Serial No. 340839
Original Instructions
er
ve
d
MAZATROL SmoothAi
ri
H747PB1006E
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
Manual No.:
gh
ts
re
s
(for Machining Centers)
EIA/ISO Program
.
PROGRAMMING MANUAL
N
o.
Serial No.:
K
ZA
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
Before using this machine and equipment, fully understand the contents of this
manual to ensure proper operation. Should any questions arise, please ask the
nearest Technical Center or Technology Center.
A
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Be sure to observe the safety precautions described in this manual and the contents of the
safety plates on the machine and equipment. Failure may cause serious personal injury or
material damage. Please replace any missing safety plates as soon as possible.
2.
No modifications are to be performed that will affect operation safety.
3.
For the purpose of explaining the operation of the machine and equipment, some illustrations
may not include safety features such as covers, doors, etc. Before operation, make sure all
such items are in place.
4.
This manual was considered complete and accurate at the time of publication, however, due to
our desire to constantly improve the quality and specification of all our products, it is subject
to change or modification. If you have any questions, please contact the nearest Technical
Center or Technology Center.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
1.
5.
Always keep this manual near the machinery for immediate use.
6.
If a new manual is required, please order from the nearest Technical Center or Technology
Center with the manual No. or the machine name, serial No. and manual name.
7.
The export of machining programs may be restricted to prevent them from being used for
military purposes. The machining programs you prepared are your property, so you should
manage them yourself in accordance with the law.
Issued by Manual Publication Section, YAMAZAKI MAZAK CORPORATION, Japan
06.2022
Copyright (C) 2017 YAMAZAKI MAZAK CORPORATION. All Rights Reserved.
ht
ig
yr
op
C
01
3
)2
(c
K
ZA
al
ri
Se
A
K
IM
ZA
A
M
YA
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
N
ts
gh
ri
.
er
ve
d
re
s
Serial No. 340839
Serial No. 340839
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Preface
Safety precautions relating to the CNC unit (in the remainder of this manual, referred to simply as
the NC unit) that is provided in this machine are explained below. Not only the persons who
create programs, but also those who operate the machine must thoroughly understand the
contents of this manual to ensure safe operation of the machine.
.
Read all these safety precautions, even if your NC model does not have the corresponding
functions or optional units and a part of the precautions do not apply.
er
ve
d
Rules
This section contains the precautions to be observed as to the working methods and states
usually expected. Of course, however, unexpected operations and/or unexpected working
states may take place at the user site.
During daily operation of the machine, therefore, the user must pay extra careful attention to
its own working safety as well as to observe the precautions described below.
2.
Although this manual contains as great an amount of information as it can, since it is not
rare for the user to perform the operations that overstep the manufacturer-assumed ones,
not all of “what the user cannot perform” or “what the user must not perform” can be fully
covered in this manual with all such operations taken into consideration beforehand.
It is to be understood, therefore, that functions not clearly written as “executable” are
“inexecutable” functions.
3.
The meanings of our safety precautions to DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION are as
follows:
K
ZA
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
1.
K
IM
A
: Failure to follow these instructions could result in loss of life.
ZA
DANGER
M
A
: Failure to observe these instructions could result in serious harm to a human
life or body.
01
3
YA
WARNING
(c
)2
: Failure to observe these instructions could result in minor injuries or serious
machine damage.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
CAUTION
HGENPA0105E
S-1
Serial No. 340839
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Basics
After turning power on, keep hands away from the keys, buttons, or switches of the
operating panel until an initial display has been made.
Before proceeding to the next operations, fully check that correct data has been entered
and/or set. If the operator performs operations without being aware of data errors,
unexpected operation of the machine will result.
WARNING
er
ve
d
.
Before machining workpieces, perform operational tests and make sure that the machine
operates correctly. No workpieces must be machined without confirmation of normal
operation. Closely check the accuracy of programs by executing override, single-block,
and other functions or by operating the machine at no load. Also, fully utilize tool path
check, Virtual Machining, and other functions, if provided.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
Make sure that the appropriate feed rate and rotational speed are designated for the
particular machining requirements. Always understand that since the maximum usable
feed rate and rotational speed are determined by the specifications of the tool to be used,
those of the workpiece to be machined, and various other factors, actual capabilities differ
from the machine specifications listed in this manual. If an inappropriate feed rate or
rotational speed is designated, the workpiece or the tool may abruptly move out from the
machine.
Before executing correction functions, fully check that the direction and amount of
correction are correct. Unexpected operation of the machine will result if a correction
function is executed without its thorough understanding.
K
ZA
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Parameters are set to the optimum standard machining conditions prior to shipping of the
machine from the factory. In principle, these settings should not be modified. If it becomes
absolutely necessary to modify the settings, perform modifications only after thoroughly
understanding the functions of the corresponding parameters. Modifications usually affect
any program. Unexpected operation of the machine will result if the settings are modified
without a thorough understanding.
M
A
Remarks on the Cutting Conditions Recommended by the NC
YA
Before using the following cutting conditions:
01
3
• Cutting conditions that are the result of the MAZATROL Automatic Cutting Conditions
Determination Function
)2
WARNING
ht
(c
• Cutting conditions for tools that are suggested to be used by the Machining Navigation
Function or the Cutting Adviser
C
op
yr
ig
Confirm that every necessary precaution in regards to safe machine setup has been taken
– especially for workpiece fixturing/clamping and tool setup.
Confirm that the machine door is securely closed before starting machining.
Failure to confirm safe machine setup may result in serious injury or death.
S-2
Serial No. 340839
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Programming
Fully check that the settings of the coordinate systems are correct. Even if the designated
program data is correct, errors in the system settings may cause the machine to operate
in unexpected places and the workpiece to abruptly move out from the machine in the
event of contact with the tool.
WARNING
During surface velocity hold control, as the current workpiece coordinates of the surface
velocity hold control axes approach zeroes, the spindle speed increases significantly. For
the lathe, the workpiece may even come off if the chucking force decreases. Safety speed
limits must therefore be observed when designating spindle speeds.
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Even after inch/metric system selection, the units of the programs, tool information, or
parameters that have been registered until that time are not converted. Fully check these
data units before operating the machine. If the machine is operated without checks being
performed, even existing correct programs may cause the machine to operate differently
from the way it did before.
N
.A
ll
ri
If a program is executed that includes the absolute data commands and relative data
commands taken in the reverse of their original meaning, totally unexpected operation of
the machine will result. Recheck the command scheme before executing programs.
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
If an incorrect plane selection command is issued for a machine action such as arc
interpolation or fixed-cycle machining, the tool may collide with the workpiece or part of
the machine since the motions of the control axes assumed and those of actual ones will
be interchanged. (This precaution applies only to NC units provided with EIA/ISO
functions.)
K
ZA
A
Se
ri
al
N
The mirror image, if made valid, changes subsequent machine actions significantly. Use
the mirror image function only after thoroughly understanding the above. (This precaution
applies only to NC units provided with EIA/ISO functions.)
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
If machine coordinate system commands or reference position returning commands are
issued with a correction function remaining made valid, correction may become invalid
temporarily. If this is not thoroughly understood, the machine may appear as if it would
operate against the expectations of the operator. Execute the above commands only after
making the corresponding correction function invalid. (This precaution applies only to NC
units provided with EIA/ISO functions.)
(c
)2
01
3
The barrier function performs interference checks based on designated tool data. Enter
the tool information that matches the tools to be actually used. Otherwise, the barrier
function will not work correctly.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
The system of G-code and M-code commands differs, especially for turning, between the
machines of INTEGREX i/e-Series and the other turning machines.
Issuance of the wrong G-code or M-code command results in totally non-intended
machine operation. Thoroughly understand the system of G-code and M-code commands
before using this system.
Sample program
S1000M3
S1000M203
Machines of INTEGREX i/e-Series
Turning machines
–1
The milling spindle rotates at 1000 min .
The turning spindle rotates at 1000 min–1.
–1
The milling spindle rotates at 1000 min–1.
The turning spindle rotates at 1000 min .
S-3
Serial No. 340839
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
For the machines of INTEGREX i/e-Series, programmed coordinates can be rotated using
an index unit of the MAZATROL program and a G68 command (coordinate rotate command) of the EIA/ISO program. However, for example, when the B-axis is rotated through
180 degrees around the Y-axis to implement machining with the turning spindle No. 2, the
plus side of the X-axis in the programmed coordinate system faces downward and if the
program is created ignoring this fact, the resulting movement of the tool to unexpected
positions may incite collisions.
To create the program with the plus side of the X-axis oriented in an upward direction, use
the mirror function of the WPC shift unit or the mirror imaging function of G-code
command (G50.1, G51.1).
WARNING
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
After modifying the tool data specified in the program, be sure to perform the tool path
check function, the Virtual Machining function, and other functions, and confirm that the
program operates properly. The modification of tool data may cause even a field-proven
machining program to change in operational status.
If the user operates the machine without being aware of any changes in program status,
interference with the workpiece could arise from unexpected operation.
For example, if the cutting edge of the tool during the start of automatic operation is
present inside the clearance-including blank (unmachined workpiece) specified in the
common unit of the MAZATROL program, care is required since the tool will directly move
from that position to the approach point because of no obstructions being judged to be
present on this path.
For this reason, before starting automatic operation, make sure that the cutting edge of
the tool during the start of automatic operation is present outside the clearance-including
workpiece specified in the common unit of the MAZATROL program.
K
ZA
CAUTION
A
Se
ri
al
If axis-by-axis independent positioning is selected and simultaneously rapid feed selected
for each axis, movements to the ending point will not usually become linear. Before using
these functions, therefore, make sure that no obstructions are present on the path.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Before starting the machining operation, be sure to confirm all contents of the program
obtained by conversion. Imperfections in the program could lead to machine damage and
operator injury.
S-4
Serial No. 340839
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Operations
Single-block, feed hold, and override functions can be made invalid using system
variables #3003 and #3004. Execution of this means the important modification that
makes the corresponding operations invalid. Before using these variables, therefore, give
thorough notification to related persons. Also, the operator must check the settings of the
system variables before starting the above operations.
WARNING
re
s
er
ve
d
.
If manual intervention during automatic operation, machine locking, the mirror image
function, or other functions are executed, the workpiece coordinate systems will usually be
shifted. When making machine restart after manual intervention, machine locking, the
mirror image function, or other functions, consider the resulting amounts of shift and take
the appropriate measures. If operation is restarted without any appropriate measures
being taken, collision with the tool or workpiece may occur.
ri
gh
ts
Use the dry run function to check the machine for normal operation at no load. Since the
feed rate at this time becomes a dry run rate different from the program-designated feed
rate, the axes may move at a feed rate higher than the programmed value.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
After operation has been stopped temporarily and insertion, deletion, updating, or other
commands executed for the active program, unexpected operation of the machine may
result if that program is restarted. No such commands should, in principle, be issued for
the active program.
During manual operation, fully check the directions and speeds of axial movement.
o.
For a machine that requires manual homing, perform manual homing operations after
turning power on. Since the software-controlled stroke limits will remain ineffective until
manual homing is completed, the machine will not stop even if it oversteps the limit area.
As a result, serious machine damage will result.
K
ZA
Se
ri
al
N
CAUTION
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
A
Do not designate an incorrect pulse multiplier when performing manual pulse handle feed
operations. If the multiplier is set to 1000 times and the handle operated inadvertently,
axial movement will become faster than that expected.
S-5
Serial No. 340839
REQUEST TO THE USER
REQUEST TO THE USER
Request for Saving Data of Machining Programs
Machining programs saved on the local disk of the NC unit may not be read out in the event of
accidental local disk trouble. The user, therefore, is earnestly requested to back up and store
every machining program of importance at regular intervals onto an external memory (USB
memory, SD card, etc.).
er
ve
d
.
• The procedure for data storage is detailed in the Operating Manual, Part 3
(OPERATING NC UNIT AND PREPARATION FOR AUTOMATIC
OPERATION), Chapter 10, (DISPLAYS RELATED TO DATA STORAGE).
ri
gh
ts
re
s
• Always use an initialized USB memory or SD card. The USB connector and
the SD card slot are located on the right side of the machine operating panel.
SD card
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
USB memory
CAUTION
On machines with a random ATC feature, each actual ATC operation changes the tool
data (in pocket numbers). Be sure not to run the machine after loading the externally
stored data of the TOOL DATA display without having confirmed the data’s
correspondence to the current tooling on the magazine. Otherwise the machine cannot be
be guaranteed to operate normally.
S-6
Serial No. 340839
BEFORE USING THE NC UNIT
BEFORE USING THE NC UNIT
Limited Warranty
The warranty of the manufacturer does not cover any trouble arising if the NC unit is used for its
non-intended purpose. Take notice of this when operating the unit.
Examples of the trouble arising if the NC unit is used for its non-intended purpose are listed
below.
Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any commercially available software
products (including user-created ones)
2.
Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any Windows operating systems
3.
Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any commercially available computer
equipment
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
1.
Ambient temperature
2.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
During machine operation: 0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F)
N
1.
.A
ll
ri
gh
Operating Environment
Relative humidity
During machine operation: 10 to 75% (without bedewing)
As humidity increases, insulation deteriorates causing electrical component parts to
deteriorate quickly.
K
A
Se
ri
Network Setting
ZA
al
N
o.
Note :
K
IM
The NC unit operates using dedicated network adapters.
ZA
Note 1: Do not change the settings of the following two network adapters. Any changes will
prevent the NC unit from operating normally.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
• Ethernet_NC (IP address:192.168.100.2)
• NC Trainer Virtual Network (IP address:192.168.202.10)
S-7
Serial No. 340839
BEFORE USING THE NC UNIT
Note 2: Use “Ethernet_PC” to connect the NC to an intra-factory network and other systems.
Do not use, however, the following network addresses: “192.168.100.xxx” and
“192.168.202.xxx”
• If the setting of the network adapter “Ethernet_PC” is changed, other systems
connected to the network may not operate normally. So, be sure to check the
settings of the other systems on the network as well. Here are some
examples of systems connected to the network.
Other systems
Sections describing how to configure network settings
Operating Manual of the Smooth PMC
“Network Setting for the MAZATROL at the Machine”
TOOL HIVE
Operating Manual & Maintenance Manual of the Extended
TOOL HIVE
“How to Change Network Settings”
Magazine display unit for
Tool ID (touch panel)
Operating Manual of the Visual Tool ID/Data Management
“CONNECTING TO THE LOCAL AREA NETWORK”
Mazak iCONNECT/
MAZA-CARE 4.0
The network settings for communication devices are made by
Mazak. If the settings are to be changed, contact Mazak
Technical Center or Technology Center.
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Smooth PMC
o.
ZA
K
N
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
21
683
43816
55555
55556
55580
55590 to 55599
57400
al
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Note 3: If you configure network settings for the NC unit, using Internet Information Services
(IIS) on Windows, do not use the following port numbers.
S-8 E
Serial No. 340839
CONTENTS
1
CONTROLLED AXES ......................................................................... 1-1
1-1
UNITS OF PROGRAM DATA INPUT .................................................. 2-1
2-1
Units of Program Data Input ............................................................................... 2-1
2-2
Units of Data Setting........................................................................................... 2-1
2-3
Ten-Fold Program Data ...................................................................................... 2-1
.A
ll
DATA FORMATS ................................................................................ 3-1
Tape Codes ........................................................................................................ 3-1
3-2
Program Formats................................................................................................ 3-5
3-3
Tape Data Storage Format ................................................................................. 3-7
3-4
Optional Block Skip ............................................................................................ 3-7
3-5
Program Number, Sequence Number and Block Number: O, N ........................ 3-8
3-6
Parity-H/V ........................................................................................................... 3-9
3-7
List of G-Codes ................................................................................................ 3-11
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
3-1
K
ZA
A
YA
01
3
)2
BUFFER REGISTERS......................................................................... 4-1
Input Buffer ......................................................................................................... 4-1
op
Preread Buffer .................................................................................................... 4-2
C
4-2
yr
ig
4-1
ht
(c
4
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
3
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
2
Coordinate Words and Controlled Axes ............................................................. 1-1
5
POSITION PROGRAMMING ............................................................... 5-1
5-1
Dimensional Data Input Method ......................................................................... 5-1
5-1-1
5-2
Absolute/Incremental data input: G90/G91 ............................................................ 5-1
Inch/Metric Selection: G20/G21 .......................................................................... 5-3
C-1
Serial No. 340839
5-3
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS .......................................................... 6-1
Positioning (Rapid Traverse): G00 ..................................................................... 6-1
6-2
One-Way Positioning: G60 ................................................................................. 6-4
6-3
Linear Interpolation: G01 .................................................................................... 6-5
6-4
Circular Interpolation: G02, G03 ......................................................................... 6-6
6-5
Radius Designated Circular Interpolation: G02, G03 .......................................... 6-9
6-6
Spiral Interpolation: G2.1, G3.1 ........................................................................ 6-11
6-7
Plane Selection: G17, G18, G19 ...................................................................... 6-19
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
6-1
Outline ................................................................................................................ 6-19
6-7-2
Plane selection methods ..................................................................................... 6-20
N
o.
6-7-1
6-9
Virtual-Axis Interpolation: G07 .......................................................................... 6-24
ZA
A
ri
K
IM
Se
K
Polar Coordinate Interpolation ON/OFF: G12.1/G13.1 (Option) ....................... 6-21
al
6-8
A
ZA
6-10 Spline Interpolation: G06.1 (Option) ................................................................. 6-25
01
3
YA
M
6-11 Modal Spline Interpolation: G61.2 (Option) ...................................................... 6-36
)2
6-12 NURBS Interpolation: G06.2 (Option)............................................................... 6-37
ig
ht
(c
6-13 Cylindrical Interpolation: G07.1 (Option)........................................................... 6-44
op
yr
6-14 Helical Interpolation: G02, G03 ........................................................................ 6-55
C
6
Decimal Point Input ............................................................................................ 5-4
6-15 Fixed Gradient Control for G0 (Option)............................................................. 6-57
6-16 Rapid Traverse Overlap ................................................................................... 6-58
6-17 Involute Interpolation (Option) .......................................................................... 6-60
6-18 Circle Cutting: G12, G13 .................................................................................. 6-66
C-2
Serial No. 340839
FEED FUNCTIONS ............................................................................. 7-1
7-1
Rapid Traverse Rates......................................................................................... 7-1
7-2
Cutting Feed Rates............................................................................................. 7-1
7-3
Asynchronous/Synchronous Feed: G94/G95 ..................................................... 7-2
7-4
Selecting a Feed Rate and Effects on Each Control Axis ................................... 7-3
7-5
Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration .................................................................. 7-6
7-6
Limitation of Speed ............................................................................................. 7-7
7-7
Exact-Stop Check: G09 ...................................................................................... 7-7
7-8
Exact-Stop Check Mode: G61 .......................................................................... 7-10
7-9
Automatic Corner Override: G62 ...................................................................... 7-11
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
7
N
o.
7-10 Tapping Mode: G63 .......................................................................................... 7-17
K
ZA
A
Se
ri
al
7-11 Cutting Mode: G64 ........................................................................................... 7-17
K
IM
7-12 Geometry Compensation: G61.1/,K/P/R ........................................................... 7-18
A
ZA
7-12-1 Geometry compensation function: G61.1 ............................................................ 7-18
YA
M
7-12-2 Specification of accuracy coefficient (,K) ............................................................. 7-19
)2
01
3
7-12-3 Specification of SMC data No. (P) ....................................................................... 7-19
ht
(c
7-12-4 Smooth corner control (R) ................................................................................... 7-20
DWELL FUNCTIONS .......................................................................... 8-1
C
8
op
yr
ig
7-13 Inverse Time Feed: G93 ................................................................................... 7-24
8-1
Dwell Command in Time: (G94) G04.................................................................. 8-1
8-2
Dwell Command in Number of Revolutions: (G95) G04 ..................................... 8-2
C-3
Serial No. 340839
9
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS ........................................................ 9-1
9-1
Miscellaneous Functions (M3-Digit).................................................................... 9-1
9-2
No. 2 Miscellaneous Functions (A8/B8/C8-Digit) ................................................ 9-2
9-3
Output of Auxiliary Function Codes during Axis Movement: G117/G118 ........... 9-3
er
ve
d
.
10 SPINDLE FUNCTIONS ..................................................................... 10-1
re
s
10-1 Spindle Function ............................................................................................... 10-1
gh
ts
10-1-1 Binary output of spindle speed ............................................................................ 10-1
.A
ll
ri
10-1-2 Spindle speed command with decimal digits ....................................................... 10-1
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
10-2 Spindle Speed Range Setting: G92 .................................................................. 10-2
11 TOOL FUNCTIONS ........................................................................... 11-1
al
N
o.
11-1 Tool Function (for ATC Systems) ..................................................................... 11-1
K
ZA
A
Se
ri
11-2 Tool Function (T3-Digit) .................................................................................... 11-1
K
IM
11-3 Tool Function (8-Digit T-Code) ......................................................................... 11-2
M
A
ZA
11-4 Tool Function [with Tool Identifiers] .................................................................. 11-2
01
3
YA
11-4-1 Programming format............................................................................................ 11-2
)2
11-4-2 Spare tool selection ............................................................................................. 11-2
ig
ht
(c
11-4-3 Precautions ......................................................................................................... 11-2
C
op
yr
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS ............................................................ 12-1
12-1 Tool Offset ........................................................................................................ 12-1
12-2 Tool Length Offset/Cancellation: G43, G44, or T-Code/G49 ............................ 12-5
12-3 Tool Length Offset in Tool-Axis Direction: G43.1 (Option)................................ 12-7
12-4 Tool Position Offset: G45 to G48 .................................................................... 12-14
C-4
Serial No. 340839
12-5 Tool Radius Compensation: G40, G41, G42 .................................................. 12-20
12-5-1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 12-20
12-5-2 Tool radius compensation ................................................................................. 12-20
12-5-3 Tool radius compensation using other commands............................................. 12-29
12-5-4 Corner movement ............................................................................................. 12-36
er
ve
d
.
12-5-5 Interruptions during tool radius compensation ................................................... 12-36
re
s
12-5-6 General precautions on tool radius compensation ............................................. 12-38
ri
gh
ts
12-5-7 Offset number updating during the offset mode ................................................. 12-39
.A
ll
12-5-8 Excessive cutting due to tool radius compensation ........................................... 12-41
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
12-5-9 Interference check ............................................................................................. 12-43
12-6 Three-Dimensional Tool Radius Compensation ............................................. 12-50
N
o.
12-6-1 Function description .......................................................................................... 12-50
K
ZA
ri
al
12-6-2 Programming methods ...................................................................................... 12-51
A
K
IM
Se
12-6-3 Correlationships to other functions .................................................................... 12-55
ZA
12-6-4 Miscellaneous notes on three-dimensional tool radius compensation................ 12-55
YA
M
A
12-7 Programmed Data Setting: G10 ..................................................................... 12-56
01
3
12-8 Tool Offsetting Based on MAZATROL Tool Data ........................................... 12-64
ht
(c
)2
12-8-1 Selection parameters ........................................................................................ 12-64
yr
ig
12-8-2 Tool length offsetting ......................................................................................... 12-65
C
op
12-8-3 Tool radius compensation ................................................................................. 12-66
12-8-4 Tool data update (during automatic operation) .................................................. 12-67
12-9 Shaping Function (Option) .............................................................................. 12-68
12-9-1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 12-68
12-9-2 Programming format.......................................................................................... 12-69
C-5
Serial No. 340839
12-9-3 Detailed description ........................................................................................... 12-69
12-9-4 Remarks............................................................................................................ 12-76
12-9-5 Relationship to other functions .......................................................................... 12-77
12-9-6 Sample program................................................................................................ 12-79
.
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS ................................................ 13-1
er
ve
d
13-1 Hole Machining Pattern Cycles: G34.1/G35/G36/G37.1................................... 13-1
ts
re
s
13-1-1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 13-1
ri
gh
13-1-2 Holes on a circle: G34.1 ...................................................................................... 13-2
N
.A
ll
13-1-3 Holes on a line: G35 ............................................................................................ 13-3
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
13-1-4 Holes on an arc: G36 .......................................................................................... 13-4
13-1-5 Holes on a grid: G37.1 ........................................................................................ 13-5
N
o.
13-2 Fixed Cycles ..................................................................................................... 13-6
K
ZA
A
Se
ri
al
13-2-1 Outline ................................................................................................................ 13-6
K
IM
13-2-2 Fixed-cycle machining data format ...................................................................... 13-7
A
ZA
13-2-3 G71.1 (Chamfering cutter CW) .......................................................................... 13-12
YA
M
13-2-4 G72.1 (Chamfering cutter CCW) ....................................................................... 13-13
)2
01
3
13-2-5 G73 (High-speed deep-hole drilling) .................................................................. 13-14
ht
(c
13-2-6 G74 (Reverse tapping) ...................................................................................... 13-15
yr
ig
13-2-7 G75 (Boring) ..................................................................................................... 13-16
C
op
13-2-8 G76 (Boring) ..................................................................................................... 13-17
13-2-9 G77 (Back spot facing) ...................................................................................... 13-18
13-2-10 G78 (Boring) ..................................................................................................... 13-19
13-2-11 G79 (Boring) ..................................................................................................... 13-20
13-2-12 G81 (Spot drilling) ............................................................................................. 13-20
C-6
Serial No. 340839
13-2-13 G82 (Drilling) ..................................................................................................... 13-21
13-2-14 G83 (Deep-hole drilling) .................................................................................... 13-22
13-2-15 G84 (Tapping) ................................................................................................... 13-23
13-2-16 G85 (Reaming).................................................................................................. 13-24
13-2-17 G86 (Boring) ..................................................................................................... 13-24
er
ve
d
.
13-2-18 G87 (Back boring) ............................................................................................. 13-25
re
s
13-2-19 G88 (Boring) ..................................................................................................... 13-26
gh
ts
13-2-20 G89 (Boring) ..................................................................................................... 13-26
.A
ll
ri
13-2-21 Synchronous tapping (Option) ........................................................................... 13-27
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
13-2-22 G82.2 [Automatic pecking cycle] (Option).......................................................... 13-31
13-2-23 Punch tapping (Option) ..................................................................................... 13-33
N
o.
13-3 Suppression of Single-Block Stop for Fixed Cycles ........................................ 13-38
K
ZA
ri
al
13-3-1 Function description .......................................................................................... 13-38
A
K
IM
Se
13-3-2 Examples of operation....................................................................................... 13-38
ZA
13-4 Initial Point and R-Point Level Return: G98 and G99 ..................................... 13-39
YA
M
A
13-5 Scaling ON/OFF: G51/G50 ............................................................................. 13-40
)2
01
3
13-6 Mirror Image ON/OFF by G-Code: G51.1/G50.1 ............................................ 13-53
ht
(c
13-7 Mirror Image ON/OFF by M-Code: M91, M92, M93/M90 ............................... 13-55
op
yr
ig
13-8 Subprogram Control: M98, M99 ..................................................................... 13-56
C
13-9 End Processing: M02, M30, M998, M999 ....................................................... 13-63
13-10 Linear Angle Commands ................................................................................ 13-64
13-11 Macro Call Function: G65, G66, G66.1, G67 .................................................. 13-65
13-11-1 User macros...................................................................................................... 13-65
13-11-2 Macro call instructions ....................................................................................... 13-66
C-7
Serial No. 340839
13-11-3 Variables ........................................................................................................... 13-75
13-11-4 Types of variables ............................................................................................. 13-77
13-11-5 Arithmetic operation commands ...................................................................... 13-108
13-11-6 Control commands .......................................................................................... 13-112
13-11-7 External output commands (Output via RS-232C) ........................................... 13-121
er
ve
d
.
13-11-8 External output command (Output onto the local disk) .................................... 13-123
ts
Specific examples of programming using user macros................................ 13-127
ri
gh
13-11-10
re
s
13-11-9 Precautions ..................................................................................................... 13-125
.A
ll
13-12 Geometric Commads.................................................................................... 13-131
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
13-13 Corner Chamfering and Corner Rounding Commands................................. 13-133
13-13-1 Corner chamfering ( ,C_) ................................................................................. 13-133
N
o.
13-13-2 Corner rounding ( ,R_) .................................................................................... 13-134
K
ZA
A
Se
ri
al
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS ............................. 14-1
ZA
K
IM
14-1 Fundamental Machine Coordinate System, Workpiece Coordinate
Systems, and Local Coordinate Systems ......................................................... 14-1
YA
M
A
14-2 Machine Zero Point and Second, Third, and Fourth Reference Points............. 14-2
)2
01
3
14-3 Fundamental Machine Coordinate System Selection: G53 .............................. 14-3
ht
(c
14-4 Coordinate System Setting: G92 ...................................................................... 14-4
op
yr
ig
14-5 Automatic Coordinate System Setting .............................................................. 14-5
C
14-6 Reference Point Return: G28, G29................................................................... 14-6
14-7 Second, Third, or Fourth Reference Point Return: G30.................................... 14-8
14-8 Reference Point Check Command: G27 ........................................................ 14-10
14-9 Programmed Coordinate Rotation: G68/G69 ................................................. 14-11
14-10 Workpiece Coordinate System Setting and Selection: (G92) G54 to G59 ...... 14-13
C-8
Serial No. 340839
14-11 Additional Workpiece Coordinate System Setting and Selection: G54.1 ........ 14-18
14-12 Local Coordinate System Setting: G52........................................................... 14-24
14-13 Reading/Writing of MAZATROL Program Basic Coordinates ......................... 14-29
14-13-1 Rewriting ........................................................................................................... 14-30
er
ve
d
.
14-14 Workpiece Coordinate System Rotation ......................................................... 14-32
re
s
14-15 Three-Dimensional Coordinate Conversion ON/OFF: G68/G69 (Option) ....... 14-45
gh
ts
15 MEASUREMENT SUPPORT FUNCTIONS ....................................... 15-1
.A
ll
ri
15-1 Skip Function: G31 ........................................................................................... 15-1
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
15-1-1 Function description ............................................................................................ 15-1
15-2 Skip Coordinate Reading.................................................................................. 15-2
N
o.
15-3 Amount of Coasting in the Execution of a G31 Block ....................................... 15-3
K
ZA
Se
ri
al
15-4 Skip Coordinate Reading Error ......................................................................... 15-4
K
IM
A
15-5 Multi-Step Skip: G31.1, G31.2, G31.3, G04 ..................................................... 15-5
M
A
ZA
16 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS .............................................................. 16-1
01
3
YA
16-1 Pre-move Stroke Check ON/OFF: G22/G23 .................................................... 16-1
(c
)2
17 THREADING: G33............................................................................. 17-1
yr
ig
ht
17-1 Equal-Lead Threading ...................................................................................... 17-1
C
op
17-2 Continuous Threading ...................................................................................... 17-4
17-3 Inch Threading ................................................................................................. 17-4
18 DYNAMIC OFFSETTING: M173, M174 (OPTION) ............................ 18-1
19 HOB MILLING (OPTION) .................................................................. 19-1
19-1 Hob Milling Mode ON/OFF: G114.3/G113 ........................................................ 19-1
C-9
Serial No. 340839
19-2 Hob Milling Mode II (Hob Milling with Positioning Control) .............................. 19-9
20 HIGH-SPEED SMOOTHING CONTROL FUNCTION ........................ 20-1
20-1 Programming Format........................................................................................ 20-2
20-2 Commands Available in the High-Speed Smoothing Control Mode ................. 20-2
er
ve
d
.
20-3 Additional Functions in the High-Speed Smoothing Control Mode ................... 20-4
re
s
20-4 Related Parameters.......................................................................................... 20-4
gh
ts
20-5 Restrictions ....................................................................................................... 20-5
.A
ll
ri
20-6 Related Alarms ................................................................................................. 20-5
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
21 TORNADO TAPPING (G130) ............................................................ 21-1
22 HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE .................................. 22-1
K
al
N
o.
22-1 Programming Format........................................................................................ 22-2
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
22-2 Commands Available in the High-Speed Machining Mode ............................... 22-2
ZA
22-3 Additional Functions in the High-Speed Machining Mode ................................ 22-4
YA
M
A
22-4 Restrictions ....................................................................................................... 22-6
01
3
23 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT: G37 ...................... 23-1
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
24 DYNAMIC OFFSETTING II: G54.2P0, G54.2P1 - G54.2P8
(OPTION) .......................................................................................... 24-1
C
op
25 COMPENSATION FOR DEVIATION OF THE AXIS OF
ROTATION OF THE TILTING TABLE ............................................... 25-1
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION................................................. 26-1
26-1 Tool Tip Point Control (Option) ......................................................................... 26-1
26-1-1 Function outline ................................................................................................... 26-1
C-10
Serial No. 340839
26-1-2 Detailed description ............................................................................................. 26-3
26-1-3 Relationship to other functions .......................................................................... 26-23
26-1-4 Restrictions ....................................................................................................... 26-33
26-1-5 Related parameters ........................................................................................... 26-35
26-2 Cutting Point Command (Option) ................................................................... 26-39
er
ve
d
.
26-2-1 Function outline ................................................................................................. 26-39
re
s
26-2-2 Detailed description ........................................................................................... 26-40
ri
gh
ts
26-2-3 Relationship to other functions .......................................................................... 26-52
.A
ll
26-2-4 Restrictions ....................................................................................................... 26-56
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
26-2-5 Related parameters ........................................................................................... 26-59
26-3 Inclined-Plane Machining: G68.2, G68.3, G68.4, G53.1................................. 26-60
N
o.
26-3-1 Function description for type A .......................................................................... 26-61
K
ZA
Se
ri
al
26-3-2 Restrictions for type A ....................................................................................... 26-77
K
IM
A
26-3-3 Function description for type B .......................................................................... 26-84
ZA
26-3-4 Restrictions for type B ....................................................................................... 26-86
YA
M
A
26-3-5 Related parameters ........................................................................................... 26-91
01
3
26-4 Tool Radius Compensation for Five-Axis Machining (Option) ........................ 26-92
(c
)2
26-4-1 Function outline ................................................................................................. 26-92
yr
ig
ht
26-4-2 Function description .......................................................................................... 26-92
C
op
26-4-3 Operation of tool radius compensation for five-axis machining .......................... 26-94
26-4-4 Method of computing the offset vector ............................................................... 26-94
26-4-5 Relationship to other functions .......................................................................... 26-96
26-4-6 Restrictions ....................................................................................................... 26-98
26-5 Workpiece Setup Error Correction: G54.4P0, G54.4P1 to G54.4P7
(Option) ........................................................................................................ 26-101
C-11
Serial No. 340839
26-5-1 Function outline ............................................................................................... 26-101
26-5-2 Function description ........................................................................................ 26-101
26-5-3 Relationship to other functions ........................................................................ 26-109
26-5-4 Restrictions ..................................................................................................... 26-110
er
ve
d
.
26-5-5 Compensation for misalignment of axes A and C (only for VARIAXIS i-1050
series) ............................................................................................................. 26-112
re
s
26-6 Five-Axis Spline Interpolation (Option) ......................................................... 26-113
gh
ts
26-6-1 Function outline ............................................................................................... 26-113
.A
ll
ri
26-6-2 Function description ........................................................................................ 26-113
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
26-6-3 Restrictions ..................................................................................................... 26-121
26-7 Selection from Multiple Sets for Five-Axis Machining (Option) ..................... 26-122
o.
26-7-1 Function outline ............................................................................................... 26-122
K
al
N
26-7-2 Function description ........................................................................................ 26-122
ZA
A
Se
ri
26-7-3 Restrictions ..................................................................................................... 26-122
ZA
K
IM
26-7-4 Related parameters ......................................................................................... 26-123
YA
M
A
27 CHOPPING FUNCTION (OPTION) ................................................... 27-1
01
3
28 ENGRAVING FUNCTION (OPTION) ................................................. 28-1
ht
(c
)2
29 FUNCTIONS FOR TURNING (ONLY FOR VARIAXIS-i T) ................ 29-1
op
yr
ig
29-1 Preparatory Functions for Selecting the Turning Plane .................................... 29-1
C
29-1-1 Outline ................................................................................................................ 29-1
29-1-2 Detailed description ............................................................................................. 29-1
29-1-3 Sample programs ................................................................................................ 29-2
29-1-4 Relationship to other preparatory functions ......................................................... 29-3
29-1-5 Remarks on setting the coordinate system .......................................................... 29-5
C-12
Serial No. 340839
29-1-6 Miscellaneous notes ............................................................................................ 29-6
29-1-7 Related alarms .................................................................................................... 29-7
29-2 Selection between Diameter and Radius Data Input: G10.9 ............................ 29-8
29-3 Constant Cutting Speed Control ON/OFF: G96/G97 ...................................... 29-10
.
29-4 Fixed Cycles for Turning................................................................................. 29-12
er
ve
d
29-4-1 Longitudinal turning cycle: G290 ....................................................................... 29-13
ts
re
s
29-4-2 Threading cycle: G292 ...................................................................................... 29-15
ri
gh
29-4-3 Transverse turning cycle: G294......................................................................... 29-17
N
.A
ll
29-5 Compound Fixed Cycles for Turning .............................................................. 29-19
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
29-5-1 Longitudinal roughing cycle: G271 .................................................................... 29-20
29-5-2 Transverse roughing cycle: G272 ...................................................................... 29-25
N
o.
29-5-3 Contour-parallel roughing cycle: G273 .............................................................. 29-27
K
ZA
Se
ri
al
29-5-4 Finishing cycle: G270 ........................................................................................ 29-31
K
IM
A
29-5-5 Longitudinal cut-off cycle: G274 ........................................................................ 29-32
A
ZA
29-5-6 Transverse cut-off cycle: G275.......................................................................... 29-35
YA
M
29-5-7 Compound threading cycle: G276 ..................................................................... 29-38
)2
01
3
29-5-8 General notes on the compound fixed cycles G270 to G276 ............................. 29-44
ht
(c
29-6 Tool Nose Point and Compensation Directions .............................................. 29-47
C
op
yr
ig
30 PARALLEL AXES COMPOSITION CONTROL: G124, G125
(OPTION) .......................................................................................... 30-1
30-1 Function Outline ............................................................................................... 30-1
30-2 Function Description ......................................................................................... 30-1
30-3 Restrictions ....................................................................................................... 30-7
30-4 Precautions ...................................................................................................... 30-8
C-13
Serial No. 340839
31 ORBIT MACHINING: G148, G149 (OPTION) .................................... 31-1
31-1 Function Outline ............................................................................................... 31-1
31-2 Function Description ......................................................................................... 31-1
31-3 Restrictions ..................................................................................................... 31-10
er
ve
d
.
31-4 Remarks ......................................................................................................... 31-11
re
s
32 EDITING AN EIA/ISO PROGRAM ..................................................... 32-1
ri
gh
ts
32-1 PROGRAM Display for EIA/ISO Programs ....................................................... 32-1
.A
ll
32-1-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 32-1
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
32-1-2 QUICK EIA .......................................................................................................... 32-3
32-2 Editing a Program ............................................................................................. 32-7
N
o.
32-2-1 Procedure for creating/editing an EIA/ISO program ............................................. 32-7
K
ZA
Se
ri
al
32-2-2 Menu functions for editing a program .................................................................. 32-8
K
IM
A
32-2-3 Description of editing operations ......................................................................... 32-8
ZA
32-2-4 Entering macro instructions ............................................................................... 32-13
YA
M
A
32-2-5 Custom display.................................................................................................. 32-14
01
3
32-2-6 Displaying two programs on the screen ............................................................. 32-36
(c
)2
32-2-7 Editing programs stored in external memory areas ........................................... 32-38
yr
ig
ht
32-2-8 Displaying the G-code list and M-code list ......................................................... 32-38
C
op
32-3 Add-In EIA Function ....................................................................................... 32-39
32-4 Analysis of Programs (VIEW SURF Function) ................................................ 32-42
32-4-1 Procedure for analysis of programs ................................................................... 32-42
32-4-2 SMC DATA SELECT window ............................................................................ 32-45
32-4-3 Analysis window ................................................................................................ 32-46
C-14
Serial No. 340839
32-4-4 Types of analyses ............................................................................................. 32-47
32-4-5 Analysis setting window .................................................................................... 32-51
32-4-6 Process list display area.................................................................................... 32-52
32-5 Help Display for Orbit Machining (Option) ...................................................... 32-53
32-5-1 Data display ...................................................................................................... 32-53
er
ve
d
.
32-5-2 Reference data for orbit machining.................................................................... 32-54
re
s
32-5-3 Calculated data for orbit machining ................................................................... 32-56
ri
gh
ts
32-5-4 Display mode select buttons.............................................................................. 32-56
.A
ll
32-5-5 Graphic column ................................................................................................. 32-57
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
32-5-6 Changing the active section .............................................................................. 32-60
N
o.
33 PROGRAM OPTIMIZATION, USING 3D CAD MODELS (OPTION)
.......................................................................................................... 33-1
K
ZA
Se
ri
al
33-1 Starting the Function ........................................................................................ 33-1
K
IM
A
33-2 Program Optimization Procedure ..................................................................... 33-2
A
ZA
33-3 Loadable CAD File Formats ............................................................................. 33-3
YA
M
33-4 Displayed Items ................................................................................................ 33-4
)2
01
3
33-4-1 Process selection ................................................................................................ 33-5
ht
(c
33-4-2 Display of operation process data ....................................................................... 33-6
op
yr
ig
33-4-3 3D display operation ........................................................................................... 33-7
C
33-5 Operation Procedure ........................................................................................ 33-8
33-5-1 Initial configuration .............................................................................................. 33-8
33-5-2 Model layout ...................................................................................................... 33-14
33-5-3 Analysis............................................................................................................. 33-17
33-5-4 Tool path optimization ....................................................................................... 33-22
C-15
Serial No. 340839
33-5-5 Program creation............................................................................................... 33-25
33-6 Document ....................................................................................................... 33-26
33-6-1 Data stored ....................................................................................................... 33-26
33-6-2 Time when the document is saved .................................................................... 33-26
33-6-3 Precautions ....................................................................................................... 33-26
er
ve
d
.
33-6-4 Input and output of a document ......................................................................... 33-26
ts
re
s
33-7 Optimizable Programs .................................................................................... 33-28
ri
gh
33-7-1 Applicable programs ......................................................................................... 33-28
.A
ll
33-7-2 Applicable tools ................................................................................................. 33-28
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
33-7-3 Optimized program ............................................................................................ 33-28
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
33-7-4 Precautions ....................................................................................................... 33-29
C-16 E
Serial No. 340839
CONTROLLED AXES
1
CONTROLLED AXES
1-1
Coordinate Words and Controlled Axes
1
Under standard specifications, there are three-dimensional controlled axes. With an added
feature and a special option, the machine can control up to a maximum of six axes, including the
three fundamental axes. The direction of machining can be designated using a predetermined
coordinate word consisting of an alphabetic character.
er
ve
d
.
For X-Y table
re
s
+Z
+Z
ts
+Y
gh
+X
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
Program coordinates
Workpiece
+X
X-Y table
+Y
Bed
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Table moving directions
A
ZA
MEP001
YA
M
For X-Y table and turntable
Workpiece
Workpiece
+X
(c
)2
01
3
+Z
ht
ig
+C
+Y
Table turning
direction
C
op
yr
+X
Program coordinates
+C
Table moving directions
+Y
MEP002
1-1
ht
ig
yr
op
C
01
3
)2
(c
K
ZA
al
ri
Se
A
K
IM
ZA
A
M
YA
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
N
ts
gh
ri
.
er
ve
d
re
s
Serial No. 340839
1 CONTROLLED AXES
1-2 E
Serial No. 340839
UNITS OF PROGRAM DATA INPUT
2
UNITS OF PROGRAM DATA INPUT
2-1
Units of Program Data Input
2
The movements on coordinate axes are to be commanded in the MDI mode or machining
program. The movement data are expressed in millimeters, inches or degrees.
2-2
Units of Data Setting
er
ve
d
.
Various data commonly used for control axes, such as offsetting data, must be set for the
machine to perform an operation as desired.
The units of data setting and those of program data input are listed below.
Linear axis
Units of program data input
0.0001 mm
0.00001 in
0.0001 deg
Units of data setting
0.0001 mm
0.00001 in
re
s
Inch system
ts
Rotational axis
Metric system
gh
0.0001 deg
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
Note 1: Inch/metric selection can be freely made using either bit 4 of parameter F91 (“0” for
metric, “1” for inches; validated through power-off and -on) or G-code commands (G20,
G21).
Selection using the G-code commands is valid only for program data input.
Variables and offsetting data (such as tool offsetting data) should therefore be set
beforehand using the appropriate unit (inch or metric) for the particular machining
requirements.
K
ZA
ri
al
Ten-Fold Program Data
(c
)2
A
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
Using a predetermined parameter, machining program data can be processed as set in units of
one m. There may be cases that a machining program which has been set in units of one m is
to be used with a numerical control unit based on 0.1 m increments. In such cases, use of this
parameter allows the machine to perform the required machining operations without rewriting the
program.
Use bit 0 of user parameter F91 for this purpose.
All types of coordinate data (axis movement data) not provided with the decimal point will be
multiplied by a factor of 10. This does not apply, indeed, to preset tool-offsetting data designated
with addresses H and D.
ig
ht
Controlled axis
Moving distance when program commands are executed
Program
command
NC (A) for which the
program was prepared
Bit 0 of F91 = 1
Program
applicability
(A) (B)
MAZATROL (B)
Bit 0 of F91 = 0
X1 (Y1 / Z1)
1 m
0.1 m
1 m
Applicable
B1
0.001°
0.0001°
0.001°
Applicable
op
yr
Linear axis
Rotational axis
C
2-3
N
o.
Note 2: Metric data and inch data cannot be used at the same time.
2-1
ht
ig
yr
op
C
01
3
)2
(c
K
ZA
al
ri
Se
A
K
IM
ZA
A
M
YA
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
N
ts
gh
ri
.
er
ve
d
re
s
Serial No. 340839
2 UNITS OF PROGRAM DATA INPUT
2-2 E
Serial No. 340839
DATA FORMATS
3
DATA FORMATS
3-1
Tape Codes
3
.
This numerical control unit (in the remainder of this manual, referred to as the NC unit) uses
command information that consists of letters of the alphabet (A, B, C .... Z), numerics (0, 1, 2 ....
9), and signs (+, –, /, and so on). These alphanumerics and signs are referred to collectively as
characters. On paper tape, these characters are represented as a combination of a maximum of
eight punched holes.
Such a representation is referred to as a code.
The NC unit uses either the EIA codes (RS-244-A) or the ISO codes (R-840).
er
ve
d
Note 1: Codes not included in the tape codes shown in Fig. 3-1 will result in an error when they
are read.
gh
ts
re
s
Note 2: Of all codes specified as the ISO codes but not specified as the EIA codes, only the
following codes can be designated using the data I/O (Tape) parameters TAP9 to
TAP14:
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
[ Bracket Open
] Bracket Close
# Sharp
Asterisk
= Equal sign
: Colon
However, you cannot designate codes that overlap existing ones or that result in parity
error.
K
A
ZA
Significant information area (LABEL SKIP function)
Se
1.
ri
al
N
o.
Note 3: EIA/ISO code identification is made automatically according to the first EOB/LF code
appearing after the NC unit has been reset. (EOB: End Of Block, LF: Line Feed)
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
During tape-based automatic operation, data storage into the memory, or data searching, the NC
unit will ignore the entire information up to the first EOB code (;) in the tape when the unit is
turned on or reset. That is, significant information in a tape refers to the information contained in
the interval from the time a character or numeric code appears, following the first EOB code (;)
after the NC unit has been reset, until a reset command is given.
3-1
Serial No. 340839
3 DATA FORMATS
2.
Control Out, Control In
The entire information in the area from Control Out “(” to Control In “)” will be ignored in regard to
machine control, while they will surely be displayed on the data display unit. Thus, this area can
be used to contain information, such as the name and number of the command tape, that is not
directly related to control.
On condition that bit 2 of parameter F332 is set to 1, the alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT occurs if
a Control Out “(” is not terminated by a Control In “)” in one and the same block. This does not
apply when F332 bit 2 is set to 0.
er
ve
d
.
During tape storage, however, the information in this area will also be stored. The NC unit will
enter the Control In status when power is turned on.
Example of EIA Code
Control Out
re
s
Control In
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
ECN
N
CE
O U P R OG R AM U N O . 1 0 1 O
BOL
L
I B
Name of tape is printed out
K
ZA
A
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
ECN
D
ND
N
N
D
N DNNCE
O U 1 1 E 1 1 U ERRRUORR / U 1 1 E 1 1 U 2 EUU O
BO L
L
L L
L
L
L
L L L L I B
M
Name of tape is punched in captital letters.
01
3
YA
MEP003
Control Out
Control In
EC
S
E
O G 0 0 X – 8 5 0 0 0 Y – 6 4 0 0 0 ( C U T T E R RE T U R N ) O
BR
P
B
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
Example of ISO Code
Operator information is printed out.
The information at this portion is ignored
and nothing is executed.
3-2
MEP004
Serial No. 340839
DATA FORMATS
3.
3
EOR code (%)
In general, the EOR (End Of Record) code is punched at both ends of a tape and has the
following functions:
To stop rewinding (only when a rewinding device is provided)
To start rewinding during tape data search (only when a rewinding device is provided)
To terminate the storage of tape data.
Tape creation method for tape operation (Only when a rewinding device is used)
EOB
2m
EOB
%
2m
Last block
ri
gh
First block
EOB 10 cm
re
s
10 cm EOB
ts
%
er
ve
d
.
4.
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
The two meters of dummy at both ends and the EOR (%) at the head are not required when a
rewinding device is not used.
3-3
Serial No. 340839
3 DATA FORMATS
EIA/ISO identification is made automatically by detecting whether EOB or LF initially appears
after the NC unit has been reset.
ts
gh
ri
.A
ll
YA
Definable in parameters
The codes asterisked above are not EIA codes,
but may be used for the convenience’s sake.
LF or NL acts as EOB
and % acts as EOR.
01
3
DEL (Delete)
AS (All Space=Feed)*
AM (All Mark=EOB+DEL)*
=
[
]
BS (Back Space)
HT (Horizontal Tab)
SP (Space)
&
CR (Carriage Return)
$
’ (Apostrophe)
;
<
>
?
@
”
DEL (Delete)
NULL
DEL (Delete)
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
BS (Back Space)
TAB
SP (Space)
&
C
*
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
+
–
.
,
/
%
LF (Line Feed) or NL
( (Control Out)
) (Control In)
:
#
N
K
ZA
A
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
+
–
.
,
/
EOR (End of Record)
EOB (End of Block) or CR
CO (2+4+5)
CI (2+4+7)
Channel number
3 2 1
re
s
8 7 6 5 4
.
Channel number
3 2 1
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
8 7 6 5 4
ISO code (R-840)
Feed holes
er
ve
d
EIA code (RS-244-A)
Feed holes
[1]
[2]
MEP006
Fig. 3-1 Tape codes
3-4
Serial No. 340839
DATA FORMATS
3
Codes in section [1] will only be stored as tape data when they are present in a comment section,
and ignored elsewhere in the significant information area.
Codes in section [2] are non-operative and will always be ignored (but undergo the parity-V
check).
A dotted area indicates that the EIA Standard provides no corresponding codes.
Program Formats
A format predetermined for assigning control information to the NC unit is referred to as a
program format. The program format used for our NC unit is word address format.
Words and addresses
er
ve
d
.
1.
A word is a set of characters arranged as shown below, and information is processed in words.
ri
gh
ts
re
s
Word
.A
ll
Numeral
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Alphabet (address)
Word configuration
The alphabetic character at the beginning of a word is referred to as an address, which defines
the meaning of its succeeding numeric information.
N
o.
Table 3-1 Type and format of words
N5
A
K
IM
Preparatory function
Inch command
O8
ZA
ri
Se
Sequence No.
Metric command
K
al
Item
Program No.
0.0001 mm (deg.),
0.00001 in
Auxiliary axis
0.0001 mm (deg.),
0.00001 in
G3 or G21
X+54
ZA
Moving axis
Y+54 Z+54 +54
X+45
Y+45 Z+45 +45
I+45 J+45 K+45
A
I+54 J+54 K+54
M
Input
unit
0.001 mm (rev),
0.0001 in
X54
YA
Dwell
)2
01
3
Feed
(c
Fixed cycle
P8 U54
0.0001 mm (deg.),
0.00001 in
F54 (per minute)
F33 (per revolution)
F45 (per minute)
F24 (per revolution)
0.0001 mm (deg.),
0.00001 in
R+54
R+45
Q54 P8 L4
H3 or D3
Miscellaneous function
M3 × 4
yr
ig
ht
Tool offset
T4 or T8
Tool function
No. 2 miscellaneous function
B8, A8 or C8
Subprogram
P8 H5 L4
Variables number
1.
Q45 P8 L4
S5
op
Spindle function
C
3-2
#6
Code O8 here indicates that program number can be set as an unsigned integer of eight
digits following O, and for X+54, “+” indicates that the value can be signed (negative) and
the two-digit number (54) indicates that the decimal point can be used and that five digits
before and four after the decimal point are effective (5 + 4 = 9 digits are effective for a
designation without decimal point).
3-5
Serial No. 340839
3 DATA FORMATS
2.
The alpha sign () denotes additional axis address. +44 will be used when is specified for
rotational axis.
3.
The number of digits in the words is checked by the maximum number of digits in the
addresses.
4.
When data with decimal point is used for address for which decimal input is not available,
decimal figures will be ignored.
5.
If the number of integral digits exceeds the specified format, an alarm will result.
6.
If the number of decimal digits exceed the specified format, the excess will be rounded.
7.
Bit 3 of parameter F36 determines the type of processing for a ‘word’ without any numerical
value (address only), as described below.
er
ve
d
.
When F36 bit 3 = 0:
Zero (0) is automatically added to a word without any numerical value.
GX10.Y10. ............. Processed as G0X10.Y10.
ri
gh
When F36 bit 3 = 1:
ts
G28XY ...................... Processed as G28X0.Y0.
re
s
Example :
N
GX10.Y10. ............. Alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Example :
.A
ll
A word without any numerical value (address only) causes the alarm 807 ILLEGAL
FORMAT.
G28XY ...................... Alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT
N
o.
Note 1: An EIA/ISO program into which a MAZATROL program is converted by the
[EIA/ISO CONVERT] menu function may contain some words without any
numerical value (by an omission method). Running such a program will lead to
alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT, therefore, when F36 bit 3 = 1.
K
ZA
A
Se
ri
al
Note 2: The detailed information on the block number that is added to the alarm message
(807 ILLEGAL FORMAT) refers to a block immediately preceding the block in
question.
ZA
K
IM
Note 3: A word with a macro variable as numerical value (e.g. G#10) is simply ignored in
its entirety if the variable is not yet defined. A word with an undefined variable,
therefore, does not cause the alarm in question even when F36 bit 3 = 1.
YA
M
A
Note 4: A word with a point ( . ) alone as numerical value is processed as that with zero as
digits unit, without causing the alarm in question, even when F36 bit 3 = 1.
Blocks
)2
2.
G0X. ........................ Processed as G0X0.
01
3
Example :
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
A block, unit of instruction, contains a number of words which constitute information necessary
for the NC machine to perform an operation. The end of each block must be indicated by an EOB
(End Of Block) code.
Programs
C
3.
4.
A number of blocks form one program.
Program end
M02, M30, M99, M998, M999 or % is used as program end code.
3-6
Serial No. 340839
DATA FORMATS
3-3
3
Tape Data Storage Format
As with tape operation, tape data to be stored into the memory can be either of ISO or EIA code.
The first EOB code read in after resetting is used by the NC unit for automatic identification of the
code system ISO or EIA.
The area of tape data to be stored into the memeory is, if the NC unit has been reset, from the
character immediately succeeding the first EOB code the EOR code, and in all other cases, from
the current tape position to the EOR code. Usually, therefore, start tape data storage operation
after resetting the NC unit.
1.
er
ve
d
.
Optional Block Skip
Function and purpose
Operating notes
Blocks that have already been read into the pre-read buffer cannot be skipped.
2.
This function is valid even during sequence number search.
3.
During tape data storage (input) or output, all blocks, including those having a “/” code, are
in- or outputted, irrespective of the status of the [BLOCK SKIP] menu function.
o.
1.
K
ZA
A
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
2.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
Optional block skip is a function that selectively ignores that specific block within a machining
program which begins with the slash code “/”.
Any block beginning with “/” will be ignored if the [BLOCK SKIP] menu function is set to ON, or
will be executed if the menu function is set to OFF.
For example, if all blocks are to be executed for a type of parts but specific blocks are not to be
executed for another type, then different parts can be machined using one and the same
program that contains the “/” code at the beginning of the specific blocks.
C
3-4
3-7
Serial No. 340839
3 DATA FORMATS
Program Number, Sequence Number and Block Number: O, N
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Program numbers, sequence numbers, and block numbers are used to monitor the execution
status of a machining program or to call a machining program or a specific process within a
machining program.
Program numbers are assigned to command blocks as required. A program number must be set
using the letter O (address) and a numeric of a maximum of eight digits that follow O.
Sequence numbers identify command blocks forming a machining program. A sequence number
must be set using the letter N (address) and a numeric of a maximum of five digits that follow N.
Block numbers are counted automatically within the NC unit, and reset to 0 each time a program
number or a sequence number is read. These numbers will be counted up by one if the block to
be read does not have an assigned program number or sequence number.
All blocks of a machining program, therefore, can be uniquely defined by combining program
number, sequence number, and block number as shown in the table below.
NC monitor display
NC input machining program
Sequence No.
O1234 (DEMO. PROG)
1234
0
G92X0Y0
1234
0
G90G51X–150. P0.75
1234
0
N100G00X–50. Y–25.
1234
100
0
N110G01X250. F300
1234
110
0
1234
110
1
1234
110
2
1234
110
3
1234
120
0
1234
130
0
1234
140
0
1234
140
1
1234
140
2
1234
140
3
1234
150
0
1234
160
0
X–50.
Y–25.
N
N130G00X–100. Y–75.
K
IM
X–100.
ZA
Se
Y–175.
A
ri
al
N140G01X–200.
Y–75.
ZA
N150G00G50X0Y0
N160M02
K
o.
N120G51Y–125. P0.5
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
%
gh
ri
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Y–225.
3-8
Block No.
ts
Program No.
C
3-5
0
1
2
Serial No. 340839
DATA FORMATS
Parity-H/V
One method of checking if the tape is correctly created is by parity checks. Parity checks are
performed to check a tape for errors in punched codes, that is, for punching errors. There are two
types of parity checks: parity-H and parity-V.
1.
Parity-H check
Parity-H checks are intended to check the quantity of punched holes which form one character,
and performed during tape operation, tape loading, and sequence-number searching.
A parity-H error occurs in the following cases:
er
ve
d
.
ISO Codes
If a code with an odd number of punched holes is present in the significant information area.
ts
re
s
EIA Codes
If a code with an even number of punched holes is present in the significant information area
or if non-punched holes (sprockets only) are present after a significant code in one block.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
Example 1: Parity-H error (for EIA codes)
K
ZA
A
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
This character leads to a Parity-H error.
One block
01
3
This non-punched character will result in a
Parity-H error.
)2
These non-punched characters will
not result in a Parity-H error.
ht
(c
MEP007
op
yr
ig
If a parity-H error occurs, the tape will stop at the position next to the error code.
C
3-6
3
3-9
Serial No. 340839
3 DATA FORMATS
2.
Parity-V check
Parity-V checks will be performed during tape operation, tape loading, or sequence-number
searching, if parity-V check item on the PARAMETER display is set to ON. Parity-V during
memory operation, however, will not be checked.
A parity-V error occurs in the following case:
If an odd number of codes are present in the significant information area from the first significant
code in the vertical direction to the EOB code (;), that is, if an odd number of characters are
present in one block.
In the event of a parity-V error, the tape stops at a code next to the EOB (;).
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Example 2: An example of parity-V error
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
This block leads to a Parity-V error.
MEP009
Note 1: During a parity-V check, some types of code are not counted as characters.
K
ZA
Se
ri
al
N
o.
See Fig. 3-1, “Tape codes” for further details.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
A
Note 2: Space codes in the area from the first EOB code to the first address code or slash code
“/” are not subjected to counting for parity-V check.
3-10
Serial No. 340839
DATA FORMATS
List of G-Codes
G functions are described in the list below.
Function
G-code
Group
■G00
01
Linear interpolation
■G01
01
Circular interpolation (CW)
G02
01
Circular interpolation (CCW)
G03
01
Spiral interpolation (CW)
G02.1
01
Spiral interpolation (CCW)
G03.1
01
Involute interpolation (CW)
G02.2
01
Involute interpolation (CCW)
G03.2
Dwell
G04
High-speed machining mode
G05
Fine spline interpolation
G06.1
NURBS interpolation
G06.2
Virtual-axis interpolation
G07
Cylindrical interpolation
G07.1
G09
00
01
Circle cutting (CW)
Circle cutting (CCW)
X-Y plane selection
al
Y-Z plane selection
Pre-move stroke check OFF
ZA
01
00
00
G11
00
G12
00
G13
00
■G17
02
■G18
02
■G19
02
■G20
06
■G21
06
00
00
G29
00
Return to 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference points
G30
00
Skip function
G31
00
Multi-step skip 1
G31.1
00
Multi-step skip 2
G31.2
00
Multi-step skip 3
G31.3
00
G33
01
Variable lead thread cutting
G34
01
Hole machining pattern cycle (on a circle)
G34.1
00
Hole machining pattern cycle (on a line)
G35
00
Hole machining pattern cycle (on an arc)
G36
00
Hole machining pattern cycle (on a grid)
G37.1
00
Automatic tool length measurement
G37
00
Vector selection for tool radius compensation
G38
00
Corner arc for tool radius compensation
G39
00
Tool radius compensation OFF
▲G40
07
Tool radius compensation (left)
G41
07
Tool radius compensation for five-axis machining (left)
G41.2/G41.4/G41.5
07
Tool radius compensation (right)
G42
07
01
3
M
A
G28
Return from reference point
YA
04
G27
)2
04
(c
G22
▲G23
ht
ZA
Reference point check
A
Pre-move stroke check ON
K
IM
Metric command
Se
ri
Inch command
K
N
o.
Z-X plane selection
01
G10
N
Data setting mode OFF
00
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
00
00
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Data setting mode ON
Reference point return
er
ve
d
.
Positioning
Exact-stop check
op
yr
ig
Thread cutting (straight, taper)
C
3-7
3
3-11
Serial No. 340839
3 DATA FORMATS
Group
Tool radius compensation for five-axis machining (right)
G42.2/G42.4/G42.5
07
Tool length offset (+)
G43
08
Tool tip point control (Type 1) ON
G43.4
08
Tool tip point control (Type 2) ON
G43.5
08
Cutting point command (Type 1) ON
G43.8
08
Cutting point command (Type 2) ON
G43.9
08
Tool length offset (–)
G44
08
Tool position offset, extension
G45
00
Tool position offset, reduction
G46
00
Tool position offset, double extension
G47
00
Tool position offset, double reduction
G48
00
▲G49
Scaling OFF
▲G50
G51
11
11
▲G50.1
Mirror image ON
G51.1
Local coordinate system setting
G52
00
G53
00
G53.1
00
.A
ll
ri
gh
Mirror image OFF
Machine coordinate system selection
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Tool-axis direction control
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 1
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 2
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 3
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 4
N
o.
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 5
Workpiece setup error correction
One-way positioning
ZA
19
19
▲G54
12
G55
12
G56
12
G57
12
G58
12
G59
12
G54.1
12
G54.2
23
G54.4
27
G60
00
G61
13
■G61.1
13
G61.2
13
Automatic corner override
G62
13
Tapping mode
G63
13
Cutting mode
ZA
Exact stop mode
A
Selection of fixture offset
K
IM
Se
ri
Additional workpiece coordinate systems
K
al
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 6
M
A
High-accuracy mode (Geometry compensation)
01
3
13
User macro single call
G65
00
User macro modal call A
G66
14
User macro modal call B
G66.1
14
ig
ht
(c
■G64
)2
YA
Modal spline interpolation
14
Programmed coordinate rotation ON
G68
16
Programmed coordinate rotation OFF
G69
16
3-D coordinate conversion ON
G68
16
Inclined-plane machining ON
G68.2
16
Inclined-plane machining (by specifying tool-axis direction) ON
G68.3
16
Incremental coordinate system establishment for inclined-plane machining
G68.4
16
yr
▲G67
op
User macro modal call OFF
C
08
ts
Scaling ON
er
ve
d
Tool position offset OFF
.
G-code
re
s
Function
▲G69
3-D coordinate conversion OFF
16
Fixed cycle (Chamfering cutter 1, CW)
G71.1
09
Fixed cycle (Chamfering cutter 2, CCW)
G72.1
09
Fixed cycle (High-speed deep-hole drilling)
G73
09
3-12
Serial No. 340839
DATA FORMATS
Function
G-code
Group
Fixed cycle (Reverse tapping)
G74
09
Fixed cycle (Boring 1)
G75
09
Fixed cycle (Boring 2)
G76
09
Fixed cycle (Back spot facing)
G77
09
Fixed cycle (Boring 3)
G78
09
Fixed cycle (Boring 4)
G79
09
▲G80
09
Fixed cycle (Spot drilling)
G81
09
Chopping mode ON
G81.1
00
Fixed cycle (Drilling)
G82
09
Fixed cycle (Deep-hole drilling)
G83
Fixed cycle (Tapping)
G84
Fixed cycle (Synchronous tapping)
G84.2
Fixed cycle (Synchronous reverse tapping)
G84.3
Fixed cycle (Reaming)
G85
Fixed cycle (Boring 5)
G86
09
09
09
09
09
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
09
G87
09
G88
09
G89
09
■G90
03
■G91
03
Coordinate system setting/Spindle speed range setting
G92
00
Workpiece coordinate system rotation
G92.5
00
Fixed cycle (Back boring)
N
Fixed cycle (Boring 6)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Fixed cycle (Boring 7)
Absolute data input
05
05
■G95
05
10
G99
10
Output of auxiliary function codes during axis movement
G117/G118
00
G124
00
Parallel axes composition control OFF
G125
00
Measurement macro, workpiece/coordinate measurement
G136
Compensation macro
G137
Engraving function
G140
K
IM
Initial point level return in fixed cycles
A
▲G98
R-point level return in fixed cycles
ZA
G93
■G94
A
Se
Feed per revolution (synchronous)
ZA
ri
al
Feed per minute (asynchronous)
K
N
Inverse time feed
o.
Incremental data input
)2
G148
00
Orbit machining mode OFF
G149
00
ht
01
3
YA
M
Parallel axes composition control ON
G270
09
Longitudinal roughing cycle
G271
09
Transverse roughing cycle
G272
09
Contour-parallel roughing cycle
G273
09
Longitudinal cut-off cycle
G274
09
Transverse cut-off cycle
G275
09
Compound thread-cutting cycle
G276
09
Longitudinal turning cycle
G290
09
Threading cycle
G292
09
Transverse turning cycle
G294
09
(c
Orbit machining mode ON
op
yr
ig
Finishing cycle
C
er
ve
d
.
Fixed cycle OFF
3
3-13
Serial No. 340839
3 DATA FORMATS
Notes:
The codes marked with ▲ are automatically selected in each group upon switching-on or
resetting with initializing the modal conditions.
2.
The codes marked with are able to be selected by a parameter as an initial modal
condition which is to become valid upon switching-on or resetting with initializing the modal
conditions. Changeover of inch/metric system, however, can be made valid only by
switching-on.
3.
G-codes of group 00 are those which are not modal, and they are valid only for blocks in
which they are entered.
4.
If a G-code not given in the G-code list is used, an alarm is displayed. And if a G-code
without corresponding option is used, an alarm is displayed (808 MIS-SET G CODE).
5.
If G-codes belong to different groups each other, any G-code can be used in the same block.
The G-codes are then processed in order of increasing group number. If two or more
G-codes belonging to the same group are given in the same block, the G-code entered last
is valid.
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
1.
3-14 E
Serial No. 340839
BUFFER REGISTERS
4
BUFFER REGISTERS
4-1
Input Buffer
1.
4
Overview
er
ve
d
.
During tape operation or RS-232C operation, when the preread buffer becomes empty, the
contents of the input buffer will be immediately shifted into the pre-read buffer and, following this,
if the memory capacity of the input buffer diminuishes to 248 × 4 characters or less, next data (up
to 248 characters) will be preread from the tape and then stored into the input buffer.
The input buffer makes block-to-block connections smooth by eliminating any operational delays
due to the tape-reading time of the tape reader.
Preread
buffer 5
Input buffer
N
Tape
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
These favorable results of prereading, however, will be obtained only if the execution time of the
block is longer than the tape-reading time of the next block.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Buffer 4
Mode
selection
Buffer 3
Buffer 2
o.
Memory
K
Arithmetic
operation
process
A
K
IM
Se
ri
MDI data
Buffer 1
ZA
al
N
Keyboard
A
ZA
Note:
One block of data is stored in one buffer.
YA
M
TEP010
Detailed description
01
3
2.
)2
The memory capacity of the input buffer is 248 × 5 characters (including the EOB code).
ht
(c
The contents of the input buffer register are updated in 248-character units.
ig
Only the significant codes in the significant information area are read into the buffer.
C
op
yr
Codes, including “(” and “)”, that exist between Control Out and Control In, are read into the
input buffer. Even if optional block skip is valid, codes from / to EOB will also be read into the
input buffer.
The contents of the buffer are cleared by a reset command.
4-1
Serial No. 340839
4 BUFFER REGISTERS
Preread Buffer
1.
Overview
During automatic operation, one block of data is usually preread to ensure smooth analysis of
the program. During tool radius compensation, however, maximal 23 blocks of data are preread
to calculate crossing point or to check the interference.
In the high-speed machining mode (G05P2), moreover, up to 8 blocks of data are preread, and
in the mode of high-speed smoothing control up to 20 blocks of data are stored with the currently
executed block in the middle (i. e. 10 blocks being preread).
Detailed description
er
ve
d
.
2.
One block of data is stored into the prepared buffer.
re
s
Only the significant codes in the significant information area are read into the pre-read buffer.
gh
ts
Codes existing between Control Out and Control In are not read into the pre-read buffer. If
optional block skip is valid, codes from / to EOB will not also be read into the pre-read buffer.
ri
The contents of the buffer are cleared by a reset command.
N
.A
ll
If the single block operation mode is selected during continuous operation, processing will
stop after pre-reading the next block data.
K
ZA
A
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
If commands given in a preread block are analysed and judged to cause an alarm, that
argument of the alarm displayed which indicates the number of the block in question refers to
the block being currently executed, but not to the preread one.
C
4-2
4-2 E
Serial No. 340839
POSITION PROGRAMMING
5
POSITION PROGRAMMING
5-1
Dimensional Data Input Method
5-1-1
5
Absolute/Incremental data input: G90/G91
1.
Function and purpose
1.
gh
N
Detailed description
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
3.
ri
G90 (or G91) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 1 ( : Additional axis)
where G90: Absolute data input
G91: Incremental data input
ts
Programming format
.A
ll
2.
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Setting of G90 or G91 allows succeeding dimensional data to be processed as absolute data or
incremental data.
Setting of arc radius (with address R) or arc center position (with addresses I, J, K) for circular
interpolation, however, must always refer to incremental data input, irrespective of preceding
G90 command.
In the absolute data mode, axis movement will be performed to the program-designated
position within the workpiece coordinate system, irrespective of the current position.
o.
N1 G90G00X0 Y0
K
ZA
ri
al
N
In the incremental data mode, axis movement will be performed through the programdesignated distance as relative data with respect to the current position.
A
K
IM
Se
N2 G91G01X200. Y50. F100
ZA
N2 G90G01X200. Y50. F100
A
Y
01
3
YA
M
200.
Tool
(c
)2
100.
N2
X
ht
ig
yr
op
C
N1
W
100.
200.
300.
MEP011
Commands for a movement from the origin of the workpiece coordinate system are given
with the same values, irrespective of whether the absolute data mode or the incremental
data mode is used.
5-1
Serial No. 340839
5 POSITION PROGRAMMING
2.
The last G90 or G91 command works as a modal one for the following blocks.
(G90)
N3 X100. Y100.
This block will perform a movement to the position of X = 100 and Y = 100 in the workpiece
coordinate system.
(G91)
N3 X-100. Y50.
This block will perform a movement of –100 on the X-axis and +50 on the Y-axis, and thus
result in a movement to the position of X = 100 and Y = 100.
er
ve
d
.
Y
re
s
200.
100.
200.
300.
W
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
3.
MEP012
N
X
100.
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
N3
Multiple G90 or G91 commands can be set in one block, and thus only a specific address
can be set as absolute data or incremental data.
o.
N4 G90X300. G91Y100.
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
In this example, dimensional data X300 preceded by G90 will be processed as an absolute
data input, and Y100 preceded by G91 as an incremental data input. Therefore, this block
will result in a movement to the position of X = 300 and Y = 200 (100 + 100) in the workpiece
coordinate system.
ZA
Y
YA
M
A
200.
W
100.
200.
300.
X
MEP013
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
100.
N4
Moreover, G91 (incremental data input mode) will work for the succeeding blocks.
4.
Either the absolute data mode or the incremental data mode can be freely selected as initial
mode by setting the bit 2 of user parameter F93.
5.
Even in the MDI (Manual Data Input) mode, G90 and G91 will also be handled as modal
commands.
5-2
Serial No. 340839
POSITION PROGRAMMING
Inch/Metric Selection: G20/G21
1.
Function and purpose
Inch command/metric command selection is possible with G-code commands.
2.
Programming format
G20:
G21:
3.
Inch command selection
Metric command selection
Detailed description
Changeover between G20 and G21 is effective only for linear axes; it is meaningless for
rotational axes.
er
ve
d
.
1.
ts
Initial Inch (parameter) ON
Example
G21
G20
G21
X
X100
0.0100 mm
0.0254 mm
0.00039 inches
Y
Y100
0.0100 mm
0.0254 mm
0.00039 inches
0.00100 inches
Z
Z100
0.0100 mm
0.0254 mm
0.00039 inches
0.00100 inches
B
B100
0.0100 deg
0.0100 deg
0.0100 deg
0.0100 deg
G20
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
.A
ll
ri
0.00100 inches
To perform G20/G21 changeover in a program, you must first convert variables, parameters,
and offsetting data (such as tool length/tool position/tool radius compensation data)
according to the unit of data input for the desired system (inch or metric) and then set all
these types of data either on each data setting display or using the programmed parameter
input function.
al
N
o.
2.
gh
Axis
N
Initial Inch (parameter) OFF
re
s
Example : Preset unit of data input and G20/G21 (for decimal-point input type )
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
Example : If Initial inch selection is OFF and offsetting data is 0.05 mm, the offsetting data
must be converted to 0.002 (0.05 ÷ 25.4 0.002) before changing the G21 mode
over to the G20 mode.
In principle, G20/G21 selection should be done before machining. If you want this changeover to be performed in the middle of the program, temporarily stop the program by an M00
command after G20 or G21 and convert the offsetting data as required.
G92 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1
G20 G92 Xx2 Yy2 Zz2
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
Example : G21
A
ZA
3.
C
5-2
5
4.
Note:
M00
F10
Convert offsetting data here.
Set an F (Feed rate) command anew.
Do not fail to give an F command appropriate to the new unit system after
changeover between G20 and G21. Otherwise, axis movements would be performed using the last F value before the changeover, without any conversion, on
the basis of the new unit system.
Whether G20 or G21 is to be selected upon switching-on can be specified by the bit 4 of
user parameter F91 (Initial Inch parameter).
5-3
Serial No. 340839
5 POSITION PROGRAMMING
Decimal Point Input
1.
Function and purpose
The decimal point can be used to determin the units digit (mm or inch) of dimensional data or
feed rate.
2.
Programming format
.
Metric system
.
Inch system
er
ve
d
.
Detailed description
Decimal-point commands are valid only for the distance, angle, time, speed, and scaling
factor (only after G51) that have been set in the machining program.
2.
As listed in the table below, the meaning of command data without the decimal point differs
between decimal-point input types and according to the type of command unit system.
re
s
1.
0.0001 (mm, inches, deg)
ON
0.0010 (mm, inches, deg)
Type
.A
ll
OFF
1.0000 (mm, inches, deg)
1.0000 (mm, inches, deg)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
X1
ri
Type
Command unit × 10
N
Command
gh
ts
3.
Decimal-point commands are only valid for addresses X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, I, J, K, E, F,
P, Q, R and S (as detailed later in the table concerned), where address P only refers to a
scaling factor. As for address S, decimal digits are only effective when the decimal point is
valid for an S-code (spindle speed command).
o.
3.
Move command
(Linear)
K
ZA
K
IM
The number of effective digits for each type of decimal-point command is as follows:
ZA
4.
A
Se
ri
al
N
See Table 5-2 “Validity of decimal point for each address” for further details.
Move command
(Rotational)
Feed rate
Dwell
inch
0. - 9999.
.0000 - .9999
0. - 99999. .0000 - .9999
0. 99999999.
.0000 - .9999
0. - 99999.
.000 - .999
.00000 .99999
0. - 99999.
.0000 - .9999
(359.)
0. 9999999.
.00000 .99999
0. - 99999.
.000 - .999
YA
0. - 99999.
)2
01
3
mm
M
A
Integral part Decimal part Integral part Decimal part Integral part Decimal part Integral part Decimal part
Decimal-point commands are also valid for definition of variables data used in subprograms.
6.
For data which can be, but is not specified with the decimal point, either the minimum
program data input unit or mm (or in) unit can be selected using bit 5 of parameter F91.
yr
ig
ht
(c
5.
op
7.
C
5-3
A decimal-point command issued for an address which does not accept the decimal point
will be processed as data that consists of an integral part only. That is, all decimal digits will
be ignored. Addresses that do not accept the decimal point are D, H, L, M, N, O, S and T.
As for address S, however, decimal digits can be processed as effective data when the
decimal point is valid for an S-code (spindle speed command).
All types of variables command data are handled as the data having the decimal point.
5-4
Serial No. 340839
POSITION PROGRAMMING
5
Table 5-1 Sample programs for addresses accepting the decimal point
Command category
For 1 = 1 m
Program example
For 1 = 0.1 m
1 = 1 mm
X123.450 mm
X123.450 mm
X123.450 mm
G0X12345
X12.345 mm*
X1.2345 mm**
X12345.000 mm***
#113=#111+#112 (ADD)
#113 = 128.550
#114=#111–#112 (SUBTRACT)
#114 = 117.450
#115=#111 #112 (MULTIPLY)
#115 = 682.650
#116=#111/#112
#117=#112/#111 (DIVIDE)
#116 = 22.162
#117 = 0.045
er
ve
d
X123.000 mm
Y5.550 mm
re
s
#111=123 #112=5.55
X#111
Y#112
.
G0X123.45
(With the decimal point always given
as the millimeter point)
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
* The least significant digit is given in 1 m.
** The least significant digit is given in 0.1 m.
*** The least significant digit is given in 1 mm.
5-5
Serial No. 340839
5 POSITION PROGRAMMING
Table 5-2 Validity of decimal point for each address
Address
Decimal
point
command
A
Application
Remarks Address
Valid
Coordinate position data
Invalid
Application
Remarks
Invalid
Program number
Rotary table
Miscellaneous function code
Invalid
Dwell time
Valid
Linear angle data
Valid
Subprogram call number
Valid
Coordinate position data
Invalid
Number of helical pitches
Invalid
Offset amount (in G10)
B
O
Decimal
point
command
P
Rotary table
Miscellaneous function code
Valid
Coordinate position data
Valid
Scaling factor
Invalid
Rotary table
Miscellaneous function code
Valid
Rank for NURBS curve
Valid
Corner chamfering amount
Valid
Cutting depth for
deep-hole drilling cycle
D
Invalid
Offset number (tool position,
tool length and tool radius)
Valid
Shift amount for back boring
E
Valid
Valid
Shift amount for fine boring
F
Valid
Rate of feed
Valid
R point in fixed cycle
G
Valid
Preparatory function code
Valid
re
s
ts
gh
ri
.A
ll
N
Radius of an arc for circular
interpolation
Radius of an arc for corner
rounding
Offset amount (in G10)
Valid
Weight for NURBS curve
S
Invalid
Spindle function code
T
Invalid
Tool function code
U
Valid
Coordinate position data
o.
Valid
Valid
Vector component for
tool radius compensation
Valid
Coordinate of arc center
Valid
Vector component for
tool radius compensation
Valid
Coordinate of arc center
V
Valid
Coordinate position data
Valid
Vector component for
tool radius compensation
W
Valid
Coordinate position data
Valid
Knot for NURBS curve
Valid
Coordinate position data
Valid
Dwell time
N
Invalid
ZA
A
ri
Se
A
YA
01
3
Invalid
Miscellaneous function code
Y
Valid
Coordinate position data
Sequence number
Z
Valid
Coordinate position data
C
op
yr
ig
Remark
X
)2
M
Fixed cycle/Subprogram
repetition
(c
Invalid
ht
L
ZA
J
K
Coordinate of arc center
I
al
Valid
M
Invalid
R
N
H
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Valid
Offset number (tool postion,
tool length and tool radius)
Intra-subprogram sequence
number
Invalid
K
Q
K
IM
C
er
ve
d
.
Invalid
Note :
The decimal point is valid in all the arguments for a user macroprogram.
Remark : Decimal digits can be entered at address S when the decimal point is valid for an Scode (spindle speed command).
5-6 E
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6-1
Positioning (Rapid Traverse): G00
1.
6
Function and purpose
Positioning command G00 involves use of a coordinate word. This command positions a tool by
moving it linearly to the ending point specified by a coordinate word.
2.
Programming format
(: Additional axis)
er
ve
d
.
G00 Xx Yy Zz ;
ts
Detailed description
Once this command has been given, the G00 mode will be retained until any other G-code
command that overrides this mode, that is, either G01, G02, G03, or G32 of command
group 01 is given. Thus, a coordinate word will only need be given if the next command is
also G00. This function is referred to as the modal function of the command.
2.
In the G00 mode, acceleration/deceleration always takes place at the starting/ending point
of a block and the program proceeds to the next block after confirming that the pulse
command in the present block is 0 and the tracking error of the acceleration/deceleration
cycle is 0. The width of in-position can be changed using a parameter (S13).
3.
The G-code functions (G71.1 to G89) of command group 09 are canceled by the G00
command (G80).
4.
The tool path can be made either linear or nonlinear using a parameter (F91 bit 6) but the
positioning time remains unchanged.
gh
1.
K
ZA
K
IM
Linear path
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
3.
re
s
The command addresses are valid for all additional axis. The absolute or the incremental data
input is used according to the status of G90/G91 existing at the particular time.
ZA
As with linear interpolation (G01), the tool speed is limited according to the rate of rapid
traverse of each axis.
A
Polygonal line path
YA
M
The tool is positioned according to the separate rate of rapid traverse of each axis.
When no number follows G address, this is treated as G00.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
5.
6-1
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
4.
Sample programs
Z
Unit: mm
(Tool)
+300
Ending point
(–120, +200, +300)
+150
–120
–100
.
+200
+150
Y
re
s
ts
gh
Remarks
N
5.
Absolute data command
Incremental data command
.A
ll
The diagram above is for:
G90 G00 X-120.000 Y200.000 Z300.000;
G91 G00 X-270.000 Y300.000 Z150.000;
MEP014
ri
X
er
ve
d
Starting point
(+150, –100, +150)
If bit 6 of user parameter F91 is 0, the tool will take the shortest path connecting the starting
and ending points. The positioning speed will be calculated automatically to give the
shortest allocation time within the limits of the rapid feed rate of each axis.
For example, if a rapid feed rate of 9600 mm/min is preset for both X- and Y-axes, then the
command
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
1.
N
o.
G91 G00 X–300.000 Y200.000
K
ZA
K
IM
Se
F91 bit 6 = 0
A
ri
al
will move the tool as shown in the figure below.
Ending point
A
ZA
Y-axis effective feedrate:
6400 mm/min
M
200
YA
01
3
)2
ht
(c
fx
X-axis effective feedrate:
9600 mm/min
X
Starting point
300
Unit: mm
MEP015-1
C
op
yr
ig
Y
fy
6-2
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
2.
6
If bit 6 of user parameter F91 is 1, the tool will move from the starting point to the ending
point according to the rapid feed rate of each axis.
For example, if a rapid feed rate of 9600 mm/min is preset for both X- and Y-axes, then the
command
G91 G00 X–300.000 Y200.000
will move the tool as shown in the figure below.
F91 bit 6 = 1
Ending point
200
Y
ts
MEP015-2
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
X-axis effective feedrate:
9600 mm/min
X
Unit: mm
.A
ll
ri
fx
gh
Starting point
re
s
fy
300
er
ve
d
.
Y-axis effective feedrate:
9600 mm/min
3.
The rapid feed rate that you can set for each axis using the G00 command varies from
machine to machine.
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ZA
Rapid feed (G00) deceleration check
When processing of rapid feed (G00) is completed, the next block will be executed after the
deceleration check time (Td) has passed.
The deceleration check time (Td) is calculated by following expressions depending on the
acceleration/deceleration type.
ri
4.
K
al
N
o.
Refer to the relevant manual of the machine for further details.
01
3
YA
M
A
Linear acceleration/linear deceleration .............................. Td = Ts +
Exponential acceleration/linear deceleration ..................... Td = 2 × Ts +
Exponential acceleration/exponential deceleration ............ Td = 2 × Ts +
(Where Ts is the acceleration time constant, = 0 to 14 ms)
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
The time required for the deceleration check during rapid feed is the longest among the
rapid feed deceleration check times of each axis determined by the rapid feed acceleration/
deceleration time constants and by the rapid feed acceleration/deceleration mode of the
axes commanded simultaneously.
6-3
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
One-Way Positioning: G60
1.
Function and purpose
Highly accurate positioning free from any backlash error can be performed when the axis
movement is controled by the G60 command so that the final access always takes place in one
determined direction.
Programming format
G60 Xx Yy Zz ;
Detailed description
The direction of final access and its creeping distance must be set in parameter I1.
2.
After rapid approach to a position away from the ending point by the creeping distance, the
final access is performed in the predetermined direction at a speed corresponding with the
rapid feed.
er
ve
d
1.
gh
ts
re
s
3.
(: Additional axis)
.
2.
.A
ll
ri
Positioning point
G60 a
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Final access direciton
(–)
Ending point
Starting point
Starting point
(+)
ZA
G60 –a
MEP018
A
Se
ri
al
G60 creeping distance
K
N
o.
Temporary stop
The positioning pattern described above also applies during machine locking or for a Z-axis
command with the Z-axis cancellation activated.
4.
In the dry run mode (G00 mode), the whole positioning is carried out at the dry-running
speed.
5.
The creeping to the einding point can be halted with Reset, Emergency stop, Interlock, or
Feed hold, or by setting the rapid feed override to 0 (zero).
The creeping is performed according to the setting of the rapid feed, and the rapid feed
override function is also effective for the creeping.
6.
One-way positioning is automatically invalidated for the hole-drilling axis in hole-drilling
fixed-cycle operations.
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
3.
One-way positioning is automatically invalidated for shifting in fine-boring or back-boring
fixed-cycle operations.
op
yr
ig
7.
C
6-2
8.
Usual positioning is performed for an axis not having a parameter-set creeping distance.
9.
One-way positioning is always of non-interpolation type.
10. An axis movement command for the same position as the ending point of the preceding
block (movement distance = 0) will cause reciprocation through the creeping distance so
that the final access can be performed in the predetermined direction for an accurate
positioning to the desired point.
6-4
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Linear Interpolation: G01
1.
Function and purpose
This command moves (interpolates) a tool from the current position to the ending point specified
by a coordinate word, at the feed rate specified with address F. The specified feed rate acts here
as the linear velocity relative to the direction of movement of the tool center.
2.
Programming format
G01 Xx Yy Zz Ff;
(: Additional axis)
Detailed description
re
s
3.
er
ve
d
.
where x, y, z, and each denote a coordinate. The absolute or the incremental data input is used
according to the status of G90/G91 existing at the particular time.
4.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
Once this command has been given, the G01 mode will be retained until any other G-code
command that overrides this mode, that is, either G00, G02, G03 or G33 of command group 01
is given. Thus, it is merely required to input coordinate words for linear interpolations in the
succeeding blocks unless the feed rate must be changed.
The alarm 816 FEEDRATE ZERO will result if no F-code command has been given to the first
G01 command.
The feed rates for rotational axes must be set in deg/min. (Example: F300 = 300 deg/min)
The G-code functions (G71.1 to G89) of command group 09 are cancelled by G01 (set to G80).
Sample program
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
The following shows a program for moving the tool at a cutting feed rate of 300 mm/min on the
route of P1 P2 P3 P4 P1 (where the section from P0 P1 forms a positioning route
for the tool):
30
Y
P3
A
ZA
P2
X
YA
M
30
20
P4
20
20
Unit: mm
P0
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
P1
op
G91
C
6-3
6
MEP019
G00
X20.
Y20.
G01
X20.
Y30.
P0 P1
P1 P2
F300
P2 P3
X30.
X–20.
P3 P4
Y–30.
P4 P1
X–30.
6-5
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Circular Interpolation: G02, G03
1.
Function and purpose
Commands G02 and G03 feed the tool along an arc.
2.
Programming format
G02
(G03)
Xx Yy (Zz)
Ii Jj (Kk)
Ff ;
Coordinates of the Coordinates of
ending point
the arc center
Counterclockwise (CCW)
Clockwise (CW)
gh
ts
re
s
Arc ending point coordinate, X-axis
Arc ending point coordinate, Y-axis
Arc ending point coordinate, Z-axis
Arc center, X-axis
Arc center, Y-axis
Arc center, Z-axis
Feed rate
ri
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
.A
ll
X
Y
Z
I
J
K
F
er
ve
d
.
Example:
Example:
Feedrate
N
o.
Detailed description
2.
The direction of circular movement is determined by G02/G03.
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
K
Once the G02 (or G03) command has been given, this command mode will be retained until
any other G-code command used to override the G02 (or G03) command mode, that is, G00
or G01 of command group 01 is given.
al
1.
ri
3.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Use addresses X, Y and Z (or their parallel axes) to specify the coordinates of the ending point of
arc, and addresses I, J and K for the coordinates of arc center.
Combined use of absolute and incremental data input is available for setting the coordinates of
the ending point of arc. For the coordinates of the arc center, however, incremental data relative
to the starting point must always be set.
M
A
ZA
G02: CW (Clockwise)
G03: CCW (Counterclockwise)
YA
Z
)2
01
3
G02
G03
G03
(c
G03
Y
ht
G02
op
yr
ig
G02
C
6-4
X
Y
X
Z
G03
G03
G02
G02
X
G17 (X-Y) plane
G03
G02
Z
G18 (Z-X) plane
6-6
Y
G19 (Y-Z) Plane
MEP020
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
3.
Interpolation of an arc that spans multiple quadrants can be defined with one block.
4.
To perform circular interpolation, the following information is required:
6
- Rotational direction ...................... CW (G02) or CCW (G03)
- Arc ending point coordinates ....... Given with address X, Y, Z.
- Arc center coordinates ................. Given with address I, J, K. (Incremental dimension)
- Feed rate ...................................... Given with address F.
If none of the addresses I, J, K and R is specified, an alarm will occur.
6.
Addresses I, J and K are used to specify the coordinates of the arc center in the X, Y and Z
directions respectively as seen from the starting point, therefore, care must be taken for
signs.
Sample programs
Complete-circle command
gh
ts
Example 1:
re
s
4.
er
ve
d
.
5.
+Y
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
Y-axis
Circle center
J = 50 mm
K
ZA
MEP021
Three-quarter circle command
+Y
Y-axis
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
Example 2:
Starting / Ending point
K
IM
G02 J50.000 F500
+X
A
Se
ri
al
X-axis
N
o.
Feedrate
F = 500 mm/min
(c
Feedrate
F = 500 mm/min
Ending point
(x+50, y+50)
C
op
yr
ig
ht
Circle center
J = 50 mm
+X
X-axis
Starting point
G91 G02 X50.000 Y50.000 J50.000 F500
6-7
MEP022
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
5.
Notes on circular interpolation
1.
Clockwise (G02) or Counterclockwise (G03) during circular interpolation refers to the
rotational direction in the right-handed coordinate system when seen from the plus side
toward the minus side of the coordinate axis perpendicular to the plane to be interpolated.
2.
If the coordinates of the ending point are not set or if the starting and ending points are set
at the same position, designating the center using address I, K or J will result in an arc of
360 degrees (true circle).
3.
The following will result if the starting-point radius and the ending-point radius are not the
same.
re
s
er
ve
d
.
If error R is larger than the parameter F19 (tolerance for radial value difference at
ending point), an alarm (817 INCORRECT ARC DATA) will occur at the starting point of
the arc.
Radius at
starting point
Starting
point
Ending point
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Center
N
Alarm stop
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
G02 X80. I50.
Radius at
ending point
R
MEP023
K
Spiral
interpolation
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
G02 X90. I50.
ZA
al
N
o.
If error R is equal to or smaller than the parameter data, interpolation will take a spiral
form heading for the programmed ending point of the arc.
M
A
Center
Radius at
starting point
Radius at
ending point
R
MEP024
)2
01
3
YA
Starting
point
Ending point
In a combined use with the cylindrical interpolation, the machining contour of circular interpolation on the cylindrical surface may be unexpectedly reversed due to a particular configuration of the machine’s controlled axes.
C
op
yr
ig
4.
ht
(c
The examples shown above assume that excessively large parameter data is given to
facilitate your understanding.
See “4. Remarks” in Section 6-13 for more information.
6-8
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Radius Designated Circular Interpolation: G02, G03
1.
Function and purpose
Circular interpolation can be performed by designating directly the arc radius R as well as
specifying conventional arc center coordinates (I, J, K).
2.
Programming format
G02 (G03) Xx Yy Rr Ff;
er
ve
d
Detailed description
re
s
3.
.
where x : X-axis coordinate of the ending point
y : Y-axis coordinate of the ending point
r : Radius of the arc
f : Feed rate
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
The arc center is present on the mid-perpendicular to the segment which connects the starting
point and the ending point. The crossing point of the mid-perpendicular and that circle of the
designated radius r that has the center set at the starting point gives the center coordinates of
the designated arc.
A semi-circle or smaller will be generated if R is a positive value.
An arc larger than the semi-circle will be generated if R is a negative value.
N
o.
Path of an arc with a negative-signed R
K
ZA
K
IM
Path of an arc with a positive R
O1
O1, O2 : Center point
ZA
L
r
M
A
Starting point
Ending point
A
Se
ri
al
O2
YA
TEP023
)2
01
3
To use the radius-designated arc interpolation commands, the following requirement must be
met:
ht
(c
L
1
2r
yr
ig
where L denotes the length of the line from the starting point to the ending point.
If radius data and arc center data (I, J, K) are both set in the same block, the circular interpolation
by radius designation will have priority in general.
For complete-circle interpolation (the ending point = the starting point), however, use centerdesignation method with addresses I, J and K, since the radius-specification command in this
case will immediately be completed without any machine operation.
op
C
6-5
6
6-9
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Sample programs
- G02 Xx1 Yy1 Rr1 Ff1
XY-plane, radius-designated arc
- G03 Zz1 Xx1 Rr1 Ff1
ZX-plane, radius-designated arc
- G02 Xx1 Yy1 Jj1 Rr1 Ff1
XY-plane, radius-designated arc
(If radius data and center data (I, J, K) are set in the same block,
circular interpolation by radius designation will have priority.)
- G17 G02 Ii1 Ji1 Rr1 Ff1
XY-plane, center-designated arc
(Radius-specification is invalid for complete circle)
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
4.
6-10
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Spiral Interpolation: G2.1, G3.1
1.
Function and purpose
Commands G2.1 and G3.1 provide such an interpolation that the starting and ending points are
connected smoothly for an arc command where the radii of the both points differ from each
other.
(Normal circular interpolation)
Ending point
er
ve
d
.
re = rs
(Spiral interpolation)
re
s
Ending point
re rs
gh
ts
rs
Starting point
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Programming format
Xp_ Yp_ I_ J_ (_) F_ P_
o.
G17 G2.1 (or G3.1)
Arc center coordinates
Arc ending point coordinates
Zp_ Xp_ K_ I_ (_) F_ P_
G19 G2.1 (or G3.1)
Yp_ Zp_ J_ K_ (_) F_ P_
K
ZA
Se
ri
al
N
G18 G2.1 (or G3.1)
A
2.
MEP031
N
.A
ll
ri
Center
M
Detailed description
Circular movement directions of G2.1 and G3.1 correspond with those of G02 and G03,
respectively.
2.
Radius designation is not available for spiral interpolation. (The starting and ending points
must lie on the same arc for a radius designation.)
01
3
YA
1.
(c
)2
3.
A
ZA
K
IM
P : Number of pitches (revolutions) (P can be omitted if equal to 0.)
: Any axis other than circular interpolation axes (For helical cutting only)
F : Rate of feed along the tool path
yr
ig
ht
Note:
op
3.
C
6-6
6
4.
When a radius is designated, this command will be regarded as a
radius-designated circular interpolation.
Conical cutting or tapered threading can be done by changing the radii of the arc at its
starting and ending points and designating a linear-interpolation axis at the same time.
Even for normal circular command G2 or G3, spiral interpolation will be performed if the
difference between the radii of the starting point and the ending point is smaller than the
setting of parameter F19.
6-11
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Example:
Y
E
A
C
X
A
B
C
D
E
3000 mm/min
2500
2000
1500
1000
.
D
er
ve
d
B
re
s
MEP032
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
G28 X0 Y0
G00 Y–200.
G17 G3.1 X–100. Y0 I–150. J0 F3000 P2
M30
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
When the above program data are executed, the feed rates for each of the points will be as
shown in the diagram above.
6-12
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
4.
6
Sample programs
Example 1:
Spiral cutting
Shown below is an example of programming for spiral contouring with incremental data input of
the arc center (X = 0, Y = 45.0) and absolute data input of the arc ending point (X = 0, Y = –15.0).
Y
er
ve
d
.
X
15
ri
gh
ts
re
s
45
.A
ll
D735PB001
G91 G28 Z0
N
Zero point return on the Z-axis
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
G80 G40
Fixed-cycle cancellation
T15 T00 M06
Tool change
G54.1 P40
Coordinate system setting
G94 G00 X0 Y-45.0
Approach in the XY-plane to the starting point (0, –45.0)
M50
K
K
IM
G01 Z-1.0 F150
A
Se
ri
S1500 M03
ZA
al
Z3.0
ZA
A
YA
)2
End of machining
(c
M30
Command for spiral interpolation with arc ending point =
(0, –15.0), arc center = (0, 0)*, and pitch = 2.
* I- and J-values refer to increments to the starting point.
Spindle stop and Air blast OFF
01
3
M05 M09
Air blast ON
Return on the Z-axis
M
G00 Z3.0
Normal rotation of the spindle
Infeed on the Z-axis
G2.1 X0 Y-15.0 I0 J45.0 F450 P2
Z30.0
Positioning on the Z-axis to the initial point
N
o.
G43 Z30.0 H01
yr
ig
ht
The rate of feed at the starting point is 450 mm/min, as specified in the block of G2.1, and the
rate of feed at the ending point can be calculated as follows:
(Ending point’s radius/Starting point’s radius) × Command value of the rate of feed.
C
op
As the radius of the starting point = 45.0, that of the ending point = 15.0, and the command rate
of feed (F) = 450, the rate of feed results in
(15.0/45.0) × 450 = 150 mm/min
at the ending point.
Note 1: Take care not to use radius designation (argument R) for spiral interpolation; otherwise
a normal circular interpolation (by G02 or G03) will be executed.
Note 2: It is not possible to give the command for a spiral interpolation the starting and ending
points of which should have different centers specified.
6-13
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Example 2:
Heart-shaped cam (by absolute data input)
Y
1
X
er
ve
d
.
70
ts
re
s
D735PB002
Zero point return on the Z-axis
G80 G40
Fixed-cycle cancellation
T15 T00 M06
Tool change
G54.1 P40
Coordinate system setting
G94 G00 X0 Y-70.0
Approach in the XY-plane to the starting point (0, –70.0)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
G91 G28 Z0
G43 Z30.0 H01
Positioning on the Z-axis to the initial point
S1500 M03
Normal rotation of the spindle
Z3.0
o.
M50
K
IM
G00 Z3.0
Command for the left-hand half curve
ZA
Se
X0 Y-70.0 I 0 J-1.0
Infeed on the Z-axis
A
ri
G2.1 X0 Y1.0 I0 J70.0 F450
K
al
N
G01 Z-1.0 F150
M05 M09
Return on the Z-axis
End of machining
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
M30
Command for the right-hand half curve
Spindle stop and Air blast OFF
ZA
Z30.0
Air blast ON
6-14
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Example 3:
6
Heart-shaped cam (by incremental data input)
Y
X
0
a
b
(30.)
(100.)
er
ve
d
.
Starting
and Ending
points
MEP033
ri
gh
ts
re
s
The difference (b–a) between the radii of the starting point and ending point denotes a
displacement for heart shape.
Use two blocks for programming separately the right-half and the left-half shape.
ZA
A
ri
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
K
N
o.
N
(Minimum arc radius)
(Maximum arc radius)
(Ending-point coordinate of the right half-circle)
(Ending-point coordinate of the left half-circle)
al
a = 30.
b = 100.
a + b = 130.
–a – b = –130.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
G3.1 Y130. J100. F1000............... (Right half)
a+b
b
G3.1 Y–130. J–30 ........................ (Left half)
–a–b
–a
.A
ll
A sample program in incremental data input:
6-15
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Example 4:
Large-size threading
To perform large-size threading, use three heilical-interpolation blocks for
programming separately infeed section, threading section and upward-cutting
section. Spiral interpolation is required to designate the amounts of diameter
clearance for both the infeed block and the upward-cutting block. (The starting and
ending points are shifted through the designated clearance amounts from the
circumference of threading section.)
Clearance
er
ve
d
.
X
i1
re
s
i3
0
Z
gh
ts
i2
.A
ll
ri
Y
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
z2
z1
Infeed
Threading
z3
Upward cutting
MEP034
o.
(Infeed block, half-circle)
(Threading block, complete circle)
(Upward-cutting block, half-circle)
K
ZA
A
The number of pitches, p2, in the threading block is given by dividing the stroke z2 by the pitch
. Note that the value p2 must be an integer.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
*
Se
ri
al
N
G3.1 X–i1–i2 Y0 Zz1 I–i1 J0 Ff1
G03 X0 Y0 Zz2 Ii2 J0 Pp2
G3.1 Xi2+i3 Y0 Zz3 Ii2 J0
N
6-16
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Example 5:
6
Tapered threading
As shown in the figure below, tapered helical cutting that begins at any angle can
be performed.
e = Ending point
s = Starting point
X
e
0
x1
er
ve
d
.
i1
Z
Y
j1
gh
ts
y1
re
s
s
ri
p1
MEP035
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
z1
K
N
al
G3.1 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ii1 Jj1 Pp1 Ff1
o.
Data with addresses X, Y and Z must be the increments x 1, y1 and z1 respectively, from the
starting point s to the ending point e; data of I and J must be the increments i1 and j1 respectively,
from the starting point s to the circular center, and data of P must be equal to the number of
pitches p1.
ZA
K
IM
i12 + j12 , re =
(x1 – i1)2 + (y1 – j1)2 ;
ZA
where rs =
A
2(re – rs)
x1
Se
t=
ri
The amount of taper t and the pitch are calculated as follows:
A
z1
(2 p1 + ) / 2
YA
M
=
01
3
where = e – s =
–1
tan
j1 – y1
i1 – x1
–1
– tan
–j1
–i1
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
where rs and re denote the radii at the starting point and the ending point respectively, and qs
and qe denote the angles at the starting point and the ending point respectively.
6-17
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Example 6:
Conical cutting
Conical cutting is an application of tapered threading, and have its starting or
ending point on the center line. Tapering results from gradually increasing or
decreasing the arc diameter. The pitch is determined by z1/p1.
Z
er
ve
d
.
p1
gh
ts
re
s
z1
.A
ll
ri
Y
N
X
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
0
x1
A
ZA
K
N
al
ri
K
IM
Se
x1 : Radius of the base
z1 : Height
p1 : Number of pitches
f1 : Feed rate
o.
G2.1 X–x1 Y0 Zz1 I–x1 Pp1 Ff1
MEP036
Note 1: Use the TRACE display to check the tool path during spiral interpolation.
M
A
ZA
Note 2: In a combined use with the cylindrical interpolation, the machining contour of spiral
interpolation on the cylindrical surface may be unexpectedly reversed due to a particular configuration of the machine’s controlled axes.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
See “4. Remarks” in Section 6-13 for more information.
6-18
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6-7
6
Plane Selection: G17, G18, G19
6-7-1
Outline
1.
Function and purpose
Commands G17, G18 and G19 are used to select a plane for motion control.
Registering the three fundamental axes as parameters allows you to select a plane generated by
any two non-parallel axes.
Use these G-codes to select the plane for the following:
- Circular interpolation
er
ve
d
.
- Polar coordinate interpolation
- Chamfering
re
s
- Positioning for fixed cycle operation
- Corner rounding/chamfering
ts
Programming format
gh
2.
G17; (XY-plane selection)
G18; (ZX-plane selection)
G19; (YZ-plane selection)
Y
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
X, Y, and Z denote respective coordinate axes
or their corresponding parellel axes.
X
Z
G03
G03
o.
G03
G02
ZA
K
G02
Z
Y
G19 (YZ) plane
A
G18 (ZX) plane
K
IM
Se
ri
X
G17 (XY) plane
al
N
G02
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
TEP024’
6-19
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6-7-2
Plane selection methods
Plane selection by parameter setting is explained in this section.
Which of the fundamental axes or their parallel axes are to form the plane you want to select
is determined by the type of plane selection command (G17, G18 or G19) and the axis
address specified in the same block.
Z
G18X Z;
G03
G19Y Z;
G03
G02
G03
G02
.
X
G17X Y;
G02
Z
Y
gh
ts
X
er
ve
d
Y
re
s
1.
ri
TEP025’
Automatic plane selection does not occur for blocks that do not have an issued
plane-selection command (G17, G18 or G19)
3.
ZX-plane
ZX-plane (No plane change)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
G18 X_ Z_;
Y_ Z_;
N
.A
ll
2.
If axis addresses are not set for blocks having an issued plane-selection command (G17,
G18 or G19), the fundamental three axes will be regarded as set.
(ZX-plane = G18 XZ ;)
N
o.
G18_;
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
Note 1: Use bits 0 and 1 of parameter F92 to set the initial plane which is to be selected upon
power-on or resetting.
Note 2: The G-codes for plane selection (G17, G18 or G19) should be commanded in a block
independently. If such a G-code is commanded in a block containing the axis move
command, a movement independent from the selected plane can be caused.
6-20
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Polar Coordinate Interpolation ON/OFF: G12.1/G13.1 (Option)
1.
Function and purpose
Polar coordinate interpolation is a function to convert a command programmed by the
rectangular coordinate system into the linear axis movement (tool movement) and the rotational
axis movement (workpiece rotation) to give contouring control.
2.
Programming format
The polar coordinate interpolation is commanded by the following G-codes (group 19).
Polar coordinate interpolation mode (Mode by which the polar coordinate is interpolated)
G13.1:
Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode (Mode by which the polar coordinate is not
interpolated)
re
s
er
ve
d
.
G12.1:
ri
Detailed description
When turning on the power and resetting, the polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode
(G13.1) is provided. Commanding G12.1 provides a plane selected by G17.
2.
The polar coordinate interpolation uses the zero point of workpiece coordinate system as
that of the coordinate system. A plane (hereinafter referred to as “polar coordinate interpolation plane”) is selected using the linear axis as the 1st axis of the plane and the virtual
axis perpendicular to the linear axis as the 2nd axis of the plane. The polar coordinate
interpolation is given on that plane.
3.
The program during polar coordinate interpolation mode is commanded by the rectangular
coordinate value on the polar coordinate interpolation plane. The axis address of the
rotational axis (C) is used for that of the command of the 2nd axis of the plane (virtual axis).
ZA
ri
Se
K
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
1.
al
3.
gh
ts
These G-codes should be commanded in an independent block.
K
IM
A
A command is given in mm or inches as with the 1st axis of the plane (command by the axis
address of the linear axis), and not in degrees.
Absolute command and incremental command for the linear interpolation (G01) and the
circular interpolation (G02, G03) can be commanded during the polar coordinate interpolation mode.
The tool radius compensation can also be made for the program command, and the polar
coordinate interpolation is given to the path after the tool radius compensation. However,
the polar coordinate interpolation mode (G12.1, G13.1) cannot be changed during the tool
radius compensation mode (G41, G42). G12.1 and G13.1 must be commanded in G40
mode (Tool radius compensation cancel mode).
5.
The feed rate is commanded using tangential speed (relative speed of the workpiece and a
tool) on the polar coordinate interpolation plane (rectangular coordinate system) as F
(mm/min or in/min is used for a unit of F).
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
4.
6.
C
6-8
6
The coordinate value of the virtual axis when G12.1 is commanded provides “0”. That is, the
polar coordinate interpolation is started taking the position where G12.1 is commanded as
the angle = 0.
6-21
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
G17: X-C (virtual axis) plane
X
C
Z
C
(Virtual axis)
Sample programs
re
s
4.
er
ve
d
.
D732S0008
N070
N060
.A
ll
X
K
ZA
A
N090
YA
M
Programmed path
A
ZA
Tool center path
N050
N100
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
N080
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
C
ri
gh
ts
C (Virtual axis)
01
3
)2
G00 G97 G98;
G28 U0 W0;
M200;
T01T00M06;
G00 X100.0 Z10.0 C0.0;
G12.1;
G42;
G01 X50.0 F500;
C10.0;
G03 X-50.0 C10.0 I-25.0;
G01 C-10.0;
G03 X50.0 C-10.0 R25.0;
G01 C0.0;
G00 X100.0;
G40;
G13.1;
M202;
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
N001
N004
N008
N010
N020
N030
N040
N050
N060
N070
N080
N090
N100
N110
N120
N130
N140
D732S0009
6-22
Positioning to the start point
Polar coordinate interpolation ON
Contour program
(Program with rectangular coordinate values
on the XC-plane)
Polar coordinate interpolation OFF
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Remarks
1.
Before G12.1 is commanded, a workpiece coordinate system must be set using the center
of rotational axis as the zero point of the coordinate system. The coordinate system must
not be changed during G12.1 mode.
2.
The plane before G12.1 is commanded (plane selected by G17, G18 or G19) is temporarily
cancelled, and it is restored when G13.1 (polar coordinate interpolation cancel) is
commanded. The polar coordinate interpolation mode is cancelled in resetting, and the G17
plane is provided.
3.
The method of commanding the circular radius (which address of I, J and K is used) when
the circular interpolation (G02, G03) is given on the polar coordinate interpolation plane
depends on which axis of the basic coordinate system the 1st axis of the plane (linear axis)
corresponds to.
er
ve
d
.
5.
6
Command is given by I and J taking the linear axis as the X-axis of Xp-Yp plane.
re
s
Command is given by J and K taking the linear axis as the Y-axis of Yp-Zp plane.
gh
ts
Command is given by K and I taking the linear aixs as the Z-axis of Zp-Xp plane.
ri
The circular radius can also be designated by R command.
G-codes capable of command during G12.1 mode are G04, G65, G66, G67, G00, G01, G02,
G03, G98, G99, G40, G41 and G42.
5.
Move command of an axis other than those on the selected plane during G12.1 mode is
executed independently of the polar coordinate interpolation.
6.
Tool offset must be commanded in the polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode before
G12.1 is commanded. It cannot be commanded during the polar coordinate interpolation
mode. Offset amount must not be changed during the polar coordinate interpolation mode.
7.
Current position display during G12.1 mode
Every current position during the polar coordinate interpolation mode is displayed with an
actual coordinate value. However, only “residue moving distance” (REMAIN) is displayed
with the residue moving distance on the polar coordinate command plane.
8.
Program restart cannot be made for a block during G12.1 mode.
9.
The machining contour of polar coordinate interpolation may be unexpectedly reversed due
to a particular configuration of the machine’s controlled axes.
K
ZA
A
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
4.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
See “4. Remarks” in Section 6-13 for more information.
6-23
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Virtual-Axis Interpolation: G07
1.
Function and purpose
Specify with G07 code one of the two circular-interpolation axes for helical or spiral interpolation
with synchronous linear interpolation as a virtual axis (a pulse-distributed axis without actual
movement), and an interpolation on the plane defined by the remaining circular axis and the
linear axis can be obtained along the sine curve which corresponds with the side view of the
circular interpolation with synchronous linear interpolation.
Programming format
G07 0
G07 1
.
er
ve
d
ts
Detailed description
Only helical or spiral interpolation can be used for the virtual-axis interpolation.
2.
In the program section from G070 to G071, the “alpha” axis is processed as a virtual axis.
If, therefore, the alpha axis is included independently in this section, the machine will remain
in dwell status until pulse distribution to the virtual axis is completed.
3.
The virtual axis is valid only for automatic operation; it is invalid for manual operation.
4.
Protective functions, such as interlock, stored stroke limit, etc., are valid even for the virtual
axis.
5.
Handle interruption is also valid for the virtual axis. That is, the virtual axis can be shifted
through the amount of handle interruption.
ri
gh
1.
ZA
al
Sample program
ri
4.
Sets the Y-axis as a virtual axis.
Sine interpolation on the XZ-plane
Resets the Y-axis to an actual axis.
A
ZA
K
IM
A
G07 Y0
G17G2.1X0Y–5.I0J–10.Z40.P2F50
G07 Y1
Se
K
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
3.
To set a virtual axis
To interpolate with the virtual axis
To cancel the virtual axis
re
s
2.
X-axis
YA
M
X-axis
)2
01
3
10.
Z-axis
20.
ig
ht
(c
5.
–5.
–10.
Y-axis
yr
op
40.
–5.
C
6-9
–10.
MEP037
6-24
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6
6-10 Spline Interpolation: G06.1 (Option)
1.
Function and purpose
The spline interpolation automatically creates a curve that smoothly traces specified points, and
thus enables a high-speed and high-accuracy machining for free shapes along smoothly curved
tool path.
2.
Programming format
G06.1 Xx1 Yy1
Detailed description
Setting and cancellation of spline interpolation mode
re
s
A.
er
ve
d
.
3.
gh
ts
The spline interpolation mode is set by the preparatory function G06.1, and cancelled by another
Group 01 command (G00, G01, G02 or G03).
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
N
Pn
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N100 G00
X_Y_
N200 G06.1 X_Y_
N201
X_Y_
N202
X_Y_
N203
X_Y_
N290
X_Y_
N300 G01
X_Y_
.A
ll
ri
Example 1:
Pn
Pn+1
P3
P5
P4
ZA
K
P1
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
P2
Pn+1
K
IM
Fig. 6-1 Interpolated line by spline interpolation
M
A
ZA
In the above example, the spline interpolation is activated at N200 (block for movement from P 1
to P2) and it is cancelled at N300. Therefore, a spline curve is created for a group of ending
points from P1 to Pn, and interpolation is applied along the created curve.
01
3
YA
For creating a spline interpolation curve, it is generally required to specify two or more blocks (at
least three points to be traced) in the mode. If the spline interpolation mode is set just for one
block, the path to the ending point of the block is interpolated in a straight line.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
Example 2:
N100
N200
N300
G01
X_Y_
G06.1 X_Y_
G01
X_Y_
P1
P2
P3
Linear interpolation for the single
spline-interpolation block
P1
P2
P3
Fig. 6-2 Spline interpolation applied to a single block
6-25
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
B.
Division of spline curve in spline-interpolation mode
The spline interpolation mode generally creates a continuous curve that smoothly connects all
specified points from the beginning of the mode to the end of it. However, the spline curve is
divided into two discontinuous curves as often as one of the following conditions is satisfied:
- When the angle between linear movement lines of two neighboring blocks is beyond the
spline-cancel angle,
- When the movement distance of a block exceeds the spline-cancel distance, or
- When there is a block without any movement command in the spline-interpolation mode.
1.
When the relative angle of two neighboring blocks is beyond the spline-cancel angle
er
ve
d
.
Spline-cancel angle Parameter F101
re
s
As to the sequence of points P1, P2, P3, Pn in a spline interpolation mode, when the angle
ts
i made by two continuous vectors Pi–1 Pi and PiPi+1 is larger than F101, the point Pi is
F101 = 80 deg
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Example 1:
.A
ll
ri
gh
regarded as a corner. In that event, the point group is divided into two sections of P 1 to Pi
and Pi to Pn at Pi, and spline curve is individually created for each section.
When the spline-cancel angle is not set (F101 = 0), this dividing function is not available.
P4
3
P3
4
2
N
5
4 > F101
P6
ZA
K
IM
6
P1
P5
A
Se
ri
P6
Forms a corner
P2
K
al
P2
o.
P5
P4
P3
P1
P7
ZA
P7
M
A
P4
P5
F101 not set
P2
)2
01
3
YA
P3
ig
ht
(c
P6
C
op
yr
P1
Fig. 6-3 Spline cancel depending on angle
6-26
P7
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6
When there are more than one point where i > F101, such points are treated as corners to
divide the point group and multiple spline curves are created for respective sections.
i > F101
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
i > F101
ri
gh
Fig. 6-4 Multiple-cornered spline curve depending on angle
Example 2:
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
When any two corner points (where i > F101) successively exist, the block for the second
point is automatically set under control of linear interpolation. Therefore, it can be omitted to
specify G01 code in each intermediate block of pick feed, for example, during 2.5dimensional machining, which considerably simplifies the programming.
F101 < 90 (deg)
M
A
01
3
YA
(G01)
(G06.1)
(G01)
(G06.1)
(c
ht
K
ZA
A
P1
P2
P3
Pj+1
G01
Pi
Pi+1
Pi+2
P1
Pj
Z
Pj
Pj+1
Pj+2
Y
Pn
X
Pn
Pi+1
Pi
C
op
yr
ig
X_Y_Z_
X_Z_
X_Z_
X_Z_
Y_
X_Z_
X_Z_
Y_
X_Z_
X_Z_
ZA
G00
G06.1
)2
N100
N200
N210
N300
N310
N320
N400
N410
N420
N700
N710
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
In the following program (shown in Fig. 6-5), the angle of the Y-directional pick feed to the
X-Z plane (of spline interpolation) is always 90°. If F101 is set slightly smaller than 90°,
spline interpolation is automatically cancelled in the pick-feed blocks (N310, N410, ),
which are then linearly interpolated each time. If no value is set for F101, it is required to
specify G-codes parenthesized in the program below to change the mode of interpolation.
Fig. 6-5 Linear interpolation for pick feed in spline-interpolation mode
6-27
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
2.
When the movement distance of a block exceeds the spline-cancel distance
Spline-cancel distance Parameter F100
As to the sequence of points P1, P2, P3, Pn in a spline interpolation mode, when the length
PiPi+1 of the vector PiPi+1 is longer than F100, the block for point Pi+1 is automatically set
under control of linear interpolation, while the preceding and succeeding sections P 1 to Pi
and Pi+1 to Pn are individually interpolated in spline curves.
In this case, the inclination of the tangent vector at P i (at the end of spline P1 to Pi) and the
inclination of the tangent vector at Pi+1 (at the beginning of spline Pi+1 to Pn) do not
er
ve
d
.
correspond to that of the line segment PiPi+1 in general.
re
s
When the spline-cancel distance is not set (F100 = 0), this dividing function is not available.
(a) P4P5 > F100,
PiPi+1 F100 for other blocks
ts
P4
ri
P6
P3
P7
P2
P1
P8
P1
P7
P8
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
P2
P6
.A
ll
P4P5 > F100
P5
N
P3
P5
gh
P4
(b) F100 is not specified
Interpolated as follows:
P1 to P4: Spline curve,
P4 to P5: Straight line,
P5 to P8: Spline curve.
o.
The whole path P1 to P8 is
interpolated in one spline curve.
K
al
N
Fig. 6-6 Spline cancel depending on movement distance of a block
K
IM
A
undergo the linear interpolation.
ZA
Se
ri
When there are more than one block where PiPi+1 > F100, all those blocks will individually
When there is a block without any movement command in the spline-interpolation mode
Any block without movement command temporarily cancels the spline interpolation, and the
sections before and after such a block will independently be spline-interpolated.
01
3
G01
X_Y_
G06.1 X_Y_
X_Y_
)2
N100
N110
N120
YA
M
A
ZA
3.
X_Y_
X0
X_Y_
N500
N510
X_Y_
X_Y_
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
N300
N310
N320
G01
P1
P2
P7
P8
P6
P5
P5 (Not moved)
P6
P5
P4
Spline from
P5 to P8
P3
Forms a corner
P2
P8
Spline from
P1 to P5
P1
Fig. 6-7 Spline cancel by a block without movement command
6-28
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
C.
6
Fine spline function (curved shape correction)
The fine spline function works with spline interpolation and automatically corrects the shape of a
spline curve, as required, to make the path of the curve smoother.
More specifically, the fine spline function works in the following two cases:
- The case that the curve errors in blocks are significant
- The case that an unusually short block exists (automatic correction in this case is referred to as
fairing.)
Automatic correction in the above cases is explained below.
1.
Automatic correction for significant curve errors in blocks
re
s
er
ve
d
.
When the curve data in CAD undergoes micro-segmentation with CAM, approximation
using a polygonal line is usually executed with a curve tolerance (chord error) of about 10
microns. At this time, if any inflection points are included in the curve, the micro-segment
block including the inflection points may increase in length (see P3 P4 . in the figure below)
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
Also, if the length of this block becomes unbalanced against those of the immediately
preceding and succeeding blocks, the spline curve in this zone may have a significant error
with respect to the original curve.
N
P2
Tolerance
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
P1
P3
Tolerance (minus side)
P0
Spline curve
(deviation from the CAD curve is significant)
K
P7
A
P4
K
IM
Se
ri
CAD curve
Tolerance (plus side)
ZA
al
N
o.
Inflection point
in the original curve
P6
ZA
P5
A
Fig. 6-8 Spline curve having a significant chord error (inflection points present)
Curve error 1 Parameter F102
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
This function detects the sections whose chord errors in the curve due to the presence of
inflection points become significant, and corrects the shape of the spline curve in that zone
automatically so that the chord errors in the curve fall within the data range of the specified
parameter.
6-29
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
If a block in the spline interpolation mode is judged to have inflection points in the spline
curve and the maximum chord error of the spline curve from the segment is greater than the
value of F102, the shape of that spline curve will be corrected for a maximum chord error
not exceeding the value of F102.
Uncorrected spline curve
Corrected spline curve
A
er
ve
d
.
B
ts
re
s
F102 or less
gh
Fig. 6-9 Shape correction 1 for spline curve
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
The shape of a curve can also be corrected if the chord error in the spline curve increases
due to an imbalance in the lengths of adjoining blocks occurs for any reasons other than the
presence of inflection points or for other reasons.
Curve error 2 Parameter F104
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
If a blocks in the spline interpolation mode is judged to have no inflection points in the spline
curve and the maximum chord error in the spline curve and block is greater than the value of
F104, the shape of that spline curve will be corrected for a maximum chord error not
exceeding the value of F104.
Uncorrected
spline curve
ZA
Correction
F104 or less
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
Corrected
spline curve
yr
ig
Fig. 6-10 Spline curve having a significant chord error (no inflection points)
C
op
Remark 1: In all types of spline curve correction, the curve correction function works only for
the corresponding block. Therefore, the tangential vectors at the boundaries with
the immediately preceding and succeeding blocks become discontinuous.
Remark 2: If parameter F102 is set to 0, all blocks regarded as including inflection points will
become linear. If parameter F104 is set to 0, all blocks regarded as including no
inflection points will become linear.
Remark 3: Curved-shape correction based on parameter F102 or F104 usually becomes
necessary when adjoining blocks are unbalanced in length. If the ratio of the adjoining block lengths is very large, however, spline interpolation may be temporarily
cancelled between the blocks prior to evaluation of the chord error.
6-30
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
2.
6
Automatic correction of the spline curve in an unusually short block (Fairing)
When CAD data is developed into micro-segments by CAM, a very small block may be
created in the middle of the program because of internal calculation errors. Such a block is
often created during creation of a tool radius compensation program which requires convergence calculation, in particular. Since this unusually small block usually occurs at almost
right angles to the direction of the spline curve, this curve tends not to become smooth.
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Distorted spline curve
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
Very small block
N
Fig. 6-11 Distortion of a spline curve due to the effects of a very small block
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
If it detects such an extremely small block during spline interpolation, the shape correction
function will remove that block and then connect the preceding and succeeding blocks
directly (this is referred to as fairing) to create a smooth spline curve free from distortion.
N
o.
Block fairing length Parameter F103
K
ZA
ZA
K
IM
li – 1 > F103 × 2
li F103
li + 1 > F103 × 2
A
Se
ri
al
Assume that the length of the i-th block in spline interpolation mode is taken as li and that
the following expressions hold:
01
3
YA
M
A
In the above case, the ending point of the (i–1)-th block and the starting point of the i+1
block are moved to the mid-point of the ith block and as a result, the ith block is deleted.
Spline interpolation is executed for the sequence of points that has thus been corrected.
li F103
li–1 F103 × 2
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
li+1 F103 × 2
Correction of the passing point
Created spline curve
Fig. 6-12 Correction of spline curve passing points by fairing
6-31
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Assume that the first block in spline interpolation mode is very small and that the following
expressions hold:
l1 F103
l2 > F103 × 2
In the above case, the starting point of the second block is changed to that of the first block
and as a result, the first block is deleted.
l1 F103
Non-spline block
gh
.A
ll
ri
Created spline curve
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
l2 F103 × 2
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Deletion of the passing point
Fig. 6-13 Fairing at the starting point of a spline curve
Assume that the last block in spline interpolation mode is very small and that the following
expressions hold:
o.
ln–1 F103 × 2
al
N
ln F103
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
In the above case, the ending point of the (n–1)-th block is changed to that of the nth block
and as a result, the nth block is deleted.
ln F103
ZA
ln–1 F103 × 2
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
Non-spline block
Created spline curve
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
Deletion of the passing point
Fig. 6-14 Fairing at the ending point of a spline curve
This function is executed preferentially over the curve slitting function based on the angle of
spline cancellation.
6-32
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
D.
6
Feed-rate limitation in spline-interpolation mode
The modal cutting feed rate F remains valid in general for the spline interpolation; however, if the
feed rate should be kept constant, it would yield excessively high acceleration at portions where
the curvature is big (the curvature radius is small) as shown in Fig. 6-15.
Acceleration: High
Curvature:
Small
F
er
ve
d
.
Acceleration: Low
ts
re
s
Curvature: Big
gh
Fig. 6-15 Change of acceleration depending on curvature
A
Pj+1
F : Modal feed rate (mm/min)
Rs : Curvature radius at the starting
point of block (mm)
Re : Curvature radius at the ending
point of block (mm)
R : Reference curvature radius for
the block (mm)
R = min {Rs, Re}
V : Maximum of pre-interpolation
acceleration
F’ : Limit feed rate (mm/min)
K
IM
Se
ZA
ri
F’
Pi
K
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
In the spline-interpolation mode of our NC, the feed rate can be controlled so that it does not
exceed the allowable limit, calculated from the related parameters, for pre-interpolation
acceleration.
To obtain an appropriate feed rate for each block of spline interpolation, the limit feed rate F' is
calculated by the equation [1] shown below where the smaller between two radii Rs (curvature
radius at the starting point of the block) and Re (curvature radius at its ending point) will be
regarded as the reference radius R for the block. The modal feed rate F will then be temporarily
overridden by F' for the respective block if F>F', so that the whole spline curve can be
interpolated block-by-block at the appropriate feed rate according to the curvature radius.
Re
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
Rs
C
op
yr
ig
Fig. 6-16 Feed-rate limitation for spline interpolation
F' =
R × V × 60 × 1000
V =
G1bF (mm/min)
G1btL (ms)
......... [1]
6-33
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
E.
Spline interpolation during tool radius compensation
The spline interpolation can be performed during tool radius compensation as follows.
1.
Tool radius compensation (2-dimensional)
Shown in Fig. 6-17 is an example that the command route is straight in the section P 0P1,
polygonal line in the section P1P2 . . . Pn that is the object of spline interpolation, and straight
in the section PnPn+1. The interpolation route with tool radius compensation is created by the
following procedure.
1)
In the first step is created a polygonal line P0'P1'P2' . . . Pn'Pn+1' that is offset by the
radius compensation value r compared with the original polygonal line P0P1P2 . . .
PnPn+1.
2)
Next, a point Pi'' where PiPi'' = r on the vector
er
ve
d
.
PiPi' is determined for all the pass
ts
Spline interpolation is now conducted for the polygonal line P 1'P2''P3'' . . . Pn–1''Pn' and
the curve thus created will act an offset path of tool center for the commanded spline
curve.
.A
ll
ri
gh
3)
re
s
points Pi (i = 2, 3, . . . n–1) other than the starting point P1 and the ending point Pn of the
spline curve.
N
P2'
1)
r
P1'
P0 '
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
P3'
P2
r
r
P1
Pn
Pn-1'
Pn+1
P1'
A
ZA
Pn-1
r
P3
’
P2
P3''
A
M
P
1
Pn-1''
Spline curve for commanded
points offset
P2''
Pn-1
ig
ht
P3''
P2
P0 '
P1'
C
P0
P
Spline curve for
commanded
points
Pn+1'
Pn '
P3
op
yr
Pn+1
r
)2
(c
3)
Pn
Pn-1'
01
3
YA
P
0
Pn+1'
Pn'
r
P3
ZA
P0 '
K
IM
Se
P2'' P2'
2)
K
ri
al
N
o.
P0
Pn+1'
Pn'
P3
Pn-1''
Pn
Pn+1
Pn-1
Fig. 6-17 Spline interpolation during tool radius compensation
The spline curve created in the above-mentioned procedure is not the strict offset, indeed,
of the commanded spline curve, but an approximation of it.
6-34
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
2.
6
3-dimensional tool radius compensation
In the 3-dimensional tool radius compensation, each point defined with programmed
coordinates is first offset through the tool radius “r” in the direction of the specified normal
vector (i, j, k) and then, the serial points thus offset in the spline-interpolation section are
connected in a smooth curve, which will act as the path of tool-radius center for the 3dimensional spline interpolation.
F.
Others
The spline interpolation targets the basic coordinate axes of X, Y and Z; however, it is not
always required to specify objective axes on commanding the spline interpolation.
Moreover, the spline-interpolation command code (G06.1) can be given in a block without
any movement command.
N100
N200
N300
X_Y_Z_
X_Y_Z_
N200
N300
X_Y_
X_Y_Z_
X_Y_Z_
ri
F_ ( No movement commands)
G06.1
N200
X_Y_Z_
N300
X_Y_Z_
.A
ll
N100
G06.1
re
s
ts
X_Y_Z0
gh
G06.1
N
N100
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Example:
er
ve
d
.
1.
The spline-interpolation command (G06.1) falls under the G-code group 01.
3.
In the single-block operation mode, the spline interpolation is cancelled and all the respective blocks will individually undergo the linear interpolation.
4.
In tool-path check, the blocks of spline interpolation are not actually displayed in a spline
curve but in a polygonal line that connects linearly the repective points, which, in case of
tool radius compensation, will have been offset in the same manner as described in the
foregoing article E.
5.
During spline interpolation, when feed hold is executed, the block for which the feed hold
function has been executed will be interpolated, at the beginning of the restart operation
along the spline curve existing before the feed hold function was executed, and then the
spline curve in the next block onward will be re-created and interpolation executed.
6.
Althouth spline interpolation can also be executed in the high-speed maching mode (G05P2
mode), curve shape correction by fairing becomes invalid in the G05P2 mode.
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
2.
6-35
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6-11 Modal Spline Interpolation: G61.2 (Option)
1.
Function and purpose
The modal preparatory function G61.2 is used to select a geometry compensation mode which is
in general equivalent to G61.1 with a particular difference in that all blocks of G1 (linear interpolation) are processed as those of fine spline interpolation. This function is especially useful in
applying fine spline interpolation to a programm with microsegment blocks created by a CAM.
2.
Programming format
er
ve
d
Detailed description
re
s
3.
.
G61.2 ............. Modal spline interpolation ON
:
G64 ................ Modal spline interpolation OFF
G0
G61.1 + G0
G61.1 + G0
G1
G61.1 + G06.1
G2/G3
G61.1 + G2/G3
G06.1
G61.1 + G06.1
G64
N
G61.1
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
G61.2
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
The mode of fine spline interpolation for G1 blocks under G61.2 is temporarily cancelled by any
other G-code of group 01, and the mode of G61.2 is cancelled by any other G-code of group 13.
The table below is given to show how various interpolation types are processed under different
modal states of group 13. For example, G1 under G61.2 is equivalent to G06.1 under G61.1.
G0
G1
G61.1 + G2/G3
G2/G3
G61.1 + G06.1
G06.1
ZA
A
ri
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
K
Sample program
al
4.
N
o.
G61.1 + G1
(c
)2
D740PB0026
C
op
yr
ig
ht
N099 G61.2
N100 G00 X_Y_Z_
N200 G01 X_Y_Z_
N201 X_Y_Z_
N202 X_Y_Z_
N203 G00 X_Y_Z_
N204 G01 X_Y_Z_
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
N205 X_Y_Z_
N206 X_Y_Z_
:
N290 G01 X_Y_Z_
N300 G00 X_Y_Z_
P7
P8
Pn
Pn+1
A simple insertion of G61.2 allows fine spline interpolation to be applied to the linear interpolation
blocks without having to replace the G01 codes in the blocks N200, N204 etc. with G06.1.
6-36
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6
6-12 NURBS Interpolation: G06.2 (Option)
1.
Function
The NURBS interpolation function provides interpolation by performing NURBS-defined CNCinternal computations on the command issued from the CAD/CAM system in the NURBS format.
With this optional function, a very smooth interpolation path can be obtained since the interpolation process is performed directly without dividing a NURBS-formatted free-form curve into
minute line segments.
2.
Definition of the NURBS curve
re
s
er
ve
d
.
NURBS, short for Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline, provides rationalization of the B-spline
function.
The NURBS curve is defined as follows:
P(t) =
(xm–1 t xn+1)
N
P2
n
Ni,m(t)wi
i=0
.A
ll
Pn–1
ri
n
Ni,m(t)wiPi
i=0
gh
ts
Pn
Ni,1(t) =
1 (xi t xi+1)
0 (t xi, xi+1 t)
Ni,k(t) =
(t – xi) Ni,k–1(t) (xi+k – t) Ni+1,k–1(t)
+
xi+k–1 – xi
xi+k – xi+1
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
P1
P(t)
K
MEP300
ZA
ri
Se
Fig. 6-18 NURBS curve
al
N
o.
P0
K
IM
A
- “Pi” and “wi” denote respectively a control point and the weight on the control point.
- “m” denotes the rank, and the NURBS curve of rank “m” is a curve of the (m–1)-th order.
A
ZA
- “xi” denotes a knot (xi xi+1), and an array of knots [x0 x1 x2 ... xn+m] is referred to as the
knot vector.
YA
M
- A variation in parameter “t” from xm–1 to xn+1 produces NURBS curve P(t).
01
3
- Ni, k(t) is the B-spline basis function expressed by the above recurrence equation.
Programming format
(c
3.
)2
Thus the NURBS curve is uniquely defined from the weighted control points and the knot vector.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
G6.2[P]
K_X_Y_Z_[R_][F_] NURBS interpolation ON
K_X_Y_Z_[R_]
K_X_Y_Z_[R_]
K_X_Y_Z_[R_]
K_X_Y_Z_[R_]
K_
K_
K_
K_
NURBS interpolation OFF
6-37
P
: Rank (omissible)
X, Y, Z : Coordinates of the control
point
R
: Weight on the control point
(omissible)
K
: Knot
F
: Speed of interpolation
(omissible)
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
4.
Detailed description
Set the G6.2 code to select the NURBS interpolation mode. Subsequently, designate the rank,
the coordinates and weights of the control points, and the knots to determine the shape of the
NURBS curve.
The modal code G6.2, which belongs to group 1 of G-codes, is of temporary validity and the
modal function relieved by a G6.2 code will automatically be retrieved upon cancellation
(termination) of the NURBS interpolation. The G6.2 code can only be omitted for an immediately
subsequent setting of the next NURBS curve.
Address P is used to set the rank, and the NURBS curve of rank “m” is of the (m–1)-th order, that
is, set as the rank
re
s
er
ve
d
.
- P2 for a straight line (curve of the first order),
- P3 for a quadratic curve (of the second order) or
- P4 for a cubic curve (of the third order).
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
Setting another value than 2, 3 and 4 will cause an alarm, and P4 will be used in default of
argument P. The rank, moreover, should be specified in the first block (containing the G6.2 code).
Designate the control points in as many sequential blocks as required by specifying their
respective coordinates and weights at addresses X, Y, Z and R. Argument R denotes the weight
proper to each control point (R1.0 will be used in default), and the more the weight is applied, the
closer will be drawn the NURBS curve to the control point.
K
ZA
K
IM
Remarks
Only the fundamental axes X, Y and Z can undergo the NURBS interpolation.
2.
Do not fail to explicitly designate all the required axes X, Y and/or Z in the first block
(containing G6.2). Designating a new axis in the second block onward will cause an alarm.
3.
Since the first control point serves as the starting point of the NURBS curve, set in the first
block (with G6.2) the same coordinates as the final point of the previous block. Otherwise,
an alarm will be caused.
4.
The setting range for the weight (R) is from 0.0001 to 99.9999. For a setting without decimal
point, the least significant digit will be treated as units digit (for example, 1 = 1.0).
A
ZA
1.
(c
ht
The knot (K) must be designated for each block. Omission results in an alarm.
yr
ig
5.
)2
01
3
YA
M
5.
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Address K is assigned to knots, and the NURBS curve of rank “m” for an “n” number of control
points requires an (n+m) number of knots. The required array of knots, referred to as knot vector,
is to be designated in sequential blocks, namely: the first knot in the same block as the first
control point, the second knot in the same block as the second control point, and so forth.
Following the “n” blocks entered thus, designate the remaining “m” knots in single-command
blocks. The leading single-command block of argument K also notifies the NC of the completion
of entering the control points, and the NURBS interpolation function itself will be terminated with
the last block for the “m” knots.
Knots, as with the weight, can be set down to four decimal digits, and the least significant
digit of a setting without decimal point will be regarded as units digit.
7.
Knots must be monotonic increasing. Setting a knot smaller than that of the previous block
will result in an alarm.
8.
The order of addresses in a block can be arbitrary.
C
op
6.
6-38
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
9.
6.
6
The shape of the NURBS curve can theoretically be modified very flexibly by changing the
rank, the positions and weights of the control points, and the knot vector (the relative
intervals of knots).
In practice, however, manual editing is almost impossible, and a special CAD/CAM system
should be used to edit the NURBS curve and create the program for the interpolation.
Generally speaking, do not edit manually the program created by a CAD/CAM system for
the NURBS interpolation.
Variation of curve according to knot vector
gh
Rank :
4
Number of control points : 6
Knot vector :
[ 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 ]
The starting point of the
curve differs from the first
control point.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
Example 1:
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
The NURBS curve, which in general passes by the control points, can be made to pass through
a specific control point by setting a certain number of knots in succession with the same value. In
particular, setting as many leading and trailing knots as the rank (value of P) with the respective
identical values will cause the NURBS curve to start from the first control point (P 0) and to end in
the last one (P5).
The examples given below exhibit a variation of the NURBS curve according to the knot vector
with the control points remaining identical.
P2
P5
The final point of the
curve differs from the
last control point.
N
o.
P1
P3
K
A
ZA
P4
MEP301
K
IM
Se
ri
al
P0
Fig. 6-19 NURBS curve for continuously increasing knots
ZA
Rank :
4
Number of control points : 6
Knot vector :
[ 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 ]
[1]
[2]
YA
M
A
Example 2:
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Point [1]: The first four (=rank) knots have the same value assigned.
Point [2]: The last four (=rank) knots have the same value assigned.
yr
The curve starts from the
first control point.
P2
P5
The curve ends in
the last control point.
C
op
P1
P0
P3
P4
MEP302
Fig. 6-20 NURBS curve for some identical knots
6-39
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Note 1: The NURBS interpolation can be performed only for the NURBS curve that starts and
ends from the first and in the last control point. Do not fail, therefore, to set as many
leading and trailing knots as the rank with the respective identical values.
Note 2: The NURBS interpolation is executed at the designated feed rate (F-code). During the
shape correction mode, however, the interpolation speed is controlled in order that the
maximum available acceleration may not be exceeded in the section of a considerable
curvature.
7.
Compatibility with the other functions
A.
er
ve
d
.
The tables in this section specify the compatibility of the NURBS interpolation with the other
functions. Pay attention to the incompatible functions, especially G-codes.
Preparatory, feed and auxiliary functions
re
s
The table below enumerates the G-codes, F-, M-, S-, T- and B-codes with regard to their
availability before, with and after G6.2.
before G6.2
with G6.2
after G6.2
all
×
×
G-codes of group 01
all
G18
G19
G22
G-codes of group 04
G23
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
al
G99
G20
×
×
G41
×
×
×
G42
×
×
×
G80
×
×
the others
×
×
×
G54 - G59
×
G61.1
×
×
G61.2
×
×
G61
×
×
×
G62
×
×
×
G63
×
×
×
G64
×
×
G66
×
×
×
G66.1
×
×
×
G66.2
×
×
×
G67
×
×
G68.5
×
×
×
G69.5
×
×
G54.2P0
×
×
G54.2P1 - P8
×
×
×
G5P0
×
×
G5P2
×
×
×
F
×
MSTB
×
×
G40
01
3
ZA
YA
M
A
G-codes of group 09
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
G-codes of group 13
C
op
G-codes of group 14
G-codes of group 16
G-codes of group 23
High-speed machining
mode
Feed function
Auxiliary function
A
K
IM
Se
G21
G-codes of group 07
G-codes of group 12
ZA
ri
G-codes of group 06
K
N
G98
o.
G93
G-codes of group 05
(*)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
G-codes of group 02
.A
ll
G17
ri
Code
G-codes of group 00
N
Function
gh
ts
: available ×: not available
(*) The G-code given last in the block takes priority in group 01.
6-40
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
B.
6
Skip instructions
The table below enumerates the skip instructions with regard to their availability before, with and
after G6.2.
: available
Instruction
before G6.2
with G6.2
after G6.2
Optional block skip
×
Control Out/In
×
Note:
Designating another address than X, Y, Z, R and K in the mode of (i. e. after) G6.2 will
cause an alarm.
.
Interruption and restart
er
ve
d
C.
×: not available
with G6.2
after G6.2
Single-block operation
×
Feed hold
×
Reset
Programmed stop
×
Optional stop
×
Manual interruption
(Pulse feed and MDI)
×
×
Restart
×
×
Comparison stop
×
×
ri
(Note)
N
.A
ll
×
o.
×
The single-block stop only occurs between blocks with different knots.
K
ZA
Se
Tool path check
A
ri
al
N
Note:
D.
ts
before G6.2
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Function
×: not available
gh
: available
re
s
The table below enumerates the functions for interrupting and restarting the program flow with
regard to their availability before, with and after G6.2.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
The tool path in a section of the NURBS interpolation can only be displayed as if the control
points were linearly interpolated (in the mode of G01).
6-41
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
8.
Sample program
The program section below refers to a NURBS interpolation of rank 4 (cubic curve) for seven
control points.
4.0 ]
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
4.0
A
ZA
NURBS interpolation
for the control points
K
IM
Se
ri
al
P1
P0
K
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
G90 G01 X0 Y120.F3000
Y100.
.............................. P0
G6.2 P4 X0 Y100.R1.K0 ...... P0
X10.Y100.R1.K0 ..................... P1
X10.Y60.R1.K0 ....................... P2
X60.Y50.R1.K0 ....................... P3
X80.Y60.R1.K1. ..................... P4
X100.Y40.R1.K2. ................... P5
X100.Y0 R1.K3. ..................... P6
K4.
K4.
K4.
K4.
G01 X120. ................................ P7
4.0
ri
4.0
.A
ll
3.0
N
Control points: P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6
Knot vector:
[ 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 2.0
ZA
Linear interpolation for
the control points
A
M
YA
P2
P4
P5
Y
X
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
P3
P7
C
P6
MEP303
Fig. 6-21 NURBS interpolation and linear interpolation
6-42
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
9.
6
Related alarms
The table below enumerates the alarms related to the NURBS interpolation.
Alarm list
Alarm
No.
Alarm message
806
ILLEGAL ADDRESS
Another address than those for the
nominated axes (X, Y and/or Z), the
weight (R) and the knot (K) is set in the
G6.2 mode.
Clear the inadequate address.
807
ILLEGAL FORMAT
1. The modal condition is not appropriate
to set G6.2.
1. Satisfy the modal condition with
reference to item 7-A.
2 A block in the G6.2 mode is set without
knot (K).
2. Do not fail to set a knot in each block in
the G6.2 mode.
3. The number of blocks with the same
knot in succession does not reach the
rank.
3. Set an appropriate knot vector with
reference to example 2 given in item 6.
1. The number of digits exceeds the
specification of axis commands (X, Y or
Z).
1. Specify the axis command within eight
digits.
2. The rank (P) is not admissible.
2. Set 2, 3 or 4 at address P.
3. The value of a knot is not admissible.
3. Set a value in a range of 0.0001 to
99.9999.
.
er
ve
d
re
s
ts
gh
ri
.A
ll
ILLEGAL NUMBER
INPUT
Remedy
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
809
Cause
4. The knot vector is not monotonic
increasing.
4. Check the blocks for a decreasing knot.
FEEDRATE ZERO
The feed rate (F-code) has not yet been
designated.
Set an F-code before or in the same block
as the G6.2 code.
936
OPTION NOT FOUND
The system is not equipped with the
optional function of the NURBS
interpolation.
Purchase and install the optional function.
955
START AND END
POINT NOT AGREE
The axis coordinates designated in the
block of G6.2 do not correspond to the
final point of the previous block.
956
RESTART OPERATION
NOT ALLOWED
957
MANUAL INTERRUPT
NOT ALLOWED
The designated restart block falls within
the mode of G6.2.
Restart operation is not allowed from the
midst of the NURBS interpolation.
An interruption by pulse handle or MDI
operation is commanded in the midst of
the G6.2 mode.
Manual interruption is not allowed in the
midst of the NURBS interpolation.
A
ri
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
K
Designate in the first block of the NURBS
interpolation the same position as the final
point of the previous block.
al
ZA
N
o.
816
6-43
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6-13 Cylindrical Interpolation: G07.1 (Option)
1.
Function and purpose
Cylindrical interpolation refers to a function by which the cylindrical surface of a workpiece can
be machined according to a program prepared on its development plane. This function is among
others very efficient in the creation of a cam grooving program.
Programming format
A.
Selection and cancellation of the cylindrical interpolation mode
er
ve
d
When the A-axis functions as the rotational axis:
G07.1 Ar; Cylindrical interpolation mode ON (r = radius of cam groove bottom)
.
2.
re
s
G07.1 A0; Cylindrical interpolation mode OFF
gh
ts
When the B-axis functions as the rotational axis:
G07.1 Br; Cylindrical interpolation mode ON (r = radius of cam groove bottom)
ri
G07.1 B0; Cylindrical interpolation mode OFF
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
Note 1: The above preparatory function (G-code) must be given in a single-command block.
Note 2: Enter a precise value for the radius of the cam groove bottom (r), which is used for the
internal calculation of the dimensions and the rate of feed in the developed plane.
Note 3: Enter a positive value for the radius of the cam groove bottom (r).
Note 4: In the mode of cylindrical interpolation the radius of the cam groove bottom (r) cannot
be otherwise modified than to zero. That is, the modification must be done after
canceling the mode temporarily.
Note 5: Cylindrical interpolation is not available for machines with a linear type rotational axis
(F85 bit 2 = 1; HV-machines or machines with a tilting table).
Note 6: The figure below refers to a vertical machining center. To perform machining on the
surface of the cylinder, position the tool on the Y-axis to the axis of the cylinder first,
perform an infeed on the Z-axis even to the groove bottom and then select the mode of
a cylindrical interpolation with simultaneous control of the X- and A-axis.
A
ZA
Z
X
r
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
Y
Fig. 6-22 Diagrammatic view of cylindrical interpolation (1/2)
6-44
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6
Note 7: The next figure shows a machining center with the fixture mounted perpendicular to the
Y-axis. To use the cylindrical interpolation on such a machine, position the tool on the
X-axis to the axis of the cylinder first, perform an infeed on the Z-axis even to the
groove bottom and then select the mode of a cylindrical interpolation with simultaneous
control of the Y- and B-axis.
Y
Z
Z
Y
X
X
re
s
er
ve
d
.
r
r
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
B
B
Fig. 6-23 Diagrammatic view of cylindrical interpolation (2/2)
Commands in the cylindrical interpolation mode
N
al
K
ZA
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
Refer to Table 6-2 (in paragraph 1 under 3-B) for the available G-codes.
Cylindrical interpolation occurs in the X-A plane or Y-B plane.
The values of X (or Y) and A (or B) are of linear and angular dimensions, respectively.
Radius for a circular interpolation
Abscissa (incremental) of the center for a circular interpolation
Ordinate (incremental) of the center for a circular interpolation
Offset number for tool radius compensation
Dwell time
Rate of feed (Refer to the detailed description in paragraph 2 under 3-B.)
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Gg:
Xx/Aa:
Yy/Bb:
Rr:
Ii:
Jj:
Dd:
Pp/Xx:
Ff:
o.
GgXxAaRrIiJjDdPpFf;
GgYyBbRrIiJjDdPpFf;
A
B.
6-45
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
3.
Detailed description
A.
Conditions necessary for the selection of the cylindrical interpolation mode
The G-code modal states required for the cylindrical interpolation mode selection are as follows:
Table 6-1 Conditions necessary for the mode selection
G-code group
Condition
G0/G1 (Positioning or Linear interpolation only)
G-code group 2
G17 (X-Y plane only)
G-code group 3
G90/G91 (Absolute/Incremental programming) [unconditional]
G-code group 4
G22/G23 (Stroke check ON/OFF) [unconditional]
G-code group 5
G94/G95 (Asynchronous/Synchronous feed) [unconditional]
G-code group 6
G20/G21 (Inch/Metric data input) [unconditional]
G-code group 7
G40 (Tool radius compensation OFF)
G-code group 8
G43/G49 (Tool length offset ON/OFF) [unconditional]
G-code group 9
G80 (Fixed cycle OFF)
G-code group 10
Invalid (Return level selection [between initial and R-point] is only valid for fixed cycles.)
G-code group 11
G50 (Scaling OFF)
G-code group 12
G54 to G59，G54.1 (Standard/Additional workpiece coordinate system) [unconditional]
G-code group 13
G64 (Cutting mode)
G-code group 14
G67 (User macro modal call OFF)
G-code group 15
G40.1 (Shaping OFF)
G-code group 16
G69 (Programmed coordinates rotation OFF)
(Note 2)
G-code group 19
G50.1/G51.1 (Mirror image ON/OFF) [unconditional]
(Note 3)
G-code group 19
No selection of a plane for five-surface machining
G-code group 23
G54.2P0 (Dynamic offsetting II OFF)
Others
G5P0 (High-speed machining OFF)
Others
G7.1B0 (Cylindrical interpolation OFF)
er
ve
d
.
G-code group 1
K
ZA
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
(Note 1)
K
IM
Otherwise the selection will only lead to an alarm.
M
A
ZA
Note 1: Select and cancel the tool radius compensation as required in the mode of cylindrical
interpolation. An alarm will be caused if the cylindrical interpolation is selected in the
mode of tool radius compensation.
01
3
YA
Note 2: The cylindrical interpolation cannot be selected in the mode of G68 (3-dimensional
coordinate conversion). On an HV machining center, therefore, the cylindrical interpolation function is not available to an inclined or top surface.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
Note 3: To use the cylindrical interpolation with the mirror image function being selected, take
the following precautions in order to prevent errors from occurring in the development
of the cylindrical surface:
[1] Set the mirroring center to 0° for the rotational axis of the cylindrical interpolation.
[2] Select the cylindrical interpolation with the rotational axis being positioned at its
workpiece origin (0°).
[3] Also cancel the cylindrical interpolation with the rotational axis being positioned at
its workpiece origin (0°).
An example of programming is given later in the sample program under 5-B.
6-46
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
B.
6
Commands in the cylindrical interpolation mode
1.
The table below enumerates the G-codes available in the cylindrical interpolation mode.
Any other G-code will cause an alarm.
Table 6-2 Available G-codes
G1, G2, G3
Linear and circular interpolation
G4
Dwell
G9
Exact-stop check
G17
Plane selection
(Note 1)
G40, G41, G42
Tool radius compensation
(Note 2)
.
Function
Rapid positioning
er
ve
d
G-code
G0
2.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
Note 1: After the mode selection by a block of G7.1, do not fail to give a plane selection
command of the following format in order to specify the cylindrical interpolation plane
determined by the corresponding linear and rotational axes:
G17X＿A＿
when the A-axis functions as the rotational axis.
G17Y＿B＿
when the B-axis functions as the rotational axis.
Note 2: Select and cancel the tool radius compensation as required in the mode of cylindrical
interpolation. An alarm will be caused if the cylindrical interpolation is selected in the
mode of tool radius compensation.
In the mode of the cylindrical interpolation the rate of feed refers to a resultant speed (of Fx
and Fa, or Fy and Fb) in the plane onto which the surface of the cylinder is developed.
The speed on each component axis is calculated for a block of G1XxAaFf; as follows:
x
•f
o.
Fx =
N
a
x +(
2 r ) 2
360
K
A
K
IM
Se
a
2 r
360
•f
a
2
2
x +(
2 r )
360
x: metric (0.001 mm)
a: degree (0.001°)
r: radius of cam groove bottom
f: command value of speed
A
ZA
Fa =
ZA
ri
al
2
YA
M
The speed on each component axis is calculated for a block of G1YyBbFf; as follows:
Fy =
y
•f
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
b
y +(
2 r ) 2
360
Fb =
2
b
2 r
360
•f
b
2
2
y +(
2 r )
360
y: metric (0.001 mm)
b: degree (0.001°)
r: radius of cam groove bottom
f: command value of speed
The speed of rapid traverse and the upper limit of cutting feed, both specified in a parameter, are expressed in an angular velocity (°/min) for a rotational axis. The actual linear
speed on the rotational axis of the cylindrical interpolation is therefore allowed to increase in
the developed plane just in proportion to the radius of the groove bottom.
6-47
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
4.
Remarks
A.
Positioning accuracy (on the rotational axis)
Each angular dimension entered is internally converted into linear one on the circumference,
which is to be used in the calculation of the interpolation with the other linear axis. The actual
angular motion is then determined by the results of that calculation. As a result, depending on
the cylinder radius, positioning errors on the rotational axis may occur in the level of the least
significant digit, but they are not cumulative.
0.002 mm
Error: 0.0009
0.001 mm
re
s
0.001
Radius of
cylinder
gh
114.432 114.592
B.
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Fig. 6-24 Positioning error according to the angle and radius
Unit: mm
.A
ll
ri
85.944
ts
0.001°
57.296
er
ve
d
.
Error: 0.0005
Changing the radius of the groove bottom
N
o.
In the mode of cylindrical interpolation, as mentioned before, the radius of the cam groove
bottom cannot be otherwise modified than to zero. That is, the modification must be done after
canceling the mode temporarily.
K
ZA
al
Rotational axis of the cylindrical interpolation
ri
C.
Manual interruption
A
ZA
D.
K
IM
Se
Only one rotational axis can be used for the cylindrical interpolation. It is not possible to
designate multiple rotational axes in a command of G7.1.
Restart operation
)2
E.
01
3
YA
M
A
Refer to the example given later under 5-D “Operation examples with manual
interruption”.
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
For restarting in the middle of the cylindrical interpolation, follow the normal restart procedure to
ensure normal operation by retrieving the necessary modal information (on the radius of groove
bottom, etc.). Never use the [RESTART 2] menu function that skips the preceding blocks.
Resetting
C
F.
Resetting (by
on the operating panel) cancels the cylindrical interpolation mode.
6-48
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
G.
6
Relationship to other functions
The programmed contour is machined on the cylindrical surface, as well as on the top surface,
according to the particular configuration of the machine’s controlled axes and the currently
selected machining plane.
If the motion on a rotational axis is required for the execution of the functions enumerated below,
the machining plane’s vertical axis (A-axis, as converted from the angular motion) may be
directed inversely to that of the corresponding (orthogonal) Y-axis, and thus the contour obtained
will be reversed accordingly.
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Circular interpolation
Helical interpolation
Spiral interpolation
Involute interpolation
Cylindrical interpolation
Circle cutting
Polar coordinate interpolation
Engraving of text
gh
<Example>
Configuration of controlled axes (including C-axis)
K
A
ZA
(G68X0Y0Z0I0J1K0R90.)
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Configuration of controlled axes (including A-axis)
N
.A
ll
ri
Given below is an example of engraving the text “ENGRAVING” in the mode of cylindrical interpolation.
+C’: Tool’s motion with respect to the cylindrical
surface by a positive rotation on the C-axis.
)2
01
3
YA
+A’: Tool’s motion with respect to the cylindrical
surface by a positive rotation on the A-axis.
Selection of XC-plane (Horizontal: X, Vertical: C)
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
Selection of XA-plane (Horizontal: X, Vertical: A)
Text engraved in the (developed) XA-plane.
Text engraved in the (developed) XC-plane.
D747PB0083
As shown in the example on the left side, “ENGRAVING” is unexpectedly reversed due to a particular configuration of controlled axes.
As a countermeasure against the problem, give a command of 3-D coordinate conversion (with
G68, as shown in the right-side example) before the command of cylindrical interpolation (with
G07.1).
6-49
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Shown below is a programming technique for correctly engraving the text on a machine of the
configuration of controlled axes (including A-axis), as shown in the left-side example above.
Programming example:
G68 I0 J0 K1.R180. ................................................................. Coordinate conversion
G7.1 A0 ....................................................................................... Cylindrical interpolation
G17 X0 A0 ................................................................................... Selection of XA-plane
G140 X20.Y0.Z0.K30.P0D.02H10.R25.L3[ENGRAVING] .......... Engraving of text
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Machining contour, as obtained in the converted XA-plane
6-50
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Sample programs
Note:
Cam grooving program
Y
N09
N17
50.
N10
N08
N06
.
A.
The examples in this section are all given for a cylindrical interpolation in the Y-B plane
(with respect to a machining center as shown in Fig. 6-23).
Replace the axis names X, Y and B with Y, X and A, respectively, for a cylindrical
interpolation in the X-A plane (on a vertical machining center as shown in Fig. 6-22).
N16
N11
re
s
0
N18
N07
ts
N14
er
ve
d
5.
6
gh
N19
135°
180°
270°
315°
N
45°
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
0°
.A
ll
ri
N15
B
360°
Groove width
K
ZA
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Tool radius
Programmed contour
K
IM
[Offset amount] = [Groove width] – [Tool radius]
ZA
Fig. 6-25 Cam grooving program
N13 G1G42Y0B360.;
N02 Z0S800M3;
M
N15 G3B135.R60.;
N04 G7.1B63.662; ........ Cylindrical interpolation ON
N16 G1Y50.B180.;
N05 G17G1G41Y0B0D1;
N17 G2B270.R60.;
N06 G2B45.R30.;
)2
N18 G1Y0B315.;
N07 G3B135.R60.;
N19 G3B360.R30.;
N08 G1Y50.B180.;
N20 G1G40;
N21 G7.1B0; .......... Cylindrical interpolation OFF
ht
(c
01
3
YA
N14 G2B45.R30.;
N03 G1Z-5.F2000; ........ Infeed to the groove bottom
ig
A
N01 G54G0G90X0Y0B0; .. Positioning to the cylinder axis
yr
N09 G2B270.R60.;
C
op
N10 G1Y0B315.;
N11 G3B360.R30.;
N12 G1G40;
6-51
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Use of mirror image function
Y
Y
N103
3
Y
50.
45.
3
N103
3
0
N104
3
45.
3
60°
3
G54
3
B
3
90°
3
N104
300°
3
0°
M
135°
3
.
B
3
G55
3
er
ve
d
270°
3
re
s
–50.
225°
3
ts
B.
ri
gh
Fig. 6-26 Use of mirror image function
Subprogram
N01 G54G0G17G90X0Y0B0;
N100 G7.1 B47.746 ;
N02 Z0S800M3;
N101 G17 G0 Y45.B0 ;
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
Main program
N03 M98P2000;
N102 G1 Z-5.F1000 ;
N04 G55G0G17G90X0Y0B0;
N103 G2 B60.R25.;
N05 Z0S800M3;
N104 G3 B90.R12.5 ;
N105 G0 Z0 ;
N07 M98P2000;
N106 G0 B0 ;
o.
N06 G51.1B0; .................. Mirror image ON
0.
225.
K
0.
135.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
Z
B
0.
–50.
ZA
0.
A
0.
Y
M
X
G55
K
IM
G54
ZA
Se
Table 6-3 Workpiece origin data
A
ri
al
N
N08 G50.1B0; .................. Mirror image OFF
6-52
N107 G7.1 B0 ;
N108 M99 ;
B
3
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
C.
6
Use of circular interpolation commands
Y
(mm)
(47.5 – 10)2 + 502
r=
Radius of groove bottom = 63.662 mm
= 62.5 mm
N04
85.
r
N03
47.5
N05
r
10.
N06
50.
90°
100
135°
180°
200
225°
250
270°
300
360°
400 (mm)
ts
re
s
45°
50
er
ve
d
.
50.
gh
Fig. 6-27 Use of circular interpolation commands
ri
N01 G90 G1 Y47.5 F1000 ;
.A
ll
N02 G7.1 B63.662 ;
N
N03 G17 G1 Y47.5 B45.;
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N04 G2 B90.R62.5 ;
N05 G1 B180.;
N06 G3 B270.I50.J37.5 ;
With “manual absolute” ON
1.
o.
Operation examples with manual interruption
N
D.
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
The “manual absolute” function is suspended during cylindrical interpolation, and the first
motion block after the cancellation of cylindrical interpolation is executed for the very target
position as programmed by canceling the amount of manual interruption.
ZA
N1 - N6:
N2 - N4:
N3:
N3 - N4:
N5:
YA
M
A
Y
01
3
N3’
N4’
Manual interruption
ht
(c
)2
Programmed
contour
Programmed contour
In the mode of cylindrical interpolation
Manual interruption
“Manual absolute” function ignored (N3’ and N4’)
“Manual absolute” function retrieved (N5’)
N2
N3
op
C
N5’
N4
yr
ig
N1
N6
Cylindrical interpolation
ON
Cylindrical interpolation
OFF
N5
B
3
Fig. 6-28 With “manual absolute” ON
6-53
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
With “manual absolute” OFF
2.
The amount of manual interruption remains intact, irrespective of the selection and
cancellation of cylindrical interpolation.
N1 - N6:
N2 - N4:
N3:
N3 - N6:
Y
Programmed contour
In the mode of cylindrical interpolation
Manual interruption
“Manual absolute” function OFF (N3’ to N6’)
N3’
Programmed
contour
N4’
er
ve
d
.
Manual interruption
N6’
N5’
N3
N2
re
s
N1
N4
ts
B
3
N
.A
ll
Cylindrical interpolation
OFF
ri
Cylindrical interpolation
ON
N6
gh
N5
Related parameters
1.
Set the type of the rotational axis (A or B) as “rotational” (with short-cut approach) in order
that the initial angular movement should not occur on the roundabout route for a command
of tool radius compensation given in the vicinity of the 0° position.
N21 bit 0 = 0: Setting the type of the rotational axis as rotational
= 1: Short-cut approach valid
2.
Set the B- and A-axis as the primary parallel ones to the axis of abscissa and that of the
ordinate, respectively.
SU2 = 66: Setting the B-axis as parallel axis 1 for the axis of abscissa
SU5 = 65: Setting the A-axis as parallel axis 1 for the axis of the ordinate
Related alarms
K
ZA
A
YA
7.
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
6.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Fig. 6-29 With “manual absolute” OFF
01
3
Table 6-4 Related alarms
Description
Remedy
ILLEGAL
ADDRESS
The address of argument in the block of selecting the cylindrical interpolation does not refer to any rotational axis.
Use the correct address.
ILLEGAL
FORMAT
The necessary conditions for the selection of cylindrical
interpolation are not yet all satisfied.
Refer to Table 6-1.
808
MIS-SET G
CODE
An unavailable G-code is given in the mode of cylindrical
interpolation.
Refer to Table 6-2.
936
OPTION NOT
FOUND (7, 0, 0)
The optional function for cylindrical interpolation is not
provided.
Equip the machine with
the option as required.
ig
ht
806
Alarm message
(c
)2
Alarm
No.
C
op
yr
2110
6-54
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6
6-14 Helical Interpolation: G02, G03
1.
Function and purpose
Command G02 or G03 with a designation for the third axis allows synchronous circular interpolation on the plane specified by plane-selection command G17, G18 or G19 with the linear
interpolation on the third axis.
Programming format
G17 G02 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ii1 Jj1
Pp1
Ff1 ;
Feed rate
Number of pitches
Arc center coordinates
Linear axis ending point coordinate
Arc ending point coordinates
er
ve
d
(G03)
.
2.
Rr2
Pp2
Ff2 ;
ts
G17 G02 Xx2 Yy2 Zz2
re
s
or
gh
Feed rate
Number of pitches
Arc radius
Linear axis ending point
Arc ending point coordinates
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Detailed description
2nd
1st
N
p1-th
X
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
X
o.
z1
K
3.
N
.A
ll
ri
(G03)
e
s
YA
M
A
ZA
Y
01
3
)2
H734P0001
For helical interpolation, movement designation is additionally required for one to two linear
axes not forming the plane for circular interpolation.
yr
ig
1.
ht
(c
Y
Z
The velocity in the tangential direction must be designated as the feed rate F.
3.
The pitch is calculated as follows:
C
op
2.
z1
= (2 p + )/2
1
–1
= e – s = tan
where
4.
ye
–1 ys
– tan
(0 < 2)
xe
xs
(xs, ys): relative coordinates of starting point with respect to the arc center
(xe, ye): relative coordinates of ending point with respect to the arc center
Address P can be omitted if the number of pitches is 1.
6-55
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
5.
Plane selection
As with circular interpolation, the circular-interpolation plane for helical interpolation is
determined by the plane-selection code and axis addresses. The basic programming
procedure for helical interpolation is: selecting a circular-interpolation plane using a planeselection command (G17, G18 or G19), and then designating the two axis addresses for
circular interpolation and the address of one axis (perpendicular to the circular-interpolation
plane) for linear interpolation.
Sample programs
ri
4.
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
XY-plane circular, Z-axis linear
After setting G02 (or G03) and G17 (plane-selection command), set the axis addresses
X, Y and Z.
ZX-plane circular, Y-axis linear
After setting G02 (or G03) and G18 (plane-selection command), set the axis addresses
Z, X and Y.
YZ-plane circular, X-axis linear
After setting G02 (or G03) and G19 (plane-selection command), set the axis addresses
Y, Z and X.
.A
ll
Example 1:
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0;
G92 X0 Z0 Y0;
G17 G03 X50. Y50. Z-50. R50. F1000;
50.
–50.
Z
o.
Ending
point
Starting
point
N
K
50.
A
ZA
al
ri
K
IM
Se
Example 2:
X
H734P0002
Y
ZA
G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0;
G92 X0 Z0 Y0;
G17 G03 X50. Y50. Z-50. R50. P2 F1000;
YA
M
A
X
01
3
50.
)2
Ending
point
(c
–50.
Z
ht
Starting
point
op
yr
ig
50.
C
Y
H734P0003
Note :
In a combined use with the cylindrical interpolation, the machining contour of helical
interpolation on the cylindrical surface may be unexpectedly reversed due to a particular configuration of the machine’s controlled axes.
See “4. Remarks” in Section 6-13 for more information.
6-56
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6
6-15 Fixed Gradient Control for G0 (Option)
1.
Function and purpose
Fixed gradient control for G0 refers to a method of executing rapid traverse commands (under
G00) using linear acceleration and deceleration of a fixed gradient. The gradient in question
denotes an acceleration and corresponds to the quotient of the rapid traverse rate (parameter
M1) and the time constant concerned (parameter N1). As compared with the control using the
fixed time constant, positioning time can be reduced for a distance traveled which is shorter than
is required for acceleration up to the rapid traverse rate and immediately succeeding deceleration to zero.
.
Example for comparison with the control using the fixed time constant
er
ve
d
2.
re
s
Given below is an example to illustrate the difference in positioning time by rapid traverse over
distance L between the two control methods.
gh
ts
Rapid traverse rate (M1) = 30000 mm/min, Time constant for rapid traverse (N1) = Ts = 0.3 s
Control using the fixed gradient
ri
Control using the fixed time constant
30000 mm/min
34
08
C
39
O
Speed
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
L = 100
L = 20
L = 20
L = 10
Ts = 0.3
0.32
0.34
L = 10
Positioning time
0.155
0.219
ZA
K
IM
Remarks
Ts = 0.3
A
ri
al
N
o.
Positioning time
Se
3.
L = 100
K
Speed
.A
ll
30000 mm/min
A
ZA
The optional function in question works on the correspondingly executed machines when rapid
traverse of interpolation type by G0 and the fixed gradient control for G0 are made valid by the
corresponding parameter settings (F91 bit 6 = 0, and K96 bit 7 = 1).
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
As for the operation during five-axis machining (in the mode of tool tip point
control, inclined-plane machining, and workpiece setup error correction), see
the description given under the restrictions for the relevant control modes.
6-57
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6-16 Rapid Traverse Overlap
1.
Function and purpose
This function allows the in-position width (positioning tolerance) to be programmed for an overlapping circular motion of transition between two linear motion blocks of G0 (rapid traverse) and
G1 (cutting feed) or G0.
2.
Programming format
G00 / G01 Xx Yy Zz ,Ii
er
ve
d
.
i: In-position width
re
s
Commanded position
Tool path
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
Programmed path
In-position width
Detailed description
N
o.
3.
ZA
ri
K
Use bit 1 of parameter F169, as shown below, to specify whether the function of rapid
traverse overlap is to be enabled or disabled.
al
1.
A
K
IM
Se
F169 bit 1 = 0: Function of specifying the in-position width is disabled,
= 1: Function of specifying the in-position width is enabled.
Argument ,I is only effective in a block in which it is programmed.
3.
The setting range of argument ,I is from 0 to 20.0000 mm (or 2.00000 in).
Entering a lower value than the lower limit (0) with ,I has the same result as entering zero (0),
and entering a higher value than the upper limit just as entering that limit.
The value entered is always processed according to the current mode (G20 or G21) for
length data input (in inches or mm).
4.
Argument ,I can be omitted if the default value is desired.
Two different default values are provided in parameters as shown below according as the
two successive blocks are both in the mode of G0 or one under G1 and the other under G0.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
2.
5.
G0 G0: Parameter S49
G0 G1: Parameter S50
Enter zero (0) with ,I to temporarily cancel the function of rapid traverse overlap.
6-58
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6
<Example of programming for changing the in-position width>
G00X_Y_,I1.
G00X_Y_
G01X_Y_
G00X_Y_,I0.
G00X_Y_
G01X_Y_
M30
Use of 1.0 as in-position width
................
Use of S49 as in-position width
................
Use of S50 as in-position width
................
Temporary cancellation of the function of rapid traverse overlap
................
Use of S49 as in-position width
................
Use of S50 as in-position width
1.
.
Remarks
er
ve
d
4.
................
The function of rapid traverse overlap is implicitly cancelled in the following cases:
re
s
Change between geometry compensation (G61.1) and cutting mode (G64),
gh
ts
Change to high-speed machining mode (G5P2) or SSS (Super Smooth Surface) control,
.A
ll
ri
In the motion for the selection and cancellation of tool tip point control (by G43.4/G43.5
and G49).
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
In the motion for the selection and cancellation of cutting point command (by
G43.8/G43.9 and G49).
In the mode of single-block operation.
2.
N
o.
Related parameters
F169 bit 1
Function of rapid traverse overlap OFF/ON
S50
In-position width for G1
ZA
K
IM
In-position width for G0
A
ri
Se
S49
K
Description
al
Parameter
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
5.
The function of rapid traverse overlap is ignored during tool path check.
6-59
Setting range
Setting unit
0/1
—
0 to 32767
0.001 mm (Linear axis)
0.001° (Rotational axis)
0 to 32767
0.001 mm (Linear axis)
0.001° (Rotational axis)
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6-17 Involute Interpolation (Option)
1.
Function and purpose
Involute interpolation enables the tool to be fed along an involute curve smoothly without having
to approximate the curve with micro line segments, in which case acceleration and deceleration
would be repeated in too formal a response to minute steps or to unevenness of line length,
causing deterioration in machining accuracy.
Y
Starting
point
F
er
ve
d
.
I
re
s
J
ri
gh
ts
Base circle
2.
N
X
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
(XX,YY)
Ending
point
.A
ll
R
Programming format
D749PB0017
N
o.
G02.2 (G03.2) Xx Yy (Zz) Ii Jj (Kk) Rr Ff
K
al
Xx, Yy, Zz : Coordinates of the ending point of the involute curve
Rr
: Radius of the base circle (evolute circle)
Ff
: Rate of feed
A
K
IM
Se
ZA
: Position of the center of the base circle, incremental from the starting point
ri
Ii, Jj, Kk
A
ZA
Note 1: Give an involute interpolation command according to the currently selected plane (G17,
G18, or G19).
YA
M
Note 2: See the description of circular interpolation for information on the plane selection and
the rotational direction (CW [G02.2] or CCW [G03.2]).
)2
01
3
Note 3: Arguments I, J and K are always to be specified in incremental data, irrespective of the
currently active mode (absolute or incremental data input).
ht
(c
Note 4: Specify the arguments I, J and K with a correct sign according to the relative position of
the base circle center with respect to the starting point.
C
op
yr
ig
Note 5: The alarm 1906 G2.2/G3.2 FORMAT ERROR will be caused if any of the required
arguments I, J, K, and R is not specified.
Note 6: An involute interpolation command without arguments X, Y and Z will immediately be
completed (as is the case with a circular interpolation command of the same type), and
the modal condition concerned will be replaced with G1 (Positioning).
Note 7: The alarm 1906 G2.2/G3.2 FORMAT ERROR will be caused if the required pair of
arguments I, J and K are both specified with zero (0).
Note 8: The alarm 1906 G2.2/G3.2 FORMAT ERROR will be caused if the argument R is
specified with zero (0).
Note 9: The alarm 1906 G2.2/G3.2 FORMAT ERROR will be caused if an argument I, J or K is
specified which does not belong to the currently selected plane.
6-60
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
3.
6
Commands available in the mode of involute interpolation
Giving any other command than those enumerated below in the mode of involute interpolation
will lead to the alarm 1904 ILLEGAL CMD DURING G2.2/G3.2 or another alarm related to the
function concerned.
Function
Code
Function
Code
G00
Fixed cycle (Back spot facing)
G77
Linear interpolation
G01
Fixed cycle (Boring 3)
G78
Circular interpolation
G02/G03
Fixed cycle (Boring 4)
G79
Spiral interpolation
G02.1/G03.1
Fixed cycle OFF
G80
Dwell
G04
Fixed cycle (Spot drilling)
G81
High-speed machining mode OFF
G05P0
Chopping cycle mode ON
G81.1
Spline/NURBS interpolation
G06.1/G06.2
Fixed cycle (Drilling)
G82
Exact stop
G09
Fixed cycle (Pecking)
G82.2
Programmed data setting ON/OFF
G10/G11
Fixed cycle (Deep-hole drilling)
G83
Radius data input for X-axis ON/OFF
G10.9X0/G10.9X1
Fixed cycle (Tapping)
Polar coordinate interpolation OFF
G13.1
Fixed cycle (Synchronous tapping)
Polar coordinate input OFF
G15
Fixed cycle (Synchronous reverse tapping)
Plane selection
G17/G18/G19
Absolute data input
Inch/Metric data input
G20/G21
Incremental data input
Pre-move stroke check ON/OFF
G22/G23
Spindle speed range setting
G92
Reference point return check
G27
Inverse time feed
G93
Reference point return
G28
Return from reference point
G29
Return to 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point
G30
Return to floating reference point
G30.1
Thread cutting/Variable lead thread cutting
G33/G34
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Positioning
ts
G84
G84.3
G90
G91
G94
Constant surface speed control OFF
G97
Initial point/R-point level return
G98/G99
Single program multi-process control
G109
Cross machining control axis setting
G110/G110.1
Hole machining pattern cycle
G34.1, G35, G36,
G37.1
Cross machining control OFF
G111
Tool radius compensation OFF
G40
M, S, T, B output to opposite system
G112
Hob milling mode ON/OFF
G114.3/G113
Se
Tool position offset OFF
G49
Superposition control ON/OFF
G126/G127
Scaling OFF
G50
Tornado cycle
G130
Mirror image by G-code OFF
G50.1
Measurement/Compensation macro
G136/G137
G51.2/G50.2
Finishing cycle
G270
G54-G59/G54.1
Longitudinal roughing cycle
G271
G54.4
Transverse roughing cycle
G272
G61
Contour-parallel roughing cycle
G273
G61.1
Longitudinal cut-off cycle
G274
Modal spline interpolation
G61.2
Transverse cut-off cycle
G275
Cutting mode
G64
Compound thread-cutting cycle
G276
Macro call/Modal macro call A/B
G65, G66/G66.1
Face driling cycle
G283
Modal macro call OFF
yr
G67
Face tapping cycle
G284
3-D coordinate conversion OFF
G69
Face synchronous tapping cycle
G274.2
Fixed cycle (Chamfering cutter CW/CCW)
G71.1/G72.1
Face boring cycle
G285
Fixed cycle (High-speed deep-hole drilling)
G73
Outside driling cycle
G287
Fixed cycle (Reverse tapping)
G74
Outside tapping cycle
G288
Fixed cycle (Boring 1)
G75
Outside synchronous tapping cycle
G288.2
Fixed cycle (Boring 2)
G76
Outside boring cycle
G289
Polygonal machining mode ON/OFF
Exact stop mode
C
ig
ht
(c
)2
Geometry compensation
01
3
Workpiece setup error correction
YA
M
Workpiece coordinate system/Additional
workp. coord. system selection
A
ZA
K
IM
G43/G44
A
Tool length offset +/–
op
ZA
K
al
N
o.
Feed per minute (asynchronous)
ri
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
G84.2
6-61
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
4.
Modes in which involute interpolation is selectable
Giving a G02.2 or G02.3 command in a mode other than those enumerated below will lead to the
alarm 1905 THIS MODE CANNOT CMD G2.2/G3.2 or another alarm related to the function
concerned.
Function
Code
Function
Code
G00
Fixed cycle (Chamfering cutter CW/CCW)
G71.1/G72.1
Linear interpolation
G01
Fixed cycle (High-speed deep-hole drilling)
G73
Circular interpolation
G02/G03
Fixed cycle (Reverse tapping)
G74
Spiral interpolation
G02.1/G03.1
Fixed cycle (Boring 1)
G75
Dwell
G04
Fixed cycle (Boring 2)
G76
High-speed machining mode OFF
G05P0
Fixed cycle (Back spot facing)
G77
Spline/NURBS interpolation
G06.1/G06.2
Fixed cycle (Boring 3)
G78
Exact stop
G09
Fixed cycle (Boring 4)
G79
Programmed data setting ON/OFF
G10/G11
Fixed cycle OFF
G80
Radius data input for X-axis ON/OFF
G10.9X0/G10.9X1
Fixed cycle (Spot drilling)
Polar coordinate interpolation ON/OFF
G12.1/G13.1
Chopping cycle mode ON
Polar coordinate input OFF
G15
Fixed cycle (Drilling)
Plane selection
G17/G18/G19
Fixed cycle (Pecking)
Milling mode selection
G18.1
Fixed cycle (Deep-hole drilling)
G83
Turning plane selection (VARIAXIS)
G18.2-G18.4
Fixed cycle (Tapping)
G84
Inch/Metric data input
G20/G21
Fixed cycle (Synchronous tapping)
G84.2
Pre-move stroke check ON/OFF
G22/G23
Fixed cycle (Synchronous reverse tapping)
G84.3
Reference point return check
G27
Absolute data input
G90
Reference point return
G28
Incremental data input
G91
Return from reference point
G29
Spindle speed range setting
G92
Return to 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point
G30
Inverse time feed
G93
Return to floating reference point
G30.1
Feed per minute (asynchronous)
G94
Skip/Multi-step skip
G31/G31.1
Constant surface speed control OFF
G97
Thread cutting/Variable lead thread cutting
G33/G34
er
ve
d
re
s
ts
G81
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
G81.1
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
N
ZA
K
al
ri
Se
.
Positioning
Initial point/R-point level return
G82
G82.2
G98/G99
Single program multi-process control
Vector for tool radius compensation
G38
Cross machining control axis setting
G110/G110.1
Corner arc for tool radius compensation
G39
Cross machining control OFF
G111
G40
M, S, T, B output to opposite system
G112
G41/G42
Hob milling mode ON/OFF
G114.3/G113
G43/G44
Superposition control ON/OFF
G126/G127
Tool length offset in tool-axis direction
G43.1
Tornado cycle
G130
Tool position offset
G45-G48
Measurement/Compensation macro
G136/G137
G49
Finishing cycle
G270
G50
Longitudinal roughing cycle
G271
Mirror image by G-code OFF
G50.1
Transverse roughing cycle
G272
Polygonal machining mode ON/OFF
G51.2/G50.2
Contour-parallel roughing cycle
G273
G52
Longitudinal cut-off cycle
G274
Workpiece coordinate system/Additional
workp. coord. system selection
G54-G59/G54.1
Face synchronous tapping cycle
Dynamic offsetting II
G54.2
Transverse cut-off cycle
G275
Workpiece setup error correction
G54.4
Compound thread-cutting cycle
G276
Exact stop mode
G61
Face driling cycle
G283
Geometry compensation
G61.1
Face tapping cycle
G284
Modal spline interpolation
G61.2
Face boring cycle
G285
Cutting mode
G64
Outside driling cycle
G287
Macro call/Modal macro call A/B
G65, G66/G66.1
Outside tapping cycle
G288
Modal macro call OFF
G67
Outside synchronous tapping cycle
G288.2
3-D coordinate conversion OFF
G69
Outside boring cycle
G289
ZA
YA
M
Tool radius compensation to the left/right
A
Tool radius compensation OFF
K
IM
Hole machining pattern cycle
)2
Tool position offset OFF
01
3
Tool length offset +/–
yr
ig
ht
(c
Scaling OFF
C
op
Local coordinate system setting
A
G34.1, G35, G36,
G37.1
6-62
G109
G274.2
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
5.
6
Starting and ending points of involute interpolation
The curve for involute interpolation is drawn from the starting point, i.e. the current position
where the command is given.
The involute of a circle can be expressed by the following parametric equation:
Y
er
ve
d
.
(Xθ, Yθ)
re
s
0
ts
Y0
X
D749PB0018
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
X0
N
Base circle
.A
ll
ri
gh
R
X = R {cos ( + 0) + ·sin ( + 0)} + X0
Y = R {sin ( + 0) – ·cos ( + 0)} + Y0
K
al
N
o.
There are two involute curves to be drawn for a given starting point and based on a given evolute
circle (base circle). According as the explicitly specified ending point is closer to, or more distant
from, the base circle than the starting point,
2.
the involute curve is extended away from the base circle.
A
Se
ZA
the involute curve is retracted towards the base circle, or
ri
1.
K
IM
The alarm 818 MISSING CENTER (NO DATA) will be raised in the folowing cases:
the starting and ending points are equidistant from the center of the base circle, or
A
ZA
the starting or ending point lies within the base circle.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
The alarm 809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT will be raised if the total curve length (from a point on
the circumference of the base circle up to the starting or ending point) should exceed hundred
times the circumference of the base circle (100 × 2R).
6-63
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6.
Tool radius compensation for involute interpolation
As with the circular interpolation, tool radius compensation can be applied to involute interpolation in the following manner.
First, the involute curve is approximated with circular arcs at the starting and ending points. Then
the tool radius compensation is applied to the arcs, and the points of intersection are obtained on
both sides between the circular offset path and the offset path of the preceding and succeeding
motion blocks. Finally, recalculation is conducted for the two pints of intersection to be interpolated with a new involute curve as tool center path.
Note 1: The required command of tool radius compensation must be given before a command
of involute interpolation (with G02.2 or G03.2).
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Note 2: The alarm 818 MISSING CENTER (NO DATA) will be raised if the tool radius compensation causes the starting or ending point of the offset curve to enter the base
circle.
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
Note 3: During involute interpolation, the axis motion can be controlled in order that the rate of
feed of tool center may be as specified with an F-code, indeed, but the motion speed at
the cutting point cannot be kept constant due to a change in curvature.
A special overriding function is provided for involute interpolation to keep a constant
motion speed at the cutting point.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
See the description below under 7 for more information on the overriding
function.
K
ZA
A
Overriding for involute interpolation
Se
7.
ri
al
N
o.
Note 4: During involute interpolation, the function of automatically preventing the interference
caused by tool radius compensation cannot be executed at all (even if it is enabled by
the corresponding setting in bit 5 of parameter F92) and the alarm 837 TOOL OFFSET
INTERFERENCE ERROR will always be raised if an interference is foreseen.
ZA
K
IM
Set parameter K249 (Lower limit of overriding for involute interpolation) to a significant value,
and the rate of feed of tool center can automatically be overridden according to the curvature
radius so that the motion speed at the cutting point may be kept as specified with an F-code.
YA
M
A
<Calculation of overriding value>
For tool radius compensation by offsetting the tool inwards (towards the base circle)
Overriding value = R / (R + r)
01
3
For tool radius compensation by offsetting the tool outwards (away from the base circle)
(c
)2
Overriding value = R / (R – r)
ht
R : Radius of curvature of the tool center path
ig
r : Amount of tool radius compensation
C
op
yr
The overriding function for involute interpolation is disabled when K249 is set to zero (0).
In the case of tool radius compensation by offsetting inwards, the internal calculation may cause
a minute overriding value close to zero (0) to be applied near the base circle.
Set K249 to an appropriate value to be used as the lowest permissible value of overriding the
rate of feed of tool center during involute interpolation.
In the case of tool radius compensation by offsetting outwards, the actual rate of feed of tool
center is higher than the speed specified with an F-code.
6-64
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
8.
6
Limitation on the acceleration for involute interpolation
An enhancement of acceleration is required near the base circle (where the curvature is considerably small) in order that the rate of feed of tool center along the tangent to the involute curve
should be kept constant.
Set parameter K247 (Upper limit of acceleration for involute interpolation) to a significant value,
and the rate of feed along the tangent can automatically be modified in adaptation to the curvature radius so that the acceleration may not exceed the maximum permissible value.
Limitation on the acceleration for involute interpolation is disabled when K247 is set to zero (0).
er
ve
d
.
The smaller the curvature radius, the lower the minimum permissible rate of feed along the
tangent. Therefore, the smaller the base circle, the lower the minimum permissible rate of feed in
the vicinity of the base circle.
ri
Erroneous setting of the ending point for involute interpolation
.A
ll
9.
gh
ts
re
s
Set parameter K248 (Lower limit of the rate of feed for involute interpolation) to a significant
value below which the rate of feed should not fall during involute interpolation.
(The K248 setting is only valid when the limitation on the acceleration for involute interpolation is
enabled, i.e. when K247 > 0.)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
The specified ending point may not precisely lie on an involute curve that passes through the
starting point. The alarm 817 INCORRECT ARC DATA will be raised if the deviation between
the respective involute curves passing through the starting point and ending point is greater than
its tolerance (parameter K246).
10. Restrictions and remarks
The involute interpolation cannot be represented correctly for tool path check.
o.
1.
K
ZA
The involute interpolation cannot be represented correctly by the QUICK EIA function.
K
IM
2.
A
Se
ri
al
N
The execution of an involute interpolation command cannot precisely be represented on the
TOOL PATH CHECK display: only in a path of semi-circle (in 3D display mode), or in a path
of circular arc and linear segment (in 2D display mode), up to the specified ending point.
ZA
An involute interpolation command can only be represented by the QUICK EIA function in a
linear path between the starting and ending points.
The involute interpolation cannot correctly undergo a tool path check for estimating the
machining time.
The estimation of machining time on the TOOL PATH CHECK display is performed for an
involute interpolation command using the programmed rate of feed without fine speed
control being taken into account, and the estimated machining time may differ more or less
from the actual one.
4.
As for a ‘helical’ involute interpolation, the speed of simultaneous axial movement on the
third orthogonal axis (Z) is obtained according to the specified rate of feed along the tangent
to the involute curve on the selected plane (XY). The resulting speed of motion at the cutting
point, therefore, is not the same as programmed and the machining accuracy may not be so
high as can be expected.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
3.
5.
The machining contour of involute interpolation on the cylindrical surface may be unexpectedly reversed due to a particular configuration of the machine’s controlled axes.
See “4. Remarks” in Section 6-13 for more information.
6-65
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6-18 Circle Cutting: G12, G13
1.
Function and purpose
A single block command of G12 or G13 causes a cycle of cutting a full circle to be executed
around the current position with a lead-in and lead-out semicircle.
2.
Programming format
G12 (or G13) Ii Dd Ff
G12: Clockwise (CW)
f:
Rate of feed
re
s
er
ve
d
Circle radius
No. of the compensation amount registered on the TOOL OFFSET display
ts
Detailed description
gh
3.
i:
d:
.
G13: Counterclockwise (CCW)
.A
ll
ri
The figure below illustrates the motion of the tool for circle cutting.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Solid line graphs the circumference of the circle with the radius specified with argument I, and
broken line does the tool path (path of the tool axis) as offset from the programmed contour by
the compensation amount specified with argument D.
Y
G13
4
ZA
2
K
ZA
A
X
1
3
Compens.
amount
M
A
Compens.
amount
4
Radius
X
K
IM
Se
ri
1
Radius
al
N
3
Programmed contour
Tool path
2
o.
G12
Y
YA
In the mode of single block operation, the block stop occurs at the end of each division as
follows:
)2
01
3
1.
2. division: 2 3 (Full circle)
3. division: 4 (Semicircle)
(c
1. division: 1 (Semicircle)
ht
Note that the execution of G12 and G13 command is completed, respectively, with the
modal conditions of circular interpolation G2 and G3 being established automatically.
yr
ig
2.
D747PB0066
C
op
3.
The alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT is raised if argument I or D is missing. Argument F can
be omitted (if no change in the rate of feed is required).
4.
The alarm 809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT is raised if the radius of the circle to be cut
(argument I) should be smaller than the compensation amount the number of which is
specified as argument D.
5.
Note that the circular tool path is offset to the outside of the programmed circle if the compensation amount specified with argument D should be a negative value.
6.
Note that the path that is offset by the amount specified with argument D is further offset
accordingly if the command of circle cutting (G12 or G13) should be given under the
condition of tool radius compensation.
6-66
Serial No. 340839
INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Restrictions and remarks
1.
The alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT is raised if a command of G12 or G13 is given in the
mode of G5P2 (high-speed machining).
2.
The alarm 808 MIS-SET G CODE is raised if a command of G12 or G13 is given in the
mode of G07.1 (cylindrical interpolation).
3.
The alarm 817 INCORRECT ARC DATA is raised if a command of G12 or G13 is given in
the mode of G10.9X1 (diameter data input for X-axis).
4.
Circle cutting is always executed in the XY-plane (G17), irrespective of the currently
selected plane.
5.
Circle cutting cannot be taken into account by the function of QUICK EIA.
6.
The machining contour of circle cutting on the cylindrical surface may be unexpectedly
reversed due to a particular configuration of the machine’s controlled axes.
re
s
er
ve
d
.
4.
6
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
See “4. Remarks” in Section 6-13 for more information.
6-67
ht
ig
yr
op
C
01
3
)2
(c
K
ZA
al
ri
Se
A
K
IM
ZA
A
M
YA
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
N
ts
gh
ri
.
er
ve
d
re
s
Serial No. 340839
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
6-68 E
Serial No. 340839
FEED FUNCTIONS
7
FEED FUNCTIONS
7-1
Rapid Traverse Rates
7
A separate rapid traverse rate can be set for each axis. The maximum rate of rapid traverse,
however, is limited according to the particular machine specifications.
Refer to the relevant manual of the machine for rapid traverse rates.
ri
Cutting Feed Rates
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
A cutting feed rate must be designated using address F and an twelve-digit number (F12-digit
direct designation).
The F12 digits must consist of eight integral digits and four decimal digits, with the decimal point.
Cutting feed rates become valid for commands G01, G02, G03, G33 and G34.
N
o.
Example : Asynchronous feed
G01 X100. Y100. F200*
G01 X100. Y100. F123.4
G01 X100. Y100. F56.789
Feed rate
200.0 mm/min
123.4 mm/min
56.789 mm/min
K
ZA
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
A
The alarm 713 SEQUENCE DATA NOT FOUND will result if a feed rate command is
not set for the first cutting command (G01, G02, G03, G33 or G34) that is read firstly
after power-on.
Se
Note :
ri
al
* It means the same if F200. or F200.000 is set in stead of F200.
C
7-2
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Two types of tool paths are available for positioning: an interpolation type, which uses a line to
perform interpolation from the starting point through the ending point, and a non-interpolation
type, which moves the tool at the maximum speed of each axis.
Use a parameter to select the interpolation type or the non-interpolation type. The positioning
time is the same for both types.
7-1
Serial No. 340839
7 FEED FUNCTIONS
Asynchronous/Synchronous Feed: G94/G95
1.
Function and purpose
Command G95 allows a feed rate per revolution to be set using an F-code.
Command G94 retrieves the mode of asynchronous feed (per minuite).
2.
Programming format
G94: Feed per minute (/min) [Asynchronous feed]
G95: Feed per revolution (/rev) [Synchronous feed]
Detailed description
1.
Feed rates that can be set using F-codes are listed in the table below.
re
s
3.
er
ve
d
.
Since command G95 is modal, it will remain valid until command G94 is issued.
Decimal point
Min. value
Max. value
Speed by min. value
G94
(Feed per minute)
Omitted
F1
F200000
1 [mm/min]
Given
F0.001
F200000.
G95
(Feed per revolution)
Omitted
F1
G94
(Feed per minute)
.A
ll
Given
F0.0001
F200000.
0.0001 [mm/rev]
F1
F20000
0.01 [in/min]
Given
F0.0001
F20000.
0.0001 [in/min]
Omitted
F1
F20000
0.0001 [in/rev]
F0.00001
F20000.
0.00001 [in/rev]
N
al
Given
K
ZA
K
IM
A
ri
Specifying an F-code with a value larger and smaller than the maximum and
minimum permissible ones causes the alarm 809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT and
816 FEEDRATE ZERO, respectively.
Se
Note :
0.01 [mm/rev]
Omitted
o.
inches
G95
(Feed per revolution)
0.001 [mm/min]
F200000
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
mm
ri
Mode of feed
N
Input in
gh
ts
The table below also lists synchronous feed rates, which are to be set in millimeters (or
inches) per spindle revolution using F-codes.
The effective feed rate per revolution, that is, the actual moving speed of the machine, can
be calculated as follows:
ZA
2.
A
FC = F × N × OVR (Expression 1)
)2
01
3
YA
M
where FC: Effective feed rate (mm/min or in/min)
F:
Designated feed rate (mm/rev or in/rev)
–1
N:
Spindle speed (min )
OVR: Overriding value for cutting feed
yr
Remarks
op
4.
ig
ht
(c
If multiple axes are selected at the same time, effective feed rate FC given by expression 1
above will become valid for the corresponding vectorial direction.
1.
On the POSITION display, FEED denotes an effective feed rate that is expressed in a feed
rate per minute (mm/min or in/min), based on the selected feed rate, the spindle speed, and
the cutting feed override.
2.
If the effective feed rate should become larger than the cutting feed limit speed, that limit
speed will govern.
3.
In the dry run mode, feed will become asynchronous and the machine will operate at an
externally preset feed rate (mm/min or in/min).
4.
According to the setting of bit 1 of parameter F93, synchronous or asynchronous feed mode
(G95 or G94) is automatically made valid upon power-on or by execution of M02 or M30.
C
7-3
7-2
Serial No. 340839
FEED FUNCTIONS
Selecting a Feed Rate and Effects on Each Control Axis
As mentioned earlier, the machine has various control axes. These control axes can be broadly
divided into linear axes, which control linear motions, and rotational axes, which control rotational
motions. Feed rates for control axes have different effects on the tool speed, which is of great
importance for machining quality, according to the particular type of axis controlled.
The amount of displacement must be designated for each axis, whereas the feed rate is to be
designated as a single value for the intended tool movement. Before letting the machine control
two or more axes at the same time, therefore, you must understand how the feed rate
designated will act on each axis. In terms of this, selection of a feed rate is described below.
Controlling linear axes
er
ve
d
.
1.
re
s
The feed rate that has been selected using an F-code acts as a linear velocity in the moving
direction of the tool, irrespective of whether only one axis is to be controlled or multiple axes
simultaneously.
If linear axes (X- and Y-axes) are to be controlled using a feed rate of f:
gh
ts
Example:
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
P2 (Tool ending point)
y
N
.A
ll
ri
Y
“f” denotes the
velocity in this
direction.
o.
X
N
x
K
MEP038
ZA
ri
al
P1
(Tool starting point)
K
IM
A
Se
When only linear axes are to be controlled, setting of a cutting feed rate itself is only required.
The feed rate for each axis refers to that component of the specified feed rate which corresponds
with the ratio of movement stroke on the respective axis to the actual movement distance.
ZA
In the example shown above:
YA
M
A
X-axis feed rate = f ×
z
x2 + y2
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Y-axis feed rate = f ×
x
x2 + y2
C
7-4
7
7-3
Serial No. 340839
7 FEED FUNCTIONS
2.
Controlling a rotational axis
When a rotational axis is to be controlled, the selected feed rate acts as the rotating speed of the
rotational axis, that is, as an angular velocity.
Thus, the cutting speed in the moving direction of the tool, that is, a linear velocity varies
according to the distance from the rotational center to the tool. This distance must be considered
when setting a feed rate in the program.
Example 1:
If a rotational axis (C-axis) is to be controlled using a feed rate of f (deg/min):
“f” denotes the angular velocity.
re
s
The linear velocity is obtainable from rf
180
ts
c
Center of
rotation
er
ve
d
.
P2 (Tool ending point)
gh
P1 (Tool starting point)
MEP034
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
r
o.
In this case, the cutting speed in the moving direction of the tool (linear velocity) “fc” is calculated
by:
r
fc = f × 180
K
K
IM
If linear axes (X- and Y-axes) are to be controlled at a feed rate of f using the
circular interpolation function:
YA
M
A
Example 2:
A
If the tool is to be moved by controlling linear axes along the circumference using the
circular interpolation function, the feed rate programmed is the velocity acting in the
moving direction of the tool, that is, in the tangential direction.
ZA
Note:
ZA
Se
ri
al
N
Hence, the feed rate to be programmed for the required value fc is:
180
f = fc ×
r
y
P2
“f” denotes this linear speed.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Y
P1
x
X
i
MEP040
In this case, the X- and Y-axis feed rates will change with the movement of the tool. The resultant
velocity, however, will be kept at the constant value, f.
7-4
Serial No. 340839
FEED FUNCTIONS
3.
7
Controlling a linear axis and a rotational axis at the same time
er
ve
d
.
The NC unit controls linear axes and rotational axes in exactly the same manner.
For control of rotational axes, data given as a coordinate word (with A, B or C) is handled as an
angle, and data given as a feed rate (F) is handled as a linear velocity. In other words, an angle
of one degree for a rotational axis is handled as equivalent to a moving distance of 1 mm for a
linear axis. Thus, for simultaneous control of a linear axis and a rotational axis, the magnitudes of
the individual axis components of the data that has been given by F are the same as those
existing during linear axis control described previously in Subparagraph 1. above. In this case,
however, the velocity components during linear axis control remain constant in both magnitude
and direction, whereas those of rotational axis control change in direction according to the
movement of the tool. Therefore, the resulting feed rate in the moving direction of the tool
changes as the tool moves.
If a linear axis (X-axis) and a rotational axis (C-axis) are to be controlled at the same
time at a feed rate of f:
ts
re
s
Example:
- “fx” is constant in both size
and direction.
- “fc” is constant in size, but
varies in direction.
- “ft” varies in both size and
direction.
fx
N
P2
fc
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
r
.A
ll
ri
gh
ft
fc
P1
ft
fx
c
x
MEP041
ZA
Se
ri
al
Center of rotation
K
N
o.
[1]
A
x
x2 + c2
=f×
M
fx = f ×
ZA
K
IM
A
X-axis incremental command data is expressed here as x, and that of C-axis as c.
The X-axis feed rate (linear velocity), fx, and the C-axis feed rate (angular velocity), , can be
calculated as follows:
c
x2 + c2
[2]
YA
The linear velocity “fc” that relates to C-axis control is expressed as:
[3]
)2
01
3
r
fc = 180
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
If the velocity in the moving direction of the tool at starting point P1 is taken as “ft”, and its X- and
Y-axis components as “ftx” and “fty” respectively, then one can express “ftx” and “fty” as follows:
ftx = –r sin (180 ) × 180 + fx
[4]
fty = –r cos (180 ) × 180
[5]
where r denotes the distance (in millimeters) from the rotational center to the tool, and q denotes
the angle (in degrees) of starting point P1 to the X-axis at the rotational center.
7-5
Serial No. 340839
7 FEED FUNCTIONS
From expressions [1] through [5] above, the resultant velocity “ft” is:
ft =
2
2
ftx + fty
) + ( r c )2
2
x – x c r sin (
=f×
180
2
90
180
[6]
2
x +c
The feed rate f that is to be set in the program must be therefore:
2
f = ft ×
2
x +c
[7]
) + ( r c )2
x – x c r sin (
2
180
.
90
er
ve
d
180
.A
ll
ri
Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
The rapid traverse and manual feed acceleration/deceleration pattern is linear acceleration and
linear deceleration. Time constant T R can be set independently for each axis using parameters in
1 ms steps within a range from 1 to 500 ms. The cutting feed (not manual feed) acceleration or
deceleration pattern is exponential acceleration/deceleration. Time constant T C can be set independently for each axis using parameters in 1 ms steps within a range from 1 to 500 ms.
(Normally, the same time constant is set for each axis.)
f
ZA
A
Continuous
command
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
Continuous
command
K
al
f
TR
Td
t
t
Tc
YA
M
A
TR
01
3
Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration pattern
(TR = Rapid traverse time constant)
(Td = Deceleration check time)
Tc
Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration pattern
(Tc = Cutting feed time constant)
(c
)2
TEP037
yr
ig
ht
During rapid traverse and manual feed, the following block is executed after the command pulse
of the current block has become “0” and the tracking error of the acceleration/deceleration circuit
has become “0”. During cutting feed, the following block is executed as soon as the command
pulse of the current block becomes “0” and also the following block can be executed when an
external signal (error detection) can detect that the tracking error of the acceleration/deceleration
circuit has reached “0”. When the in-position check has been made valid (selected by machine
parameter) during the deceleration check, it is first confirmed that the tracking error of the
acceleration/deceleration circuit has reached “0”, then it is checked that the position deviation is
less than the parameter setting, and finally the following block is executed.
op
C
7-5
gh
ts
re
s
In expression [6], “ft” is the velocity at starting point P1 and thus the value of ft changes with that
of which changes according to the rotational angle of the C-axis. To keep cutting speed “ft” as
constant as possible, the rotational angle of the C-axis in one block must be minimized to ensure
a minimum rate of change of .
7-6
Serial No. 340839
FEED FUNCTIONS
7-6
7
Limitation of Speed
This function exercises control over the actual rate of cutting feed in which override has been
applied to the programmed rate so that the speed limit preset independently for each axis is not
exceeded.
Note :
Exact-Stop Check: G09
1.
Function and purpose
G09
ri
Programming format
G01 (G02, G03) ;
.A
ll
2.
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Only after the in-position status has been checked following machine deceleration and stop or
after deceleration checking time has been passed, may you want to start the next block
command in order to reduce possible machine shocks due to abrupt changes in tool feed rate
and to minimize any rounding of workpieces during corner cutting. An exact-stop check function
is provided for these purposes.
3.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Exact-stop check command G09 is valid only for the cutting command code (G01, G02, or G03)
that has been set in that block.
Sample program
N001 G09 G01
X-axis
K
ZA
Tool
With G09
K
IM
Se
f (Selected feed rate)
A
ri
al
N
o.
N002
X100.000 F150; The next block is executed after an in-position status
check following machine deceleration and stop.
Y100.000 ;
N001
ZA
N001
YA
M
A
Without G09
N002
Time
N002
)2
01
3
Y-axis
(c
The solid line indicates a feedrate pattern with the G09 available.
The dotted line indicates a feedrate pattern without the G09.
Fig. 7-1 Validity of exact-stop check
op
yr
ig
ht
TEP038
C
7-7
Speed limitation is not applied to synchronous feed and threading.
7-7
Serial No. 340839
7 FEED FUNCTIONS
4.
Detailed description
A.
Continuous cutting feed commands
Next block
er
ve
d
.
Preceding block
Ts: Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration
time constant
.A
ll
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Cutting feed commands with in-position status check
ri
gh
Fig. 7-2 Continuous cutting feed commands
B.
TEP039
ts
re
s
Ts
Next block
o.
Preceding block
K
ZA
Ts
Ts: Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration
time constant
Lc: In-position width
TEP040
A
Ts
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
Lc
A
Fig. 7-3 Block-to-block connection in cutting feed in-position status check mode
YA
M
As shown in Fig. 7-3, in-position width Lc represents the remaining distance within the block
immediately preceding the next block to be executed.
Lc
Next block
(c
)2
01
3
The in-position width helps keep any
rounding of workpieces during corner
cutting within a fixed level.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
If rounding of workpieces at corners is to
be completely suppressed, include dwell
command G04 between cutting blocks.
Preceding block
TEP041
7-8
Serial No. 340839
FEED FUNCTIONS
C.
7
With deceleration check
With linear acceleration/deceleration
Ts
er
ve
d
Ts : Acceliration/deceleration time constant
Td : Deceleration check time
Td = Ts + (0 to 14 ms)
.
Next block
Preceding block
re
s
Td
ts
TEP042
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
With exponential acceleration/deceleration
Next block
o.
Preceding block
Ts : Acceleration/deceleration time
constant
Td : Deceleration check time
Td = 2 × Ts + (0 to 14 ms)
A
ZA
K
Td
TEP043
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
Ts
YA
M
A
ZA
With exponential acceleration/linear deceleration
01
3
Preceding block
2 × Ts
Td
Ts
Ts : Acceleration/deceleration time
constant
Td : Deceleration check time
Td = 2 × Ts + (0 to 14 ms)
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
Next block
TEP044
The time required for the deceleration check during cutting feed is the longest among the times
of each axis determined by the time constants and types of cutting feed acceleration and
deceleration of the axes concerned.
7-9
Serial No. 340839
7 FEED FUNCTIONS
Exact-Stop Check Mode: G61
1.
Function and purpose
Unlike exact-stop check command G09 which performs an in-position status check on that block
only, command G61 functions as a modal command. That is, this command acts on all its
succeeding cutting commands (G01, G02, and G03) so that deceleration occurs at the end of
each block, followed by an in-position status check. Command G61 is cleared by geometry
compensation command G61.1, automatic corner override command G62, tapping mode
command G63, or cutting mode command G64.
Programming format
er
ve
d
.
2.
K
ZA
A
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
G61;
C
7-8
7-10
Serial No. 340839
FEED FUNCTIONS
Automatic Corner Override: G62
1.
Function and purpose
Automatic corner override refers to a function for decreasing the rate of feed automatically at
corners on the tool path so as to reduce the tool load. The function contributes toward enhancing
the surface quality in inner-corner cutting, or automatic inner-corner rounding (,R), in the mode of
tool radius compensation.
“Inner corner” denotes an inside corner made of linear or circular segments.
.
“Automatic corner rounding (,R)” denotes a corner which is made of linear segments only
and to be rounded with a radius specified using a special address ,R.
Programming format
ri
2.
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
Once command G62 has been issued, the automatic corner override function will remain valid
until it is cancelled by tool radius compensation cancellation command G40, exact-stop check
mode command G61, geometry compensation command G61.1, tapping mode command G63,
or cutting mode command G64.
A.
N
Detailed description
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
3.
.A
ll
G62;
Inner-corner cutting
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
When inner corner is cut by a tool moving from position [1] through [2] to [3] as shown in Fig. 7-4
below, the load on the tool increases because the cutting amount at position [3] is larger than
that of position [2] by the area of hatched section S. Using G62 in such a case allows the rate of
cutting feed to be automatically decreased within the preset zone, and thus the tool load to be
reduced in order to accomplish appropriate cutting.
This function, however, should only be used for programming a finishing contour.
A
ZA
Finishing allowance
S
[1]
Programmed path
(Finishing contour)
Workpiece surface shape
[2]
[3]
Tool center path
Finish.
allow.
Ci
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
Workpiece
op
yr
ig
ht
Tool
: Maximum inner-corner angle
Ci : Deceleration zone (IN)
MEP046
C
7-9
7
Fig. 7-4 Inner-corner cutting
1.
Machine operation
In Fig. 7-4 above, if angle of the inner corner is smaller than the value preset in a
parameter, the rate of feed is automatically overriden according to another parameter for
movement through deceleration zone Ci.
7-11
Serial No. 340839
7 FEED FUNCTIONS
2.
Setting parameters
Set the following user parameters as required:
F29: Override ......................................... 0 to 100 (%)
F21: Maximum inner-corner angle ...... 0 to 179 (deg)
F22: Deceleration zone Ci ...................... 0 to 9999.9999 (mm) or 999.99999 (in)
For further details of parameter setting, refer to the separate Parameter List/
Alarm List/M-code List.
3.
Operation examples
Programmed path
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Linear-to-linear corner
ri
Tool center path
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
Ci
Tool
MEP047
al
N
o.
The rate of feed is automatically overridden with a value preset by parameter F29
through deceleration zone Ci.
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
Linear-to-circular (external compensation) corner
A
ZA
Programmed
path
Tool center
path
Ci
Tool
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
C
op
yr
ig
MEP048
The rate of feed is automatically overridden with a value preset by parameter F29
through deceleration zone Ci.
7-12
Serial No. 340839
FEED FUNCTIONS
7
Circular(internal compensation)-to-linear corner
Programmed path
Ci
Tool center path
Tool
er
ve
d
.
Tool
MEP049
gh
Deceleration zone Ci for automatic corner override is used as an arc length for
circular interpolation.
ri
Note :
ts
re
s
The rate of feed is automatically overridden with a value preset by parameter F29
through deceleration zone Ci.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
Circular(internal compensation)-to-circular(external compensation) corner
N2
Programmed path
Tool center path
A
ZA
K
Ci
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
N1
A
MEP050
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
The rate of feed is automatically overridden with a value preset by parameter F29
through deceleration zone Ci.
7-13
Serial No. 340839
7 FEED FUNCTIONS
B.
Automatic corner rounding (,R)
When automatic inner-corner rounding (,R) is performed by a tool moving from position [1]
through [2] to [3] as shown in Fig. 7-5 below, the load on the tool increases because the cutting
amount at position [3] is larger than that of position [2] by the area of shaded section S. Using
G62 in such a case allows the rate of cutting feed to be automatically decreased within the preset
zone, and thus the tool load to be reduced in order to accomplish appropriate cutting.
er
ve
d
.
For details of automatic corner rounding (,R), refer to Subsection 13-12-2.
re
s
Programmed path
Corner rounding section
Workpiece surface shape
[1]
S
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Ci
Workpiece
ri
[2]
.A
ll
[3]
gh
ts
Tool center path
D740PB0154
ZA
ri
Machine operation
Se
1.
al
Fig. 7-5 Automatic corner rounding (,R)
K
N
o.
Finishing allowance
ZA
K
IM
A
For inner corner cutting with automatic corner rounding, the rate of feed is automatically
overriden according to a parameter for movement through deceleration zone Ci and corner
rounding section (independently of corner angle).
Setting parameters
F29: Override ......................................... 0 to 100 (%)
M
A
2.
YA
F22: Deceleration zone Ci ...................... 0 to 9999.9999 (mm) or 999.99999 (in)
Operation examples
C
op
yr
ig
3.
ht
(c
)2
01
3
For further details of parameter setting, refer to the separate Parameter List/
Alarm List/M-code List.
<Programming>
G0G54
M3S100
G94
G42G90G0X200.Y0.Z0.
G62
G0X100.
G1X80.,R5.F100
Y20.
M30
7-14
Serial No. 340839
FEED FUNCTIONS
7
<Machine operation>
Y
Programmed path
Tool center path
X
Corner rounding
ending point
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Ci
ts
Corner rounding
starting point
ri
gh
D740PB0155
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Correlationships to other command functions
Function
Override at corners
Automatic corner override is applied after cutting feed override.
Override cancel
Automatic corner override is not cancelled by override cancel.
Feed rate clamp
Valid (for the feed rate after automatic corner override)
Dry run
Automatic corner override is invalid.
Synchronous feed
A synchronous feed rate is automatically corner-overridden.
Skip (G31)
During tool radius compensation, G31 will result in an alarm.
Valid
ZA
K
IM
Machine lock
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Cutting feedrate override
K
4.
N
.A
ll
The rate of feed is automatically overridden with a value preset by parameter F29 through
deceleration zone Ci up to the ending point of corner rounding.
Invalid
G01
Valid
ZA
G00
Valid
Precautions
Automatic corner override is valid only during the G01, G02 or G03 modes; it is invalid
during the G00 mode. Also, when the command mode is changed over from G00 to G01,
G02, or G03 (or vice versa) at a corner, automatic corner override is not performed on the
G00-containing block at that corner.
Even in the automatic corner override mode, automatic corner override is not performed
until the tool radius compensation mode has been set.
C
op
yr
ig
2.
ht
(c
)2
01
3
1.
YA
5.
M
A
G02, G03
7-15
Serial No. 340839
7 FEED FUNCTIONS
3.
Automatic corner override does not occur at corners where tool radius compensation is to
start or to be cancelled.
Cancel block
Programmed path
Startup block
Tool center path
Automatic corner override remains invalid.
er
ve
d
.
MEP051
Automatic corner override does not occur at corners where I, J and K vector commands for
tool radius compensation are to be executed.
gh
ts
re
s
4.
.A
ll
ri
Programmed path
N
Tool center path
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Block including I and J
vector commands
Automatic corner override remains invalid.
MEP052
o.
(G41X_Y_I_J_;)
Automatic corner override occurs only when crossing points can be calculated. Crossing
points can not be calculated in the following case:
K
ri
al
N
5.
ZA
A
Se
Four or more blocks that do not include move command appear in succession.
For circular interpolation, the deceleration zone is represented as the length of the arc.
7.
The parameter-set angle of an inner corner is applied to the angle existing on the
programmed path.
8.
Setting the maximum angle to 0 degrees in the angle parameter results in an automatic
corner override failure.
9.
Setting the override to 0 or 100 in the override parameter results in an automatic corner
override failure.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
6.
7-16
Serial No. 340839
FEED FUNCTIONS
7
7-10 Tapping Mode: G63
1.
Function and purpose
Command G63 enters the NC unit into a control mode suitable for tapping. This mode has the
following features:
The cutting feed override is fixed at 100%.
Commands for deceleration at block-to-block connections are invalidated.
The feed hold function is invalidated.
The single-block function is invalidated.
.
Tapping-mode signal is output.
re
s
er
ve
d
The G63 command mode will remain valid until it is cancelled by exact-stop check mode
command G61, geometry compensation command G61.1, automatic corner override command
G62 or cutting mode command G64.
ts
Programming format
gh
2.
.A
ll
ri
G63 ;
1.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
7-11 Cutting Mode: G64
Function and purpose
K
ZA
A
Programming format
K
IM
2.
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Command G64 enters the NC unit into a control mode proper to obtain smoothly cut surfaces.
Unlike the exact-stop check mode (G61 command mode), the cutting mode allows the next block
to be executed without decelerating/stopping the machine between cutting feed blocks.
The G64 command mode is cleared by exact-stop check mode command G61, geometry
compensation command G61.1, automatic corner override command G62 or tapping mode
command G63.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
G64 ;
7-17
Serial No. 340839
7 FEED FUNCTIONS
7-12 Geometry Compensation: G61.1/,K/P/R
7-12-1 Geometry compensation function: G61.1
1.
Function and purpose
ts
re
s
Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration
Feed forward control
Optimum corner deceleration
Precise vector compensation
gh
1.
2.
3.
4.
er
ve
d
The geometry compensation function is composed of the following four functions:
.
The geometry compensation function (G61.1) is provided to reduce conventional geometry
errors caused by delayed follow-up of smoothing circuits and servo systems.
The geometry compensation function is canceled, or replaced, by the functions of exact stop
check mode (G61), automatic corner override (G62), tapping mode (G63) and cutting mode
(G64).
Programming format
G61.1;
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
Selection of the geometry compensation function
Cancellation of the geometry compensation function
Remarks
The geometry compensation function cannot be selected or canceled for EIA/ISO programs
by the setting of the parameter F72 (which is only effective for MAZATROL programs).
2.
The geometry compensation function is suspended during execution of the following
operations:
Rapid traverse of non-interpolation type (according to bit 6 of parameter F91), Synchronous
tapping, Measurement (skipping), Threading.
3.
The pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration is effective from the block of G61.1 onward.
C
op
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
1.
yr
4.
YA
M
A
N001 G61.1
G01X100.F1000
X100.Y–100.
X–100.Y–100.
X–100.
X–100.Y100.
X100.Y100.
G64
o.
Sample program
ZA
3.
K
2.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
Refer to Section 11-2 “Geometry Compensation Function” in PART 3 of the
Operating Manual for the description of the above functions.
7-18
Serial No. 340839
FEED FUNCTIONS
7
7-12-2 Specification of accuracy coefficient (,K)
1.
Function and purpose
In the mode of geometry compensation (G61.1) the feed of the tool is automatically decelerated
at relevant corners and for circular motions by the optimal corner deceleration and the circular
feed limitation, respectively, in order to enhance the machining accuracy. Specifying an accuracy
coefficient in the machining program can further improve the accuracy by additionally
decelerating the feed for the sections concerned.
2.
Programming format
Specify the rate of reduction of the corner deceleration speed and the circular feed rate
limitation in percentage terms.
er
ve
d
.
,K_;
Sample program
ts
N
<Example 1>
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N001 G61.1
The rate of feed for a corner deceleration or circular motion in the section from
this block onward will be reduced to 70% of the value applied in default of the
accuracy coefficient command.
N200 G1X_Y_,K30
N300
gh
.A
ll
3.
ri
- Resetting is performed,
- The geometry compensation function is canceled (by G64),
- A command of “,K0” is given.
re
s
The accuracy coefficient is canceled in the following cases:
X_Y_
N400 …
ri
al
N001 G61.1
N200 G2I-10.,K30
ZA
Se
Deceleration to 70% occurs for this block only.
N300 G1X10.,K0
K
IM
A
The accuracy coefficient is canceled from this block onward.
N400 …
A
ZA
Remarks
The accuracy coefficient cannot be specified in a MAZATROL program.
2.
Specifying an accuracy coefficient 1 to 99 at address “,K” increases the machining time
according to the additional deceleration at relevant corners and for circular motions.
YA
M
1.
01
3
4.
K
N
o.
<Example 2>
(c
)2
7-12-3 Specification of SMC data No. (P)
ht
Function and purpose
ig
1.
C
op
yr
The desired set of SMC data (prepared and stored on the corresponding display) to be used in
the mode of geometry compensation can be specified as required in the program.
2.
See the corresponding section in PART 3 of the Operating Manual for the
details on the display for setting SMC data.
Programming format
G61.1 Pp;
p: SMC data No.
Setting range: 0 to 41
Argument P can be omitted if the SMC data set specified last is to be used further.
7-19
Serial No. 340839
7 FEED FUNCTIONS
Argument P with a decimal point will be processed by simply deleting the decimal point and
decimal digits.
The processing for an erroneous argument P (a number that falls outside of the setting range,
or under which no data are prepared) depends upon a parameter setting as follows:
F329 bit 0 = 0: Operation is continued with the alarm 965 DESIGNATED PNo NOT FOUND
displayed on the screen,
= 1: Operation is stopped with the alarm 964 DESIGNATED PNo NOT FOUND
displayed on the screen.
Function and purpose
er
ve
d
1.
.
7-12-4 Smooth corner control (R)
gh
Programming format
.A
ll
ri
G61.1 Rr;
G61.2 Rr;
r: Tolerable error distance
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Setting range: 0.0000 to 10.0000 mm (for metric input)
0.00000 to 1.00000 in (for inch input)
N
2.
ts
re
s
This function allows the tolerable error distance to be programmed for a smooth cornering
(circular motion) between two cutting-feed blocks by appropriate motion speed control.
Commanded position
A
ZA
K
Programmed path
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Tool path
01
3
Detailed description
Enter inch or metric data for argument R according to the current mode (G20 or G21).
2.
Enter zero (0) with R to temporarily cancel the SCC function (so as to bring the motion of the
block to an exact stop at the commanded position).
)2
1.
Entering a lower value than the lower limit (0) with R has the same result as entering zero
(0), and entering a higher value than the upper limit just as entering that limit.
C
op
yr
ig
3.
ht
(c
3.
YA
M
A
Tolerable error distance
4.
Argument R can be omitted if the default value (provided in parameter F270) is desired.
5.
The SCC function is canceled by the following functions (belonging to the same group of
modal G-codes as G61.1 and G61.2):
Exact stop check mode (G61),
Automatic corner override (G62),
Tapping mode (G63),
Cutting mode (G64).
7-20
Serial No. 340839
FEED FUNCTIONS
7
<Example of programming for changing the tolerable error distance>
................
Use of F270 as tolerable error distance
................
Use of 0.2 as tolerable error distance
................
Cancellation of the SCC function
................
Use of 0.3 as tolerable error distance
................
Temporary exact stop
................
Use of F270 as tolerable error distance
Relationship to other G-codes
re
s
4.
er
ve
d
.
G61.1
G61.1R0.2
G64
G61.1R0.3
G61.1R0
G61.1
M30
ts
The modal conditions compatible with the SCC function are as enumerated below.
Linear interpolation
G01
Circular and Helical interpolation
G02/G03
High-speed machining mode
G05
Cylindrical interpolation
(Note)
Function
N
G-code
G07.1
G11
Polar coordinate interpolation OFF
G13.1
Plane selection
G17/G18/G19
Se
Pre-move stroke check OFF
M
A
Tool radius compensation
YA
Shaping OFF
Workpiece setup error correction
G54.4
Dynamic offsetting
G54.2
User macro modal call OFF
G67
3-D coordinate conversion OFF
G69
Hole-machining fixed cycle OFF
G80
G93
G20/G21
Feed per minute (asynchronous)
G94
G23
Feed per revolution (synchronous)
G95
G40/G41/G42
Constant cutting speed control OFF
G97
G40.1
Initial point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G98
R-point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G99
A
G90/G91
Inverse time feed
G41.2/G41.5
Tool radius compensation for five-axis
machining (right)
G42.2/G42.5
01
3
G54-G59,
G54.1
Absolute/Incremental data input
Tool radius compensation for five-axis
machining (left)
G109
Cross machining control axis cancellation
G111
Tool tip point control
G43.4/G43.5
Hob milling mode OFF
G113
Head offset for five-surface machining OFF
yr
G49.1
Polar coordinate input OFF
G15
Scaling OFF
G50
Radius data input for the X-axis ON
G10.9X0
Mirror image OFF
G50.1
Superposition control OFF
G127
Polygonal machining mode OFF
G50.2
Compound fixed cycles
G274-G276
op
ig
ht
Tool length offset
(c
Single program multi-process control
G43/G44/G49
C
)2
Selection of workpiece coordinate system,
Selection of additional workp. coord. system
G18.1
ZA
Inch/Metric data input
G52.2
K
ri
Turning plane selection OFF
G17.9
ZA
Temporary cancelation of machining surface
selection (for five-surface machining)
K
IM
al
N
o.
Programmed data setting OFF
G-code
Offsetting for the ram spindle OFF
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Function
.A
ll
ri
gh
In case a G61.1 or G61.2 command is given under incompatible conditions or an incompatible
modal command is given in the mode of G61.1 or G61.2, the SCC function remains canceled
temporarily until the required conditions are satisfied (anew).
Note :
The combined use of G07.1 (Cylindrical interpolation) or G12.1 (Polar coordinate interpolation) with G61.1 (Geometry compensation) requires that the optional function of
geometry compensation for rotational axes may be enabled by a parameter setting
(F96 bit 6 = 1). The mode of G61.1 is canceled temporarily if the optional function is not
provided or the named parameter is set to 0.
7-21
Serial No. 340839
7 FEED FUNCTIONS
Moreover, the SCC function is canceled by the following functions (belonging to the same group
of modal G-codes as G61.1 and G61.2):
Exact stop check mode (G61),
Automatic corner override (G62),
Tapping mode (G63),
Cutting mode (G64).
Remarks
1.
With the SCC function enabled, always give the G61.1 and G61.2 command in a singlecommand block. If a block of G61.1 and G61.2 should contain any other G-codes or an M-,
S-, T- or B-code, an alarm will be raised (807 ILLEGAL FORMAT).
2.
The tolerable error distance may be shorter than the specified value in actual operation if
the feed hold function is applied during automatic operation with the SCC function being
selected.
3.
The SCC function is implicitly canceled in the mode of single-block operation.
4.
The SCC function is ignored during tool path check.
5.
The tolerable error distance specified in the main program will remain intact in a subprogram, indeed, but will be canceled for a new main program to be executed continuously
by the program-chaining function.
6.
A considerably low rate of feed may result in the tolerable error distance being reduced in
actual operation.
7.
An excessively large setting of the tolerable error distance may implicitly be reduced in
actual operation.
ri
ZA
Description
Se
Parameter
K
Related parameters
al
6.
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
5.
Setting range
Setting unit
For Smooth Corner Control function:
Tolerable error distance
0 to 999999
0.0001 mm or
0.00001 in
F271
For Smooth Corner Control function:
Circular-motion speed limit coefficient
0 to 500
%
F272
For Smooth Corner Control function:
Circular-motion speed limit coefficient for high-speed
smoothing control (applied to a curve approximated with
micro linear segments in the mode of G00, G02 or G03)
0 to 500
%
F273
For Smooth Corner Control function:
Cancel angle
0 to 90
°
For Smooth Corner Control function:
Circular-motion speed limit coefficient for high-speed
smoothing control (applied to a curve approximated with
micro linear segments in the mode of G01)
0 to 500
%
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
A
F270
C
op
yr
ig
ht
F281
7-22
Serial No. 340839
FEED FUNCTIONS
7.
7
SCC function in relationship to SMC (Smooth Machining Configuration)
Smooth Machining Configuration refers to a function which allows the optimum sets of relevant
parameters for the type of machining and workpiece (SMC data) to be prepared beforehand and
to be selected as required in the flow of automatic operation.
The tolerable error distance for the SCC function can be specified by choosing an SMC data set
in the programming format shown below.
A.
Programming format
G61.1 Pp;
G61.2 Pp;
er
ve
d
.
p: SMC data No.
Setting range: 0 to 41
Tolerable error distance (argument R) and SMC data (argument P)
re
s
B.
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
The tolerable error distance (for the SCC function) selected through argument P (for choosing an
SMC data set) can temporarily be replaced with the value specified explicitly by argument R.
Under the modal condition of an SMC data selection, however, omission of argument R always
retrieves the tolerable error distance according to the selected SMC data, instead of the default
value for argument R (provided in parameter F270).
Use of F270 as tolerable error distance
................
Use of 0.2 as tolerable error distance
................
Use of the value according to the SMC data No. 1
................
Use of 0.3 as tolerable error distance
o.
................
K
A
Use of the value according to the SMC data No. 1
K
IM
................
ZA
Se
ri
al
N
G61.1
G61.1R0.2
G61.1P1
G61.1R0.3
G61.1
M30
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
<Example of programming for changing the tolerable error distance>
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
See the corresponding section in PART 3 of the Operating Manual for the
procedures for registering and editing the SMC data.
7-23
Serial No. 340839
7 FEED FUNCTIONS
7-13 Inverse Time Feed: G93
1.
Function and purpose
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
When tool radius compensation is performed for a smooth linear or circular small-line-segment
command, differences will occur between the contour defined in the program and that existing
after tool radius compensation. The feed commands with G94 and G95 only apply for the tool
path existing after compensation, and the tool speed at the point of cutting (that is, along the
programmed contour), therefore, will not be kept constant so that the resulting speed fluctuations
will cause seams on the surface machined.
Setting of an Inverse Time Feed command code makes constant the processing time for the
corresponding block of the machining program, and thus provides control to ensure a constant
machining feed rate at the point of cutting (along the programmed contour).
Setting of command code G93 specifies the inverse time assignment mode.
In G93 mode, the reciprocal of the machining time for the block of cutting command code G01,
G02 or G03 is to be assigned using an F-code. Data that can be assigned with address F is from
0.0001 to 99999.9999.
For linear interpolation (G01)
[Speed]
: mm/min (for metric system) or
in/min (for inch system)
[Distance]
: mm (for metric system) or
in (for inch system)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
[Speed]
[Distance]
F-code value =
N
.A
ll
ri
The feed rate for the corresponding block is calculated (by NC) from the commanded length of
the program block and the value of the F-code.
[Speed]
[Arc radius]
Programming formats
ZA
: mm/min (for metric system) or
in/min (for inch system)
A
[Arc radius] : mm (for metric system) or
in (for inch system)
G93 G01 Xx1 Yy1 Ff1
A
Linear interpolation:
[Speed]
ZA
2.
K
IM
Se
ri
al
F-code value =
K
N
o.
For circular interpolation (G02 or G03)
YA
M
Circular interpolation:
G93 G02 Xx1 Yy1 Rr1 Ff1
Precautions
)2
3.
01
3
(Code G03 can be used, instead of G02, and code I, J and/or K instead of R.)
ht
(c
Code G93, which belongs to the same G-code group as that of G94 (feed per minute) and
G95 (feed per revolution), is a modal G-code.
C
op
yr
ig
In G93 mode, since F codes are not handled as modal codes, they must be set for each block.
The absence of F-code results in alarm 816 FEEDRATE ZERO.
Setting of F0 during G93 mode results in alarm 816 FEEDRATE ZERO.
For a corner insertion block during tool radius compensation, the F-code value in the previous
block is regarded as the inverse time command value.
A modal F-code must be set if the G93 mode is changed over to G94 or G95.
7-24
Serial No. 340839
FEED FUNCTIONS
4.
7
Description of alarms
No.
Message
941
Description
G93 MODE
An illegal G-code* has been set during G93 mode.
* Illegal G-codes are:
G31
Threading
G7, G8, G2
Fixed cycle
Sample program
Y
G94
G40
M02
er
ve
d
re
s
ts
F500
X
200
Y-200.R100.
Y-400.R100.
Y-600.R100.
X0
Y0
Y80.
X-80.
F5
F5
F5
F500
gh
G02
G03
G02
G01
Y80.
Y0 D11
–200
ri
G93
X-80.
X0
X200.
.A
ll
G00
G41
200
N
G90
G01
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N01
N02
N03
N04
N05
N06
N07
N08
N09
N10
200
.
5.
Skip
G32, G33
–400
200
K
ZA
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
–600
D11 = 10 mm
D11 = 20 mm
M
A
MEP053
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
In this example, set data as follows if the machining speed in the circular-interpolation blocks is
to be made equal to 500 mm/min that is specified for the linear-interpolation block of G01:
[Speed]
500
F-code value =
=
[Arc radius]
100
7-25
ht
ig
yr
op
C
01
3
)2
(c
K
ZA
al
ri
Se
A
K
IM
ZA
A
M
YA
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
N
ts
gh
ri
.
er
ve
d
re
s
Serial No. 340839
7 FEED FUNCTIONS
7-26 E
Serial No. 340839
DWELL FUNCTIONS
8
8
DWELL FUNCTIONS
The start of execution of the next block can be delayed using a G04 command.
Dwell Command in Time: (G94) G04
1.
Function and purpose
Setting command G04 in the feed-per-second mode (command G94) delays the start of
execution of the next block for the specified time.
Programming format
er
ve
d
.
2.
re
s
G94 G04 X_;
or
G94 G04 P_;
Detailed description
The setting range for dwell time is as follows:
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
1.
.A
ll
3.
ri
gh
ts
Data must be set in 0.001 seconds.
For address P, the decimal point is not available. Setting a decimal point will cause an alarm.
Unit of data setting
Range for address X
Range for address P
0.001 mm
0.001 to 99999.999 (s)
1 to 99999999 (× 0.001 s)
0.0001 inches
0.001 to 99999.999 (s)
1 to 99999999 (× 0.001 s)
The count for the dwell command which is preceded by a block with cutting-feed command
is not started until the movement of the preceding block has been brought to a complete
stop.
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
2.
A
ZA
Cutting command in
the preceding block
YA
M
Next block
)2
01
3
Dwell command
ht
(c
Dwell time
TEP053
ig
yr
op
C
8-1
3.
If the dwell command is given in one block together with an M-, S-, T- or B-code, the dwell
count and the execution of the respective code will be started at the same time.
If the bit 2 of parameter F92 is set to 1, dwell command value is always processed in time
specification irrespective of G94 and G95 modes.
8-1
Serial No. 340839
8 DWELL FUNCTIONS
4.
Sample programs
- When data is to be set in 0.01 mm, 0.001 mm or 0.0001 inches:
G04 X 500 ;.......................................... Dwell time = 0.5 s
G04 X 5000 ;........................................ Dwell time = 5.0 s
G04 X 5. ;............................................. Dwell time = 5.0 s
G04 P 5000 ;........................................ Dwell time = 5.0 s
G04 P 12.345 ; .................................... Alarm
- When data is to be set in 0.0001 inches and dwell time is included before G04:
X5. G04 ;.............................................. Dwell time = 50 s (Equivalent to X50000G04.)
er
ve
d
Function and purpose
re
s
1.
.
Dwell Command in Number of Revolutions: (G95) G04
Programming format
.A
ll
2.
ri
gh
ts
Setting command G04 in the feed-per-revolution mode (command G95) suspends the start of
execution of the next block until the spindle has rotated the specified number of revolutions.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
G95 G04 X_ ;
or
G95 G04 P_ ;
Data must be set in 0.001 revolutions.
For address P, the decimal point is not available. Setting a decimal point will cause an alarm.
N
o.
Detailed description
Se
0.0001 inches
Range for address P
1 to 99999999 (× 0.001 rev)
1 to 99999999 (× 0.001 rev)
A
0.001 to 99999.999 (rev)
0.001 to 99999.999 (rev)
The count for the dwell command which is preceded by a block with cutting-feed command
is not started until the movement of the preceding block has been brought to a complete
stop.
Cut command in the
preceding block
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
2.
ZA
Range for address X
ri
Unit of data setting
0.001 mm
K
The setting range for number of dwell revolutions is as follows:
al
1.
K
IM
3.
op
yr
ig
Next block
Dwell command
C
8-2
Revolutions for dwell
(12.345 rev)
TEP053
If the dwell command is given in one block together with an M-, S-, T- or B-code, the dwell
count and the execution of the respective code will be started at the same time.
3.
The dwell function is also valid during the machine lock mode.
8-2
Serial No. 340839
DWELL FUNCTIONS
8
During rest of the spindle, dwell count is also halted. When the spindle restarts rotating,
dwell count will also restart.
5.
If the bit 2 of parameter F92 is set to 1, dwell command value is alway processed in time
specification.
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
4.
8-3
ht
ig
yr
op
C
01
3
)2
(c
K
ZA
al
ri
Se
A
K
IM
ZA
A
M
YA
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
N
ts
gh
ri
.
er
ve
d
re
s
Serial No. 340839
8 DWELL FUNCTIONS
8-4 E
Serial No. 340839
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS
9
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS
9-1
Miscellaneous Functions (M3-Digit)
9
Miscellaneous functions, which are also referred to as M-code functions, give spindle forward/
backward rotation and stop commands, coolant on/off commands, and other auxiliary commands
to the NC machine.
For the NC unit, these functions must be selected using M3-digit data (three-digit data preceded
by address M). Up to four sets of M3-digit data can be included in one block.
er
ve
d
If five or more sets of M3-digit data are set, only the last four sets will become valid.
.
Example : G00 Xx1 Mm1 Mm2 Mm3 Mm4;
ts
re
s
Refer to the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-code List for more specific
relationships between available data and functions.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
For M-codes M00, M01, M02, M30, M998 and M999, the next block of data is not read into the
input buffer since pre-reading is disabled automatically.
The M-codes can be included in any block that contains other command codes. If, however, the
M-codes are included in a block that contains move commands, then the execution priority will
be either
the M-code functions are executed after completion of movement, or
the M-code functions are executed together with movement.
K
IM
A
ZA
Programmed Stop: M00
When this M-code is read, the tape reader will stop reading subsequent block. Whether the
machine function such as spindle rotation and coolant will also stop depends on the
Se
1.
K
ri
al
N
o.
It depends on the machine specifications which type of processing is applied.
Processing and completion sequences are required in each case for all M commands except
M98 and M99.
The following lists six types of special M-code functions:
M
A
ZA
machine specifications. The machine operation is restarted by pressing the
button
on the operation panel. Whether resetting can be initiated by M00 or not also depends on
the machine specifications.
Optional Stop: M01
When the M01 code is read with the [OPTIONAL STOP] menu function set to ON, the tape
reader will stop operating to perform the same function as M00.
The M01 command will be ignored if the [OPTIONAL STOP] menu function is set to OFF.
(c
)2
01
3
YA
2.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
Example :
N10 G00 X1000;
N11 M01;
N12 G01 X2000 Z3000 F600;
<[OPTIONAL STOP] menu function status and operation>
If the menu function is on, operation stops at N11.
If the menu function is off, operation does not stop at N11 and N12 is executed.
3.
Program End: M02 or M30
Usually, the program end command is given in the final block of machining program. Use
this command mainly for reading data back to the head of the program during memory
operation, or rewinding the tape in the tape operation mode (use an M30 command to
rewind the tape). The NC unit is automatically reset after tape rewinding and execution of
other command codes included in that block.
9-1
Serial No. 340839
9 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS
Automatic resetting by this command cancels both modal commands and offsetting data,
but the designated-position display counter is not cleared to zero.
The NC unit will stop operating when tape rewinding is completed (the automatic run mode
lamp goes out). To restart the NC unit, the
button must be pressed.
Beware that if, during the restart of the NC unit following completion of M02 or M30
execution, the first movement command has been set in a coordinate word only, the valid
mode will be the interpolation mode existing when the program ended. It is recommended,
therefore, that the first movement command be given with an appropriate G-code.
Subprogram Call/End: M98, M99
Use M98 or M99 to branch the control into a subprogram or to recall it back to the calling
program.
As M99 and M99 are internaly processed by the NC M-code signals ans strobe signals are
not output.
er
ve
d
.
4.
ri
gh
ts
re
s
<Internal processing by the NC unit when M00, M01, M02 or M30 is used>
After M00, M01, M02 or M30 has been read, data pre-reading is automatically aborted. Other
tape rewinding operations and the initialization of modals by resetting differ according to the
machine specification.
.A
ll
Note 1: M00, M01, M02 and M30 output independent signals, which will be cancelled by
No. 2 Miscellaneous Functions (A8/B8/C8-Digit)
N
o.
The No. 2 miscellaneous functions are used for positioning an index table. For the NC unit, these
functions must be designated using an eight-digit value (form 0 to 99999999) preceded by
address A, B or C.
K
ZA
Se
ri
al
The address assigned to No. 2 miscellaneous functions depends upon the setting of parameter
K56.
K
IM
A
A, B or C codes can be included in any block that contains other command codes. If, however,
the A, B or C codes can be included in a block that contains move commands, then the
execution priority will be either
ZA
the A, B or C code functions are performed after completion of movement, or
M
A
the A, B or C code functions are performed together with movement.
)2
01
3
YA
It depends on the machine specifications which type of processing is applied.
Processing and completion sequences are required in each case for all No. 2 miscellaneous
functions.
ht
(c
Address combinations are shown below. The same address for both additional axis and the No.
2 miscellaneous functions cannot be used.
ig
Additional axis
B
C
A
×
B
×
C
×
yr
A
op
No. 2 miscellaneous functions
C
9-2
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
pressing the
key.
Note 2: Tape rewinding is performed only when the tape reader has a rewinding function.
Note :
When A has been designated as the No. 2 miscellaneous function address, linear
angle commands cannot be used.
9-2
Serial No. 340839
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS
Output of Auxiliary Function Codes during Axis Movement: G117/G118
1.
Function and purpose
Miscellaneous function (M-code), spindle function (S-code), tool function (T-code) for specifying
the next tool, and No. 2 miscellaneous function (A-, B- or C-code) ― hereinafter, these are
collectively referred to as “auxiliary functions” ― can be output during axis movement.
2.
Programing format
G117 Xx Yy Zz Aa Cc Mm Ss Tt Bb;
er
ve
d
.
The position for outputting the desired auxiliary functions is to be specified with reference to the
programming coordinate system.
re
s
x, y, z, a, c: Programming coordinates for specifying the position at which to output the
auxiliary functions.
The position can be specified with absolute as well as incremental data.
gh
ts
The positional specification can be made for all the NC-controlled axes.
.A
ll
ri
G118 Xx Yy Zz Aa Cc Mm Ss Tt Bb;
N
The position for outputting the desired auxiliary functions is to be specified in distances from the
desired position to the ending point of axis movement.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
x, y, z, a, c: Distances from the output position to the ending point of axis movement.
The positional specification can be made for all the NC-controlled axes.
A
Ending point
Position for outputting auxiliary functions
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ZA
al
Detailed description
ri
3.
K
N
o.
Remark : The programming format shown above refers to a machine which has the controlled
rotational axes A and C and for which address B is to be used for No. 2 miscellaneous
function.
Starting point
ht
(c
D747PB0067
Commands of G117 or G118 must be given in a single-command block.
yr
ig
1.
op
2.
C
9-3
9
The output position must lie on each axis within the range from the starting to the ending
points of the axis movement command concerned.
3.
Up to four miscellaneous functions (M-codes) can be specified in a block of G117 or G118
together with a single spindle function (S-code), tool function (T-code) for specifying the
next tool, and No. 2 miscellaneous function (A-, B- or C-code).
4.
The axis movement is continued up to the ending point without stopping at the specified
output position.
5.
The execution of the block next to the axis motion block does not start at the ending point
until all the specified auxiliary functions are completed.
9-3
Serial No. 340839
9 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS
4.
Programming examples
Example 1: Commands of G117 and G118 with absolute data
Y
100
M03
(Spindle start Fwd.)
50
25
er
ve
d
.
M05 (Spindle stop)
X
100
200
re
s
50
ts
D747PB0068
gh
G90 G00 X0. Y0.; ............. Axis movement.
N
G01 X200.F100; ................. Axis movement.
.A
ll
ri
G117 X50. Y50. M03; ...... Specification of the position at which to output M03.
G00 X100.Y100.; ............... Axis movement. *1
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
G118 X50.Y25.M05; ........... Specification of the position at which to output M05.
G00 X50.Y25; ...................... Axis movement. *2
M30;
According to the preceding command of G117, output of M03 occurs as soon as the
position of (x, y) = (50, 50) is passed during the axis movement.
*2:
According to the preceding command of G118, output of M05 occurs as soon as the
position of (x, y) = (100, 50) is passed during the axis movement.
K
ZA
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
*1:
M03
(Spindle start Fwd.)
50
25
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
100
ZA
Y
K
IM
Example 2: Command of G117 with incremental data
X
yr
25
50
100
C
op
D747PB0069
G90 G00 X0. Y0.;
G91 X25.Y25.; ................... Axis movement.
G117 X25. Y25. M03; ...... Specification of the position at which to output M03.
G00 X75.Y75.; ................... Axis movement. *
M30;
*
According to the preceding command of G117, output of M03 occurs as soon as the
position of (x, y) = (50, 50) is passed during the axis movement.
9-4
Serial No. 340839
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS
9
Example 3: Command of G117 between axis movement commands with absolute and incremental data
Y
100
M03
(Spindle start Fwd.)
50
er
ve
d
.
25
X
50
25
100
re
s
D747PB0069
gh
ts
G90 G00 X0. Y0.;
ri
G00 X25. Y25.; ................. Axis movement.
.A
ll
G117 X50. Y50. M03; ...... Specification of the position at which to output M03.
G91 G00 X75.Y75.; ........... Axis movement. *
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
*
N
M30;
According to the preceding command of G117, output of M03 occurs as soon as the
position of (x, y) = (50, 50) is passed during the axis movement.
A
M04 (Spindle start Rev.)
K
IM
Se
75
ri
100
ZA
al
Y
K
N
o.
Example 4: Successive commands of G117/G118
M05 (Spindle stop)
ZA
50
YA
M
A
M03 (Spindle start
Fwd.)
01
3
X
100
150
200
)2
D747PB0070
ht
(c
G90 G00 X0. Y0.; ....................... Axis movement.
C
op
yr
ig
G117 X100. Y50. M05; .............. Specification of the position at which to output M05.
G117 X150. Y75. M04; .............. Specification of the position at which to output M04.
G01 X200. Y100. F100 M03; ... Axis movement (Output of M03 at the beginning). *
M30;
*
According to the first and second command of G117, output of M05 and M04 occurs,
respectively, as soon as the position of (x, y) = (100, 50) and (150, 75) is passed during
the axis movement.
9-5
Serial No. 340839
9 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS
Remarks
1.
In a block of G118, do not enter a negative value as the distance from the position for
outputting the auxiliary functions to the ending point of axis movement; otherwise the alarm
807 ILLEGAL FORMAT is raised.
2.
The alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT is raised if the axis movement command following a
G117/G118 block is not of linear motion (under G00 or G01).
3.
Auxiliary functions will be output at the very beginning of executing the succeeding
command of axis movement if they are entered in a block of G117/G118 without specification of their output position.
4.
The alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT is raised if the specified position for outputting the
auxiliary functions should fall outside the range of the axis movement programmed in the
succeeding block.
5.
The next block to a block of G117/G118 is always processed as that of axis movement with
the exception of a block of optional block skip, a block composed of comment only, or an
empty block. If a move-free block of any other type, e.g. a block of sequence number only,
as shown in the sample program below, should follow a G117/G118 block, then the starting
and ending points of the ‘axis movement command’ are judged to be at one and the same
position. The alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT is raised, therefore, in such a case if the
starting point of the next command of axis movement should differ from the specified
position for outputting the auxiliary functions.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
5.
Y
M03 (Spindle start Fwd)
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
100
ZA
X
100
200
YA
M
A
D747PB0071
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
G90 G00 X0. Y0.;
G00 X100.Y100.; ......................... Axis movement.
G117 X100. Y100. M03; ............ Specification of the position at which to output M03.
N1
G01 X200.F100;
M30;
C
op
yr
6.
7.
Do not fail to give an axis movement command within the succeeding four blocks (inclusive
of a block of optional block skip, a block composed of comment only, and an empty block);
otherwise the alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT is raised.
Do not give a command of G117/G118 in more than two blocks in succession; otherwise the
alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT is raised.
9-6
Serial No. 340839
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS
8.
9
Precautions for giving two commands of G117/G118 in succession
The output of the auxiliary functions specified in the second block is suspended at the
specified output position if those specified in the first block have not yet been completed.
The output of auxiliary functions occurs in order of the command blocks if the specified
output position is the same in both blocks.
The alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT is raised if the output position specified in the second
block should lie before that of the first block on the path of the axis movement.
If the specified output position should not lie on the path of the axis movement concerned,
then the output does not occur until the specified position has been reached on all the
specified axes.
er
ve
d
.
9.
ts
re
s
Y
.A
ll
ri
gh
Specified output position
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Actual output position
X
D747PB0072
K
ZA
A
Broken line： Programmed path
Solid line：
Interpolated path
Actual output position
YA
M
A
ZA
Y
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
10. If the specified path of axis movement is modified, for example, by an interpolation function,
then, on the linear segment between the starting and ending point of the axis movement, a
point is first generated by calculation at which the specified position is reached on all the
axes and, finally, with that point as reference, a similar point on the interpolated path is
determined as the actual position of outputting auxiliary functions.
Generated output position
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Specified output position
ig
X
C
op
yr
D747PB0073
9-7
Serial No. 340839
9 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS
6.
Relationship to other functions
A.
Miscellaneous functions unavailable in a G117/G118 block
As tabulated below, it is not allowed to specify those miscellaneous functions in a G117/G118
block which interfere with the axis movement or cause an independent axis movement to be
executed. Nor can be used auxiliary functions for calling a macroprogram.
<Examples of unavailable miscellaneous functions>
Code
Function
Code
Function
Programmed stop
M98
Subprogram call
M01
Optional stop
M99
Subprogram end
M02
Program end
M153
Geometry compensation ON
M06
Tool change
M154
Geometry compensation OFF
M30
Reset and rewind
M197
Reset
M96
Branching mode ON
M998, M999
Program chain
M97
Branching mode OFF
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
M00
ri
Use of an unavailable function will cause the alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT to be raised.
N
G-code
G00
Linear interpolation
G01
Dwell
G04
High-speed machining mode OFF
G-code
Multi-step skip 3
G31.3
Hole machining pattern cycle (on a circle)
G34.1
Hole machining pattern cycle (on a line)
G35
G05P0
Hole machining pattern cycle (on an arc)
G36
Virtual-axis interpolation
G07
Automatic tool length measurement
G37
Cylindrical interpolation
G07.1
Hole machining pattern cycle (on a grid)
G37.1
Exact-stop check
G09
Vector selection for tool radius compens.
G38
Corner arc for tool radius compensation
G39
Nose/Tool radius compensation OFF
G40
Polar coordinate interpolation ON
A
Shaping OFF
G40.1
G11
Nose/Tool radius compensation (left)
G41
G12.1
Shaping (to the left) ON
G41.1
G13.1
Tool radius compensation for five-axis
machining (left)
G41.2
G41.4
G41.5
Nose/Tool radius compensation (right)
G42
Shaping (to the right) ON
G42.1
Tool radius compensation for five-axis
machining (right)
G42.2
G42.4
G42.5
M
G15
G17
G17.9
Selection of ZX-plane
G18
Milling mode selection
G18.1
Turning plane selection (VARIAXIS)
G18.2-G18.4
Turning plane selection OFF
G18.9
Tool length offset (+)
G43
yr
ig
ht
(c
01
3
Temporary cancelation of machining
surface selection (for 5-surfc. maching.)
)2
Selection of XY-plane
YA
Polar coordinate input OFF
A
Polar coordinate interpolation OFF
ZA
Data setting mode OFF
G10.9
K
IM
Selection between diameter and radius
data input
K
G10
Se
Data setting mode ON
ZA
ri
al
o.
Positioning
Function
N
Function
.A
ll
G-codes available after a G117/G118 block
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
B.
G19
Tool length offset in tool-axis direction
G43.1
Inch command
G20
Tool tip point control (Type 1) ON
G43.4
Metric command
G21
Tool tip point control (Type 2) ON
G43.5
Pre-move stroke check ON
G22
Tool length offset (–)
G44
Pre-move stroke check OFF
G23
Tool position offset, extension
G45
Reference point check
G27
Tool position offset, reduction
G46
Reference point return
G28
Tool position offset, double extension
G47
Return from reference point
G29
Tool position offset, double reduction
G48
Return to 2., 3. and 4. reference points
G30
Tool position offset OFF
G49
Skip function
G31
Head offset for five-surfc. machining OFF
G49.1
Multi-step skip 1
G31.1
Scaling OFF
G50
Multi-step skip 2
G31.2
Mirror image by G-code OFF
G50.1
C
op
Selection of YZ-plane
9-8
Serial No. 340839
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS
Function
G-code
G50.2
Fixed cycle (Pecking)
G82.2
Scaling ON
G51
Fixed cycle (Deep-hole drilling)
G83
Mirror image by G-code ON
G51.1
Fixed cycle (Tapping)
G84
Polygonal machining mode ON
G51.2
Fixed cycle (Synchronous tapping)
G84.2
Local coordinate system setting
G52
Fix. cycle (Synchronous reverse tapping)
G84.3
Ram spindle offset OFF
G52.2
Fixed cycle (Reaming)
G85
Machine coordinate system selection
G53
Fixed cycle (Boring 5)
G86
Tool-axis direction control
G53.1
Fixed cycle (Back boring)
G87
Workpiece coordinate system 1
G54
Fixed cycle (Boring 6)
G88
Additional workpiece coordinate systems
G54.1
Fixed cycle (Boring 7)
G89
Selection of fixture offset
G54.2
Absolute data input
G90
Workpiece setup error correction
G54.4
Incremental data input
G91
Workpiece coordinate system 2
G55
Workpiece coordinate system 3
G56
Coordinate system setting/Spindle speed
range setting
Workpiece coordinate system 4
G57
Workpiece coordinate system rotation
Workpiece coordinate system 5
G58
Inverse time feed
Workpiece coordinate system 6
G59
Feed per minute (asynchronous)
One-way positioning
G60
Feed per revolution (synchronous)
G95
Exact stop mode
G61
Constant surface speed control ON
G96
High-accuracy mode (Geometry comp.)
G61.1
Constant surface speed control OFF
G97
Modal spline interpolation
G61.2
Initial point level return in fixed cycles
Automatic corner override
G62
R-point level return in fixed cycles
G99
Tapping mode
G63
Single program multi-process control
G109
Cutting mode
G64
Cross machining control axis selection
G110/G110.1
User macro single call
G65
Cross machining control axis cancellation
G111
User macro modal call A
G66
M, S, T, B output to opposite system
G112
User macro modal call B
Hob milling mode OFF
G113
Hob milling mode ON
G114.3
Tornado cycle
G130
Measurement macro
G136
G68.2
Compensation macro
G137
Inclined-plane machining (by specifying
tool-axis direction) ON
G68.3
Finishing cycle
G270
Longitudinal roughing cycle
G271
Incremental coordinate system establishment for inclined-plane machining
G68.4
Transverse roughing cycle
G272
Contour-parallel roughing cycle
G273
G68
K
K
IM
A
Se
3-D coordinate conversion ON
G68
ZA
G67
Programmed coordinate rotation ON
ri
User macro modal call OFF
YA
M
A
ZA
Inclined-plane machining ON
er
ve
d
G92
re
s
ts
gh
ri
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
al
G66.1
G92.5
G93
G94
G98
Programmed coordinate rotation OFF
G69
Longitudinal cut-off cycle
G274
3-D coordinate conversion OFF
G69
Transverse cut-off cycle
G275
Inclined-plane machining OFF
01
3
.
Polygonal machining mode OFF
.A
ll
G-code
N
Function
9
Compound thread-cutting cycle
G276
G71.1
Face driling cycle
G283
Fixed cycle (Chamfering cutter 2, CCW)
G72.1
Face tapping cycle
G284
Fix. cycle (High-speed deep-hole drilling)
G73
Face synchronous tapping cycle
G284.2
Fixed cycle (Reverse tapping)
G74
Face boring cycle
G285
Outside driling cycle
G287
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
G69
Fixed cycle (Chamfering cutter 1, CW)
G75
Fixed cycle (Boring 2)
G76
Outside tapping cycle
G288
Fixed cycle (Back spot facing)
G77
Outside synchronous tapping cycle
G288.2
Fixed cycle (Boring 3)
G78
Outside boring cycle
G289
Fixed cycle (Boring 4)
G79
Fix cycle A (Longitudinal turning cycle)
G290
Fixed cycle OFF
G80
Threading cycle
G292
Fixed cycle (Spot drilling)
G81
Fix cycle B (Transverse turning cycle)
G294
Fixed cycle (Drilling)
G82
C
op
Fixed cycle (Boring 1)
9-9
Serial No. 340839
9 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS
C.
Modes in which a G117/G118 command can be given
G-code
Function
G-code
Nose/Tool radius compensation (right)
G42
Linear interpolation
G01
Shaping (to the right) ON
G42.1
Dwell
G04
High-speed machining mode OFF
G05P0
Tool radius compensation for five-axis
machining (right)
Fine spline interpolation
G06.1
G42.2
G42.4
G42.5
NURBS interpolation
G06.2
Tool length offset (+)
G43
Virtual-axis interpolation
G07
Tool length offset in tool-axis direction
G43.1
Cylindrical interpolation
G07.1
Tool tip point control (Type 1) ON
G43.4
Exact-stop check
G09
Tool tip point control (Type 2) ON
G43.5
Data setting mode ON
G10
Tool length offset (–)
G44
Selection between diameter and radius
data input
G10.9
Tool position offset, extension
Data setting mode OFF
G11
Tool position offset, double extension
Polar coordinate interpolation ON
G12.1
Tool position offset, double reduction
G48
Polar coordinate interpolation OFF
G13.1
Head offset for five-surfc. machining OFF
Polar coordinate input OFF
G15
Scaling OFF
Selection of XY-plane
G17
Scaling ON
Temporary cancelation of machining
surface selection (for 5-surfc. maching.)
G17.9
Mirror image by G-code ON
Selection of ZX-plane
G18
Milling mode selection
G18.1
Turning plane selection (VARIAXIS)
er
ve
d
.
G00
re
s
Function
Positioning
G45
G46
G47
G49.1
G50
G51
G51.1
Local coordinate system setting
G52
Ram spindle offset OFF
G52.2
G18.2-G18.4
Machine coordinate system selection
G53
Turning plane selection OFF
G18.9
Tool-axis direction control
G53.1
Selection of YZ-plane
G19
Workpiece coordinate system 1
G54
Inch command
Additional workpiece coordinate systems
G54.1
Selection of fixture offset
G54.2
Workpiece setup error correction
G54.4
Workpiece coordinate system 2
G55
G27
Workpiece coordinate system 3
G56
G28
Workpiece coordinate system 4
G57
G29
Workpiece coordinate system 5
G58
G30
Workpiece coordinate system 6
G59
G31
One-way positioning
G60
G31.1
Exact stop mode
G61
G31.2
High-accuracy mode (Geometry comp.)
G61.1
Reference point check
Reference point return
ZA
Return from reference point
M
A
Return to 2., 3. and 4. reference points
YA
Skip function
Multi-step skip 3
Modal spline interpolation
G61.2
G32/G33
Automatic corner override
G62
Variable lead thread cutting
G34
Tapping mode
G63
Hole machining pattern cycle (on a circle)
G34.1
Cutting mode
G64
Hole machining pattern cycle (on a line)
G35
User macro single call
G65
G36
Programmed coordinate rotation ON
G68
Automatic tool length measurement
G37
3-D coordinate conversion ON
G68
Hole machining pattern cycle (on a grid)
G37.1
Inclined-plane machining ON
G68.2
Vector selection for tool radius compens.
G38
G68.3
Corner arc for tool radius compensation
G39
Inclined-plane machining (by specifying
tool-axis direction) ON
Nose/Tool radius compensation OFF
G40
G68.4
Shaping OFF
G40.1
Incremental coordinate system establishment for inclined-plane machining
Nose/Tool radius compensation (left)
G41
Programmed coordinate rotation OFF
G69
Shaping (to the left) ON
G41.1
3-D coordinate conversion OFF
G69
Tool radius compensation for five-axis
machining (left)
G41.2
G41.4
G41.5
Fixed cycle (Chamfering cutter 1, CW)
G71.1
Fixed cycle (Chamfering cutter 2, CCW)
G72.1
Fix. cycle (High-speed deep-hole drilling)
G73
ig
ht
(c
)2
G31.3
Constant lead threading (straight, taper)
yr
Multi-step skip 2
01
3
Multi-step skip 1
G23
K
IM
Pre-move stroke check OFF
G22
A
Se
Pre-move stroke check ON
ZA
G21
ri
Metric command
K
o.
G20
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
G51.2
al
Polygonal machining mode ON
N
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
Tool position offset, reduction
C
op
Hole machining pattern cycle (on an arc)
9-10
Serial No. 340839
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS
G-code
Function
G-code
G74
Initial point level return in fixed cycles
Fixed cycle (Boring 1)
G75
R-point level return in fixed cycles
G99
Fixed cycle (Boring 2)
G76
Single program multi-process control
G109
Fixed cycle (Back spot facing)
G77
Cross machining control axis selection
G110/G110.1
Fixed cycle (Boring 3)
G78
Cross machining control axis cancellation
G111
Fixed cycle (Boring 4)
G79
M, S, T, B output to opposite system
G112
Fixed cycle OFF
G80
Hob milling mode OFF
G113
Fixed cycle (Spot drilling)
G81
Hob milling mode ON
G114.3
Fixed cycle (Drilling)
G82
Tornado cycle
G130
Fixed cycle (Pecking)
G82.2
Measurement macro
G136
Fixed cycle (Deep-hole drilling)
G83
Compensation macro
G137
Fixed cycle (Tapping)
G84
Finishing cycle
G270
Fixed cycle (Synchronous tapping)
G84.2
Longitudinal roughing cycle
Fix. cycle (Synchronous reverse tapping)
G84.3
Transverse roughing cycle
Fixed cycle (Reaming)
G85
Contour-parallel roughing cycle
Fixed cycle (Boring 5)
G86
Longitudinal cut-off cycle
Fixed cycle (Back boring)
G87
Transverse cut-off cycle
Fixed cycle (Boring 6)
G88
Compound thread-cutting cycle
Fixed cycle (Boring 7)
G89
Face driling cycle
Absolute data input
G90
Face tapping cycle
Incremental data input
G91
Face synchronous tapping cycle
G284.2
Coordinate system setting/Spindle speed
range setting
G92
Face boring cycle
G285
Outside driling cycle
G287
Workpiece coordinate system rotation
G92.5
Outside tapping cycle
G288
Inverse time feed
G93
Outside synchronous tapping cycle
G288.2
Feed per minute (asynchronous)
G94
Outside boring cycle
G289
Feed per revolution (synchronous)
Fix cycle A (Longitudinal turning cycle)
G290
Threading cycle
G292
Fix cycle B (Transverse turning cycle)
G294
er
ve
d
G271
re
s
G272
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
G273
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
A
G97
ZA
G96
Se
Constant surface speed control OFF
ri
Constant surface speed control ON
K
o.
al
G95
9-11
G98
.
Fixed cycle (Reverse tapping)
N
Function
9
G274
G275
G276
G283
G284
ht
ig
yr
op
C
01
3
)2
(c
K
ZA
al
ri
Se
A
K
IM
ZA
A
M
YA
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
N
ts
gh
ri
.
er
ve
d
re
s
Serial No. 340839
9 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS
9-12 E
Serial No. 340839
SPINDLE FUNCTIONS
10
10 SPINDLE FUNCTIONS
10-1 Spindle Function
10-1-1 Binary output of spindle speed
.
By designating a 6-digit number at address S (as an S-code), this function enables the appropriate gear signals, voltages corresponding to the commanded spindle speed (rpm) and start
signals to be output.
Processing and completion sequences are required for all S commands.
The analog signal specifications are given below.
er
ve
d
Output voltage .........................0 to 10V or –8 to +8V
re
s
Resolution ...............................1/4096 (2 to the power of –12)
Load conditions .......................10 kiloohms
gh
ts
Output impedance ...................220 ohms
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Parameters corresponding to individual gears
.A
ll
ri
If the parameters for up to 4 gear range steps are set in advance, the gear range corresponding
to the S command will be selected by the NC unit and the gear signal will be output. The analog
voltage is calculated in accordance with the input gear signal.
Limit speed, maximum speed, gear shift speed and maximum speed during tapping.
Parameters corresponding to all gears
Orient speed, minimum speed
K
ri
al
N
o.
An S-code composed of a six-digit integral part and a three-digit decimal part can be used when
the decimal point is valid for a spindle speed command.
ZA
A
Se
10-1-2 Spindle speed command with decimal digits
K
IM
A spindle speed command (S-code) can be given with up to the third decimal place.
ZA
Decimal point for spindle speed command
Invalid
6 integral + 3 decimal digits
6 integral digits
A
Valid
YA
M
Number of digits
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
It depends upon the specifications of the machine whether the decimal point is valid or invalid for
spindle speed command.
10-1
Serial No. 340839
10 SPINDLE FUNCTIONS
10-2 Spindle Speed Range Setting: G92
1.
Function and purpose
The code G92 can be used to set the maximum and minimum spindle speeds at addresses S
and Q, respectively.
2.
Programming format
Detailed description
re
s
3.
er
ve
d
s: Maximum spindle speed
q: Minimum spindle speed
r: Spindle for speed limitation (to be specified with 3 for the milling spindle)
.
G92 Ss Qq Rr;
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
For gear change between the spindle and spindle motor, four steps of gear range can be set by
–1
the related parameters in steps of 1 min . In range defined by two ways, parameter setting and
G92 SsQq setting, the smaller data will be used for the upper limit and the larger data for the
lower limit.
Do not fail to designate the spindle with argument “R3” in the G92 command block.
10-2 E
Serial No. 340839
TOOL FUNCTIONS
11
11 TOOL FUNCTIONS
11-1 Tool Function (for ATC Systems)
A next tool can be designated for the machine provided with ATC function by commanding
T-code in the format shown below. The next tool refers to a tool used for the next machining,
which can be assigned when it is currently accomodated in the magazine. The next tool in the
magazine can be indexed at the ATC position beforehand by commanding the next tool, thus
permitting reduced ATC time.
er
ve
d
.
As for machines equipped with the function for allowing multiple sets of tool data to be registered
under one tool number, use the tool ID code to select a desired data set for the particular tool.
The tool ID code is not required at all for machines without the function mentioned above, or can
be omitted if it concerns the tool data set registered on the first line for the tool in question.
It depends upon the specifications of the machine whether or not multiple sets of tool
data can be registered under one and the same tool number.
gh
ts
re
s
Note :
ri
T .◇◇ T△△△.◇◇ M6 ;
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
: Number of the tool to be changed for
◇◇: Tool ID code
△△△: Number of the tool to be used next
Use two digits after the decimal point as follows to designate the tool ID code with reference to
the settings on the TOOL DATA display:
ID CODE
w/o
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
◇◇
00
01
02
03
o.
<Normal tools>
05
06
07
08
09
11
12
13
Q
R
al
S
15
16
17
18
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
21
22
23
24
25
26
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
◇◇
K
IM
A
ID CODE
61
ZA
<Heavy tools>
T
19
K
P
14
ZA
N
◇◇
Se
ID CODE
ri
N
04
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
71
72
73
Q
A
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
M
N
P
◇◇
74
75
76
77
78
79
81
82
83
84
85
86
01
3
YA
ID CODE
62
)2
11-2 Tool Function (T3-Digit)
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
Tool function is also referred to as T-code function. This function is used to select tool numbers.
For our NC unit, T function allows you to select a maximum of 1000 numbers (0 to 999) using
three-digit command data preceded by address T. Selection of an illegal T-code results in the
alarm 294 NO TOOL SELECT (INCORRECT TNo.).
Refer to the relevant manual of the machine for the actually available range of
T-codes.
The T-code can be given with any other commands in one block, and the T-code given together
with an axis motion command is executed, depending upon the machine specifications, in one of
the following two timings:
The T-code is not executed till completion of the motion command, or
The T-code is executed simultaneously with the motion command.
11-1
Serial No. 340839
11 TOOL FUNCTIONS
11-3 Tool Function (8-Digit T-Code)
This function allows you to select a tool number (from 0 to 99999999) using eight-digit command
data preceded by address T. Only one T-code can be included in a block.
Set bit 4 of parameter F94 to 0 to select the group-number designation for T-code funciton, or set
this bit to 1 to select the tool-number designation.
11-4 Tool Function [with Tool Identifiers]
.
It is also possible to use tool identifiers (TOOL IDENT settings in up to 32 characters on the
TOOL DATA display) for programming Tool functions (T-codes).
er
ve
d
11-4-1 Programming format
For ATC systems
gh
1.
ts
re
s
T-codes are to be programmed with tool identifiers enclosed in brackets (< and >), as shown
below.
.A
ll
ri
T <> T<△△△> M6
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
2.
N
: Identifier of the tool to be changed for
△△△: Identifier of the tool to be used next
For group-number designation with 8-digit T-codes
Specify tools with a tool identifier enclosed in brackets (< and >) at address T.
N
o.
11-4-2 Spare tool selection
K
ZA
A
K
IM
When F329 bit 7 = 0
Se
ri
al
A spare tool is automatically selected if the tool specified with a tool identifier is found to have
reached its life. The method of spare tool selection depends upon the setting in bit 7 of
parameter F329, as follows.
ZA
According to the settings in F94 bit 4 and F84 bit 2, spare tool selection occurs with reference
to tool names or tool group numbers.
F84 bit 2
Selection by
YA
M
A
F94 bit 4
0
)2
01
3
Setting
1
0
Tool group numbers
1
Tool names
0
Tool group numbers
1
Tool names
ht
(c
When F329 bit 7 = 1
yr
ig
Spare tool selection occurs with reference to tool identifiers.
C
op
11-4-3 Precautions
Characters available for setting tool identifiers are: letters (capital and small: A to Z and a to z),
numerals and symbols (“+” “–” “_” and “.”).
Do not use a tool ID code setting as tool identifier; otherwise an alarm is raised (806 ILLEGAL ADDRESS).
Tools of the same identifier are all regarded as spare ones, and tools are automatically
selected in order with the smallest tool number (TNo.) first.
Alarm 841 DESIGNATED TOOL NOT FOUND is raised if the specified tool identifier is not
yet registered in the memory.
11-2
Serial No. 340839
TOOL FUNCTIONS
11
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT is raised if the specified tool identifier consists of more than 32
characters (inclusive of spaces).
11-3
ht
ig
yr
op
C
01
3
)2
(c
K
ZA
al
ri
Se
A
K
IM
ZA
A
M
YA
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
N
ts
gh
ri
.
er
ve
d
re
s
Serial No. 340839
11 TOOL FUNCTIONS
11-4 E
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12-1 Tool Offset
1.
Overview
re
s
er
ve
d
.
As shown in the diagram below, three types of basic tool offset functions are available: tool
position offset, tool length offset, and tool radius compensation.
These three types of offset functions use offset numbers for designation of offset amount. Set the
amount of offset directly using the operation panel or by applying the function of programmed
parameter input. MAZATROL tool data can also be used for tool length offset or tool radius
compensation operations according to the parameter setting.
L2
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
Tool position offset
L1
r
L1 – r
(Contraction)
ZA
Tool length
Side view
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
Tool length offset
Reference point
A
ri
al
Plan
K
o.
L2 + 2r (Double extension)
N
r
Offset to
the right
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Tool radius compensaiton
Offset to the left
C
op
yr
ig
Plan
MEP055
12-1
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
2.
Selecting the amounts of tool offset
The amounts of tool offset corresponding to the offset numbers must be prestored on the TOOL
OFFSET display by manual data input method or programmed data setting function (G10).
The mounts of tool offset can be selected using one of the following two types:
A.
Type A
The same amount of offset will be set if identical offset numbers are selected using commands D
and H.
er
ve
d
.
Reference
point
(Dn) = an
re
s
(Hn) = an
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
a1
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
B.
N
a2
Type B
MEP056
K
ZA
(Hn) = bn+cn
K
IM
Reference
point
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Set an H-code and D-code, respectively, to use the total sum of the geometric offset amount and
the wear compensation amount for tool length offset and tool radius compensation.
M
01
3
YA
b1
A
ZA
(Dn) = dn+en
d1
e1
MEP057
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
c1
12-2
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
3.
12
TOOL OFFSET display types
As a data storage area for tool offsetting functions, two types of the TOOL OFFSET display are
provided: Type A and Type B.
A.
Type
Length/Radius distinguished?
Geometric/Wear distinguished?
A
No
No
B
Yes
Yes
Type A
Offset amount
1
a1
2
a2
3
a3
B.
ts
gh
ri
an
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
n
re
s
Offset No.
.A
ll
(H1) = a1
(H2) = a2
(Hn) = an
N
(D1) = a1,
(D2) = a2,
(Dn) = an,
er
ve
d
.
As listed in the table below, one offset data is given for one offset number. No distinction is
drawn between length, radius, geometric and wear compensation amounts. That is, one set of
offset data comprises all these four factors.
Type B
A
K
ZA
Tool length (H)
Geometric offset
YA
2
)2
3
01
3
1
(c
ht
Geometric offset
Wear compensation
b1
c1
d1
e1
b2
c2
d2
e2
b3
c3
d3
e3
bn
cn
dn
en
C
op
yr
ig
n
Tool radius (D) / (Position offset)
Wear compensation
M
Offset No.
ZA
K
IM
Se
(H1) = b1 + c1, (D1) = d1 + e1
(H2) = b2 + c2, (D2) = d2 + e2
(Hn) = bn + cn, (Dn) = dn + en
A
ri
al
N
o.
As listed in the table below, two types of offset data can be set for one offset number. That is,
different amounts of geometric offset and wear compensation can be set for each of the selected
tool length and the selected tool radius.
Use command H to select offset data concerning the tool length, and use command D to select
offset data concerning the tool radius.
12-3
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
4.
Tool offset numbers (H/D)
Tool offset numbers can be selected using address H or D.
Use address H to offset the selected tool length. Use address D to offset the selected tool
position or the selected tool radius.
Once a tool offset number has been selected, it will remain unchanged until a new H or D is
used.
Offset numbers can be set only once for one block. If offset numbers are set more than once
for one block, only the last offset number will be used.
±84.50000 in
TOOL OFFSET Type B
Length Wear
±99.9999 mm
±9.99999 in
TOOL OFFSET Type B
Dia. Geom.
±999.9999 mm
±84.50000 in
TOOL OFFSET Type B
Dia. Wear
±9.9999 mm
±0.99999 in
re
s
±1999.9999 mm
ts
TOOL OFFSET Type B
Length Geom.
gh
±84.50000 in
ri
±1999.9999 mm
.A
ll
TOOL OFFSET Type A
N
Inch
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Metric
er
ve
d
.
The offset data range is as listed in the table below.
Offset data for each offset number must be set beforehand on the TOOL OFFSET display.
H-code with a numeric value of zero (H0) cancels the mode of tool length offset if bit 1 of
parameter F170 is set to “1.” This does not apply when F170 bit 1 = 0.
o.
The tool offset number (H- or D-code) cannot be made effective if it is not designated in
the corresponding offset mode.
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
Note :
12-4
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12
12-2 Tool Length Offset/Cancellation: G43, G44, or T-Code/G49
1.
Function and purpose
Commands G43 and G44 allow the ending point of move commands to be shifted through the
previously set offset amount for each axis. Any deviations between programmed tool size and
actual length or radius can be set as offset data using these commands to make the program
more flexible.
2.
Programming format
er
ve
d
Detailed description
re
s
3.
.
G43 Zz Hh .......... Tool length offset +
G44 Zz Hh .......... Tool length offset –
G49 Zz ................ Cancellation of tool length offset
.A
ll
Z-axis motion distance
±z + ｛±h1 – (±h0)｝
Positive-direction offset by length offset amount
G44Z±zHh1
±z + ｛±h1 – (±h0)｝
Negative-direction offset by length offset amount
G49Z±z
±z – (±h1)
Cancellation of the offset amount
N
G43Z±zHh1
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
1.
ri
gh
ts
The following represents the relationship between the programming format and the stroke of
movement after offsetting.
h1: BA62 + Value of offset No. h1
h0: Offset amount existing before the G43 or G44 block
K
ZA
G80
YA
M
G94 G00 G40
G28 Z0 X0
T00 M06
G54 X0 Y0
Z5. H01
Z-50. F100
01
3
G90
G91
T01
G90
G43
G01
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
N001
N002
N003
N004
N005
N006
A
ZA
For absolute data input
(H01: Z = 95.)
A
Sample programs
K
IM
2.
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Irrespective of whether absolute or incremental programming method is used, the actual
ending point coordinates are calculated by offsetting the programmed end point coordinate
through the offset amount.
The initial state (upon turning-on or after M02) is of G49 (tool length offset cancellation).
12-5
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
Supplement
1)
Use bit 3 of parameter F92 to select the axes to which tool length offset is to be applied.
Offsetting (by G43H or G44H) is applied to the Z-axis only and to all the three orthogonal axes (X, Y, and Z), respectively, when F92 bit 3 is set to 1 and 0.
2)
Offsetting through the specified amount is always performed for a block of G43H or
G44H, irrespective of whether or not an axis motion command is given in the same
block.
When F92 bit 3 = 0
Programming example
Motion by the offset amount on the X-,
Y-, and Z-axis.
Motion by the offset amount on the
Z-axis only.
G43 Xx2 Hh2
G49
X-axis movement to the commanded
position shifted by the offset amount,
along with the motion on the Y- and
Z-axis by the same offset amount.
X-axis movement to the commanded
position, along with the motion on the
Z-axis by the offset amount.
G43 Yy3 Hh3
G49
Y-axis movement to the commanded
position shifted by the offset amount,
along with the motion on the X- and
Z-axis by the same offset amount.
Y-axis movement to the commanded
position, along with the motion on the
Z-axis by the offset amount.
G43 Xx4 Yy4 Zz4 Hh4
G49
Simultaneous movement on the three
axes (X, Y, and Z) to the commanded
position uniformly shifted by the offset
amount.
Simultaneous movement on the three
axes (X, Y, and Z) to the commanded
position that is shifted only on the
Z-axis by the offset amount.
er
ve
d
re
s
ts
gh
ri
.A
ll
N
If reference point (zero point) return is performed in the offsetting mode, the mode is
cancelled after completion of the returning operation.
o.
Programming example
G43 Hh1
G28 Zz2
ZA
ri
al
N
Upon completion of return to the reference point (zero point), the offset amount
is cleared.
K
IM
A
Reference point return after a Z-axis motion at the current position for clearing
the offset amount.
Se
G43 Hh1
G49 G28 Zz2
If command G49 or H00 is executed, length offsetting will be immediately cancelled
(the corresponding axis will move to clear the offset amount to zero).
When using MAZATROL tool data, do not use G49 as a cancellation command code;
otherwise interference with the workpiece may result since automatic cancellation
moves the tool on the Z-axis in minus direction through the distance equivalent to the
tool length.
Use an H00 command, rather than a G49 command, if G43/G44 mode is to be
cancelled temporarily.
The alarm 839 ILLEGAL OFFSET No. will occur if an offset number exceeding the
machine specifications is set.
6)
When tool offset data and MAZATROL tool data are both validated, offsetting is
executed by the sum of the two data items concerned.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
5)
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
4)
.
G43 Hh1
G49
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
3)
When F92 bit 3 = 1
K
3.
12-6
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12
12-3 Tool Length Offset in Tool-Axis Direction: G43.1 (Option)
1.
Function and purpose
The preparatory function G43.1 refers to offsetting the tool, in whatever direction it may be
inclined three-dimensionally, in the direction of its axis through the length offset amount.
In the G43.1 mode the tool length offsetting is always performed in the tool-axis direction, in
accordance with the motion command for a rotational axis concerned, through the relevant offset
amount.
Programming format
Tool length offset in tool-axis direction ON
.
A.
er
ve
d
2.
re
s
G43.1 (XxYyZz) Hh
h: Number of length offset amount
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
- A block of G43.1 can contain movement commands for the orthogonal axes (X, Y, and Z), but
those for rotational axes, any other G-code and an M-, S-, T- or B-code must not be entered in
the same block; otherwise an alarm is caused.
B.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
- The argument H (for specifying the number of length offset amount) can be omitted when
parameter F93 bit 3 = 1 (use of LENGTH data prepared on the TOOL DATA display for
executing EIA/ISO programs).
Tool length offset in tool-axis direction OFF
G49
N
o.
- The execution of a G49 command does not cause any axis motion.
K
ZA
A
Offset amount selection
K
IM
C.
Se
ri
al
- The cancellation command G49 must be given independently (without any other instruction
codes); otherwise an alarm is caused.
M
A
ZA
The table below indicates those usage patterns [1] to [4] of the externally stored tool offset data
items which are applied to the tool length offset in tool-axis direction according to the settings of
the relevant parameters (F93 bit 3 and F94 bit 7).
YA
Data items used
(Display and Data item names)
01
3
Pattern
TOOL OFFSET
(c
TOOL DATA
ig
ht
[2]
)2
[1]
C
op
yr
[3]
[4]
Offset data items
Parameter
F94 bit 7
F93 bit 3
0
0
1
1
LENGTH
Programming method
G43.1 with H-code
T-code + G43.1
LENGTH + LENG. No.
LENGTH + LENG. CO.
T-code + G43.1 with H-code
TOOL DATA
LENG. No.
LENG. CO.
1
0
G43.1 with H-code
TOOL OFFSET +
TOOL DATA
Offset data items +
LENGTH
0
1
T-code + G43.1 with H-code
12-7
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
3.
On the processing of offset amount for the axis of rotation
According to the definition of the tool length there are two types of tool length offset in the
direction of the tool axis as described below.
Type
Inclusion of offset amount for the axis of rotation
Exclusion of offset amount for the axis of rotation
F168 bit 2 = 0
F168 bit 2 = 1
Description
Tool length is defined as a distance between the
tool tip and the axis of rotation of the tool axis.
This is the initial setting.
Tool length is defined as a distance between the
tool tip and the tool mounting edge. (The distance
of the tool mounting edge [spindle nose] from the
axis of rotation of the tool axis is excluded.)
ri
: Tool length offset amount
Operation of startup
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
4.
N
.A
ll
: Tool length offset amount
: Offset amount for the axis of rotation
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Parameter
The operation at the selection of the tool length offset in tool-axis direction depends upon
whether or not the motion command for an orthogonal axis is given in the G43.1 block as follows:
Motion commands for orthogonal axes
given
A
ZA
G90;
G43.1XxYyZzHh;
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
G43.1Hh;
K
N
o.
not given
Operation
Z
01
3
(c
)2
X
No motions occur at all.
(A motion by the offset amount does not occur.)
A motion occurs for a point of the specified
coordinates, inclusive of the amount for length
offset in tool-axis direction.
yr
ig
ht
(x, y, z)
Y
C
op
- “Given” is the orthogonal-axis motion command when the G43.1 block contains even only one
command for an orthogonal axis.
5.
Operation of cancellation
The mode of tool length offset in tool-axis direction is cancelled by a G49 command.
- The execution of a G49 command does not cause any axis motion.
- The cancellation command G49 must be given independently (without any other instruction
codes); otherwise an alarm is caused.
12-8
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
6.
12
Vector components for tool length offset in tool-axis direction
When the axes related to rotating the tool axis are A- and C-axis:
Vx = L × sin (A) × sin (C)
Vy = –L × sin (A) × cos (C)
Vz = L × cos (A)
2.
When the axes related to rotating the tool axis are B- and C-axis:
Vx = L × sin (B) × cos (C)
Vy = –L × sin (B) × sin (C)
Vz = L × cos (B)
er
ve
d
1.
.
The orthogonal axis components of the vector for tool length offset in tool-axis direction are
internally calculated as follows:
X-, Y-, and Z-components of the vector for tool length offset in tool-axis direction
L
Amount of tool length offset
:
Amount of angular motion on the rotational axis
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
(A), (B), (C) :
re
s
Vx, Vy, Vz :
12-9
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
7.
Operation in the mode of tool length offset in tool-axis direction
The following example shows how the path of the tool tip can be shifted as required simply by
changing the offset amount for the tool length offset in tool-axis direction.
Machining program
X-axis
N01 G29XYZBC
N02 G90G54
N03 G0 B90.C0
N04 G43.1H1
N05 X85.000 Y0.000 Z0.000
N06 G1 F10000.
N07 X85.000 Z0.000 B90.
N08 X55.000 Z0.000 B90.
N09 X54.992 Z0.960 B89.
N10 X54.966 Z1.919 B88.
N11 X54.925 Z2.878 B87.
N12 X54.866 Z3.837 B86.
N13 X54.791 Z4.794 B85.
N14 X54.699 Z5.749 B84.
N15 X54.590 Z6.703 B83.
N16 X54.465 Z7.655 B82.
N17 X54.323 Z8.604 B81.
N18 X54.164 Z9.551 B80.
N19 X85.000
N20 G49
M30
Offset amount
enlarged
Offset amount
enlarged
N08 (X60.Z0)
N18 (X59.088, Z10.419)
er
ve
d
N18 (X54.164, Z9.551)
.
N08 (X55.Z0)
N08 (X50.Z0)
re
s
N18 (X49.240, Z8.682)
Offset amount
reduced
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
Offset amount
reduced
o.
Z-axis
K
al
N
D740PB0028
YA
ZA
A
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
The blocks N08 to N18 sequentially describe the points in the ZX-plane, with the Z- and X-components of the position vector, in a distance of 55 mm from the origin [(X, Z) = 0, 0)] according to
the angles of rotating the tool axis on the B-axis. Now, an external change of the offset amount
(for the offset number H1) allows the tool to be shifted in the direction of the tool axis through the
difference in offset amount without having to rewrite the program. Enlarge and reduce the offset
amount, respectively, to shift the tool away from, and in the direction of, the origin of the
ZX-plane.
Initial offset amount + 5
Initial offset amount – 5
X55.000, Z0.000
X60.000, Z0.000
X50.000, Z0.000
X54.992, Z0.960
X59.992, Z1.047
X49.992, Z0.873
01
3
With the initial offset amount
N09
X54.966, Z1.919
X59.963, Z2.094
X49.970, Z1.745
N11
X59.918, Z3.140
X49.931, Z2.617
ht
N12
X54.866, Z3.837
X59.854, Z4.185
X49.878, Z3.488
N13
X54.791, Z4.794
X59.772, Z5.229
X49.810, Z4.358
N14
X54.699, Z5.749
X59.671, Z6.272
X49.726, Z5.226
N15
X54.590, Z6.703
X59.553, Z7.312
X49.627, Z6.093
N16
X54.465, Z7.655
X59.416, Z8.350
X49.513, Z6.959
N17
X54.323, Z8.604
X59.261, Z9.386
X49.384, Z7.822
N18
X54.164, Z9.551
X59.088, Z10.419
X49.240, Z8.682
C
op
yr
X54.925, Z2.878
ig
(c
N10
)2
N08
12-10
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
8.
12
Resetting the tool length offset in tool-axis direction
The tool length offset in tool-axis direction is cancelled in the following cases:
- The
key is pressed,
- M02, M30, M998 or M999 is executed,
- G49 is executed, or
- A command for offset number zero (G43.1H0) is executed.
9.
Compatibility with the other functions
Commands available in the mode of tool length offset in tool-axis direction
Function
Code
Function
Positioning
G61
Exact stop check mode
G01
Linear interpolation
G61.1
Geometry compensation
G02
Circular interpolation (CW)
(Note 1)
G64
Cutting mode
G03
Circular interpolation (CCW)
(Note 1)
G65
User macro single call
G04
Dwell
G90
Absolute data input
G05
High-speed machining mode
G91
Incremental data input
G09
Exact-stop check
G93
Inverse time feed
G17
XY-plane selection
G94
Feed per minute (asynchronous)
G18
ZX-plane selection
G112
M, S, T, B output to opposite system (Note 2)
G19
YZ-plane selection
M98
Subprogram call
G40
Nose R/Tool radius compensation OFF
M99
Subprogram end
G41.5
Tool radius compensation
for five-axis machining
to the left
F
Feed function
G42.5
MSTB
M-, S-, T-, and B-code
G49
Tool length offset OFF
G50
Scaling OFF
Macro
instruction
Local variable, Common variable, Operation
command, Control command
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
(Note 3)
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
K
ZA
A
Se
ri
al
N
to the right
re
s
G00
o.
Code
er
ve
d
.
A.
(Note 2)
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Note 1: A command for helical or spiral interpolation leads to an alarm (1812 ILLEGAL CMD IN
G43.1 MODE).
The same alarm will be caused when a block of circular interpolation contains a motion
command for a rotational axis.
Note 2: Giving a tool change command (T-code) in the mode of tool length offset in tool-axis
direction leads to an alarm (1812 ILLEGAL CMD IN G43.1 MODE).
Note 3: The use of G61.1 leads to an alarm (1812 ILLEGAL CMD IN G43.1 MODE) when the
geometry compensation is made invalid for rotational axes.
12-11
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
Modes in which the tool length offset in tool-axis direction is selectable
Code
Function
Code
Function
Positioning
G54.4Pp
Workpiece setup error correction
G10.9
Radius data input for X
G61
Exact stop check mode
G13.1
Polar coordinate interpolation OFF
G61.1
Geometry compensation
G15
Polar coordinate input OFF
G64
Cutting mode
G17
XY-plane selection
G65
User macro single call
G18
ZX-plane selection
G67
User macro modal call OFF
G19
YZ-plane selection
G69
3-D coordinate conversion OFF
G20
Inch data input
G80
Fixed cycle OFF
G21
Metric data input
G90
Absolute data input
G23
Pre-move stroke check OFF
G91
Incremental data input
G40.1
Control in perpendicular direction OFF
G93
Inverse time feed
G41.5
to the left
G94
Feed per minute (asynchronous)
to the right
re
s
er
ve
d
.
G00
G97
Constant surface speed control OFF
G43
Tool length offset (+)
G98
Initial point level return in fixed cycles
G44
Tool length offset (–)
G99
R-point level return in fixed cycles
G49
Tool length offset OFF
G109
Two-system control by one program
G50
Scaling OFF
G110
Cross machining control ON
G50.1
Mirror image OFF
G111
Cross machining control OFF
G50.2
Polygonal machining mode OFF
G113
Hob milling mode OFF
G54
Selection of workpiece coordinate system
gh
ri
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Tracing
al
1.
o.
10. Restrictions and precautions
ts
G42.5
Tool radius compensation
for five-axis machining
K
B.
Tool path check
ZA
A
ZA
2.
K
IM
Se
ri
It is not the movement of the actual tool tip, but of the point shifted from the spindle nose
through the length offset amount, that is traced in the mode of tool length offset in tool-axis
direction. It depends on the parameter setting concerned whether or not the offset amount
used in tracing includes the “axis-of-rotation offset” amount.
01
3
YA
M
A
As with tracing, the motion path of the point shifted from the spindle nose through the length
offset amount (not of the tool tip) is drawn in the mode of tool length offset in tool-axis
direction. It also depends on the parameter setting concerned whether or not the offset
amount used in tool path check includes the “axis-of-rotation offset” amount.
Measurement
)2
3.
Tool change command (T-code)
C
op
yr
ig
4.
ht
(c
The use of a measuring cycle or the skip function in the mode of tool length offset in
tool-axis direction leads to an alarm (1812 ILLEGAL CMD IN G43.1 MODE).
5.
Giving a tool change command (T-code) in the mode of tool length offset in tool-axis
direction leads to an alarm (1812 ILLEGAL CMD IN G43.1 MODE).
Interruption
Do not attempt to interrupt the operation in the mode of tool length offset in tool-axis
direction (be it by using manual operation mode, MDI operation mode, or using the pulse
handle); otherwise an alarm is caused (1812 ILLEGAL CMD IN G43.1 MODE).
6.
Circular interpolation
Do not enter any motion command for a rotational axis in a block of circular interpolation in
the mode of tool length offset in tool-axis direction; otherwise an alarm is caused (1812
ILLEGAL CMD IN G43.1 MODE).
12-12
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
7.
12
Others
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Do not give a command for corner rounding/chamfering, a linear angle command, or a
geometric command; otherwise an alarm is caused (1812 ILLEGAL CMD IN G43.1 MODE).
12-13
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12-4 Tool Position Offset: G45 to G48
1.
Function and purpose
Command G45 or G46 allows the axis movement distance set previously in that block to be
increased or decreased, respectively, according to the offset data. Likewise, command G47 or
G48 extends or contracts the previously set distance by twice the offset stroke, respectively.
G46 command
Extended through
offset stroke only
Contracted through
offset stroke only
Moving
stroke
Ending
point
Starting
point
Ending
point
ts
Starting
point
er
ve
d
Moving
stroke
re
s
Internal
calculation
gh
Internal
calculation
.
G45 command
G48 command
Contracted through
twice the offset stroke
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Internal
calculation
N
Internal
calculation
.A
ll
ri
G47 command
Extended through
twice the offset stroke
Moving
stroke
Moving
stroke
Starting
point
Ending
point
N
o.
Ending
point
Starting
point
K
ri
ZA
Function
ZA
Programming format
(Moving stroke after offset)
A
K
IM
Programming format
=
(Offset stroke)
Se
2.
al
±
(Program command value)
To extend a moving stroke by the offset stroke which has been set in the offset
memory.
G46 Xx Dd
To contract a moving stroke by the offset stroke which has been set in the offset
memory.
01
3
YA
M
A
G45 Xx Dd
)2
G47 Xx Dd
To contract a moving stroke by twice the offset stroke which has been set in the
offset memory.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
G48 Xx Dd
To extend a moving stroke by twice the offset stroke which has been set in the
offset memory.
12-14
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
3.
12
Detailed description
- Programming based on incremental data is shown below.
Stroke of movement by
equivalent tape command
(selected offset stroke = )
= 10
= –10
X = 1010
X = 990
G45 X–x Dd
X – {x + }
= 10
= –10
X = –1010
X = –990
G46 Xx Dd
X {x – }
= 10
= –10
X = 990
X = 1010
G46 X–x Dd
X – {x – }
= 10
= –10
X = –990
X = –1010
G47 Xx Dd
X {x + 2}
= 10
= –10
X = 1020
X = 980
G47 X–x Dd
X – {x + 2}
= 10
= –10
X = –1020
X = –980
G48 Xx Dd
X {x – 2}
= 10
= –10
X = 980
X = 1020
G48 X–x Dd
X – {x – 2}
= 10
= –10
er
ve
d
X {x + }
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
G45 Xx Dd
.
Example
(with x = 1000)
re
s
Tape command
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
X = –980
X = –1020
- Even if no offset numbers are set in the same block as that which contains commands G45 to
G48, offsetting will be performed, based on previously stored tool position offset numbers.
o.
- An alarm 839 ILLEGAL OFFSET No. will occur if the designated offset number is an
unavailable one.
K
ZA
ri
al
N
- These G-code commands are not modal ones, and thus they are valid only for the designated
block.
A
K
IM
Se
- These commands must be used in modes other than the fixed-cycle mode. They will be
ignored if used in the fixed-cycle mode.
A
ZA
- The axis will move in reverse if internal calculation for changing the movement distance results
in inversion of the direction of movement.
M
Starting point
YA
Program command: G48 X20.000
+ 15.000
Real movement:
X–10.000
Ending point
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Offset stroke:
yr
ig
MEP060
C
op
- The following lists how the machine operates if a movement distance of 0 using the incremental
data command mode (G91) is programmed:
NC command
G45 X0 D01
G45 X–0 D01
G46 X0 D01
G46 X–0 D01
Equivalent command
X1234
X–1234
X–1234
X1234
D01: Offset number
1234: Offset amount for D01
For absolute data commands, if the movement distance is set equal to 0, the block will be
immediately completed and no movement through the offset distance will occur.
12-15
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
- When absolute data commands are used, each axis will also move from the ending point
preset in the preceding block to the position set in the block that contains commands G45
through G48.
That is, when absolute data commands are used, offsetting will be performed according to the
movement distance (increments in distance) set in that block.
Sample programs
During circular interpolation, tool radius compensation using commands G45 to G48 can be
done only for a 1/4, 1/2, or 3/4 circle whose starting and ending points are present on a
coordinate axis passing through the arc center.
Y
(D01 = 200)
G91 G45 G03 X–1000 Y1000 I–1000 F1000 D01
Ending point
Programmed
path
gh
ts
re
s
Tool center path
ri
200
.A
ll
1000
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
X
N
Tool
1000
Programmed
arc center
.
1.
er
ve
d
4.
Starting point
Tool position offset, with 1/4 arc command given
MEP061
If an “n” number of axes are designated at the same time, the same amount of offsetting will
be performed on all designated axes. This also applies to additional axes, but within the
limits of the simultaneously controllable axis quantity.
ZA
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
2.
YA
01
3
110.
ht
(c
)2
60.
Starting point
50.
50.
Programmed ending point
X
220.
270.
MEP062
C
op
yr
ig
Ending point after offset
M
A
Y
G01 G45 X220. Y60. D20
(D20 = +50.000)
12-16
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
Note:
12
Use tool radius compensation commands G40, G41, or G42 if simultaneous offsetting
of two axes is likely to result in excessive or insufficient cutting as shown below.
Programmed path
Tool center path
Desirable shape
er
ve
d
.
G01 G45 Xx1 Dd1
Xx2 Yy2
G45 Yy3
Workpiece
Y
ts
re
s
Machining shape
X
.A
ll
ri
gh
Insufficient cutting
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Tool
MEP063
K
ZA
K
IM
Programmed path
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
: Set value of offset stroke
Tool center path
ZA
G01 Xx1
G45 Xx2 Yy2 Dd2
Yy3
01
3
YA
M
A
Machining shape
Workpiece
Y
Excessive cutting
X
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
Desirable shape
Tool
: Set value of offset stroke
MEP064
12-17
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
3.
Cornering in a 1/4 circle
N4
Tool center path
G46
G45
G45
G01
G00
G01
G03
Xx4
Xx1
Yy2
Xx3
Yy1
Ff2
Yy3
Dd1
Ii3
er
ve
d
N1
N2
N3
N4
re
s
Programmed path
.
N3
ts
Y
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N1
N
X
.A
ll
ri
gh
N2
12-18
MEP065
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
4.
12
When commands G45 to G48 are set, each of the corresponding amounts of offsetting will
become those designated by the offset numbers; unlike the tool length offset command
(G43), these commands will not move the axes through the difference from the previous
offset amount.
Tool center path
Programmed path
N111
N107
N112
N106
N108
N110
N104
N105
30
R10
N113
R20
er
ve
d
.
N109
N114
re
s
N103
R10
.A
ll
ri
gh
N115
ts
40
40
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N116
N100
30
10
30
30
40
10
K
al
N
o.
Starting point
G48
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
G45
G45
G45
G46
M02
ZA
Y40.
X–20. Y20.
Y0
J20.
A
G00
X40.
X100. F200
X10. Y10.
Y40.
A
ZA
K
IM
G46
G01
G03
G01
X0
G02
G01
X–30.
Y–30.
X–30.
Y30.
X–30.
G03
G01
X10.
Y–40.
X–40.
M
YA
G91
G45
G45
G45
G46
G46
G45
G47
Se
ri
Offset stroke: D01 = 10.000 mm (Tool radius compensation stroke)
N100
N101
N102
N103
N104
N105
N106
N107
N108
N109
N110
N111
N112
N113
N114
N115
N116
N117
%
J10.
X–10. Y–10. J–10.
Y–20.
Y–40.
12-19
N102
N
N101
D01
MEP066
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12-5 Tool Radius Compensation: G40, G41, G42
12-5-1 Overview
1.
Function and purpose
Offsetting in any vectorial direction can be done according to the tool radius preselected using
G-codes (G38 to G42) and D-codes. This function is referred to as tool radius compensation.
For turning tools, nose-R compensation can be performed according to the designated direction
(only when TOOL OFFSET type C is selected).
G38 I_J_
To change and hold an offset vector
G39
To interpolate a corner arc
These commands can be given in the
mode of tool radius compensation.
N
Detailed description
re
s
To compensate a tool radius (to the right)
ts
To compensate a tool radius (to the left)
G42X_Y_
gh
G41X_Y_
Remarks
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
3.
Function
To cancal a tool radius compensation
ri
Programming format
G40X_Y_
er
ve
d
.
Programming format
.A
ll
2.
K
al
N
o.
For tool radius compensation, all H-code commands are ignored and only D-code commands
become valid.
Also, tool radius compensation is performed for the plane that is specified by either the plane
selection G-code command or two-axis address code command appropriate for tool radius
compensation. No such compensation is performed for axes other than those corresponding or
parallel to the selected plane.
ZA
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
See Section 6-7 to select a plane using a G-code command.
Cancellation of tool radius compensation
YA
1.
M
A
12-5-2 Tool radius compensation
01
3
Tool radius compensation is automatically cancelled in the following cases:
)2
- After power has been turned on
(c
- After the
key on the NC operation panel has been pressed
ig
ht
- After M02 or M30 has been executed (these two codes have a reset function)
C
op
yr
- After G40 (offsetting cancellation command) has been executed
In the offsetting cancellation mode, the offset vector becomes zero and the tool center path
agrees with the programmed path.
Programs containing the tool radius compensation function must be terminated during the
compensation cancellation mode. Give the G40 command in a single-command block (without
any other G-code). Otherwise it may be ignored.
12-20
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
2.
12
Startup of tool radius compensation
Tool radius compensation will begin during the compensation mode when all the following three
conditions are met:
- Command G41 or G42 has been executed.
- The offset number for tool radius compensation is larger than zero, but equal to or smaller than
the maximum available offset number.
- The command used with the compensation command is a move command other than those
used for circular interpolation.
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Compensation will be performed only when reading of three motion blocks, if possible within a
range of 23 blocks (inclusive of the startup block), is completed, irrespective of whether the
single-block operation mode is used.
During compensation, 23 blocks are pre-read and then calculation for compensation is
performed.
ri
gh
Control status
G00_
G41_
G01_
G02_
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
S_
.A
ll
T_
Machining
program
Start of pre-reading
23 blocks
G01_
G02_
G41_
G01_
G02_
G41_
G01_
T_
ZA
A
S_
G00_
ZA
K
IM
Se
G00_
K
Blocks executed
S_
al
T_
ri
Pre-read buffer
N
o.
Offset buffer
G02_
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
There are two types of compensation startup operation: Type A and Type B.
It depends on the setting of bit 4 of parameter F92 whether Type A or Type B is automatically
selected.
These two types of startup operation are similar to those of compensation cancellation.
In the descriptive diagrams below, “s” signifies the ending point of single-block operation.
12-21
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
3.
Startup operation of tool radius compensation
A.
For the corner interior
Linear Linear
Linear Arc
Programmed path
Programmed path
r
r (Offset stroke)
Tool center path
s
G42
G42
re
s
Tool center
path
Starting point
MEP068
ri
gh
Arc center
ts
Starting point
For the corner exterior (obtuse angle) [90° < 180°]
.A
ll
B.
er
ve
d
.
s
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
(Type A/B selection is possible with a predetermined parameter.)
Linear Linear (Type A)
Linear Arc (Type A)
s
Programmed
path
ZA
G41
K
IM
Se
K
N
r
A
G41
ri
al
r (Offset stroke)
Tool center
path
Tool center path
o.
s
ZA
Starting point
Arc center Programmed path
M
A
Starting point
YA
MEP069
Linear Arc (Type B)
ig
yr
op
C
Point of intersection
s
Point of intersection
s
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Linear Linear (Type B)
r
r
Tool center path
r
Tool center
path
r
Programmed path
G41
Starting point
G41
Starting point
Arc center
Programmed path
MEP070
12-22
Serial No. 340839
12
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
C.
For the corner exterior (sharp angle) [ < 90°]
(Type A/B selection is possible with a predetermined parameter.)
Linear Linear (Type A)
Linear Arc (Type A)
Arc center
s
Tool center path
r
s
Programmed path
er
ve
d
.
r
G41
re
s
G41
Linear Linear (Type B)
Starting point
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
Starting point
Linear Arc (Type B)
Arc center
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
s
Tool center path
Programmed path
s
r
o.
r
r
ZA
A
Se
ri
al
N
G41
K
r
K
IM
Starting point
G41
A
ZA
Starting point
Operation during the compensation mode
01
3
4.
YA
M
MEP071
ht
(c
)2
Compensaiton is performed for linear or arc interpolation commands and positioning commands.
Identical compensation commands G41 or G42 will be ignored if they are used in the compensation mode.
C
op
yr
ig
Successive setting of 22 or more move-free blocks during the compensation mode may result in
excessive or insufficient cutting.
See Subsection 12-5-3 for a description of ‘move-free’ blocks.
12-23
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
A.
For the corner exterior
Linear Linear (90° < 180°)
Linear Linear (0° < < 90°)
Tool center path
r
s
s
r
Programmed path
Programmed path
Tool center path
er
ve
d
Tool center path
re
s
r
s
s
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Arc center
Arc Linear (90° < 180°)
o.
Arc center
Arc Linear ( 0° < < 90° )
ZA
A
K
IM
Programmed path
K
N
al
Se
ri
Programmed path
r
r
r
A
ZA
r
Arc center
Tool center path
YA
M
s
01
3
s
Arc Arc (90° < 180°)
(c
)2
Arc Arc (0° < < 90°)
Arc center
Programmed path
yr
ig
ht
Programmed path
.A
ll
Tool center path
Arc center
Tool center path
r
ri
r
ts
Programmed path
gh
r
.
Linear Arc (0° < < 90°)
Linear Arc (90° < 180°)
op
Programmed path
C
r
r
Tool center path
r
r
s
Tool center path
Arc center
Arc center
s
Arc center
MEP072
12-24
Serial No. 340839
12
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
B.
For the corner interior
Linear Linear (Obtuse angle)
Linear Linear (Obtuse angle)
r
Programmed path
r
Programmed path
r
s
s
Tool center path
r
Linear Arc (Obtuse angle)
re
s
Linear Arc (Obtuse angle)
er
ve
d
.
Tool center path
gh
ts
Arc center
.A
ll
ri
Programmed path
Programmed path
r
r
ZA
A
Arc center
K
IM
Programmed path
K
N
al
ri
Se
r
Arc Linear (Obtuse angle)
o.
Arc center
Arc Linear (Obtuse angle)
s
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Tool center path
N
s
Tool center path
Programmed path
ZA
s
Tool center path
A
s
M
r
YA
r
Tool center path
01
3
Arc center
)2
Arc Arc (Sharp angle)
Arc center
Tool center path
s
yr
ig
ht
(c
Arc Arc (Obtuse angle)
op
r
C
Arc center
Programmed path
Arc center
s
Arc center
Tool center path
r
Programmed path
MEP073
12-25
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
C.
For an arc that does not have the ending point on it
The area from the starting point of the arc to the ending point is interpolated as a spiral arc.
Virtual circle
Tool center path
Programmed path
Arc ending point
er
ve
d
.
r
s
r
ts
re
s
R
Arc center
D.
.A
ll
ri
gh
MEP074
For arcs that do not have their inner crossing point
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
In cases such as those shown in the diagram below, there may or may not be a crossing point of
arcs A and B, depending on the particular offset data. In the latter case, the program terminates
at the ending point of the preceding block after an alarm 836 NO INTERSECTION has been
displayed.
K
ZA
K
IM
Se
r
Center of Arc A
A
ri
al
Tool center path
N
o.
Stop with an alarm
r
A
B
Line of intersection
points between
Arcs A and B
MEP075
Cancellation of tool radius compensation
ht
5.
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
Programmed path
C
op
yr
ig
During the tool radius compensation mode, tool radius compensation will be cancelled in any of
the two cases listed below.
- Command G40 has been executed.
- Offset number code D00 has been executed.
At this time, however, the move command should not be given under the mode of circular interpolation. An alarm 835 G41, G42 FORMAT ERROR will occur if an attempt is made to cancel the
compensation using a circular interpolation command.
After the compensation cancellation command has been read into the offset buffer, the cancellation mode is set automatically and subsequent blocks of data are read into the pre-read buffer,
not the offset buffer.
12-26
Serial No. 340839
12
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
6.
Cancellation operation of tool radius compensation
A.
For the corner interior
Linear Linear
Arc Linear
Programmed path
Programmed path
r
r (Offset stroke)
Tool center path
s
Tool center
path
G40
Ending point
re
s
G40
er
ve
d
.
s
MEP076
For the corner exterior (obtuse angle)
.A
ll
B.
ri
gh
Arc center
ts
Ending point
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
(Type A/B selection is possible with a predetermined parameter)
Linear Linear (Type A)
Arc Linear (Type A)
s
s
o.
Tool center path
r
K
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
Ending point
ZA
Ending point
G40
Programmed
path
Tool center
path
A
G40
al
N
r (Offset stroke)
Programmed
path
YA
M
A
Arc center
s
ht
ig
yr
Point of intersection
s
Tool center path
r
r
r
r
Programmed path
G40
Tool center
path
C
op
G40
Arc Linear (Type B)
Point of intersection
(c
)2
01
3
Linear Linear (Type B)
Ending point
Ending point
Arc center
Programmed
path
MEP078
12-27
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
C.
For the corner exterior (sharp angle)
(Type A/B selection is possible with a predetermined parameter)
Arc Linear (Type A)
Linear Linear (Type A)
Arc center
s
Tool center path
r
s
Programmed path
er
ve
d
.
r
ts
re
s
G40
gh
G40
N
.A
ll
ri
Ending point
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Linear Linear (Type B)
Arc center
s
Tool center path
o.
r
r
K
IM
A
ZA
al
ri
Se
G40
Arc Linear (Type B)
s
K
N
Programmed path
r
Ending point
ZA
r
G40
YA
M
A
Ending point
01
3
Ending point
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
MEP079
12-28
Serial No. 340839
12
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12-5-3 Tool radius compensation using other commands
1.
Interpolation of the corner arc
When command G39 (corner-arc interpolation) is used, the coordinates of the crossing points at
workpiece corners will not be calculated and an arc with offset data as its radius will be interpolated.
Point of intersection
Interpolated arc
Interpolated arc
Programmed path
Tool center path
Programmed path
Tool center path
er
ve
d
r
.
(r = Offset
stroke)
(r = Offset stroke)
re
s
r
Outside Offset
Changing/retaining offset vectors
N
Inside Offset
MEP080
o.
2.
(Without G39
command)
(G39 command given)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
(Without G39
command)
(G39 command given)
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
Point of
intersection
N
Using command G38, you can change or retain offset vectors during tool radius compensation.
K
al
Retaining vectors
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
Setting G38 in a block that contains move commands allows crossing-point calculation at the
ending point of that block to be cancelled and the vectors in the preceding block to be
retained. This can be used for pick and feed operations.
ZA
G38 Xx Yy
A
Changing vectors
01
3
YA
M
The directions of new offset vectors can be designated using I, J, and K (I, J, and K depend
on the selected type of plane), and offset data can be designated using D. (These commands
can be included in the same block as that which contains move commands.)
(c
)2
G38 Ii Jj Dd
i2 + j 2
j
× r1
yr
ig
ht
r2 =
r1
C
op
Tool center path
r1
i
N15
N13
N14
Programmed path
j
N16
N12
N11
N11G1Xx11 N12G38Yy12 N13G38Xx13 N14G38Xx14Yy14 N15G38Xx15IiJjDd2 N16G40Xx16Yy16
Vector held
Vector changed
NEP081
12-29
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
3.
Changing the offset direction during tool radius compensation
The offset direction is determined by the type of tool radius compensation command (G41 or
G42) and the sign (plus or minus) of the offset data.
Offset stroke sign
+
–
G41
Left side offset
Right side offset
G42
Right side offset
Left side offset
G-code
er
ve
d
.
The offset direction can be changed by updating the offset command without having to cancel
the compensation mode. This can, however, be done only for blocks other than the compensation startup block and the next block.
ts
re
s
See Subsection 12-5-6, General precautions on tool radius compensation, for
NC operation that will occur if the sign is reversed.
gh
Linear Linear
.A
ll
ri
Tool center path
r
N
Programmed path
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
r
Point of intersection
G41
G41
o.
r
G42
r
N
r
A
G42
M
G41
r
r
ZA
K
IM
A
ZA
K
al
ri
Se
Linear Arc
G41
G42
YA
r
)2
01
3
Programmed path
r
(c
r
Tool center path
ht
ig
G41
Tool center path
G42
Arc center
C
op
yr
Arc Arc
This figure shows an
example in which no points
of intersection are present
during offset direction
change.
r
Programmed path
G41
G42
G41
r
G41
G41
G42
Arc center
MEP082
12-30
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12
Linear turnaround
G41
Tool center path
G42
r
er
ve
d
.
Programmed path
MEP083
re
s
The arc of more than 360 degrees may result in the following cases:
gh
ts
- The offset direction has been changed by G41/G42 selection.
Arc of 360° or more (depends on the offsetting method used)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
G42
.A
ll
ri
- Commands I, J, and K have been set for G40.
K
ZA
Tool center path
MEP084
A
Cases where the offset vector is temporarily cancelled
M
4.
G41
ZA
K
IM
Se
G42
A
ri
al
N
o.
Programmed path
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
If the command listed below is used during compensation mode, the current offset vector will be
cancelled temporarily and then the NC unit will re-enter the compensation mode.
In that case, a movement will occur from the crossing point to a vector-less point, that is, to the
programmed point, without movements for cancelling the compensation mode. The next
movement will also occur directly to the next crossing point when the compensation mode is
restored.
12-31
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
A.
Reference-point return command
s
s
s
N6
N7
N8
re
s
N5
er
ve
d
.
Intermediate point
ts
(G41)
N5 G91 G01 X–60. Y–30.
N6 G28
X–50. Y+40.
N7
X–30. Y+60.
N8
X–70. Y–40.
gh
Temporary vector 0 as offset at the intermediate
MEP085
5.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
point (reference point when the intermediate point is
not available)
Move-free Blocks (that do not include movement)
The blocks listed below are referred to as move-free ones:
K
ZA
A
When a mve-free block is set at the start of compensation
01
3
A.
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
M03 ................................................. M command
S12 ................................................. S command
T45 ................................................. T command
G04 X500 ...................................... Dwell
G22 X200. Y150. Z100........... To set a machining-prohibited area
Move-free
G10 P01 R50 ............................... To set an offset stroke
G92 X600. Y400. Z500........... To set a coordinate system
(G17) Z40. .................................... To move outside the offsetting plane
G90 ................................................. G-code only
G91 X0 .......................................... Moving stroke 0
...........Moving stroke is 0.
(c
)2
Vertical offsetting will be performed on the next move block.
X30. Y60.
G41 D10
X20. Y–50.
X50. Y–20.
Move-free block
N02
N03
C
op
yr
ig
ht
N01
N02
N03
N04
N01
N04
MEP086’
12-32
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12
Offset vectors, however, will not be generated if 22 or more blocks that do not include move
commands appear in succession.
X30. Y60.
G41 D10
G4 X1000
F100
S500
M3
N02 to N23
Move-free blocks
N24
(Point of intersection)
N01
X20. Y–50.
X50. Y–20.
N25
er
ve
d
.
N01
N02
N03
N04
N05
N06
N24
N25
G41 X30. Y60. D10
G4 X1000
F100
S500
Move-free blocks
M3
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N24
N
.A
ll
N02 to N23
(Point of intersection)
N01
X20. Y–50.
X50. Y–20.
N25
K
ZA
When a move-free block is set in the compensation mode
K
IM
B.
MEP088’
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
N01
N02
N03
N04
N05
N24
N25
ri
gh
ts
re
s
MEP087’
YA
M
A
ZA
Usual crossing-point vectors will be generated unless 22 or more blocks that do not include
movement appear in succession.
01
3
N06 G91 X100. Y200.
Move-free block
N07 G04 P1000
N08 X200.
N08
N06
N08
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
N07
Block N07 is executed here.
C
N06
MEP089’
Vertical offset vectors will be generated at the end point of preceding block if 22 or more blocks
that do not include movement appear in succession.
12-33
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
N06
N07
N08
N09
N10
N29
X100. Y200.
G4 X1000
F100
S500
Move-free blocks
M4
N29
X100.
N29
N06
N07 to N28
In this case, excessive cutting may occur.
er
ve
d
When a move-free block contains a cancellation command
re
s
C.
MEP090’
.
N06
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
Only offset vectors will be cancelled if the block that does not include movement contains G40.
N6 X100. Y200.
N7 G40 G04P1000
N8 X100. Y50.
N
N8
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N7
K
ZA
A
If I, J, and K are set with G40
ZA
6.
MEP091
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
N6
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
When the last of the four move command blocks which immediately precede the G40 command
block contains G41 or G42, movement will be handled as if it had been programmed to occur in
the vectorial direction of I, J, and K from the ending point of that last move command. That is, the
area up to the crossing point with the virtual tool center path will be interpolated and then
compensation will be cancelled. The offset direction will remain unchanged.
Virtual tool center path
C
op
yr
(a, b)
(i, j)
N2
A
Tool center path
G41
r
r
N1
N2
N1
(G41) G1 X_
G40XaYbIiJj
Programmed path
MEP092
12-34
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12
In this case, beware that irrespective of the offset direction, the coordinates of the crossing point
will be calculated even if wrong vectors are set as shown in the diagram below.
(a, b)
N2
Tool center path
A
G41
r
N1
Programmed path
re
s
Virtual tool center path
er
ve
d
Where I and J in the sample program
shown above have wrong signs
(i, j)
.
r
gh
ts
MEP093
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
Also, beware that a vertical vector will be generated on the block before that of G40 if crossingpoint calculation results in the offset vector becoming too large.
(a, b)
G40
Tool center path
A
o.
G41
r
K
r
A
ZA
(i, j)
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
Programmed path
Virtual tool center path
ZA
MEP094
Part of the workpiece will be cut twice if the I/J/K command in a G40 block preceded by
a circular interpolation command generates an arc of more than 360 degrees.
(G42, G91) G01X200.
G02 J150.
G40 G1X150. Y–150.I–100. J100.
r
ig
ht
(c
)2
N1
N2
N3
01
3
YA
M
A
Note:
N2
C
op
yr
(i, j)
Programmed path
Tool center path
r
N1
r
G42
G40
N3
MEP095
12-35
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12-5-4 Corner movement
Programmed path
.
If multiple offset vectors are generated at a connection between move command blocks, a linear
(polygonal) movement will occur through the end points of the vectors. This action is referred to
as corner movement.
When two different vectors are required for the connection, a linear interpolation will occur
around the corner as an addition to the first connecting movement. In the single-block operation,
therefore, the first section of “Preceding block + Corner movement” is executed as one block and
the second section of “Connecting movement + Next block” as the next one.
er
ve
d
N1
re
s
N2
r
Arc center
.A
ll
ri
r
gh
ts
Tool center path
N
This movement and its rate
of feed belong to Block N2.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Stopping point in the
single block operation mode
MEP096
N
Interruption by MDI
al
1.
o.
12-5-5 Interruptions during tool radius compensation
K
ZA
A
ZA
Interruption without movement
01
3
YA
M
No change in tool path
A
A.
K
IM
Se
ri
Tool radius compensation is valid during automatic operation, whether it is based on the tape,
memory, or MDI operation mode.
The following diagrams show what will occur if tape or memory operation is interrupted using the
MDI function following termination of the program at a block:
)2
N1 G41D1
N2 X–20. Y–50.
MDI interruption
(c
N3 G3 X–40. Y40. R70. S1000 M3
C
op
yr
ig
ht
s (Stop position in the single
block operation mode)
N2
N3
MEP097
12-36
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
B.
12
Interruption with movement
The offset vectors are recalculated automatically at the first effective move block after interruption.
Linear interruption
N1 G41D1
s
MDI interruption
N2 X–20. Y–50.
N3 G3 X–40. Y40. R70.
X–50. Y30.
X–30. Y–50.
er
ve
d
.
s
N2
re
s
N3
Circular interruption
N1 G41D1
s
N3 G3 X–40. Y40. R70.
N
MDI interruption
N2 X–20. Y–50.
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
MEP098
s
Manual interruption
K
N3
ZA
MEP099
K
IM
2.
N2
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
G2 X–40. Y–40. R70.
G1 X–40.
ZA
- For the incremental data command mode, the tool path shifts through the interruption amount.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
- For the absolute data command mode, the intended tool path is restored at the ending point of
the block immediately following that at which interruption has been performed. This state is
shown in the diagram below.
Interruption
Interruption
12-37
MEP100
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12-5-6 General precautions on tool radius compensation
1.
Selecting the amounts of offset
The amounts of offset are selected by specifying an offset number using a D-code. Once a
D-code has been used, it will remain valid until a second D-code is used. No H-codes can be
used to make these selections.
D-codes are also used to select tool position offset data.
2.
Updating the selected amounts of offset
The sign of offset data and the tool center path
ts
3.
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Updating of the selected amounts of offset is usually to be done after a different tool has been
selected during the radius compensation cancellation mode. If such updating is done during the
compensation mode, vectors at the ending point of a block will be calculated using the offset
data selected for that block.
K
ZA
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
Minus-signed (–) offset data generates the same figure as that obtained when G41 and G42 are
exchanged each other. Therefore, the tool center will move around the inside of the workpiece if
it has been moving around the outside. Conversely, the tool center will move around the outside
of the workpiece if it has been moving around the inside.
Sample programs are shown below. Usually, offset data is to be programmed as plus (+) data. If
the tool center has been programmed to move as shown in diagram (a) below, the movement
can be changed as shown in diagram (b) below by changing the sign of the offset data to minus
(–). Conversely, if the tool center has been programmed to move as shown in diagram (b) below,
the movement can be changed as shown in diagram (a) below by changing the sign of the offset
data to plus (+). One tape for machining of both inside and outside shapes can be created in this
way. Also, a dimensional tolerance between both shapes can be freely set by selecting
appropriate offset data (however, Type A is to be used during the start of offsetting or during its
cancellation).
M
A
Workpiece
Tool center path
G41 offset stroke positive or
G42 offset stroke negative
(a)
Tool center path
G41 offset stroke negative or
G42 offset stroke positive
(b)
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
Workpiece
C
MEP101
12-38
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12
12-5-7 Offset number updating during the offset mode
In principle, offset numbers should not be updated during the offset mode. If updating is done,
the tool center will move as shown below.
If an offset number (offset data) is updated
Dr1
N101 G0 Xx1
N102 G0 Xx2
N103
Xx3
Yy1
Yy2
Yy3
= 0, 1, 2, 3
To change an offset number
er
ve
d
.
Dr2
Line-to-line movement
re
s
1.
G41 G01
gh
ts
The offset stroke selected
in N102 will be used.
.A
ll
N
Tool center path
ri
The offset stroke selected
in N101 will be used.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
r2
r1
r1
N102
r2
N103
o.
N101
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
Programmed path
r1
ZA
Tool center path
A
r1
YA
M
Programmed path
r1
N101
01
3
r1
r2
N103
r2
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
N102
MEP102
12-39
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
2.
Line-to-arc movement
Tool center path
r2
Programmed path
N102
G02
r1
r1
er
ve
d
.
N101
Arc center
Tool center path
r1
re
s
r1
Programmed path
ts
N101
gh
r1
r1
ri
N102
.A
ll
G03
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
r2
Arc center
o.
Arc-to-arc movement
A
Tool center path
K
IM
r1
N101
r1
ZA
Programmed path
K
ZA
Se
ri
al
N
3.
MEP103
r2
Arc center
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
N102
ht
Arc center
ig
r1
C
op
yr
r1
N102
Tool center path
r1
r1
N101
r2
Arc center
Programmed path
Arc center
MEP104
12-40
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12
12-5-8 Excessive cutting due to tool radius compensation
If an interference check function is not provided, excessive cutting may result in the following
three cases:
1.
Machining of the inside of an arc smaller than the tool radius
If the radius of the programmed arc is smaller than that of the tool, excessive cutting may result
from offsetting of the inside of the arc.
Tool center
er
ve
d
.
path
re
s
Programmed path
R
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
Programmed arc
MEP105
2.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Excessive cutting
Machining of a groove smaller than the tool radius
Programmed path
A
ZA
K
Tool center path
Opposite
direction
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Excessive cutting may result if tool radius compensation makes the moving direction of the tool
center opposite to that of the program.
ht
Machining of a stepped section smaller than the tool radius
ig
3.
MEP106
(c
)2
Excessive cutting
C
op
yr
Tool center path
Programmed path
Excessive cutting
12-41
MEP107
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
4.
Relationship between the start of tool radius compensation and the cutting operation in the
Z-axis direction
It is generally done that radius compensation (usually, on the XY-plane) is done at a suitable
distance from the workpiece during the start of cutting and then the workpiece is cut along the
Z-axis. At this time, incorporate the following programming considerations if you want to split the
Z-axis action into rapid feed and cutting feed which is to follow only after the Z-axis has moved
close to the workpiece:
If you make a program such as that shown below:
G01 Z–300. F1
Y100. F2
Tool center path
N24
N24
er
ve
d
.
G91 G00 G41 X500. Y500. D1
S1000
M3
re
s
N01
N02
N03
N22
N24
ts
N02 to N21
ri
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
X
.A
ll
N01
N01
N
N22: Z-axis moves
downward
Y
(1 block)
gh
N22
Y
Z
MEP108’
K
ZA
A
G91 G00 G41 X500. Y500. D1
S1000
M3
A
N22
YA
N23
N24
)2
Y
Excessive
cutting
Z
N01
ht
(c
N02 to N21
N24
M
Z–250.
G01 Z–50. F1
Y100. F2
ZA
K
IM
N01
01
3
N01
N02
N03
N22
N23
N24
Se
ri
al
N
o.
With this program, all blocks up to N24 can be read during the start of offsetting based on N01.
Thus, the NC unit will judge the relationship between N01 and N24 and correctly perform the
offset operation as shown in the diagram above.
A sample program in which the N22 block in the program shown above has been split into two
parts is shown below.
X
X
yr
ig
MEP109’
C
op
In this case, successive 22 blocks (N02 to N23) do not have any motion command corresponding to the XY-plane and the relevant block N24 cannot be read during the start of offsetting
based on N01. As a result, offsetting will be based only on the information contained in the N01
block and thus the NC unit will not be able to create offset vectors during the start of offsetting.
This will cause excessive cutting as shown in the diagram above.
Even in such a case, however, excessive cutting can be prevented if a command code that
moves the tool in exactly the same direction as that existing after the Z-axis has moved
downward is included immediately before the Z-direction cutting block.
12-42
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
N01 G91 G00 G41 X500. Y400. D1
N02
Y100. S1000
N03 M3
N22
Z–250.
N23 G01 Z–50. F1
N24
Y100. F2
12
N24
N24
N24
N03 to N21
N22
N03 to N21
N02
N02
N23
Y
Y
N01
N01
er
ve
d
.
Z
X
re
s
MEP110’
gh
ts
For the sample program shown above, correct offsetting is ensured since the moving direction of
the tool center at N02 is the same as at N24.
.A
ll
Overview
N
1.
ri
12-5-9 Interference check
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Even a tool that has been offset radially by usual tool radius compensation based on two-block
pre-reading may move into the workpiece to cut it. This status is referred to as interference, and
a function for the prevention of such interference is referred to as interference check.
The following two types of interference check are provided and their selection is to be made
using bit 5 of parameter F92.
Parameter
Operation
Interference check
and prevention
Interference check and
prevention on
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ZA
Interference check and
prevention off
ri
Interference check
and alarm
The system will stop, with an alarm resulting
before executing the cutting block.
K
al
N
Function
12-43
The path is changed to prevent cutting from
taking place.
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
Example:
(G41)
N1 G90 G1 X–50. Y–100.
N2 X–70. Y–100.
N3 X–120. Y0
Interference prevention path
Tool outside
diameter
N3
re
s
er
ve
d
.
N1
gh
ts
N2
ri
Cutting by N2
MEP111
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
Cutting by N2
o.
- For the alarm function
An alarm occurs before N1 is executed. Machining can therefore be proceeded with by
updating the program into, for example,
N1 G90 G1 X–20. Y–40.
using the buffer correction function.
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
- For the prevention function
Interference prevention vectors are generated by N1 and N3 crossing-point calculation.
[4]’
[3]’
ZA
[2]
+
N3
[2]’
[3]
YA
M
A
[1]
[1]’
N1
ht
(c
)2
01
3
[4]
ig
N2
C
op
yr
MEP112
Vector [1] [4]' check No interference
Vector [2] [3]' check No interference
Vector [3] [2]' check Interference Vector [3] [2]' deletion Vector [4] [1]' deletion
The above process is performed to leave vectors [1] [2] [3]' and [4]' as effective ones. Resultantly,
the route that connects vectors [1] [2] [3]' and [4] is taken as a bypass for the prevention of
interference.
12-44
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
2.
12
Detailed description
A.
The case where interference is regarded as occurring
When move commands are present in three of the 23 command blocks to be pre-read, interference will be regarded as occurring, if the offset calculation vectors at the block connections of
the individual move commands intersect.
Tool center path
Programmed path
N1
er
ve
d
.
r
re
s
N3
N2
gh
ts
Vectors intersect.
B.
Cases where interference check cannot be performed
.A
ll
ri
MEP113
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
- When pre-reading of three move command blocks within 23 blocks to be pre-read is not
possible (since 21 or more blocks do not contain move commands).
- When the fourth and subsequent move command blocks themselves interfere.
o.
Tool center path
K
N6
K
IM
N5
Interference cannot be checked
for.
N3
N4
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
N2
A
Se
N1
ZA
ri
al
N
Programmed path
)2
(c
Movements during the prevention of interference
ht
C.
MEP114
yr
ig
The following shows the movements occurring when interference prevention is provided:
C
op
Tool center path
Programmed
path
N3
N1
N2
MEP115
12-45
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
Solid-line indicated vector: Valid
Dotted-line indicated vector: Invalid
Tool center path with interference prevented
Tool center path without interference check
Programmed path
N3
N2
er
ve
d
.
N1
Tool center path without interference check
.A
ll
ri
Programmed path
gh
ts
r
re
s
Tool center path with interference prevented
Linear move
N3
N2
N
Arc center
N1
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
r
MEP116
K
ZA
A
N2
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Prevention vector
N3
ZA
Tool center path
A
N1 Prevention vector
YA
M
Programmed path
Once all interference prevention
linear vectors have been erased, a
new prevention vector is made as
shown at right. Thus, interference is
prevented.
01
3
N4
)2
r2
N3
(c
r1
C
op
yr
ig
ht
Prevention vector 1
N2
Prevention vector 2
Tool center path 2
Tool center path 1
r1
r2
N1
Programmed path
MEP117
12-46
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12
In the diagram shown below, part of the groove is left uncut:
Interference prevention path
Tool center path
er
ve
d
.
Programmed path
gh
Interference alarm
ri
3.
ts
re
s
MEP118
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
When interference check and alarm is selected
.A
ll
Cases that an interference alarm 837 TOOL OFFSET INTERFERENCE ERROR occurs are
listed below.
If all vectors at the ending point of the current block are erased:
Prior to execution of N1, an alarm will result if vectors 1 through 4 at the ending point of the
N1 block are all erased as shown in the diagram below.
K
ZA
K
IM
Se
N1
A
ri
al
N
o.
1)
ZA
1
2, 3
N3
4
01
3
YA
M
A
N2
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
MEP119
12-47
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
When interference check and prevention is selected
2)
If all vectors at the ending point of the current block are erased but an effective vector(s)
remains at the ending point of the next block:
- For the diagram shown below, interference checking at N2 will erase all vectors existing at
the ending point of N2, but leave the vectors at the ending point of N3 effective.
At this time, an alarm will occur at the ending point of N1.
4
er
ve
d
3
.
N4
N3
Alarm stop
re
s
N2
1
gh
ts
2
MEP120
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
N1
A
ZA
K
1, 2, 3, 4
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
- For the diagram shown below, the direction of movement becomes opposite at N2.
At this time, an alarm will occur before execution of N1.
N4
N2
N3
YA
M
A
N1
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
MEP121
12-48
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
When prevention vectors cannot be generated:
Prevention vectors may not be generated even when the conditions for generating them are
satisfied. Or even after generation, the prevention vectors may interfere with N3.
An alarm will therefore occur at the ending point of N1 if those vectors cross at angles of 90
degrees or more.
Alarm stop
N1
Alarm stop
N1
N2
.
N2
N4
re
s
N4
er
ve
d
3)
12
N3
ri
gh
ts
: Intersection angle
MEP122
.A
ll
N3
When the after-offsetting moving direction of the tool is opposite to that of the program:
For a program for the machining of parallel or downwardly extending grooves narrower than
the tool diameter, interference may be regarded as occurring even if it is not actually
occurring.
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
4)
A
ZA
K
Stop
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
Tool center path
Programmed path
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
MEP123
12-49
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12-6 Three-Dimensional Tool Radius Compensation
Three-dimensional tool radius compensation is performed to offset a tool in three-dimensional
space according to the previously designated three-dimensional vectors.
12-6-1 Function description
Tool
.
(I, J, K) Plane-normal vector
Programmed
coordinates
(x, y, z)
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
Z (K)
r Tool radius
Workpiece
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
Tool center coordinates
(x’, y’, z’)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
3-dimensional offset vector
Y (J)
X (I)
MEP124
I
r
2
2
J
2
2
YA
2
K
ZA
A
A
I +J +K
Hy =
ZA
2
M
Hx =
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
As shown in the diagram above, the tool is moved through the tool radius r in the plane-normal
vectorial direction of (I, J, K) from the program coordinates (x, y, z) to the offset tool center
coordinates (x’, y’, z’). Also, unlike two-dimensional tool radius compensation, which generates
vectors perpendicular to the direction of (I, J, K), three-dimensional tool radius compensation
generates vectors in the direction of (I, J, K). (The vectors are generated at the ending point of
that block.) The axis components of three-dimensional offset vectors become:
r
K
)2
Hz =
01
3
I +J +K
2
2
r
2
(c
I +J +K
ig
ht
Hence, the tool center coordinates (x’, y’, z’) are expressed as
C
op
yr
x’ = x + Hx
y’ = y + Hy
z’ = z + Hz
where (x, y, z) denote the programmed coordinates.
Note 1: The three-dimensional vectors (Hx, Hy, Hz) refer to plane-normal vectors that are
identical to the plane-normal vectors (I, J, K) in direction and have a magnitude of r
(tool radius).
Note 2: If parameter F11 is set to a value other than 0, the value of F11 will be used as
2
2
2
I +J +K .
12-50
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12
12-6-2 Programming methods
1.
G-codes and their functions
Parameter and feature
G-code
Offset stroke positive
Offset stroke negative
Offset No. D00
To cancel the 3-dimensional tool
radius compensation
To cancel
To cancel
G41
To compensate in (I, J, K) direction
To compensate in the direction opposite to (I,
J, K)
To cancel
G42
To compensate in the direction
opposite to (I, J, K)
To compensate in (I, J, K) direction
To cancel
2.
er
ve
d
.
G40
Offset data
Space in which offsetting is to be performed
ri
3.
gh
ts
re
s
For the tool radius r that is to be offset, the offset number under which that offset amount has
been registered must be selected using D.
ZA
Se
A
Starting a three-dimensional tool radius compensation operation
K
IM
4.
XYZ space
XYZ space
XVZ space
XYW space
K
N
o.
Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ii1 Jj1 Kk1
Yy2 Ii2 Jj2 Kk2
Xx3 Vv3 Zz3 Ii3 Kk3
Ww4 Ii4 Jj4 Kk4
al
G41
G41
G41
G41
ri
Example:
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
The space in which offsetting is to be performed is determined by the axis address commands (X,
Y, Z, U, V, W) that are contained in the starting block of three-dimensional tool radius
compensation. When the U-, V-, and W-axes are taken as additions to the X-, Y-, and Z-axes,
respectively, priority will be given to the X-, Y-, or Z axis if the X-axis and the U-axis (or Y and V,
or Z and W) are selected at the same time. Coordinate axes that have not been addressed will
be interpreted as the X-axis, the Y-axis, and the Z-axis, respectively.
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
Offset number D and the plane-normal vectors (I, J, K) must be set in the same block as that
which contains three-dimensional tool radius compensation command code G41 (or G42). In that
case, (I, J, K) must be set for each of the X-, Y-, and Z-axes. If this vector setting is not complete
(setting of zero for I, J or K is effective), the usual tool radius compensation mode will be set. If,
however, the machine does not have the three-dimensional tool radius compensation function,
an alarm 838 3-D OFFSET OPTION NOT FOUND will result.
Yy1
Zz1
Ii1
Jj1
Kk1 Dd1
)2
G41 (G42) Xx1
(c
G41 (G42) : 3-dimensional tool radius compensation command
C
op
yr
ig
ht
X, Y, Z
: Command to move each axis and to determine an offsetting space
I, J, K
: To indicate the offsetting direction in plane-normal vectors
D
: Offset number
Use the G00 or G01 mode to start the three-dimensional tool radius compensation operation.
Use of the G02 or G03 mode results in an alarm 835 G41, G42 FORMAT ERROR.
12-51
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
Example 1:
If move commands are present:
G41 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ii1 Jj1 Kk1 Dd1
3-dimensional offset vector
Tool center path
er
ve
d
.
Programmed path
Starting point
re
s
MEP125
ts
If move commands are not present:
ri
gh
Example 2:
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
G41 Ii2 Jj2 Kk2 Dd2
Tool center path
3-dimentional
offset vector
ZA
K
MEP126
A
During three-dimensional tool radius compensation
K
IM
5.
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Starting point
Set move commands and new plane-normal vector commands as follows:
Ii3
Jj3
Kk3
If move commands and plane-normal vector commands are present:
YA
M
Example 1:
Zz3
ZA
Yy3
A
Xx3
)2
01
3
Xx3 Yy3 Zz3 Ii3 Jj3 Kk3
ht
(c
Tool center path
Old vector
C
op
yr
ig
New vector
Programmed path
Starting point
MEP127
12-52
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
Example 2:
12
If plane-normal vector commands are not present:
The new vector is the same as the old one.
Xx4 Yy4 Zz4
Tool center path
New vector
er
ve
d
.
Old vector
Programmed path
re
s
Starting point
ri
.A
ll
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
G02 Xx5 Yy5 (Zz5) Ii0 Jj0 I and J(K) represent the center of an arc.
or
G02 Xx5 Yy5 (Zz5) Rr0 (Radius-selected arc).
gh
For arc or helical cutting:
The new vector is the same as the old one.
N
Example 3:
ts
MEP128
K
ZA
A
ri
New vector
Programmed path
K
IM
Se
Old vector
al
N
o.
Tool center path
Starting point
ZA
MEP129
M
For changing the offset data:
Set offset number D in the same block as that of three-dimensional tool radius
compensation command G41 or G42. Use the G00 or G01 mode to change the
offset data. Use of the arc mode results in an alarm (835 G41, G42 FORMAT
ERROR).
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
Example 4:
A
The arc shifts through the amount of vector.
C
op
yr
ig
G41 Xx0 Yy0 Zz0 Ii0 Jj0 Kk0 Dd1
G41 Xx6 Yy6 Zz6 Ii6 Jj6 Kk6 Dd2
Tool center path
New vector
Old vector
Starting point
Programmed path
MEP130
12-53
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
Example 5:
For changing the offset direction:
G41 Xx0 Yy0 Zz0 Ii0 Jj0 Kk0 Dd1
G42 Xx0 Yy0 Zz0 Ii0 Jj0 Kk0
Tool center path
Programmed path
Old vector
er
ve
d
.
New vector
Starting point
re
s
MEP131
Cancelling the three-dimensional tool radius compensation operation
.A
ll
6.
ri
gh
ts
Use the G00 or G01 mode to change the offset direction. Use of the arc mode results in an alarm
(835 G41, G42 FORMAT ERROR).
Xx7
Yy7
Zz7
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
G40
N
Make the program as follows:
Use the G00 or G01 mode to cancel three-dimensional tool radius compensation. Use of the G02
or G03 mode results in an alarm (835 G41, G42 FORMAT ERROR).
If move commands are present:
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
G40 Xx7 Yy7 Zz7
K
N
o.
Example 1:
Tool center path
Starting point
Programmed path
Ending point
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
Old vector
)2
MEP132
If move commands are not present:
G40 (or D00)
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
Example 2:
Old vector
Programmed path
12-54
Tool center path
MEP133
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12
12-6-3 Correlationships to other functions
Tool radius compensation
The usual tool radius compensation mode will be selected if setting of plane-normal vectors
(I, J, K) in the starting block of three-dimensional tool radius compensation is not done for
each of the X-, Y-, and Z-axes.
2.
Tool length offset
Tool length offsetting is performed according to the coordinates existing after execution of
three-dimensional tool radius compensation.
3.
Tool position offset
Tool position offsetting is performed according to the coordinates existing after execution of
three-dimensional tool radius compensation.
4.
Selection of fixed-cycle operation results in an alarm (901 INCORRECT FIXED CYCLE
COMMAND).
5.
Scaling
Three-dimensional tool radius compensation is performed according to the coordinates
existing after execution of scaling.
6.
Home position check (G27)
The current offset data is not cancelled.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
1.
12-6-4 Miscellaneous notes on three-dimensional tool radius compensation
Although they can be used to select offset numbers, D-code commands are valid only after
command G41 or G42 has been set. If a D-code command is not present, the previous Dcode command becomes valid.
2.
Use the G00 or G01 mode to change the offset mode, the offset direction or the offset data.
An alarm (835 G41, G42 FORMAT ERROR) will occur if an attempt is made to perform
these changes in an arc mode.
3.
During the three-dimensional tool radius compensation mode using a space, threedimensional tool radius compensation cannot be done using any other space. The cancel
command code (G40 or D00) must be executed to select some other offset space.
K
ZA
A
A
M
X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_
To start offsetting in XYZ space
U_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_
To offset in XYZ space while a U-axis movement occurs as specified
)2
01
3
YA
Example:
G41
G41
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
1.
ht
Only the G40 or D00 command code can be used to cancel three-dimensional tool radius
C
op
yr
ig
5.
Selection of an offset number falling outside the range from 1 to the maximum available
number results in an alarm (839 ILLEGAL OFFSET No.).
(c
4.
6.
compensation. Cancellation is not possible with the
key or external reset functions.
An alarm will result if the vectorial magnitude specified by (I, J, K), that is
overflows.
12-55
2
2
2
I +J +K ,
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12-7 Programmed Data Setting: G10
1.
Function and purpose
The G10 command allows tool offset data, workpiece offset data and parameter data to be set or
modified in the flow of program.
2.
Programming formats
A.
Programming workpiece offsets
- Programming format for the workpiece origin data
er
ve
d
.
G10 L2 P_ Xp_ Yp_ Zp__ (: Additional axis)
gh
ts
re
s
P0: Coordinate shift (Added feature)
P1: G54
P4: G57
P2: G55
P5: G58
P3: G56
P6: G59
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
G10 L20 P_ Xp_ Yp_ Zp__ (: Additional axis)
P1:
G54.1 P1
P2:
G54.1 P2
P299: G54.1 P299
P300: G54.1 P300
N
- Programming format for the additional workpiece origin data
.A
ll
ri
Data of P-commands other than those listed above are handled as P = 1.
If P-command setting is omitted, the workpiece offsets will be handled as currently effective
ones.
K
ZA
K
IM
Metric
A
Se
ri
The setting ranges of the data at axial addresses are as follows:
Inch
±99999.9999 mm
±9999.99999 in
Rotational axis
±99999.9999°
±99999.9999°
M
Programming tool offsets
YA
B.
A
ZA
Linear axis
- Programming format for the tool offset data of Type A
01
3
G10 L10 P_R_
(c
)2
P: Offset number
R: Offset amount
ig
ht
- Programming format for the tool offset data of Type B
C
op
yr
G10 L10 P_R_
G10 L11 P_R_
G10 L12 P_R_
G10 L13 P_R_
Geometric offset concerning the length
Wear compensation concerning the length
Geometric offset concerning the diameter
Wear compensation concerning the diameter
12-56
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12
The setting ranges for programming tool offset amount (R) are as follows:
TOOL OFFSET Type A
±1999.9999 mm
±84.50000 in
TOOL OFFSET Type B
Length Geom.
±1999.9999 mm
±84.50000 in
TOOL OFFSET Type B
Length Wear
±99.9999 mm
±9.99999 in
TOOL OFFSET Type B
Dia. Geom.
±999.9999 mm
±84.50000 in
TOOL OFFSET Type B
Dia. Wear
±9.9999 mm
±0.99999 in
.
Inch
Programming parameter data
er
ve
d
C.
Metric
ri
gh
ts
re
s
G10 L50................ Parameter input mode ON
N_P_R_
N_R_
G11 ..................... Parameter input mode OFF
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Specify the parameters with address N as indicated below:
Parameter
N: Number
1 to 200
B
1 to 200
C
1 to 200
D
1 to 144
E
1 to 144
F
1 to 168 (47 to 66 excluded)
I
1 to 36
J
1 to 576
K
1 to 288
L
1 to 288
M
1 to 72
N
1 to 72
P
1 to 5
S
SV
P: Axis No.
1001 to
1200
—
2001 to
2200
—
3001 to
3200
—
4001 to
—
5144
—
6001 to
6168
—
9001 to
9036
1 to 32
10001 to
10576
—
11001 to
11288
—
12001 to
12288
—
13001 to
13072
1 to 32
14001 to
A
ZA
K
4144
5001 to
1 to 32
1 to 32
1 to 72
01
3
16001 to
16072
1 to 32
1 to 384
17001 to
17384
1 to 32
1 to 256
18001 to
18256
1 to 8
1 to 250
19001 to
19250
1 to 8
BA
ht
1 to 264
20001 to
20264
—
TC
1 to 308
21001 to
21308
—
SU
1 to 168
22001 to
22168
—
SD
1 to 168
23001 to
23168
—
MS
1 to 132
25001 to
25132
—
US
1 to 90
26001 to
25090
—
op
yr
)2
(c
SA
YA
14072
150001 to 150005
ig
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
A
SP
C
N
.A
ll
N: Parameter number
P: Axis number (for axis type parameter)
R: Data of parameter
As for the setting ranges of parameter data, refer to the separate Parameter
List/Alarm List/M-code List.
12-57
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
3.
Detailed description
Workpiece origin data input
1.
The G10 command is not associated with movement. However, do not use this command in
the same block with a G-code command other than: G21, G22, G54 to G59, G90 and G91.
2.
Do not use the G10 command in the same block with a fixed cycle command or a subprogram call command. This will cause a malfunctioning or an alarm.
3.
Irrespective of workpiece offset type (G54 - G59 and G54.1), the data to the axial addresses
have to refer to the origin of the fundamental machine coordinate system.
4.
Depending upon the data input mode — absolute (G90) or incremental (G91) — the
designated data will overwrite, or will be added to, the existing data.
5.
L-code and P-code commands can be omitted, indeed, but take notice of the following when
omitting them:
Omit both L-code and P-code commands only when
ts
1)
re
s
er
ve
d
.
A.
ri
The L-code command only may be omitted when the intended axial data refer to a
coordinate system of the same type (in terms of L-code: L2 or L20) as the last selected
one; give a P-command in such a case as follows:
N
.A
ll
2)
gh
The axial data should refer to the coordinate system that was last selected.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
- Set an integer from 0 to 6 with address P to specify the coordinate shift data or one of
the coordinate systems from G54 to G59.
- Set an integer from 1 to 300 with address P to specify one of the additional workpiece
coordinate systems of G54.1.
o.
If the P-code command only is omitted:
N
3)
K
al
An alarm will result if the value of L mismatches the coordinate system last selected.
A
ri
K
IM
Se
Example:
ZA
Axial data without a decimal point can be entered in the range from –99999999 to
+99999999. The data settings at that time depend upon the data input unit.
6.
G10 L2 P1 X–100. Y–1000 Z–100 B–1000
Y –1.
Y –0.1
Y –0.1
Y –0.01
Z –0.1
Z –0.01
Z –0.01
Z –0.001
B –1.
B –0.1
B –1.
B –0.1
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
The above command sets the following data:
Metric system
X –100.
Metric system (up to 4 dec. places)
X –100.
Inch system
X –100.
Inch system (up to 5 dec. places)
X –100.
The origin data updated by a G10 command are not indicated as they are on the WORK
OFFSET display until that display has been selected anew.
8.
Setting an illegal L-code value causes an alarm.
(c
ht
Setting an illegal P-code value causes an alarm.
ig
9.
)2
7.
C
op
yr
10. Setting an illegal axial value causes an alarm.
B.
11. The G10 command is invalid (or skipped) during tool path check.
Tool offset data input
1.
The G10 command is not associated with movement. However, do not use this command in
the same block with a G-code command other than: G21, G22, G54 to G59, G90 and G91.
2.
Do not use the G10 command in the same block with a fixed cycle command or a subprogram call command. This will cause a malfunctioning or an alarm.
3.
Depending upon the data input mode — absolute (G90) or incremental (G91) — the
designated data will overwrite, or will be added to, the existing data.
12-58
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12
Offset data (R) without a decimal point can be entered in the range from –999999 to
+999999 for geometric offset, or in the range from –99999 to +99999 for wear
compensation. The data settings at that time depend upon the data input unit.
4.
Example:
G10 L10 P1 R1000
The above command sets the following data:
Metric system
1.
Metric system (up to 4 dec. places)
0.1
Inch system
0.1
Inch system (up to 5 dec. places)
0.01
The offset data updated by a G10 command are not indicated as they are on the TOOL
OFFSET display until that display has been selected anew.
6.
Setting an illegal L-code value causes an alarm.
7.
A command of “G10 P_ R_” without an L-code is also available for tool offset data input.
8.
Setting an illegal P-code value causes an alarm.
9.
Setting an illegal offset value (R) causes an alarm.
ri
N
Parameter data input
The G10 command is not associated with movement. However, do not use this command in
the same block with a G-code command other than: G21, G22, G54 to G59, G90 and G91.
2.
Do not use the G10 command in the same block with a fixed cycle command or a subprogram call command. This will cause a malfunctioning or an alarm.
3.
Other NC statements must not be given in the parameter input mode.
4.
No sequence number must be designated with address N in the parameter input mode.
5.
Irrespective of the data input mode — absolute (G90) or incremental (G91) — the
designated data will overwrite the existing parameter. Moreover, describe all the data in
decimal numbers (hexadecimal and bit type data, therefore, must be converted).
K
ZA
K
IM
Example:
A
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
1.
Se
C.
.A
ll
10. The G10 command is invalid (or skipped) during tool path check.
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
5.
For changing a bit type data of 00110110 to 00110111:
M
A
ZA
Since (00110111)2 = (55)10 [a binary number of 00110111 corresponds to “55”
in decimal notation], set 55 with address R.
All decimal places, even if inputted, are ignored.
7.
Some specific bit-type parameters require selection of one of multiple bits. For the
parameter shown as an example below, set data that turns on only one of bits 2 to 5.
Example:
Parameter K107
(c
)2
01
3
YA
6.
bit
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ig
ht
7
C
op
yr
S-shaped speed filter
S-shaped speed filter
S-shaped speed filter
S-shaped speed filter
7.1 ms
14.2 ms
28.4 ms
56.8 ms
Setting “1” for bits 2 and 3, for example, could not make valid a speed filter of 21.3 ms (= 7.1 + 14.2).
8.
The parameter data updated by a G10 L50 command are not made valid till the execution of
a G11 command.
9.
The parameter data updated by a G10 L50 command are not indicated as they are on the
PARAMETER display until that display has been selected anew.
10. Setting an illegal L-code value causes an alarm.
11. Setting an illegal N-code value (parameter No.) causes an alarm.
12-59
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12. Omission of P-code for an axis type parameter causes an alarm.
13. Setting an illegal parameter value with address R causes an alarm.
14. The G10 command is invalid (or skipped) during tool path check.
15. As for parameters (BA, SU and MS) with separate values for each system, a G10 command
is only effective for the values of the system to which the current program section belongs.
4.
Sample programs
A.
Entering tool offset data from tape
H10 = –12345
re
s
H40 = 2468
Updating tool offset data
Example 2:
gh
(Z = –101000)
ri
G90 G43 Z–100000 H10
Z0
G10 L10 P10 R–500
G90 G43 Z–100000 H10
.A
ll
G01
G28
G91
G01
(–500 is added in the G91 mode.)
(Z = –101500)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N1
N2
N3
N4
ts
Assumes that H10 has already been set equal to –1000.
Example 1:
N
B.
H05 = 98765
er
ve
d
.
G10L10P10R–12345 G10L10P05R98765 G10L10P40R2468
Assumes that H10 has already been set equal to –1000.
N
o.
Main program
N1 G00 X100000 ........................................ a
N2 #1=–1000
N3 M98 P1111L4 ........................................ b1, b2, b3, b4
A
K
ZA
K
IM
A
Se
ZA
ri
al
Subprogram O1111
N1 G01 G91 G43 Z0 H10 F100 ........ c1, c2, c3, c4
N2 G01 X1000 ............................................ d1, d2, d3, d4
N3 #1=#1–1000
N4 G90 G10 L10 P10 R#1
N5 M99
(b1)
M
(a)
(b2)
(b3)
(b4)
1000
d1
c2
1000
d2
c3
1000
d3
c4
d4
1000
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
c1
C
Note:
Final offset stroke: H10 = –5000
1000 1000 1000 1000
12-60
MEP134
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
Example 3:
12
The programs in Example 2 above can be rewritten as follows:
Main program
N1 G00 X100000
N2 M98 P1111 L4
Subprogram
O1111
N1 G01 G91 G43 Z0 H10
N2 G01 X1000
N3 G10 L10 P10 R–1000
N4 M99
Even when the command code is displayed on <Next Command>, the current offset
number and variables will remain unupdated until that command is executed.
N1 G10
L10 P10 R–100
N2 G43
Z–10000 H10
N3 G0
X–10000 Y–10000
N4 G10
L10 P10 R–200
Executing block N4 will cause an offset stroke
in H10 to be updated.
Updating the workpiece coordinate system offset data
.A
ll
C.
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Note:
F100
N100
N101
N102
M02
Y = –10.000
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
X = –10.000
N
Assume that the previous workpiece coordinate system offset data is as follows:
Y–15.000
–20.
K
ZA
–10.
M
Fundamental machine
coordinate system zero point
YA
M
A
ZA
–X
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
G00 G90 G54 X0 Y0
G10 L2 P1 X–15.000
X0 Y0
01
3
)2
–X
N100
Coordinate system of G54
before change
(c
ht
Coordinate system of
G54 after change
–X
yr
ig
N102
W1
C
op
–10.
N101
(W1)
–20.
–Y
–Y
–Y
MEP135
12-61
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
Note 1: Changes in the display of the workpiece position at N101
At N101, the display of tool position in the G54 coordinate system changes before and
after workpiece coordinate system updating with G10.
X = +5.000
X=0
Y = +5.000
Y=0
Programming for using one workpiece coordinate system as multiple workpiece
coordinate systems
ri
.A
ll
#1=–50.
#2=10.
M98 P200 L5
M02
%
N1 G90 G54 G10 L2 P1 X#1
N2 G00 X0
Y0
N3 X–5. F100
N4 X0
Y–5.
N5 Y0
N6 #1=#1+#2
N7 M99
%
gh
ts
D.
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Note 2: Prepare the following program to set workpiece coordinate system offset data in G54 to
G59:
G10L2P1X–10.000 Y–10.000
G10L2P2X–20.000 Y–20.000
G10L2P3X–30.000 Y–30.000
G10L2P4X–40.000 Y–40.000
G10L2P5X–50.000 Y–50.000
G10L2P6X–60.000 Y–60.000
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Main program
–60.
–50.
–40.
K
ZA
A
–30.
–20.
M
01
3
YA
G54''''
(c
)2
G54'''
W
W
M
ig
G54'
G54
W
W
W
–10.
Fundamental
machine coordinate
system zero point
5th cycle
–20.
4th cycle
–30.
ht
G54''
yr
op
C
–10.
A
–X
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Subprogram
(O200)
Y#1
3rd cycle
–40.
2nd cycle
–50.
1st cycle
–Y
MEP136
12-62
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
E.
Programming for parameter data input
G10L50
N4017R10
N6088R96
N12067R–1000
N12072R67
N150004P1R50
G11
5.
12
Parameter input mode ON
D17 is set to “10”.
F88 is set to “01100000”. [ (01100000)2 = (96)10 ]
L67 is set to “–1000”.
L72 is set to “0x43”. [ (43)16 = (67)10 ]
P4 data for the 1st axis (X-axis) is set to “50”.
Parameter input mode OFF
Related alarms
Alarm message
Cause
Remedy
re
s
gh
Parameter input:
An illegal parameter number is set.
Review the program data.
ts
ILLEGAL FORMAT
N
.A
ll
Work offset input:
The setting range of the coordinate system number
or the offset data is overstepped.
ri
807
Work offset input:
P-command is omitted in a block of G10 L20 (or
L2) although the last selected coordinate system is
one of the systems from G54 to G59 (or of the
G54.1 systems).
er
ve
d
.
Alarm No.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Tool offset input:
The setting range of the offset data is overstepped.
ILLEGAL NUMBER
INPUT
Review the program data.
Parameter input:
The axis number is not specified for an axis type
parameter.
The setting range of the axis number or the
parameter data is overstepped.
N
o.
809
A
ZA
al
ri
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
K
Tool offset input:
The specified offset number is greater than the
number of available data sets.
ILLEGAL OFFSET
No.
839
12-63
Correct the offset number
according to the number of
available data sets.
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12-8 Tool Offsetting Based on MAZATROL Tool Data
Parameter selection allows both tool length offset and tool radius compensation to be performed
using MAZATROL tool data (tool diameter and tool length data).
12-8-1 Selection parameters
Using the following parameters, select whether or not MAZATROL tool data is to be used:
User parameters
F92 bit 7 = 1: Tool radius compensation uses the MAZATROL tool data ACT- (tool diameter
data).
er
ve
d
.
F93 bit 3 = 1: Tool length offsetting uses the MAZATROL tool data LENGTH (tool length data).
re
s
F94 bit 2 = 1: Tool length offsetting using the MAZATROL tool data is prevented from being
cancelled by a reference-point return command.
TOOL OFFSET
Tool offset No.
LENGTH
0
G43/G44 H_
0
T_ + H_
- Length offset cancellation not
required for tool change.
- G43 not required.
1
G43/G44 H_
Length offset cancellation
required for tool change. [*]
0
(G43/G44 H_)
+ (T_)
Length offset cancellation
required for tool change. [*]
1
1
0
1
o.
LENGTH + OFFSET No.
or
LENGTH + LENG CO.
K
ZA
Se
ri
al
or
K
IM
A
Tool offset No. + LENGTH
- Set G49 before tool change command.
- Set G28/G30 before tool change command (when F94 bit 2 = 0).
M
Tool radius compensation
YA
2.
A
ZA
[*] Canceling method
Remarks
T_
OFFSET No.
LENG CO.
TOOL OFFSET +
TOOL DATA
Programming
format
N
TOOL DATA
(MAZATROL)
Parameter
F93 F94
bit 3 bit 7
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Data items used
.A
ll
Tool length offsetting
N
1.
ri
gh
ts
F94 bit 7 = 1: Tool offsetting uses the MAZATROL tool data ACT- CO. (or No.) and LENG
CO. (or No.).
(Set F94 bit 7 to 0 to use the data stored on the TOOL OFFSET display.)
)2
01
3
Parameter
ht
(c
TOOL OFFSET
C
op
yr
ig
TOOL DATA
(MAZATROL)
TOOL OFFSET +
TOOL DATA
Data items used
F92
bit 7
F94
bit 7
Tool offset No.
0
0
G41/G42 D_
ACT- + ACT- CO. or
ACT- + OFFSET No.
1
1
G41/G42 T_
ACT- CO. or
OFFSET No.
0
1
G41/G42 T_
1
0
G41/G42 D_ + T_
Tool offset No. + ACT-
12-64
Programming format
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12
12-8-2 Tool length offsetting
1.
Function and purpose
Even when offset data is not programmed, tool length offsetting will be performed according to
the MAZATROL tool data LENGTH that corresponds to the designated tool number.
2.
Parameter setting
Set both bit 3 of parameter F93 and bit 2 of parameter F94 to 1.
Detailed description
Tool length offsetting is performed automatically, but its timing and method differ as follows:
- After a tool change command has been issued, offsetting is performed according to the
LENGTH data of the tool mounted in the spindle. (A tool change command code must be
set in the program before tool length offsetting can be done.)
- After command G43 has been set, offsetting is performed according to the LENGTH data
of the tool mounted in the spindle.
2.
Tool length offsetting is cancelled in the following cases:
- When a command for tool change with some other tool is executed
- When M02 or M30 is executed
- When the
key is pressed
- When command G49 is issued
- When a reference-point return command is executed with bit 2 of parameter F94 set to 0
3.
Tool length offsetting becomes valid for the block onward that first involves Z-axis movement after tool change. This does not apply, however, if the first motion block in question is
of G28, G30, or G53.
4.
If this offset function is used with a G43 H-command, offsetting will use as its offset data the
sum total of the MAZATROL tool data LENGTH and the offset amount specified by the G43
H (or G44 H) command.
.
1.
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
3.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
Note 1: Set G43 H0 if tool length offsetting is to be done using a G43 H-command and only the
offset amount specified by H is to be cancelled.
Note 2: With a G44 command, tool length offsetting based on MAZATROL tool data is not performed.
Note 3: The restart operation must begin from a position before a G43 command code or a tool
change command code. Even when the spindle has a mounted tool, G43 or the tool
change command must be executed before offsetting based on MAZATROL tool data
can take place.
Note 4: Offsetting will fail if registered MAZATROL tool data LENGTH is not present.
Note 5: For an EIA/ISO program, to carry out tool length offset operations using the tool length
data included in MAZATROL tool data, it becomes necessary to set data in the
validation parameter for the tool length data of the MAZATROL tool data and to insert a
tool change T- and M-code command block. It is to be noted that the tool change
command block may not be missed particularly in the following cases:
- During automatic operation, if the first tool to be used has already been mounted in
the spindle.
- During call of an EIA/ISO program as a subprogram from the MAZATROL main
program, if the tool to be used immediately prior to call of the subprogram is the same
as that which is to be designated in that subprogram as the first tool to be used.
12-65
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
4.
Sample programs
Machine zero point
Workpiece
coordinate Z
(G54)
Offsetting values:
(LENGTH = 95.)
+5.00
.
er
ve
d
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
Workpiece zero point
re
s
T01: LENGTH
=95.
G94 G00 G40 G80
G28 Z0
T00 M06
G54 X-100. Y0
Z5.
Z-50. F100
ts
N001 G90
N002 G91
N003 T01
N004 G90
N005 G0
N006 G01
BA62
gh
Length offset amount
=100.
12-8-3 Tool radius compensation
1.
Function and purpose
Detailed description
K
ZA
ZA
3.
K
IM
Set bit 7 of parameter F92 to 1.
A
Parameter setting
Se
2.
ri
al
N
o.
Tool radius compensation by a G41 or G42 command uses MAZATROL tool data ACT- for the
calculation of offset amount.
YA
M
A
- Tool radius compensation uses as its offset amount the half of the diameter data of the tool
which is mounted in the spindle at the issuance of G41/G42.
01
3
- Tool radius compensation is cancelled by G40.
(c
)2
- If the tool radius compensation function is used with a D-command, the sum total of the data
indicated by the corresponding offset number (D) and the radius of the tool will be used as the
offset data.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
Note 1: The tool used must be mounted in the spindle before restarting the program.
Note 2: Offsetting based on tool diameter data will not occur if registered MAZATROL tool
diameter data is not present or if a tool for which tool diameter data cannot be entered
is to be used.
Note 3: To carry out for an EIA/ISO program the tool radius compensation operations using the
tool diameter data included in MAZATROL tool data, it is necessary to insert tool
change command blocks, as it is the case for tool length offsetting (refer to Note 5 in
Subsection 12-8-2).
12-66
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12
12-8-4 Tool data update (during automatic operation)
1.
Function and purpose
Tool Data Update allows MAZATROL tool data to be updated during automatic operation based
on an EIA/ISO program.
2.
Parameter setting
Set parameter L57 to 1.
3.
Detailed description
MAX.
ROT.
ts
TOOL
NOM-
ACT-
LENGTH
LENG
COMP.
THRUST F/
HORSE PW
LIFE
TIME
CUT
TIME
L57 = 0
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
L57 = 1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
ri
re
s
MAT.
gh
Parameter
er
ve
d
.
This function allows the entire tool data, except for spindle tools, to be updated during automatic
operation based on an EIA/ISO program.
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
Note 1: In the table given above, “Yes” indicates that you can update the data, and “No”
indicates that you cannot update the data.
Identification between MAZATROL programs and EIA/ISO programs is automatically
made by whether the program currently being executed, is MAZATROL or EIA/ISO,
irrespective of whether it is a main program or subprogram.
If, however, the main program is MAZATROL and its subprograms are EIA/ISO, then
the currently active set of programs is regarded as a MAZATROL program.
Note 2: An alarm 428 MEMORY PROTECT (AUTO OPERATION) will occur if the spindle tool
data is modified during automatic operation based on an EIA/ISO program.
12-67
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12-9 Shaping Function (Option)
12-9-1 Overview
The shaping function is provided to control the rotational axis concerned in order to keep the tool
set normal (perpendicular) to the direction of the movement in the XY-plane.
This optional function permits free-form shapes such as the rubber oil-seal surface to be cut out
for a better surface finish than with an end-milling tool.
Note :
The name of the rotational axis to be controlled for the shaping function depends on
the construction of the machine in question. The description in this section assumes
that the rotational axis concerned is named V-axis.
re
s
er
ve
d
.
The V-axis control is automatically performed at block connections to keep the tool normally
oriented.
ri
gh
ts
Rotational axis (V-axis)
N
K
A
MEP304
K
IM
Se
ri
Tool nose
ZA
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Rotation on
the V-axis
.A
ll
Tool
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
During circular interpolation, the V-axis is continuously controlled in synchronization with the
tool movement.
Rotation on
the V-axis
Rotation on
the V-axis
Tool
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
Arc center
Tool nose
12-68
MEP305
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12
12-9-2 Programming format
G40.1
G41.1
G42.1
X x Yy Ff
G40.1: Cancellation of shaping
G41.1: Selection of shaping to the left (normal orientation on the left side)
G42.1: Selection of shaping to the right (normal orientation on the right side)
x: X-axis position of ending point
y: Y-axis position of ending point
f : Feed rate
er
ve
d
.
Note 1: The codes G40.1, G41.1 and G42.1 belong to group 15 of G-codes.
ts
re
s
Note 2: The shaping control (orientation of the tool) can only be performed in the XY-plane,
regardless of the plane currently selected.
gh
Tool nose path
Axis of rotation
N
Programmed
contour
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Programmed
contour
.A
ll
ri
Tool nose path
K
ZA
A
MEP306
A
ZA
12-9-3 Detailed description
M
Definition of the V-axis angle
YA
1.
G42.1: Shaping to the right
K
IM
Se
G41.1: Shaping to the left
ri
al
N
o.
Axis of rotation
(c
)2
01
3
The V-axis angle with the tool oriented in the +X direction is defined as 0°, and counterclockwise
rotation is defined as positive (+).
Z
V-axis angle
+X direction
+Y direction
–X direction
–Y direction
0°
90°
180°
270° (–90°)
Tool
C
op
yr
ig
ht
Tool orientation
Axis of rotation
Y
90°
+ direction
– direction
180°
0°
X
Tool
270° (–90°)
Definition of the V-axis angle
12-69
MEP307
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
2.
Movement
A.
Start up
The V-axis rotation is performed at the starting point of the first shaping block and then the Xand Y-axis movement is carried out with the tool normally oriented.
The direction of the preparatory rotation is automatically selected for the smallest angel ( 180°).
Selection in a single-command block
N3
N1
N1 G01 Xx1 Yy1 Ff1
N2 G41.1
N3 Xx2 Yy2
.
N3
er
ve
d
Tool nose path
G41.1 execution
re
s
(x1, y1)
gh
ts
Programmed contour
(x2, y2)
N
MEP308
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Selection in a block containing motion command
.A
ll
ri
No movement for N2
G41.1 execution
Tool nose path
N2
N2
N
o.
N1
N1 G01 Xx1 Yy1 Ff1
N2 G41.1 Xx2 Yy2
K
K
IM
A
Se
Programmed contour
ZA
ri
al
(x1, y1)
ZA
MEP309
A
Cancellation
M
B.
(x2, y2)
YA
After cancellation of shaping, the X- and Y-axis movement is carried out without V-axis rotation.
(c
)2
01
3
Cancellation in a single-command block
G40.1 execution
N3
N1
(x1, y1)
N1 Xx1 Yy1
N2 G40.1
N3 Xx2 Yy2
C
op
yr
ig
ht
Tool nose path
Programmed contour
(x2, y2)
No movement for N2
MEP310
12-70
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12
Cancellation in a block containing motion command
Tool nose path
G40.1 execution
N2
N1
N1 Xx1 Yy1
N2 G40.1 Xx2 Yy2
(x1, y1)
Programmed contour
er
ve
d
.
(x2, y2)
MEP311
Movement in the shaping mode
re
s
C.
gh
ts
Execution of a block
N
Block of circular interpolation
.A
ll
The tool moves linearly without V-axis rotation.
ri
Block of linear interpolation
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
The angular position on the V-axis is continuously controlled in synchronization with the
circular movement of the tool.
K
ZA
K
IM
Arc center
(i, j)
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Tool nose path
N2
(x1, y1)
MEP312
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
Programmed
contour
N1 G41.1
N2 G02 Xx1 Yy1 Ii Jj
12-71
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
Connection between blocks
Without tool radius compensation
An independent V-axis rotation is performed at the end of the preceding block to orient the
tool in the normal direction with respect to the starting motion of the next block.
er
ve
d
.
Tool nose path
<linear—linear>
ts
re
s
Programmed contour
<circular—circular>
ri
gh
<linear—circular>
.A
ll
With tool radius compensation
MEP313
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
The tool radius compensation automatically inserts linear segments for connection between
blocks whose paths cross each other at a sharp angle.
The shaping function controls the V-axis so as to orient the tool in accordance with the offset
tool path.
K
ZA
A
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Tool nose path
YA
M
Programmed contour
Radially offset path
<linear—circular>
01
3
<linear—linear>
<circular—circular>
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
MEP314
12-72
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12
Direction of V-axis rotation at block connections
The rotation on the V-axis occurs in the negative direction (clockwise) in the mode of G41.1, or in the
positive direction (counterclockwise) in the mode of G42.1, at block connections.
Parameter K2 (: minimum allowable angle of V-axis rotation) is provided to suppress the rotation as
described below.
Direction of V-axis rotation at block connections
For G41.1: negative (CW)
For G42.1: positive (CCW)
Suppression or prohibition of V-axis rotation at block connections
er
ve
d
.
: Rotational angle required
: Parameter K2 (minimum allowable angle of V-axis rotation)
re
s
<
The V-axis rotation is suppressed.
ri
gh
ts
In the mode of G41.1:
< 180° –
Alarm No. 147 SHAPING AXIS TURNING ANGLE OVER will be caused.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
In the mode of G42.1:
180° + < 360° –
Alarm No. 147 SHAPING AXIS TURNING ANGLE OVER will be caused.
90°
K
ZA
A
ri
ZA
A
YA
MEP315
01
3
The V-axis rotation is suppressed if the angle of rotation required is smaller than
parameter K2 ( < ).
The rotational angle thus ignored will surely be added to the angle of the next rotation
required, which will then be actually performed or further suppressed according to the
result of the accumulation.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
Note :
0°
–
Alarm 147 SHAPING AXIS TURNING ANGLE OVER
M
270°
+
Rotation suppressed
K
IM
Se
180°
180°+
al
N
o.
V-axis rotation
12-73
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
Angle at a block connection:
G41.1
G42.1
V-axis rotation suppressed
V-axis rotation suppressed
1. – < < +
90°
+
180°
–
0°
er
ve
d
.
270°
re
s
2. + < < (180° – )
ri
gh
ts
90°
.A
ll
+
180° –
180°
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
0°
Alarm 147 SHAPING AXIS TURNING
ANGLE OVER
270°
180° –
180°
180° +
K
A
K
IM
Se
ri
90°
ZA
al
N
o.
3. (180° – ) (180° + )
YA
01
3
270°
M
A
ZA
0°
(c
)2
4. (180° + ) (360° – )
op
yr
ig
ht
90°
0°
360° –
C
180°
180° +
270°
Alarm 147 SHAPING AXIS TURNING
ANGLE OVER
12-74
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
3.
12
Speed of V-axis rotation for shaping
At block connection
The V-axis rotation is performed at such a speed that the tool nose will move at the speed
specified by the F-code.
The V-axis rotational speed Fc is calculated as follows:
F
R
er
ve
d
.
Fc
F
MEP316
ts
F
re
s
R
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
If parameter K1 (radius of V-axis rotation) = 0
N
180 (deg/min)
Fc = F ×
R
.A
ll
ri
gh
If parameter K1 (radius of V-axis rotation) 0
Fc = F (deg/min)
o.
F: Feed rate (mm/min)
R: Parameter K1 (mm) [radius of V-axis rotation (distance between V-axis and tool nose)]
K
ZA
K
IM
During circular interpolation
A
Se
ri
al
N
The V-axis rotation, however, is controlled in order that the preset maximum allowable cutting
speed of the V-axis should not be exceeded, regardless of the result Fc of the above
calculation.
Rapid traverse occurs according to parameter M1 (rapid traverse speed [for the V-axis]).
F
R
Fr
r
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
The circular interpolation is performed at such a speed that the tool nose will move at the
speed specified by the F-code.
The cutting feed rate of the circular interpolation (Fr) is calculated as follows:
C
op
MEP317
r
Fr = F × R + r (mm/min)
F: Feed rate (mm/min)
r : Radius of circular interpolation (mm)
R: Parameter K1 (mm) [radius of V-axis rotation (distance between V-axis and tool nose)]
The speed of the circular interpolation (F), however, is automatically controlled in order that
the preset maximum allowable cutting speed of the V-axis should not be exceeded.
12-75
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12-9-4 Remarks
1.
If the axis of the work spindle is to be used for shaping control, the spindle axis must be
changed over to a servoaxis (V-axis). The following M-codes are provided to select the
control mode of the work spindle.
M193: Selection of spindle as the V-axis (Servo On)
M194: Selection of spindle as the milling spindle (Servo Off)
2.
In the mode of single-block operation, interlocking at the start of cutting block or each block,
the operation will be stopped before the preparatory rotation on the V-axis.
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Block stop position
.A
ll
MEP318
The V-axis motion command is ignored in the mode of shaping.
4.
The workpiece origin offsetting for the V-axis (G92 Vv) cannot be set in the mode of shaping
(G41.1 or G42.1). Setting such a command will only result in alarm 807 ILLEGAL
FORMAT.
5.
With the mirror image selected for the X- or Y-axis, the direction of the V-axis rotation is
reversed.
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
3.
Mirror image OFF
A
ZA
K
Y
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
Mirror image on the
X-axis ON
Mirror image on the Xand Y-axes ON
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
X
Mirror image on the
Y-axis ON
6.
The indication for the V-axis under BUFFER on the POSITION display refers to an absolute
value.
7.
For the connection between blocks, the BUFFER area on the POSITION display indicates
the angle of the V-axis rotation in addition to the distance of the X- and Y-axis movement.
C
op
yr
MEP319
12-76
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12
12-9-5 Relationship to other functions
A.
Commands available in the mode of shaping control
Function
Code
Function
Code
G00
Tool radius compensation (to the left)
G41
Linear interpolation
G01
Tool radius compensation (to the right)
G42
Threading with C-axis interpolation
G01.1
Tool length offset (+)
G43
Circular interpolation (CW)
G02
Tool length offset (–)
G44
Circular interpolation (CCW)
G03
Helical interpolation (CW)
G02
Tool position offset
G45, G46,
G47, G48
Helical interpolation (CCW)
G03
Tool position offset OFF
G49
Spiral interpolation (CW) (*1)
G02.1
Mirror image by G-code OFF
Spiral interpolation (CCW) (*1)
G03.1
Mirror image by G-code ON
Dwell
G04
Local coordinate system setting (*4)
Fine spline interpolation
G06.1
Selection of machine coordinate system
NURBS interpolation
G06.2
Virtual-axis interpolation
G07
Cylindrical interpolation
G07.1
One-way positioning (*3)
Exact-stop check (*2)
G09
Exact stop mode (*2)
Programmed data setting ON
G10
Modal spline interpolation
G61.2
Programmed data setting OFF
G11
Cutting mode
G64
Polar coordinate interpolation ON
G12.1
User macro single call
G65
Polar coordinate interpolation OFF
G13.1
User macro modal call A
G66
Selection of XY-plane
G17
User macro modal call B
G66.1
Selection of ZX-plane
G18
User macro modal call OFF
G67
Selection of YZ-plane
G19
3-D coordinate conversion OFF
G69
Hole-machining fixed cycles
G71.1 - G89
Pre-move stroke check ON
YA
Return from reference point (*3)
M
Return to reference point (*3)
A
Reference point check
er
ve
d
re
s
ts
gh
ri
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
K
ZA
G54/G55/G56/
G57/G58/G59
G60
G61
G93
G23
Feed per minute (asynchronous)
G94
G27
Feed per revolution (synchronous) (*5)
G95
G28
Initial point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G98
R-point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G99
A
G90/G91
G29
Skip function
G31
01
3
G53
Inverse time feed
G30
G40
(c
)2
G52
Absolute/Incremental data input
Return to 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference points
Tool radius compensation OFF
G51.1
G22
ZA
Pre-move stroke check OFF
Shaping cannot be realized correctly since the starting and ending point do not lie on one and the same circumference.
ht
*1
Deceleration up to stop does not occur for the rotation on the V-axis.
Shaping control is suppressed.
The rotation on the V-axis is performed with reference to the coordinate system established in the shaping mode.
The designated rate of feed per revolution cannot be obtained since the spindle is controlled as the V-axis.
C
op
yr
ig
*2
*3
*4
*5
o.
N
G21
K
IM
Metric command
G50.1
Selection of workpiece coordinate systems
al
ri
G20
Se
Inch command
.
Positioning
Giving any other command than those enumerated above in the mode of shaping control will
lead to various alarms (according to the unavailable commands given).
12-77
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
B.
Modes in which shaping control is selectable (with G41.1 or G42.1)
Function
Code
Function
Code
G00
Tool length offset (+)
G43
Linear interpolation
G01
Tool length offset (–)
G44
Threading with C-axis interpolation
G01.1
Tool position offset OFF
G49
Circular interpolation (CW)
G02
Mirror image by G-code OFF
G50.1
Circular interpolation (CCW)
G03
Mirror image by G-code ON
G51.1
Helical interpolation (CW)
G02
Helical interpolation (CCW)
G03
Selection of workpiece coordinate systems
G54/G55/G56/
G57/G58/G59
Spiral interpolation (CW) (*1)
G02.1
Exact stop mode (*2)
G61
Spiral interpolation (CCW) (*1)
G03.1
Geometry compensation (*3)
G61.1
Fine spline interpolation
G06.1
Modal spline interpolation
NURBS interpolation
G06.2
Cutting mode
Cylindrical interpolation
G07.1
User macro modal call A
Programmed data setting ON
G10
User macro modal call B
Programmed data setting OFF
G11
User macro modal call OFF
Polar coordinate interpolation ON
G12.1
3-D coordinate conversion ON
Polar coordinate interpolation OFF
G13.1
3-D coordinate conversion OFF
G69
Selection of XY-plane
G17
Hole-machining fixed cycles
G71.1 - G89
Selection of ZX-plane
G18
Absolute/Incremental data input
G90/G91
Selection of YZ-plane
G19
Inverse time feed
G93
Inch command
G20
Feed per minute (asynchronous)
G94
Metric command
G21
Feed per revolution (synchronous) (*4)
G95
Pre-move stroke check ON
G22
Pre-move stroke check OFF
G23
Initial point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G98
Tool radius compensation OFF
G40
R-point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G99
er
ve
d
re
s
G64
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
G66
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
G66.1
G67
G68
A
ZA
K
N
al
ri
G42
G61.2
K
IM
Tool radius compensation (to the right)
G41
Se
Tool radius compensation (to the left)
.
Positioning
Shaping cannot be realized correctly since the starting and ending point do not lie on one and the same circumference.
Deceleration up to stop does not occur for the rotation on the V-axis.
Shaping cannot be realized correctly since fixed gradient control cannot be applied to the rotation on the V-axis.
Use the following parameter as required to specify whether or not to raise an alarm if shaping control should be
selected in the mode of geometry compensation.
F331 bit 5 = 0: No alarm is raised.
= 1: Alarm 822 ILLEGAL MODAL is raised.
ZA
*1
01
3
YA
M
A
*2
*3
The designated rate of feed per revolution cannot be obtained since the spindle is controlled as the V-axis.
)2
*4
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
Giving a G41.1 or G42.1 command in a mode other than those enumerated above will lead to
various alarms (according to the improper modes).
12-78
Serial No. 340839
TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12
12-9-6 Sample program
Subprogram
WNo. 1001
O1000
G91G28 X0 Y0 Z0
M193
G28 C0
G90 G92 G53 X0 Y0 Z0
G00 G54 G43 X35.Y0.Z100.H1
G00 Z3.
G01 Z0.1 F3000
O1001
G17 G91 G01 Y20.,R10.Z-0.01
X-70.,R10.
Y-40.,R10.
X70. ,R10.
Y20.
M99
%
G42.1
M98 P1001 L510
M98 P1002 L2
WNo. 1002
G91 G01 Y10.Z0.05
G40.1
G90 G00 Z100.
G28 X0 Y0 Z0
G00 C0
M194
M30
%
O1002
G17 G91 G01 Y20.,R10.
X-70.,R10.
Y-40.,R10.
X70.,R10.
Y20.
M99
%
ts
gh
ri
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
A
ZA
K
N
al
ri
Se
K
IM
R10
20
A
10
5
W
R10
YA
M
0.1
01
3
R10
20
)2
W: Workpiece origin
of G54
35
MEP321
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
Spindle
(V-axis)
Tool
ZA
R10
35
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Main program
WNo. 1000
12-79
ht
ig
yr
op
C
01
3
)2
(c
K
ZA
al
ri
Se
A
K
IM
ZA
A
M
YA
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
N
ts
gh
ri
.
er
ve
d
re
s
Serial No. 340839
12 TOOL OFFSET FUNCTIONS
12-80 E
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13-1 Hole Machining Pattern Cycles: G34.1/G35/G36/G37.1
13-1-1 Overview
1.
Function and purpose
Hole machining patterns are used to arrange on a predetermined pattern hole positions at which
to execute a hole-machining cycle.
er
ve
d
.
Give beforehand a command of the desired hole-machining cycle without any axis positioning
data (which only causes storage of the hole-machining data to be executed at the arranged
hole positions).
ts
re
s
The execution of this command begins with the positioning to the first one of the arranged
holes. The type of hole machining depends on the corresponding cycle designated last.
.A
ll
ri
gh
The current mode of hole-machining cycle will remain active over the execution of this
command till it is cancelled explicitly.
N
This command will only activate positioning when it is given in any other mode than those of
hole-machining cycle.
List of hole machining pattern cycles
Argument addresses
o.
Description
Remarks
N
G-code
X, Y, I, J, K
G35
Holes on a line
G36
Holes on an arc
G37.1
Holes on a grid
Note :
In order that it may function correctly, do not give a command of hole machining pattern
cycle in one block together with any one for the following functions (described in this
chapter):
ZA
X, Y, I, J, K
X, Y, I, J, P, K
X, Y, I, P, J, K
M
A
ZA
K
IM
A
ri
K
Holes on a circle
al
G34.1
Se
2.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
These commands only cause positioning at the speed of the current modal condition (of
G-code group 01) in default of any preceding hole-machining cycle.
YA
Fixed cycle
Subprogram control
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Macro call
13-1
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13-1-2 Holes on a circle: G34.1
As shown in the format below, a command of G34.1 determines a circle of radius “r” around the
center designated by X and Y. The circumference is then divided, beginning from the point of the
central angle “”, regularly by “n”, and the hole machining designated beforehand by a fixed cycle
(G81 etc.) will be done around all the vertices of the regular n-gon.
The movement in the XY-plane from hole to hole occurs rapidly (under G00). The argument data
of the G34.1 command will be cleared upon completion of its execution.
1.
Programming format
G34.1 Xx Yy Ir J Kn;
er
ve
d
.
X, Y : Coordinates of the center of the circle.
: Radius (r) of the circle. Always given in a positive value.
J
: Central angle () of the first hole. Positive central angles refer to counterclockwise
measurement.
K
: Number (n) of holes to be machined (from 1 to 9999). The algebraic sign of
argument K refers to the rotational direction of the sequential machining of “n” holes.
Set a positive and a negative number respectively for counterclockwise and clockwise rotation.
Sample programes
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
2.
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
I
Given below is an example of G81 hole machining with a figure representing the hole positions.
N001 G91;
N002 G81 Z-10. R5. L0. F200;
K
ZA
A
x = 200
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N004 G80;
N005 G90 G0 X500. Y100.;
N
o.
N003 G90 G34.1 X200. Y100. I100. J20. K6;
= 20°
YA
M
A
r = 100
01
3
y = 100
ht
(c
)2
n=6
Last position before (500, 100)
G34.1 execution
Notes
C
op
3.
yr
ig
D740PB0007
Give a G90 or G91 command as required to designate the axis position in absolute or
incremental values.
As shown in the above example, the last position of the G34.1 command is on the last one of
the arranged holes. Use the method of absolute data input, therefore, to specify the
movement to the position for the next operation desired. (An incremental command would
require a more or less complicated calculation with respect to that last hole.)
13-2
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
13-1-3 Holes on a line: G35
As shown in the format below, a command of G35 determines a straight line through the starting
point designated by X and Y at the angle “” with the X-axis. On this line “n” holes will be
machined at intervals of “d”, according to the current mode of hole machining.
The movement in the XY-plane from hole to hole occurs rapidly (under G00). The argument data
of the G35 command will be cleared upon completion of its execution.
1.
Programming format
G35 Xx Yy Id J Kn;
X, Y : Coordinates of the starting point.
J
K
: Angle () of the line. Positive angles refer to counterclockwise measurement.
: Number (n) of holes to be machined (from 1 to 9999), inclusive of the starting point.
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
: Interval (d) between holes. Change of sign for argument I causes a centrically
symmetric hole arrangement with the starting point as the center.
gh
Sample programes
ri
2.
I
.A
ll
Given below is an example of G81 hole machining with a figure representing the hole positions.
N001 G91;
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
N002 G81 Z-10. R5. L0. F100;
K
ZA
= 30°
K
IM
ZA
y = 100
n=5
d = 100
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
N003 G35 X200. Y100. I100. J30. K5;
N004 G80;
x = 200
YA
M
A
Last position before
G35 execution
01
3
Notes
)2
3.
D740PB0008
ht
(c
Give a G90 or G91 command as required to designate the axis position in absolute or
incremental values.
C
op
yr
ig
Omission of argument K or setting “K0” will result in an alarm. A setting of K with five or more
digits will lead to the lowest four digits being used.
In a block with G35 any words with addresses other than G, L, N, X, Y, I, J, K, F, M, S, T and
B will simply be ignored.
Giving a G-code of group 00 in the same block with G35 will cause an exclusive execution of
either code which is given later.
In a block with G35 a G22 or G23 command will simply be ignored without affecting the
execution of the G35 command.
13-3
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13-1-4 Holes on an arc: G36
As shown in the format below, a command of G36 determines a circle of radius “r” around the
center designated by X and Y. On the circumference “n” holes will be machined, starting from the
point of the central angle “”, at angular intervals of “”, according to the current mode of hole
machining.
The movement in the XY-plane from hole to hole occurs rapidly (under G00). The argument data
of the G36 command will be cleared upon completion of its execution.
1.
Programming format
G36 Xx Yy Ir J P Kn;
er
ve
d
.
X, Y : Coordinates of the center of the arc.
: Radius (r) of the arc. Always given in a positive value.
J
: Central angle () of the first hole. Positive central angles refer to counterclockwise
measurement.
P
: Angular interval () between holes. The algebraic sign of argument P refers to the
rotational direction of the sequential machining of “n” holes. Set a positive and a
negative value respectively for counterclockwise and clockwise rotation.
: Number (n) of holes to be machined (from 1 to 9999).
Sample programes
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
2.
N
K
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
I
Given below is an example of G81 hole machining with a figure representing the hole positions.
N001 G91;
N002 G81 Z–10. R5. F100;
K
ZA
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
N003 G36 X300. Y100. I300. J10. P15. K6;
N004 G80;
n=6
M
A
= 15°
YA
= 10°
01
3
y = 100
x = 300
(c
)2
Last position before
G36 execution
yr
Notes
Give a G90 or G91 command as required to designate the axis position in absolute or
incremental values.
C
op
3.
ig
ht
D740PB0009
13-4
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
13-1-5 Holes on a grid: G37.1
As shown in the format below, a command of G37.1 determines a grid pattern of [x][nx] by
[y][ny] with the point designated by X and Y as starting point. On the grid points the hole
machining designated beforehand by a fixed cycle will be done “nx” in number along the X-axis
at intervals of “x”, and “ny” in number along the Y-axis at intervals of “y”. The main progression
of machining occurs in the X-axis direction.
The movement in the XY-plane from hole to hole occurs rapidly (under G00). The argument data
of the G37.1 command will be cleared upon completion of its execution.
1.
Programming format
er
ve
d
.
G37.1 Xx Yy Ix Pnx Jy Kny;
X, Y : Coordinates of the starting point.
: Hole interval (x) on the X-axis. Set a positive and a negative value to arrange holes
in respective directions from the starting point on the X-axis.
P
: Number (nx) of holes to be arranged on the X-axis (from 1 to 9999).
J
: Hole interval (y) on the Y-axis. Set a positive and a negative value to arrange holes
in respective directions from the starting point on the Y-axis.
: Number (ny) of holes to be arranged on the Y-axis (from 1 to 9999).
Sample programs
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
2.
N
K
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
I
K
ZA
K
IM
y = 100
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Given below is an example of G81 hole machining with a figure representing the hole positions.
N001 G91;
N002 G81 Z–10. R5. F20;
N003 G37.1 X300. Y-100. I50. P10 J100. K8;
N004 G80;
ny = 8
A
ZA
Last position before
G37.1 execution
x = 50
x = 300
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
y = 100
yr
Notes
C
op
3.
D740PB0010
ig
ht
nx = 10
Give a G90 or G91 command as required to designate the axis position in absolute or
incremental values.
Omission of argument P or K, or setting “P0” or “K0” will result in an alarm. A setting of K or P
with five or more digits will lead to the lowest four digits being used.
In a block with G37.1 any words with addresses other than G, L, N, X, Y, I, J, K, F, M, S, T
and B will simply be ignored.
Giving a G-code of group 00 in the same block with G37.1 will cause an exclusive execution
of either code which is given later.
In a block with G37.1 a G22 or G23 command will simply be ignored without affecting the
execution of the G37.1 command.
13-5
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13-2 Fixed Cycles
13-2-1 Outline
1.
Function and purspose
High-speed deep-hole drilling
[X Y] Z Q R F [P D K I J(B)]
G74
Reverse tapping
[X Y] Z R F [P D J(B) H]
G74.5
Left-hand Punch tapping, PT1.0
[X Y] Z R F I [J ,D P L]
G74.6
Left-hand Punch tapping, PT1.5
G74.8
Left-hand Punch tapping, PT2.0
G75
Boring
G76
Boring
G77
Back spot facing
G78
Boring
G79
Boring
G81
Spot drilling
G82
Drilling
G83
Deep-hole drilling
G84
Tapping
G84.5
Right-hand Punch tapping, PT1.0
G84.6
Right-hand Punch tapping, PT1.5
[X Y] Z R F I [J ,D P L]
G84.8
Right-hand Punch tapping, PT2.0
[X Y] Z R F I [J ,D P L]
G85
Reaming
[X Y] Z R F [P D E]
G86
Boring
[X Y] Z R F [P]
G87
Back boring
[X Y] Z R F [Q P D J(B)]
Boring
[X Y] Z R F [P]
Boring
[X Y] Z R F [P]
[X Y] Z R F I [J ,D P L]
[X Y] Z R F [Q P D K I J(B)]
[X Y] Z R F [Q P D J(B)]
Return to initial point only.
[X Y] Z R F [Q P D K]
ZA
K
[X Y] Z R F [Q P D K E]
A
[X Y] Z R F
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
[X Y] Z R F [Q P E J(B)]
M
YA
)2
Dwell in seconds
[X Y] Z R F I [J ,D P L]
[X Y] Z R F [P D I J(B)]
[X Y] Z Q R F [P D K I J(B)]
[X Y] Z R F [P D J(B) H]
Dwell in seconds
[X Y] Z R F I [J ,D P L]
ig
ht
G89
re
s
G73
ts
[X Y] Z Q R F [P D]
gh
[X Y] Z Q R F [P D]
Chamfering cutter (CCW)
ri
Chamfering cutter (CW)
G72.1
Notes
.A
ll
G71.1
G88
Arguments
N
Description
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
G-code
01
3
List of fixed cycles
(c
2.
er
ve
d
.
The fixed-cycle functions allow positioning, hole-drilling, boring, tapping, or other machining
programs to be executed according to the predetermined job sequence by the commands of a
single block. The available job sequences for machining are listed below.
The fixed-cycle function mode is cancelled on reception of G80 or a G-command (G00, G01,
G02, G03, G2.1, or G3.1) of group G01. All related types of data are also cleared to zero at the
same time.
]) can be omitted.
C
op
yr
Note 1: The arguments enclosed in brackets ([
Return to initial point only.
Note 2: Whether argument J or B is to be used depends on the value that has been set in bit 1
of parameter F84.
Parameter F84 bit 1 = 1: Argument J-command
= 0: Argument B-command
Note 3: In order that it may function correctly, do not give a command of fixed cycle in one
block together with any one for the following functions (described in this chapter):
Hole machining pattern cycle
Subprogram control
Macro call
13-6
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
Note 4: As for the fixed tapping cycles enumerated below, the controlled axis of tapping motion
is determined, as is the case in general with the hole machining axis, according to the
plane selected for describing the tool’s radial positioning.
If the direction of feed on the tool axis is reversed, then the right- and left-handedness
of the thread is inversed for each tapping cycle.
G74 (Reverse tapping)
G84.2 (Synchronous normal tapping)
G84 (Normal tapping)
G84.3 (Synchronous reverse tapping)
13-2-2 Fixed-cycle machining data format
Setting fixed-cycle machining data
.
1.
er
ve
d
Set fixed-cycle machining data as follows:
re
s
G X_Y_ Z_Q_R_P_D_K_I_J(B)_E_H_F_,D_ L_
Repeat times
gh
ts
Hole-machining data
ri
Hole position data
.A
ll
Hole-machining mode
N
Hole-machining mode (G-code)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
See the list of the fixed cycles under 2 in Subsection 13-2-1.
Hole position data (X, Y)
K
ZA
A
ZA
Hole-machining data
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Specify the position of the (first) hole to be machined using incremental or absolute data.
When the hole position is specified by the incremental data input method, hole machining will
be so often repeated as instructed with argument L at regular intervals as specified with the
increments. When the absolute data input method is used, hole machining will be so often
repeated as instructed with argument L at one and the same place as specified with the
absolue coordinates.
YA
M
A
Z ....... Set the distance from R-point to the hole bottom using incremental data, or set the
position of the hole bottom using absolute data.
01
3
Q ...... Set this address code using incremental data. (This address code has different uses
according to the type of hole-machining mode selected.)
(c
)2
R ....... Set the distance from the initial point of machining to R-point using incremental data, or
set the position of R-point using absolute data.
ig
ht
P ....... Set the desired time or the number of spindle revolutions, for dwell at the hole bottom.
(Set the overlapping length for the chamfering cutter cycles G71.1 and G72.1.)
C
op
yr
D ....... Set this address code using incremental data. (This address code has different uses
according to the type of hole-machining mode selected.)
K ....... Set this address code using incremental data. (This address code has different uses
according to the type of hole-machining mode selected.)
I ........ Set the feed override distance for the tool to be decelerated during the last cutting
operation of drilling with a G73, G82, or G83 command code.
Specify the cycle operation mode for synchronous tapping (G84.2 or G84.3).
Specify the rate of cutting feed for helical or axial grooving for Punch tapping (G74.5,
G74.6, G74.8, G84.5, G84.6 or G84.8).
J(B) ... For G74 or G84, set the timing of dwell data output; for G75, G76, or G87, set the
timing of M3 and M4 output, or; for G73, G82, or G83, set the feed override ratio for
deceleration during the last cutting operation.
13-7
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
J ....... Specify the spindle speed for retracting the tool for Punch tapping (G74.5, G74.6,
G74.8, G84.5, G84.6 or G84.8).
E ....... Set a cutting feed rate (for G77, G79 and G85).
H ....... Select synchronous/asynchronous tapping cycle and set the return speed override
during a synchronous tapping cycle.
F ....... Set a cutting feed rate.
Specify the pitch of thread forming for Punch tapping (G74.5, G74.6, G74.8, G84.5,
G84.6 or G84.8).
,D ...... Specify the helical return distance for relieving the tool for Punch tapping (G74.5,
G74.6, G74.8, G84.5, G84.6 or G84.8).
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Repeat times (L)
Specify the number of repetitions of the same cycle for machining holes at equal intervals.
As for hole positioning data, use the incremental data input method to specify the first place of
hole machining. When the absolute data input method is used, hole machining will be so
often repeated as instructed with argument L at one and the same place as specified with the
absolue coordinates.
This number can be omitted if “L1” is desired. When L0 is deisgnated, the hole machining
data are stored in the memory but no holes will be machined.
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
The differences between the G90 mode data setting method and the G91 mode data setting
method are shown in the diagram below.
13-8
Serial No. 340839
13
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
G90
G91
Initial point
Initial point
R
Z=0
er
ve
d
.
R
R-point
R-point
D
D
Point D
re
s
Point D
Z
Point Z
MEP138
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
: Signifies signed distance data that begins at .
: Signifies unsigned distance data.
N
Point Z
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
Z
o.
Note 1: The initial point refers to the Z-axis position existing at the moment of the fixed-cycle
mode selection.
K
ZA
ri
al
N
Note 2: Point D is that at which positioning from R-point can be done further at a rapid feed
rate.
A
M
Programming format
YA
2.
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
Note 3: When the hole position is specified by the incremental data input method, hole
machining will be so often repeated as instructed with argument L at regular intervals
as specified with the increments. When the absolute data input method is used, hole
machining will be so often repeated as instructed with argument L at one and the same
place as specified with the absolue coordinates.
01
3
As shown below, the fixed-cycle command consists of a hole-machining mode section, a hole
position data section, a hole-machining data section, and a repeat instruction section.
(c
)2
G X_Y_ Z_Q_R_P_D_K_I_J(B)_E_H_F_,D_ L_
ht
Repeat times
ig
Hole-machining data
yr
Hole position data
C
op
Hole-machining mode
13-9
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
Detailed description
1.
The hole-machining mode refers to a fixed-cycle mode used for drilling, counterboring,
tapping, boring, or other machining operations. Hole position data denotes X- and Y-axis
positioning data. Hole-machining data denotes actual machining data. Hole position data
and repeat times are non-modal, whereas hole-machining data are modal.
2.
If M00 or M01 is set either in the same block as a fixed-cycle command or during the
fixed-cycle mode, then the fixed-cycle command will be ignored and then after positioning,
M00 or M01 will be outputted. The fixed-cycle command will be executed if either X, Y, Z, or
R is set.
3.
During fixed-cycle operation, the machine acts in one of the following seven types of
manner:
er
ve
d
.
3.
For positioning on the X-, and Y-axes, the machine acts according to the
current G-code of group 01 (G02 and G03 will be regarded as G01).
Action 2
M19 is sent from the NC unit to the machine at the positioning complete point
(initial point) in the G87 mode. After execution of this M-command, the next
action will begin. In the single-block operation mode, positioning is followed
by block stop.
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
Action 1
Initial point
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
2
1
7
3
N
o.
R-point
5
A
ZA
K
6
MEP139
K
IM
Se
ri
al
4
Positioning to R-point by rapid motion.
Action 4
Hole-machining by cutting feed.
Action 5
Depending on the selected fixed-cycle type, spindle stop (M05), spindle
reverse rotation (M04), spindle normal rotation (M03), dwell, or tool shift is
performed at the hole bottom.
YA
M
A
ZA
Action 3
)2
01
3
Action 6
Return to the initial point is performed by rapid motion.
ht
(c
Action 7
Tool relief to R-point is performed by cutting feed or rapid motion (according
to the selected fixed-cycle type).
C
op
yr
ig
Whether fixed-cycle mode operation is to be terminated at action 6 or action 7 can be
selected with the following G-codes:
G98: Return to the initial point level
G99: Return to the R-point level
Both commands are modal. Once G98 has been given, for example, the G98 mode remains
valid until G99 is given. The G98 mode is the initial state of the NC.
For a block without positioning data, the hole-machining data are only stored into the
memory and fixed-cycle operation is not performed.
13-10
Serial No. 340839
13
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
4.
Feed function (F-code) for fixed cycles
The feed function (F-code) specified for a fixed cycle is processed as follows according to the
type of the cycle.
Description
Chamfering cutter (CW)
Chamfering cutter (CCW)
G73
High-speed deep-hole
drilling
G74
Reverse tapping
(asynchronous)
G75
Boring
G76
Boring
G77
Back spot facing
G78
Boring
G79
Boring
G81
Spot drilling
G82
Drilling
G83
Deep-hole drilling
G84
Tapping (asynchronous)
G85
Reaming
G86
Boring
G87
Back boring
G88
Boring
G89
Boring
G74
Reverse tapping
(synchronous)
in
Omitted
Given
F1
F1.0
1 [mm/min]
1 [mm/min]
1 [in/min]
1 [in/min]
G95 (Feed per
revolution)
Omitted
Given
F1
F1.0
0.01 [mm/rev]
1 [mm/rev]
0.0001 [in/rev]
1 [in/rev]
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
G72.1
Operation speed
mm
G94 (Feed per
minute)
Se
K
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
As above (described for G71.1)
ZA
G71.1
F-code (with decimal
point omitted/given)
Mode of feed
G94 (Feed per
minute)
Omitted
Given
F1
F1.0
1 [mm/rev]
1 [mm/rev]
1 [in/rev]
1 [in/rev]
G95 (Feed per
revolution)
Omitted
Given
F1
F1.0
1 [mm/rev]
1 [mm/rev]
1 [in/rev]
1 [in/rev]
Left-hand Punch tapping,
PT1.0
G74.6
Left-hand Punch tapping,
PT1.5
G74.8
Left-hand Punch tapping,
PT2.0
G84
Tapping (synchronous)
G84.2
YA
01
3
)2
Synchronous tapping
ht
As above (described for G74 [synchronous])
Synchronous reverse
tapping
yr
ig
G84.3
M
A
G74.5
(c
ZA
K
IM
A
G-code
C
op
G84.5
Right-hand Punch tapping,
PT1.0
G84.6
Right-hand Punch tapping,
PT1.5
G84.8
Right-hand Punch tapping,
PT2.0
Note :
Argument E (rate of feed for return motion) is always processed as a value for feed per
minute, independently of the current mode of feed (G94 [feed per minute] or G95 [feed
per revolution]).
“E1” or “E1.0”, for example, sets the return speed to 1 mm/min or 1 in/min.
13-11
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13-2-3 G71.1 (Chamfering cutter CW)
G71.1 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz Qq0 [Pp0 Dd0] Ff0
Initial point
G98
R-point
G99
d0
er
ve
d
.
Point D
3
2
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
gh
N
q0
.A
ll
ri
Point Z
ts
re
s
f0
5
1
4
o.
p0
d0 : Distance from R-point
f0 : Feed rate
K
ZA
Se
- X, Y, P, and/or D can be omitted.
A
ri
al
N
q0 : Radius
p0 : Overlapping length (in arc)
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
- Omission of Q or setting “Q0” results in an alarm.
13-12
MEP140
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
13-2-4 G72.1 (Chamfering cutter CCW)
G72.1 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz Qq0 [Pp0 Dd0] Ff0
Initial point
G98
R-point
G99
d0
er
ve
d
.
Point D
3
2
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
gh
N
q0
.A
ll
ri
Point Z
ts
re
s
f0
5
1
4
N
o.
p0
K
ZA
- X, Y, P, and/or D can be omitted.
d0 : Distance from R-point
f0 : Feed rate
A
Se
ri
al
q0 : Radius
p0 : Overlapping length (in arc)
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
- Omission of Q or setting “Q0” results in an alarm.
13-13
MEP141
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13-2-5 G73 (High-speed deep-hole drilling)
G73 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz Qtz [Ptc] Ff0 [Dd0 Kk0 Ii0 Jj0(Bb0)]
Initial point
G98
R-point
k0
Point D
.
[1]
f0
f2
G99
d0
f0
er
ve
d
tz
re
s
tz + d0
[2]
f2
Point Z
o.
j0 : Feed override ratio (%)
(b0)
f0 : Feed rate
f1 : Feed overridden f1 = f0×j0(b0)/100
f2 : Return speed (fixed)
Max. speed: 9999 mm/min (for metric spec.)
999.9 in/min (for inch spec.)
K
ZA
ri
al
N
tz : Depth of cut per pass
tc : Dwell (in time or No. of revolutions)
d0 : Return distance
k0 : Distance from R-point to the starting
point of cutting feed
i0 : Feed override distance
MEP142
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
Dwell
(tc)
ri
Dwell
(tc)
gh
ts
i0
f1
A
Se
- The feed rate will remain unchanged if either I or J(B) is omitted.
K
IM
- X, Y, P, D, K, I, and/or J(B) can be omitted.
If D is omitted or set to 0, the machine operates according to the value of parameter F12.
ZA
- The alarm 809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT will occur if Q is set to 0.
YA
M
A
- Whether argument J or B is to be used depends on the value that has been set in bit 1 of
parameter F84.
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Parameter F84 bit 1 = 1: Argument J-command
= 0: Argument B-command
Note:
For a horizontal machining center, if the value of bit 1 of parameter F84 is 1
(argument J-command), setting a B-command will cause the table to rotate. Be
careful in that case to ensure no interference between the workpiece and the tool.
- The feed rate is f1 only if the starting point of a cutting pass is within the range of i 0.
C
op
Example:
In the diagram shown above, during the second cutting operation, since pecking
return point [1] falls outside the range of feed override distance i 0, feeding does
not decelerate and cutting is performed at feed rate f 0; during the third cutting
operation, since pecking return point [2] falls within the range of i0, feeding
decelerates and cutting is performed at feed rate f 1.
13-14
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
13-2-6 G74 (Reverse tapping)
G74 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc] Ff0 [Jj0(Bb0) Dd0 Hh0 Kk0]
Initial point
G98
M04
Point R’
d0
G99
R-point
er
ve
d
Point D
f1
re
s
f1
f0
.
k0
Point Z
Dwell
M03
gh
ts
MEP143’
h0 : Flag for synchronous/asynchronous tapping and
ri
tc : Dwell (always in time)
f0 : Feed rate
Asynchronous tapping
Synchronous tapping
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
h0 = 0
h0 > 0
N
j0 : 1…M03 after dwell at hole bottom
(b0) 2…M03 before dwell at hole bottom
4…M04 after dwell at R-point
d0 : Distance from R-point
.A
ll
the return speed override (%) for synchronous
tapping
k0 : Distance from R-point
(Tap lifting distance)
al
N
o.
- X, Y, P, J(B), D, H, and/or K can be omitted.
If, however, J(B) is omitted or set to 0, the setting of J(B) will be regarded as 2.
If H is omitted, synchronous tapping method is automatically selected.
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
For synchronous tapping, see Subsection 13-2-21.
ZA
- Whether argument J or B is to be used depends on the value that has been set in bit 1 of
parameter F84.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
Parameter F84 bit 1 = 1: Argument J-command
= 0: Argument B-command
Note:
For a horizontal machining center, if the value of bit 1 of parameter F84 is 1 (argument
J-command), setting a B-command will cause the table to rotate. Be careful in that
case to ensure no interference between the workpiece and the tool.
13-15
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13-2-7 G75 (Boring)
G75 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc Qq0] Ff0 [Dd0 Jj0(Bb0) Kk0 Ii0]
M03
q0
Initial point
G98
M03
q0
R-point
.
d0
er
ve
d
Point D
G99
ts
q0
gh
M19
re
s
f0
.A
ll
k0
ri
i0
Point Z
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Dwell
Feed and Spindle speed 70%
N
o.
MEP144
A
ZA
K
j0 : 0 or omitted ········· M03 after machining
(b0) Value except 0 ····· M04 after machining
k0 : Distance from point Z
i0 : Distance from point Z
K
IM
Se
ri
al
tc : Dwell (in time or No. of revolutions)
q0 : Amount of relief on the XY-plane
(Direction determined by bits 3 & 4 of I14)
f0 : Feed rate
d0 : Distance from R-point
ZA
- X, Y, P, Q, D, J(B), K, and/or I can be omitted.
M
A
- Whether argument J or B is to be used depends on the value that has been set in bit 1 of
parameter F84.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
Parameter F84 bit 1 = 1: Argument J-command
= 0: Argument B-command
Note:
For a horizontal machining center, if the value of bit 1 of parameter F84 is 1 (argument
J-command), setting a B-command will cause the table to rotate. Be careful in that
case to ensure no interference between the workpiece and the tool.
13-16
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
13-2-8 G76 (Boring)
G76 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc Qq0] Ff1 [Dd0 Jj0(Bb0)]
M03
q0
Initial point
G98
er
ve
d
.
M03
q0
R-point
Point D
re
s
d0
ts
G99
.A
ll
ri
gh
f1
q0
N
Point Z
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
M19
Dwell
K
f1 : Feed rate
j0 : 0 or omitted ········· M03 after machining
(b0) Value except 0 ····· M04 after machining
ZA
ri
al
N
o.
tc : Dwell (in time or No. of revolutions)
q0 : Amount of relief on the XY-plane
(Direction determined by bits 3 & 4 of I14)
MEP145
A
Se
- X, Y, P, Q, D, and/or J(B) can be omitted.
K
IM
- Whether argument J or B is to be used depends on the value that has been set in bit 1 of
parameter F84.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
Parameter F84 bit 1 = 1: Argument J-command
= 0: Argument B-command
Note:
For a horizontal machining center, if the value of bit 1 of parameter F84 is 1
(argument J-command), setting a B-command will cause the table to rotate. Be
careful in that case to ensure no interference between the workpiece and the tool.
13-17
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13-2-9 G77 (Back spot facing)
G77 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc Qtz] Ff0 [Ef1 Jj0(Bb0) Dd0]
Initial point
er
ve
d
.
tz
Point R’
d0
f0
ri
f0
gh
Point Z (z)
ts
Dwell
f1
()
re
s
Point D
f1
MEP146’
o.
j0(b0) : Output order of M03 and M04 at hole bottom.
0: M03, then M04 (for normal spindle rotation)
1: M04, then M03 (for reverse spindle rotation)
d0 : Distance from point R’
ZA
ri
al
f1 : Feed rate 1
K
N
tc : Dwell (in time or No. of revolutions)
tz : Distance from the initial point
f0 : Feed rate 0
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
M04
.A
ll
R-point (r)
M03
A
K
IM
Se
- Normally, asynchronous feed (G94) is used for the pass marked with (). If f1 = 0, or if f1 is
omitted, however, synchronous feed (G95) is used (feed rate = 0.5 mm/rev).
- X, Y, P, Q, E, J (B), and/or D can be omitted.
M
A
ZA
- Whether argument J or B is to be used depends on the value that has been set in bit 1 of
parameter F84.
(c
)2
01
3
YA
Parameter F84 bit 1 = 1: Argument J-command
= 0: Argument B-command
Note:
For a horizontal machining center, if the value of bit 1 of parameter F84 is 1
(argument J-command), setting a B-command will cause the table to rotate. Be
careful in that case to ensure no interference between the workpiece and the tool.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
- In G91 (incremental data input) mode, the direction of hole machining is automatically
determined according to the sign of Z data (the sign of data at address R will be ignored).
13-18
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
13-2-10 G78 (Boring)
G78 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc] Ff0 [Dd0 Kk0 Qi0]
Initial point
G98
.
R-point
G99
er
ve
d
d0
re
s
Point D
i0
N
Point Z
.A
ll
k0
ri
gh
ts
f0
o.
k0 : Distance from point Z
i0 : Distance from point Z
al
d0 : Distance from R-point
K
N
tc : Dwell (in time or No. of revolutions)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Dwell
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
X, Y, P, D, K, and/or Q can be omitted.
13-19
MEP147
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13-2-11 G79 (Boring)
G79 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc] Ff0 [Dd0 Kk0 Qi0 Ef1]
Initial point
G98
R-point
d0
G99
er
ve
d
.
Point D
f1
gh
ts
re
s
f0
.A
ll
ri
i0
k0
Point Z
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Dwell
k0 : Distance from point Z
i0 : Distance from point Z
f1 : Feed rate 1
o.
tc : Dwell (in time or No. of revolutions)
f0 : Feed rate 0
d0 : Distance from R-point
MEP148
K
ZA
ri
al
N
- Asynchronous feed is used for f1.
If, however, f1 is set equal to 0 or is not set, then the tool is fed at the setting of f0.
A
K
IM
Se
- X, Y, P, D, K, Q, and/or E can be omitted.
13-2-12 G81 (Spot drilling)
YA
M
A
ZA
G81 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz
)2
01
3
Initial point
ht
(c
G98
C
op
yr
ig
R-point
G99
Point Z
MEP149
- X and/or Y can be omitted.
13-20
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
13-2-13 G82 (Drilling)
G82 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc] Ff0 [Dd0 Ii0 Jj0(Bb0)]
Initial point
G98
er
ve
d
.
R-point
d0
ts
re
s
Point D
gh
f0
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
i0
f1
.A
ll
ri
G99
Point Z
j0 : Feed override ratio (%)
(b0)
f0 : Feed rate
f1 : Feed overridden f1 = f0×j0(b0)/100
point of cutting feed
ZA
ri
al
i0 : Feed override distance
K
N
tc : Dwell (in time or No. of revolutions)
d0 : Distance from R-point to the starting
MEP150
o.
Dwell (tc)
A
Se
- The feed rate will remain unchanged if either I or J(B) is omitted.
K
IM
- X, Y, P, D, I, and/or J(B) can be omitted.
A
ZA
- Whether argument J or B is to be used depends on the value that has been set in bit 1 of
parameter F84.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
Parameter F84 bit 1 = 1 : Argument J-command
= 0 : Argument B-command
Note:
For a horizontal machining center, if the value of bit 1 of parameter F84 is 1
(argument J-command), setting a B-command will cause the table to rotate. Be
careful in that case to ensure no interference between the workpiece and the tool.
13-21
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13-2-14 G83 (Deep-hole drilling)
G83 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz Qtz Ff0 [Dd0 Kk0 Ii0 Jj0(Bb0)]
Initial point
R-point
k0
Point D
f0
G99
G98
.
[1]
er
ve
d
tz
d0
re
s
f0
ts
tz + d0
gh
[2]
i0
.A
ll
ri
f1
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Point Z
tz : Depth of cut per pass
d0 : Rapid motion stopping allowance
k0 : Distance from R-point to the starting
j0 : Feed override ratio (%)
(b0)
f0 : Feed rate
f1 : Feed overridden f1 = f0 × j0(b0)/100
point of cutting feed
N
o.
i0 : Feed override distance
MEP151
K
ZA
ri
al
The feed rate will remain unchanged if either I or J(B) is omitted.
A
K
IM
Se
X, Y, P, D, K, I, and/or J(B) can be omitted.
If D is omitted or set to 0, the machine will operate according to the value of parameter F13.
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
When F165 bit 4 = 1: Setting of “Q0” or omission of argument Q causes the hole to be drilled
in a single pass up to the depth specified with Z. Set argument Q with a positive value to be
used as “Depth of cut per pass.”
When F165 bit 4 = 0 and F332 bit 6 = 0: Setting of “Q0” causes an alarm to be raised (809
ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT). Omission of argument Q causes the currently active modal
value to be applied. Set argument Q with a positive value to be used as “Depth of cut per
pass.”
When F165 bit 4 = 0 and F332 bit 6 = 1: Setting of “Q0” causes the hole to be drilled in a
single pass up to the depth specified with Z. Omission of argument Q causes the currently
active modal value to be applied. Set argument Q with a positive value to be used as “Depth
of cut per pass.”
C
op
Whether argument J or B is to be used depends on the value that has been set in bit 1 of
parameter F84.
Parameter F84 bit 1 = 1: Argument J-command
= 0: Argument B-command
Note :
For a horizontal machining center, if the value of bit 1 of parameter F84 is 1
(argument J-command), setting a B-command will cause the table to rotate. Be
careful in that case to ensure no interference between the workpiece and the tool.
13-22
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
The feed rate is f1 only if the starting point of a cutting pass is within the range of i 0.
Example : In the diagram shown above, during the second cutting operation, since rapid feed
positioning point [1] falls outside the range of feed override distance i0, feeding does
not decelerate and cutting is performed at feed rate f 0; during the third cutting
operation, since rapid feed positioning point [2] falls within the range of i0, feeding
decelerates and cutting is performed at feed rate f 1.
13-2-15 G84 (Tapping)
G84 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc] Ff0 [Jj0(Bb0) Dd0 Hh0 Kk0]
er
ve
d
.
Initial point
re
s
Dwell
M03
Point R’
ri
R-point
gh
ts
d0
k0
.A
ll
Point D
G99
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
G98
Point Z
Dwell
M04
MEP152’
h0 : Flag for synchronous/asynchronous tapping and
o.
tc : Dwell (always in time)
f0 : Feed rate
K
ZA
Asynchronous tapping
Synchronous tapping
k0 : Distance from R-point
K
IM
(Tap lifting distance)
h0 = 0
h0 > 0
A
Se
ri
al
N
j0 : 1…M04 after dwell at hole bottom
(b0) 2…M04 before dwell at hole bottom
4…M03 after dwell at R-point
d0 : Distance from R-point
the return speed override (%) for synchronous
tapping
M
A
ZA
X, Y, P, J(B), D, H, and/or K can be omitted.
If, however, J(B) is omitted or set to 0, the setting of J(B) will be regarded as 2.
If H is omitted, synchronous tapping method is automatically selected.
)2
01
3
YA
For synchronous tapping, see Subsection 13-2-21.
ht
(c
Whether argument J or B is to be used depends on the value that has been set in bit 1 of
parameter F84.
op
yr
ig
Parameter F84 bit 1 = 1 : Argument J-command
= 0 : Argument B-command
C
Note :
For a horizontal machining center, if the value of bit 1 of parameter F84 is 1 (argument
J-command), setting a B-command will cause the table to rotate. Be careful in that
case to ensure no interference between the workpiece and the tool.
13-23
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13-2-16 G85 (Reaming)
G85 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptz] Ff0 [Ef1 Dd0]
Initial point
er
ve
d
.
R-point
re
s
d0
G98
.A
ll
ri
G99
gh
f0
ts
f1
Point Z
tz : Dwell (in time or No. of revolutions)
f0 : Feed rate 0
MEP153
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Dwell
f1 : Feed rate 1
d0 : Distance from R-point
o.
- Asynchronous feed is used for f1.
If, however, f1 is set equal to 0 or is not set, then the tool is fed at the setting of f0.
K
ZA
A
Initial point
YA
M
A
ZA
G86 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc]
K
IM
13-2-17 G86 (Boring)
Se
ri
al
N
- X, Y, P, E, and/or D can be omitted.
01
3
G98
)2
M03
ig
ht
(c
R-point
C
op
yr
G99
Point Z
Dwell
M05
tc : Dwell (in time or No. of revolutions)
- X, Y, and/or P can be omitted.
13-24
MEP154
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
13-2-18 G87 (Back boring)
G87 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc Qq0] Ff0 [Dd0 Jj0(Bb0)]
M03
Initial point
M19
Dwell
Point Z
er
ve
d
.
d0
re
s
M19
MEP155
.A
ll
ri
gh
q0
ts
R-point
M03
d0 : Distance from point Z
j0 : 0 or omitted ········· M03 at R-point
(b0) Value except 0 ····· M04 at R-point
N
tc : Dwell (in time or No. of revolutions)
q0 : Amount of relief on the XY-plane
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
(Direction determined by bits 3 & 4 of I14)
f0 : Feed rate
- X, Y, P, Q, D, and/or J(B) can be omitted.
- Initial-point return is always used for G87 (even if the current modal is of G99).
K
al
N
o.
- Whether argument J or B is to be used depends on the value that has been set in bit 1 of
parameter F84.
ZA
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
Parameter F84 bit 1 = 1: Argument J-command
= 0: Argument B-command
Note:
For a horizontal machining center, if the value of bit 1 of parameter F84 is 1
(argument J-command), setting a B-command will cause the table to rotate. Be
careful in that case to ensure no interference between the workpiece and the tool.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
- In G91 (incremental data input) mode, the direction of hole machining is automatically
determined according to the sign of Z data (the sign of data at address R will be ignored).
13-25
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13-2-19 G88 (Boring)
G88 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc]
Initial point
G98
er
ve
d
.
R-point
re
s
G99
MEP156
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
Point Z
Dwell, M05, M00
N
tc : Dwell (in time or No. of revolutions)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
- X, Y, and/or P can be omitted.
- At the hole bottom, M05 and M00 are outputted.
13-2-20 G89 (Boring)
K
ZA
A
Initial point
G98
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
G89 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc]
01
3
YA
R-point
Point Z
Dwell
MEP157
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
G99
C
op
tc : Dwell (in time or No. of revolutions)
- X, Y, and/or P can be omitted.
13-26
Serial No. 340839
13
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13-2-21 Synchronous tapping (Option)
In an EIA/ISO program, synchronous tapping can be selected by additionally setting data at the
address H in the tapping cycle block of G74 or G84. Address H is used to select between a synchronous and asynchronous tapping cycle and to designate the override of return speed. Special
preparatory functions G84.2 and G84.3 are also provided for both types of synchronous tapping.
Moreover, addresses Q and I are provided for specifying a deep-hole tapping and high-speed
deep-hole tapping cycle. Arguments Q and I are used respectively to specify the depth of cut per
pass for pecking and to select between a standard and high-speed deep-hole tapping cycle.
1.
G74 [Reverse tapping]/G84.3 [Synchronous reverse tapping]
er
ve
d
High-speed deep-hole tapping cycle
re
s
Deep-hole tapping cycle
.
G74 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc Qq0] Ff0 [Ii0 Jj0(Bb0) Dd0 Hh0 Kk0]
G84.3 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc Qq0] Ff0 [Ii0]
Spindle stop
G98
gh
Spindle stop
Initial point
ts
Initial point
ri
G98
N
G99
k0
Point D
o.
Dwell
M03
G99
R-point
Point D
Dwell
M03
N
q0
k0
Dwell
M04
Parameter
F10
q0
q0
q0
d0
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
R-point
Dwell
M04
Point R’
.A
ll
Point R’
d0
Point Z
K
ZA
Se
ri
al
Point Z
d0 : Distance from R-point (Tap lifting distance)
h0 : Return speed override (%)
h0 = 0..... Asynchronous tapping
h0 1 .... Synchronous tapping
k0 : Distance from R-point
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
A
tc : Dwell (always in time)
q0 : Depth of cut per pass for pecking
f0 : Feed rate
(Set the pitch for synchronous tapping)
i0 : 0 ... Deep-hole tapping cycle
1 ... High-speed deep-hole tapping cycle
j0 : 1 ... M03 after dwell at hole bottom
(b0) 2 ... M03 before dwell at hole bottom
4 ... M04 after dwell at R-point
ht
(c
)2
X, Y, P, Q, I, J(B), D, H, and/or K can be omitted.
If, however, J(B) is omitted or set to 0, the setting of J(B) will be regarded as 2.
If H is omitted, synchronous tapping method is automatically selected.
C
op
yr
ig
Arguments Q and I are not effective at all for an asynchronous tapping method (for which
standard tapping cycle only is available).
Moreover, the tapping operation depends upon the setting in bit 3 of parameter F155 as well
as upon whether or not and how the arguments Q and I are specified, as shown below.
Argument Q: Given
Argument Q: Omitted (or Q0)
Argument I
1
0
H.S. deep-hole
tapping cycle
Deep-hole
tapping cycle
Omitted
F155 bit 3 = 1
F155 bit 3 = 0
H.S. deep-hole
tapping cycle
Deep-hole
tapping cycle
13-27
Tapping cycle
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
H is used to select whether synchronous tapping cycle operation or asynchronous tapping
cycle operation is to be performed using a machine capable of synchronous tapping. This
code is also used to override the return speed for synchronous tapping cycle operation.
As for a machine not capable of synchronous tapping, explicitely enter ‘H0’ to select asynchronous tapping method. Otherwise, i.e. omission or specification with an effective value for
synchronous tapping method will cause an alarm (952 NO SYNCHRONIZED TAP OPTION).
Whether argument J or B is to be used depends on the value that has been set in bit 1 of
parameter F84.
Parameter F84 bit 1 = 1: Argument J-command
= 0: Argument B-command
For a horizontal machining center, if the value of bit 1 of parameter F84 is 1
(argument J-command), setting a B-command will cause the table to rotate. Be
careful in that case to ensure no interference between the workpiece and the tool.
er
ve
d
.
Note :
gh
ts
re
s
In the mode of single-block operation, the stop of operation occurs after each pecking return
per pass and only after final return to the initial point or R-point, respectively, in the case of
deep-hole and high-speed deep-hole tapping cycles.
N
.A
ll
ri
In a high-speed deep-hole tapping cycle, the tool is returned for pecking after each cutting
feed by the distance externally set in parameter F10 unless the return point should unnecessarily overstep point D, at which the pecking return is always completed.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
During gear selection for tapping, due consideration must be given to ensure the minimum
spindle acceleration/deceleration time.
The overriding ratio (%) of the return speed to the rate of cutting feed for G84.3 is externally
set in parameter K90.
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Refer to the Operating Manual of the machine for more information on gear
selection for tapping.
13-28
Serial No. 340839
13
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
2.
G84 [Normal tapping]/G84.2 [Synchronous normal tapping]
G84 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc Qq0] Ff0 [Ii0 Jj0(Bb0) Dd0 Hh0 Kk0]
G84.2 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz [Ptc Qq0] Ff0 [Ii0]
Deep-hole tapping cycle
High-speed deep-hole tapping cycle
Initial point
Spindle stop
G98
G98
Point R’
Point R’
d0
G99
G99
R-point
Dwell
M03
R-point
k0
Point D
re
s
ts
Dwell
M04
gh
q0
Point D
Dwell
M03
Parameter
F10
q0
Dwell
M04
er
ve
d
k0
q0
q0
d0
.
Spindle stop
Initial point
Point Z
.A
ll
ri
Point Z
d0 : Distance from R-point (Tap lifting distance)
h0 : Return speed override (%)
h0 = 0..... Asynchronous tapping
h0 1 .... Synchronous tapping
k0 : Distance from R-point
K
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
tc : Dwell (always in time)
q0 : Depth of cut per pass for pecking
f0 : Feed rate
(Set the pitch for synchronous tapping)
i0 : 0 ... Deep-hole tapping cycle
1 ... High-speed deep-hole tapping cycle
j0 : 1 ... M04 after dwell at hole bottom
(b0) 2 ... M04 before dwell at hole bottom
4 ... M03 after dwell at R-point
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
X, Y, P, Q, I, J(B), D, H, and/or K can be omitted.
If, however, J(B) is omitted or set to 0, the setting of J(B) will be regarded as 2.
If H is omitted, synchronous tapping method is automatically selected.
YA
M
A
ZA
Arguments Q and I are not effective at all for an asynchronous tapping method (for which
standard tapping cycle only is available).
Moreover, the tapping operation depends upon the setting in bit 3 of parameter F155 as well
as upon whether or not and how the arguments Q and I are specified, as shown below.
01
3
Argument Q: Given
)2
0
H.S. deep-hole
tapping cycle
Deep-hole
tapping cycle
Omitted
F155 bit 3 = 1
F155 bit 3 = 0
H.S. deep-hole
tapping cycle
Deep-hole
tapping cycle
yr
ig
ht
(c
1
Tapping cycle
H is used to select whether synchronous tapping cycle operation or asynchronous tapping
cycle operation is to be performed using a machine capable of synchronous tapping. This
code is also used to override the return speed for synchronous tapping cycle operation.
As for a machine not capable of synchronous tapping, explicitely enter ‘H0’ to select asynchronous tapping method. Otherwise, i.e. omission or specification with an effective value for
synchronous tapping method will cause an alarm (952 NO SYNCHRONIZED TAP OPTION).
op
C
Argument Q: Omitted (or Q0)
Argument I
13-29
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
Whether argument J or B is to be used depends on the value that has been set in bit 1 of
parameter F84.
Parameter F84 bit 1 = 1: Argument J-command
= 0: Argument B-command
Note :
For a horizontal machining center, if the value of bit 1 of parameter F84 is 1
(argument J-command), setting a B-command will cause the table to rotate. Be
careful in that case to ensure no interference between the workpiece and the tool.
In the mode of single-block operation, the stop of operation occurs after each pecking return
per pass and only after final return to the initial point or R-point, respectively, in the case of
deep-hole and high-speed deep-hole tapping cycles.
er
ve
d
.
In a high-speed deep-hole tapping cycle, the tool is returned for pecking after each cutting
feed by the distance externally set in parameter F10 unless the return point should unnecessarily overstep point D, at which the pecking return is always completed.
ts
re
s
During gear selection for tapping, due consideration must be given to ensure the minimum
spindle acceleration/deceleration time.
.A
ll
ri
gh
The overriding ratio (%) of the return speed to the rate of cutting feed for G84.2 is externally
set in parameter K90.
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Refer to the Operating Manual of the machine for more information on gear
selection for tapping.
13-30
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
13-2-22 G82.2 [Automatic pecking cycle] (Option)
G82.2 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz Qq0 Ff0 [Dd0 Kk0 Ptc Ii0 Hh0]
Initial point
G98
R-point
k0
er
ve
d
.
G99
re
s
f0
ts
d0
gh
f0
D747PB0011
N
Point Z
.A
ll
ri
[1]
f0 : Feed rate
tc : Automatic identification time (ms)
i0 : Breakage detection distance
h0 : Maximum number of pecking operations
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
d0 : Rapid motion stopping allowance
k0 : Distance from R-point to the starting point of
cutting feed
q0 : Threshold
X, Y, and/or D can be omitted.
N
o.
If D is omitted or set to 0, the machine will operate according to the value of parameter F13.
K
ZA
ri
al
The cutting feed is reversed by a pecking movement up to the R-point when the cutting load
reaches the threshold specified as argument Q (at point [1]).
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
Use argument P to specify the period of time for which the identification should be carried out
in order to absorb (not to take into account) that change in the no-load torque which is caused
by a change in the current feedback due to a rise in the spindle temperature. Once obtained,
the identification value will be used until it is cleared by resetting.
YA
M
A
It is necessary for automatic identification to be done correctly that the spindle rotates at the
command speed.
01
3
Use argument I to specify the distance for the detection of tool breakage based on the cutting
load.
ig
ht
(c
)2
The cutting load is monitored during the first axial movement from the R-point up to the
position determined by argument I. If the cutting load should not change according to the
setting in parameter SA133, then the tool will be judged to be broken and returned to the
initial point without being used actually for hole machining.
op
yr
The result can be read at bit 0 of system variable #3108.
C
Use argument H to specify the maximum permissible number of pecking operations per hole.
The pecking operation the execution of which would cause the specified maximum number to
be exceeded will be replaced with a return motion up to the initial point without the hole
machining being continued any more.
The result can be read at bit 1 of system variable #3108.
Arguments P, I, and H are modal values.
13-31
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
The value of argument I depends upon whether or not the decimal point is used. System
variables used for setting argument I are always processed as values with decimal point.
Argument I
1
(w/o dec. pt.)
1.
(with dec. pt.)
#100 = 1
I#100
#100 = 1.
I#100
Unit
0.0001 mm
1 mm
1 mm
1 mm
The value of argument Q depends upon whether or not the decimal point is used. System
variables used for setting argument Q are always processed as values with decimal point.
Moreover, the value of argument Q depends upon whether it is entered in the mode of G20
(Inch data input) or G21 (metric data input), as shown below.
1.
(with dec. pt.)
#100 = 1
Q#100
#100 = 1.
Q#100
Setting range
Inch (G20)
0.00001 N·m
10 N·m
10 N·m
10 N·m
0 to 9999.9999
Metric (G21)
0.0001 N·m
1 N·m
1 N·m
1 N·m
0 to 99999.999
re
s
er
ve
d
.
1
(w/o dec. pt.)
Argument Q
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
A value below zero (0) as argument Q will cause the alarm 958 AUTO PECKING IMPOSSIBLE.
Note, moreover, that automatic pecking operations can only be inserted actually when a
threshold of 0.01 N·m or greater is specified as argument Q. A positive value below
0.01 N·m will only set the threshold to zero (0) and no pecking operations can occur.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
The table below enumerates the system variables related to the automatic pecking cycle.
System variable
Description
Workpiece coordinate of the bottom of the hole to be machined with G82.2.
(Subtract the length of the tool concerned to obtain the corresponding value specified in the
program.)
#3108
Tool breakage flag.
bit 0: Is set to “1” if the predetermined change in the cutting load has not been detected
during movement over the distance (specified with argument I).
bit 1: Is set to “1” if the maximum permissible number of pecking operations (specified with
argument H) has been exceeded.
#3109
Cumulative number of machined holes.
Holes machined with G82.2 are counted up. Holes that are not machined completely up to
the bottom are excluded from counting.
The variable is always initialized (zeroized) upon switching-on, and can be changed manually as required.
K
ZA
A
Number of pecking operations per hole.
Maximum cutting torque per hole. [Unit: 0.01 N·m]
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
#3111
YA
#3110
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
#3113
13-32
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
13-2-23 Punch tapping (Option)
Punch tapping refers to a revolutionary technology for forming internal threads which uses a
special type of tool, named Punch Tap, to establish an entirely new dimension of time saving as
compared to the conventional tapping or thread-forming technologies.
There are three patterns of Punch tapping provided, as shown below, to be selected with their
respective G-codes.
Punch Tap is a registered trademark of Emuge Co., Ltd.
Pattern
Feature
G74.5/G84.5
PT1.0
Fastest machining process
G74.6/G84.6
PT1.5
Supplement of a deburring process to PT1.0
G74.8/G84.8
PT2.0
Supplement of a deburring and a rethreading process to PT1.0
.
G-code
er
ve
d
Remark :
ts
G74.5/G84.5 (Left-hand/Right-hand Punch tapping, PT1.0)
gh
1.
re
s
The optional function requires another optional one for synchronous tapping to be provided.
.A
ll
ri
G74.5 [Xx Yy] Zz Rr Ff0 Ii0 [Jj0 ,Dd0 Pp Lk]
G84.5 [Xx Yy] Zz Rr Ff0 Ii0 [Jj0 ,Dd0 Pp Lk]
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Initial point
p
i0
i0
(G99)
(G98)
R-point
o.
p
K
ZA
(Tg)
A
f0
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
i0
i0 (d0)
Point Z
ZA
p
YA
R-point position
Pitch of thread forming
Pitch of helical grooving
Helical return distance for relieving the tool
01
3
r :
f0 :
i0 :
d0 :
M
A
D747PB0075
Tg :
p :
k :
j0 :
Axial distance for thread forming
Dwell command
Number of repetitions
Spindle speed for retracting the tool
(c
)2
The stop of operation during cutting feed in the mode of single-block operation mode or
caused by the feed hold function only occurs after final return to the initial point or R-point.
ig
ht
(Suspension of stop at positions until at in the figure above)
C
op
yr
The function for overriding the spindle speed and the rate of cutting feed cannot be applied at
all during the cycle of Punch tapping.
Alarming in relation to the settings of feed distances and pitches (Arguments F and I)
An alarm is raised (809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT) in the following cases:
[Distance betw. R-point and Hole bottom] < [Argument ,D (d0)]
[Distance betw. R-point and Hole bottom] < [Argument ,D (d0)] + [Thread forming distance (Tg)]
[Argument ,D (d0)] + [Thread forming distance (Tg)] < [Deburring adjustment distance (D)]
[Argument F (f0)] [Argument I (i0)]
13-33
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
Argument F
Use argument F to specify the rate of axial feed for thread forming.
According as bit 1 of parameter F331 is set to 0 or 1, specify the rate of feed always in “feed
per revolution” or in accordance with the current mode concerned (of G94 or G95).
F331 bit 1 (Use of Feed per minute for tapping cycles)
Modal G-code
0 (invalid)
G94 (Feed per
minute)
Specify the rate of feed per minute.
The “Lead of thread” is, therefore, to be the
division of “Argument F” by “Spindle speed.”
A code of spindle function (S-code) must be
given beforehand; otherwise an alarm will be
raised (906 NO S DIRECTIVE IN FIXED
CYCLE).
Specify the rate of feed per revolution, irrespective of the modal condition of the Gcodes concerned.
G95 (Feed per
revolution)
Specify the rate of feed per revolution.
The value of argument F is, therefore, to be
the lead of thread itself.
re
s
er
ve
d
.
1 (valid)
Metric system
Inch system
ri
Modal G-code
gh
ts
Setting range
0.0001 to 99999.9999 mm/min
0.00001 to 9999.99999 in/min
G95 (per revolution)
0.0001 to 32.767 mm/rev
0.00001 to 3.2767 in/rev
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
G94 (per minute)
The alarm 909 ILLEGAL PITCH IN FIXED CYCLE will be raised if the lead of thread should
fall outside the range shown below.
Metric system
Inch system
0 to 32.767
0 to 3.2767
o.
Lead of thread
With decimal point
0 to 3
ZA
ri
Argument I
0 to 32
K
al
N
Without decimal point
A
Se
Use argument I to specify the rate of axial feed for plunging into the workpiece.
ZA
K
IM
According as helical grooves or axial grooves are to be made, enter argument I in positive or
negative values. Argument I must, as a matter of course, correspond to the Punch Tap tool to
be used.
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
<Positive values of argument I (for helical grooving)>
Use argument I to specify the rate of axial feed for helical grooving by plunging.
According as bit 1 of parameter F331 is set to 0 or 1, specify the rate of feed always in “feed
per revolution” or in accordance with the current mode concerned (of G94 or G95).
Modal G-code
G94 (Feed per
minute)
Specify the rate of feed per minute.
The “Lead of helical groove” is, therefore, to
be the division of “Argument I” by “Spindle
speed.” A code of spindle function (S-code)
must be given beforehand; otherwise an
alarm will be raised (906 NO S DIRECTIVE
IN FIXED CYCLE).
Specify the rate of feed per revolution, irrespective of the modal condition of the Gcodes concerned.
G95 (Feed per
revolution)
Specify the rate of feed per revolution.
The value of argument I is, therefore, to be
the lead of helical groove itself.
yr
ig
ht
(c
0 (invalid)
C
op
F331 bit 1 (Use of Feed per minute for tapping cycles)
1 (valid)
Setting range
Modal G-code
Metric system
Inch system
G94 (per minute)
0.0001 to 99999.9999 mm/min
0.00001 to 9999.99999 in/min
G95 (per revolution)
0.0001 to 9999.999 mm/rev
0.00001 to 999.9999 in/rev
13-34
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
The alarm 909 ILLEGAL PITCH IN FIXED CYCLE will be raised if the lead of helical groove
should fall outside the range shown below.
Lead of helical groove
Metric system
Inch system
With decimal point
0 to 32.767
0 to 3.2767
Without decimal point
0 to 32
0 to 3
er
ve
d
.
<Negative values of argument I (for axial grooving)>
Use argument I to specify the rate of axial feed for axial grooving by plunging in a value of
overriding the argument F (rate of feed for thread forming).
The setting can range from –1000 to –1 (1 to 1000 times), and the alarm 909 ILLEGAL
PITCH IN FIXED CYCLE will be raised if the value of argument I should fall outside the
setting range.
Example : G84.5 X0.Y0.Z–14.R2. F1.0 I–30. S400 (F specified in feed per revolution)
ts
re
s
The rate of feed for axial grooving is set as follows:
(F)1.0 × (S)400 × (I)30 = 12000.
.A
ll
–1
ri
Use argument J to specify the spindle speed for retracting the tool.
gh
Argument J
Setting range: 0 to 999999.999 min
Spindle speed for retraction (Argument J)
Spindle speed (S-code value)
× 100
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Overriding ratio (%) =
Argument J
Overriding ratio
Within
Given
The value corresponding to the argument J is used.
the range of
100 to 999%
Outside
Automatically replaced with 100%.
A
ZA
al
ri
Se
Argument ,D
K
N
o.
Parameter K90 is used.
(K90: Overriding ratio (%) of the retraction speed to the thread forming speed in
synchronous tapping cycles)
Omitted
K
IM
Use argument ,D to specify the helical return distance for relieving the tool.
A
ZA
Setting range: –99999.9999 to 99999.9999 mm or
–9999.99999 to 9999.99999 in
YA
M
The alarm 809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT is raised if argument ,D should fall outside the
setting range.
)2
01
3
The setting is always used, by ignoring the sign, as an incremental value from position Z in
the returning direction.
Simply omit, or enter 0, as argument ,D if no retracting step is required.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
Note 1: When bit 1 of parameter F331 is set to 1, that is, when the feed command of a tapping
cycle is to be processed in accordance with the current mode concerned (of G94 [Feed
per minute] or G95 [Feed per revolution]), do not execute a tapping cycle by using the
[RESTART 2 NONMODAL] menu function before checking the current mode for the
appropriateness.
F331 bit 1 = 0: Feed command is processed as that of synchronous tapping,
= 1: Feed command is processed according to the current mode.
Note 2: Parameters SA33 to SA40 (Time constants of cutting feed for synchronous tapping)
are also applied to Punch tapping cycles. Use parameter SA238 (Reduction ratio of
time constants for Punch tapping), as required, to reduce the time constants especially
for Punch tapping cycles as shown below.
(100 – SA238)
Time constant for Punch tapping = Time constant for synchr. tapping ×
100
13-35
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
Note 3: The maximum permissible rate of cutting feed for Punch tapping cycles is determined
in accordance with parameter M64. Any excessive command of the rate of feed is
automatically processed so as to use the value according to M64.
Note 4: As for a Punch tapping cycle of repetition at multiple hole machining positions, the
positioning for radial transition to the next hole position is checked for the admissibility
with different parameters according as the transition is to take place in the level of the
initial point or in that of the R-point: with S64 (Positioning tolerance for point-to-point
positioning control in transition between holes) or S13 (Positioning tolerance for rapid
traverse by G0).
G74.6/G84.6 (Left-hand/Right-hand Punch tapping, PT1.5)
re
s
2.
er
ve
d
.
Note 5: Movements of cutting feed by G01 in a Punch tapping cycle are checked for the
admissibility with an especially provided parameter (S65: Positioning tolerance for
movements by G01 in Punch tapping cycles).
ri
gh
ts
G74.6 [Xx Yy] Zz Rr Ff0 Ii0 Jj0 [,Dd0 Pp Lk]
G84.6 [Xx Yy] Zz Rr Ff0 Ii0 Jj0 [,Dd0 Pp Lk]
.A
ll
Initial point
N
(Tg)
N
i0
i0
(G99)
(G98)
ZA
A
K
IM
D
Point Z
D747PB0076
YA
M
A
ZA
R-point position
Pitch of thread forming
Pitch of helical grooving
Helical return distance for relieving the tool
Axial distance for thread forming
01
3
r :
f0 :
i0 :
d0 :
Tg :
R-point
K
al
ri
Se
i0 (d0)
p
p
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
i0
f0
p
p :
k :
j0 :
D:
Dwell command
Number of repetitions
Spindle speed for retracting the tool
Deburring adjustment distance
(parameter F325)
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
Refer to “1. G74.5/G84.5 (Left-hand/Right-hand Punch tapping, PT1.0)” for a
detailed description of the respective arguments.
13-36
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
3.
13
G74.8/G84.8 (Left-hand/Right-hand Punch tapping, PT2.0)
G74.8 [Xx Yy] Zz Rr Ff0 Ii0 Jj0 [,Dd0 Pp Lk]
G84.8 [Xx Yy] Zz Rr Ff0 Ii0 Jj0 [,Dd0 Pp Lk]
Initial point
R-point
p
p
i0
i0
(G99)
(G98)
(Tg)
i0
i0
f0
D
Point Z
gh
i0 (d0)
p
ts
re
s
f0
er
ve
d
.
i0
p :
k :
j0 :
D:
Dwell command
Number of repetitions
Spindle speed for retracting the tool
Deburring adjustment distance
(parameter F325)
N
R-point position
Pitch of thread forming
Pitch of helical grooving
Helical return distance for relieving the tool
Axial distance for thread forming
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
r :
f0 :
i0 :
d0 :
Tg :
.A
ll
ri
D747PB0077
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Refer to “1. G74.5/G84.5 (Left-hand/Right-hand Punch tapping, PT1.0)” for a
detailed description of the respective arguments.
13-37
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13-3 Suppression of Single-Block Stop for Fixed Cycles
13-3-1 Function description
This function allows point-machining (i.e. hole-machining) operation to be checked efficiently in
the mode of single-block operation by reducing the number of
words, the frequency of operation stop).
button operations (in other
When this suppression function is valid, the single-block stop is reduced to the following three
positions:
er
ve
d
ts
Remark 1: Use the following parameter to make this function valid or invalid:
Suppression of single-block stop for fixed cycles:
F87 bit 4 = 1 (Valid) / 0 (Invalid)
.
Completion position of positioning,
Completion position of approaching to R-point,
Completion position of successive hole-machining operations and return.
re
s
1.
2.
3.
ri
gh
Remark 2: This function is available for both EIA/ISO and MAZATROL program types.
.A
ll
13-3-2 Examples of operation
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
The changes made by this function to the single-block operation are described below taking the
deep-hole drilling cycle (G83) as an example.
G83 [Xx Yy] Rr Zz Ff0 Qq0 [Dd0 Kk0 Ptc Ii0 Hh0]
K
ZA
F87 bit 4 = 1
K
IM
F87 bit 4 = 0
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
In the deep-hole drilling cycle, the tool is to return repeatedly after drilling through a certain depth
in order to avoid an increase in load due to clogging with chips. As shown in Figure 1, there are a
number of positions at which the operation stops in the machining cycle.
The number of stopping positions can be reduced as in Figure 2 by the single-block stop suppression.
Initial point
R-point
R-point
k0
k0
D-point
D-point
YA
M
A
ZA
Initial point
G99
G98
G99
G98
d0
)2
01
3
d0
i0
Z-point
Z-point
: Single-block stop position
: Single-block stop position
Figure 1
Figure 2
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
i0
13-38
D735P0562
Serial No. 340839
13
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13-4 Initial Point and R-Point Level Return: G98 and G99
1.
Function and purpose
Commands G98 or G99 can be used to select whether the return level of the final sequence
during fixed-cycle operation is to be set at R-point or at the initial point of machining.
2.
Programming format
G98: Initial point level return
G99: R-point level return
.
Detailed description
er
ve
d
3.
G98
(At power-on or after cancellation
G99
key)
Initial point
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Only
one
Initial point
N
G81 X100. Y100.
.A
ll
ri
using M02, M30, or
ts
Sample program
gh
Number
of holes
re
s
The following represents the relationship between the G98/G99 mode and repeat times:
R-point
Z–50. R25. F1000
Return to R-point level.
ZA
K
al
ri
A
K
IM
Se
A
ZA
G81 X100. Y100.
Z–50. R25. L5 F1000
Two or
more
N
o.
Return to initial point level.
R-point
1st hole
2nd hole
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
Always return to initial point.
13-39
Last hole
1st hole
2nd hole
Last hole
MEP158
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13-5 Scaling ON/OFF: G51/G50
1.
Function and purpose
The shape specified in a machining program can be enlarged or reduced in size using scaling
command G51. The range of scaling (enlargement/reduction) factors is from 0.000001 to
99.999999.
Use command G51 to specify a scaling axis, the center of scaling, and a scaling factor.
Use command G50 to specify scaling cancellation.
2.
Programming format
er
ve
d
gh
Specifying a scaling axis
.A
ll
A.
ts
Detailed description
ri
3.
Scaling cancel
re
s
G50
.
G51 Xx Yy Zz Pp Scaling on (specify a scaling axis, the center of scaling
(incremental/absolute), and a scaling factor)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
The scaling mode is set automatically by setting G51. Command G51 does not move any axis; it
only specifies a scaling axis, the center of scaling, and a scaling factor.
Scaling becomes valid only for the axis to which the center of scaling has been specified.
o.
Center of scaling
The center of scaling must be specified with the axis address according to the absolute or
incremental data command mode (G90 or G91). This also applies even when specifying the
current position as the center.
K
ZA
ri
al
N
Scaling factor
Use address P to specify a scaling factor.
Specifiable range of factors:
1 to 99999999 or 0.000001 to 99.999999 (times)
(Although both are valid, the latter with a decimal point must be
preceded by G51.)
A
ZA
K
IM
A
0.000001
Se
Minimum unit of specification:
)2
01
3
YA
M
Scaling factor: b/a
ig
ht
(c
b
C
op
yr
Machining shape
a
Programmed shape
Scaling center
MEP177
13-40
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
The scaling factor set in parameter F20 will be used if you do not specify any scaling factor in the
same block as that of G51. The current setting of this parameter will be used if it is updated
during the scaling mode. That is, the parameter setting existing when G51 is set is valid.
Data will be calculated at a scaling factor of 1 if neither the program nor the parameter has a
specified scaling factor.
Alarms occur in the following cases:
- If scaling is specified for a machine not capable of scaling (Alarm 872 G51 OPTION NOT
FOUND)
Cancellation of scaling
re
s
B.
er
ve
d
.
- If a scaling factor exceeding its maximum available value is specified in the same block as that
of G51 (Alarm 809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT) (All scaling factors less than 0.000001 are
processed as 1.)
N
Precautions
Scaling does not become valid for tool radius compensation, tool length offsetting, or tool
position offsetting. Offsets and other corrections are calculated only for the shape existing
after scaling.
2.
Scaling is valid only for move commands associated with automatic operation (tape,
memory, or MDI); it is not valid for manual movement.
3.
After-scaling coordinates are displayed as position data.
4.
Scaling is performed on the axis for which the center of scaling is specified by G51. In that
case, scaling becomes valid for all move commands associated with automatic operation,
as well as for the parameter-set return strokes of G73 and G83 and for the shift strokes of
G76 and G87.
5.
If only one axis of the plane concerned is selected for scaling, circular interpolation is
performed with the single scaling on that axis.
6.
Scaling will be cancelled if either M02, M30, or M00 (only when M0 contains reset) is issued
during the scaling mode. Scaling is also cancelled by an external reset command or
K
Data P, which specifies a scaling factor, can use a decimal point. The decimal point,
however, becomes valid only if scaling command code G51 precedes data P.
(c
ht
G51P0.5
P0.5G51
P500000G51
G51P500000
ig
yr
op
key during the reset/initial status.
)2
7.
C
A
K
IM
Se
ZA
A
M
YA
01
3
pressing the
8.
ZA
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
1.
ri
4.
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
The scaling cancel mode is set automatically by setting G50. Setting this command code offsets
any deviation between the program coordinates and the coordinates of the actual machine
position. Even for axes that have not been designated in the same block as that of G50, the
machine moves through the offset amount specified by scaling.
0.5 time
1 time (regarded as P = 0)
0.5 time
0.5 time
The center of scaling is shifted accordingly if the coordinate system is shifted using
commands G92 or G52 during scaling.
13-41
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
5.
Sample programs
Basic operation I
1.
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
N01 G92X0Y0Z0
N02 G90G51X–100.Y–100.P0.5
N03 G00G43Z–200.H02
N04 G41X–50.Y-50.D01
N05 G01Z–250.F1000
N06 Y–150.F200
N07 X–150.
N08 G02Y–50.J50.
N09 G01X–50.
N10 G00Z0
N11 G40G50X0Y0
N12 M02
–150.
–100.
–50.
X
W
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
–200.
gh
Y
N09
–50.
N11
K
M
–100.
A
N06
N07
–150.
Tool path after 1/2 scaling
Program path after 1/2 scaling
Tool path without scaling
Program path without scaling
01
3
YA
D01 = 25.000
M: Scaling center
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
N08
ZA
al
N
o.
N04
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
MEP178
13-42
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
Basic operation II
2.
[2] If scaling is to be done for X, Y
N02 G90G51X–100.Y–100.P0.5
[3] If scaling is to be done for X only
N02 G90G51X–100.P0.5
[4] If scaling is to be done for Y only
N02 G90G51Y–100.P0.5
er
ve
d
N02 G90G51P0.5
–50.
.A
ll
–100.
ri
Y
–150.
gh
ts
re
s
[1] Without scaling
.
N01 G92X0Y0
N02 G90G51P0.5 ........ See [1] to [4] below.
N03 G00X–50.Y–50.
N04 G01X–150.F1000
N05 Y–150.
N06 X–50.
N07 Y–50.
N08 G00G50
N09 M02
X
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
W
[3]
K
ZA
K
IM
[2]
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
[4]
–50.
–100.
M
A
ZA
M
YA
[1]
)2
01
3
–150.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
MEP179
13-43
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
Basic operation III
3.
er
ve
d
.
N01 G92X0Y0
N02 G90G51P0.5 .................. See [1] to [4] below.
N03 G00X–50.Y–50.
N04 G01Y–150.F1000
N05 G02X–100.I–25.
N06 G01X–150.
N07 G02X–200.I–25.
N08 G01X–250.Y–100.
N09 Y–50.
N10 X–50.
N11 G00G50
N12 M02
Without scaling
N02 G90G51P0.5
[2]
If scaling is to be done for X, Y
N02 G90G51X–125.Y–100.P0.5
[3]
If scaling is to be done for X only
N02 G90G51X–125.P0.5
[4]
If scaling is to be done for Y only
N02 G90G51Y–100.P0.5
gh
ri
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
–150.
–200.
–125.
–100.
Y
–50.
X
W
K
A
ZA
–50.
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
–250.
ts
re
s
[1]
[2]
M
–100.
01
3
YA
M
A
[4]
[3]
–150.
ig
ht
(c
)2
[1]
C
op
yr
MEP180
13-44
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
4.
13
Reference-point (zero point) check (G27) during scaling
Setting G27 during scaling cancels the scaling mode after G27 has been executed.
N01 G28X0Y0
N02 G92X0Y0
N03 G90G51X–100.Y–100.P0.5
N04 G00X–50.Y–50.
N05 G01X–150.F1000
N06 G27X0Y0
er
ve
d
.
If a program is constructed in the manner that the reference point is reached under normal
mode, it will also be reached even under scaling mode.
–100.
–50.
X
ts
–150.
re
s
Y
.A
ll
ri
gh
W
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
N06*
N06**
–50.
K
ZA
A
–100.
M
YA
M
A
ZA
N06* ............. Without scaling
N06**............ During scaling
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
N05
o.
N04
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
MEP181
13-45
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
5.
Reference-point (zero point) return (G28, G29, or G30) during scaling
Setting G28 or G30 during scaling cancels the scaling mode at the middle point and then
executes the reference-point (zero point) return command. If the middle point has not been
set, the reference-point (zero point) return command is executed with the point where
scaling has been cancelled as middle point.
If G29 is set during the scaling mode, scaling will be performed for the entire movement
after the middle point.
N01 G28X0Y0
N02 G92X0Y0
N03 G90G51X–100.Y–150.P500000
N04 G00X–50.Y–100.
N05 G01X–150.F1000
N06 G28X–100.Y–50.
N07 G29X–50.Y–100.
–100.
–50.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
–150.
Y
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
0.5
X
W
N06
N
o.
N07
K
ZA
A
N07*
ZA
N06*
–50.
N04
K
IM
Se
ri
al
Intermediate point
N07**
M
A
N06**
01
3
YA
–100.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
N05
–150.
N06*
N07*
Without scaling
N06**
N07**
During scaling
M
MEP182
13-46
Serial No. 340839
13
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
6.
One-way positioning (G60) during scaling
Setting G60 during the scaling mode executes scaling at the final point of positioning, and
thus no scaling is performed for the parameter l1 of creeping. That is, the amount of
creeping remains constant, irrespective of whether scaling is valid.
N01 G92X0Y0
N02 G91G51X–100.Y–150.P0.5
N03 G60X–50.Y–50.
N04 G60X–150.Y–100.
–100.
–50.
X
W
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
–150.
er
ve
d
.
Y
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Without scaling
–50.
K
ZA
–100.
A
N04
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
N03
M
–150.
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
During scaling
C
op
yr
ig
ht
MEP183
13-47
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
7.
Workpiece coordinate system updating during scaling
Updating of the workpiece coordinate system during scaling causes the center of scaling to
be shifted according to the difference in offset amount between the new workpiece
coordinate system and the old one.
Subprogram
N01 G90G54G00X0Y0
N02 G51X–100.Y–100.P0.5
N03 G65P100
N04 G90G55G00X0Y0
N05 G65P100
G54
W1
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
O100
G00X–50.Y–50.
G01X–150.F1000
Y–150.
X–50.
Y–50.
M99
%
G55
K
ZA
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
W2
M
YA
M
A
M’
’
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
MEP184
13-48
Serial No. 340839
13
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
8.
Figure rotation during scaling
Setting a figure rotate command during scaling executes scaling for both the center and
radius of rotation of the figure.
Subprogram
N01 G92X0Y0
N02 G90G51X0Y0P0.5
N03 G00X–100.Y–100.
N04 M98P200I–50.L8
–150.
–100.
–50.
X
re
s
–200.
Y
er
ve
d
Scaling center
.
O200
G91G01X–14.645Y35.355F1000
M99
%
–50.
K
ZA
After scaling
A
–100.
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
W
YA
M
A
Machining program
ht
(c
)2
01
3
–150.
C
op
yr
ig
MEP185
13-49
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
9.
Scaling using a figure rotation subprogram
Setting a scaling command in a figure rotation subprogram executes scaling only for the
shape predefined in the subprogram. Scaling is not executed for the radius of rotation of the
figure.
Subprogram
G92X0Y0
G90G00X100.
M98P300I–100.L4
G90G00X0Y0
M02
K
A
ZA
Machining program
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
O300
G91G51X0Y0P0.5
G00X–40.
G01Y–40.F1000
X40.
G03Y80.J40.
G01X–40.
Y–40.
G00G50X40.
X–100.Y100.
M99
%
M
A
ZA
W
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
After scaling
C
op
MEP186
13-50
Serial No. 340839
13
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
10. Scaling during coordinate rotation
If scaling during coordinate rotation is programmed the center of scaling will rotate and
scaling will be performed at that rotated center of scaling.
er
ve
d
.
(Coordinate rotation data setting)
–100.
–50.
ri
–150.
Y
X
W
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
–200.
gh
ts
re
s
N01 G92X0Y0
N02 M00
N03 G90G51X–150.Y–75.P0.5
N04 G00X–100.Y–50,
N05 G01X–200.F1000
N06 Y–100.
N07 X–100.
N08 Y–50.
N09 G00G50X0Y0
Scaling only
–50.
K
ZA
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Machining program
–100.
YA
N05
N08
N06
–150.
N07
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Shift of scaling center
by coordinate rotation
Coordinate rotation only
M
A
N04
C
op
Coordinate rotation and scaling
MEP187
13-51
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
11. Setting G51 during scaling
If command G51 is set during the scaling mode, the axis for which the center of scaling is
newly specified will also undergo scaling. The scaling factor specified by the latest G51
command becomes valid in that case.
N01 G92X0Y0
N02 G90G51X–150.P0.75
N03 G00X–50.Y–25.
N04 G01X–250.F1000
N05 Y–225.
N06 X–50.
N07 Y–25.
N08 G51Y–125.P0.5
N09 G00X–100.Y–75.
N10 G01X–200.
N11 Y–175.
N12 X–100.
N13 Y–75.
N14 G00G50X0Y0
Scaling axis X; P = 0.75
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Scaling axes X and Y; P = 0.5
–200.
–150.
N
ZA
M
N03
N14
–50.
ZA
–100.
N11
N13
N12
–150.
)2
01
3
YA
X
W
A
N10
A
Machining
program
–50.
K
N09
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N05
–100.
Y
N04
o.
–250.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
Cancel
–200.
N06
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
N07
MEP188
13-52
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
13-6 Mirror Image ON/OFF by G-Code: G51.1/G50.1
1.
Function and purpose
Mirror image mode can be turned on and off for each axis using G-codes. Higher priority is given
to the mirror image setting with the G-codes over setting by any other methods.
2.
Programming format
G51.1 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Cc1 Bb1
G50.1 Xx2 Yy2 Zz2 Cc2 Bb2
Detailed description
er
ve
d
.
3.
Mirror image ON
Mirror image OFF
re
s
Use the address and coordinates in a G51.1 block to specify the mirroring axis and mirroring
center (using absolute or incremental data), respectively.
gh
ts
If the coordinate word is designated in G50.1, then this denotes the axis for which the mirror
image is to be cancelled. Coordinate data, even if specified, is ignored in that case.
.A
ll
ri
If mirror image is turned on for only one of the axes forming a plane, the rotational direction
and the offset direction become reverse during circular interpolation, tool radius compensation, or coordinate rotation.
Programming example for linear axes (X- and Y-axis)
[1]
A
ZA
K
Y
K
IM
Se
ri
[2]
al
N
o.
4.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Since the mirror image function works with reference to the currently active local coordinate
system, the center of mirror image processing moves according to the particular counter
preset data or the change in workpiece coordinate offsetting data.
[3]
[4]
MEP189
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
X
X
Y
ht
(Main program)
C
op
yr
ig
G00G90G40G49G80
M98P100
G51.1X0
M98P100
G51.1Y0
M98P100
G50.1X0
M98P100
G50.1Y0
M30
[1] OFF OFF
[2] ON OFF
[3] ON ON
[4] OFF ON
OFF OFF
13-53
(Subprogram O100)
G91G28X0Y0
G90G00X20.Y20.
G42G01X40.D01F120
Y40.
X20.
Y20.
G40X0Y0
M99
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
5.
Programming example for a rotational axis (C-axis)
Without mirror image
With mirror image
(Absolute programming)
With mirror image
(Incremental programming)
C = 0°
C = 0°
C = 0°
[1]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[2]
er
ve
d
.
[3]
re
s
D740PB0160
(With mirror image)
* Absolute programming
(With mirror image)
* Incremental programming
G00G90G40G49G80
M200
C0
C45. ...................[1]
C90. ...................[2]
C-45. .................[3]
M30
G00G90G40G49G80
M200
C0
G51.1C0
C45. .................. [1]
C90. .................. [2]
C-45. ................ [3]
G50.1C0
M30
G00G90G40G49G80
M200
C0
G51.1C0
G91C45. ............ [1]
C90. ................... [2]
C-45. ................. [3]
G50.1C0
M30
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
(Without mirror image)
13-54
Serial No. 340839
13
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13-7 Mirror Image ON/OFF by M-Code: M91, M92, M93/M90
1.
Function and purpose
Mirror image mode can be turned on and off for linear and rotational axes using M-codes.
Programming format
3.
Mirror image ON for the X-axis
Mirror image ON for the Y-axis
Mirror image ON for the B-axis
Mirror image OFF
.
M91
M92
M93
M90
Detailed description
er
ve
d
2.
re
s
The center of mirror image processing is implicitly the origin (X = 0, Y = 0, B = 0°) of the
currently active workpiece or local coordinate system.
gh
ts
Use M90 to cancel all the mirror image functions selected with M91 to M93.
M90
Mirror image OFF.
N
To cancel all the mirror image functions selected with M91 to M93.
Mirror image ON for the X-axis.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
M91
.A
ll
ri
Do not give more than one mirror image M-code in one and the same block.
To turn on the mirror image mode for the X-axis, i.e. to reverse the sign (+ and –) of the
motion amount on the X-axis.
M92
Mirror image ON for the Y-axis.
o.
To turn on the mirror image mode for the Y-axis, i.e. to reverse the sign (+ and –) of the
motion amount on the Y-axis.
Mirror image ON for the B-axis.
N
M93
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
To turn on the mirror image mode for the B-axis, i.e. to reverse the sign (+ and –) of the
motion amount on the B-axis.
13-55
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13-8 Subprogram Control: M98, M99
1.
Function and purpose
Fixed sequences or repeatedly used programs can be stored in the memory as subprograms
which can then be called from the main program when required. M98 serves to call subprograms
and M99 serves to return from the subprogram. Furthermore, it is possible to call other subprograms from particular subprograms and the nesting depth can include as many as 8 levels.
Subprogram
Subprogram
Subprogram
Subprogram
O0010;
O1000;
O1200;
O2000;
O5000;
M98P1000;
M98P1200
Q20;
N20;
M98P2000;
M98P2500;
M02;
M99;
N60;
M99;
M99P60;
re
s
ts
gh
ri
(Level 2)
M99;
(Level 3)
(Level 8)
.A
ll
(Level 1)
er
ve
d
.
Main program
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Nesting depth
TEP161
The table below shows the functions which can be executed by adding and combining the tape
storing and editing functions, subprogram control functions and fixed cycle functions.
o.
(: available ×: not available)
Case 4
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
K
A
M
A
ZA
2. Tape editing (main memory)
4. Subprogram nesting (*)
Case 3
Yes
Yes
No
ZA
al
ri
1. Memory operation
3. Subprogram call
Case 2
Yes
No
No
K
IM
Se
Function
Case 1
N
1. Tape storing and editing
2. Subprogram control
3. Fixed cycles
YA
5. Fixed cycles
01
3
6. Fixed cycle subprogram editing
* The nesting depth can include as many as 8 levels.
)2
In order that it may function correctly, do not give a command of subprogram control in
one block together with any one for the following functions (described in this chapter):
(c
Note :
Fixed cycle
Macro call
C
op
yr
ig
ht
Hole machining pattern cycle
13-56
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
2.
13
Programming format
Subprogram call
M98 <_> H_ L_;
Number of subprogram repetitions (L1 if omitted)
Sequence number in subprogram to be called (head block if omitted)
Program name of subprogram to be called [up to 32 characters]
(calling program if omitted)
Alternatively,
M98 P_ H_ L_;
Number of subprogram repetitions (L1 if omitted)
er
ve
d
.
Sequence number in subprogram to be called (head block if omitted)
re
s
Program number [composed of numerals only] of subprogram to be called [up to 8 digits]
(calling program if omitted) P can only be omitted during memory operation.
M99 P_ L_;
ri
Number of times after repetition number has been changed
gh
ts
Return to main program from subprogram
N
Creating and entering subprograms
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
3.
.A
ll
Sequence number of return destination (returned to block following block of call if omitted)
Subprograms have the same format as machining programs for normal memory operation
except that the subprogram completion instruction M99 (P_ L_) is entered as an independent
block at the last block.
O ;
............... ;
............... ;
K
al
N
o.
Program number as subprogram
ZA
A
Se
ri
Main body of subprogram
............... ;
M99;
%(EOR)
K
IM
Subprogram return command
End of record code (% with ISO code and EOR with EIA code)
A
ZA
The above program is registered by editing operations.
01
3
YA
M
See Chapter 32 for more information.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
Only those subprograms numbers ranging from 1 through 99999999 designated by the optional
specifications can be used. When there are no program numbers on the tape, the setting number
for “program input” is used.
Up to 8 nesting levels can be used for calling programs from subprograms, and an alarm (842
SUB PROGRAM NESTING EXCEEDED) occurs if this number is exceeded.
Main programs and subprograms are registered in order in which they were read because no
distinction is made between them. This means that main programs and subprograms should not
be given the same numbers. (If the same numbers are given, error occurs during entry.)
13-57
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
;
O ;
................. ;
Subprogram A
M99;
%
;
O ;
................. ;
Subprogram B
er
ve
d
.
M99;
ts
Subprogram C
gh
;
O ;
................. ;
re
s
%
ri
.A
ll
M99;
N
%
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Note 1: Main programs can be used during memory and tape operation but subprograms must
have been entered in the memory.
Note 2: The following commands are not the object of subprogram nesting and can be called
even beyond the 8th nesting level.
o.
Fixed cycles
K
ZA
A
Subprogram execution
Se
4.
ri
al
N
Pattern cycles
K
IM
M98: Subprogram call command
M99: Subprogram return command
A
M98 P_ H_ L_;
YA
Name of the subprogram to be called (up to 32 characters)
Number of the subprogram to be called (up to 8 digits)
Any sequence number within the subprogram to be called (up to 5 digits)
Number of repetitions from 1 to 9999 with numerical value of four figures; if L is
omitted, the subprogram is executed once ; with L0, there is no execution.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Where < > :
P :
H :
L
:
or
M
M98 <_> H_ L_;
ZA
Programming format
For example,
M98 P1 L3; is equivalent to the following :
M98 P1;
M98 P1;
M98 P1;
13-58
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
Example 1: When there are 3 subprogram calls (known as 3 nesting levels)
Main program
Subprogram 1
Subprogram 2
Subprogram 3
O1;
O10;
O20;
[1]
[2]
M98P1;
[3]
M98P10;
M98P20;
[1]’
[2]’
[3]’
M99;
M99;
M99;
Sequence of execution: [1][2][3][3]’[2]’[1]’
er
ve
d
.
M02;
re
s
TEP162
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
For nesting, the M98 and M99 commands should always be paired off on a 1 : 1 basis [1]' for [1],
[2]' for [2], etc.
Modal information is rewritten according to the execution sequence without distinction between
main programs and subprograms. This means that after calling a subprogram, attention must be
paid to the modal data status when programming.
commands designate the sequence numbers in a
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Example 2: The M98 Q_ ; and M99 P_ ;
program with a call instruction.
M99P_;
K
IM
N3__;
N100__;
M98P123;
N200__;
N300__;
N400__;
O123;
M99P100;
YA
M
A
ZA
M99;
K
Search
A
Se
ri
M98Q3;
ZA
al
N
o.
M98Q_;
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
TEP163
13-59
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
Example 3: Main program M98 P2 ;
O1;
M99;
%
O2;
N200
M99;
%
O3;
N200
M99;
%
Subprogram 1
er
ve
d
.
Subprogram 2
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
Subprogram 3
N
When the O2 N200 block is searched with the memory search function, the modal data
are updated according to the related data of O2 to N200.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
The same sequence number can be used in different subprograms.
When the subprogram (No. p1) is to be repeatedly used, it will be repeatedly executed for
I1 times provided that M98 Pp1 Ll1 ; is programmed.
o.
Other precautions
N
5.
K
al
An alarm occurs when the designated program number (P) is not found.
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
Single block stop does not occur in the M98P _ ; and M99 ; block. If any address except O, N,
P, Q or L is used, single block stop can be executed. (With X100. M98 P100 ; operation
branches to O100 after X100. is executed.)
ZA
When M99 is commanded in the main program, operation returns to the head.
YA
M
A
Operation can branch from tape or PTR operation to a subprogram by M98P_ but the
sequence number of the return destination cannot be designated with M99P_ ;. (P_ is
ignored.)
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Care should be taken that the search operation will take time when the sequence number is
designated by M99P_ ;
13-60
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
6.
13
MAZATROL program call from EIA/ISO program
A.
Overview
MAZATROL machining program can be called as a subprogram from the machining program
described with EIA/ISO codes.
EIA/ISO MAZATROL (Program call)
MAZATROL (WNo. 1000)
EIA/ISO
MAZATROL machining program is called
from EIA/ISO program, and entire
machining program can be used.
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
M98P1000;
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
Note 1: When the execution of MAZATROL machining program is completed, the execution is
returned again to EIA/ISO program.
It should be noted that the used tool, current position and others are changed though
EIA/ISO modal information is not changed.
ZA
M98 P_ L_;
A
or
ri
M98 <_> L_;
al
Programming format
Se
B.
K
N
o.
Note 2: A MAZATROL program should be called up as a subprogram always in the mode of
radius data input (G10.9X0) from an EIA/ISO program; otherwise (called in the mode of
diameter data input) the MAZATROL program cannot be executed correctly in that the
programmed values concerned are used just in half their dimensions for axis motion
control.
ZA
K
IM
< > or P:
Name, or number, of the MAZATROL machining program to be called.
When omitted, the alarm 844 PROGRAM No. NOT FOUND will be displayed.
A
The same alarm will occur when the specified program is not stored.
YA
M
L:
Number of repetitions of program execution (1 to 9999).
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
When omitted or L = 0, the called program will be executed one time (as if L = 1).
13-61
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
C.
Detailed description
1.
END unit of the MAZATROL program
The END unit of the MAZATROL program to be called must have “1” specified under CONTI.
for correct return to the EIA/ISO main program.
As for the END unit’s items other than CONTI.: Even if WORK No. is specified, program
chain cannot be made with the MAZATROL program called from an EIA/ISO program.
MAZATROL
EIA/ISO
M98
Ignored
Impossible
er
ve
d
.
UNIT CONTI. WORK No.
END
1
MAZATROL program execution
.A
ll
2.
ri
gh
ts
re
s
MAZATROL
N
When MAZATROL program is called from an EIA/ISO program, the MAZATROL program is
executed like automatic operation of MAZATROL.
o.
The END unit of the MAZATROL program to be called from an EIA/ISO program must
have “1” specified under CONTI. for correct return to the EIA/ISO main program. Never
use an M99 command for the return.
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Remarks
MDI interruption and macro interruption signal during MAZATROL program execution are
ignored.
2.
MAZATROL program cannot be restarted halfway.
3.
MAZATROL program call in the mode of a fixed cycle results in an alarm.
4.
MAZATROL program call in the mode of tool radius compensation results in an alarm.
5.
MAZATROL program call is not available in the MDI operation mode (results in an alarm).
6.
A MAZATROL program called by M98 cannot be executed but in its entirety (from the head
to the end).
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
1.
Commands to addresses other than O, N, P, Q, L and H in a block of M98 for MAZATROL
program call will not be processed till completion of the called program.
C
op
yr
ig
7.
ht
(c
D.
Se
ri
al
N
Note :
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
MAZATROL program is executed independently of EIA/ISO program which has made the
call. In other words, it performs the same machining as MAZATROL program alone is
executed. When calling MAZATROL program, always place a tool outside the safety profile
beforehand. Failure to do this may cause interference of a workpiece with the tool.
13-62
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
13-9 End Processing: M02, M30, M998, M999
If the program contains M02, M30, M998, M999 or EOR (%), the block containing one of these
codes will be executed as the end of the program in the NC unit. The program end processing
will not be commanded by M98 or M99. In end processing, tool life processing, parts count, and
work No. search will be executed.
1.
M02, M30
Tool life processing only will be executed.
2.
M998, M999
Tool life processing, parts count, and work No. search will be executed.
<111>
Q1;
.
M998(999)
re
s
er
ve
d
Specification of execution or non-execution of parts count
(counting updated on POSITION display)
0: Parts count non-execution
1: Parts count execution
ts
Name of the program to be executed next
.A
ll
ri
gh
M-code for program chain
M998: Continuous execution after parts count and work No. search
M999: Ending after parts count and work No. search
M998(999)
S111
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
As shown below, the next program can be designated alternatively with address S if its
“name” consists of numerals only.
Q1;
o.
Specification of execution or non-execution of parts count
(counting updated on POSITION display)
0: Parts count non-execution
1: Parts count execution
N
Number of the program to be executed next
K
ZA
A
MAZATROL program
or
EIA/ISO program
YA
M
A
EIA/ISO program
ZA
- M998<>
K
IM
Se
ri
al
M-code for program chain
M998: Continuous execution after parts count and work No. search
M999: Ending after parts count and work No. search
)2
01
3
M998<>
ht
(c
MAZATROL or EIA/ISO program is called from EIA/ISO program and executed as the next
program.
EIA/ISO program
C
op
yr
ig
- M999<>
M999<>
MAZATROL program
or
EIA/ISO program
MAZATROL or EIA/ISO program is only called from EIA/ISO program and the operation is
terminated.
13-63
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
Note 1: In order to prevent the machine operation from being inconveniently stopped, the NC
will process a block of M998Q1 automatically as that of M999Q1 in case the total
number of machined parts should amount to, or exceed, the preset number of parts
required.
Note 2: Omission of the designation of the next program, be it by name or number, will result in
the current main program being called up as the next one.
13-10 Linear Angle Commands
1.
Function and purpose
Programming format
re
s
2.
er
ve
d
.
Programming the linear angle and one of the coordinates of the ending point makes the NC unit
automatically calculate the coordinates of that ending point.
N
.A
ll
ri
* A and ,A (with a prefixed comma) can be used for angle designation.
gh
ts
N1 G01 Aa1 Zz1 (Xx1);
Designate the angle and the coordinates of the X-axis or the Z-axis.
N2 G01 A–a2 Zz2 (Xx2); (Setting Aa3 means the same as setting A–a2.)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
X
(z1, x1)
x1
–a2
K
(z2, x2)
K
IM
Se
ri
x2
N2
a3
A
a1
ZA
al
N
o.
N1
Z
M
YA
Detailed description
1.
The angle denotes that relative to the plus (+) direction of the first axis (horizontal axis) on
the selected plane.
Assign the sign + for a counterclockwise direction (CCW) or the sign – for a clockwise
direction (CW).
2.
Set the ending point on one of the two axes of the selected plane.
ht
Angle data will be ignored if the coordinates of both axes are set together with angles.
yr
ig
3.
(c
)2
01
3
3.
A
ZA
MEP190
If angles alone are set, the command will be handled as a geometric command.
5.
For the second block, the angle at either the starting point or the ending point can be
specified.
6.
Always give a linear angle command using A with a prefixed comma (,A) if address A is to
be used for an axis name or for the No. 2 miscellaneous function.
7.
This function is valid only for the G01 command; it is not valid for other interpolation or
positioning commands.
C
op
4.
13-64
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
13-11 Macro Call Function: G65, G66, G66.1, G67
13-11-1 User macros
Macroprogram call, data calculation, data input to/output from a personal computer, data control,
judgment, branching, and various other instructions can be used with variables commands to
perform measurements and other operations.
Macroprogram
er
ve
d
.
Main program
ri
M99
.A
ll
M30
gh
ts
re
s
Macro call instruction
N
MEP164
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
A macroprogram is a subprogram which is created using variables, calculation instructions,
control instructions, etc. to have special control features.
These special control features (macroprograms) can be used by calling them from the main
program as required. These calls use macro call instructions.
o.
Detailed description
K
ZA
ri
al
N
When command G66 is entered, the designated user macro subprogram willbe called every
time after execution of the move commands within a block until G67 (cancellation) is entered.
A
In order that it may function correctly, do not give a command of macro call in one block
together with any one of the following commands (described in this chapter):
ZA
Note :
K
IM
Se
Command codes G66 and G67 must reside in the same programm in pairs.
A
Hole machining pattern cycle
M
Fixed cycle
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
Subprogram control
13-65
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13-11-2 Macro call instructions
Two types of macro call instructions are provided: single-call instructions used to call only at the
designated block, and modal call instructions used to call at each block within a macro call mode.
Modal call instructions are further divided into type A and type B.
1.
Single call
Subprogram (O 01)
Main program
O01
er
ve
d
.
to subprogram
re
s
G65P01L1 <argument>
gh
ts
M99
.A
ll
ri
to main program
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
The designated user macro subprogram ends with M99.
Instruction G65 calls the designated user macro subprogram only once.
o.
Format:
G65 <__> L__ <argument>
K
A
ZA
Program Name (When omitted, own program
will be repeated.)
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
Repeat times
Alternatively,
Repeat times
Program No. (When P is omitted, own
program will be repeated.)
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
G65 P__ L__ <argument>
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
<Argument>
When argument is to be delivered to the user macro subprogram as a local variable, designate
the required data with the respective addresses. (Argument designation is not available for a
user macro subprogram written in MAZATROL language.)
In such a case, the argument can have a sign and a decimal point, irrespective of the address.
Arguments can be specified using method I or II, as shown below.
13-66
Serial No. 340839
13
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
A.
Argument specification I
Format: A_B_C_ X_Y_Z_
Detailed description
An argument can be specified using all addresses, except G, L, N, O, and P.
Except for I, J, and K, addresses does not need be specified in an alphabetical order.
Addresses I, J, and K must be specified in an alphabetical order.
I_J_K_ ....... Correct
J_I_K_ ........ Wrong
Addresses whose specification is not required can be omitted.
Call commands and usable addresses
Address specified using
method I
Variable in macroprogram
G65, G66
A
#1
D
#7
E
#8
F
#9
G
#10
H
#11
I
#4
J
N
o.
ts
gh
×*
×
×*
#13
#14
×
×*
#15
×
×
#16
×
×*
#17
#18
#19
T
#20
U
#21
V
#22
W
#23
X
#24
Y
#25
Z
#26
K
IM
ZA
A
P
ig
ht
01
3
YA
M
Q
S
A
Se
N
O
R
ZA
ri
#6
#12
K
)2
×
(c
al
#5
M
yr
ri
.A
ll
#3
N
#2
G66.1
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
B
C
L
op
re
s
Relationship between address and variables number
K
C
er
ve
d
.
The relationship between addresses that can be specified using argument specification I, and
variables numbers in a user macro unit, is shown in the following table:
: Usable
13-67
×: Unusable
*: Usable in G66.1 modal
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
B.
Argument specification II
Format: A_B_C_I_J_K_I_J_K_
Detailed description
Up to a maximum of 10 sets of arguments that each consist of addresses I, J, and K, as well
as A, B, and C, can be specified.
If identical addresses overlap, specify them in the required order.
Addresses whose specification is not required can be omitted.
Argument specification
II addresses
Variables in macroprograms
A
#1
K5
#18
K6
#5
I7
K1
#6
J7
I2
#7
K7
J2
#8
I8
K2
#9
I3
#10
#11
#12
I4
#13
#14
I5
#22
#23
#24
#25
J8
#26
K8
#27
I9
#28
J9
#29
K9
#30
I10
#31
J10
#32
K10
#33
#17
ZA
In the table above, the numerals 1 through 10 have been added to addresses I, J, and
J just to denote the order of arrangement of the designated sets of arguments: these
numerals are not included in actual instructions.
Combined use of argument specification I and II
01
3
C.
YA
M
A
Note :
#16
#21
K
IM
J5
A
Se
ri
#15
ZA
al
J4
K4
K
N
o.
J3
K3
ts
#4
#20
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
I1
J1
#19
gh
J6
ri
I6
#3
.A
ll
#2
N
B
C
.
Variables in macroprograms
er
ve
d
Argument specification
II addresses
re
s
The relationship between addresses that can be specified using argument specification II,
and variables numbers in a user macro unit, is shown in the following table:
)2
When both method I and method II are used to specify arguments, only the latter of two
arguments which have an address corresponding to the same variable will become valid.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
Example : Call command
G65
A1.1
B–2.2
D3.3
I4.4
I7.7
Variables
#1:
1.1
#2: –2.2
#3:
#4:
4.4
#5:
#6:
#7:
7.7
If two arguments (D3.3 and I7.7) are designated for the variable of #7, only the latter
argument (I7.7) will be used.
13-68
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
2.
13
Modal call, type A (Move command call)
Subprogram
Main program
O01
to subprogram
G66P01L1 <argument>
M99
to main program
.
G67
re
s
er
ve
d
to subprogram
gh
ts
For a block that has a move command code between G66 and G67, the designated user macro
subprogram is executed after that move command has been executed. The subprogram is
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
executed an 1 number of times for the first call, or once for subsequent calls.
For modal call of type A, the methods of specifying <argument> are the same as used for single
call.
Format:
G66 <__> L__ <argument>
o.
Repeat times
ZA
K
IM
G66 P__ L__ <argument>
A
Se
ri
Alternatively,
K
al
N
Program name
Program No.
YA
M
A
ZA
Repeat times
01
3
Detailed description
ht
(c
)2
When command G66 is entered, the designated user macro subprogram will be called every
time after execution of the move commands within a block until command G67 (cancellation)
is entered.
C
op
yr
ig
Command codes G66 and G67 must reside in the same program in pairs.
Entry of a G67 command without a G66 command results in an alarm (857 INCORRECT
USER MACRO G67 PROG).
13-69
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
Example : Hole-machining cycle
Main program
N1 G90 G54 G0 X0Y0Z0
Subprogram
N2 G91 G00 X-50.Y-50.Z-200.
N3 G66 P9010 R-10.Z-30.F100
O9010
N4 X-50. Y-50.
N10 G00 Z#18M03
N5 X-50.
N6 G67
To subprogram after axis motion
N20 G09 G01 Z#26F#9
To subprogram after axis motion
N30 G00 Z-[#18+#26]
M99
–100. –50.
W
N2
N3
re
s
N1
N10
Argument R
ts
–50
N4
N5
N30
.A
ll
Argument F
N
Y
Argument Z
ri
N20
–100
gh
–150.
X
er
ve
d
.
Return
Z-axis movement
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
To subprogram
Modal call, type B (Block-to-block call)
K
al
3.
N
o.
Note 1: The designated subprogram is executed after the axis commands in the main program
have been executed.
Note 2: No subprograms are executed for the G67 block and its successors.
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
The designated user macro subprogram is called unconditionally for each of the command
blocks present between G66.1 and G67. Execution of the macro program is repeated as
specified with L for the first call, and only once for each of subsequent calls.
Repeat times
Program name
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
Format:
G66.1 <__> L__ <argument>
ht
(c
Alternatively,
C
op
yr
ig
G66.1 P__ L__ <argument>
Repeat times
Program No.
Detailed description
During the G66.1 mode, only the codes O, N, and G in each of the read command blocks are
executed. No other codes in those blocks are executed; codes other than O, N, and G are
handled as arguments. However, only the last G-code and the N-codes following a code other
than O or N become arguments.
13-70
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
All significant blocks in the G66.1 mode are regarded as preceded by the command G65P_.
For example, the block of
N100G01G90X100. Y200. F400R1000
in the G66.1P1000 mode is handled as equivalent to
N100G65P1000G01G90X100. Y200. F400R1000.
Note :
Call is executed even for the G66.1 command block of the G66.1 mode, with the
relationship between the addresses of the arguments and the variables numbers
being the same as for G65 (single call).
G-code macro call
re
s
4.
er
ve
d
Sequence number N, modal G-codes, and O are all updated as modal information.
.
The data range of the G, L, P, and N commands that you can set as new variables using the
G66.1 mode is the same as the data range of usual NC commands.
ri
gh
ts
The user macro subprograms of the required program number can be called just by setting
G-codes.
N
.A
ll
Format:
G×× <argument>
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
G-code which calls macro-subprogram
Detailed description
K
ZA
K
IM
G65P <argument>
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
The instruction shown above performs the same function as those of the instructions listed
below. Which of these listed instructions will apply is determined by the parameter data to be
set for each G-code.
M98P
G66P <argument>
ZA
G66.1P <argument>
M
A
Use parameters to set the relationship between G ×× (macro call G-code) and P
(program number of the macro to be called).
01
3
YA
Of G00 through G255, up to a maximum of 10 command codes can be used with this
instruction unless the uses of these codes are clearly predefined by EIA/ISO Standards, such
as G00, G01, G02, etc.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
The command code cannot be included in user macro subprograms that have been called
using G-codes.
13-71
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
5.
Auxiliary command macro call (M-, S-, T-, or B-code macro call)
The user macro subprograms of the required program number can be called just by setting M-,
S-, T-, or B-codes.
Format:
Mm (or Ss, Tt and Bb)
M (or S, T and B) code which calls macro-subprogram
er
ve
d
.
Detailed description (The following description also applies to S-, T-, and B-codes.)
ts
re
s
The instruction shown above performs the same function as those of the instructions listed
below. Which of these listed instructions will apply is determined by the parameter data to be
set for each M-code.
M98P
gh
G65PMm
.A
ll
ri
G66PMm
G66.1PMm
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Use parameter to set the relationship between Mm (macro call M-code) and P (program
number of the macro to be called).
Up to a maximum of 10 M-codes, ranging from M00 to M95, can be registered. Do not
register the M-codes that are fundamentally required for your machine, nor M0, M1, M2, M30,
and M96 through M99.
K
ZA
A
Differences in usage between commands M98, G65, etc.
K
IM
6.
Se
ri
al
N
o.
If registered auxiliary command codes are set in the user macro subprograms that have been
called using M-codes, macro calls will not occur since those special auxiliary command codes
will be handled as usual ones (M-, S-, T-, or B-codes).
Arguments can be designated for G65, but cannot be designated for M98.
A
ZA
Sequence numbers can be designated for M98, but cannot be designated for G65, G66, or
G66.1.
01
3
YA
M
Command M98 executes a subprogram after M98 block commands other than M, P, H, and L
have been executed, whereas G65 just branches the program into a subprogram without
doing anything.
(c
)2
Single-block stop will occur if the block of command M98 has addresses other than O, N, P, H,
and L. For G65, however, single-block stop will not occur.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
The level of local variables is fixed for M98, but for G65 does change according to the depth
of nesting. (For example, #1s, if present before and after M98, always mean the same, but if
present before and after G65, they have different meanings.)
13-72
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
7.
13
Multiplexity of macro call commands
The maximum available number of levels of singel and modal macro subprogram call is eight
and four, respectively. Arguments in macro call instructions become valid only on the level of the
called macro and, therefore, can be included in a program as independent local variables each
time a macro call is made.
Note 1: When a G65, G66, or G66.1 macro call or an auxiliary command macro call is made,
nesting will be regarded as single-level and thus the level of local variables will also
increase by 1.
er
ve
d
.
Note 2: For modal call of type A, the designated user macro subprogram is called each time a
move command is executed. If, however, multiple G66s are present, the next user
macro subprogram will be called even for the move commands in the macro each time
axis movement is done.
re
s
Note 3: User macro subprograms are cancelled in a reverse order to that in which they have
been arranged.
.A
ll
User macroprogram operation
Main program
After z1 execution
G66Pp2
x1
w1
x2
M99
x1
w1
x2
M99
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
(p1 call-out)
Zz1
N
Macro p1
G66Pp1
ri
gh
ts
Example :
Macro p1
(p2 call-out)
Zz2
G67
ZA
A
M
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Zz5
(p1 cancel)
YA
Zz4
x1
ZA
After z3 execution
G67
Macro p2
Macro p2
A
(p1 call-out)
Zz3
Macro p2
Macro p1
K
IM
Se
ri
al
(p2 cancel)
K
N
o.
After z2 execution
13-73
w1
x2
M99
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
8.
User macro call based on interruption
Outline
Prior creation of special user macros for interrupt processing allows the user macros to be
executed during automatic operation when a user macro interrupt signal is input. After the user
macro has been executed, the program can also be returned to the interrupted program block
and then started from this block.
Detailed description
Format for selecting the user macro branching destination
M96<_>L_ (or M96P_L_)
er
ve
d
.
(Branching mode on)
When user macroprogram interruption signal is input
during this space, the branch into the specified user
macroprogram will be applied.
re
s
M97 (Branching mode off)
ts
.A
ll
ri
gh
It depends upon the specifications of the machine whether user macro interrupt signal is
available or not.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
If a user macro interrupt signal is input during execution of an axis movement block, the user
macroprogram will be executed immediately by interrupting the movement without holding
(storing) the remaining motion amount.
N
o.
User macro interruption can be processed when the number of levels of macro call multiplexity during the occurrence of an interrupt is seven or lower.
The local variables’ level of the user macros used for interruption depends upon the setting of
a parameter as follows:
K
al
F95 bit 1 = 0 : Type of interruption (on the same level, as shown in the figure below)
ZA
A
Se
ri
F95 bit 1 = 1 : Type of subprogram call (on an independent level)
ZA
K
IM
Interruption branch
Interruption return
O2000
O2100
O5100
A
YA
M
M96P5100
G1X_
Interruption
01
3
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
G65P2100
C
G1Y_
Interruption
M97
M99
(Level 3)
Local variable
M99
(Level 4)
Local variable
13-74
M99
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
13-11-3 Variables
Of all types of variables available for the NC unit, only local variables, common variables, and
part of system variables are retained even after power-off.
1.
Multiplexing of variables
Under user macro specifications, variables can have their identifiers (identification numbers)
either transformed into variables, which is referred to as multiplexing, or replaced with
<expression>.
For <expression>, only one arithmetic expression (for either multiplication, division, addition, or
subtraction) can be used.
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Example 1: Multiplexing variables
#1=10 #10=20 #20=30 From #1 = 10, #[#[#1]] = #[#10] will result.
#5=#[#[#1]]
From #10 = 20, #[#10] = #20 will result. Therefore #5 = #20, i.e. #5
= 30 will result.
#1=10 #10=20 #20=30
#5=1000
#[#[#1]]=#5
o.
N
Undefined variables
al
2.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Example 2: Replacing variables identifiers with <expression>
#10=5
#[#10+1]=1000
#6 = 1000 will result.
#[#10–1]=–1000
#4 = –1000 will result.
#[#103]=100
#15 = 100 will result.
#[#10/2]=100
#2 = –100 will result.
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
From #1 = 10, #[#[#1]] = #[#10] will result.
From #10 = 20, #[#10] = #20 will result. Therefore #20 = #5, i.e.
#20 = 1000 will result.
K
ZA
A
A
Arithmetic expression
M
A.
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
Under user macro specifications, variables remaining unused after power-on or local variables
that are not argument-specified by G65, G66, or G66.1 can be used as <empty>. Also, variables
can be forcibly made into <empty>.
Variable #0 is always used as <empty> one, and this variable cannot be defined on the left side
of the expression.
YA
#1=#0................. #1 = <empty>
01
3
#2=#0+1 ............ #2 = 1
)2
#3=1+#0 ............ #3 = 1
(c
#4=#010 .......... #4 = 0
ht
#5=#0+#0 .......... #5 = 0
C
op
yr
ig
Note:
Be careful that <empty> is handled the same as 0 during processing of expressions.
<empty> + <empty> = 0
<empty> + <constant> = constant
<constant> + <empty> = constant
B.
Applying variables
Application of an undefined variable alone causes even the address to be ignored.
If #1 = <empty>
G0X#1Y1000
G0X[#1+10]Y1000
is equivalent to G0Y1000, and
is equivalent to G0X10Y1000.
13-75
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
C.
Conditional expression
Only for EQ and NE, does <empty> differ from 0 in meaning.
If #101 = <empty>
If #101 = 0
#101EQ#0
<empty> = <empty> holds.
#101EQ#0
0 = <empty> does not hold.
#101NE0
<empty> 0 holds.
#101NE0
0 0 does not hold.
#101GE#0
<empty> <empty> holds.
#101GE#0
0 <empty> holds.
#101GT0
<empty> > 0 does not hold.
#101GT0
0 > 0 does not hold.
Left side
NE
GT
LT
GE
LE
er
ve
d
EQ
Right side
.
Hold-conditions and not-hold-conditions list
(For conditional expressions including undefined variables)
Empty Constant Empty Constant Empty Constant Empty Constant Empty Constant Empty Constant
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
ts
H
re
s
Empty
Constant
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
H:
Holds (The conditional expression holds.)
Blank: The conditional expression does not hold.
13-76
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
13-11-4 Types of variables
1.
Common variables (#100 to #199, and #500 to #999)
Common variables refer to the variables to be used in common at any position. The identifiers of
common variables which can be used are from #100 to #199, or from #500 to #999.
2.
Local variables (#1 to #33)
er
ve
d
.
Local variables refer to variables that can be defined as <argument> when calling a macro
subprogram, or those which can be used locally within the main program or a subprogram. There
is no relationship between macros. Thus, these variables can be overlapped on each other, but
up to a maximum of eight levels of overlapping.
where
re
s
G65Pp1L1 <argument>
p1 : Program number
gh
ts
1 : Number of repeat times
ri
<Argument> must be: Aa1 Bb1 Cc1 Zz1.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
A
B
C
D
E
G
H
I
×
×*
#1
R
#18
#2
S
#19
#3
T
#20
#7
U
#21
K
V
#22
W
#23
#10
X
#24
#11
Y
#25
#4
Z
#26
ZA
al
ri
#9
#8
#28
L
#12
–
#29
M
#13
–
#30
×*
N
#14
–
#31
×
O
#15
–
#32
×*
P
#16
–
#33
Q
#17
01
3
YA
A
#27
–
M
–
#6
)2
J
(c
yr
ig
Local
variable
#5
ht
×
Argument
address
K
×
×
G66.1
A
×*
ZA
×
G65
G66
K
IM
F
Argument addresses marked as × in the table above cannot be used. Only during the G66.1
mode, however, can argument addresses marked with an asterisk (*) in this table be additionally
used. Also, the dash sign (–) indicates that no address is crosskeyed to the local variables
number.
op
C
Call commands
o.
G66.1
Local
variable
N
G65
G66
Argument
address
Se
Call commands
N
.A
ll
The following represents the relationship between the address specified by <argument> and the
local variables number used in the user macro unit:
13-77
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
1.
Local variables for a subprogram can be defined by specifying <argument> when calling a
macro.
Subprogram (O9900)
Main program
To subprogram
G65P9900A60.S100.F800
M02
#5=#4010
G91G01 X[#19COS[#1]]
Y[#19SIN[#1]]F#9
M99
Control of move and
others with reference
to local variables.
er
ve
d
.
A (#1)=60.000
Local variable setting by argument
F (#9)=800
Local variable
data table
Within a subprogram, local variables can be freely used.
.A
ll
ri
2.
gh
ts
re
s
S (#19)=100.000
Subprogram (O1)
#30=FUP[#2/#5/2]
#5=#2/#30/2
M98H100L#30
X#1
M99
N100G1X#1F#9
Y#5
X–#1
X#5
M99
N
Main program
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
To subprogram
ZA
K
IM
A
Se
ri
al
Example of face milling
Local variable set by argument
A
J
Local variable
data table
A
B
F
J
(#1)
(#2)
(#9)
(#5)
(#30)
Local variables
can be changed in
the subprogram
100.000
50.000
500
10.000 8.333
3.
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
B
K
N
o.
G65P1A100.B50.J10.F500
C
op
yr
ig
ht
In the sample program for face-milling that is shown above, although the argument J has
initially been programmed as a machining pitch of 10 mm, it has been changed into
8.333 mm to ensure equal-pitched machining.
Also, local variable #30 contains the calculated data about the number of times of reciprocal
machining.
13-78
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
3.
13
Local variables can be used for each of the eight levels of macro call separately. For the
main program (macro level 0), separate local variables are also provided. The local
variables of level 0, however, cannot be designated with arguments.
O1 (Macro level 1)
O10 (Macro level 2)
P65P1A1.B2.C3.
G65P10A10.B20.C30.
G65P100A100.B200.
M02
M99
M99
M99
Local variable (1)
A(#1) 1.000
B(#2) 2.000
C(#3) 3.000
D(#7)
Local variable (2)
A(#1) 10.000
B(#2) 20.000
C(#3) 30.000
D(#7)
Local variable (3)
A(#1) 100.000
B(#2) 200.000
C(#3)
Z(#26)
Z(#26)
Main (Level 0)
O100 (Macro level 3)
#33
ts
gh
ri
.A
ll
N
Local variable (0)
0.100
0.200
0.300
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
#1
#2
#3
re
s
er
ve
d
.
#1=0.1#2=0.2#3=0.3
#33
#33
Z(#26)
#33
N
o.
How the local variables are currently being used is displayed on the screen.
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
For further details, refer to the corresponding section in PART 3 of the
Operating Manual.
13-79
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
3.
Macro interface input system variables (#1000 to #1035)
You can check the status of an interface input signal by reading the value of the appropriate
variables number (#1000 to #1035).
The read value of the variables number is either 1 (contact closed) or 0 (contact open). You can
also check the status of all input signals of the variables from #1000 to #1031 by reading the
value of variables number 1032. Variables from #1000 to #1035 can only be read; they cannot
be placed on the left side of an arithmetic expression.
Points
Interface input signal
System variable
Points
Interface input signal
#1000
1
Register R72, bit 0
#1016
1
Register R73, bit 0
#1001
1
Register R72, bit 1
#1017
1
Register R73, bit 1
#1002
1
Register R72, bit 2
#1018
1
Register R73, bit 2
#1003
1
Register R72, bit 3
#1019
1
Register R73, bit 3
#1004
1
Register R72, bit 4
#1020
1
Register R73, bit 4
#1005
1
Register R72, bit 5
#1021
1
Register R73, bit 5
#1006
1
Register R72, bit 6
#1022
1
Register R73, bit 6
#1007
1
Register R72, bit 7
#1023
1
#1008
1
Register R72, bit 8
#1024
1
#1009
1
Register R72, bit 9
#1025
#1010
1
Register R72, bit 10
#1026
#1011
1
Register R72, bit 11
#1027
#1012
1
Register R72, bit 12
#1013
1
#1014
1
#1015
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
System variable
.A
ll
ri
Register R73, bit 7
Register R73, bit 8
Register R73, bit 9
1
Register R73, bit 10
1
Register R73, bit 11
#1028
1
Register R73, bit 12
Register R72, bit 13
#1029
1
Register R73, bit 13
Register R72, bit 14
#1030
1
Register R73, bit 14
1
Register R72, bit 15
#1031
1
Register R73, bit 15
System variable
Points
Interface input signal
#1032
32
Register R72 and R73
#1033
32
#1034
32
Register R76 and R77
#1035
32
Register R78 and R79
K
ZA
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
1
ZA
K
IM
A
Register R74 and R75
The following interface input signals are used exclusively in the NC system operation
(cannot be used for other purposes).
YA
M
A
Note:
01
3
Interface input signal
Description
Touch sensor mounted in the spindle
Register R72, bit 4
X- and Y-axis machine lock ON
Register R72, bit 5
M-, S-, T-code lock ON
Register R72, bit 6
Z-axis machine lock ON
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
Register R72, bit 0
13-80
Serial No. 340839
13
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
4.
Macro interface output system variables (#1100 to #1135)
Points
Interface output signal
System variable
Points
Interface output signal
#1100
1
Register R172, bit 0
#1116
1
Register R173, bit 0
#1101
1
Register R172, bit 1
#1117
1
Register R173, bit 1
#1102
1
Register R172, bit 2
#1118
1
Register R173, bit 2
#1103
1
Register R172, bit 3
#1119
1
Register R173, bit 3
#1104
1
Register R172, bit 4
#1120
1
Register R173, bit 4
#1105
1
Register R172, bit 5
#1121
1
Register R173, bit 5
#1106
1
Register R172, bit 6
#1122
1
Register R173, bit 6
#1107
1
Register R172, bit 7
#1123
1
gh
#1108
1
Register R172, bit 8
#1124
1
#1109
1
Register R172, bit 9
#1125
#1110
1
Register R172, bit 10
#1126
#1111
1
Register R172, bit 11
#1127
#1112
1
Register R172, bit 12
#1113
1
#1114
1
#1115
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
System variable
.A
ll
You can send an interface output signal by assigning a value to the appropriate variables
number (#1100 to #1135).
All output signals can take either 0 or 1.
You can also send all output signals of the variables from #1100 to #1131 at the same time by
assigning a value to variables number 1132. In addition to the data writing for offsetting the
#1100 to #1135 output signals, the reading of the output signal status can be done.
ri
Register R173, bit 7
1
Register R173, bit 10
1
Register R173, bit 11
#1128
1
Register R173, bit 12
Register R172, bit 13
#1129
1
Register R173, bit 13
Register R172, bit 14
#1130
1
Register R173, bit 14
1
Register R172, bit 15
#1131
1
Register R173, bit 15
System variable
Points
Interface output signal
#1132
32
Register R172 and R173
#1133
32
#1134
32
Register R176 and R177
#1135
32
Register R178 and R179
K
ZA
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Register R173, bit 9
Se
Register R173, bit 8
1
ZA
K
IM
A
Register R174 and R175
01
3
YA
M
A
Note 1: Data of the system variables from #1100 to #1135 is saved according to the logical
level (1 or 0) of the signal that has been lastly sent. The saved data is cleared by
power-on/off automatically.
Note 2: The following applies if a data other than 1 or 0 is assigned to the variables from #1100
to #1131:
(c
)2
<empty> is regarded as equal to 0.
Data less than 0.00000001, however, is regarded as undefined.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
Data other than 0 and <empty> is regarded as equal to 1.
13-81
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
#1132 (R172, R173)
#1000
#1100
#1001
#1101
#1002
#1102
#1028
#1128
#1029
#1129
Macro-
#1030
instruction
#1130
#1131
gh
ts
#1031
(R174, R175) 32 bit
#1133
(R76, R77)
#1034
(R176, R177)
#1134
(R78, R79)
#1035
(R178, R179)
#1135
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
(R74, R75)
#1033
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
32 bit
#1103
.
Read
and write
Read
only
#1003
Output signal
er
ve
d
(R72, R73) #1032
re
s
Input signal
13-82
Serial No. 340839
13
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
5.
Tool offset
Use the relevant variables to read and write tool offset data items.
Usable are variables numbered from #100001, #10001, and #2001.
200, 999, and 4000 sets of offset data items can be used, respectively, for variables numbered
from #2001, #10001, and #100001.
The last three digits of variables numbered from #2001 or #10001 denote tool offset data
numbers. As for variables numbered from #100001, the last four digits correspond to tool offset
data numbers.
The number of tool offset data sets available depends upon the specifications of the machine.
(“n” in the following tables = Number of tool offset data sets available)
.
Type A
Item
#2001 - #2000+n
Tool offset amounts
Type B
Range of variable Nos.
.A
ll
ri
B.
gh
ts
#10001 - #10000+n
re
s
Range of variable Nos.
#100001 - #100000+n
er
ve
d
A.
Item
#10001 - #10000+n
#2001 - #2000+n
#110001 - #110000+n
#11001 - #11000+n
#2201 - #2200+n
Length Geometric offset
#160001 - #160000+n
*(#120001 - #120000+n)
#16001 - #16000+n
*(#12001 - #12000+n)
#2401 - #2400+n
Diameter Geometric offset
#170001 - #170000+n
*(#130001 - #130000+n)
#17001 - #17000+n
*(#13001 - #13000+n)
#2601 - #2600+n
Diameter Wear compensation
N
#100001 - #100000+n
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Length Wear compensation
Set bit 0 of parameter F96 to “1” to use the variables in parentheses with a leading
asterisk.
F96 bit 0 = 0: #160001 - #160000+n, and #170001 - #170000+n
#16001 - #16000+n, and #17001 - #17000+n
= 1: #120001 - #120000+n, and #130001 - #130000+n
#12001 - #12000+n, and #13001 - #13000+n
K
ZA
A
A
Type C
M
C.
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
Note :
#10001 - #10000+n
#2001 - #2000+n
Geometric offset Z
#110001 - #110000+n
01
3
#11001 - #11000+n
#2201 - #2200+n
Wear compensation Z
#160001 - #160000+n
#16001 - #16000+n
#2401 - #2400+n
Geometric offset, Nose R
#170001 - #170000+n
#17001 - #17000+n
#2601 - #2600+n
Wear compensation, Nose R
#120001 - #120000+n
#12001 - #12000+n
Geometric offset X
#130001 - #130000+n
#13001 - #13000+n
Wear compensation X
#140001 - #140000+n
#14001 - #14000+n
Geometric offset Y
#150001 - #150000+n
#15001 - #15000+n
Wear compensation Y
#180001 - #180000+n
#18001 - #18000+n
Offsetting direction
ig
ht
(c
#100001 - #100000+n
yr
op
C
Item
)2
YA
Range of variable Nos.
Note :
Set bit 0 of parameter F96 to “0” to use the TOOL OFFSET type C data.
The maximum number of tool offset data sets available (n) depends upon the ranges of variable
numbers as follows.
Range of variable Nos.
Maximum of “n”
#100001 - #184000
4000
#10001 - #18999
999
#2001 - #2800
200
13-83
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
As with other variables, tool offset data is to contain the decimal point. The decimal point must
therefore be included if you want to set data that has decimal digits.
Program example
Common variables
After
execution
#101=1000
#10001=#101
#102=#10001
Tool offset data
#101=1000.0
H1=1000.000
#102=1000.0
er
ve
d
re
s
ts
gh
G00
#5063
H1
G31
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
#1
ri
Return to zero point
Tool change (for T01)
Starting point memory
Rapid traverse to safe position
Measurement with skip feed
Measuring distance calculation
and tool offset data setting
.A
ll
G28Z0T01
M06
#1=#5003
G00Z–500.
G31Z–100.F100
#10001=#5063–#1
.
Example : Tool offset data measuring
The example shown above does not allow for any skip sensor signal delay. Also,
#5003 denotes the position of the starting point of the Z-axis, and #5063 denotes the
skip coordinate of the Z-axis, that is, the position at which a skip signal was input during
execution of G31.
K
ZA
A
Workpiece coordinate system offset
K
IM
6.
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Note :
Sensor
ZA
Using variables numbers from 5201 to 5336, you can read workpiece coordinate system offset
data or assign data.
The number of controllable axes depends on the machine specifications.
2nd axis
3rd axis
16th
axis
#5201
#5202
#5203
#5216
G54
#5221
#5222
#5223
#5236
(c
G55
#5241
#5242
#5243
#5256
#5261
#5262
#5263
#5276
G57
#5281
#5282
#5283
#5296
G58
#5301
#5302
#5303
#5316
G59
#5321
#5322
#5323
#5336
op
yr
ig
G56
C
YA
ht
)2
SHIFT
1st axis
01
3
Axis No.
Data name
M
A
Note :
13-84
Remarks
An external data input/output optional
spec. is required.
A workpiece coordinate system offset
feature is required.
Serial No. 340839
13
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
(Example 1)
N1
N2
N3
N1
M
–90.
G28X0Y0Z0
#5221=–20.#5222=–20.
G90G00G54X0Y0
N3
W1
–10.
–20.
N11
W1
Workpiece coordinate
system of G54 specified
by N10
N10 #5221=–90.#5222=–10.
N11 G00G54X0Y0
Workpiece coordinate system of
G54 specified by N2
re
s
er
ve
d
.
M02
(Example 2)
ri
C
G55
W2 (G55)
M
G54
W1 (G54)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
N100 #5221=#5221+#5201
#5222=#5222+#5202
#5241=#5241+#5201
#5242=#5242+#5202
#5201=0 #5202=0
.A
ll
Coord. sys.
before
change
gh
Coordinate shift
ts
Fundamental machine coordinate system
Fundamental machine coordinate system
M
C
G55
G54
o
o
W2 (G55)
W1 (G54)
r
d
i
MEP166
n
a
The example 2 shown above applies only when coordinate shift data is to be added to the offset
t
data of a workpiece coordinate system (G54 or G55) without changing the position of the
e
workpiece coordinate system.
K
ZA
A
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Coord. sys.
after
change
(c
)2
01
3
[Additional workpiece coordinate system offset]
s
Variables numbered 70001 to 75996 can ybe used to read or assign additional workpiece
coordinate system offsetting dimensions. Thes variable number for the k-th axis origin of the “Pn”
coordinate system can be calculated as follows:
t
70000 + (n – 1) × 20 + k
ig
ht
e
m depends on the machine specifications.
The total number of controllable axes
C
op
yr
Note :
Axis No.
Data name
1st
axis
2nd
axis
G54.1P1
#70001
#70002
G54.1P2
#70021
#70022
G54.1P299
#75961
#75962
G54.1P300
#75981
#75982
a 4th
f axis
#70003 t #70004
#70023 e #70024
r
#70016
#75963
#75976
3rd
axis
#75964
c
#75983 #75984
h
a
n
g
e
13-85
16th
axis
#70036
#75996
Remarks
Only available with
the optional function
for additional
coordinate system
offset.
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
Alternatively, variables numbered 7001 to 7956 can be used to read or assign additional workpiece coordinate system offsetting dimensions. The variable number for the k-th axis origin of the
“Pn” coordinate system can be calculated as follows:
7000 + (n – 1) × 20 + k
The total number of controllable axes depends on the machine specifications.
2nd
axis
3rd
axis
4th
axis
16th
axis
G54.1P1
#7001
#7002
#7003
#7004
#7016
G54.1P2
#7021
#7022
#7023
#7024
#7036
G54.1P3
#7041
#7042
#7043
#7044
#7056
G54.1P48
#7941
#7942
#7943
#7944
#7956
Remarks
Only available with
the optional function
for additional coordinate system offset.
re
s
1st
axis
NC alarm (#3000)
ts
7.
Data name
.
Axis No.
er
ve
d
Note :
ri
gh
The NC unit can be forced into an alarm status using variables number 3000.
N
Alarm message
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Alarm No.
.A
ll
#3000 = 70 (CALL#PROGRAMMER#TEL#530)
The setting range for the alarm No. is from 1 to 6999.
The maximum available length of the alarm message is 31 characters.
The type of alarm message displayed on the screen depends on the designated alarm
number, as indicated in the following table.
al
N
o.
Note:
ZA
[Designated alarm No.] + 979
[Designated alarm No.] + 3000
K
IM
A
1 to 20
21 to 6999
Se
Displayed alarm message
K
Displayed alarm No.
ri
Designated alarm No.
Message preset for the displayed alarm No.
*1
Designated alarm message as it is
*2
*1 Refers to alarm Nos. 980 to 999 whose messages are preset as indicated in Alarm List.
A
ZA
*2 Display of a message as it is set in the macro statement.
01
3
YA
M
Program ex. 1 (Command for display
of “980 MACRO USER ALARM 1” on
condition of #1=0)
Operation stop by
NC alarm
980 MACRO USER ALARM 1
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
IF[#1NE0]GOTO100
#3000=1
N100
Program ex. 2 (Command for display of
“3021#ORIGINAL#ALARM#1” on condition
of #2=0)
IF[#2NE0]GOTO200
#3000=21(#ORIGINAL#ALARM#1)
N200
Operation stop
by NC alarm
13-86
3021#ORIGINAL#ALARM#1
Serial No. 340839
13
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
8.
Integrated time
Using variables #3001 and #3002, you can read the integrated time existing during automatic
operation or assign data.
Type
Variable No.
Integrated time 1
3001
Integrated time 2
3002
Unit
Data at power-on
Same as at
power-off
ms
Initialization
Counting
Data is assigned
in variables.
Always during power-on
During auto-starting
The integrated time is cleared to 0 after having reached about 3.6 × 10
11
ms.
#3001=0
WHILE[#3001LE#20]DO1
re
s
G65P9010T (Allowable time [ms])
er
ve
d
To subprogram
.
O9010
T#20______
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Into local variable #20
Execution of blocks from DO1 to END1
is repeated until the allowable time has
elapsed, and then the control jumps to
the end block of M99.
N
Local variable
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
END1
M99
AUTO CUT.
3042
TOTAL CUT.
3043
TOTAL TIME
3044
K
IM
Counting
Power being turned on
Automatic operation (from start to end)
Same as at
power-off
ZA
ms
K
3041
Initialization
ZA
3040
AUTO OPE.
Data at
power-on
A
POWER ON
Unit
ri
Variable
No.
Se
Item
al
N
o.
Using variables #3040 to #3044, moreover, it is possible to read various types of cumulative time
data displayed in the ACCUMULATED TIME window. TOTAL TIME denotes the cumulative time
for which the power has been turned on.
—
Automatic operation (with the start button lamp
lighting)
M
A
Execution of G1, G2 or G3 commands
YA
Power being turned on
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Note 1: Variable #3001 can be used to replace POWER ON item in the ACCUMULATED TIME
window with the desired value, on condition that bit 7 of parameter F151 is set to 0.
According to the parameter setting, variable #3001 is processed as shown below in
relation to POWER ON item.
F151 bit 7
Effect of writing data into #3001 on
POWER ON item
Value of #3001 at power-on
0
Replacement by the written value
Same as at power-off
1
No effect
Reset to zero (0)
Note 2: Variable #3002 can be used to replace the AUTO CUT. item in the ACCUMULATED
TIME window with the desired value.
Note 3: #3040, #3041, #3042, #3043 and #3044 are read-only variables.
See the section on the DIAGNOSIS (USER) - ALARM display in PART 3 of
the Operating Manual for more information on the respective data items.
13-87
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
9.
Validation/invalidation of single-block stop or auxiliary-function finish signal wait (#3003)
Assigning one of the values listed in the table below to variables number 3003 allows singleblock stop to be made invalid at subsequent blocks or the program to be advanced to the next
block without ever having to wait for the arrival of an auxiliary-function code (M, S, T, or B)
execution finish signal (FIN).
Single block stop
Auxiliary-function completion signal
0
Effective
Wait
1
Ineffective
Wait
2
Effective
No wait
3
Ineffective
No wait
Note:
er
ve
d
.
#3003
Variable #3003 is cleared to 0 by resetting.
re
s
10. Validation/invalidation of feed hold, feed rate override, or G09 (#3004)
Contents (Value)
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Feed rate override
Effective
Effective
1
Ineffective
Effective
2
Effective
3
Ineffective
4
Effective
5
Ineffective
6
Effective
7
Ineffective
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
G09 check
Effective
Effective
Effective
Ineffective
Effective
Effective
Ineffective
Effective
Ineffective
Ineffective
Ineffective
Ineffective
Ineffective
K
N
o.
Ineffective
al
ri
N
Feed hold
0
.A
ll
#3004
ri
gh
ts
Feed hold, feed rate override, or G09 can be made valid or invalid for subsequent blocks by
assigning one of the values listed in the table below to variables number 3004.
ZA
A
Se
Note 1: Variable #3004 is cleared to 0 by resetting.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Note 2: Each of the listed bits makes the function valid if 0, or invalid if 1.
13-88
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
11. Program stop, Message box
A.
Program stop (#3006)
Use of variables number 3006 allows the program to be stopped after execution of the immediately preceding block.
Format:
#3006 = 1 (CHECK OPERAT)
.
Character string to be displayed
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
Additional setting of a character string (in 31 characters at maximum) in parentheses allows the
required stop message to be displayed on the screen.
It depends upon the setting of bit 3 of parameter F37 when the stop message is cleared from the
screen.
F37 bit 3 = 0: The message does not disappear till completion of automatic operation.
ri
F37 bit 3 = 1: The message disappears when the execution of the next block is started.
N
.A
ll
Note 1: Always set “1” on the right-hand side of equation; otherwise (e.g. #3006 = 2) the operation will not be stopped, nor the message displayed.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Note 2: A block of #3006 does not cause the operation to be stopped, nor the message to be
displayed when the program is executed on the TOOL PATH CHECK display. As for
running on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display, operation is stopped at a block of
#3006, but the message does not appear.
K
ZA
ri
Message box (#3009/#3010)
Se
B.
al
N
o.
Note 3: Only use one-byte characters to specify the message in parentheses; otherwise the
message may not be displayed exactly as specified.
ZA
K
IM
A
Use of variables number 3009 or 3010 allows a message box to be opened. The message box
displays the specified interrogative message for prompting the user to answer in order that the
automatic operation may be continued under the desired conditions.
M
A
#3009 = 501 (ALL DONE? [Y/N])
01
3
YA
Character string to be displayed
Common variables number
#3010 = 501 (ALL DONE? [Y/N])
ig
ht
(c
)2
Character string to be displayed
Common variables number
C
op
yr
Variable #3009 has the following three functions:
1.
Displaying the desired character string in the message box,
2.
Assigning the desired value to an arbitrary common variable, and
3.
Causing a block stop.
Variable #3010 has the following two functions:
1.
Displaying the desired character string in the message box, and
2.
Assigning the desired value to an arbitrary common variable.
Set bit 7 of parameter F331 to “1” in order to use the variables #3009 and #3010; otherwise use
of them will only lead to the alarm 846 DESIGNATED NUMBER NOT FOUND.
Set the desired character string (in 31 characters at maximum) in parentheses.
13-89
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
Characters usable in setting the message are those provided on the screen keyboard (except
the symbols “(”, “)” and “%”).
Use of an unusable character or more than 31 characters will be rejected with the alarm 807
ILLEGAL FORMAT.
Specify a common variable (to be written) within a range between #100 to #199 or #500 to #999;
otherwise the alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT will be raised.
<Message box>
er
ve
d
.
[1]
Character string, as entered (in a block of #3009 or #3010) in the parentheses added to the
number of the variable to be written.
Message
N
[1]
Description
ri
Item
.A
ll
No.
gh
ts
re
s
[3]
[2]
Data entry field
Remark :
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
[2]
Used to enter the desired character string of the data to be written into the specified common variable.
Up to 4 characters can be entered.
Usable characters are enumerated in the table below.
o.
Used to definitively write the specified character string into the common variable concerned
through conversion in ASCII codes (in decimal notation).
N
Example :
ZA
al
ri
K
1. Give a command of “#3009 = 501” and enter “Y” in the data entry field in order to set
the variable #501 to 89.
[OK] button
[3]
A
K
IM
Se
2. Give a command of “#3009 = 501” and enter “AB12” in the data entry field in order to
set the variable #501 to 65664950.
<List of the characters usable for setting the message>
Numerical value
Character
Numerical value
Character
Numerical value
(Space)
M
A
65
O
79
YA
B
66
P
80
45
C
67
Q
81
46
D
68
R
82
0
)2
48
E
69
S
83
1
49
F
70
T
84
2
50
G
71
U
85
3
51
H
72
V
86
4
52
I
73
W
87
5
53
J
74
X
88
6
54
K
75
Y
89
7
55
L
76
Z
90
8
56
M
77
_
95
9
57
N
78
ht
01
3
43
-
(c
32
+
ig
yr
op
A
Character
.
C
ZA
Character = Usable character, Numerical value = Value to be written into the common variable
13-90
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
Example of use of variable #3009
Shown below is an example of programming to display “ALL DONE? [Y/N]” in the message box
for prompting the user to answer with Yes or No in the pause of block stop.
Then, in the flow of the example program, the operation will be continued by branching to
sequence numbers 10 and 20, respectively, when “Y” and “N” are entered in the pause and the
start button is pressed.
The message box remains opened to prompt the user again and again if he should give an
answer other than required (neither with Y, nore with N).
ri
gh
ts
re
s
N100
N1 #501=0 ...................................................
Initialization of the common variable concerned
#3009=501(ALL DONE? [Y/N]) ...........
Display of a message box (in a pause of block stop)
er
ve
d
.
M648 ...............................................................
Temporary cancelation of Safety Shield (Note 1)
IF[#50600 EQ 1] GOTO100 ..................
(Note 2)
GOTO30
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
IF[#501 EQ 89] GOTO10 .......................
Branching command for an answer with “Y”
IF[#501 EQ 78] GOTO20 .......................
Branching command for an answer with “N”
GOTO1
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
N10
GOTO30
N20
GOTO30
N30
M649 ...............................................................
Restoration of Safety Shield
ZA
Example of use of variable #3010
YA
M
A
Shown below is an example of programming to display “ALL DONE? [Y/N]” in the message box
for prompting the user to answer with “Y” or “N.”
01
3
The message box remains opened on the screen to wait for an answer while the command in a
block between the WHILE and END sentences is executed repeatedly.
(c
)2
Then, in the flow of the example program, the operation will be continued by branching to
sequence numbers 10 and 20, respectively, as soon as “Y” and “N” are entered.
yr
ig
ht
The message box remains opened to prompt the user again and again if he should give an
answer other than required (neither with Y, nore with N).
C
op
M648 ...............................................................
Temporary cancelation of Safety Shield (Note 1)
IF[#50600 EQ 1] GOTO100 ..................
(Note 2)
GOTO30
N100
N1 #501=0 ...................................................
Initialization of the common variable concerned
#3010=501(ALL DONE? [Y/N]) ...........
Display of a message box
WHILE[#501 EQ 0] DO1 .........................
Waiting for the common variable to change (Note 5)
G94G4X0.5 ...................................................
Dwell for 0.5 seconds (Note 3)
END1
13-91
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
IF[#501 EQ 89] GOTO10 .......................
Branching command for an answer with “Y”
IF[#501 EQ 78] GOTO20 .......................
Branching command for an answer with “N”
GOTO1
re
s
er
ve
d
.
N10
GOTO30
N20
GOTO30
N30
M649 ...............................................................
Restoration of Safety Shield
ri
gh
ts
Note 1: Do not fail to temporarily cancel the Safety Shield function until the common variable
concerned is written correctly; otherwise the automatic operation could be stopped
without the alarm 1125 SAFETY SHIELD CALCULATING being cleared automatically.
N
.A
ll
Do not, moreover, give any cutting commands in a section with the Safety Shield being
canceled; otherwise the interference check cannot occur any more correctly after
restoration of the Safety Shield.
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Note 2: In a virtual operation on the TOOL PATH CHECK and VIRTUAL MACHINING displays,
the prompting message box cannot be opened at all and, therefore, the suspension of
operation or looping cannot be canceled in any way.
To solve the problem, insert branching commands, using the variable #50600, to jump
to, and jump over, respectively, the section of #3009 or #3010 in the case of real and
virtual operations.
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
Note 3: As for programming with #3010, every repetitive execution of the command for waiting
for the common variable to change must be preceded by a dwell for 0.5 seconds;
otherwise the sensitivity to screen operation may be decreased because of an increase
in the load of program analysis.
YA
M
A
ZA
Note 4: In the case of large-sized programs, the sensitivity to screen operation may be
extremely decreased because of an increase in the load of program analysis when an
“IF GOTO ” statement is used as a command for waiting for the common variable to
change.
(c
)2
01
3
Note 5: As for a command for waiting for the common variable to change, do not give a
sequence number and the GOTO statement for that N-number in one and the same
block; otherwise the sensitivity to screen operation may be extremely decreased
because of an increase in the load of program analysis.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
Program example causing a decrease in the sensitivity to screen operation
N1 #501=0
#3010=501(ALL DONE? [Y/N])
N5 IF[#501 EQ 0] GOTO5 ..... Increase in the load of program analysis
Note 6: If the variable #3009 is used in a block to which the single-block operation is not
applicable, then no block stop occurs, as is the case with #3010.
Note 7: Do not specify in the block of #3009 or #3010, as the common variable to be written,
any one of those variables which are specified by the parameter F109 and F110 as
commonly usable for both turrets; otherwise an unexpected branching may occur.
13-92
Serial No. 340839
13
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
12. Mirror image (#3007)
The mirror image status of each axis at one particular time can be checked by reading variables
number 3007.
Variable #3007 has its each bit crosskeyed to an axis, and these bits indicate that:
If 0, the mirror image is invalid.
If 1, the mirror image is valid.
Bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
Axis no.
5
4
3
2
1
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
13. G-command modal status
re
s
er
ve
d
.
The G-command modal status in a pre-read block can be checked using variables numbers from
4001 to 4027. For variables numbers from #4201 to #4227, the modal status of the block being
executed can be checked in a similar manner to that described above.
#4001
#4201
Interpolation mode
G0-G3 : 0-3, G2.1 : 2.1, G3.1 : 3.1
#4002
#4202
Plane selection
G17 : 17, G18 : 18, G19 : 19
#4003
#4203
Absolute/Incremental programming
#4004
#4204
Pre-move stroke check
G22 : 22, G23 : 23
#4005
#4205
Feed specification
G94 : 94, G95 : 95
#4006
#4206
Inch/metric selection
G20/21 : 20/21
#4007
#4207
Tool radius compensation
G40 : 40, G41 : 41, G42 : 42
Tool length offset
G43/44 : 43/44, G43.4 : 43.4, G43.5 : 43.5,
G43.8/43.9 : 43.8/43.9, G49 : 49
.A
ll
ri
gh
Block
executed
#4009
#4209
Fixed cycle
#4010
#4210
Returning level
#4011
#4211
Scaling OFF/ON
#4012
#4212
Workpiece coordinate system G54-G59 : 54-59, G54.1 : 54.1
#4013
#4213
Mode of machining (feed)
G61-64 : 61-64, G61.1 : 61.1, G61.4 : 61.4
#4014
#4214
Macro modal call
G66 : 66, G66.1 : 66.1, G67 : 67
#4015
#4215
Shaping function
G40.1 : 40.1, G41.1 : 41.1, G42.1 : 42.1
#4016
#4216
Programmed coordinate conversion ON/OFF
#4017
#4217
#4018
#4218
#4019
G50/51 : 50/51
N
K
A
ZA
G98 : 98, G99 : 99
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
G80 : 80, G273/274 : 273/274, G276 : 276, G81-G89 : 81-89
G68/69 : 68/69
YA
(c
)2
#4219
#4220
#4221
#4022
#4222
#4023
#4223
#4024
#4224
#4025
#4225
#4026
#4226
#4027
#4227
ht
#4021
ig
o.
#4208
01
3
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
G90/91 : 90/91
#4008
yr
op
Function
Block
pre-read
#4020
C
ts
Variable Nos.
Mirror image by G-codes (5-surf. machining)
G17.1-17.9 : 17.1-17.9, G45.1 : 45.1 G49.1 : 49.1, G50.1 : 50.1, G51.1 : 51.1
Cross machining control
G110 : 110, G110.1 : 110.1, G111 : 111
Polygonal machining and Hobbing G50.2 : 50.2, G51.2 : 51.2, G113 : 113, G114.3 : 114.3
Dynamic offsetting II
13-93
G54.2 : 54.2
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
14. Other modal information
Modal information about factors other than the G-command modal status in the previous block
can be checked using variables numbers from 4101 to 4132. For variables numbers from #4301
to #4330, the modal information of the block being executed can be checked in a similar manner
to that described above.
Moreover, use #4501 to #4530 in an interruption macroprogram to read various modal information items at the moment of macro interruption.
Variable Nos.
Variable Nos.
Modal information
Macro
Previous
Block
block
executed interrupt.
#4315
#4515
#4116
#4316
#4516
#4503
#4117
#4317
#4517
#4504
#4118
#4318
#4518
#4106
#4305
#4505
#4119
#4319
#4519
Spindle functionS
#4306
#4506
#4120
#4320
#4520
Tool functionT
#4107
#4307
#4507
#4108
#4308
#4508
#4130
#4330
#4530
#4109
#4309
#4509
#4110
#4310
#4510
#4111
#4311
#4511
#4112
#4312
#4512
#4113
#4313
#4513
Radius comp. No.D
Rate of feedF
Length offset No.H
#4131
Miscel. functionM
#4132
#4314
#4514
Addt. workp. coord. system
G54-G59: 0,
G54.1P1-P300: 1-300
Sequence No.N
Surface type
Upper: 0, 0°/180°: 1,
90°/270°: 2
Machining surface
Upper: 5, 0°: 6, 90°: 7,
180°: 8, 270°: 9
N
o.
#4114
er
ve
d
#4105
re
s
#4304
ts
#4303
#4104
gh
#4103
Program No.O
.
#4115
No. 2 miscell. function
ri
#4502
.A
ll
#4501
#4302
N
#4301
#4102
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
#4101
Modal information
Macro
Previous
Block
block
executed interrupt.
K
ZA
ri
al
Note 1: Use the variable #4315 from the second block of the program. If it is used in the first
block, the reading of the program number is not successful.
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
Note 2: The variables #4115 and #4315 are only effective for programs whose ID-number or
name consists of numerals only. During execution of a program whose name contains
even one single character other than numerals, the reading in question remains zero
(0).
YA
M
A
Note 3: Do not use #4501 to #4530 elsewhere than in an interruption macroprogram; otherwise
an alarm will be caused (846 DESIGNATED NUMBER NOT FOUND).
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Example : Given below is an example to show the difference between variables #4113 and
#4313 (for checking modal information about M-codes) in the information that is
obtained in the parallel flow of actual execution and internal pre-reading (analysis) for
automatic operation.
Previous block (#4113)
Block being executed (#4313)
:
:
N001 M3
N002
N003
:
N006 M200
N007 #100=#4313
N008
N001 M3
N002
N003
:
N006 M200
N007 #100=#4113
N008
In execution
In analysis
Reading the information about M-codes
(M200) at the block previous to the currently analyzed one.
13-94
In execution
In analysis
Reading the information about M-codes
(M3) at the block being executed.
Serial No. 340839
13
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
15. Position information
Using variables numbers from #5001 to #5116, you can check the ending-point coordinates of
the previous block, machine coordinates, workpiece coordinates, skip coordinates, tool position
offset coordinates, and servo deviations.
Position information
End point
coordinates
of previous
block
Machine
coordinate
Workpiece
coordinate
Skip
coordinate
Tool
position
offset
coordinates
Servo
deviation
amount
1
#5001
#5021
#5041
#5061
#5081
#5101
2
#5002
#5022
#5042
#5062
#5082
#5102
3
#5003
#5023
#5043
#5063
#5083
#5103
16
#5016
#5036
#5056
#5076
#5096
Remarks
(Reading during move)
Possible
Impossible
Impossible
Possible
Impossible
er
ve
d
.
Axis No.
#5116
ts
re
s
Possible
The number of controllable axes depends on the machine specifications.
ri
gh
Note:
The ending-point coordinates and skip coordinates read will be those related to the
workpiece coordinate system.
2.
Ending-point coordinates, skip coordinates, and servo deviations can be checked even
during movement. Machine coordinates, workpiece coordinates, and tool position offset
coordinates must be checked only after movement has stopped.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
1.
M
o.
Fundamental machine coordinate system
ZA
K
W
G00
K
IM
A
Se
ri
al
N
Workpiece coordinate system
End point
coordinates
Read
command
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
G01
Workpiece coordinate
system
Workpiece
coordinates
Machine coordinate
system
C
op
yr
ig
ht
W
Machine
coordinates
M
MEP167
13-95
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
3.
Skip coordinates denote the position at which a skip signal has turned on at the block of
G31. If the skip signal has not turned on, skip coordinates will denote the corresponding
ending-point position.
er
ve
d
.
Read
command
re
s
Skip coordinate value
MEP168
ri
gh
ts
Gauge, etc.
The ending-point position denotes the tool tip position which does not allow for any tool
offsets, whereas machine coordinates, workpiece coordinates, and skip coordinates denote
the tool reference-point position which allows for tool offsets.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
4.
N
W
K
ZA
K
IM
Skip signal input
coordinates
A
Se
ri
al
F (Speed)
o.
Skip signal
Workpiece
coordinate system
Workpiece
coordinates
M
Machine
coordinate system
ZA
Machine coordinates
YA
M
A
Mark : Read after confirmation of stop.
Mark : Can be read during move.
MEP169
See Chapter 15 for further details.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
The input coordinates of a skip signal denote the position within the workpiece coordinate
system. The coordinates stored in variables from #5061 to #5066 are those existing when
skip signals were input during movement of the machine. These coordinates can therefore
be read at any time after that.
13-96
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
Example 1: Workpiece position measurement:
The following shows an example of measuring the distance from a reference
measurement point to the workpiece end:
#101
#102
#103
Skip signal input
X
.
.A
ll
X-axis measuring amount
Y-axis measuring amount
Measuring line linear amount
X-axis measuring start point
Y-axis measuring start point
X-axis skip input point
Y-axis skip input point
ZA
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8
N9, N10
N11
ZA
K
IM
A
Se
ri
al
#101
#102
#103
#5001
#5002
#5061
#5062
#102
N
Y
#103
N5
#101
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N8
N4
K
N3
o.
Z
N
Start point
87.245
87.245
123.383
#180=#4003
#30=#5001#31=#5002
G91G01Z#26F#9
G31X#24Y#25F#9
G90G00X#30Y#31
#101=#30–#5061#102=#31–#5062
#103=SQR[#101 #101+#102 #102]
G91G01Z–#26
IF[#180EQ91]GOTO11
G90
M99
er
ve
d
(Common variable)
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8
N9
N10
N11
re
s
To subprogram
O9031
ts
G65P9031X100.Y100.Z-10.F200
(#9)
200
(#24) 100.000
(#25) 100.000
(#26) –10.000
gh
F
X
Y
Z
ri
Argument (Local variable)
Modal data storage of G90/G91
X, Y starting point data storage
Z-axis entry
X, Y measuring (Stop at skip input)
Return to X, Y starting point
X, Y measuring incremental data calculation
Measuring line linear amount calculation
Z-axis escape
Modal return of G90/G91
Return from subprogram
–X
–150
–75
–25
Y
X
(c
G91G28X0Y0
G90G00X0Y0
X0Y–100.
G31X–150.Y–50.F80
#111=#5061 #112=#5062
G00Y0
G31X0
#121=#5061 #122=#5062
M02
–50
C
op
yr
ig
ht
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8
N9
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
Example 2: Skip signal input coordinates reading:
–75
–100
–Y
Skip signal
#111 = –75. +
#112 = –75. +
#121 = –25. +
#122 = –75. +
where denotes an error due to response delay.
13-97
MEP171
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
See Chapter 15 for further details.
Variable #122 denotes the skip signal input coordinate of N4 since N7 does not have a Ycommand code.
16. Measurement parameters
Variable numbers provided for reading measurement parameters are as follows:
Variables
Description
Parameter
Specification of tolerance (Lower limit) for measurement
K17
#3072
Specification of tolerance (Upper limit) for measurement
K18
#3086
Rate of skip feed for measurement
K13
#3087
Rate of approach feed for measurement
K14
#3088
Rate of skip feed for measurement (for the C-axis)
K15
#3089
Rate of approach feed for measurement (for the C-axis)
#5501
Stylus eccentricity of touch sensor (X-component)
#5502
Stylus eccentricity of touch sensor (Y-component)
#5503
Radius of stylus ball of touch sensor (X-component)
re
s
ts
gh
ri
.A
ll
N
#58167
L3
L4
R8164, 8165
Rate of skip feed for measurement
K13
R8166, 8167
#58169
Rate of approach feed for measurement
K14
R8168, 8169
#58171
Measurement stroke for workpiece measurement
K19
R8170, 8171
#58172
Safety contour clearance – Outside diameter (Radius value)
TC37
R8172
#58173
Safety contour clearance – Inside diameter (Radius value)
TC38
R8173
#58174
Safety contour clearance – Front face
TC39
R8174
#58175
Safety contour clearance – Back face
TC40
R8175
#58203
Offset amount from the B-axis to the spindle nose
BA62
#58205
Measurement stroke for tool nose measurement
K20
#58207
Rate of approach feed for laser measurement of tool length
K30
#58209
Rate of approach feed for laser measurement of tool diameter
K31
#58211
Rate of feed for preliminary laser measurement of tool length
K32
#58213
Rate of feed for preliminary laser measurement of tool diameter
K33
#58215
Spindle speed for preliminary laser measurement of tool length
#58217
Spindle speed for preliminary laser measurement of tool diameter
K35
#58221
Width of the tool-nose measurement sensor along the X-axis
L22
#58223
Width of the tool-nose measurement sensor along the Z-axis
L23
Reference position of the tool-nose measurement sensor in X
L24
K
ZA
A
)2
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
K23
#58227
Reference position of the tool-nose measurement sensor in Z
ht
K34
Reference position of the tool-nose measurement sensor in Y
L26
ig
(c
#58225
#58231
Position of the laser measurement sensor in X
L100
#58233
Position of the laser measurement sensor in Y
L101
#58235
Position of the laser measurement sensor in Z
L102
#58237
Position of the approach point in X for laser measurement of tool diameter
L103
#58239
Position of the approach point in Y for laser measurement of tool diameter
L104
#58241
Position of the approach point in Z for laser measurement of tool diameter
L105
#58259
Z-axis escape distance from the approach point after TOOL EYE measurement
L28
#58261
Maximum allowable tool length for laser measurement of tool length
L98
#58271
X-axis escape distance from the approach point for TOOL EYE measurement
L78
op
yr
#58229
C
L2
o.
Retry frequency for workpiece measurement
L1
N
Radius of stylus ball of touch sensor (Y-component)
K16
01
3
#5504
#58165
er
ve
d
.
#3071
Register R
13-98
L25
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
17. TNo. (#51999) and Number of index (#3020) of the spindle tool
Variables numbered 51999 and 3020 can be used to read the tool number, and the number of
tool data index, of the tool mounted in the spindle. The number of index can be used, instead of
TNo., in reading the tool data of a particular tool with the aid of macro variables.
System variable
Description
#51999
Tool number of the spindle tool
#3020
Number of tool data index of the spindle tool
Note 1: These system variables are read-only variables.
er
ve
d
.
Note 2: During tool path checking operation both variables (#51999 and #3020) store data with
mere reference to the “TNo.” programmed in a T-code and, therefore, remain zero (0)
when the program concerned has no T-codes used.
re
s
18. Number of tool data index (#3022 and #3023)
ri
gh
ts
Variables numbered 3022 and 3023 can be used to read the number of tool data index of any
desired tool.
Description
#3022
Designation of the required tool (for writing only).
Use the integral and decimal parts respectively for specifying the required tool
with its number and suffix.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
Variables
#3022 = . ΔΔ
: Tool number (TNo.)
ΔΔ:
Suffix
Number of index of the specified tool (for reading only).
Use this variable to read out the index line number of the tool specified by the
variable #3022.
The reading in #3023 is zero (0) if there is no corresponding tool registered in
the memory.
K
#3022 setting
Reading in #3023
A
1.01
21
2
B
2.02
24
3
C
3.03
40
4
A
4.61
31
5
B
5.62
34
6
C
6.63
35
7
H
7.08
15
V
8.22
18
Z
9.26
19
:
:
:
:
:
:
–
0
M
YA
01
3
)2
ht
9
(c
8
A
1
ZA
TNo.
yr
ig
:
:
Failure
C
op
ZA
K
IM
Se
Example:
A
ri
al
N
o.
#3023
Note :
The number of tool data index undergoes changes by an exchange of data sets using
the [TOOL DATA MOVE] menu function on the TOOL DATA display. It is necessary,
therefore, to obtain the number of tool data index in order to correctly fetch a tool’s
information item from the TOOL DATA display with the aid of system variables.
13-99
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
19. MAZATROL tool data
Using variables tabulated below, MAZATROL tool data can be read or written, as required.
Variables from #60001 ............. Tool quantity: 999 (maximum)
Variables from #600001 ........... Tool quantity: 4000 (maximum)
The maximum applicable tool quantity depends on the machine specifications.
(n = Number of index of the tool)
System variables
MAZATROL tool data
#600001 to #600000+n
Tool length / Length A
#61001 to #61000+n
#610001 to #610000+n
Tool diameter / Nose R
#62001 to #62000+n
#620001 to #620000+n
Tool life flag (1: ON, 0: OFF)
#63001 to #63000+n
#630001 to #630000+n
Tool damage flag (1: ON, 0: OFF)
#64001 to #64000+n
#640001 to #640000+n
Wear compensation X
#65001 to #65000+n
#650001 to #650000+n
Wear compensation Y
#66001 to #66000+n
#660001 to #660000+n
Wear compensation Z
#67001 to #67000+n
#670001 to #670000+n
Group number
#68001 to #68000+n
#680001 to #680000+n
Length B
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
#60001 to #60000+n
Note 1: During tool path check, tool data can be read but cannot be written.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Note 2: Tool life flags (variables numbers of the order of #62000 or #620000) and tool damage
flags (likewise, the order of #63000 or #630000) can take either 1 or 0 as their logical
states (1 for ON, 0 for OFF).
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Note 3: Tool life flags (variables numbers of the order of #62000 or #620000) only refer to tool
life management according to the tool’s application time.
13-100
Serial No. 340839
13
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
20. EIA/ISO tool data
Using variables numbers tabulated below, EIA/ISO tool data (tool life management data) can be
read or updated, as required.
Variables from #40001 ............. Tool quantity: 960 (maximum)
Variables from #400001 ........... Tool quantity: 4000 (maximum)
The maximum applicable tool quantity depends on the machine specifications.
(n = Number of index of the tool)
System variables
Corresponding data
#40001 to #40000+n
#400001 to #400000+n
Length offset data No. or Length offset amount
#41001 to #41000+n
#410001 to #410000+n
#42001 to #42000+n
#420001 to #420000+n
Tool life flag (1: ON, 0: OFF)
#43001 to #43000+n
#430001 to #430000+n
Tool damage flag (1: ON, 0: OFF)
#44001 to #44000+n
#440001 to #440000+n
Tool data flag (See the table below.)
#45001 to #45000+n
#450001 to #450000+n
Tool application time (s)
#46001 to #46000+n
#460001 to #460000+n
Tool life time (s)
#47001 to #47000+n
#470001 to #470000+n
Tool application quantity
#48001 to #48000+n
#480001 to #480000+n
Tool life quantity
er
ve
d
.
Radius compensation data No. or compensation amount
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
Offset data No. of a turning tool
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Tool life flag
0: No expiration of serviceable life
1: Expiration in terms of application quantity
2: Expiration in terms of application time
4: Expiration in terms of X-axis werar amount
8: Expiration in terms of Y-axis werar amount
16: Expiration in terms of Z-axis werar amount
#490001 to #490000+n
N
o.
#49001 to #49000+n
K
ZA
ri
al
Note 1: During tool path check, tool data can be read but cannot be written.
K
IM
A
Se
Note 2: Tool life flags (variables numbers of the order of #42000 or #420000) and tool damage
flags (likewise, the order of #43000 or #430000) can take either 1 or 0 as their logical
states (1 for ON, 0 for OFF).
bit 0
M
bit 1
bit 2
bit 3
Length offset data No.
0
0
–
–
01
3
A
ZA
Note 3: The identification between number and amount of tool length offset or radius compensation is made by referring to the tool data flag.
Length offset amount
0
1
–
–
Radius comp. data No.
–
–
0
0
Radius comp. amount
–
–
0
1
ht
(c
)2
YA
Tool data flag
yr
ig
21. Date and time (Year-month-day and hour-minute-second)
C
op
Variables numbered 3011 and 3012 can be used to read date and time data.
Variable Nos.
Description
#3011
Date (Year-month-day)
#3012
Time (Hour-minute-second)
Example:
If the date is December 15, 1995 and the time is 16:45:10, data is set as follows in
the corresponding system variables:
#3011 = 951215
#3012 = 164510.
13-101
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
22. Total number of machined parts and the number of parts required
Variables numbered 3901 and 3902 can be used to read or assign the total number of machined
parts and the number of parts required.
Variable Nos.
Description
#3901
Total number of machined parts
#3902
Number of parts required
Note 1: These variables must be integers from 0 to 9999.
Note 2: Data reading and writing by these variables is surely suppressed during tool path
checking.
er
ve
d
.
23. Setting and using variables names
gh
ts
re
s
Any variables name can be assigned to each of common variables #500 through #519. The
variables name, however, must be of seven alphanumerics or less that begin with a letter of the
alphabet.
.A
ll
ri
Format:
SETVNn [NAME1, NAME2, .....]
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Starting number of the variable to be named
Name of #n (Variables name)
Name of #n + 1 (Varaibles name)
al
Detailed description
K
N
o.
Each variables name must be separated using the comma (,).
ZA
Se
ri
Once a variables name has been set, it remains valid even after power-off.
K
IM
G01X[#POINT1]
[#TIMES]=25
A
ZA
Example :
A
Variables in a program can be called using the variables names. The variable to be called
must, however, be enclosed in brackets ([ ]).
Program
SETVN500[ABC,EFG]
On the display
F46 0
F47 ABC
F48 EFG
F49
F50
Variables name assigned to #500
Variables name assigned to #501
Variables name assigned to #502
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Example :
YA
M
Variables names can be checked on the USER PARAMETER No. 1 display. The names
assigned to variables #500 to #519 are displayed at F47 to F66.
13-102
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
24. Contents of the S12 or S23 parameters (#3200 and #3212 or #3223)
Variables numbered 3200, 3212 and 3223 can be used to read the settings of particular S
parameters. Use #3200 beforehand to specify the desired axis.
#3200 setting
Description
1 to 16
Axis number
Example : #3200 = 1;
Designation of the first significant axis setting (normally: X) within the system.
S parameter
#3212
S12
#3223
S23
er
ve
d
.
Variable Nos.
re
s
Note 1: #3200 is initialized (to “1”) by NC-resetting.
gh
ts
Note 2: It is not necessary to repeat writing into #3200 next time the reading with #3212 or
#3223 is to be done for the same axis.
ri
Note 3: Read #3200 as required to check its last setting.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
Note 4: The setting for #3200 is not checked for the appropriateness (as to whether the
designated axis is preset properly) at the block of #3200, but results in an alarm (809
ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT) being caused at the reading block of #3212 or #3223 when
the setting is found inappropriate.
25. Dynamic offsetting II
N
o.
Using variables tabulated below, it is possible to read dynamic offsetting values (X, Y, Z),
coordinates of the axis of table rotation (X, Y, Z), and the dynamic offset number.
Description
K
al
Variables
#5122
Dynamic offsetting value Y
#5123
Dynamic offsetting value Z
#50700
X-coordinate of the axis of rotation of the turntable (Parameter S5 X)
#50705
Y-coordinate of the axis of rotation of the turntable (Parameter S5 Y)
#50701
Z-coordinate of the axis of rotation of the turntable (Parameter S5 Z)
#3700
X-coordinate of the axis of rotation of the tilting table (Parameter S12 X)
#3701
Y-coordinate of the axis of rotation of the tilting table (Parameter S12 Y)
#3702
Z-coordinate of the axis of rotation of the tilting table (Parameter S12 Z)
#5510
Dynamic offset number (0 to 8)
A
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ZA
Dynamic offsetting value X
ri
#5121
1st axis
2nd axis
.....
16th axis
G54.2P1
#5521
#5522
.....
#5536
G54.2P2
#5541
#5542
.....
#5556
G54.2P3
#5561
#5562
.....
#5576
G54.2P4
#5581
#5582
.....
#5596
G54.2P5
#5601
#5602
.....
#5616
G54.2P6
#5621
#5622
.....
#5636
G54.2P7
#5641
#5642
.....
#5656
G54.2P8
#5661
#5662
.....
#5676
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
Moreover, use the following variables to read and write the values of the reference dynamic
offset:
13-103
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
26. Workpiece setup error correction values
Using variables tabulated below, it is possible to read and write the values used for workpiece
setup error correction.
Common
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
x
#5801
#5811
#5821
#5831
#5841
#5851
#5861
#5871
y
#5802
#5812
#5822
#5832
#5842
#5852
#5862
#5872
z
#5803
#5813
#5823
#5833
#5843
#5853
#5863
#5873
a
—
#5814
#5824
#5834
#5844
#5854
#5864
#5874
b
—
#5815
#5825
#5835
#5845
#5855
#5865
#5875
c
#5816
#5826
#5836
#5846
#5856
#5866
#5876
#5807
#5817
#5827
#5837
#5847
#5857
#5867
#5877
Rotat. axis coord. 2
#5808
#5818
#5828
#5838
#5848
#5858
#5868
#5878
er
ve
d
.
—
Rotat. axis coord. 1
gh
An attempt to overwrite the system variable #5800 will only lead to an alarm (1821
UNWRITABLE SYSTEM VARIABLE).
N
27. Settings in an indexing unit (for VERSATECH series only)
.A
ll
ri
Note :
ts
re
s
Use #5800 to read the number (1 to 7) of the currently selected data set for workpiece setup
error correction.
Description
TURN POS Z
#550616
TURN POS W
#550618
ANGLE B
#550620
ANGLE C
#550698
W-POS
0.0001 mm or 0.00001 in
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
0.0001 mm or 0.00001 in
0.0001°
0.0001°
0.0001 mm or 0.00001 in
These system variables are read-only variables.
ZA
Note :
0.0001 mm or 0.00001 in
K
#550614
0.0001 mm or 0.00001 in
o.
TURN POS Y
N
TURN POS X
#550612
ri
#550610
Unit
al
Variables
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Using variables tabulated below, it is possible to read the setting items of an indexing unit
(INDEX) in a MAZATROL program.
M
A
28. Work number of the main program (#4000)
)2
01
3
YA
Use variable #4000 to read the work number of the main program. The reading can also occur in
the same manner during execution on the TOOL PATH CHECK display.
Subprogram
1000.eia
O0010;
O1000;
#100=#4000
M98P1000;
“10” is read out as the work No. of
the main program.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
Main program
10.eia
M99;
M30
Note 1: Only 8-digit natural numbers (1 to 99999999) can be read as they are. The reading is
always “–1” if there is any character other than arabic numerals (0 to 9) in the work
number.
Note 2: The reading cannot be done appropriately (is always “–1”) in the mode of tape
operation and MDI.
13-104
Serial No. 340839
13
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
Note 3: This system variable is a read-only one.
Note 4: In the case of program chain (by M998) the work number of the main program chained
can be read as appropriate.
Main program
20.eia
Main program
10.eia
O0020;
O0010;
#100=#4000
M998S20;
M998P2000;
Program chain
“20” is read out as the work No. of
the main program.
Subprogram
2000.eia
er
ve
d
M30
.
O2000;
“20” is read out as the
work No. of the main
program.
re
s
#100=#4000
ri
gh
ts
M99;
.A
ll
29. Barrel-shaped milling cutter’s compensation amounts in F306 to F311 (#6041 to #6046)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Use variables tabulated below to read and write the settings in parameters F306 to F311.
Variables
Description
Setting range
Parameter F306 (For cutting point command: ACT-1)
0 to 99999999
#6042
Parameter F307 (For cutting point command: R1)
0 to 99999999
#6043
Parameter F308 (For cutting point command: R2)
0 to 99999999
#6044
Parameter F309 (For cutting point command: TEETH LG)
#6045
Parameter F310 (For cutting point command: ACT-2)
#6046
Parameter F311 (For cutting point command: R HEIGHT)
K
ZA
Se
ri
al
N
o.
#6041
0 to 99999999
0 to 99999999
0 to 99999999
K
IM
A
Note 1: Setting any of the variables above to a value outside the setting range will cause the
alarm 809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT.
YA
M
A
ZA
Note 2: The settings in parameters F306 to F311 are always fetched at the start up of the mode
of cutting point command (option). Their change made in the middle of the mode,
therefore, cannot become valid until the start up command is given anew.
01
3
30. Number of the currently selected SMC data set (#80001)
ig
ht
(c
)2
Use variable #80001 to read the No. of the SMC data set currently selected.
During execution on the TOOL PATH CHECK display, the number of the data set selected on
the POSITION display is read when there is no command given yet for selecting an SMC data
set in the program.
yr
Note 1: The reading is always “–1” when no SMC data set is yet selected.
C
op
Note 2: The reading is always “–2” when the SMC function is not enabled.
Note 3: This system variable is a read-only one.
13-105
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
31. Information about the type of program execution (#50600)
Variable numbered 50600 can be used to obtain information as to whether the program is
currently being run for the purpose of simulation (on the TOOL PATH CHECK or VIRTUAL
MACHINING display) or for actual machining (on the machine).
Description
Variables
0: Execution for simulation (on the TOOL PATH CHECK or VIRTUAL MACHINING
display)
1: Execution for actual machining (on the machine)
#50600
re
s
IF[#50600EQ0]GOTO32 : Branching to sequence N32 in the case of simulation.
N31 G65P9031X100. : Calling a measurement macro (to be skipped in simulation)
N32 G90X0.Y0.Z0.
er
ve
d
.
Example : Use of the variable to skip or execute the block for calling a measurement macroprogram according to the type of program execution.
gh
ts
.A
ll
ri
Note 1: This system variable is a read-only one.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Note 2: The reading of #50600 is always zero (0) in searching the program up to the restart
position for modal data to be prepared for restart operation.
32. Settings in a five-surface machining unit (for VERSATECH series only)
Using variables tabulated below, it is possible to read the setting items of a five-surface
machining unit (5F CUT) in a MAZATROL program.
Setting range
N
o.
Description
#5355
FACE
#5356
MACHINING W
ZA
0/90/180/270°
–99999.9999 to 99999.9999 mm or
–9999.99999 to 9999.99999 in
K
IM
Se
ri
al
INDEX W
K
–99999.9999 to 99999.9999 mm or
–9999.99999 to 9999.99999 in
#5354
A
Variables
ZA
Note 1: These system variables are read-only variables.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
Note 2: The reading is always “0” unless the variable is used in a subprogram which is called
by a five-surface machining unit.
13-106
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
33. Parameter settings
Using variables shown below, various parameter settings can be read, as required.
Use variable #800000 as required to specify the axis No. or system No., and then read the
desired parameter settings using the corresponding variables as tabulated below.
Parameter
System variable
Axis No./
System No.
Parameter
System variable
Axis No./
System No.
1 to 144
#804001 to #804144
—
S
1 to 72
#816001 to #816072
1 to 32
E
1 to 144
#805001 to #805144
—
SA
1 to 250
#819001 to #819250
1 to 8
F
1 to 336
#806001 to #806336
—
BA
1 to 264
#820001 to #820264
1 to 4
I
1 to 36
#809001 to #809036
1 to 32
TC
1 to 308
#821001 to #821308
—
1 to 4
1 to 576
#810001 to #810576
—
SU
1 to 168
#822001 to #822168
1 to 288
#811001 to #811288
—
SD
1 to 168
#823001 to #823168
1 to 288
#812001 to #812288
—
MS
1 to 132
#826001 to #826132
1 to 72
#813001 to #813072
1 to 32
US
1 to 90
#827001 to #827090
N
1 to 72
#814001 to #814072
1 to 32
—
1 to 4
—
gh
ts
re
s
L
M
er
ve
d
J
K
.
D
.A
ll
ri
Example : Shown below is an example of programming for reading the settings in parameters
K124 and M5 (for the X- and Y-axis) as well as in parameter BA62 (for system 1 and
system 2).
Specifying the axis No. 1 and system No. 1.
#100 = #811124
Storing the setting of K124 into variable #100.
#101 = #813005
Storing the setting of M5 for the 1st axis (X) into variable #101.
#102 = #820062
Storing the setting of BA62 for system 1 (TR1/HD1) into variable #102.
#800000 = 2
Specifying the axis No. 2 and system No. 2.
#103 = #813005
Storing the setting of M5 for the 2nd axis (Y) into variable #103.
#104 = #820062
Storing the setting of BA62 for system 2 (TR2/HD2) into variable #104.
K
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
#800000 = 1
ZA
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
Note 1: “1” is automatically selected as the initial value of variable #800000 (No. of Axis and
System) upon switching-on or resetting. “#800000 = 1” can be omitted, therefore, until
the named variable is to be specified with any other value than 1 for the reading macro
statements concerned.
M
A
Note 2: Alarm 1821 UNWRITABLE SYSTEM VARIABLE is raised if an attempt is made to write
in one of the variables listed in the table above (since they are all read-only variables).
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
Note 3: Parameters available depend upon the specifications of the machine in question.
13-107
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13-11-5 Arithmetic operation commands
Various operations can be carried out between variables using the following format.
#i = <expression>
where <expression> must consist of a constant(s), a variable(s), a function(s), or an operator(s).
In the table given below, constants can be used instead of #j and/or #k.
#i=#j
Definition/replacement
[2] Additional-type operations
#i=#j+#k
#i=#j–#k
#i=#jOR#k
#i=#jXOR#k
Addition
Subtraction
Logical additon (For each of 32 bits)
Exclusive OR (For each of 32 bits)
[3] Multiplicative-type
operations
#i=#j#k
#i=#j/#k
#i=#jMOD#k
#i=#jAND#k
Multiplication
Division
Surplus
Logical product (For each of 32 bits)
[4] Functions
#i=SIN[#k]
#i=COS[#k]
#i=TAN[#k]
#i=ATAN[#j]
#i=ACOS[#j]
#i=SQRT[#k]
#i=ABS[#k]
#i=BIN[#k]
#i=BCD[#k]
#i=ROUND[#k]
Sine
Cosine
Tangent (tanq is used as sinq/cosq.)
Arc-tangent (Either ATAN or ATN can be used.)
Arc-cosine
Square root (Either SQRT or SQR is available.)
Absolute value
BINARY conversion from BCD
BCD conversion from BINARY
Rounding to the nearest whole number (Either ROUND or
RND is available.)
Cutting away any decimal digits
Counting any decimal digits as 1s
Natural logarithm
Exponent with the base of e (= 2.718 ...)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
[1] Definition/replacement of
variables
K
ri
al
N
o.
#i=FIX[#k]
#i=FUP[#k]
#i=LN[#k]
#i=EXP[#k]
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
Note 1: In principle, data without a decimal point is handled as data that has a decimal point.
(Example: 1 = 1.000)
M
A
ZA
Note 2: Offsets from variable #10001, workpiece coordinate system offsets from variable
#5201, and other data become data that has a decimal point. If data without a decimal
point is defined using these variables numbers, therefore, a decimal point will also be
assigned to the data.
YA
Example :
01
3
Common variable
Execution
#101
1000
#102 1.000
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
#101=1000
#10001=#101
#102=#10001
]).
C
op
Note 3: The <expression> after a function must be enclosed in brackets ([
1.
Operation priority
Higher priority is given to functions, multiplicative operations, and additive operations, in that
order.
#101=#111+#112SIN[#113]
[1] Function
[2] Multiplicative
[3] Additional
13-108
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
2.
13
Specifying an operational priority level
The part to which the first level of operation priority is to be given can be enclosed in brackets
([ ]). Up to five sets of brackets, including those of functions, can be used for one expression.
#101=SQRT[[[#111–#112]SIN[#113]+#114]#15]
One fold
Two fold
Three fold
Examples of operation instructions
.
3.
G65 P100 A10 B20.
#101=100.000
#102=200.000
#1
#2
#101
#102
10.000
20.000
100.000
200.000
[2] Definition,
replacement
=
#1=1000
#2=1000.
#3=#101
#4=#102
#5=#5081
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
1000.000
1000.000
100.000
Data of common variables
200.000
–10.000 Offset amount
[3] Addition,
subtraction
+–
#11=#1+1000
#12=#2–50.
#13=#101+#1
#14=#5081–3.
#15=#5081+#102
#11
#12
#13
#14
#15
2000.000
950.000
1100.000
–13.000
190.000
[4] Logical addition
OR
#3=100
#4=#3OR14
[5] Exclusive OR
XOR
#3=100
#4=#3XOR14
[6] Multiplication,
Division
/
#21=100100
#22=100.100
#23=100100.
#24=100.100.
#25=100/100
#26=100./100
#27=100/100.
#28=100./100.
#29=#5081#101
#30=#5081/#102
[7] Surplus
MOD
#31=#19MOD#20
re
s
ts
gh
ri
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
N
A
ZA
K
al
ri
K
IM
Se
ZA
A
M
YA
#3
14
#4
= 01100100
= 00001110
= 01101010 = 106
#21
#22
#23
#24
#25
#26
#27
#28
#29
#30
10000.000
10000.000
10000.000
10000.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
–1000.000
–0.050
#9
15
#10
= 01100100
= 00001111
= 00000100 = 4
#501=SIN[60]
#502=SIN[60.]
#503=1000SIN[60]
#504=1000SIN[60.]
#505=1000.SIN[60]
#506=1000.SIN[60.]
Note: SIN[60] is equal to SIN[60.].
#501
#502
#503
#504
#505
#506
0.866
0.866
866.025
866.025
866.025
866.025
#541=COS[45]
#542=COS[45.]
#543=1000COS[45]
#544=1000COS[45.]
#545=1000.COS[45]
#546=1000.COS[45.]
Note: COS[45] is equal to COS[45.].
#541
#542
#543
#544
#545
#546
0.707
0.707
707.107
707.107
707.107
707.107
)2
01
3
[10] Cosine
COS
= 01100100
= 00001110
= 01101110 = 110
#9=100
#10=#9AND15
(c
ig
yr
C
op
[9] Sine
SIN
#3
14
#4
#19
48
= 5 surplus 3
=
#20
9
ht
[8] Logical product
AND
er
ve
d
[1] Main program and
argument
specification
13-109
Serial No. 340839
1.732
1.732
1732.051
1732.051
1732.051
1732.051
[12] Arc-tangent
ATAN
#561=ATAN[173205/100000]
#562=ATAN[173.205/100.]
#563=ATAN[1.732]
#561
#562
#563
60.000
60.000
59.999
[13] Arc-cosine
ACOS
#521=ACOS[100000/141421]
#522=ACOS[100./141.421]
#523=ACOS[1000/1414.213]
#524=ACOS[10./14.142]
#525=ACOS[0.707]
#521
#522
#523
#524
#525
45.000
45.000
45.000
44.999
45.009
[14] Square root
SQRT
#571=SQRT[1000]
#572=SQRT[1000.]
#573=SQRT[10.10.+20.20.]
#574=SQRT[#14#14+#15#15]
#571
#572
#573
#574
31.623
31.623
22.361
190.444
#576
#577
–1000.000
1000.000
er
ve
d
#551
#552
#553
#554
#555
#556
re
s
#551=TAN[60]
#552=TAN[60.]
#553=1000TAN[60]
#554=1000TAN[60.]
#555=1000.TAN[60]
#556=1000.TAN[60.]
Note: TAN[60] is equal to TAN[60.].
ts
[11] Tangent
TAN
.
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
#580
64
256
#21
#22
#23
#24
#25
#26
#27
#28
5
5
5
5
–5
–5
–5
–5
#21
#22
#23
#24
#25
#26
#27
#28
4.000
4.000
4.000
4.000
–4.000
–4.000
–4.000
–4.000
5.000
5.000
5.000
5.000
–5.000
–5.000
–5.000
–5.000
[18] Cutting away any
decimal digits
FIX
#21=FIX[14/3]
#22=FIX[14./3]
#23=FIX[14/3.]
#24=FIX[14./3.]
#25=FIX[–14/3]
#26=FIX[–14./3]
#27=FIX[–14/3.]
#28=FIX[–14./3.]
[19] Counting any
decimal digits as 1s
FUP
#21=FUP[14/3]
#22=FUP[14./3]
#23=FUP[14/3.]
#24=FUP[14./3.]
#25=FUP[–14/3]
#26=FUP[–14./3]
#27=FUP[–14/3.]
#28=FUP[–14./3.]
#21
#22
#23
#24
#25
#26
#27
#28
[20] Natural logarithm
LN
#101=LN[5]
#102=LN[0.5]
#103=LN[–5]
#101
#102
Alarm
[21] Exponent
EXP
#104=EXP[2]
#105=EXP[1]
#106=EXP[–2]
#104
#105
#106
ig
ht
K
ZA
A
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
#21=ROUND[14/3]
#22=ROUND[14./3]
#23=ROUND[14/3.]
#24=ROUND[14./3.]
#25=ROUND[–14/3]
#26=ROUND[–14./3]
#27=ROUND[–14/3.]
#28=ROUND[–14./3.]
yr
ri
120.000
#11
#12
[17] Rounding into the
nearest whole
number
ROUND
op
.A
ll
#1=100
#11=BIN[#1]
#12=BCD[#1]
N
[16] BIN, BCD
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
#576=–1000
#577=ABS[#576]
#3=70.
#4=–50.
#580= ABS[#4–#3]
C
[15] Absolute value
ABS
gh
Note: For enhanced accuracy, perform
operations within [ ] as far as possible.
13-110
1.609
–0.693
860 CALCULATION IMPOSSIBLE
7.389
2.718
0.135
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
4.
13
Operation accuracy
The errors listed in the table below are generated by one arithmetic operation, and the error rate
increases each time an operation is performed.
Max. error
a=b+c
a=b–c
2.33 × 10–10
5.32 × 10–10
a=bc
1.55 × 10–10
4.66 × 10–10
a = b/c
4.66 × 10–10
1.86 × 10–9
b
1.24 × 10–9
3.73 × 10–9
a = sin b
a = cos b
5.0 × 10–9
1.0 × 10–8
a = tan–1 b/c
1.8 × 10–6
3.6 × 10–6
b
Relative error
a
Absolute error
degree
The function TAN (Tangent) is calculated as SIN/COS (Sine/Cosine).
gh
Notes on deterioration of accuracy
Addition/subtraction
.A
ll
A.
,
ri
5.
c
re
s
Note:
Min.
ts
a=
Kind of error
.
Mean error
er
ve
d
Operation format
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
As for additional-type operations, if an absolute value is subtracted from the other, the relative
–8
error cannot be reduced below 10 .
For example, when the true values (such values, by the way, cannot be substitued directly) of
#10 and #20 are as follows:
o.
#10 = 2345678988888.888
#20 = 2345678901234.567
K
ZA
K
IM
#10 = 2345679000000.000
#20 = 2345678900000.000
A
Se
ri
al
N
then #10 – #20 = 87654.321 would not result from calculation of #10 – #20. This is because,
since the effective number of digits of the variable is eight (decimal), the approximate values of
#10 and #20 are:
A
ZA
More strictly, internal binary values slightly differ from these values. Actually therefore, a
significant error results as follows:
Logical relationship
01
3
B.
YA
M
#10 – #20 = 100000.000.
ht
(c
)2
As for EQ, NE, GT, LT, GE and LE, the processing is executed in a similar manner to addition
and substraction, so be careful to errors. For example, to judge whether #10 is equal to #20 of
the above example, the conditional expression
ig
IF [#10EQ#20]
C
op
yr
is not appropriate due to the errors. In such a case, therefore, give a macro-instruction as shown
below to allow for an acceptable tolerance in the judgement on the equality of two values.
C.
IF [ABS[#10 – #20] LT200000]
Trigonometric functions
For trigonometric functions, although the absolute error is guaranteed, the relative error is not
–8
below 10 . Be careful, therefore, when carrying out multiplication, or division after trigonometric
function operations.
13-111
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13-11-6 Control commands
The flow of a program can be controlled using IF and WHILE DO commands.
1.
Branching
A.
IFGOTO
Format: IF [conditional expression] GOTO n
er
ve
d
.
where n is a sequence number in the same program.
The branching will occur to the block headed by sequence number ‘n’ if the condition holds, or if
the condition does not hold, the next block will be executed.
An independent setting of GOTO statement without IF [conditional expression] will perform
unconditional branching to the specified block.
re
s
The available formats of [conditional expression] are as follows:
=
( #i is equal to #j.)
#i NE #j
(#i is not equal to #j.)
#i GT #j
>
(#i is larger than #j.)
#i LT #j
<
(#i is smaller than #j.)
#i GE #j
(#i is equal to #j, or larger than #j.)
#i LE #j
(#i is equal to #j, or smaller than #j.)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
#i EQ #j
K
ZA
A
Branching to N100
if #2 = 1.
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
N10 #22=#20 #23=#21
IF[#2EQ1] GOTO100
#22=#20–#3
#23=#21–#4
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
For GOTO n, n must be a sequence number within the same program. If the sequence number
does not exist in that program, the alarm 843 DESIGNATED SNo. NOT FOUND will occur. An
expression or a variable can be used instead of #i, #j, or n.
Sequence number designation Nn must be set at the beginning of the destination block.
Otherwise, the alarm 843 DESIGNATED SNo. NOT FOUND will result. If, however, the block
begins with “/” and Nn follows, the program can branch to that sequence number.
Search
for
N10
to be
continued
back to
the
head
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
N100 X#22 Y#23
#1=#1+1
Search
for
N100
Note :
During search for the branching destination sequence number, if the area from the
block after “IF ...” to the program end (% code) is searched (forward search) in vain,
then the area from the head down to the block before “IF ...” will be searched next
(backward search). It will therefore take more time to execute backward search
(searching in the opposite direction to the flow of the program) than to execute forward
search.
13-112
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
B.
13
IFTHENELSEENDIF
After describing the conditional expression of IF, give commands after THEN or, in succession,
after ELSE according as they are to be executed if the conditional expression holds or does not
hold.
There is a special type of programming format provided to allow multiple macro statements and,
moreover, even NC statements to be entered in the section between IFTHEN block and ELSE
block as well as in that between ELSE block and ENDIF block (see Type A below).
Type
er
ve
d
.
See Subsection 13-11-9 “Precautions” for a description of NC and macro
statements.
Programming format
re
s
IF[Cond. expres.]THEN
Macro statement or NC statement
ts
gh
ELSE
A
ri
Macro statement or NC statement
.A
ll
ENDIF
IF[Cond. expres.]THEN Macro statement
ELSE Macro statement
ENDIF
C
IF[Cond. expres.]THEN Macro statement ELSE Macro statement
ENDIF
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
B
N
o.
The available formats of [conditional expression] are as follows:
=
( #i is equal to #j.)
#i NE #j
(#i is not equal to #j.)
#i GT #j
>
(#i is larger than #j.)
#i LT #j
<
(#i is smaller than #j.)
#i GE #j
(#i is equal to #j, or larger than #j.)
#i LE #j
(#i is equal to #j, or smaller than #j.)
K
ZA
A
YA
M
<Detailed description>
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
#i EQ #j
1.
Omission of THEN or ELSE
01
3
THEN or ELSE commands can be omitted as shown below.
)2
Type
Macro statm. or NC statm.
ENDIF
ENDIF
B
IF[Cond. expres.]ELSE Macro statm.
ENDIF
IF[Cond. expres.]THEN Macro statm.
ENDIF
C
IF[Cond. expres.]ELSE Macro statm.
ENDIF
IF[Cond. expres.]THEN Macro statm.
ENDIF
ht
(c
Macro statm. or NC statm.
ig
yr
op
Omission of ELSE
IF[Cond. expres.]THEN
A
C
Omission of THEN
IF[Cond. expres.]ELSE
Note :
THEN and ELSE commands cannot both be omitted.
13-113
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
2.
Omission of ENDIF
ENDIF can be omitted as shown below.
Type
Omission of ENDIF
A
Not to be omitted.
The alarm 1919 IF-ENDIF MIS-MATCH is raised if ENDIF is missing.
B
IF[Cond. expres.]THEN Macro statm.
ELSE Macro statm.
C
IF[Cond. expres.]THEN Macro statm. ELSE Macro statm.
Example : Nesting of an instruction of Type B within that of Type A.
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
IF[#100EQ0]THEN
IF[#110EQ1]THEN#120=10....................... a
ENDIF ............................................................... b
ELSE
#120=20
ENDIF
.
Do not omit ENDIF for an instruction of Type B or C if it is to be nested within a
section of Type A.
er
ve
d
Note :
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
The IF statement of Type B in block “a” must be terminated by ENDIF in block “b.”
The alarm 1919 IF-ENDIF MIS-MATCH is raised if ENDIF in block “b” is missing.
3.
The programming formats of Type A and Type B can be used mixedly.
Example : Mixed use of Types A and B.
K
ZA
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
IF[#100EQ0]THEN ............................. Type A
#100=2
G00X#101
ELSE#110=10 ...................................... Type B
ENDIF
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
IF[#100EQ0]THEN #100=2 ................ Type B
ELSE ........................................................... Type A
G00X#101
#110=10
ENDIF
Up to 10 IF statements can be given in a nesting manner.
01
3
4.
)2
Use of an 11th IF statement causes the alarm 1918 IF-ENDIF NESTING EXCEEDED to be
raised.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
Example : Use of three IF statements.
IF[#100EQ0]THEN
IF[#110GT#111]THEN
ELSE
IF[#120EQ#121]THEN
ELSE
ENDIF
ENDIF
ELSE
ENDIF
2nd
3rd
13-114
1st
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
5.
13
Branch instruction can be given for a destination outside the section between IF and ENDIF.
Example : Branching to an outside destination.
IF[#100EQ0]THEN
IF[#110GT#111]GOTO100
ENDIF
N100
Branch instruction can be given from outside for a destination inside the section between IF
and ENDIF, and the commands succeeding the destination block of sequence number are
executed, independently of whether or not the conditional expression concerned holds or
does not hold.
re
s
er
ve
d
.
6.
gh
ts
Example : Branching from outside to an inside destination.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
#100=1
GOTO10
IF[#100EQ0]THEN
N10
ELSE
N20
ENDIF
K
A
Do not use an IFENDIF section and WHILEDO section in such a manner that they overlap with each other; otherwise the alarm 1919 IF-ENDIF MIS-MATCH is raised.
K
IM
7.
ZA
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Unconditional execution
of the succeeding
commands
ZA
Example 1: WHILEDO section in its entirety within an IFENDIF section.
Correct
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
IF[#100EQ0]THEN
WHILE[#110GT#111]DO1
END1
ENDIF
C
op
yr
ig
ht
Example 2: WHILEDO section overlaps with an IFENDIF section.
#100=0
#110=5
#111=0
IF[#100EQ0]THEN
WHILE[#110GT#111]DO1
ENDIF
#111=#111+1
END1
Incorrect
13-115
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
8.
A command of subprogram call with M98, G65 or G66 a. o. can be given in a section between IF and ENDIF. The subprogram can contain branching commands of IFENDIF, and
up to 10 IF statements can be given in a nesting manner within the subprogram.
Example : Subprogram call with M98.
Main program
IF[#100EQ0]THEN
To subprogram
M98 P100
ENDIF
M30
Subprogram
re
s
er
ve
d
.
IF[#100EQ0]THEN
ENDIF
M99
Always give commands of IF and ENDIF in pairs within each program; otherwise the alarm
1919 IF-ENDIF MIS-MATCH is raised.
gh
ts
9.
.A
ll
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Main program
Subprogram
IF[#100EQ0]THEN
M99
K
ZA
Se
ri
al
N
o.
IF[#100EQ0]THEN
To subprogram
M98 P100
ENDIF
M30
ri
Example : ENDIF is missing in a subprogram.
K
IM
A
10. Blocks of IF, THEN, ELSE and ENDIF must begin with a slash (/) if it is desired that the
function of optional block skip may be applied to them.
ZA
Example : Optional block skip function can be applied.
YA
M
A
/IF[#100EQ0]THEN#100=10;
01
3
11. A command of program end can in some cases prevent an alarm from being caused even if
an indispensable ENDIF is missing.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
When, in the sample program shown below, the conditional expression does not hold,
branch to the ELSE section occurs and, without any alarm being raised, the succeeding
program end command, M30, can be executed. If, however, the conditional expression
holds, the alarm 1919 IF-ENDIF MIS-MATCH will be raised at the ELSE block after
processing the THEN instructions because the indispensable ENDIF is actually missing.
IF[#100EQ20]THEN
#100=10
#120=20
ELSE
#120=30
M30
13-116
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
12. There are some cases where the alarm concerned is not raised even if the THEN section is
not correctly programmed, on condition that the conditional expression does not hold in
actual operation.
The table below indicates whether the alarms concerned are caused or skipped.
Alarm No.
Message
Caused?
807
ILLEGAL FORMAT
Skipped
854
INCORRECT USERMACRO
PROGRAMMING
Skipped
IF STATEMENT ERROR
Skipped
IF-ENDIF NESTING EXCEEDED
Caused
1919
IF-ENDIF MIS-MATCH
Caused
er
ve
d
.
864
1918
re
s
Example : The alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT is skipped when the conditional expression
does not hold.
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
IF[Cond. expres.]THEN
THEN#100=10
THEN#100=10
ENDIF
N
13. Enumerated below are the cases in which the alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT is raised.
o.
N
IF[Cond. expres.]THEN THEN
THEN#100=10
ENDIF ENDIF
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
When multiple THEN, ELSE or ENDIF are present in succession on one and the same
nesting level.
K
A
K
IM
Se
IF[Cond. expres.]THEN#100=10
ELSE#100=20 ENDIF
ZA
ri
al
When ENDIF is present in a block headed by IF, THEN or ELSE.
ZA
When there are more than one ENDIF entered in one and the same block.
YA
M
A
IF[Cond. expres.]THEN THEN
THEN #100=10
ENDIF ENDIF
)2
01
3
When IF and THEN statements are followed by another IF statement without the preceding ENDIF block.
ig
ht
(c
IF[Cond. expres.]THEN #100=10
ELSE#100=20 IF[Cond. expres.]ELSE#100=10
C
op
yr
14. Enumerated below are the cases in which the alarm 854 INCORRECT USERMACRO
PROGRAMMING is raised.
When an NC statement is entered in an incorrect manner.
IF[Cond. expres.]THEN G0Z-10.
When a command for calling a macroprogram is given in an incorrect manner.
IF[Cond. expres.]THEN G65P1000
When an NC statement immediately succeeds an IF statement.
IF[Cond. expres.]G0Z-10.
13-117
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
15. Enumerated below are the cases in which the alarm 864 IF STATEMENT ERROR is raised.
When a calculation statement immediately succeeds an IF statement.
IF[Cond. expres.]#100=10
When IF is not followed immediately by a conditional expression in one and the same
block.
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
IF
[Cond. expres.]THEN #100=10
ENDIF
13-118
Serial No. 340839
13
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
2.
Looping
Format:
WHILE [Conditional expression] DOm
(m = 1, 2, 3 127)
ENDm
re
s
er
ve
d
.
The area from the next block to the ENDm block loops while the conditional expression holds. If
the conditional expression does not hold, control will be tansferred to the block after ENDm. In
the format shown above, DOm can precede WHILE.
You must always use WHILE [conditional expression] DOm and ENDm in pairs. If you omit
WHILE [conditional expression], the area from DOm to ENDm will endlessly loop. In DOm, m (1
to 127) identifies the number of looping. (DO1, DO2, DO3, and so on up to DO127)
The maximum available number of degrees of multiplicity is 27.
[2] The identifying No. of WHILE DOm is arbitrary.
ts
[1] Same identifying No. can be used repeatedly.
.A
ll
ri
END1
gh
WHILE DO1
WHILE DO1
Usable
WHILE DO3
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
END1
Usable
WHILE DO1
N
o.
Usable
K
ZA
Se
ri
al
END1
K
IM
WHILE DO1
ZA
A
M
YA
WHILE DO27
WHILE DO2
END2
WHILE DO1
END1
[4] The total number of levels of WHILE DOm must not
exceed 27.
WHILE DO1
DO1
WHILE DO2
WHILE DO2
WHILE DO27
DO2
DO27
WHILE DO28
END27
END28
)2
01
3
Usable
A
[3] Up to 27 levels of WHILE DOm can be used.
m can be 1 to 127, independent of the depth of nesting.
END3
END27
(c
END2
Unusable
ht
END2
END1
yr
ig
END1
For nesting, m once used cannot be used again.
op
Note :
[6] WHILE DOm must correspond to ENDm one-to-one in the
same program.
C
[5] WHILE DOm must precede ENDm.
END1
WHILE DO1
Unusable
Unusable
WHILE DO1
WHILE DO1
END1
13-119
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
[7] WHILE DOm must not overlap.
[8] Outward branching from the range of WHILE DOm is
possible.
WHILE DO1
WHILE DO1
WHILE DO2
Unusable
IF GOTOn
END1
END1
Usable
END2
Nn
[9] Branching into WHILE DOm is not allowed.
.
Main program
IF GOTOn
WHILE DO1
WHILE DO2
WHILE DO1
ri
Nn
M99
N
M02
.A
ll
END1
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
END1
END1
END2
To subprogram
WHILE DO1
Nn
gh
G65 P100
ts
END1
Usable
[12] If WHILE and END are not included in pairs in subprogram
(including macro subprogram), an alarm will result at M99.
o.
[11] The looping can be independently programmed in a
subprogram which is called using G65/G66 from the
midway of WHILE DOm. Up to 27 levels of nesting for
both programs can be done.
Main program
Subprogram (O100)
N
Main program
K
ZA
ri
al
Subprogram (O100)
WHILE DO1
To subprogram
Usable
To subprg.
M02
ZA
END1
WHILE DO1
G65 P100
A
K
IM
Se
WHILE DO1
G65 P100
END1
Subprogram (O100)
re
s
Unusable
Usable
er
ve
d
WHILE DO1
IF GOTOn
Unusable
[10] Subprogram can be called using M98, G65, G66, etc. from
the midway of WHILE DOm.
M99
Alarm 868 DO-END MIS-MATCH
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
M99
13-120
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
13-11-7 External output commands (Output via RS-232C)
1.
Overview
In addition to standard user macros, the types of macros listed below are provided as external
output commands. These external output macros can be used to output character data or the
numerical data in variables to an external unit via an RS-232C interface. The data are outputted
in a data length of 7 bits with an even-parity bit added.
Types and functions of external output macros
Setup processing for data output
PCLOS
Termination processing of data output
BPRNT
Printout of character data or binary printout of variable data
DPRNT
Printout of character data or numerical printout of variable data on a digit-by-digit
basis
re
s
er
ve
d
.
POPEN
Programming order
.A
ll
ri
B.
gh
ts
A.
POPEN
DPRNT
Data output commands
N
o.
BPRNT
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Open command
K
ZA
POPEN
ZA
Programming format:
A
Open command POPEN
Close command
K
IM
2.
Se
ri
al
PCLOS
A
Detailed description
M
- The command code POPEN must be included before a series of data output command codes.
01
3
YA
- The control code for DC2 and the percentage code % are output from the NC unit to an
external output unit.
(c
Close command PCLOS
ht
3.
)2
- Once POPEN has been set, it will remain valid until PCLOS is set.
PCLOS
yr
ig
Programming format:
C
op
Detailed description
- The command code PCLOS must be included after all data output command codes.
- The control code for DC4 and the percentage code % are outputted from the NC unit to an
external output unit.
- This command must be used together with POPEN. This command code must be included only
after POPEN.
- This command must be set at the end of the program even after data output has been aborted
using, for example, the NC reset switch.
13-121
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
4.
Data output command BPRNT
Programming format:
BPRNT[1#v1[c1]2#v2[c2]]
Effective digits after decimal point
Variable number
Character string
Variable
value
c
× 10
Detailed description
- The command BPRNT can be used to output characters or to output variable data in binary
form.
re
s
er
ve
d
.
- The designated character string is outputted directly in the ISO coded format. Alphanumerics
(A to Z, and 0 to 9) and/or special characters (+, –, , /) can be used. Of these characters, only
the asterisk () is outputted as a space code.
Example 2:
If no digits are specified for –100.0, then
–100 (FFFFFF9C)
will be outputted as binary data.
N
If three digits are specified for 12.3456, then
3
[12.346 × 10 ] = 12346 (0000303A)
will be outputted as binary data.
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Example 1:
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
- Since all variables are saved as those having a decimal point, the necessary number of
decimal digits must be enclosed in brackets ([ ]).
All variables are handled as data of four bytes (32 bits), and each byte is outputted as binary
data in the order of the most significant byte first. Minus data is processed as the complement
for that data.
K
ZA
ri
al
- After the specified data has been outputted, the EOB (End Of Block) code is outputted in the
format of the appropriate ISO code.
5.
A
K
IM
Se
- Variables containing <empty> are interpreted as 0s.
Data output command DPRNT
ZA
Programming format:
Effective digits below decimal point
Effective digits above decimal point
Variable number
Character string
c+d8
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
DPRNT[1#v1[d1 c1]2#v2[c2]]
ht
Detailed description
C
op
yr
ig
- Output of character data or decimal output of variable data is performed in the format of ISO
codes.
- The designated character string is outputted directly in the ISO coded format.
Alphanumerics (A to Z, and 0 to 9) and/or special characters (+, –, , /) can be used. Of these
characters, only the asterisk () is outputted as a space code.
- Of the data contained in a variable, the necessary number of digits above the decimal point and
that of digits below the decimal point must each be enclosed in brackets ([ ]). The variable
data will then have its total specified number of digits, including the decimal point, outputted in
the ISO coded format in the order of the most significant digit first. No trailing zeros will be left
out in that case.
13-122
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
13-11-8 External output command (Output onto the local disk)
1.
Overview
External output macros can also be used to output data in text file format into the predetermined
directory on the local disk.
2.
Related parameters
- DPR14: Selection of an output destination port
Set DPR14 to “4” (Output onto the local disk) under OTHER on the DATA I/O PARAMETER
display.
er
ve
d
.
- DPR15: Number of lines in feed section
Set the required number of lines to be fed.
gh
ts
Maximum permissible file size: DPR8 × 100 (KB)
re
s
- DPR8: Output file size
Use this parameter to specify the maximum permissible output file size.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
However, the file size limit is 100 KB if the value in DPR8 is 0.
.A
ll
ri
A command for outputting a greater file will cause the alarm 1420 FILE SIZE LIMIT
EXCEEDED.
Note:
Output of a file of smaller size than the limit, however, may not be possible due to a
shortage of available area on the local disk.
o.
The DATA I/O PARAMETER display can be selected by tapping the [DATA I/O PARAM.] menu
item on the DATA I/O display.
Output file
K
ZA
K
IM
3.
A
Se
ri
al
N
For further details of the parameters, refer to the separate Parameter List/
Alarm List/M-code List.
A
ZA
The text file will be automatically outputted with a particular file name into the predetermined
directory.
M
Output directory: c:\ymw\M8Y\data\MC_sdg\print\
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
Output file name: print.txt
(A file of this name will be automatically created, if required, or the text data
will be added to the current contents of the file.)
13-123
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
File contents:
Given below on the right is an example of text file contents created by the execution of the
program shown on the left under the particular parameter settings.
[Program]
[Output example]
print.txt
G28XYZ
.
%
OOOOOOOOOOOO
XXXXXXXXXXXX
IIIIIIIIIIII
%
er
ve
d
POPEN
DPRNT[OOOOOOOOOOOO]
DPRNT[XXXXXXXXXXXX]
DPRNT[IIIIIIIIIIII]
PCLOS
gh
ts
re
s
G0X100.Y100.Z100.
M30
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
4.
ri
[Parameter]
DPR14: 4
DPR15: No setting
Related alarms
Message
887
TAPE I/O ERROR
–100
Argument 1
Argument 2
Argument 3
0
0
File write error
0
0
–112
File size too great
0
0
A
ZA
K
File open error
–111
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
No.
N
o.
The alarm given for text file output is described below.
13-124
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
13-11-9 Precautions
er
ve
d
.
Use of user macro commands allows a machining program to be created by combining arithmetic
operation, judgment, branchining, or other macro commands with conventional NC commands
such as move commands, M-, S-, T-commands, etc. The statement defined by these macro
commands and that of conventional NC commands are taken as a macro statement and an NC
execute statement, respectively. The treatment of a macro statement has no direct rerations with
machine control. Its treatment as short as possible is effective for shortening machining time.
Parallel processing of the NC execute statement and the macro statement becomes possible
according to the setting of bit 6 of parameter F93.
(It becomes possible to process all macro statements in batch form by setting the parameter bit
to OFF when machining the workpiece, or to execute the macro statements block-by-block by
setting the parameter bit to ON when checking the program. Therefore, set the parameter bit
according to your requirements.)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
Macro statements
ri
gh
ts
re
s
Sample program
N1 G91G28X0Y0Z0
N2 G92X0Y0Z0
N3 G00X–100.Y–100.
N4 #101=100.COS[210.]
N5 #102=100.SIN[210.]
N6 G01X#101Y#102F800
A macro statement refers to a statement that consists of the following blocks:
- Arithmetic operation command block (compassing the equal sign =)
- Control command block (compassing GOTO, DO END, etc.)
al
N
o.
- Macro call command block (compassing macro call or cancellation G-code commands G65,
G66, G66.1, or G67)
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
An NC execute statement refers to a non-macro statement.
13-125
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
The flow of processing of these two types of statements is shown below.
N1 N2
Program analysis
N3
N4
N4
Macroprogram statement
treatment
Parameter
OFF
N5
N2
N6
N7
N5
N3
N6
N7
Next command
N1
N2
N4
N5
N4
N1
N3 G00X–100.Y–100.
(Next command)
N6 G01X#101Y#102F800
K
ZA
Se
ri
al
N
o.
(In execution)
N4 #101=100.COS[210.]
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
(Next command)
A
N3 G00X–100.Y–100.
K
IM
(In execution)
Parameter
ON
N3
N6
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Machining program data is displayed as follows:
Parameter
OFF
N2
N7
.A
ll
In execution
ts
N3
Next command
gh
N2
N5
re
s
N4
N6 N7
.
N3
Macroprogram statement
treatment
NC statement
treatment
N6
er
ve
d
N1 N2
Program analysis
Parameter
ON
N3
In execution
ri
NC statement
treatment
13-126
N4, N5 and N6 are treated in parallel with NC
execution sentence of N3, and N6 is displayed as
next command because it is NC execution
sentence. When N4, N5, and N6 are analized
during NC execution sentence of N3, machine
control continues.
N4 is treated in parallel with the control of NC
execution sentence of N3, and is displayed as
next command.
After N3 is completed, N5 and N6 are analized so
the machine control is forced to wait by the
analyzing time of N5 and N6 before N6 can be
executed.
Serial No. 340839
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13
13-11-10 Specific examples of programming using user macros
The following three examples of programming are shown here:
Example 1: SIN curve
Example 2: Bolt-hole circle
Example 3: Grid
Example 1:
SIN curve
G65 Pp1 Aa1 Bb1 Cc1 Ff1
er
ve
d
.
Y (sin )
re
s
100.
A: Initial value 0°
B: Final value 360°
C: R of RSIN
F: Feed rate
0
180.
270.
360.
.A
ll
ri
90.
gh
ts
X
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
–100.
O9910 (Subprogram)
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
WHILE[#1LE#2]DO1
#10=#3SIN[#1]
Note
G90G1X#1Y#10F#9
#1=#1+10.
END1
M99
ZA
#1 = 0
#2 = 360.000
#3 = 100.000
#9 = 100.000
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
Local variable set
in argument
K
al
To subprogram
ri
G65P9910A0B360.C100.F100
N
o.
Main program
MEP172
13-127
Note: G90G01X#1Y[#3SIN[#1]]F#9
makes one block command available.
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
Example 2:
Bolt-hole circle
After hole data has been defined using fixed-cycle machining commands G72 to
G89, hole positions are to be designated using macro commands.
–X
Main program
x1
W
a1
y1
.
To subprogram
er
ve
d
G81Z–100.R50.F300
G65P9920Aa1Bb1Rr1Xx1Yy1
a1 : Start angle
b1 : Hole quantity
r1 : Radius
x1 : X-axis center position
y1 : Y-axis center position
–Y
O9920
0
#101
G90,G91 - Read-in
#102
Preceding coordinate
read-in
X
#103
Y
#104
Start angle
#111
WHILE[#101LT#2]DO1
o.
Note
ri
.A
ll
RadiusCOS [#111]
+ center coordinate X #120
RadiusSIN [#111]
+ center coordinate Y #121
#120
#122
#121
#123
01
3
Note
#120 = Hole position X coordinate
#121 = Hole position Y coordinate
#122 = X-axis absolute value
#123 = Y-axis absolute value
Yes
Mode judge G90, G91
#102 = 90
No
#120 – #103 #122
#122 = X-axis incremental value
#121 – #104 #123
#123 = Y-axis incremental value
#120
#103
X-axis present position renewal
#121
#104
Y-axis present position renewal
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
END1
M99
N
Yes
YA
N100 X#122Y#123
#101=#101+1
#111=#1+360.#101/#2
END
M
A
ZA
#103=#120
#104=#121
No
ZA
K
IM
Note
#101 Hole
quantity
#103 = X-axis present position
#104 = Y-axis present position
#111 = Start angle
A
Se
ri
al
#122=#120 #123=#121
IF[#102EQ90]GOTO100
#102 = G90 or G91
K
N
#120=#24+#18COS[#111]
#121=#25+#18SIN[#111]
#101 = Hole count
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Note
#122=#120–#103
#123=#121–#104
gh
ts
O9920 (Subprogram)
#101=0
#102=#4003
#103=#5001
#104=#5002
#111=#1
re
s
MEP173
Note:
The processing time can be reduced by
one-block reduced programming.
N100X#122Y#123
#101+1
#101
Y
360°#101/Hole quantity
#111 =
+ #1
#111
Drilling
command
Hole number count-up
#111 = Hole position angle
#111 =
13-128
Serial No. 340839
13
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
G28X Y Z
T1 M06
G90 G43 Z100. H01
G54 G00 X0 Y0
To subprogram
G81 Z-100. R3. F100 M03
G65 P9920X-500. Y-500. A0 B8R100.
G65 P9920X-500. Y-500. A30. B8R200.
G65 P9920X-500. Y-500. A60. B8R300.
W
–500.
–X
100.
–500.
200.
.
300.
gh
Grid
After hole data has been defined using fixed-cycle machining commands G72 to
G89, hole positions are to be designated using macro call commands.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
Example 3:
MEP174
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
–Y
G81 Zz1 Rr1 Ff1
G65Pp1 Xx1 Yy1 Ii1 Jj1 Aa1 Bb1
i1
W
o.
y1
K
al
N
j1
A
ZA
Subprogram is
shown on the
next page.
ri
: X-axis hole position
: Y-axis hole position
: X-axis distance
: Y-axis distance
: X direction hole quantity
: Y direction hole quantity
–Y
ZA
K
IM
Se
X
Y
I
J
A
B
x1
–X
YA
M
A
MEP175
100.
01
3
G28X Y Z
T1 M06
G90 G43 Z100. H01
G54 G00 X0 Y0
G81 Z–100. R3. F100M03
G65P9930 X0 Y0 I100. J–75. A5B3
100.
W
)2
–X
100.
ht
(c
–75.
op
yr
ig
–75.
To subprogram
C
G84 Z–90. R3. F250M03
G65P9930 X0 Y0 I–100. J–75. A5B3
–Y
–X
–100.
–Z
MEP176
13-129
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
O9930
O9930 (Subprogram)
#101=#24
#102=#25
#104=#10
#105=#1
#106=#2–1
#110=0
#111=0
#112=0
Start point X coordinate #101
Start point Y coordinate #102
Y-axis direction distance #104
X-axis hole quantity
#105
Y-axis hole quantity –1 #106
0 #110
0 #111
0 #112
Note
#101 = X-axis start point
#102 = Y-axis start point
#104 = Y direction distance
#105 = X-axis hole quanty
#106 = Y-axis hole quantity – 1
#110 = Y direction line count
#111 = Even/odd times judge
#112 = X-axis drilling direction
reverse switch
0 #113
X direction distance #103
#113 = X-axis distance initial
#103 = X direction distance
No
ri
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Yes
o.
N
(c
ZA
A
Yes
N10
#103 #113
X-axis drilling distance reset
N
100
#106 – 1 #106
0
#112
#110 + 1 #110
yr
op
C
Note:
The processing time can be reduced by oneblock reduced programming.
For even times (#111 = 0), X
distance is same as command.
For odd times (#111 = 1), X-axis
drilling direction reverse switch on
0 – #103 #103
1 #112
Y-axis hole quantity – 1
X-axis drilling direction reverse switch off
Y direction line count-up
ig
ht
No
#111 = 1
K
IM
ZA
A
M
01
3
YA
Note
X-axis drilling direction reverse
switch check
No
K
al
ri
Se
Note
)2
GOTO2
Drilling command
#112 = 1
IF[#106LT0]GOTO200
#111=#111AND1
X coordinates renewal
X direction hole quantity – 1
X#101 Y#102
N10 #113=#103
END1
#105=#1
#102=#102+#104
#111=#110
.A
ll
#101 + #113 #101
#105 –1 #105
Note
N100 #106=#106–1
#112=0
#110=#110+1
X direction hole drilling
completion check
Yes
Note
IF[#112EQ1]GOTO10
IF[#111NE1]GOTO10
#103=0–#103
#112=1
N
100
#105 > 0
N
WHILE[#105GT0]DO1
#101=#101+#113
#105=#105–1
X#101Y#102
ts
re
s
Note
gh
N2 #113=0
#103=#9
N200 M99
er
ve
d
.
N2
Yes
#106 < 0
Y direction hole drilling
completion check
END
No
#1 #105
#102 + #104 #102
#110 #111
#111AND 1 #111
13-130
X-axis hole quantity reset
Y coordinates renewal
Even times = 0
Odd times = 1
Serial No. 340839
13
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13-12 Geometric Commads
1.
Function and purpose
Even if it is difficult to find the crossing point of two lines using linear interpolation commands,
setting the slope of the first line and the absolute coordinates of the ending point of the second
line and its slope will allow the NC unit to calculate the coordinates of the ending point of the first
line and thus to control move commands.
Programming format
Specify the intended plane using G17, G18, or G19.
N1 G01 Aa1 Ff1
Specify the angle and speed for the first block.
N2 Xxe Zze Aa2 (a’2) Ff2
Specify the absolute coordinates of the ending point of the next block,
angles, and a speed.
er
ve
d
.
G18
ri
gh
ts
re
s
2.
.A
ll
?
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
a’2
N1
N2
a1
a2
Current position
(1st axis on the
selected plane)
Detailed description
K
ZA
K
IM
3.
MEP191
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Ending point (ze, xe)
M
A
ZA
The slope of a line denotes an angle relative to the plus (+) direction of the first axis (horizontal axis) on the selected plane. Assign the sign + for a counterclockwise direction (CCW),
or the sign – for a clockwise direction (CW).
YA
The range of the slope a must be –360.000° a +360.000°.
01
3
For the second block, the slope at either the starting point or the ending point can be set. The
NC unit will identify whether the specified slope is for the starting point or for the ending point.
ht
(c
)2
The coordinates of the ending point of the second block must be specified using absolute
data. Otherwise an alarm will result.
ig
Any speed can be specified for each block.
C
op
yr
An alarm will result if the angle of the crossing point of the two lines is 1 degree or less.
An alarm will result if the preselected plane for the first block is changed over at the second
block.
The geometric command function does not work if address A is to be used for an axis name
or for the No. 2 auxiliary function.
Single-block stop can be used at the ending point of the first block.
An alarm will result if the first block or the second block is not linear.
13-131
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
4.
Correlationships to other functions
Geometric command can be set following a linear angle command.
N1 Xx2Aa1
N2 Aa2
N3 Xx3Zz3Aa3
(x3, z3)
a3
N3
?
N2
(x2, z2)
a2
N1
a1
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
MEP192
er
ve
d
.
(x1, z1)
13-132
Serial No. 340839
13
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13-13 Corner Chamfering and Corner Rounding Commands
Automatic chamfering (or rounding) at any angle becomes possible by adding characters “,C_”
or “,R_” at the end of the first block of the two blocks that use only lines to generate corners.
13-13-1 Corner chamfering ( ,C_)
1.
Function and purpose
The sections before and after virtual corners, for which it is assumed that no chamfering is to
take place, are chamfered over a distance which is specified in C_.
.
Programming format
er
ve
d
2.
N100 G01 X_Y_,C_
Chamfering will be executed at the crossing point of N100 and
N200.
re
s
N200 G01 X_Y_
.A
ll
Sample program
N
G91G01X100.,C10.
X100.Y100.
[1]
[2]
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
3.
ri
gh
ts
Distance from the virtual corner to the starting or ending point of
chamfering
ZA
K
[2]
A
Y100.0
K
IM
Se
Virtual corner
crossing point
ri
al
N
Chamfering
ending point
o.
Y-axis
A
ZA
Chamfering
starting point
M
10.0
YA
[1]
01
3
10.0
X100.0
X100.0
ht
(c
)2
X-axis
op
yr
ig
MEP193
Detailed description
C
4.
The starting point of the next block of corner chamfering is a virtual corner crossing point.
If character C is not preceded by a comma (,), that command will be regarded as a C-code
command.
If one block contains both “,C_” and “,R_”, only the last issued command will become valid.
Tool offset data is calculated for the shape existing after completion of corner chamfering.
Scaling, if already set, also works for the amount of corner chamfering.
13-133
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
Alarm 912 NO MOTION COMMAND AFTER R/C results if the command in the block immediately succeeding that of the corner-chamfering command is not a linear-machining
command.
Alarm 913 INCORRECT R/C COMMAND results if the distance of movement, specified in the
corner-chamfering command block, is less than the amount of chamfering.
Alarm 914 INCORRECT COMMAND AFTER R/C results if the distance of movement,
specified in the block immediately succeeding the corner chamfering command block, is less
than the amount of chamfering.
.
Alarm 911 CORNER R/C OPTION NOT FOUND results if the command in the block immediately succeeding that of the corner chamfering command is an arc-machining command.
Function and purpose
re
s
1.
er
ve
d
13-13-2 Corner rounding ( ,R_)
N
Programming format
N100 G01 X_Y_,R_
Rounding will be executed at the crossing point of
N100 and N200.
N200 G01 X_Y_
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
2.
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
The virtual corners to be used when it is assumed that no corner rounding is to take place for the
corners that each consist of only lines, are rounded using the arcs whose radii are specified
using R_.
Radius of the arc for corner rounding
o.
Sample program
ZA
K
IM
A
ZA
ri
Se
Y-axis
K
N
G91G01X100.,R10.
X100.Y100.
[1]
[2]
al
3.
M
A
Corner rounding
ending point
Y100.0
)2
01
3
YA
[2]
Virtual corner
crossing point
R10.0
[1]
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
Corner rounding
starting point
X-axis
X100.0
X100.0
MEP194
4.
Detailed description
The starting point of the next block of corner rounding is a virtual corner crossing point.
13-134
Serial No. 340839
13
PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
If character R is not preceded by a comma (,), that command will be regarded as an R-code
command.
If one block contains both “,C_” and “,R_”, only the last issued command will become valid.
Tool offset data is calculated for the shape existing after completion of corner rounding.
Scaling, if already set, also works for the amount of corner rounding.
Alarm 912 NO MOTION COMMAND AFTER R/C results if the command in the block immediately succeeding that of the corner-rounding command is not a linear-machining
command.
Alarm 913 INCORRECT R/C COMMAND results if the distance of movement, specified in the
corner-rounding command block, is less than the amount of rounding.
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Alarm 914 INCORRECT COMMAND AFTER R/C results if the distance of movement,
specified in the block immediately succeeding the corner-rounding command block, is less
than the amount of rounding.
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
Alarm 911 CORNER R/C OPTION NOT FOUND results if the command in the block immediately succeeding that of the corner-rounding command is an arc-machining command.
13-135
ht
ig
yr
op
C
01
3
)2
(c
K
ZA
al
ri
Se
A
K
IM
ZA
A
M
YA
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
N
ts
gh
ri
.
er
ve
d
re
s
Serial No. 340839
13 PROGRAM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
13-136 E
Serial No. 340839
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14-1 Fundamental Machine Coordinate System, Workpiece Coordinate Systems,
and Local Coordinate Systems
re
s
er
ve
d
.
The fundamental machine coordinate system, which is a fixed coordinate system for the machine,
is used to designate the tool change position, stroke end position, etc. that are predetermined for
the machine.
Workpiece coordinate systems are the coordinate systems to be used by a programmer when
creating programs. These coordinate systems have their origins set at reference points on
workpieces. Local coordinate systems are the coordinate systems to be set on the workpiece
coordinate systems to facilitate the creating of partial-machining programs.
R#1
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
(1st) reference point
W3
M
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
Local coordinate system
o.
W4
W2
ZA
W1
M
A
Fundamental machine coordinate system
YA
R#1
W2
ht
(c
)2
01
3
W1
C
op
yr
ig
M
W1 to W4: Workpiece coordinate system 1 to 4
MEP195
14-1
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14-2 Machine Zero Point and Second, Third, and Fourth Reference Points
The machine zero point refers to a position that acts as a reference point for the fundamental
machine coordinate system. That is, the machine zero point is a point specific to the machine,
determined by return to the reference point (zero point).
The second, third, and fourth reference points (zero point) are the points whose positions in the
fundamental machine coordinate system are parameter-preset.
Fundamental machine
coordinate system (G53)
Machine zero point
er
ve
d
.
2nd ref. point
re
s
x
1st ref. point
.A
ll
ri
3rd ref. point
gh
ts
y
(X2, Y2)
y
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
(X1, Y1)
x
4th ref. point
Local coordinate
system (G52)
N
o.
y
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
Workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59)
x
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
MEP196
14-2
Serial No. 340839
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14
14-3 Fundamental Machine Coordinate System Selection: G53
1.
Function and purpose
The fundamental machine coordinate system is used to designate the tool change position,
stroke end position, etc. that are predetermined for the machine.
Command G53 and its succeeding coordinate words move the tool at the rate of rapid traverse to
the designated position on the fundamental machine coordinate system.
2.
Programming format
er
ve
d
Detailed description
re
s
3.
.
Selection of the fundamental machine coordinate system:
(G90) G53 Xx Yy Zz (: Additional axis)
ri
gh
ts
- When power is turned on, the fundamental machine coordinate system will be set according to
the reference point (zero point) return position which is determined by a manual or automatic
reference point (zero point) return command.
- Command G53 is valid only for designated blocks.
.A
ll
- The fundamental machine coordinate system is not updated by command G92.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
- During the incremental data command mode (G91), command G53 moves the tool on the
selected coordinate system according to incremental data.
- Setting of command G53 does not cancel the tool radius compensation amount of the
designated axis.
K
ZA
A
(500, 500)
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
- The coordinate data of the first reference point represents the distance from point 0 on the
fundamental machine coordinate system to the reference point (zero point) return position.
–X
M
Reference point (zero point)
return position (#1)
M
A
ZA
R#1
–Y
First reference point coordinate values: X = +500
Y = +500
(c
)2
01
3
YA
Zero point of the fundamental
machine coordinate system
C
op
yr
ig
ht
MEP197
14-3
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14-4 Coordinate System Setting: G92
1.
Function and purpose
Setting of command G92 allows absolute coordinate system and current position display data to
be newly preset exactly as programmed, without ever having to move the machine.
2.
Programming format
G92 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 1
3.
(: Additional axis)
Detailed description
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
- After power-on, return to the reference point is initially performed using watchdogs. Coordinate
systems are set automatically on completion of return.
R
R, M
ri
gh
Fundamental machine coordinate system
.A
ll
Power-on
position
Reference
point return
100.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Reference
point return
completion
N
Power-on
position
W(G54)
100.
200.
300.
N
o.
Workpiece
Coordinate system
[M-Pos.]
X
0.000
Y
0.000
[W-Pos.]
X 300.000
Y 200.000
K
ZA
A
MEP198
K
IM
Se
ri
al
M-Pos. : Current position in the Machine coordinate system
W-Pos. : Current position in the Workpiece coordinate system
ZA
Fundamental machine and workpiece coordinate systems are established at predetermined
positions.
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
- Setting of command G92 allows absolute (workpiece) coordinate system and current position
display data to be newly preset exactly as programmed, without ever having to move the
machine.
(c
R, M
op
yr
ig
ht
200.
Coordinate
system setting
R, M
C
100.
50.
Tool
100.
[M-Pos.]
X –200.000
Y –150.000
[W-Pos.]
X
100.000
Y
50.000
–100.
Tool
[M-Pos.]
X 0.000
Y 0.000
[W-Pos.]
X 0.000
Y 0.000
P(G54') 100.
–50.
200.
W(G54)
W(G54)
100.
200.
300.
For example, if G92X0Y0; is set, a new workpiece coordinate system will be established.
MEP199
14-4
Serial No. 340839
14
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14-5 Automatic Coordinate System Setting
The automatic coordinate system setting function allows various coordinate systems to be
generated according to parameters previously set on the operation panel when the first manual
reference point return or watchdog-based reference point return is completed.
Use the automatically set coordinate systems when creating machining programs.
y1
y2
re
s
y3
er
ve
d
x1
.
Machine zero point
Fundamental machine coordinates system (G53)
x2
ts
First reference
point
gh
W1 (G54)
ri
W2 (G55)
.A
ll
W3 (G56)
N
x3
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
y4
W6 (G59)
W5 (G58)
W4 (G57)
K
MEP200
ZA
Se
ri
al
N
o.
x4
K
IM
A
- This function generates the following coordinate systems:
1) Fundamental machine coordinate system (G53)
ZA
2) Workpiece coordinate systems (G54 through G59)
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
- Parameters for the NC unit must be the distance data from the origin of the fundamental
machine coordinate system. You must therefore determine where on the fundamental machine
coordinate system the first reference point is to be set, and then set the zero point of the
workpiece coordinate system.
14-5
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14-6 Reference Point Return: G28, G29
1.
Function and purpose
G28 command first performs a G00 (rapid) positioning to the specified intermediate position
along the specified axes, and then a returning to the first reference point at the rapid feed rate
independently along each specified axis.
Second reference point
(0, 0, 0, 0)
er
ve
d
.
G29 command first performs a returning to the intermediate point of the last G28 or G30
command at the rapid feed rate independently along each specified axis, and then a G00
(rapid) positioning to the specified position.
Machine zero point
G30P2
gh
ts
(x3, y3, z3, 3)
re
s
Reference point
ri
G28
.A
ll
G28
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
G29
(x1, y1, z1, 1)
Starting point
G30
Interm. point
ZA
K
N
al
Se
ri
(x2, y2, z2, 2)
G29
o.
G30P3
G30P4
Third reference point
K
IM
Programming format
(: Additional axis) [Automatic reference point return]
M
A
G28 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 1
MEP201
ZA
2.
A
Fourth reference point
YA
G29 Xx2 Yy2 Zz2 2
Detailed description
01
3
3.
(: Additional axis) [Start point return]
Command G28 is equivalent to the following commands:
)2
1.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
G00 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 1
G00 Xx3 Yy3 Zz3 3
where x3, y3, z3 and 3 denote the coordinates of the reference point, that are parameter-set
as the distance from the zero point of the fundamental machine coordinate system.
2.
Axes that have not been returned to the reference point in manual mode after power-on are
returned using the watchdog method. In that case, the direction of return is regarded as the
same as the sign-designated direction. The direction of return will not be checked if it is of
the straight-return type. For the second time onward, the axes are returned at high speed to
the reference point that was stored into the memory by execution of the first return
command the direction is not checked at this time, either.
3.
When reference point (zero point) return is completed, a return complete output signal will
be output and “#1” will be displayed in the field of the axis name.
14-6
Serial No. 340839
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
4.
14
Command G29 is equivalent to the following commands:
G00 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 1
G00 Xx2 Yy2 Zz2 2
Independent rapid feed on each axis
(not the same as for G0).
where x1, y1, z1 and 1 are the coordinates of the middle point specified by the last G28 or
G30 command.
An alarm will result if G29 is executed without any preceding G28 (automatic reference point
return command) after turning-on.
6.
Under machine locked status or Z-axis cancelled status, any movements of the Z-axis up to
the middle point are ignored and only subsequent positioning is performed.
7.
The coordinates of the intermediate point (x1, y, z1, 1) must be given according to the type of
dimensional data input (G90 or G91).
8.
G29 command can refer to both G28 and G30, and the positioning along the specified axes
is performed through the intermediate point of the last G28 or G30 command.
9.
The tool offset values are temporarily canceled, or used even, in return movement to the
reference point according as bit 2 of parameter F94 is set to “0” or “1.”
Sample programs
N
Example : G28Xx1Zz1 From point A to reference point
.A
ll
4.
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
5.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
G30Xx2Zz2 From point B to second reference point
G29Xx3Zz3 From point C to point D
Reference point (#1)
Current position
(x2, z2)
N
K
D
B
(x3, z3)
A
ZA
al
ri
G30
G29
R2
C
Second reference point
(#2)
MEP204
ZA
K
IM
Se
G28
New interm. point
o.
R1
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
Old interm. point
14-7
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14-7 Second, Third, or Fourth Reference Point Return: G30
1.
Function and purpose
The returning to the second, third, or fourth reference point can be programmed by setting “G30
P2 (P3, P4)”.
Second reference point
Reference point
G30P2
G28
er
ve
d
.
G28
(x1, y1, z1, 1)
Interm. point
G30
ts
Starting
point
re
s
G29
gh
G30P3
.A
ll
ri
G30P4
G29
Programming format
G30 P2 (P3, P4) Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 1
o.
(: Additional axis)
N
Detailed description
2.
Return to the second, third or fourth reference point is performed through the specified
intermediate point like the return to the first reference point.
3.
The coordinates of the second, third, or fourth reference point represent the positions
specific to the machine. Display machine parameters M5, M6 and M7 on the screen to
check the coordinates concerned.
4.
A command of G29 after return to the second, third or fourth reference point is carried out
through the intermediate point of the last command for return to the reference point.
A
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
K
Use address P to specify the number of the required reference point (P2, P3 or P4). Return
to the second reference point is automatically selected if P-command is omitted or zero, one,
five or a greater integer is set at address P.
al
1.
ri
3.
MEP205
ZA
2.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Fourth reference point Third reference point
(c
R#1
First reference point
ig
ht
–X
C
op
yr
Intermediate point
(x1, y1)
G30P3Xx1Yy1
R#3
G29Xx2Yy2
(x2, y2)
–Y
MEP206
Third reference point
14-8
Serial No. 340839
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
5.
14
Tool radius compensation function is temporarily cancelled during return to a reference
point in the offsetting plane and made valid again for a return (by G29) from there. The
cancellation and resumption of offsetting dimensions occur during movement from the
intermediate point to the reference point and vice versa.
R#3
–X
Third reference point
Intermediate point
Tool center path
Program path
G30P3Xx1Yy1
G29Xx2Yy2
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
(x1, y1)
gh
–Y
(x2, y2)
.A
ll
ri
MEP207
The tool offset values are temporarily canceled, or used even, in return movement to the
2nd, 3rd or 4th reference point according as bit 2 of parameter F94 is set to “0” or “1.”
7.
For the second, third, or fourth reference point return under machine locked status,
movement from the middle point to the reference point is skipped. The next block is
executed after the designated axis has arrived at the intermediate point.
8.
For the second, third, or fourth reference point return in the mirror image mode, the mirror
image is valid for movement from the starting point to the intermediate point and the axis
moves in an opposite direction to the designated one. For movement from the intermediate
point to the reference point, however, the mirror image becomes invalid and thus the axis
moves to the reference point.
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
6.
R#3
Third reference point
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
–X
–Y
G30P3Xx1Yy1
ht
(c
)2
X axis mirror image
yr
ig
Without mirror image
C
op
MEP208
14-9
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14-8 Reference Point Check Command: G27
1.
Function and purpose
G27 command performs a rapid positioning to the specified position, checks the final position for
agreement with the specified reference point and, upon confirmation of the agreement, outputs a
reference point return complete signal to the machine side as is the case with G28. For a
machining program, therefore, of which the starting and the ending positions are the reference
pont, this function is useful for checking whether the returning, i.e. the program itself, has been
correctly executed to the end.
Programming format
G27
er
ve
d
.
2.
Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Pp1
3.
ts
gh
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Check command
.A
ll
ri
P1: First reference point check
P2: Second reference point check
P3: Third reference point check
P4: Fourth reference point check
Return control axis
re
s
Check No.
Detailed description
The first reference point check will occur if the P code is omitted.
N
o.
The number of axes for which reference point check can be done at the same time depends
on the number of simultaneously controllable axes.
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
An alarm will result if the designated reference point is not the final position on completion of
this command.
14-10
Serial No. 340839
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14
14-9 Programmed Coordinate Rotation: G68/G69
Programmed coordinate rotation is performed to rotate the machining shape itself on the
workpiece by rotating the workpiece coordinate system.
Yp
Dm
Ym
Cm
Em
Ep
Dp
Fm
Cp
er
ve
d
.
Fp
Bm
re
s
Xm
Ap
ts
Am
.A
ll
ri
gh
Bp
Xp
N
W
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Zero point of co- 0
ordinate system
(Center of rotation)
Programmed coordinate path:
MEP162
N
o.
Ap Bp Cp Dp Ep Fp Ap
K
ri
al
Machine coordinate path after coordinate rotation:
1.
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
Am Bm Cm Dm Em Fm Am
Correlationships to other functions, and precautions
Coordinate rotation is valid only for the automatic operation modes (tape operation, memory
operation, and MDI); it is invalid for manual rapid traverse, handle feed, or reference point
(zero point) return, whether it is automatic or manual.
M
A
ZA
1.
01
3
YA
Note 1: Even in the automatic operation mode, rotation does not occur during creeping
feed for one-way positioning.
Calculation for offset processing is performed lastly. That is, coordinate rotate processing
using the designated program is performed and tool radius compensation, tool length
offsetting, tool position offsetting, etc. follow.
C
op
yr
ig
2.
ht
(c
)2
Note 2: If manual interruption is made (on the axes related to the coordinate rotation),
automatic operation must not be executed for any subsequent absolute data
commands. Axis movements may not describe the desired path.
3.
Higher priority is given to coordinate rotation than to the mirror image function. If these two
functions are selected, therefore, coordinate rotation will precede mirror image processing.
4.
The current positions (POSITION items on the screen) represent the movements existing
after coordinate rotation. If coordinate rotate processing is carried out for a single-axis
command, therefore, simultaneous dual-axis movements will be displayed in general.
14-11
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
2.
Programming format
GnG68 __R_
re
s
er
ve
d
.
n:
Plane selection code 17, 18, or 19
, : Coordinates of the center of rotation [Of the three axes (X, Y, Z), specify any two that
correspond to the selected plane.]
R:
Angle of rotation (positive values for counterclockwise rotation)
Set an angle from –360.000 to +360.000 degrees in 0.001 degree steps.
ri
gh
ts
+R
MEP163
N
.A
ll
(, )
Detailed description
1.
The plane selection command code (G17, G18 or G19) need not be included in the block of
G68; it will become valid even if given before the G68 block.
2.
The position where the G68 command is executed becomes the center of rotation if the
coordinates concerned (, ) are omitted.
3.
The absolute data input mode must always be used for rotational center coordinates (, ).
For the angle of rotation (R), either the absolute data input mode or the incremental data
input mode is to be used, depending on whether G90 or G91 has been issued.
4.
If coordinate rotation command is given in the mode of coordinate rotation, that command
will be processed as a command for changing the center and angle of coordinate rotation.
5.
Since program coordinate rotation is a function related to the workpiece coordinate system,
the relationship between the fundamental machine coordinate system and the as-rotated
workpiece coordinate system is as shown in the diagram below.
K
ZA
Workp. coord. sys.
Workp. coord. sys.
R
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
3.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
G69: (Coordinate rotate cancellation) This command code can be included in any block,
whether independent from or together with other command codes.
C
R
Workp. coord. sys.
R
Fundamental machine coordinate system
MEP164
6.
Do not use G68 (Programmed coordinate rotation) together with M98 (Figure rotation);
otherwise the alarm 850 G68 AND M98 COMMANDS SAME BLOCK is raised.
14-12
Serial No. 340839
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14
14-10 Workpiece Coordinate System Setting and Selection: (G92) G54 to G59
1.
Function and purpose
- Workpiece coordinate systems are set to facilitate creation of a workpiece machining program
having its origin set at a machining reference point for the intended workpiece. Commands G54
through G59 move the designated axis to the designated position on the workpiece coordinate
system corresponding to the command code number. These six types of commands generate
respective workpiece coordinate systems.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Selecting a workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59)
(G90) G54 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 1 (: Additional axis)
.A
ll
Programming format
N
2.
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
- Command G92 can be used to modify the current workpiece coordinate system in order that
the current tool position be indicated by the specified coordinates. (The current tool position
refers to a position that has incorporated tool radius compensation, tool length offset, and tool
position offset data.)
Command G92 also generates a virtual machine coordinate system according to which the
current tool position is indicated by the specified coordinates. (The current tool position refers
to a position that has incorporated tool radius compensation, tool length offset, and tool position
offset data.)
Setting the workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59)
(G54) G92 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 1 (: Additional axis)
o.
Detailed description
Tool radius compensation data for the designated axis is not cancelled by the selection of a
new workpiece coordinate system using commands G54 to G59.
2.
The coordinate system corresponding to G54 will always be selected upon turning-on.
3.
Commands G54 through G59 are modal commands (of group 12).
4.
Command G92 only moves the workpiece coordinate system.
5.
The workpiece origins (reference points) of G54 to G59 must be externally preset with
reference to the fundamental machine coordinate system.
N
1.
K
ZA
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
A
Se
ri
al
3.
01
3
(#1) Reference point (zero point)
Return position
M
–X (G54)
Zero point of the fundamental machine
coordinate system
W1
–X (G55)
G54 reference point
–Y
(G54)
W2
–Y
(G55)
G55 reference point
Setting on the WORK OFFSET display
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
–X
R#1
G54
–Y
6.
G55
X = –500
Y = –500
X = –2000
Y = –1000
MEP209
Settings of workpiece origin can be updated repeatedly (manually or by programming “G10
L2 Pp1 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1”).
14-13
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
7.
New workpiece coordinate system 1 (G54) can be generated by setting G92 during the
mode of G54. At the same time, other workpiece coordinate systems 2 through 6 (G55
through G59) are shifted parallel to the new workpiece coordinate system 1.
R#1
(#1) Reference point (zero point)
Return position
M
–X
Zero point of the fundamental
machine coordinate system
[M]
–X
Virtual machine coordinate zero point by G92
–X (G54)
er
ve
d
Old workpiece coordinate system 2 (G55)
W2
–X (G54’)
–Y (G54)
–Y (G55)
New workpiece coordinate system 2 (G55)
ts
[W2]
re
s
New workpiece coordinate system 1 (G54)
[W1]
–X (G55’)
.
Old workpiece coordinate system 1 (G54)
W1
–X (G55)
gh
–Y
–Y
N
–Y (G55’)
.A
ll
ri
–Y (G54’)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
MEP210
K
A
After power has been turned on, the fundamental machine coordinate system and workpiece coordinate systems will be set automatically according to the presettings when the
first automatic (G28) or manual reference point return is completed.
[1]
[2]
[3]
G28X0Y0
G53X–100.Y–50.
G53X0Y0
)2
01
3
YA
Example 1:
A
Sample programs
M
4.
ZA
K
IM
8.
ZA
Se
ri
al
N
o.
A virtual machine coordinate system is also formed in accordance with shifting of workpiece
coordinate system by G92.
After power has been turned on, the virtual machine coordinate system will coincide with the
fundamental machine coordinate system by the first automatic (G28) or manual reference
point return.
When a virtual machine coordinate system is generated, new workpiece coordinate systems
will be set by using the preset origins with reference to the virtual machine coordiate system.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
R#1
–X
(#1) Reference point (zero point)
Return position
[1]
[2]
[3]
M
Current position
–Y
MEP211
If the coordinate data of the first reference point is 0 (zero), the zero point (origin) of the
fundamental machine coordinate system and the reference point return position (#1) will agree.
14-14
Serial No. 340839
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
Example 2: [1] G28X0Y0
[2] G90G00G53X0Y0
[3] G54X–500.Y–500.
[4] G01G91X–500.F100
[5] Y–500.
[6] X+500.
14
[7] Y+500.
[8] G90G00G55X0Y0
[9] G01X–500.F200
[10] X0Y–500.
[11] G90G28X0Y0
(#1) Reference point (zero point)
Return position
[1]
–1500
–500
W1
[5]
[11]
–1000
[7]
–1500
ri
gh
[6]
MEP212
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
–Y
(G54)
–Y
(G55)
ts
[4]
re
s
[8]
[10]
–500
[3]
W2
[9]
er
ve
d
M
–X (G54)
–X (G55)
[2]
.
Current position
Same machining as is given in Example 2 after shifting through (–500, –500) the
workpiece coordinate system of G54 (provided that [3] through [10] in Example 2
have been registered in subprogram O1111):
K
(Not required if #1 ref. pt. = machine origin)
Shift amount of workpiece coordinate system
New workpiece coordinate system setting
A
ZA
ri
al
N
o.
G28X0Y0
G90G00G53X0Y0
G54X–500.Y–500.
G92X0Y0
M98P1111
K
IM
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Se
Example 3:
(#1) Reference point (zero point)
Return position
ZA
[1]
[2]
Current position
M
A
–X
Old G55 coordinate system
YA
[3]
[4] [3]
01
3
–X (G55) –X (G54’)
New G55 coordinate system
)2
M
–X (G54)
Old G54 coordinate system
New G54 coordinate system
W1
W2
–Y
(G54)
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
–X (G55’)
–Y
(G55’)
–Y
(G55)
–Y
(G54’)
–Y
Note :
MEP213
If blocks [3] through [5] are used repeatedly, reference point return command G28
must be set at the end of the program since the workpiece coordinate systems will shift
each time those blocks are executed.
14-15
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
Example 4:
A.
If one and the same machining is to be done for each of six identical workpieces
placed on the coordinate systems of G54 through G59:
Setting of workpiece origins
X = –100.000
X = –100.000
X = –500.000
X = –500.000
X = –900.000
X = –900.000
Workpiece 1
2
3
4
5
6
N
K
ZA
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
Y–5.Z–150.R–95.F40
Y–125.
Y–175.
Y–125.
A
Positioning program (Main program)
At power-on
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
G28X0Y0Z0
N1 G90G54M98P100
N2
G55M98P100
N3
G57M98P100
N4
G56M98P100
N5
G58M98P100
N6
G59M98P100
N7 G28X0Y0Z0
N8 M02
%
ht
ig
yr
op
C
.A
ll
14-16
er
ve
d
re
s
ri
gh
ts
Face milling
Drilling 1
Drilling 2
Drilling 3
Drilling 4
o.
N6G98G84X–125.
X–175.
X–125.
X–75.
G80
M99
C.
Positioning
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
O100
N1G90G00G43X–50.Y–50.Z–100.H10
N2G01X–200.F50
Y–200.
X–50.
Y–50.
N3G28X0Y0Z0
TM06
N4G98G81X–125. Y–75.Z–150.R–95.F40
X–175. Y–125.
X–125. Y–175.
X–75. Y–125.
G80
N5G28X0Y0Z0
.
Machining program (Subprogram)
N
B.
Y = –100.000 ......... G54
Y = –500.000 ......... G55
Y = –100.000 ......... G56
Y = –500.000 ......... G57
Y = –100.000 ......... G58
Y = –500.000 ......... G59
Tapping 1
Tapping 2
Tapping 3
Tapping 4
Serial No. 340839
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
900 mm
500 mm
–X
–X
–X
G58
200 mm
175
125
–X
G56
W5
0
100
M
100 mm
75
50
G54 W1
W3
75
175
50
1
125
2
200
4
500 mm
3
(Workpiece 1)
–Y
–Y
re
s
–Y
.
(Workpiece 3)
er
ve
d
(Workpiece 5)
G55
W4
W2
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
W6
ts
–X
G57
gh
–X
G59
ri
–X
(Workpiece 6)
(Workpiece 4)
(Workpiece 2)
–Y
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
–Y
14-17
14
–Y
–Y
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14-11 Additional Workpiece Coordinate System Setting and Selection: G54.1
1.
Function and purpose
In addition to the six standard systems G54 to G59, up to 300 sets of workpiece origin data can
be used to facilitate program creation.
Note 1: Local coordinate system setting is not available in G54.1 mode.
Note 2: Setting a G52-command during G54.1 mode will cause the alarm 949 NO G52 IN
G54.1 MODE.
Programming format
Selection of a workpiece coordinate system
G54.1 Pn
(n = 1 to 300)
re
s
A.
er
ve
d
.
2.
G54.1P48 Selection of P48 system
ts
Example:
Omission of P and setting of “P0” function the same as “P1”. Setting a value other than
integers from 0 to 300 at address P causes the alarm 809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT.
N
Movement in a workpiece coodinate system
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
G54.1Pn ( n = 1 to 300)
G90 Xx Yy Zz
G54.1P1
G90X0Y0Z0
N
Setting of workpiece origin data
al
(n = 1 to 300)
ZA
ri
G10 L20 Pn Xx Yy Zz
G90G10L20P30X–255.Y–50.
K
IM
Se
Example:
A
C.
Selection of P1 system
Movement to P1-system origin (0, 0, 0)
o.
Example:
K
B.
M
Remarks on omission of P and/or L
01
3
A.
(c
)2
G10 L20 Pn Xx Yy Zz
op
yr
ig
ht
G10 L20 Xx Yy Zz
C
Data at addresses X and Y are added to data
of P30-system origin.
YA
Detailed description
Data at addresses X and Y are set as data of
P30-system origin.
A
ZA
G91G10L20P30X–3.Y–5.
3.
.A
ll
ri
gh
Note:
When n = 1 to 300: Correct setting of data for Pn-system origin
Otherwise:
Alarm 809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT
Correct setting of workpiece origin data for the current system, except
for G54- to G59-system (in which case: Alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT)
G10 Pn Xx Yy Zz
Correct setting of workpiece origin data for the current system
G10 Xx Yy Zz
Correct setting of workpiece origin data for the current system
14-18
Serial No. 340839
14
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
B.
Precautions for programming
Do not set together in a block of G54.1 or L20 any G-code that can refer to address P.
Such G-codes are for example:
G04 Pp
G30 Pp
G72 to G89
G65 Pp, M98 Pp
Dwell
Reference-point return
Fixed cycle
Subprogram call
Local coordinate system setting is not available in G54.1 mode. Setting a G52 command
during G54.1 mode will cause the alarm 949 NO G52 IN G54.1 MODE.
Related system variables
re
s
C.
er
ve
d
.
Do not give a command of G49 in the same block with G54.1; otherwise an alam will be
raised (822 ILLEGAL MODAL).
gh
ts
The origin data of additional workpiece coordinate systems are assigned to system variables as
listed-up in the following table.
The total number of controllable axes depends on the machine specifications.
ri
Note:
P1
#70001
to
#70016
P2
#70021
to
#70036
or
1st axis
to
16th axis
P1
#7001
to
#7016
P2
#7021
to
#7036
.A
ll
16th axis
N
to
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
1st axis
:
:
:
:
:
#75961
to
#75976
P300
#75981
to
#75996
P47
#7921
to
#7936
P48
#7941
to
#7956
N
P299
o.
:
K
ZA
or
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
70000 + 20 (n – 1) + k
(n = 1 to 300, k = 1 to 16)
A
Se
ri
al
The variable number for the k-th axis origin of the “Pn” coordinate system can be calculated as
follows:
14-19
7000 + 20 (n – 1) + k
(n = 1 to 48, k = 1 to 16)
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
Sample programs
Consecutive setting of origin data for all the 48 sets of additional workpiece coordinate
system
480
470
460
30
20
10
P1
10
P2
20
P3
ri
gh
ts
re
s
30
.
1.
er
ve
d
4.
460
N
.A
ll
P46
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
P47
480
K
ZA
Se
ri
al
N
o.
P48
470
Setting in format “G10L20PpXxYyZz”
O100
#100=1
P-No. initial.
ZA
K
IM
A
Setting in assignment of variables
O200
G90
#100=7001
Sys.-var.-No. initial.
#101=10.
#102=1
Counter initial.
Origin setting WHILE[#102LT49]DO1
P-No. count-up #103=0
Counter initial.
WHILE[#103LT2]DO2
#[#100]=#101
Sys.-var. Setting
#100=#100+1
Sys.-var.-No. count-up
#103=#103+1
Counter count-up
END2
#100=#100+19
#101=#101+10.
#102=#102+1
END1
M30
%
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
#101=10.
WHILE[#100LT49]DO1
G90G10L20P#100X#101Y#101
#100=#100+1
#101=#101+10.
END1
M30
%
14-20
Serial No. 340839
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
2.
14
Consecutive application of all the 48 sets of additional workpiece coordinate system
Provided that preparatory setting of origin data in P1 to P48 is completed in accordance with
the 48 workpieces fixed on the table in the arrangement shown in the figure below:
P08
P06
P07
P04
P02
P03
P01
P09
P11
P13
P12
P15
P14
P16
P22
P20
P21
P18
P19
P17
P25
P27
P29
P28
P31
P30
P32
P40
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
P26
.A
ll
ri
P23
gh
P24
ts
re
s
P10
er
ve
d
.
P05
P38
P37
P39
P41
P43
P36
P34
P35
P45
P44
P47
P46
P48
K
ZA
A
A
M
01
3
)2
(c
ht
ig
C
op
yr
Profile
ZA
K
IM
Se
O1001 (Subprg.)
Reference-pt. return
G43X–10.Y–0.Z–100.H10
P-No. initial.
G01X–0.
Absolute data input
Y–30.
Repeat while P-No.<49
X–10.
Wpc. coordn. sys. Setting Y–10.
Subprogram call
G00G40Z10.
P-No. count-up
G98G81X–20.Y–15.Z–150.R5.F40
X–25.Y–20.
Reset to reference-pt.
X–20.Y–25.
X–15.Y–20.
G80
M99
%
YA
O1000 (Main prg.)
G28XYZ
#100=1
G90
WHILE[#100LT49]DO1
G54.1P#100
M98P1001
#100=#100+1
END1
G28Z
G28XY
M02
%
ri
al
N
o.
P42
P33
14-21
Drilling
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
3.
Application of additional systems via transmission into G54 to G59
Provided that preparatory setting of origin data in P1 to P24 is completed in accordance with
the 24 sections of a workpiece fixed on the rotary table as shown in the figure below:
P3
P20
P1
P19
P2
P21
P23
Y
Z
P5
.
P6
er
ve
d
P22
P4
P24
re
s
X
N
O2001 (Origin-data transference)
#2=5221
Init.-var.-No. of 1. G-sys.
#3=[#1–1] 20+7001 Init.-var.-No. of 1. P-sys.
#5=0
Sys.-qty-counter cleared
WHILE[#5LT6]DO1
Check f. sys.-qty.
#6=#2
1.-ax.-var.-No. of receiver
#7=#3
1.-ax.-var.-No. of transm.
#4=0
Axis-qty-counter cleared
WHILE[#4LT6]DO2
Check f. axis-qty.
#[#6]=#[#7]
Transmission of var.-data
#6=#6+1
Axis-qty count-up f. recvr.
#7=#7+1
Axis-qty count-up f. transm.
#4=#4+1
Axis-qty counter up
END2
#2=#2+20
Init.-var.-No. of next G-sys.
#3=#3+20
Init.-var.-No. of next P-sys.
#5=#5+1
Sys.-qty-counter up
END1
M99
%
01
3
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
O2002 (Drilling subprg.)
G54
M98
H100
G55
M98
H100
G56
M98
H100
G57
M98
H100
G58
M98
H100
G59
M98
H100
G28
Z0
M99
N100G98G81X–20.Y–15.Z–150.R5.F40
X–25. Y–20.
X–20. Y–25.
X–15. Y–20.
G80
G28Z
M99
%
C
K
ZA
A
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
O2000 (Main prg.)
G28 XYZB
Reference-pt. return
G90
Absolute data input
G00 B0
Table indexed f. 1. surf.
G65 P2001A1
Origin-data loading
M98 P2002
Drilling-subprg. call
G00 B90.
Table indexed f. 2. surf.
G65 P2001A7
M98 P2002
G00 B180.
Table indexed f. 3. surf.
G65 P2001A13
M98 P2002
G00 B270.
Table indexed f. 4. surf.
G65 P2001A19
M98 P2002
G28 XYB
Reset to reference-pt.
M02
%
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
B
Drilling in G54-system
Drilling in G55-system
Drilling in G56-system
Drilling in G57-system
Drilling in G58-system
Drilling in G59-system
Fixed cycle for drilling
14-22
Serial No. 340839
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14
Simplified version of Example 3 program in application of “G54.1 Pp”
4.
Provided that preparatory setting of origin data in P1 to P24 is completed in accordance with
the 24 sections of a workpiece fixed on the rotary table as shown in the figure below:
P3
P20
P1
P19
P2
P21
P23
Y
Z
P5
P6
.
P22
er
ve
d
P4
P24
re
s
X
.A
ll
N
Reference-point return
Selection of absolut data input
Indexing of table for 1st surface
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
O3000
G28 XYZB
G90
G00 B0
G65 P3001A1
G00 B90.
G65 P3001A7
G00 B180.
G65 P3001A13
G00 B270.
G65 P3001A19
G28 XYB
M30
%
O3001
#100=#1
#101=0
WHILE[#101LT6]DO1
G54.1P#100
M98H100
#100=#100+1
#101=#101+1
END1
G28Z0
M99
N100G98G81X–20.Y–15.Z–150.R5.F40
X–25. Y–20.
X–20. Y–25.
X–15. Y–20.
G80
G28Z
M99
%
ri
gh
ts
B
Indexing of table for 2nd surface
ZA
K
Indexing of table for 4th surface
A
Reset to reference-point
Initialization of P-No.
Initialization of counter
Setting of additional workpiece coordinate system
Call for drilling subroutine
P-No. count-up
Checking counter count-up
Fixed cycle for drilling
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Indexing of table for 3rd surface
14-23
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14-12 Local Coordinate System Setting: G52
1.
Function and purpose
A local coordinate system in which the designated position becomes the program origin can be
set on the current workpiece coordinate system by setting command code G52.
Command code G52 can also be used instead of G92 to update any positional shift between the
machining program origin and the workpiece origin.
2.
Programming format
Detailed description
er
ve
d
3.
.
G52 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 1 (: Additional axis)
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
Command G52, which causes no machine movement, is valid until a new G52 is issued.
Command G52 is therefore convenient for using a new coordinate system without changing the
origin of the workpiece coordinate system.
The local coordinate system offset data is cleared by execution of either an automatic referencepoint return operation, or a manual reference-point (zero point) return operation using the dog
method following power-on.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
(G91) G52X_ Y_
Incremental value
Ln
Absolute value
Ln
Ln
(G90)
G52 X_ Y_
K
al
N
o.
Absolute value
ZA
Workpiece coordinate system
Workpiece coordinate system offset
(CRT setting, G10 G54 X_ Y_ )
K
IM
A
Se
ri
Wn (n = 1 thru 6)
Reference point
Local coordinate
systems
R
ZA
External workpiece coordinate system setting
(PC input, CRT setting)
Machine coordinate system
A
M
YA
M
MEP215
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Coordinates given in the absolute data input mode (G90) refer to the local coordinate system.
14-24
Serial No. 340839
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
4.
14
Sample programs
Setting local coordinates in the absolute data input mode (local coordinate system offset
data is not integrated)
[1] G28X0Y0
[2] G00G90X1.Y1.
[3] G92X0Y0
[4] G00X500.Y500
[5] G52X1.Y1.
[6] G00X0Y0
[7] G01X500.F100
[8] Y500.
[9] G52X0Y0
[10] G00X0Y0
[6]
2000
[5]
[4]
1500
[3]
[2]
[W1] L1
Local coordinate system
established by [5]
o.
1000
ri
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
[7]
.A
ll
[8]
[9]
2500
N
Y
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
1.
N
[10]
500
ZA
1000
1500
ZA
R#1
W1
New coordinate system set by [3],
which coincides with the local coordinate
system set by [9]
A
[1]
K
IM
Se
ri
500
K
al
[W1]
2500
3000
X
M
A
Current position
2000
YA
MEP216
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
The local coordinate system is established by [5] and cancelled by [9], and coincides with
the coordinate system of [3].
14-25
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
2.
Setting local coordinates in the incremental data input mode (local coordinate system offset
data is integrated)
[1] G28X0Y0
(a) O100
[2] G92X0Y0
(b) G90G00X0Y0
[3] G91G52X500.Y500. (c) G01X500.
[4] M98P100
(d) Y500.
[5] G52X1.Y1.
(e) G91
[6] M98P100
(f) M99
[7] G52X–1.5Y–1.5
[8] G00G90X0Y0
re
s
er
ve
d
.
M02
Y’’
ts
Y’
2500
(d)
[8]
[6]
(c)
[W1] L2
(d)
o.
[4]
(c)
ri
1000
Current
position
2000
New coordinate system set by [3]
2500
3000
X
Coincides with the local coordinate
system set by [7]
A
ZA
R#1
W1
1500
Se
500
[8]
K
IM
[1]
al
[W1] L1
ZA
[3]
[2]
X’
N
500
A
(b)
Local coordinate system
established by [5]
K
1000
YA
M
MEP217
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Block [3] generates local coordinate system X’-Y’ at the position of (500, 500) in the X-Y
coordinate system.
Block [5] generates local coordinate system X”-Y” at the position of (1000, 1000) in the X’-Y’
coordinate system.
Block [7] generates a local coordinate system at the position (–1500, –1500) in the X”-Y”
coordinate system. That is, the local coordinate system and the X-Y coordinate system
coincide, which means that the former has been cancelled.
C
op
yr
X’’
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
1500
N
2000
.A
ll
ri
gh
Y
14-26
Serial No. 340839
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
3.
14
Combined use of local coordinate system and workpiece coordinate system
[1] G28X0Y0
(a) O200
[2] G00G90G54X0Y0
(b) G00X0Y0
[3] G52X500.Y500.
(c) G01X500.F100
[4] M98P200
(d) Y500.
[5] G00G90G55X0Y0
(e) M99
[6] M98P200
%
[7] G00G90G54X0Y0
G55
X 1000
Y 500
1000
2000
Workpiece origin data
re
s
G54
er
ve
d
.
M02
2500
ri
(d)
.A
ll
Y
gh
ts
3000
(b)
G55
2000
N
(c)
[5]
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
W2
(d)
1500
(b)
o.
1000
ZA
500
A
R#1
W1
1000
K
IM
[1]
Se
ri
al
500
Local coordinate system
established by [3]
G54
K
N
[3]
[2]
[7] (c)
[W1] L1
1500
2000
2500
3000
X
ZA
Current
position
A
MEP218
YA
M
Block [3] generates a local coordinate system at the position of (500, 500) in the G54
coordinate system no local coordinate system is generated in the G55 coordinate system.
)2
01
3
Block [7] performs a movement to the local coordinate system reference point (zero point) of
G54.
(c
The local coordinate system can be cancelled using this format:
C
op
yr
ig
ht
G90 G54 G52 X0 Y0
14-27
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
4.
Combined use of G54 workpiece coordinate system and multiple local coordinate systems
[1] G28X0Y0
(a)
O300
[2] G00G90G54X0Y0
(b)
G00X0Y0
[3] M98P300
(c)
G01X500.F100
[4] G52X1.Y1.
(d)
Y500.
[5] M98P300
(e)
X0Y0
[6] G52X2.Y2.
(f)
M99
[7] M98P300
%
[8] G52X0Y0
er
ve
d
.
M02
Workpiece origin data
gh
ts
500
500
re
s
G54
X
Y
ri
3000
.A
ll
[7]
N
2500
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Local coordinate system
established by [6]
[W1] L2
2000
[5]
1500
o.
[W1] L1
(b)
1000
G54
A
1500
ZA
500
2000
2500
3000
A
R#1
ZA
ri
[3]
(e) (c)
W1
K
IM
[1]
[8]
[2]
Se
500
al
1000
Local coordinate system
established by [4]
K
N
(d)
M
Current position
01
3
YA
MEP219
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
Block [4] generates a local coordinate system at the position of (1000, 1000) in the G54
coordinate system.
Block [6] generates a local coordinate system at the position of (2000, 2000) in the G54
coordinate system.
Block [8] makes the local coordinate system coincide with the G54 coordinate system.
14-28
Serial No. 340839
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14
14-13 Reading/Writing of MAZATROL Program Basic Coordinates
The basic coordinates of a MAZATROL program can be read or rewritten by using system
variables #5341 to #5349.
System variables for MAZATROL basic coordinates (WPC)
Variables
Function
Variables
Function
#5341
WPC-X
#5345
WPC-C
#5342
WPC-Y
#5347/#5348
WPC-th
#5343
WPC-Z
#5349
WPC-R.T
#5344
WPC-4
er
ve
d
.
Note 1: Use the system variable #5348 to read the basic coordinate WPC-th in a macroprogram called by a subprogram unit, since #5347 is ineffective for that purpose.
ts
re
s
Note 2: Use the system variable #5347 to rewrite the basic coordinate WPC-th, since #5348 is
a read-only variable.
.A
ll
ri
gh
Note 3: System variable #5349 is only effective for machines equipped with an additional table
on condition that bit 4 of parameter D106 is set to “1” (Table selection enabled).
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Main program
(MAZATROL)
UNo. UNIT
X
1 WPC-0 –100.
o.
Macroprogram
(EIA/ISO)
K
ZA
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
UNo. UNIT
. .. .
5 SUB PRO . . . . . .
G65P9998X ..........
M99
YA
M
A
The WPC coordinates of line UNo. 1 can be
read or rewritten.
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Note 4: For updating the basic coordinates, do not forget to select the [MEASURE MACRO]
menu function in entering a subprogram unit for the macroprogram concerned
(WNo. 9998); otherwise the new coordinates may not always be used in time for the
execution of the machining unit immediately following the subprogram unit.
C
op
yr
ig
Note 5: On the other hand, do not select the [MEASURE MACRO] menu function unless the
above macroprogram (WNo. 9998) is to be used.
Refer to the section of subprogram unit in the PROGRAMMING MANUAL
(MAZATROL Program) for details on data setting for subprogram call.
14-29
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14-13-1 Rewriting
The basic coordinates cannot be rewritten just by entering the data into #5341 to #5347 and
#5349. It is required to create a macroprogram in the following format:
1.
Macroprogramming format
Macroprogram to be prepared by the user
re
s
er
ve
d
.
G65P9998X_Y_Z_D_B_C_
M99
Z: WPC-Z
D: WPC-th
B: WPC-4
C: WPC-C
A: WPC-R.T
.A
ll
Y: WPC-Y
N
X: WPC-X
ri
gh
ts
At the end of macroprogramming, call the rewriting macroprogram (WNo. 9998). At this time,
assign new coordinates as arguments. The relationship between each argument and axis is
as follows:
It is not possible to rewrite, using the macroprogram, the R. T (Rotary Table) setting, a
special item in the basic coordinate unit (WPC) if NOT USE is selected under ROT.
TABLE in the table selection unit (TABLE).
K
Rewriting macroprogram
al
2.
N
o.
Note :
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Only the coordinates assigned with the respective argument are rewritten. The argument data
is handled as data having the decimal point.
A
ZA
A
WPC-X rewritten
01
3
YA
M
IF[#24EQ#0]GOTO10
#5341=#24
#50449=#24
#50467=#50467OR32
N10
IF[#25EQ#0]GOTO20
Branching to N70 if executed on the TOOL PATH CHECK or VIRTUAL
MACHINING display
ZA
O9998
IF[#50600EQ0]GOTO70
K
IM
Se
ri
The rewriting macroprogram (WNo. 9998) is shown below.
WPC-Y rewritten
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
#5342=#25
#50447=#25
#50467=#50467OR64
N20
IF[#26EQ#0]GOTO30
C
op
#5343=#26
#50445=#26
#50467=#50467OR128
N30
IF[#7EQ#0]GOTO40
#5347=#7
#50441=#7
#50467=#50467OR512
WPC-Z rewritten
WPC-th rewritten
14-30
Serial No. 340839
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14
N40
IF[#2EQ#0]GOTO45
#5344=#2
#50443=#2
#50467=#50467OR256
N45
IF[#3EQ#0]GOTO50
WPC-4 rewritten
#5345=#3
#58161=#3
#50467=#50467OR2048
N50
IF[#1EQ#0]GOTO60
#5349=#1
#58300=#1
#50467=#50467OR16384
N60
er
ve
d
.
WPC-C rewritten
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
Indispensable macro statements for rewriting
gh
#50467=#50467OR-65536
#50499=#50499OR1
N70
M99
%
ts
re
s
WPC-R.T rewritten
Note 1: The execution of the macroprogram (O9998) causes an alarm (191 FILE SYSTEM I/O
ERROR) if there are no MAZATROL program’s basic coordinates being validated in
the flow of program execution.
N
o.
Note 2: The last two macro statements with #50467 and #50499 are indispensable for the
execution of the macroprogram, irrespective of the axis coordinates to be rewritten.
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
Note 3: To write a rotational axis’ coordinate in the mode of inch data input, ― use variable
#4206 to check whether inch or metric data input is currently active ― the corresponding system variable should be replaced by the tenth (1/10) of the desired value
(angle; in degrees).
M
A
ZA
Example : To replace the WPC-C value with 100 degrees (°), the corresponding system
variable is to be replaced as follows:
#5345=10 or #5345=10.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
Note 4: In the execution on the TOOL PATH CHECK display, the command concerned in an
EIA/ISO subprogram cannot rewrite the basic coordinates of the MAZATROL main
program.
14-31
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14-14 Workpiece Coordinate System Rotation
1.
Function and purpose
The function refers to rotating the workpiece coordinate system around the position of the
specified machine coordinates. The machining program can be rotated in its entirety as required
for the actual inclination of the workpiece.
Programming format
Yy
Xx
Zz
Rr
Rr
Rr
Xx
Zz
Yy
Yy
Xx
Zz
Ii
Kk
Jj
X-Y plane
Z-X plane
Y-Z plane
Jj
Ii
Kk
er
ve
d
.
Xx
Zz
Yy
X-Y plane
Z-X plane
Y-Z plane
re
s
(G17) G92.5
(G18) G92.5
(G19) G92.5
or
(G17) G92.5
(G18) G92.5
(G19) G92.5
ts
2.
Coordinates of the rotational center.
The position along the two axes of the previously selected X-Y, Z-X, or Y-Z plane must be designated
in machine coordinates.
The designation for an axis not corresponding to the plane will be ignored.
R:
Angle of rotation.
Designate the rotational angle for the coordinate system. A positive value refers to a counterclockwise
rotation.
i, j, k :
Axial component vectors.
The angle for coordinate system rotation can also be designated in axial component vectors
corresponding to the previously selected plane.
The designation for an axis not corresponding to the plane will be ignored.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
x, y, z :
A
ZA
K
Workpiece
coordinate system
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Y
x
01
3
YA
M
A
r
Machine
coordinate
)2
X
(c
Machine origin
y
ig
ht
r
i
C
op
yr
Rotational
center
j
Workpiece coordinate system rotation
Range and unit for angle data setting
Setting method
Setting range
Setting unit
Axial component vectors
Metric system
0 to ±99999.999
0.001 mm
(i, j, k)
Inch system
0 to ±9999.9999
0.0001 in
0 to ±99999.999°
0.001°
Angle of rotation ( r )
Metric system
Inch system
14-32
Serial No. 340839
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
Detailed description
1.
Irrespective of the actual mode for incremental or absolute data input, the values at
addesses X, Y, Z, or I, J, K as well as R are always referred to the machine coordinate
system.
2.
Two methods are available to designate a rotational angle:
(a) Designation in rotational angle (r), or
(b) Designation in axial component vectors (i, j, k).
3.
If angle data are entered using both methods (a) and (b) above, the rotational angle (at
address R) will govern.
4.
If, during rotation of the workpiece coordinate system, a rotational angle of zero degrees is
designated (by setting G92.5 R0, for example), the coordinate system rotation will be
cancelled, irrespective of the data input mode of G90 (absolute) or G91 (incremental). The
next move command will then be executed for the ending point in the original (not rotated)
workpiece coordinate system.
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
3.
14
.A
ll
ri
gh
Refer to Article 1 under “5. Precautions” for more information.
The rotational center coordinates will be retained and automatically applied for a
succeeding rotation command without data designation at addresses X, Y, and/or Z.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
5.
N1 G17
Selection of the X-Y plane
N2 G92.5X100.Y100.R45. Rotation of the workpiece coordinate system through
45 deg around the point of (X, Y) = (100, 100)
N3 G92.5R0
Cancellation of the workpiece coordinate system
rotation
N4 G17G92.5R90.
Rotation of the workpiece coordinate system through
90 deg around the center last programmed (X100,
%
Y100)
K
ZA
Omission of addresses R and I, J , K is regarded as a rotational angle designation of zero
degrees.
K
IM
6.
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Example:
“G92.5 X0. Y0.” is equivalent to “G92.5 X0. Y0. R0”.
A
ZA
Example:
Alarm No. 809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT will be displayed if the specified axial component
vectors (i, j, k) or rotational angle (r) oversteps the effective setting range.
8.
Plane selection (by codes G17, G18, and G19) need not be included in the block of G92.5, if
the rotation shall be performed on the currently active plane.
9.
The designation for an axis not corresponding to the selected plane will be ignored. The
designations at addresses Z and K in a block of G92.5, for example, will be ignored in the
mode of G17 (X-Y plane).
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
7.
C
op
yr
Example:
The second block shown below rotates the workpiece coordinate system through
–1
63.435 , calculation from tan (2/1), around the point of (X, Y) = (10, 20) on the X-Y
plane, and the values at Z and K are ignored for the rotation.
G17
G92.5X10.Y20.Z30.I1.J2.K3.
Even the ignored axial values at X, Y, and Z in a G92.5 block are retained as well as
the values actually used (see Article 5 above) and, for example, if the G92.5 block
shown above is followed by
G19
G92.5J2.K3.
then the workpiece coordinate system will be rotated around the point of (Y, Z) = (20,
–1
30) through 56.301°, calculation from tan (3/2), on the Y-Z plane (G19).
14-33
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
Examples of operation
Rotation around the machine origin.
G55 (Work Offset)
X100.
Y100.
Rotation around the machine origin
through 90 deg
gh
ts
N6
N7
N8
N9
N10
N11
%
G28X0Y0
G17
G90
G55
G92.5X0Y0R90. ................................
(or G92.5X0Y0I0J1.)
G0X0Y0
G1X100.F1000.
Y200.
X0.
Y0.
M30
.
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
er
ve
d
1.
re
s
4.
ri
Workpiece coordinates systems
X
.A
ll
Y
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Y
300
N
N8
al
N9
K
ZA
Se
100 W2
W2'
ZA
N6
–200
YA
M
A
–300
–100
X
Workpiece origin
without rotation
K
IM
Workpiece origin
after rotation
A
N10
ri
N7
Y
Programmed contour
without workpiece
coordinate system
rotation
200
o.
Programmed contour after
workpiece coordinate
system rotation
90°
0
R
M
X
100
200
300
)2
01
3
Machine coordinate system
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
The block of G92.5 under N5 rotates the workpiece coordinate system through 90
degrees around the origin of the machine coordinate system. For N6 onward, the
machine operates according to the rotated workpiece coordinate system.
The above example of the vector setting method for the same 90-deg rotation is based
on the following calculation:
= tan
–1
(J/I) = tan
–1
(1/0) = 90°.
14-34
Serial No. 340839
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
2.
14
Rotation around the workpiece origin.
G55 (Work Offset)
X100.
Y100.
Rotation through 45 deg around the point of
machine coordinates X=100 and Y=100 (that
is, the origin of the G55 workpiece coordinate
system).
er
ve
d
.
N1 G28X0Y0Z0
N2 G17
N3 G55
N4 G90
N5 G92.5X100.Y100.R45. .....................
N6 G81X50.Y50.Z–25.R–5.F500
N7 X100.
N8 X150.
N9 M30
%
300
ts
re
s
Y
.A
ll
ri
gh
Programmed contour after
workpiece coordinate
system rotation
Workpiece
coordinates
systems
Workpiece coordinate
system after rotation
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Programmed contour without
workpiece coordinate system
rotation
o.
45°
ZA
K
IM
A
ri
al
W2
Se
R
M
Workpiece coordinate system
without rotation
N
W2’
X
200
300
M
A
ZA
100
K
100
N
Hole
machining
200
)2
01
3
YA
The block of G92.5 under N5 rotates the workpiece coordinate system around its own
origin through 45 degrees. For N6 onward, the machine operates according to the
rotated workpiece coordinate system.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
Set the rotational center on the workpiece origin, as shown in this example, to rotate the
current workpiece coordinate system around its own origin.
14-35
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
Programmed coordinate rotation (G68) in the mode of G92.5
.
G28X0Y0
G55 (Work Offset)
G17
X100.
G55
Y100.
G90
G92.5X0Y0R90. ............................... [1]
G68X50.Y50.R45. ........................... [2]
G0X0Y0
G1X100.F500
Y100.
X0
Y0
M30
er
ve
d
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8
N9
N10
N11
N12
%
re
s
3.
gh
ts
Y
ri
Programmed contour
without both [1] and [2]
G68
rot. ctr.
N8
N11
N10
o.
N9
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
200
W2
ZA
Programmed
contour
without [1]
ZA
X
–100
R
M
100
200
01
3
YA
M
A
–200
G68
rot. ctr.
K
100
K
IM
Se
N7
A
ri
al
N
W2’
Programmed contour
with both [1] and [2]
N
.A
ll
Programmed contour
without [2]
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
In a combined use with G92.5, the center of programmed coordinate rotation by G68 will be
a position which corresponds with the workpiece coordinate system rotation designated by
the G92.5 command.
It will not affect operation even if the order of the program blocks marked [1] and [2] above is
reversed.
14-36
Serial No. 340839
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
Figure rotation (M98) in the mode of G92.5
G28X0Y0
G17
G55
G90
G92.5X0Y0R90. .........................
G0X0Y0
M98H10I–50.J50.L4
M30
G55 (Work Offset)
X100.
Y100.
Rotation through 90 deg around the origin of the
machine coordinate system
er
ve
d
.
G1X100.Y50.F500
X0Y100.
M99
gh
ts
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8
N9
N10
N11
N12
%
re
s
4.
14
.A
ll
ri
Y
300
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Programmed contour without
workpiece coordinate system rotation
200
K
N
W2’
ZA
ri
al
N10(1)
A
Fig. rot. ctr.
–200
N10(3)
N11(4)
W2
N6
N10(4)
X
–100
R
M
100
200
N11(3)
Serial
number of
repetition
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
–300
A
ZA
N11(2)
100
’
K
IM
Se
N10(2)
Fig. rot. ctr.
o.
N11(1)
Programmed contour after
workpiece coordinate
system rotation
In a combined use with G92.5, the center of figure rotation by M98 will be a position which
corresponds with the workpiece coordinate system rotation designated by the G92.5
command.
14-37
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
5.
Scaling (G51) in the mode of G92.5
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
N1 G28X0Y0
G55 (Work Offset)
N2 G17
X100.
N3 G55
Y100.
N4 G90
N5 G92.5X0Y0R90. ...................................
[1]
N6 G51X0Y0P2. ..........................................
[2]
N7 G0X0Y0
N8 G1X50.F500
N9 Y50.
N10 X0
N11 Y0
N12 M30
%
ri
gh
Y
Programmed
contour without [2]
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
Programmed contour
with both [1] and [2]
200
N9
N8
N11
W2
Programmed contour
without both [1] and [2]
A
K
IM
Se
Programmed contour
without [2]
100
ZA
ri
al
W2’
K
N
o.
N10
A
ZA
N7
–100
X
R
M
100
200
)2
01
3
YA
M
–200
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
In a combined use with G92.5, the scaling center will be a position which corresponds with
the workpiece coordinate system rotation designated by the G92.5 command.
14-38
Serial No. 340839
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
Mirror image in the mode of G92.5
G-code mirror image
Programmed
contour without [1]
G55 (Work Offset)
X100.
Y100.
.
[1]
[2]
er
ve
d
G28X0Y0
G17
G55
G90
G92.5X0Y0R90. ..............................
G51.1X–50. .....................................
G0X0Y0
G1X100.F500
Y100.
X0Y0
M30
re
s
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8
N9
N10
N11
%
Y
Mirror axis
(Without G92.5)
.A
ll
ri
200
ts
a)
gh
6.
14
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Programmed
contour without [2]
100
W2’
Programmed contour
without both [1] and [2]
K
ZA
–100
M
ZA
N10
X
R
N8
M
A
Programmed contour
with both [1] and [2]
K
IM
–200
N7
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Mirror axis (Without G92.5)
W2
YA
N9
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
–100
14-39
100
200
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
M-code mirror image
G28X0Y0
G17
G55
G90
G92.5X0Y0R90. .................................
M91. .........................................................
G0X0Y0
G1X100.F500
Y100.
X0Y0
M30
G55 (Work Offset)
X100.
Y100.
[1]
[2]
Programmed
contour without [2]
re
s
er
ve
d
.
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8
N9
N10
N11
%
Programmed contour
without both [1] and [2]
Y
ts
b)
ri
gh
200
Mirror axis (With G92.5)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
Programmed
contour
without [1]
W2’
W2
100
N7
o.
N10
–100
K
Mirror axis
(Without G92.5)
R
X
M
100
200
K
IM
–200
A
Se
ri
N9
ZA
al
N
N8
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
Programmed contour
with both [1] and [2]
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
In a combined use with G92.5, the axis of symmetry for G-code or M-code mirror image will
be set in accordance with the workpiece coordinate system rotation designated by the
G92.5 command.
14-40
Serial No. 340839
14
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
Coordinate system setting (G92) in the mode of G92.5
.
G28X0Y0
G55 (Work Offset)
G17
X100.
G55
Y100.
G90
G92.5X0Y0R90. .............................. [1]
G92X–100.Y100. ............................ [2]
G0X0Y0
G1X100.F500
Y100.
X0Y0
M30
er
ve
d
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8
N9
N10
N11
%
Programmed contour
with both [1] and [2]
Y
ts
200
ri
N
N8
.A
ll
N10
gh
N9
Programmed
contour without [2]
re
s
7.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
W2’
100
W2
Programmed contour
without both [1] and [2]
K
200
X
M
R
100
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
–100
ZA
–200
A
ri
al
N
o.
N7
M
–100
01
3
YA
Programmed contour without [1]
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
Coordinate system setting by a G92 block after G92.5 will be performed in reference to the
coordinate system rotation designated by the G92.5 command.
14-41
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
Precautions
If, during rotation of the workpiece coordinate system, a rotational angle of zero degrees is
designated (by setting G92.5 R0, for example), the coordinate system rotation will be
cancelled, irrespective of the data input mode of G90 (absolute) or G91 (incremental). The
next move command will then be executed for the ending point in the original (not rotated)
workpiece coordinate system.
For absolute data input
ri
Example 2:
G28X0Y0
G17G92.5X0Y0R20.
G90G01Y50.F1000.
X100.
G92.5R0 ........................................ Command for 0-deg rotation
Y0 ................................................... Motion to (X100, Y0)
X0
M30
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8
%
K
ZA
K
IM
Y
A
Se
ri
Programmed contour for Examples 1 and 2 above
Programmed contour with N2
(Workpiece coordinate system rotation)
A
ZA
N4
YA
M
50
N6
01
3
Programmed contour
without N2
(c
)2
N3
ht
N7
X
0
100
C
op
yr
ig
.
G28X0Y0
G17G92.5X0Y0R20.
G91G01Y50.F1000.
X100.
G92.5R0 ........................................ Command for 0-deg rotation
Y–50.............................................. Motion to (X100, Y0)
X–100.
M30
ts
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
N6
N7
N8
%
For incremental data input
er
ve
d
Example 1:
re
s
1.
gh
5.
14-42
Serial No. 340839
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
2.
14
Use a linear motion command (with G00 or G01) for the first movement to be executed after
G92.5 command.
Circular interpolation in such a case, as shown below, would have to take place from the
current position A, which refers to the original workpiece coordinate system, to the ending
point B’ to which the point B should be shifted in accordance with the rotation. As a result,
the radii of the starting and ending points would differ too significantly and the alarm No. 817
INCORRECT ARC DATA would be caused.
Example:
er
ve
d
.
G28X0Y0
G91G01X50.F1000.
G17G92.5X0Y0R20.
G02X40.Y40.I40.
M30
ts
re
s
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
%
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
Circular interpolation as the first motion after G92.5
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
B'
o.
Programmed contour
B
without N2
K
ZA
Programmed contour
without N3
A
20°
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
40
A
50
M
A
01
3
Re
90
Rs
YA
0
Center of arc
Rs : Arc radius for the starting point
Re : Arc radius for the ending point
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
Alarm for incorrect
circular command
C
op
3.
Set a G92.5 command in the mode of G40.
4.
The machine will operate on the rotated coordinate system for an MDI interruption during
the mode of G92.5.
5.
For a manual interruption during the mode of G92.5 using the JOG or handle feed mode,
the machine will operate independently of the coordinate system rotation.
14-43
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
6.
Differences between workpiece coordinate system rotation and programmed coordinate
rotation.
Function name
Workpiece coordinate system rotation
Programmed coordinate rotation
System to be rotated
Workpiece coordinate system
Local coordinate system
Programming format
(G17)
G92.5 Xx Yy Rr
(G17)
G68 Xx Yy Rr
(G18)
G92.5 Yy Zz Rr
(G18)
G68 Yy Zz Rr
(G19)
G92.5 Zz Xx Rr
(G19)
G68 Zz Xx Rr
(Angle)
or
G92.5 Xx Yy Ii Jj
(G18)
G92.5 Yy Zz Jj Kk
(G19)
G92.5 Zz Xx Kk Ii
(Vector comp.)
.
(G17)
er
ve
d
Operation
r
ts
re
s
Workpiece
coordinate system
gh
x
Local coordinate
system
N
.A
ll
ri
r
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
y
r
j
i
Rotational
center
Designation at addresses X, Y, Z
Rotational center coordinates
Designation at R (angle) or at I, J, K (vector
components)
Machine coordinate system
Designation at addresses X, Y, Z
Designation at R (angle)
Retained
Retained
ZA
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
A
ZA
Retained
M
Resumption of
readiness after
emergency
stop
K
IM
key
A
ri
al
Retained
M02/M30
YA
Resetting or M02/M30 cancels the G92.5 mode itself, while the information on the
rotational center, etc., at related addresses is retained as indicated above.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Note :
Power-off on
Se
Information
on center
and angle of
rotation
cleared?
K
N
o.
Angle of rotation
Workpiece
coordinate system
14-44
Serial No. 340839
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14
14-15 Three-Dimensional Coordinate Conversion ON/OFF: G68/G69 (Option)
1.
Function and purpose
The three-dimensional (3D) coordinate conversion mode makes it possible for a new coordinate
system to be defined by rotating the X-axis, Y-axis, or Z-axis of the currently valid workpiece
coordinate system and moving the workpiece origin in parallel to that axis. Thus, definition of any
plane on a space allows creation of a program assuming that the plane is an X-Y plane.
Programming format
G68 [Xx0 Yy0 Zz0] Ii Jj Kk Rr
Where
.
............................................. 3D coordinate conversion mode off
er
ve
d
G69
...... 3D coordinate conversion mode on
x0, y0, z0 : Rotational center coordinates (Absolute)
i, j, k :
Axis of rotation (1: Valid, 0: Invalid)
gh
ri
Angle and direction of rotation of the coordinate system (the clockwise
rotational direction when the positive side of the rotational axis is seen
from the center of rotation, is taken as a plus direction)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
r:
ts
I : X-axis
J : Y-axis
K : Z-axis
re
s
2.
Example:
G68X0Y0Z0 I1J0K0 R–90.
o.
Rotates the coordinate system counterclockwise through 90°.
al
N
Sets the X-axis as the axis of rotation of the coordinate system.
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
Sets the workpiece origin as the center of rotation.
Z
Y
X
X
Z
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
Y
C
op
NM221-00049
14-45
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
<Precautions>
If X, Y, or Z is omitted, the workpiece origin in the currently valid workpiece coordinate system
will become rotational center coordinates.
The charatcters I, J, and K must all be set. Omission of even one of these three characters
results in alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT. Omission of all the three characters makes program
coordinate rotation valid, instead of 3D coorinate conversion.
G68X0Y0Z0I1K0R–45.
Format error
G68X0Y0Z0R–45.
Program coordinate rotation ON
Setting of 0 in all the arguments of I, J, and K also results in alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT.
G68X0Y0Z0I1J1K0R–90.
er
ve
d
.
Setting of 1 in the arguments of two or more of the three characters (I, J, and K) also results in
alarm 807 ILLEGEAL FORMAT.
Format error
ts
re
s
Setting of command G68 in the absence of a 3D coordinate conversion option results in alarm
942 NO 3-D CONVERSION OPTION.
.A
ll
ri
gh
Setting of an illegal G-code during the 3D coordinate conversion mode results in alarm 943
CONVERTING IN 3-D CORDINATES.
G68I1J0K0R-90.
G00X0Y0
G43Z50.H01
G01Z-1.
Y50.
G02X100.R50.
G01Y0
G01Z50.
G69
G91G28Z0
G28X0Y0
M30
ZA
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
(c
)2
01
3
N02
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
K
N
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
A
G90G00G40G49G80
G54X0Y-100.
G43Z50.H01
G01Z-1.F1200
Y-50.
G02X100.R50.
G01Y-100.
G01Z50.
G91G28Z0
G28X0Y0
G90G00G40G49G80
G54G00A90.
ri
N01
o.
Sample program
al
3.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
See “5. Relationship to other functions” for the listing of illegal G-codes.
ht
[11]
Program origin
yr
ig
[12]
Program
origin
C
op
[5]
[13] [17]
X
[15]
[3]
[6]
[1]
[8]
[2]
[14]
[16]
[4]
Y
Z
[10]
[18]
[7]
Z
[9]
Y
Machine origin
X
Machine origin
NM221-00050
14-46
Serial No. 340839
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
4.
14
3D coordinate conversion and a program coordinate system
Use of command G68 allows the coordinates of the rotational center in the currently valid
coordinate system to be shifted to the designated position (X, Y, Z) and the corresponding
graphics to be rotated through the designated angle of rotation (R) in the designated direction of
rotational center (I, J, K). Thus, a new program coordinate system can be set.
[1] G90 G54 X0 Y0
[2] G68 X10.Y0 Z0 I0 J1 K0 R-30.
[3] G68 X0 Y10.Z0 I1 J0 K0 R45.
[4] G69
Example:
Set a workpiece coordinate system using workpiece offset command G54.
[2]
The program origin in the workpiece coordinate system that was set during step [1]
above shifts to the position of (x, y, z) =(10, 0, 0) and the graphics rotates through 30
degrees in a clockwise direction around the Y-axis. Thus, new program coordinate
system A is set.
[3]
The program origin in the workpiece coordinate system that was set during step [2]
above shifts to the position of (x, y, z) = (0, 10, 0) and the graphics rotates through 45
degrees in a counter clockwise direction around the X-axis. Thus, new program
coordinate system B is set.
[4]
Both the program coordinate systems that were set during steps [2] and [3] above are
cancelled and the coordinate system that was set during step [1] above becomes valid
once again.
Program coodinate system B
+Y”
+Y’
45°
ZA
A
P (0, 10, 0)
ZA
+X’
–30°
M
A
P (0, 0, 0)
Workpiece coodinate system
YA
P’ (10, 0, 0)
+X
Program coodinate system A
NM221-00051
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
+X”
+Z’
K
IM
Se
ri
al
+Y
K
N
o.
+Z
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
[1]
14-47
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
5.
Relationship to other functions
1.
The table below indicates the compatibility of each G-code with the three-dimensional
coordinate conversion function in the two columns on the right.
Group
[1]
[2]
00
01
Positioning
Yes
Yes
01
01
Linear interpolation
Yes
Yes
01.1
01
Threading with C-axis
Yes
No
02
01
Circular interpolation CW
Yes (*1)
No
03
01
Circular interpolation CCW
Yes (*1)
02.1
00
Spiral interpolation CW
No
03.1
00
Spiral interpolation CCW
No
04
00
Dwell
05
00
High-speed machining
06.1
01
Spline interpolation
06.2
01
NURBS interpolation
07
00
Virtual-axis interpolation
07.1
00
Cylindrical interpolation
09
00
Exact-stop check
10
00
Programmed parameter input
Yes (*4)
11
00
Programmed parameter input cancel
Yes (*4)
17
02
Plane selection X-Y
18
02
Plane selection Z-X
19
02
Plane selection Y-Z
20
06
Inch command
21
06
Metric command
22
04
Pre-move stroke check ON
No
No
23
04
Pre-move stroke check OFF
A
No
Yes
27
00
Reference-point check
No
28
00
Reference-point return
Yes (*2)
29
00
Starting-point return
Yes
30
00
No. 2 through 4 reference-point return
Yes (*2)
31
00
Skip
Yes
31.1
00
Multi-step skip 1
Yes
31.2
er
ve
d
re
s
ts
gh
No
No
No
Yes
No
ri
No
No
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
N
ZA
K
al
ri
K
IM
Se
ZA
M
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
00
Multi-step skip 3
Yes
01
Constant lead threading
No
No
01
Constant lead threading
No
No
34
01
Variable lead threading
No
No
37
00
Automatic tool-length measurement
No
38
00
Vector selection for tool radius compensation
No
39
00
Corner arc for tool radius compensation
No
No
40
07
Tool radius compensation OFF
Yes
Yes
40.1
15
Shaping cancel
Yes
No
41
07
Tool radius compensation (to the left)
Yes
No
41.1
15
Shapint to the left
Yes
No
42
07
Tool radius compensation (to the right)
Yes
No
42.1
15
Shaping to the right
Yes
No
43
08
Tool-length offset (+)
Yes
No
44
08
Tool-length offset (–)
Yes
No
45
00
Tool-position offset, extension
Yes
No
45.1
19
Attachment compensation
Yes
Yes
(c
yr
ig
33
)2
01
3
Yes
ht
YA
No
Multi-step skip 2
32
op
No
Yes (*4)
No
No
00
31.3
C
Function
.
G-code
A
[1] Is the G-code available in the mode of three-dimensional coordinate conversion?
[2] Is the three-dimensional conversion mode selectable under the condition of the
G-code?
14-48
No
Serial No. 340839
14
[2]
Tool-position offset, reduction
Yes
No
Tool-position offset, double extension
Yes
No
00
Tool-positon offset, double reduction
Yes
No
49
08
Tool-length offset cancel
Yes
Yes
49.1
19
Attachment compensation cancel
Yes
Yes
50
11
Scaling cancel
No
Yes
51
11
Scaling on
No
No
50.1
19
G-command mirror image cancel
Yes
Yes
50.2
23
Polygonal machining cancel
Yes
Yes
51.1
19
G-command mirror image on
Yes
No
51.2
23
Polygonal machining
Yes
Yes
52
00
Local coordinate system setting
Yes
Yes
53
00
Machine coordinate system selection
54
12
Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection
No
54.1
12
Additional workpiece coordinate system selection
No
55
12
Workpiece coordinate system 2 selection
No
56
12
Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection
57
12
Workpiece coordinate system 4 selection
58
12
Workpiece coordinate system 5 selection
59
12
Workpiece coordinate system 6 selection
60
00
One-way positioning
61
13
Exact-stop check mode
Yes
Yes
61.1
13
Geometry compensation mode
Yes
Yes
61.4
13
Inverse model control
Yes
Yes
62
13
Automatic corner override
Yes
Yes
63
13
Tapping mode
Yes
Yes
64
13
Cutting mode
Yes
Yes
65
00
User macro simple call
66
14
User macro modal call A
Yes
66.1
14
User macro modal call B
Yes
No
67
14
User macro modal call cancel
Yes
Yes
68
16
Program coordinates rotation
No
No
69
16
Cancellation of coordinates rotation/3D conversion
71.1
09
Fixed cycle (chamfering cutter 1)
72.1
09
73
09
er
ve
d
re
s
ri
ts
gh
Yes
No
Yes
.A
ll
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes (*2)
Yes
Yes
No
Fixed cycle (chamfering cutter 2)
Yes
No
Fixed cycle (high-speed deep-hole drilling)
Yes
No
Yes
No
Fixed cycle (boring)
Yes
No
09
Fixed cycle (boring)
Yes
No
77
ht
09
Fixed cycle (back facing)
Yes
No
78
09
Fixed cycle (boring)
Yes
No
79
09
Fixed cycle (boring)
Yes
No
80
09
Fixed cycle cancel
Yes
Yes
81
09
Fixed cycle (drill/spot drill)
Yes
No
82
09
Fixed cycle (drill)
Yes
No
82.2
09
Fixed cycle (drill)
Yes
No
83
09
Fixed cycle (deep hole drill)
Yes
No
84
09
Fixed cycle (tapping)
Yes
No
84.2
09
Fixed cycle (synchronous tapping)
Yes
No
84.3
09
Fixed cycle (synchronous reverse tapping)
Yes
No
85
09
Fixed cycle (reaming)
Yes
No
86
09
Fixed cycle (boring)
Yes
No
87
09
Fixed cycle (back boring)
Yes
No
)2
Fixed cycle (reverse tapping)
09
ig
09
Yes
No
N
K
ZA
A
3D coordinate conversion
Yes
yr
74
Yes (*5)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
N
al
ri
Se
48
ZA
00
A
00
47
M
46
Function
YA
Group
01
3
G-code
.
[1]
K
IM
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
C
op
76
(c
75
14-49
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
Group
88
09
89
09
90
Function
[1]
[2]
Fixed cycle (boring)
Yes
No
Fixed cycle (boring)
Yes
No
03
Absolute data input
Yes
Yes
91
03
Incremental data input
Yes
Yes
92
00
Machine coordinate system setting
No
92.5
00
Workpiece coordinate system rotation
Yes
93
05
Inverse time feed
Yes
Yes
94
05
Asynchronous feed (feed per minute)
Yes (*4)
Yes
95
05
Synchronous feed (feed per revolution)
Yes (*4)
Yes
98
10
Initial level return in fixed cycle
Yes
Yes
99
10
R-point level return in fixed cycle
Yes
Yes
re
s
Setting of helical interpolation results in an alarm.
Only the intermediate point has its coordinates converted.
Setting of program coordinate rotation results in an alarm.
The preparatory function is executed independently of the coordinate conversion.
The operation is always performed in the original coordinate system (free from any conversion).
ts
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
er
ve
d
.
G-code
Setting of a G-code other than G17, G18, and G19, in the block containing G68 or G69
results in alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT.
3.
G28 and G30 commands permit a return to the reference point through the 3D converted
intermediate point, whereas a G53 command is performed without any conversion.
4.
Codes G41 (Radius comp. to the left), G42 (Radius comp. to the right), G51.1 (G-command
mirror image on), and Fixed cycle codes must be present with their cancellation codes
between G68 and G69 so that a nested relationship is established. Moreover, give a motion
command with G90 (absolute data input) in the next block to that of the G68 command.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
2.
G68X50.Y100.Z150.I1J0K0R-90.
G90G00X0Y0Z0
G41G01X10.F1000
G40
G69
K
ZA
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Example:
Tool-length, -radius and -position offset is first processed, and the 3D conversion is
conducted on the offset contour.
6.
Mirror image can only be applied by G51.1 (the related M-codes are not available). The
processing order is: mirror image first, then 3D conversion.
7.
In mode G68, code G52 is handled as follows:
01
3
YA
M
A
5.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
If code G68 is set in the coordinates that have been set using G52, that local coordinate
system will be overriden with a new workpiece coordinate system by G68. Setting of G69
under that status will make the original local coordinate system valid once again.
G68
G69
L
L
W
W
M
M
M: Machine coordinate system
W: Workpiece coordinate system
L: Local coordinate system
NM221-00052
14-50
Serial No. 340839
COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14
If code G52 is present in the data set using mode G68, a local coordinate system can be
set on the workpiece coordinate system that has been set using G68. Setting of G69
under that status will cancel the local coordinate system and the G68-set workpiece
coordinate system and thus the original coordinate system existing before G68 was set
will become valid once again.
L
G69
G68
er
ve
d
.
W
W
M
M
ts
re
s
M: Machine coordinate system
W: Workpiece coordinate system
L:
Local coordinate system
G68: G68-set workpiece coordinate system
ri
gh
NM221-00053
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
If code G52 is present in the data set using mode G68, a local coordinate system can be
set that starts from the workpiece coordinate system to be set using G68. Setting of G68
under that status will cancel the local coordinate system and then set a G68 program
coordinate system.
M
K
A
ri
Se
W
G68
ZA
al
N
L
G68
W
M
NM221-00054
M
A
ZA
K
IM
M: Machine coordinate system
W: Workpiece coordinate system
L:
Local coordinate system
G68, G68’: G68-set workpiece coordinate
system
G68’
G68′
Setting of G68 during figure rotation results in alarm 850 G68 AND M98 COMMANDS
SAME BLOCK.
9.
Three-dimensional coordinate conversion is not valid for the axis of rotation.
01
3
YA
8.
(c
)2
10. The G68 mode does not accept any external workpiece origin setting commands.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
11. Cancel the 3D coordinate conversion mode temporarily if a MAZATROL program is to be
called up as a subprogram.
14-51
ht
ig
yr
op
C
01
3
)2
(c
K
ZA
al
ri
Se
A
K
IM
ZA
A
M
YA
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
N
ts
gh
ri
.
er
ve
d
re
s
Serial No. 340839
14 COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING FUNCTIONS
14-52 E
Serial No. 340839
MEASUREMENT SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
15
15 MEASUREMENT SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
Measurement by an EIA/ISO program is basically the same as that by a MAZATROL program.
Information given by a MAZATROL program may be executed by the following preparatory
function.
G31: Skip function
15-1 Skip Function: G31
Overview
er
ve
d
1.
.
15-1-1 Function description
Programming format
gh
2.
ts
re
s
During linear interpolation by G31, when an external skip signal is inputted, the feed will stop, all
remaining commands will be cancelled and then the program will skip to the next block.
.A
ll
ri
G31 Xx Yy Zz Ff ;
: Feed rate (mm/min)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
F
N
x, y, z : The coordinates of respective axes. These coordinates are designated using absolute
or incremental data.
al
N
Detailed description
An asynchronous feed rate commanded previously will be used as feed rate. If an
asynchronous feed command is not made previously and if Ff is not commanded, the alarm
922 SKIP SPEED ZERO will be caused. F-modal command data will not be updated by the
F-command given in the G31 block.
2.
Automatic acceleration/deceleration is not applied to command block G31.
3.
If feed rate is specified per minute, override, dry run and automatic acceleration/deceleration will not be allowed. They will be effective when feed rate is specified per revolution.
4.
Command G31 is unmodal, and thus set it each time.
5.
The execution of command G31 will immediately terminate if a skip signal is inputted at the
beginning.
Also, if a skip signal is not inputted until the end of command block G31, execution of this
command will terminate on completion of execution of move commands.
ZA
A
Setting this command code during tool radius compensation results in an alarm.
yr
ig
6.
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
K
1.
ri
3.
o.
This command starts linear interpolation, and when an external skip signal is inputted, the feed
will stop, the remaining distance of movement will be cancelled and the next block will be
executed.
Under a machine lock status the skip signals will be valid.
C
op
7.
15-1
Serial No. 340839
15 MEASUREMENT SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
4.
Execution of G31
G90
G00
G31
G01
G31
X–100. Y0
X–500. F100
Y–100.
X0
Y–200.
X–500.
Y–300.
X0
G31
Y
–100
.
er
ve
d
G31
–500
0
X
G31
gh
MEP221
o.
15-2 Skip Coordinate Reading
ri
.A
ll
–300
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
G01
–200
N
G01
ts
–100
G01
G31
re
s
W
G01
G00
X-100.
G31
X-200. F60
K
ZA
Skip signal input coordinate value (in the workpiece coordinates
system) is stored into variable #101.
YA
M
A
#101=#5061
Skip command
ZA
G90
K
IM
A
Se
ri
al
N
The coordinates of the positions where skip signals are input will be stored into system variables
#5061 (first axis) through #5076 (sixteenth axis). These coordinates can be called using user
macros.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
15-2
Serial No. 340839
MEASUREMENT SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
15
15-3 Amount of Coasting in the Execution of a G31 Block
The amount of coasting of the machine from the time a skip signal is inputted during G31
command to the time the machine stops differs according to the G31-defined feed rate or the F
command data contained in G31.
Accurate machine stop with a minimum amount of coasting is possible because of a short time
from the beginning of response to a skip signal to the stop with deceleration.
The amount of coasting is calculated as follows:
F
F
F
F
× Tp +
(t ± t ) =
× (Tp + t1) ±
× t2
60
60 1 2
60
60
0 =
1
0 :
F :
Tp :
t1 :
2
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Amount of coasting (mim)
G31 skip rate (mm/min)
–1
Position loop time constant (s) = (Position loop gain)
Response delay time (s) = (The time from skip signal detection until arrival at NC
through PC)
Response error time = 0.001 (s)
gh
t2 :
N
.A
ll
ri
When using command G31 for measurement purposes, measured data 1 can be corrected.
Such corrections, however, cannot be performed for 2.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Skip signal inputted
F
K
ZA
K
IM
t1 t2
Time (s)
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
The area of the hatched section denotes the
amount of coasting 0.
Tp
Stop pattern during skip signal inputted
A
ZA
TEP202
0.050
0.040
Max. value
Tp = 0.03
t1 = 0.005
Mean. value
Min. value
C
op
yr
ig
ht
)2
Amount of
coasting ()
(mm)
(c
01
3
YA
M
The diagram shown below represents the relationship between the feed rate and the amount of
coasting that will be established if Tp is set equal to 30 ms and, t1 to 5 ms.
0.030
0.020
0.010
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
Feed rate F
(mm/min)
Relationship between the amount of coasting and the feed rate (Example)
15-3
TEP203
Serial No. 340839
15 MEASUREMENT SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
15-4 Skip Coordinate Reading Error
1.
Reading the skip signal input coordinates
Skip signal input coordinate data does not include the amounts of coasting defined by position
loop time constant Tp and cutting feed time constant Ts. Thus skip signal input coordinates can
be checked by reading within the error range shown in the diagram below the workpiece
coordinates existing when skip signals were intputted. The amount of coasting that is defined by
response delay time t1, however, must be corrected to prevent a measurement error from
occurring.
F
× t2
60
er
ve
d
.
: Reading error (mm)
F : Rate of feed (mm/min)
t2 : Response delay time 0.001 (s)
re
s
=±
gh
0
60 Rate of feed (mm/min)
ri
Reading error
(m)
ts
+1
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
–1
The hatched section corresponds
to measured data.
Skip signal input coordinate reading error
K
ZA
A
TEP204
ZA
Reading coordinates other than those of skip signal inputs
A
2.
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
The reading error at a feed rate of 60 mm/min
60
× 0.001
= ±60
= ± 0.001 (mm)
and measured data stays within the reading error range of ± 1 m.
YA
M
Coordinate data that has been read includes an amount of coasting.
)2
01
3
If, therefore, you are to check the coordinate data existing when skip signals
were inputted, perform corrections as directed in Section 15-3 above.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
If, however, the particular amount of coasting defined by response delay time t 2 cannot be
calculated, then a measurement error will occur.
15-4
Serial No. 340839
MEASUREMENT SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
15
15-5 Multi-Step Skip: G31.1, G31.2, G31.3, G04
1.
Function and purpose
Conditional skipping becomes possible by previously setting a combination of skip signals that
are to be input. Skipping occurs in the same manner as that done with G31.
The skip function can be designated using commands G31.1, G31,2, G31.3, or G04. The
relationship between each of these G commands and the type of skip signal can be set by the
parameters K69 to K73.
G31.1 Xx Yy Zz Ff
(Same as for G31.2 or G31.3 Ff is not required for G04)
.
Programming format
er
ve
d
2.
Feed rate (mm/min)
re
s
Axis address and target coordinate data
Detailed description
1.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
3.
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
Using this programming format, you can execute linear interpolation in the same manner as that
done using command G31.
During linear interpolation, the machine will stop when the previously set skip signal input
conditions are satisfied, and then all remaining commands will be cancelled and the next block
will be executed.
For feed rates set by the parameter K42 to K44, the following relationship holds:
N
o.
G31.1 ............ G31.1 skip feed rate
G31.2 ............ G31.2 skip feed rate
G31.3 ............ G31.3 skip feed rate
3.
Except for items other than 1 and 2 above, the description of command code G31 also
applies.
A
ZA
ri
K
IM
Se
ZA
Parameter setting
The feed rate appropriate for each of the G31.1, G31.2, and G31.3 command codes can be
set by the parameters K42 to K44.
2.
The skip conditions appropriate for each of the G31.1, G31.2, G31.3 and G04 command
codes are to be set by parameters K69 to K73. (The skip conditions refer to the logical sum
of previously set skip signals).
A
1.
)2
01
3
YA
M
4.
K
The program will skip when the skip signal input conditions appropriate for each of these G
commands are satisfied.
al
2.
ig
ht
(c
A parameter setting of 7 is equivalent to G31.
C
op
yr
Parameter setting value
1
Valid skip signals
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
15-5
Serial No. 340839
15 MEASUREMENT SUPPORT FUNCTIONS
5.
Machine action
1.
Use of the multi-step skip function allows the following type of machine action control, and
hence, reduction of the measurement time with improved measurement accuracy.
If parameter settings are as shown below.
Skip condition
G31.1 = 7
G31.2 = 3
G31.3 = 1
Skip feed rate
20.0 mm/min (f1)
5.0 mm/min (f2)
1.0 mm/min (f3)
er
ve
d
.
Sample program
N10 G31.1X200.0
N20 G31.2X40.0
N30 G31.3X1.0
N10
.A
ll
N30
t
MEP225
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
(f3)
N
N20
(f2)
Input of skip signal A
Input of skip signal B
Input of skip signal C
ri
Measuring
distance
Skip feed rate
ZA
A
ri
K
IM
Se
K
During the machine action shown above, if input of skip signal 1 precedes that of
skip signal 2, the remaining distance of N20 will be skipped and N30 will also be
ignored.
al
Note:
If the skip signal corresponding to the conditions previously set is input during dwell
(command G04), the remaining time of dwell will be cancelled and the next block will be
executed.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
2.
gh
ts
(f1)
re
s
Action
f
15-6 E
Serial No. 340839
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
16
16 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
16-1 Pre-move Stroke Check ON/OFF: G22/G23
1.
Function and purpose
ts
re
s
Maker-defined software
stroke limit (Upper limit)
er
ve
d
.
While the user-defined software stroke limit check generates an outside machining prohibit area,
the pre-move stroke check function sets an inside machining prohibit area (shaded section in the
diagram below).
An alarm will occur beforehand for an axis movement command whose execution would cause
the tool to touch, or move in or through, the prohibit area.
Upper limit for G22
ZA
K
IM
User-defined software
stroke limit (Lower limit)
A
Se
ri
al
(i, j, k)
Lower limt for G22
K
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
(x, y, z)
.A
ll
ri
gh
User-defined software
stroke limit (Upper limit)
ZA
Maker-defined software
stroke limit (Lower limit)
YA
Programming format
01
3
2.
M
A
MEP220
ig
ht
(c
)2
G22 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_
Lower limit specification
Upper limit specification
(Cancellation)
C
op
yr
G23
(Inside machining prohibitarea specification)
16-1
Serial No. 340839
16 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
3.
Detailed description
1.
Both upper-limit and lower-limit values must be specified with machine coordinates.
2.
Use X, Y, Z to set the upper limit of the prohibit area, and I, J, K to set the lower limit. If the
value of X, Y, Z is smaller than that of I, J, K, then the former and the latter will be used as
the lower-limit and the upper-limit, respectively.
3.
No stroke limit checks will be performed if the upper- and lower-limit values that are
assigned to one and the same axis are identical.
G22X200.Y250.Z100.I200.J-200.K0
er
ve
d
.
The X-axis does not undergo the stroke check.
Give a G23 command to cancel the pre-move stroke limit check function.
5.
A block of G23 X_Y_Z_ will cause the axis motion command X_Y_Z_ to be executed in the
current mode of axis movement after cancellation of pre-move stroke limit check.
re
s
4.
Before setting G22, move the tool to a position outside the prohibit area.
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
Note:
16-2 E
Serial No. 340839
THREADING: G33
17
17 THREADING: G33
17-1 Equal-Lead Threading
1.
Function and purpose
Setting a G33 command in the program enables equal-lead threading under tool feed control
synchronized with spindle rotation.
Also, multiple-thread screws can be machined by specifying the starting angle of threading. A
d’ANDREA tool is required for fully automatic threading.
er
ve
d
A.
.
Programming format
Standard lead threading
re
s
2.
G33 Zz Ff Qq
Threading direction axis address and the thread length
Lead in the direction of the long axis (the axis to be moved through the longest distance
among all axes)
Threading start shift angle (0 to 360 degrees)
(The starting angle of threading becomes 0 degrees if omitted.)
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
z:
f:
Precise lead threading
G33 Zz Ee Qq
Threading direction axis address and the thread length
Lead in the direction of the long axis (the axis to be moved through the longest distance
among all axes)
Threading start shift angle (0 to 360 degrees)
(The starting angle of threading becomes 0 degrees if omitted.)
N
o.
z:
e:
1.
ZA
A
K
IM
Detailed description
For a tapered screw, specify the lead in the long-axis direction.
ZA
3.
Se
ri
al
q:
K
B.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
q:
YA
M
A
Z
01
3
Tapered thread
If a < 45°, then the lead must be Lz.
If a > 45°, then the lead must be Lx.
If a = 45°, then the lead can be either Lx or Lz.
a
ig
ht
(c
)2
Lz
X
C
op
yr
Lx
MEP226
The setting ranges of leads F and E are as follows:
Input unit
F-command lead data range (6-digit)
E-command lead data range (8-digit)
Metric
0.001 to 999.999 mm/rev
0.00001 to 999.99999 mm/rev
Inch
0.0001 to 99.9999 in/rev
0.000001 to 99.999999 in/rev
Note:
Alarm 134 SPINDLE ROTATION EXCEEDED will be displayed if the feed rate,
after being converted into a feed rate per minute, is in excess of the maximum
cutting feed rate.
17-1
Serial No. 340839
17 THREADING: G33
The E-command data will also be used as number-of-threads command data for threading
in inches. Whether the command data is to be used only as precise lead data or
number-of-threads data can be selected using bit 7 of parameter F91.
3.
Keep the spindle speed constant during the entire machining cycle from rough cutting to
finish cutting.
4.
During threading, feed hold does not work. Pressing the feed hold button during threading
brings the program to a block stop at the end of the block which immediately succeeds the
block under the control of the G33 mode (that is, the block at which the threading operation
has ended).
5.
For tapered screws, since machining cannot be stopped in the middle of threading, the
cutting feed rate after being converted may exceed the maximum cutting feed according to
the particular command data.
To prevent this from occurring, therefore, the command lead data must be set according to
the maximum feed rate obtained after conversion, not for the starting point of threading.
6.
Usually, the leads at the beginning of threading and at the end of threading become
incorrect because of a delay in the operation of the servo system. A thread length must
therefore be specified that has a probable, incorrect lead length added to the required
thread length.
7.
The spindle speed undergoes the following restriction:
N
Maximum feed rate
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
1R
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
2.
Thread lead
o.
where R must be smaller than or equal to the maximum allowable encoder revolutions
–1
(min ), and
–1
K
ZA
Se
ri
al
N
R:
Spindle speed (min )
Thread lead:
mm or inches
Maximum feed rate: mm/min or inches/min
The threading start shift angle must be specified using an integer from 0 to 360.
9.
The cutting feed override value is fixed at 100%.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
A
8.
17-2
Serial No. 340839
17
THREADING: G33
4.
Sample program
N110 G90G0X-200.Y-200.S50M3
N111 Z110.
N112 G33Z40.F6.0
N113 M19
N114 G0X-210.
N115 Z110.M0
N116 X-200.
M3
N117 G04X5.0:
N118 G33Z40.
Z
10
50
re
s
er
ve
d
.
10
X
X
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
Y
N
o.
<Operation description>
MEP227
N112
The first threading operation is performed.
Tread lead = 6.0 mm
N113
Spindle orientation based on an M19 command is performed.
N114
The tool moves away in the X-axis direction.
N115
The tool returns to a position above the workpiece, and an M00 command
stops the program. Adjust the tool as required.
ZA
Preparations for the second threading operation are made.
Set a dwell time, as required, to stabilize the spindle speed.
The second threading operation is performed.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
N118
A
ri
K
IM
Se
ZA
A
M
YA
)2
N117
01
3
N116
K
The spindle center is positioned at the workpiece center and the spindle
rotates forward.
al
N110, N111
17-3
Serial No. 340839
17 THREADING: G33
17-2 Continuous Threading
er
ve
d
.
Continuous threading becomes possible by setting threading command codes in succession in
the program. Thus, special threads that change in lead and/or shape during threading can be
machined. A D’ANDREA tool is required for continuous threading.
re
s
G33
G33
ts
G33
ri
gh
MEP228
N
Function and purpose
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
1.
.A
ll
17-3 Inch Threading
ZA
e:
Number of threads per inch in the direction of the long axis (the axis to be moved through
the longest distance among all axes)
(A decimal point can be included.)
q:
Threading start shift angle (0 to 360 degrees)
YA
Detailed description
M
A
ZA
K
IM
A
Threading direction axis address and the thread length
Se
z:
The number of threads per inch must be that existing in the long-axis direction.
2.
E-command data will also be used as command data for precise lead threading. Whether
the command data is to be used only as number-of-threads command data or precise lead
command data can be selected using bit 7 of parameter F91.
)2
01
3
1.
E-command data value must be in the setting range for the command.
C
op
yr
ig
3.
ht
(c
3.
ri
G33 Zz Ee Qq
K
N
Programming format
al
2.
o.
Including in a G33-command format the number of threads per inch in the long-axis direction
enables tool feed to be controlled in synchronization with spindle rotation, and thus enables
equal-lead straight threading and tapered threading.
17-4
Serial No. 340839
17
THREADING: G33
4.
Sample program
Thread lead ........ 3 thread leads/inch (= 3.46666...)
1 = 10 mm
2 = 10 mm
If programmed in millimeters:
er
ve
d
.
Z
re
s
1
50.0
mm
2
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
N210 G90G0X-200.Y-200.S50M3
N211 Z110.
N212 G91G33Z-70.E3.0
(First threading)
N213 M19
N214 G90G0X-210.
N215 Z110.M0
N216 X-200.
M3
N217 G04X2.0
N218 G91G33Z-70.
(Second threading)
X
X
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Y
17-5
MEP227
ht
ig
yr
op
C
01
3
)2
(c
K
ZA
al
ri
Se
A
K
IM
ZA
A
M
YA
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
N
ts
gh
ri
.
er
ve
d
re
s
Serial No. 340839
17 THREADING: G33
17-6 E
Serial No. 340839
DYNAMIC OFFSETTING: M173, M174 (OPTION)
18
18 DYNAMIC OFFSETTING: M173, M174 (OPTION)
1.
Function and purpose
Workpiece
before machining
er
ve
d
.
Machining with rotation of the rotary table (B-axis) requires in principle the axis of rotation of the
workpiece to be completely aligned with the axis of rotation of the table.
ts
re
s
Workpiece
after machining
ri
gh
MEP232
B axis
K
ZA
A
X axis
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
In practice, however, this is very difficult to implement for the reasons of fixture design, unless a
very precise fixture is used.
Dynamic offsetting is a function that internally compensates continuous deviation due to the
misalignment in question. As a result, machining program can easily be prepared on the assumption that the alignment is ideal.
ZA
Z axis
M
A
Axis of rotation
of the table
01
3
YA
Axis of rotation
of the workpiece
Dynamic offsetting ON
Dynamic offsetting OFF
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
M173
G01 B360. F500
M174
18-1
MEP233
Serial No. 340839
18 DYNAMIC OFFSETTING: M173, M174 (OPTION)
Detailed description
1.
Automatic limitation by the software does not occur even if dynamic offsetting may cause
the stroke limit to be overstepped.
2.
Reduce to 3 mm or less the eccentricity of an actually mounted workpiece from the axis of
rotation of the table; otherwise the alarm 137 DYNAMIC COMPENSATION EXCEEDED is
caused.
Automatic operation is executed on the assumption that the origin of the workpiece
coordinates lies on the axis of rotation of the workpiece. Manual operation uses the data in
parameter I11 (as described later).
3.
The workpiece origin must be set on the axis of rotation of a workpiece when it is to be
machined using dynamic offsetting.
4.
Dynamic offsetting is not effective in the 3-dimensional coordinates conversion mode (G68).
5.
The related parameters are as follows:
I11
Axis of workpiece rotation
re
s
Set the machine coordinates of the axis of the table rotation for the
controlled axes concerned.
Unit:
0.001 mm
ri
Axis of table
rotation
Set the machine coordinates of the axis of the workpiece rotation,
existing at a table angle of 0 degrees, for the controlled axes
concerned. (This parameter is valid only for manual operation.)
Range:
±99999999
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
S5
Description
ts
Setting
gh
Name
.A
ll
Address
er
ve
d
.
2.
Dynamic offsetting is provided for the type of machining that can in principle be achieved by
turning the workpiece only with the tool in a fixed position.
K
ZA
A
YA
M
Table
ZA
K
IM
Workpiece
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
6.
01
3
)2
Sample program
G55 ....................... The workpiece axis is assumed to go through the origin of the G55 system.
G0X_Y_Z_ ............ Approach
M173 ..................... Dynamic offsetting ON
G1 Z_F_
Start of cutting
B_F_................ B-axis rotation
Z_F_................ Relief on the Z-axis
M174 ..................... Dynamic offsetting OFF
M30 ....................... End of machining
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
3.
MEP234
18-2 E
Serial No. 340839
HOB MILLING (OPTION)
19
19 HOB MILLING (OPTION)
19-1 Hob Milling Mode ON/OFF: G114.3/G113
1.
Outline
A synchronization control of the (cutter) spindle and the C-axis allows them to be used as the
hob spindle and the workpiece spindle, respectively, in order to generate spur and helical gears.
Lead angle
re
s
er
ve
d
Z-axis
Y-axis
.
The hob milling function, however, is only available to machining centers with a table to be tilted
on the A- or B-axis, as well as to those with a tool-swiveling axis and a table’s rotational axis.
Tilting on the A-axis
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Workpiece
.A
ll
Hob spindle
(Cutter
spindle)
ri
gh
ts
A-axis
C-axis for table rotation
(Workpiece spindle)
o.
Programming format
N
Start of hobbing
ZA
ri
al
G114.3 D±1 E_L_P_Q_R_K_;
K
2.
A
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
D .......Selection of the direction of workpiece spindle’s rotation
The direction of rotation depends upon a parameter setting as follows:
<When parameter K103 bit 0 = 0>
+1 : Rotation of the workpiece spindle in the reverse direction to the hob spindle.
–1 : Rotation of the workpiece spindle in the same direction as the hob spindle.
<When parameter K103 bit 0 = 1>
+1 : Rotation of the workpiece spindle in the same direction as the hob spindle.
–1 : Rotation of the workpiece spindle in the reverse direction to the hob spindle.
E .......Number of threads of the hob
L ........Number of teeth on the gear
P .......Helix angle
Specify the desired helix angle for a helical gear.
Omit the argument, or specify 0 (degree) for a spur gear.
Q .......Module or Diametral pitch
Specify the normal module, or diametral pitch, for a helical gear.
Use argument K to specify the data type of argument Q.
Argument K can be omitted if argument Q is to be specified as follows:
In the mode of metric data input (G21) : Module
In the mode of inch data input (G20) : Diametral pitch
It depends upon the setting of bit 3 of parameter F144 whether or not a negative
value (with a minus sign) can be used as argument Q.
When F144 bit 3 = 0:
Negative values cannot be used as argument Q (rejected by alarm 809
ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT).
When F144 bit 3 = 1:
Even a negative value can be used as argument Q.
ig
yr
op
C
D747PB0025
19-1
Serial No. 340839
19 HOB MILLING (OPTION)
R .......Angle of phase shift
Specify the angle for phase matching between the hob spindle (milling spindle) and
the workpiece spindle (C-axis).
The specified angle refers to the initial rotation (angular positioning) of the hob
spindle after completion of the zero-point return of the hob and workpiece spindles as
a preparation for the synchronization control.
0 to 100
L
1 to 9999
.A
ll
±1
E
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
D
er
ve
d
Default value
ri
Setting range
N
Address
gh
The setting range and default value for each argument are as follows:
–90.0000 to 90.0000 deg [0.0001 deg]
P
Module:
0.1 to 50.0 and –0.1 to –50.0 mm [0.001 mm]
Q
+1
1
1
0 (Spur gear)
Ommision of Q causes an alarm (807) if a significant argument P is specified in the same
block.
N
o.
Diametral pitch:
0.1 to 50.0 and –0.1 to –50.0 in–1 [0.0001 in–1]
re
s
Cancellation of the hob milling mode
The synchronization control of the hob spindle and the workpiece spindle is canceled.
ts
G113;
.
K .......Data type of argument Q
Specify the data type of argument Q.
0 : In accordance with the data input mode.
In the mode of metric data input (G21) : Module
In the mode of inch data input (G20) : Diametral pitch
1 : Module
2 : Diametral pitch
Se
No phase matching
0
ZA
0/1/2
ri
K
K
0 to 359.999 deg [0.001 deg]
al
R
K
IM
A
The argument D leads to an alarm (809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT) if a value outside the
setting range is specified.
A
ZA
The workpiece spindle does not rotate with the argument E (Number of hob threads) set to “0.”
Consequently, the designation of argument R for phase matching is not effective.
M
The argument Q is ignored if the argument P is not specified in the same block.
01
3
YA
The alarm 809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT is raised if the argument K is set to a value other
than 0, 1 and 2.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
The alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT is raised if the argument K is set with a decimal point.
19-2
Serial No. 340839
19
HOB MILLING (OPTION)
3.
Sample program
The preparation of a program for hobbing a spur gear is explained below with examples.
1.
Details of the gear to be generated and the tool to be used
Spur gear
Hob
Module
Module
1.5
Number of teeth
38
Lead angle
1°41'
Whole depth of teeth
3.375
Number of threads
1
Handedness
Right-handed
Tool diameter
55
.
Diameter of the workpiece
er
ve
d
2.
1.5
re
s
The diameter of the blank workpiece (preliminarily turned one into which to cut a spur gear)
is calculated as follows:
ri
gh
ts
D = Z × m + 2 × m = (Z + 2) m
D: Diameter
Z: Number of teeth
m: Module
N
Table index angle
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
3.
.A
ll
For our example, the outside diameter of preliminary turning is (38 + 2) × 1.5 = 60.0 [mm].
Hob
K
ZA
Lead angle
A
A = –90°
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Workpiece
YA
M
A
D747PB0026
01
3
For the initial angular positioning, index or swivel the cutter spindle so as to make the cutting
teeth of the hob parallel with the teeth to be cut in the workpiece.
ht
(c
)2
The case shown above where the parallelism is realized in the front view refers to cutting
with the tool being fed behind the workpiece (i.e. on the negative side of the X-axis, with
respect to the axis of rotation of the table).
C
op
yr
ig
(The initial positioning can be done by an angular shift on the A-axis through the lead
angle.)
The A-axis index angle for the initial positioning is calculated as follows.
Cutting on the positive side of the X-axis [from the axis of rotation of the table]:
()
–90° + 1.683° = –88.317°,
Cutting on the negative side of the X-axis [from the axis of rotation of the table]:
()
–90° – 1.683° = –91.683°.
As one degree (1°) is equal to 60 minutes (60'), the lead angle in question, 1°41', can be
converted into (60 + 41)/60 = 1.683°.
19-3
Serial No. 340839
19 HOB MILLING (OPTION)
4.
Directions of the tool’s and workpiece’s rotations
<For cutting on the positive side of the X-axis [from the axis of rotation of the table]>
Z+
Wave of the
cutting teeth
A = –88.317
X+
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Y+
gh
ts
D747PB0027
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
The right-handed hob used requires the cutter spindle mounted with it to be rotated in the
normal direction (right-hand rotation).
The wave, so to say, of the cutting teeth moves upwards when the cutter spindle rotates in
the normal direction. The workpiece spindle must be rotated, therefore, in the direction of
the arrow in the figure above so as to move the “surface to be cut” in the same direction as
the “wave of the cutting teeth”.
<For cutting on the negative side of the X-axis [from the axis of rotation of the table]>
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
A = –91.683
ri
al
N
o.
Z+
Wave of the
cutting teeth
X+
YA
M
A
ZA
Y+
01
3
D747PB0028
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
The right-handed hob used requires the cutter spindle mounted with it to be rotated in the
normal direction (right-hand rotation).
The wave, so to say, of the cutting teeth moves upwards when the cutter spindle rotates in
the normal direction. The workpiece spindle must be rotated, therefore, in the direction of
the arrow in the figure above so as to move the “surface to be cut” in the same direction as
the “wave of the cutting teeth”.
19-4
Serial No. 340839
HOB MILLING (OPTION)
5.
19
Relevant settings on the TOOL DATA and TOOL OFFSET displays
<Settings for the use of MAZATROL tool data>
Register the required data for an OTHER (milling) tool on the TOOL DATA display.
(The example below is given for metric data setting.)
Item
Setting
—
OTHER
NOM-
mm
55
ID CODE
—
A
LENGTH
mm
250
ACT-
mm
55
MAX. ROT.
min–1
1000
er
ve
d
.
Unit
TOOL
gh
ts
re
s
Tool’s
reference position
.A
ll
ri
LENGTH
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Cutting point
ACT-
Set the relevant parameters as follows:
Address
Description
ACT-/NOSE-R in the TOOL DATA display for an EIA/ISO program
F93 bit 3
LENGTH data in the TOOL DATA display for an EIA/ISO program
F94 bit 7
Offset or compensation values to be used for an EIA/ISO program
K
ZA
Se
ri
al
N
o.
F92 bit 7
Setting
1: Valid
1: Valid
0: Values in the TOOL
OFFSET display
ZA
K
IM
A
<Settings for the use of tool offsetting data>
Register the required data on the TOOL OFFSET display.
(The example below is given for metric data setting.)
Unit
A
Item
Setting
mm
250
GEOMETRIC OFFSET NOSE-R
mm
27.5 (Radius of the hob)
Tool’s
reference position
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
GEOMETRIC OFFSET Z
op
yr
ig
ht
GEOMETRIC
OFFSET
Z
C
Cutting point
GEOMETRIC
OFFSET NOSE-R
Set the relevant parameters as follows:
Address
Description
F92 bit 7
ACT-/NOSE-R in the TOOL DATA display for an EIA/ISO program
0: Invalid
F93 bit 3
LENGTH data in the TOOL DATA display for an EIA/ISO program
0: Invalid
F94 bit 7
Offset or compensation values to be used for an EIA/ISO program
0: Values in the TOOL
OFFSET display
19-5
Setting
Serial No. 340839
19 HOB MILLING (OPTION)
A.
Generating a spur gear (without phase matching)
G91G28XYZ
G28AC
G64 ................................................ Selection of the “Cutting mode.”
G94G97 .......................................... Feed per minute.
T30M6 ............................................ Tool change for TNo. 30 (hob).
G92S1000R3 ................................. Limiting the cutter spindle speed to 1000 min–1.
M3S0 .............................................. Start of the (cutter) hob spindle’s normal rotation [M3] at a speed of zero [S0].
G53A-91.683 ............................... A-axis motion to –90° – 1.683° [lead angle]. (Cutting on the –X side)
G54 ................................................ Selection of the G54 workpiece coordinate system.
er
ve
d
.
G90 ................................................ Absolute data input.
G43G0H1X-100.Z100.Y-30. ..... Tool length offset ON.
re
s
G90G0Z-50.M8 ............................. Approach.
G41D1X[-30.+3.375-0.5] ....... Tool radius compensation ON with X-axis motion to the roughing position.
ts
G114.3D+1E1L38R0 .................... Selection of the hob milling mode. Positive value of D for the same rotational
gh
direction (normal in this case) of the workpiece spindle as the hob spindle.
ri
M3S230 .......................................... Start of the (cutter) hob spindle’s rotation at 230 min–1 (for a cutting speed of
.A
ll
40 m/min, resulting from the hob cutter’s diameter [55 mm]).
N
G1Y100.Z-46.181F18. .............. Linear shift on the Z-axis according to that angular shift by 1.683° (lead angle)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
which makes the cutting teeth of the hob parallel with the teeth to be cut in the
workpiece.
G0X-100.
G0Y-30.Z-50.
G41D1X[-30.+3.375] .............. X-axis motion to the finishing position. (See the figure below.)
N
o.
G1Y100.Z-46.181F6.
ZA
ri
Y-150.Z100.
K
al
G0X-100.
A
Se
M5 .................................................. Stop of the (cutter) hob spindle.
K
IM
G113 .............................................. Cancellation of the hob milling mode.
G40 ................................................ Tool radius compensation OFF.
ZA
G49 ................................................ Tool length offset OFF.
+Y
01
3
YA
M
A
M30
)2
Workpiece
radius = 30
Cutting point
yr
ig
ht
(c
Whole depth of
teeth = 3.375
op
Finishing position
on the X-axis
Whole depth of teeth = 3.375,
and
Workpiece radius = 30.
The finishing position on the X-axis,
therefore, is calculated as follows:
–30 + 3.375 = –26.625
C
–26.625
+X
Unit: mm
Diameter of the
hob = 55
D747PB0029
19-6
Serial No. 340839
HOB MILLING (OPTION)
B.
19
Generating a helical gear (with phase matching)
G91G28XYZ
G28AC
G64 ................................................ Selection of the “Cutting mode.”
G94G97 .......................................... Feed per minute.
T30M6 ............................................ Tool change for TNo. 30 (hob).
G92S1000R3 ................................. Limiting the cutter spindle speed to 1000 min–1.
M3S0 .............................................. Start of the (cutter) hob spindle’s normal rotation [M3] at a speed of zero [S0].
G53A-87.2 ................................... A-axis motion to –87.2° (angle for spur gear).
G54 ................................................ Selection of the G54 workpiece coordinate system.
er
ve
d
.
G90 ................................................ Absolute data input.
G43G0H1X-100.Z100.Y-30. ..... Tool length offset ON.
re
s
G90G0Z-50.M8 ............................. Approach.
G41D1X[-30.+3.375-0.5] ....... Tool radius compensation ON with X-axis motion to the roughing position.
ts
G114.3D+1E1L10P-20.Q2.R0 ... Selection of the hob milling mode (with phase matching).
.A
ll
ri
gh
Positive value of D for the same rotational direction (normal in this case) of the
workpiece spindle as the hob spindle.
Helix angle –20° with reference to the angle for spur gear (–87.2°).
M3S230 .......................................... Start of the (hob) milling spindle’s rotation at 230 min–1 (for a cutting speed of
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
40 m/min, resulting from the hob cutter’s diameter [55 mm]).
G1Y100.Z-46.181F18. .............. Cutting with interpolation on the YZ-plane.
G0X-100.
G0Y-30.Z-50.
G41D1X[-30.+3.375] .............. X-axis motion to the finishing position.
ri
Y-150.Z100.
ZA
al
G0X-100.
K
N
o.
G1Y100.Z-46.181F6.
A
Se
M5 .................................................. Stop of the (cutter) hob spindle.
K
IM
G113 .............................................. Cancellation of the hob milling mode.
G40 ................................................ Tool radius compensation OFF.
ZA
G49 ................................................ Tool length offset OFF.
YA
Detailed description
Give an S-code and M-code, respectively, to specify the rotational speed and direction of
the spindle selected as the hob spindle.
2.
The block of G114.3 must be preceded by a command of “0” speed and a selection of the
rotational direction of the hob spindle. The synchronization cannot be established if a
command of G114.3 is given with the hob spindle already rotating or without its rotational
direction specified.
(c
)2
01
3
1.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
4.
M
A
M30
3.
The rotational speed of the workpiece spindle is determined by the number of hob threads
and that of gear teeth, both specified in the block of G114.3.
Sw = Sh × E/L
where Sw:
Sh:
E:
L:
4.
Rotational speed of the workpiece spindle
Rotational speed of the hob spindle
Rotational ratio of the hob spindle (Number of hob threads)
Rotational ratio of the workpiece spindle (Number of gear teeth)
Once determined by the hob milling command (G114.3), the rotational relationship between
the workpiece spindle and the hob spindle is maintained in all operation modes until a hob
milling cancel command (G113) or spindle synchronization cancel command is given.
19-7
Serial No. 340839
19 HOB MILLING (OPTION)
The synchronization of the workpiece spindle with the hob spindle is started by the hob
milling command (G114.3) at a speed of 0 revolutions per minute.
6.
In the mode of hob milling the C-axis counter on the POSITION display does not work as the
indicator of actual motion.
7.
Use the preparatory function for asynchronous feed (G94) to cut a helical gear.
Precautions
Do not change, or override, the cutter spindle speed if hob milling operations are to be
repeated on the same machining section; otherwise gear cutting accuracy cannot be
guaranteed due to inevitable change in the phase at the start of hob milling.
2.
If a motion command for the C-axis (workpiece spindle) is given in the middle of the hob
milling mode by a manual or MDI interruption, or even in the program, such a shifting motion
will be superimposed on the synchronized C-axis movement. In this case, however, the
synchronization between the C-axis and the cutter spindle cannot be guaranteed.
3.
A faulty machining could occur if the axis movement should come to a stop in the hob milling
mode by the activation of the single-block operation mode or the feed hold function, in which
case the cutter spindle alone continues rotating and thus runs out of the required synchronization with the workpiece spindle.
4.
A phase mismatching or an excessive error could occur if the cutter spindle should be
stopped in the hob milling mode by a command of M05, M00, or M01.
5.
The C-axis offset settings are ignored appropriately in the hob milling mode.
6.
If the specified speed of the cutter spindle is in excess of its upper limit, the cutter spindle
speed will be set to that limit and the C-axis will rotate in accordance with the cutter spindle
limit speed and the rotational ratio.
7.
If the calculated speed of the C-axis rotation exceeds its upper limit, the C-axis speed will be
set to that limit and the cutter spindle will rotate in accordance with the C-axis speed limit
and the rotational ratio.
8.
Stop the (cutter) hob spindle by M05 before cancelling the hob milling mode (by G113);
otherwise an overrunning movement on the C-axis before stopping may occur during
execution of G113.
.
1.
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
5.
5.
19-8
Serial No. 340839
19
HOB MILLING (OPTION)
19-2 Hob Milling Mode II (Hob Milling with Positioning Control)
1.
Outline
Gear cutting can be continued smoothly without any phase mismatching even if the milling
spindle speed is changed by operating the override keys during execution of a feed block in the
hob milling mode II. This feature is useful in efficiently determining the cutting conditions for hob
milling.
Use bit 0 of parameter F330 as follows to disable or enable the hob milling mode II.
F330 bit 0 = 0: Hob milling mode
2.
er
ve
d
.
= 1: Hob milling mode II
Programming format
ts
re
s
The information given in Section 19-1 is also applicable to the hob milling mode II with the sole
exception of the default value of argument R (Angle of phase shift) as shown below.
Setting range
Default value
R
0 to 359.999 [deg]
Zero point for the rotation of the hob spindle
.A
ll
ri
gh
Address
3.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
See Section 19-1 “Hob Milling Mode ON/OFF: G114.3/G113” for more information on the programming format.
Sample program
K
ZA
A
Detailed description
K
IM
4.
Se
ri
al
N
o.
See Section 19-1 “Hob Milling Mode ON/OFF: G114.3/G113” for sample
programs.
YA
M
A
ZA
In the hob milling mode II the digital information on the current angular positions of the hob and
workpiece spindles (V- and C-axis) is always displayed as “0” if it is given (under POSITION) with
respect to the workpiece coordinate system. The positional information under MACHINE (given
with respect to the machine coordinate system) depends upon the setting of bit 1 of parameter
F330 as follows.
01
3
F330 bit 1 = 0: MACHINE values remain “0” for the V- and the C-axis.
See Section 19-1 “Hob Milling Mode ON/OFF: G114.3/G113” for the other
items of detailed information.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
= 1: MACHINE values indicate the machine coordinates of the current positions on
the V- and the C-axis.
5.
Remarks
1.
If a motion command for the C-axis (workpiece spindle) is given in the middle of the hob
milling mode II by a manual or MDI interruption, or even in the program, such a shifting
motion will be superimposed on the synchronized C-axis movement.
2.
The C-axis offset settings are ignored appropriately in the hob milling mode II.
3.
If the specified speed of the hob spindle is in excess of its upper limit, the hob spindle speed
will be set to that limit and the workpiece spindle will rotate on the C-axis in accordance with
the hob spindle limit speed and the rotational ratio.
19-9
Serial No. 340839
19 HOB MILLING (OPTION)
4.
If the calculated speed of the C-axis rotation (of the workpiece spindle) exceeds its upper
limit, the C-axis speed will be set to that limit and the hob spindle will rotate in accordance
with the C-axis speed limit and the rotational ratio.
5.
The selection of the hob milling mode II (G114.3) in the mode of geometry compensation
(G61.1) or modal spline interpolation (G61.2) will only result in an alarm (807 ILLEGAL
FORMAT).
6.
The synchronization between the hob and workpiece spindles cannot be guaranteed any
more if a cutting operation in the hob milling mode II should be interrupted, with both
spindles being stopped abruptly, due to an emergency stop or a servo alarm.
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
If an operation stop, however, is caused by pressing the
key, by a command of M00,
M02 or M30 as well as by the activation of the single-block operation mode or the feed hold
function, the spindles are decelerated and stopped in such a way that their synchronization
may be kept intact.
19-10 E
Serial No. 340839
20
HIGH-SPEED SMOOTHING CONTROL FUNCTION
20 HIGH-SPEED SMOOTHING CONTROL FUNCTION
The high-speed smoothing control function allows rapid and highly accurate execution of an
EIA/ISO program which is prepared to approximate free-curved surfaces with very small lines.
Compared with the conventional high-speed machining mode, this function allows machining
almost free of cut-surface defects and stripes.
The application of speed control based on a block-to-block angle, such as corner deceleration, in
the conventional high-speed machining mode may cause acceleration and deceleration to be
repeated in too formal a response to minute steps or to errors. As a result, scratch-like traces or
stripes may be left on a cut surface.
re
s
er
ve
d
.
By judging the machining shape or contour from the specified continuous lines as well as from
the angle between two blocks, the high-speed smoothing control conducts the optimum speed
control not affected too significantly by very slight steps or undulations. Consequently, a cut
surface with less scratch-like traces or stripes can be obtained.
ts
Some of the outstanding features of high-speed smoothing control are listed below.
gh
Effective for machining a die of a smooth shape using a microsegment program.
.A
ll
ri
Speed control is insusceptible to the effects of any errors contained in the tool path.
N
If adjacent paths are similar in terms of geometrical accuracy, acceleration and deceleration
patterns will also be similar.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Even at the sections where corner deceleration is not necessary with respect to the angle,
speed will be clamped if the estimated acceleration is great.
N
o.
This function is valid during high-speed machining mode with the geometry compensation being
selected.
K
ZA
Feed
No deceleration
Deceleration
according to the
corner angle
Time
Time
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
For obtuse
corners (<)
High-speed smoothing control
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
Optimum deceleration at corners
(conventional control)
Feed
Feed
Feed
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
For sharper
corners (>)
= Reference angle for
deceleration at corners
Time
Time
D735P0563
20-1
Serial No. 340839
20 HIGH-SPEED SMOOTHING CONTROL FUNCTION
20-1 Programming Format
G61.1 (G61.2);
G5P2; ········· High-speed machining mode (with smoothing control) ON
Either 0 or 2 is to be set with address P (P0 or P2).
No other addresses than P and N must be set in the same block with G05.
Use the following parameter to make the high-speed smoothing control valid.
F3 bit 0 = 1: High-speed smoothing control valid
0: High-speed smoothing control invalid (Only high-speed machining valid)
re
s
20-2 Commands Available in the High-Speed Smoothing Control Mode
er
ve
d
.
Give G61.1 (Shape correction ON) or G61.2 (Modal spline interpolation) before G05P2 to use
the high-speed smoothing control.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
As is the case with the high-speed machining mode feature, only axis motion commands with the
corresponding preparatory functions (G-codes) and feed functions (F-codes), designation of
sequence number, codes for Control Out and Control In (parentheses), as well as M/S/T
functions are available in the high-speed smoothing control. Setting data of any other type will
result in an alarm (807 ILLEGAL FORMAT).
See Chapter 22 for a detailed description of the high-speed machining mode
feature.
o.
G-codes
N
1.
K
ZA
Se
ri
al
The available preparatory functions are G00, G01, G02, G03, G17, G18, G19, G90, G91, G93
and G94.
ZA
K
IM
A
The circular interpolation can be programmed with R (radius designation) as well as with I and J
(center designation), and executed always (independently of the setting in bit 2 of the F96
parameter) with the control for a uniform feed. Do not give, in particular, a command for spiral
interpolation (since it is always rejected with alarm 807 ILLEGAL FORMAT).
YA
M
A
Moreover, the type of feed function can be selected even in the middle of the high-speed
smoothing control mode between G93 (Inverse time feed) and G94 (Asynchronous feed).
However, synchronous feed (Feed per revolution; G95) is not available.
(c
Axis motion commands
ht
2.
)2
01
3
With the exception of group 1, the modal G-functions will be saved during, and restored upon
cancellation of, the high-speed smoothing control mode.
C
op
yr
ig
The three linear axes (X, Y, Z) can be specified. Absolute data input as well as incremental data
input is applicable, indeed, but the former input mode requires the validation of bit 5 of the F84
parameter.
F84 bit 5 : Type of position data input in the high-speed machining mode:
1: The input mode (G90/G91) before selection of the high-speed machining mode
0: Always incremental data input
3.
Feed functions
The rate of feed can be specified with address F.
20-2
Serial No. 340839
HIGH-SPEED SMOOTHING CONTROL FUNCTION
4.
20
Sequence number
Sequence number can be specified with address N. This number, however, is skipped as a
meaningless code during reading.
5.
Control Out and Control In
Use round brackets “(” and “)” as required to insert a comment.
See Section 3-1 for more information.
M/S/T functions
gh
6.
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
It should be noted here, however, that useless deceleration may be caused by a move-free block.
Move-free are, for instance, an empty block (null contents), one beginning and ending with “(”
and “)”, a G91-block with a moving distance of zero (0) as well as a G90-block for the very same
position.
.A
ll
ri
Codes (M, S, and T) of miscellaneous, spindle, and tool functions can be used in general as
required. Use of these functions, however, may cause useless deceleration.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
No. 2 miscellaneous functions (8-digit A-, B- or C-codes).
N
Use of the following functions in particular can only cause an alarm (807 ILLEGAL FORMAT):
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Special M-codes for interrupting by, and calling for, a macroprogram (M96, M97, M98, M99).
20-3
Serial No. 340839
20 HIGH-SPEED SMOOTHING CONTROL FUNCTION
20-3 Additional Functions in the High-Speed Smoothing Control Mode
During high-speed smoothing control, fairing, although basically not required, can be made valid,
as with normal high-speed machining mode.
1.
Fairing function
If, in a series of linear paths, a protruding section exists in the CAM-created microsegment
machining program, this protruding path can be removed and the preceding and following paths
connected smoothly by setting parameter F96 bit 1 to “1”.
er
ve
d
.
F96 bit 1: Faring function for the microsegment machining program
1: Faring for a protruding path
0: No faring
re
s
F103: Maximum length of a block to be removed for fairing
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
The effect of fairing
Before fairing
After fairing
D735P0564
K
ZA
A
In the middle of fairing
YA
M
Before fairing
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Fairing is also valid for a succession of protruding paths as shown below:
After fairing
)2
01
3
D735P0565
(c
20-4 Related Parameters
ig
ht
The parameter settings related to this function are as follows:
C
op
yr
F3 = 0 : High-speed smoothing control invalid
1 : High-speed smoothing control valid (No deceleration at very slightly stepped sections)
3 : High-speed smoothing control valid (Deceleration at all stepped sections)
Under the default setting (1), deceleration does not occur at very slight steps of 5 microns or less
since such steps are processed as errors in the programmed path. For a machining program
which requires all the described contours in it to be respected as they are, set this parameter to 3
to obtain precise feed control for the as-programmed shape.
20-4
Serial No. 340839
HIGH-SPEED SMOOTHING CONTROL FUNCTION
20
20-5 Restrictions
The modal functions for tool radius compensation, mirror image, scaling, coordinate system
rotation, virtual axis interpolation, three-dimensional radius compensation and shaping
function should have been cancelled beforehand to give a G05 P2 command. Otherwise, an
alarm may be caused or the modal function unexpectedly cancelled.
2.
The high-speed smoothing control mode should be selected and cancelled with the tool
sufficiently cleared from the workpiece since the selection and cancellation always cause a
deceleration of feed motions.
3.
Fairing function cannot be executed in the mode of single-block operation.
4.
The high-speed smoothing control is not valid for rotational axes.
5.
Fairing function cannot be executed in the mode of tool tip point control, cutting point command, tool radius compensation for five-axis machining, workpiece setup error correction, or
inclined-plane machining.
6.
In the mode of high-speed machining a block of M/S/T function causes the flow of
processing for fairing to be interrupted temporarily.
7.
In the mode of high-speed machining a block of TM6 for tool change causes the
execution speed and the fairing function to be lowered and suppressed, respectively, until a
length-offsetting value is made valid for the new tool, which does not occur implicitly if the
length values of the MAZATROL tool data are not to be used in executing EIA/ISO
programs (F93 bit 3 = 0). In this case, therefore, it is necessary to cancel the high-speed
machining mode temporarily so as to give explicitly the required G43-command for tool
length offset.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
1.
Tool change
Interpolation for high-speed machining
o.
T01M6
N
G01 X__ F__
suppressed
ZA
resumed
K
IM
Se
X__ Y__
A
ri
al
Z__
K
Offsetting value made valid at the
first Z-axis movement
20-6 Related Alarms
A
ZA
The alarms related to this function are as follows:
YA
Alarm message
ILLEGAL OPER.
HIGH SMOOTHING
CTR
(c
ILLEGAL FORMAT
ht
807
)2
01
3
169
M
Alarm
No.
ILLEGAL NUMBER
INPUT
Remedy
In the mode of high-speed smoothing
control an unavailable operation (MDI
interruption, zero point return) was
attempted.
MDI interruption or zero point return cannot be performed in the mode of highspeed smoothing control.
An unavailable command code is given
in the G5P2 mode.
Check the machining program and make
corrections as required.
The number of digits of the entered
numerical data is too large.
Check the machining program and make
corrections as required.
C
op
yr
ig
809
Cause
20-5
ht
ig
yr
op
C
01
3
)2
(c
K
ZA
al
ri
Se
A
K
IM
ZA
A
M
YA
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
N
ts
gh
ri
.
er
ve
d
re
s
Serial No. 340839
20 HIGH-SPEED SMOOTHING CONTROL FUNCTION
20-6 E
Serial No. 340839
21
TORNADO TAPPING (G130)
21 TORNADO TAPPING (G130)
1.
Function and purpose
Tornado tapping cycle is provided to machine a tapped hole by one axial cutting motion with the
aid of a special tool. While usual tapping cycles require multiple tools to be used in sequence,
use of this cycle function spares tool change time as well as repetitive cutting motion in order to
enhance the machining efficiency.
This cycle function is only available on machines equipped with the Y-axis control facility.
Tornado tapping function requires the following parameter settings for macro-call
G-codes:
.
Note :
Programming format
ri
2.
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
J37 = 100009401 (Fixed value for the number of the macroprogram to be called for
tornado tapping)
J38 = 130 (Fixed value for the number of the G-code to be used for macro call)
J39 = 2 (Fixed value for the type of macro call)
.A
ll
The following format refers to hole machining on the face [or O. D. surface].
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
G17 [or G19];
G130 R_Z_D_T_V_F_H_I_J_K_Q_E_M1 [or M0];
X [or Z] _Y_; (Setting of hole position)
G67;
N
o.
Hole machining axis
ZA
K
IM
Se
A
ri
E
Cutting surface
K
al
R
45°
ZA
I
V
J
Z
D
TEP300
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
H
R: Position of R-point
Z: Position of hole bottom
D: Hole diameter
T: Tool diameter
V: Hole depth
F: Feed rate
H: Chamfering amount
I: Pitch 1
J: Pitch 2
K: Bottom finishing
(0: No, 1: Yes, Others: Yes)
Q: Machining direction (0: CW, 1: CCW)
E: Position of 2nd R-point
M: Hole machining axis (0: X, 1: Z or oblique)
yr
ig
The chamfering angle is fixed at 45°.
C
op
Arguments D (hole diameter) and T (tool diameter) must satisfy the following condition:
D T D/2.
Argument K is used to select whether finishing is to be (K1) or not to be (K0) executed on the
bottom of the hole.
Set the hole position separately from the macro-call G-code (G130).
As is the case with usual fixed cycles, actual machining with axial movement can only be
executed for a block containing the hole position data.
Do not fail to set the code G67 as required to cancel the modal call.
21-1
Serial No. 340839
21 TORNADO TAPPING (G130)
3.
Description of movement
A.
Hole machining
1.
With chamfering
After moving from the current position to the R-point on the hole axis and then approaching
to a point on the 2nd R-point level, chamfering is performed by a spiral-helical interpolation
first, and then cylindrical machining is carried out to the bottom by a circular-helical interpolation.
Cutting feed
Rapid traverse
R-point
er
ve
d
Approach point
2nd R-point
E
re
s
R
.
Initial point
gh
ts
Cutting
surface
ri
Pitch 1
Chamfer
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
Hole depth
Pitch 2
Without chamfering
N
2.
TEP301
o.
Hole diameter
YA
M
A
ZA
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
After moving from the current position to the R-point on the hole axis and then approaching
through the hole radius and to a point on the 2nd R-point level, cylindrical machining is
carried out from the top to the bottom by a circular-helical interpolation.
Cutting feed
Rapid traverse
Cutting
surface
ht
(c
)2
01
3
R
Initial point
R-point
Approach point
2nd R-point
E
op
yr
ig
Hole depth
C
Pitch 2
Hole diameter
21-2
TEP302
Serial No. 340839
TORNADO TAPPING (G130)
B.
21
Movement on the bottom
1.
With bottom finishing
er
ve
d
.
After cutting down to the bottom of the hole by helical interpolation, the tool performs a
circular interpolation for full circle, and then escapes radially to the axis of the hole before
returning in the axial direction to the initial point or R-point at the rapid traverse.
Without bottom finishing
N
2.
TEP303
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
Escape point
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
After cutting down to the bottom of the hole by helical interpolation, the tool escapes radially
to the axis of the hole while axially returning through quarter the pitch, and then returns in
the axial direction to the initial point or R-point at the rapid traverse.
Escape point
YA
M
A
ZA
1/4 pitch
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
TEP304
21-3
ht
ig
yr
op
C
01
3
)2
(c
K
ZA
al
ri
Se
A
K
IM
ZA
A
M
YA
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
N
ts
gh
ri
.
er
ve
d
re
s
Serial No. 340839
21 TORNADO TAPPING (G130)
21-4 E
Serial No. 340839
HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE
22
22 HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
The high-speed machining mode feature allows high-speed execution of programs used for the
machining of free-curved surfaces that have been approximated using very small lines.
In high-speed machining mode, microsegment machining capabilities improve by several times,
compared with conventional capabilities. This allows the same machining program to be
executed at several times the original feed rate, and thus the machining time to be reduced
significantly.
Conversely, a machining program that has been approximated using lines of several fractions of
the original segment length, can also be executed at the same feed rate, so more accurate
machining is possible.
Combined use of the high-speed machining mode and the shape correction function allows more
accurate machining to be implemented.
If, moreover, a protruding section exists in the microsegment machining program, smooth
interpolation can be conducted automatically by removing this illegal path.
X
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
Z
K
ZA
ri
al
N
o.
Y
A
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
High-speed machining is available in the automatic operation modes: Memory, HD (Hard Disk)
and Ethernet.
Even in the high-speed machining mode can be applied various operational functions: override
functions, cutting feed rate limit function, single-block operation function, dry run function,
graphic trace function and geometry compensation function.
01
3
Operation mode
YA
M
The microsegment machining capability in the high-speed machining mode is as follows:
Max. speed
Conditions required
135 m/min (5315 IPM)
None
HD operation
67 m/min (2638 IPM)
With the POSITION display selected on the screen
Ethernet operation
135 m/min (5315 IPM)
Avoid unusual key operations
(c
)2
Memory operation
(Note 2)
C
op
yr
ig
ht
The microsegment machining capability is restricted further by the functions used in, or applied
to, the program as shown below:
Fairing function
Preparatory functions
Not applied
Applied
84 m/min (3307 IPM)
G01
Linear interpolation only
(Note 1)
135 m/min (5315 IPM)
G02/G03
Circular interpolation included
(Note 1)
33 m/min (1299 IPM)
G06.1
Fine-spline interpolation included
G54.4
Workpiece setup error correction
(Note 1)
67.2 m/min (2646 IPM)
G68.2
Inclined-plane machining
(Note 1)
67.2 m/min (2646 IPM)
G41.x/G42.x
Tool radius compensation for five-axis
machining to the left/right
(Note 1)
33.6 m/min (1323 IPM)
G43.4
Tool tip point control
(Note 1)
67.2 m/min (2646 IPM)
G43.8
Cutting point command
(Note 1)
67.2 m/min (2646 IPM)
101 m/min (3976 IPM)
22-1
50 m/min (1969 IPM)
Serial No. 340839
22 HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE
Note 1: The microsegment machining capabilities shown above apply in the case where 3-axis
and 5-axis simultaneous motion commands consist of up to 32 and 52 characters per
block, respectively, for a segment length of 1 mm. Exceeding the limit of block size may
deteriorate the machining capabilities in question. Moreover, the lowest value of the
maximum available rate of feed applies in combined use of multiple functions.
Note 2: If the POSITION display should be changed to any other display during operation,
program reading from the local disk may be aborted to damage the surface to be
machined.
Note 3: Before executing a microsegment machining program for HD (Hard Disk) operation or
Ethernet operation, terminate the commercially available software if it is being used.
er
ve
d
.
Note 4: Since optimum corner deceleration occurs during the shape correction mode, the
machining time may be longer than in other modes.
gh
ts
High-speed machining mode ON
High-speed machining mode OFF
.A
ll
Note 1: Both commands must be given in a single-command block.
ri
G5 P2
G5 P0
re
s
22-1 Programming Format
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Note 2: Do not use both commands in the MDI operation mode; otherwise an alarm (807
ILLEGAL FORMAT) occurs.
22-2 Commands Available in the High-Speed Machining Mode
K
ZA
G-codes
Se
1.
ri
al
N
o.
Only axis motion commands with the corresponding preparatory functions (G-codes) and feed
functions (F-codes), designation of sequence number, codes for Control Out and Control In
(parentheses), as well as M/S/T functions are available in the high-speed machining mode.
Setting data of any other type will result in an alarm (807 ILLEGAL FORMAT).
M
A
ZA
K
IM
A
The available preparatory functions are G00, G01, G02, G03, G17, G18, G19, G90, G91,
G93 and G94.
The circular interpolation can be programmed with R (radius designation) as well as with I
and J (center designation). If the machining program includes circular commands, however,
set bit 2 of the F96 parameter to one (1).
01
3
YA
F96 bit 2: Type of control for circular commands in the high-speed machining mode:
0: Control for the specified speed (with acceleration/deceleration)
1: Control for a uniform feed
Axis motion commands
)2
2.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
Absolute data input as well as incremental data input is applicable, indeed, but the former
input mode requires the validation of bit 5 of the F84 parameter.
3.
F84 bit 5: Type of position data input in the high-speed machining mode:
0: Always incremental data input
1: According to the input mode before selection of the high-speed machining mode
Feed functions
Feed rate can be specified with address F.
4.
Sequence number
Sequence number can be specified with address N. This number, however, is skipped as a
meaningless code during reading.
22-2
Serial No. 340839
HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE
5.
22
Control Out and Control In
Use round brackets “(” and “)” as required to insert a comment.
See Section 3-1 for more information.
It should be noted here, however, that useless deceleration may be caused by a move-free
block. Move-free are, for instance, an empty block (null contents), one beginning and ending
with “(” and “)”, a G91-block with a moving distance of zero (0) as well as a G90-block for the
very same position.
M/S/T functions
.
6.
er
ve
d
Codes (M, S, and T) of miscellaneous, spindle, and tool functions can be used in general as
required. Use of these functions, however, may cause useless deceleration.
ts
re
s
Use of the following functions in particular can only cause an alarm (807 ILLEGAL
FORMAT):
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
o.
High-speed machining mode ON
K
IM
A
ZA
K
al
When F84 bit 5 = 0:
Incremental motion under G01
When F84 bit 5 = 1:
Absolute motion under G01
Se
G28 X0 Y0 Z0
G90 G0X-100.Y-100.
G43 Z-5.H03
G01 F3000
G05 P2
X0.1
X0.1 Y0.001
X0.1 Y0.002
X0.1 F200
G05 P0
G49 Z0
M02
N
Sample program
ri
7.
.A
ll
ri
gh
- No. 2 miscellaneous functions (8-digit A-, B- or C-codes).
- Special M-codes for interrupting by, and calling for, a macroprogram (M96, M97, M98,
M99).
A
ZA
High-speed machining mode OFF
YA
M
Note 1: Either 0 or 2 is to be set with address P (P0 or P2). Setting any other value will result in
an alarm (807 ILLEGAL FORMAT).
01
3
Note 2: No other addresses than P and N must be set in the same block with G05.
)2
Note 3: A decimal point must not be appended to address P.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
Note 4: The maximum permissible length of one block is 30 characters.
22-3
Serial No. 340839
22 HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE
22-3 Additional Functions in the High-Speed Machining Mode
1.
Fairing function
If, in a series of linear paths, a protruding section exists in the CAM-created microsegment
machining program, this protruding path can be removed and the preceding and following paths
connected smoothly by setting parameter F96 bit 1 to “1”.
F96 bit 1: Fairing function for the microsegment machining program
0: No fairing
1: Fairing for a protruding path
.A
ll
ri
gh
After fairing
Before fairing
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
F103: Maximum length of a block to be removed for fairing
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Fairing is also valid for a succession of protruding paths as shown below:
In the middle of fairing
K
A
ZA
al
ri
Cutting feed limiting speed
K
IM
Se
2.
After fairing
N
Before fairing
YA
M
A
ZA
In shape correction mode, the minimum of the cutting feed limiting speeds of the movable axes is
set as the cutting feed limiting speed in the high-speed machining mode. Setting parameter F96
bit 5 to “1”, however, allows the curvature of every curved section to be judged for limiting the
speed so as not to exceed the maximum available acceleration.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
F96 bit 5: Type of cutting feed limiting speed for the high-speed machining mode
0: Minimum of the cutting feed limiting speeds of the movable axes
1: Limiting speed based on the radius of curvature
R
If axial movement at the section of a large
curvature should be conducted without
deceleration, excessive acceleration will be
developed to cause a path error due to inner
cornering.
22-4
Serial No. 340839
HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE
3.
22
Deceleration at corners in the high-speed machining mode
er
ve
d
F96 bit 4: Type of corner judgment in the high-speed machining mode
0: Always judging from the angle between adjacent blocks
1: Judging after removing any microblock (if present between large-angle blocks)
gh
ts
re
s
F107: Reference length for microblock judgement
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
An adequate deceleration can be performed
without suffering any effects of this microblock.
22-5
.
In shape correction mode, automatic deceleration at corners of significantly large angle is
provided in general to ensure that the acceleration developed during cornering shall fall within
the predetermined tolerance.
A micro-length block between relatively longer blocks intersecting each other in a large angle in
CAM-created microsegment machining programs, in particular, may cause the cornering speed
to mismatch the surroundings and thus affect surface quality.
Setting parameter F96 bit 4 to “1” will now allow corner judgment and deceleration without
suffering any effects of such a microblock.
Serial No. 340839
22 HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE
22-4 Restrictions
1.
The modal functions for tool radius compensation, mirror image, scaling, coordinate system
rotation, virtual axis interpolation, three-dimensional radius compensation, and shaping
function should have been cancelled beforehand to give a G05 P2 command. Otherwise, an
alarm may be caused (807 ILLEGAL FORMAT) or the modal function unexpectedly cancelled.
Example :
K
ZA
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Main program
G28 X0 Y0 Z0
G90 G92 X0 Y0 Z100.
G00 X-100.Y-100.
G43 Z-10.H001
Movement under the conditions of G90, G00 and G43
M98 H001
G49 Z0
Movement under the conditions of G90 and G01
G28 X0 Y0 Z0
M02
Subprogram (O001)
N001 F3000
G05 P2
High-speed machining mode ON
G01 X0.1
When F84 bit 5 = 0:
X-0.1 Y-0.001
Incremental motion under G01
X-0.1 Y-0.002
When F84 bit 5 = 1:
Absolute motion under G01
X0.1
G05 P0
High-speed machining mode OFF
M99
3.
The high-speed machining mode should be selected and cancelled by using commands of
G05 P2 and G05 P0, respectively, with the tool sufficiently cleared from the workpiece since
the selection and cancellation always cause a deceleration of feed motions as shown below:
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
A
In the high-speed machining mode there may occur a delay in display response since
priority is always given to the processing for the automatic operation.
Se
2.
G05P2
X-577 Y-577 Z-577 G05P0
Speed
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
Command
4.
Fairing function cannot be executed in the mode of single-block operation.
5.
In the mode of high-speed machining a block of M/S/T function causes the flow of
processing for fairing to be interrupted temporarily.
22-6
Serial No. 340839
22
HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE
6.
In the mode of high-speed machining a block of TM6 for tool change causes the
execution speed and the fairing function to be lowered and suppressed, respectively, until a
length-offsetting value is made valid for the new tool, which does not occur implicitly if the
length values of the MAZATROL tool data are not to be used in executing EIA/ISO
programs (F93 bit 3 = 0). In this case, therefore, it is necessary to cancel the high-speed
machining mode temporarily so as to give explicitly the required G43-command for tool
length offset.
Tool change
T01M6
Interpolation for high-speed machining
G01 X__ F__
suppressed
Offsetting value made valid at the
first Z-axis movement
Z__
X__ Y__
7.
er
ve
d
.
resumed
Restrictions on programming and machine operation are listed in the following table:
–: Invalid,
Specification
5
Axis name
Axes of auxilliary devices
Unit of input
Units of control
Unit-of-programming × 10
N
o.
Tape code
al
Label skip
K
IM
Parity V
ZA
Se
Parity H
A
ri
ISO/EIA automatic identification
Tape format
ts
ISO/EIA
ISO/EIA
–
(–)
()
()
()
Refer to the programming format.
(err)
()
()
(err)
Tape input buffer
()
Pre-read buffer
()
Absolute/inrcemental data input
(err)
Inch/metric selection
–
(–)
Decimal point input
()
Positioning
()
One-way positioning
–
(err)
Linear interpolation
()
Circular interpolation
()
Helical cutting
–
(err)
Spiral interpolation
–
(err)
Virtual-axis interpolation
–
(err)
Threading
–
(err)
Plane selection
()
Fine-Spline interpolation
(err)
NURBS interpolation
–
(err)
YA
M
01
3
ht
ig
yr
op
C
Interpolation
functions
ABC
(c
Position
commands
()
Optimal block skip
Control IN/OUT
Buffers
()
)2
A
Sequence number
5
ZA
Program number
7
ABC
Unit of programming
Input formats
gh
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Simultaneously controllable axis quantity
14
ri
14
.A
ll
14
Effective controllable axis quantity
K
Control axes
Maximum controllable axis quantity
err: Alarm
High-speed machining mode
(Designation in the mode)
Standard mode
Subclassification
N
Classification
re
s
: Valid,
22-7
Serial No. 340839
22 HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE
: Valid,
Specification
Classification
Rapid traverse rate
()
Cutting feed rate
()
Synchronous feed
(err)
Automatic acceleration/deceleration
()
Linear acceleration/deceleration before
cutting interpolation
(err)
Limitation in cutting
direction
Rapid feed override
No. 1 cutting feed override
No. 2 cutting feed override
Exact-stop mode
–
Cutting mode
Tapping mode
–
Automatic corner override
Error detection
Override cancellation
Dwell in time
M-command
Miscellaneous
function
Optional stop
N
Tool functions
ri
T-command
K
IM
Spare-tool selection
Se
Tool operation time integration
ZA
al
S-command
A
Spindle functions
o.
No. 2 miscellaneous functions
.
er
ve
d
re
s
ts
gh
(err)
(err)
.A
ll
N
()
–
(err)
–
(err)
()
–
()
(err)
()
()
()
(–)
(err)
(err)
–
(err)
3D tool radius compensation
–
(err)
Tool-offset memory
()
Number of tool offset data sets
()
Programmed tool-offset input
–
(err)
(err)
Fixed cycle for drilling
–
(err)
M
A
ZA
–
YA
01
3
(c
ht
ig
yr
op
C
(err)
Tool-offset number auto selection
Program auxiliary
functions
()
Tool radius compensation
Tool-position offset
Tool offset
functions
()
)2
Tool-length offset
()
–
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Dwell in number of revolutions
K
Dwell
Minimum limiting speed of feed axes/
According to curvature
ri
Cutting feed rate limitation
Feed functions
err: Alarm
High-speed machining mode
(Designation in the mode)
Standard mode
Subclassification
–: Invalid,
Pattern cycle
–
–
(–)
Subprogram control
(err)
Variable command
–
(err)
Figure rotation
–
(err)
Coordinate rotation
–
(err)
User macro
(err)
User macro interruption
(err)
Scaling
–
(err)
Mirror image
–
(err)
Programmable mirror image
–
(err)
Geometric function
–
(err)
Programmed parameter setting
err
(err)
22-8
Serial No. 340839
22
HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE
: Valid,
Specification
Memory-based reference-point return
(–)
Automatic reference-point return
–
(err)
#2/#3/#4 reference-point return
–
(err)
Reference-point check
–
(err)
Machine corrdinate system offset
–
(err)
Workpiece coordinate system offset
–
(err)
Local coordinate system offset
–
(err)
Coordinate system setting
–
(err)
Corrdinate system rotation setting
–
Program restart
Absolute data detection
Backlash correction
Lost-motion correction
Memory-based relative position correction
Machine coordinate system correction
Emergency stop
.
er
ve
d
re
s
ts
gh
()
.A
ll
()
–
(err)
()
()
()
(–)
(–)
()
–
()
–
()
–
()
–
()
Handle interruption
()
Auto/manual simultaneous
()
HD operation
(–)
(–)
o.
N
Jog feed
ZA
Incremental feed
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
Handle feed
Manual rapid feed
A
K
IM
MDI operation
ZA
al
ri
Se
Memory operation
N
()
Tape operation
Automatic-operation start
()
Automatic-operation halt
()
Single-block stop
()
NC reset
–
()
External reset
–
()
All-axis machine lock
()
Axis-by-axis machine lock
()
Dry run
()
Miscellaneous-function lock
()
Manual-absolute selection
(–)
ht
(c
Ethernet operation
ig
Data protection
yr
()
External deceleration
op
()
()
Interlock
C
()
()
Programmed software limit
External control
signals
(err)
Software limit
Operation modes
(err)
Stroke end
Protection
functions
(–)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Machine error
correction
Watchdog-based reference-point return
K
Coordinate
system setting
High-speed machining mode
(Designation in the mode)
Standard mode
Subclassification
err: Alarm
ri
Classification
–: Invalid,
22-9
Serial No. 340839
22 HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE
: Valid,
Specification
()
()
Auto-run mode
()
Auto-run in progress
()
Auto-run halted
()
Cutting feed in progress
()
Tapping in progress
–
(–)
Threading in progress
–
(–)
Axis selected
Axis-movement direction
Rapid feed in progress
er
ve
d
Rewind
NC alarm
Reset
()
Movement-command completed
()
Manual tool-length measurement
–
(–)
Automatic tool-length measurement
Skip
Multi-step skip
Manual skip
o.
Servo off
N
Follow-up
External data input/output
ZA
Setting/Display unit
A
Settings display
M
Search
re
s
ts
gh
.A
ll
N
()
()
()
–
(err)
–
(err)
–
(err)
–
(err)
()
()
()
()
()
()
()
()
(err)
–
(–)
()
Program restart
(err)
Machining-time calculation
()
PC opening
()
Program-status display
()
Integrated-time display
()
Graphics display
()
Multi-step skip
–
(err)
Graphics check
()
Alarm display
()
Operation-error display
()
Servo-error display
()
Operation-stop-cause display
()
Servo monitor display
()
NC-PC I/O signal display
()
DIO display
()
Keyboard-operation record
()
YA
)2
(c
Self-diagnostics
()
MDI
ht
ig
yr
op
C
Program creation
()
Check-and-stop
01
3
Setting/display
functions
K
IM
External data output I/F
Data input/output
ZA
Se
External data input I/F
ri
al
Control-axis removal
A
Axis control
functions
.
Servo-unit ready
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Measurement aid
functions
Control-unit ready
K
Status output
signals
High-speed machining mode
(Designation in the mode)
Standard mode
Subclassification
err: Alarm
ri
Classification
–: Invalid,
22-10
Serial No. 340839
22
HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE
8.
The table below enumerates the modes in which high-speed machining mode is selectable.
Code
Function
Code
Selection of add. workpc. coordinate system
G54.1
Linear interpolation
G01
Workpiece setup error correction
G54.4
Circular interpolation (CW)
G02
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 2
G55
Circular interpolation (CCW)
G03
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 3
G56
Spiral interpolation (CW)
G02.1
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 4
G57
Spiral interpolation (CCW)
G03.1
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 5
G58
Spline interpolation
G06.1
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 6
G59
Polar coordinate interpolation OFF
G13.1
Exact stop mode
G61 (Note 2)
Polar coordinate input OFF
G15
Geometry compensation
G61.1
Selection of XY-plane
G17
Modal spline interpolation
Selection of ZX-plane
G18
Cutting mode
Selection of YZ-plane
G19
User macro modal call OFF
Five-surface machining OFF
G17.9
Inclined-plane machining
Inch data input
G20 (Note 1)
3-D coordinate conversion ON
Metric data input
G21 (Note 1)
3-D coordinate conversion OFF
Pre-move stroke check OFF
G23
Fixed cycle OFF
Tool radius compensation OFF
G40
Absolute data input
(to the left)
G41.5
Incremental data input
G91
(to the right)
G42.5
Inverse time feed
G93
.
G00
er
ve
d
Function
Positioning
G64
re
s
G67
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
G68.2
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Tool radius compensation for
five-axis machining
G61.2
G68
G69
G80
G90
G43 (Note 3)
Feed per minute (asynchronous)
G94
Tool length offset (–)
G44 (Note 3)
Constant surface speed control OFF
G97
Tool tip point control, type 1/2
G43.4/G43.5
Cutting point command, type 1/2
G43.8/G43.9
Initial point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G98
Tool position offset OFF
G49
R-point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G99
Radius data input for X-axis ON
G10.9X0
Radius data input for X-axis OFF
G10.9X1
Se
G50
G50.1
G54
ZA
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 1
K
IM
Mirror image OFF
A
Scaling OFF
K
G49.1
ri
Head offset for five-surface machining OFF
ZA
al
N
o.
Tool length offset (+)
M
A
Giving a G5 P2 command in a mode other than those enumerated above will lead to an alarm
(807 ILLEGAL FORMAT).
)2
01
3
YA
Note 1: The modal condition is temporarily replaced, if required, with the initial condition (to be
selected automatically upon resetting for the G-code group concerned according to the
setting of bit 4 of parameter F91) during the high-speed machining mode, and restored
upon its cancellation.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
Note 2: The modal condition is temporarily replaced with the initial condition (to be selected
automatically upon resetting for the G-code group concerned according to the setting
of bit 1 of parameter F159) during the high-speed machining mode, and restored upon
its cancellation.
22-11
Serial No. 340839
22 HIGH-SPEED MACHINING MODE FEATURE
Note 3: The modal function of tool length offset is temporarily cancelled during the high-speed
machining mode if the last motion command for the controlled axis of length offset
before the mode selection (by G05 P2) is given with G53 (temporary selection of
machine coordinate system in the current mode of selection of a programming coordinate system), and restored upon cancellation of the high-speed machining mode.
Example :
Selection of tool length offset (Schema [1])
G90 G53 Z0.
Motion command with G53 (Schema [2])
There is no motion command given with reference to the
programming coordinate system between the blocks of G53
and G05 P2.
Selection of high-speed machining mode
In the mode of high-speed machining, even axis motion
commands that are given with respect to the programming
coordinate system will be executed with the tool length offset
remaining cancelled. (Schema [3])
Cancellation of high-speed machining mode
The mode of tool length offset is automatically restored to
normal function.
er
ve
d
.
G43 G00 Z100. H1
gh
ts
re
s
G05 P2
G01 Z100. F180.0
Schema [2]
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Schema [1]
N
.A
ll
ri
G05 P0
Schema [3]
Machine
origin
Machine
origin
Z
100.
A
K
ZA
A
Z
Z
X
X
Program origin
Program origin
M
Program origin
ZA
X
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Machine
origin
100.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
D740PB0153
22-12 E
Serial No. 340839
AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT: G37
23
23 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT: G37
1.
Function and purpose
re
s
er
ve
d
.
When the tool for which command data has been assigned moves to a programmed measurement position, the NC system will measure and calculate any differential data between the
coordinates at that time and those of the programmed measurement position. Data thus obtained
will become offset data for that tool.
Also, if offsetting has already been performed for the tool, the current offset data will be further
offset, provided that after movement of that tool under an offset status to the required
measurement position, the measurements and calculations of any differential coordinates show
some data to be further offset.
At this time, further offsetting will occur for the tool offset data if only one type of offset data exists,
or for the tool wear offset data if two types of offset data exist (tool length offsets and tool wear
offsets).
gh
ri
Programming format
.A
ll
2.
This preparatory function cannot be used for VERSATECH machines.
ts
Note :
G37 Z_ (X_, Y_) R_ D_ F_
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
X, Y, Z: Address of the measurement axis and the coordinate of the measurement position
Distance from the starting point of movement at a measurement feed rate, to the
measurement position
D:
The area where the tool is to stop moving
F:
Measurement feed rate
o.
R:
K
ZA
Description
K
IM
Parameter
A
ri
Description of parameters
Se
3.
al
N
If R, D, or F is omitted, respective parameter values will become valid.
R-code command. Deceleration area
F43
D-code command. Measurement area
F44
F-code command. Measurement feed rate f
F72
Conditions for skipping based on G37 (EIA/ISO)
YA
M
A
ZA
F42
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
See the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-code List for further details.
23-1
Serial No. 340839
23 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT: G37
Example of execution
If H01 = 0
T01T00M06
G90G00G43Z0H01
G37Z-600.R200.D150.F300
0
–100
–400
.
Coordinate to reach the measurement position
= –500.01
–500.01 – (–600) = 99.99
0 + 99.99 = 99.99
Thus, H01 = 99.99
er
ve
d
4.
F
R
re
s
–500
gh
ts
D
ri
–600
N
D
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
–Z
.A
ll
Measuring
instrument
K
ZA
A
ri
K
IM
Se
If H01 = 100
T01T00M06
G90G00G43Z-200.H01
G37Z-600.F300
al
N
o.
MEP229
ZA
–200
–300
–400
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
Coordinate to reach the measurement position
= –600.01
–600.01 – (–600) = –0.01
100 + (–0.01) = 99.99
Thus, H01 = 99.99
–500
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
<Supplement>
When the program shown above is executed,
parameter F42 and F43 are set as follows:
F42 (R-code command) : 25000 (25 mm)
F43 (D-code command) : 2000 ( 2 mm)
F42
–600
F43
F
F43
–Z
Measuring
instrument
MEP230
23-2
Serial No. 340839
AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT: G37
5.
23
Detailed description
1.
Machine action based on command G37
G28X0Y0Z0
Machine zero point
G90G0G43Zz1Hh0 ................................... [1]
[1]
G37Zz0Rr0Dd0Ff0 ..................................... [2], [3]
[5]
G0G90Zz1 ............................................... [4]
(zi)
[2]
G28X0Y0Z0............................................ [5]
[4]
Rapid feed
Measurement
feed rate
z0 : Coordinate of the measurement point
R (r0)
[3] (f0)
(measurement position)
r0 : Starting point of movement at
measurement feed rate
d0 : The area where the tool is to stop moving
f0 : Measurement feed rate
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
Measurement
point (Z0)
er
ve
d
.
h0 : Offset number
MEP231
point (Z0)
Sensor signals (Measurement Position Reached) also act as skip signals.
3.
If the F-code value is 0, the feed rate becomes 1 mm/min.
4.
Update offset data becomes valid from the Z-axis (measurement axis) command codes that
succeed the block of G37.
5.
The delay and dispersion in processing of sensor signals, except for the PLC side, is from 0
to 0.2 ms for the NC side alone. Accordingly, the following measurement error may occur:
K
ZA
Se
ri
al
N
o.
2.
K
IM
A
Maximum measurement error [mm]
1
= Measurement feed rate [mm/min] ×
ZA
60
0.2 [ms]
1000
When a sensor signal is detected, although the coordinates of the machine position at that
time will be read, the machine will stop only after overruning through the distance equivalent
to a servo droop.
01
3
YA
M
A
6.
×
)2
Maximum amount of overrun [mm]
ht
(c
= Measurement feed rate [mm/min] ×
C
op
yr
ig
30.3 [ms] if the position loop gain is 33.
23-3
1
60
×
30.3 [ms]
1000
Serial No. 340839
23 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT: G37
7.
If command G37 is executed in the single-block operation mode, the machine will come to a
single block stop after execution of the block that immediately succeeds the G37-containing
block.
G0G90G43Z-200.H01
G37Z-600.R25.D2.F10
G0G90Z-200.
Example:
[1]
[2]
[3]
Machine in its single-block
stop status at block [1]
button on
Block [2] executed
re
s
ri
gh
Precautions
Alarm 923 ILLEGAL COMMAND G37 AXIS will result if the block of G37 does not contain
axis data or contains data of two or more axes.
2.
Alarm 924 G37, H COMMANDS SAME BLOCK will result if an H code exists in the block of
G37.
3.
Alarm 925 H CODE REQUIRED will result if G43 H_ does not exist before the block of G37.
4.
Alarm 926 ILLEGAL G37 SIGNAL will result if input sensor signals occur outside a
predetermined allowable measurement range or if a sensor signal is not detected on arrival
of the tool at the ending point of movement.
5.
If a manual interruption operation has been carried out during movement of the tool at a
measurement feed rate, the program must be restarted only after returning that tool to the
position existing when the interruption operation was carried out.
6.
Set G37 data or parameter data so that the following condition is satisfied:
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
1.
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
6.
ts
Machine replaced in its
single-block stop status
er
ve
d
.
Block [3] executed
R-code value
or parameter r
>
D-code value
or parameter d
A
ZA
Measurement point – Staring point >
If the R-code value, the D-code value and parameter d, mentioned in Item G above, are all
0s, the program will come to a normal end only when the designated measurement point
and the sensor signal detection point agree. Alarm 926 ILLEGAL G37 SIGNAL will result in
all other cases.
8.
If the R-code value, the D-code value, parameter r, and parameter d, mentioned in Item G
above, are all 0s, alarm 926 ILLEGAL G37 SIGNAL will result after the tool has been
positioned at the designated measurement point, irrespective of whether a sensor signal is
detected.
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
7.
C
op
9.
Set G37 (automatic tool length measurement code) together with G43 H_ (offset number
assignment code).
G43 H_
G37 Z_R_D_F_
23-4
Serial No. 340839
23
AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT: G37
10. If the offset data is tool offsets of type A, then automatic correction of tool data occurs, or if
the offset data is tool offsets of type B, then automatic correction of tool wear offsetting data
occurs.
Example : The TOOL OFFSET displays in both cases after offsetting of H1 = 100
TOOL OFFSET (Type A)
TOOL OFFSET (Type B)
TOOL LENGTH
No.
OFFSET
No.
OFFSET
No.
GEOMETRY
WEAR
1
100
17
0
1
100
0
2
0
18
0
2
0
0
3
0
19
0
3
0
0
er
ve
d
.
Before
measurement
TOOL LENGTH
No.
OFFSET
No.
GEOMETRY
1
110
17
0
1
100
2
0
18
0
2
0
3
0
19
0
3
0
WEAR
re
s
OFFSET
ri
gh
ts
10
0
0
.A
ll
After
measurement
No.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
11. The distance from the machine zero point to the measurement point (skip sensor) is preset
in register R2392 or R2393. Use this value as reference to set a coordinate using Z-, X-, or
Y-code command.
12. When this function is used for tool offsets of type B, the correct data will not be displayed if
the wear offset value exceeds 100.
N
o.
13. When executing this function in the presence of offset data, set the value of a D code to
2mm or less to prevent damaging the measuring instrument.
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
14. When executing this function in the absence of offset data (offset data = 0), set the values of
an R code and a D code to those larger than the tool length of the tool to be measured. Also,
in that case, before executing this function, make sure that the skip sensor in the measuring
instrument correctly operates.
23-5
ht
ig
yr
op
C
01
3
)2
(c
K
ZA
al
ri
Se
A
K
IM
ZA
A
M
YA
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
N
ts
gh
ri
.
er
ve
d
re
s
Serial No. 340839
23 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT: G37
23-6 E
Serial No. 340839
DYNAMIC OFFSETTING II: G54.2P0, G54.2P1 - G54.2P8 (OPTION)
24
24 DYNAMIC OFFSETTING II: G54.2P0, G54.2P1 - G54.2P8 (OPTION)
1.
Function and purpose
Programming format
re
s
2.
er
ve
d
.
When a workpiece fixed on the turntable is to be machined with the rotation of the table, mismatching between the workpiece reference position (program origin) and the origin of workpiece
coordinates (center of rotation of the table) leads to an error in machining contour. Provided that
the vector of a particular deviation from the center of rotation to the workpiece reference position
is given as a “reference”, the “Dynamic Offsetting ” function will calculate for each command of
rotation the deviation vector for the designated angular motion in order to control the linear axes
for an adequate movement to the ending point as programmed with respect to the ideal workpiece origin, and thus to prevent the above-mentioned faulty machining from occurring.
G54.2 Pn;
A.
N
Definitions of terms
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
3.
.A
ll
Cancellation is the initial state of the function (upon turning-on).
ri
gh
ts
n: Dynamic offset number (1 to 8)
Give a “G54.2 P0” command (n = 0) to cancel the dynamic offsetting function.
Deviation vector
N
Dynamic offset
al
B.
o.
The vector of a deviation from the center of rotation of the table (Wo: presupposed position of the
workpiece origin) to the actual origin of coordinates of the workpiece mounted on the table.
C.
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
The offsetting vector (= deviation vector; whose direction depends upon the angular position of
the table) for the ending point of each block containing a command of rotation.
Reference dynamic offset
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
A particular deviation vector entered as the reference for the calculation of dynamic offsets.
Consists of the vector proper (measured and entered in three-axis component vectors) and the
positions (in machine coordinates) of the rotational and tilting axis for the measurement.
24-1
Serial No. 340839
24 DYNAMIC OFFSETTING II: G54.2P0, G54.2P1 - G54.2P8 (OPTION)
4.
Operation description
A.
Operation by a command of rotation in the G54.2 mode
In the G54.2 mode (modal group 23), which is selected by a “G54.2Pn” command, deviation
vector (to be used in a vector addition for offsetting) is re-calculated for each command of table
rotation beforehand in order to create an adequate tool path for the block’s ending point as
programmed with respect to the ideal workpiece origin.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Mounted here.
ZA
K
IM
A
D735S1101
YA
M
A
ZA
The ideal workpiece mounting position (the workpiece origin set on to the center of rotation of the table)
The actual workpiece mounting position (vector Gs denotes the deviation from the ideal position)
The position of the actual workpiece W1’ after a table rotation by
The position of the ideally mounted workpiece W1 after a table rotation by
The origin of workpiece coordinates (given by a corresponding preparatory function, such as G54)
The reference deviation vector (to be registered in the NC unit as a reference dynamic offset.)
The deviation vector for the rotation of the rotational axis by
The starting point of the G1 (linear interpolation) microsegment command
The ending point of the G1 (linear interpolation) microsegment command
01
3
[Legend]
W1:
W1’:
W2’:
W2:
Wo:
Gs:
G:
a (a1, a1’):
b (b1, b2’):
Se
ri
al
Machine zero point
K
N
o.
Work offset (e.g. G54)
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
With the measurement results of the reference dynamic offset (Gs) registered for workpiece W
fixed on the turntable, the selection (activation) of the G54.2 mode causes the tool to be shifted
by the deviation vector Gs from the current position, point a1 for example, to point a1’ (if bit 0 of
the F87 parameter described later is set to “0”).
C
op
A succeeding command of “G1b1” (b1 = designation of a point with X-, Y-, and Z-coordinates)
feeds the tool from a1’ to b1’ in the G1 mode (linearly). If, however, simultaneous motion of the
rotational axis is designated in the same block, “G1b1C” for example, the tool is also fed linearly
from the current position a1’ to the offset position b2’ which is obtained by adding the deviation
vector G internally calculated for the rotation to point b2, the ending point on the ideally
mounted workpiece.
24-2
Serial No. 340839
DYNAMIC OFFSETTING II: G54.2P0, G54.2P1 - G54.2P8 (OPTION)
B.
24
On-reset operation
It depends on the setting of parameter F95 bit 7 whether or not dynamic offsetting is canceled by
resetting.
F95 bit 7 = 0: The dynamic offset is canceled and the G54.2 mode is also canceled.
= 1: The existing dynamic offset is held along with the G54.2 mode. When the automatic operation is started again after resetting, the dynamic offsetting mode is
active from the beginning of the program.
Note :
.
Operation by the selection of the G54.2 mode
er
ve
d
C.
When the dynamic offset is canceled by resetting, the tool will not move on the path
corresponding to the canceled vector (even if bit 0 of the F87 parameter described later
is set to “0”).
Operation by the cancellation of the G54.2 mode
N
D.
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
When a G54.2Pn command is given, the deviation vector for the current position of the rotational
axis is calculated and an offsetting movement is carried out on the linear axes by their respective
components of the computed vector (dynamic offset). If an axis motion command is given in the
same block, the deviation vector for the ending point of that block is calculated and the
corresponding motion is performed from the current point to the dynamically offset ending point.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
The cancellation command (G54.2P0) moves the tool by a vector reverse to the current dynamic
offset. It depends, however, on the setting of parameter F168 bit 0 whether or not an independent cancellation command (G54.2P0) causes the above-mentioned movement.
F168 bit 0 = 0: G54.2P0 causes canceling motions on the liner axes concerned.
= 1: G54.2P0 does not cause any motions on the liner axes.
K
ZA
Se
ri
al
N
o.
If an axis motion command is given in the same block, the corresponding motion is performed
from the current point to the ending point as designated with workpiece coordinates (a
movement including the cancellation of the dynamic offsetting).
K
IM
E.
A
The axis motion occurs according to the current modal function concerned (of G-code group 1).
Manual interruption in the G54.2 mode
)2
Input and output of the reference dynamic offset
(c
5.
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
The deviation vector does not change if automatic operation is stopped in the G54.2 mode (by
single-block stop, etc.) and then a movement on the rotational axis carried out in manual mode.
The re-calculation of the deviation vector for dynamic offsetting will not occur until a rotational
axis motion command or another G54.2 command is given after setting the MDI or automatic
operation mode.
ht
Setting the reference dynamic offset by G10
ig
A.
yr
G10 L21 Pn Xx Yy ········ ;
C
op
Use this format of programmed parameter input. Argument P (n) denotes a dynamic offset
number (1 to 8).
According to the data input mode, absolute (G90) or incremental (G91), the designated axis
value overwrites, or is added to, the current one.
B.
Reading/writing the reference dynamic offset with system variables
System variable number = 5500 + 20 × n + m
n: Dynamic offset number (1 to 8)
m: Axis number (1 to 6)
Use system variable #5510 to read the selected dynamic offset number (1 to 8).
24-3
Serial No. 340839
24 DYNAMIC OFFSETTING II: G54.2P0, G54.2P1 - G54.2P8 (OPTION)
6.
Other detailed precautions
1.
When the related parameters and reference dynamic offset are modified in the G54.2 mode,
the modifications will become valid for the next G54.2Pn command onward.
2.
The following describes how some specific commands are executed in the G54.2 mode.
(a) Machine coordinate system selection (G53)
A G53 command temporarily suppresses the dynamic offset and the axis motion is
performed to the ending point as designated in machine coordinates. The deviation
vector is not re-calculated even when a value for the rotational axis is specified. The
dynamic offsetting function will not be recovered until a motion command is given with
workpiece coordinates.
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
(b) Workpiece coordinate system change (G54 to G59, G54.1, G92, G52)
Even when the workpiece coordinate system is changed in the G54.2 mode, the
reference dynamic offset is not re-calculated and dynamic offsets are calculated
according to the existing reference dynamic offset. The axis motion is carried out to the
position obtained by adding the deviation vector to the ending point specified in the
new workpiece coordinate system.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
(c) Commands related to zero point return (G27, G28, G29, G30, G30.n)
The dynamic offsetting function is temporarily canceled for the path from the intermediate point to the reference point and recovered for the movement from there to a
position specified in the workpiece coordinate system. (Similar to the processing of the
commands related to zero point return in the tool length offset mode)
When the work offset data (workpiece origin) being used is modified by a G10 command in
the G54.2 mode, the new work offset data will be valid for the next block onward.
4.
As for the tool motion caused by a change only in the deviation vector, it is executed in the
current mode of G-code group 1 and at the current rate of feed. If, however, the mode
concerned is other than that of G0 or G1, e.g. a mode of circular interpolation (G2, G3, etc.),
the tool is temporarily moved in the mode of linear interpolation (G1).
5.
The type of the control axis for the turntable must be specified as “rotational”. The dynamic
offsetting function cannot be used for the C-axis specified as “linear type”.
6.
The polar coordinate interpolation with the rotational axis cannot be executed properly in the
G54.2 mode.
7.
The following function commands cannot be executed in the G54.2 mode:
K
ZA
A
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
3.
Figure rotation (M98)
Mirror image (by G51.1 or control signal)
Coordinates rotation (G68)
Scaling (G51)
G5P0, G5P2
)2
01
3
YA
Restarting the program
The workpiece coordinates read with system variables include dynamic offsets.
9.
The component vectors of the current dynamic offset can be read using system variables
#5121 (X-axis), #5122 (Y-axis) and #5123 (Z-axis).
Related alarms
C
op
7.
yr
ig
ht
(c
8.
936 OPTION NOT FOUND
The dynamic offset option is not installed.
959 WORKPIECE COORDINATE ERROR
The origin of workpiece coordinates does not match the center of rotation of the turntable.
807 ILLEGAL FORMAT
Argument P is missing in the block of G54.2.
An incompatible G-code is used in the G54.2 mode or G54.2 is given in the mode of an
incompatible G-code.
809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT
The value of P in the block of G54.2 is not proper.
24-4
Serial No. 340839
DYNAMIC OFFSETTING II: G54.2P0, G54.2P1 - G54.2P8 (OPTION)
8.
24
Related parameters
A.
Dynamic offset type
Specify whether or not the tool is to be offset by each change only in the deviation vector.
F87 bit 0 = 0: Offset (the indication of both workpiece and machine coordinates changes.)
= 1: Not offset (no change in the position indication at all)
Normally set this parameter to “0”.
B.
Axis of table rotation
Specify the axis of rotation of the table in machine coordinates.
Axis of rotation of the turntable (in the case of C-axis)
S12 Y, Z
Axis of rotation of the tilting table (in the case of A-axis)
S11 Z
Distance (length) from the tilting axis to the turntable surface
re
s
er
ve
d
.
S5 X, Y
gh
The S11 and S12 settings are not required for machines without tilting table.
ri
Note :
ts
(The turntable center must be in the direction of –Z from the tilting axis.)
C.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
See Subsection 13-11-4 for details on the (read-only) system variables to be
used for reading the values in parameters S5 and S12.
Workpiece origin mismatch check
9.
Mechanical requirements
K
ZA
K
IM
Se
Normally set this parameter to “0”.
A
ri
al
N
o.
The origin of the selected workpiece coordinate system must correspond to the center of table
rotation in order that the dynamic offsetting may effectively function. The following parameter is
provided to check the condition in question for each G54.2 command.
F87 bit 1 = 0: The mismatch check is conducted.
= 1: The mismatch check is not conducted.
ZA
The dynamic offsetting function requires the following conditions to be satisfied:
The machine is equipped with a table of either two-axis rotational control (construction of a
turntable on the tilting axis) or of a single rotational axis control (turntable or tilting table).
The tilting and rotational axis must refer to rotating around the X- and Z-axis, respectively.
Moreover, the construction must not be of the tilting axis mounted on the turntable.
2.
The workpiece coordinate origin corresponds to the center of table rotation, and the X-, Y-,
and Z-axes of workpiece coordinates are in parallel with, and the same direction as, the
corresponding axes of machine coordinates.
The requirements for machining with table rotation: The machining contour is described
using a workpiece coordinate system fixed in parallel with the machine coordinate system
(not rotated with the table rotation) and microsegment command blocks of G1.
C
op
yr
ig
3.
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
1.
24-5
Serial No. 340839
24 DYNAMIC OFFSETTING II: G54.2P0, G54.2P1 - G54.2P8 (OPTION)
10. Operation description using a sample program
The following describes the operation using a sample program (created for explanation only).
Settings on the related displays
WORK OFFSET (G54)
X = –315.0, Y = –315.0, Z = 0.0, A = 0.0, C = 0.0
DYNAMIC OFFSET (P1)
X = –1.0,
Parameters
Z = 0.0, A = 0.0, C = 90.0
F87 bit 0 = 0 (Dynamic offset type: Offset)
S5 X = –315000
S5 Y = –315000
Sample program (for explanation of operation)
.
B.
Y=0.0,
er
ve
d
A.
Position indication and dynamic offset for each line of the program
POSITION (workpiece coordinates)
X
Y
Z
A
C
X
Y
Z
A
C
X
Y
Z
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
o.
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
315.000 315.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000 –315.000 –315.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
N4
0.000
–1.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000 –316.000
0.000
0.000
0.000 –1.000
0.000
N5
0.000
1.000
0.000
0.000
180.000
0.000 –314.000
0.000
0.000 180.000
0.000
1.000
0.000
N6
10.000
1.000
0.000
0.000
180.000 –305.000 –314.000
0.000
0.000 180.000
0.000
1.000
0.000
N7
0.000
11.000
0.000
0.000
180.000 –315.000 –304.000
0.000
0.000 180.000
0.000
1.000
0.000
N8
0.866
10.500
0.000
0.000
240.000 –314.134 –325.500
0.000
0.000 240.000
0.866
0.500
0.000
ZA
ri
K
IM
Se
K
0.000
0.000
al
0.000
N3
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
N2
Dynamic offset
A
N1
MACHINE (machine coordinates)
N
N-No.
ZA
C.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
N1 G91 G28 X0 Y0 Z0 A0 C0
N2 G54
N3 G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z0 A0 C0
N4 G54.2P1
N5 G01 C180.0 F1000
N6 G01 X10.0
N7 G03 X0 Y10.0 R10.0
N8 G01 C240.0
24-6
Serial No. 340839
DYNAMIC OFFSETTING II: G54.2P0, G54.2P1 - G54.2P8 (OPTION)
D.
24
Illustration of the sample program
Measurement of the reference dynamic offset
Let the position where the mark on the table is aligned
with the fixed position marked with be the zero point of
the C-axis.
The reference dynamic offset (arrow) = (–1, 0, 0) was
measured with the table positioned at C = 90.0, as
shown on the left.
Workpiece
er
ve
d
N4
1
N5
2
re
s
N3
3
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
N-No.
.
Turntable (C-axis)
N-No.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Illustration
N6, N7
N8
5
K
ZA
YA
<Explanation>
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Illustration
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
4
N5
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
1. N3 turns the table on the C-axis to (C = 0) and positions the tool tip to the × point (X, Y, Z = 0, 0, 0).
2. N4 causes the tool tip to be shifted by the dynamic offset (arrow) for an angular position of C = 0 to the × point
(X, Y, Z = 0, –1, 0).
3. N5 turns the table on the C-axis to (C = 180) and causes the tool tip to be shifted by linear interpolation to the ×
point (X, Y, Z = 0, 1, 0) determined by the dynamic offset (arrow) for an angular position of C = 180.
4. N6 and N7 interpolate the linear and circular paths to the × point.
5. N8 turns the table on the C-axis to and causes the tool tip to be shifted by linear interpolation to the × point.
24-7
Serial No. 340839
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
24 DYNAMIC OFFSETTING II: G54.2P0, G54.2P1 - G54.2P8 (OPTION)
24-8 E
Serial No. 340839
COMPENSATION FOR DEVIATION OF THE AXIS OF ROTATION OF THE TILTING TABLE
25
25 COMPENSATION FOR DEVIATION OF THE AXIS OF ROTATION OF
THE TILTING TABLE
1.
Outline
Z
re
s
er
ve
d
.
On machines with a tilting table (the axis of whose rotation is named A-axis) the position of the
reference point for programming slightly deviates from the actual axis of table tilting and so
moves with rotation on the A-axis, which in turn requires correction on the programmed point.
The compensation function in question uses parameters L134 and L135, which denote the
deviation existing with both A- and C-axis positions being 0°, to conduct the correction by shifting
on the orthogonal axes. There is no need any more, therefore, to use a macroprogram which is
created for the compensation in question with the aid of the values and (nameplate ratings for
each machine).
gh
ts
Reference value Y
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Reference
value
Z
.A
ll
L134
ri
Y
Machine coordinate system
L135
Actual axis of
A-axis rotation
N
o.
Reference position
for the axis of
A-axis rotation
Precautions
K
ZA
K
IM
2.
D740PB0082
A
Se
ri
al
Axis of C-axis rotation
ZA
Do not use superfluously a macroprogram created for the compensation in question with the
aid of the values and . Otherwise an inexpedient correction will be added.
01
3
YA
M
A
Set the postprocessor for creating EIA/ISO programs, if used, so as not to include in the
program created the compensation in question with the aid of the values and . Otherwise
an inexpedient correction will be added.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
The name of the axis for tilting motion control depends upon the specifications of the
machine.
25-1
Serial No. 340839
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
25 COMPENSATION FOR DEVIATION OF THE AXIS OF ROTATION OF THE TILTING TABLE
25-2 E
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
26
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
26-1 Tool Tip Point Control (Option)
26-1-1 Function outline
The tool-tip point control function provides simultaneous axis control for moving the tool
(including its attitude) in order that the tool tip point may describe such a path, at such a rate of
feed, as programmed in terms of the relative position of the tool to the workpiece.
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Center of rotation
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Programmed path
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Control is provided so that the tip point of the tool follows
the path described in the program.
26-1
D734P2001
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
Note 1: This function is valid only for machines of the following construction types:
<Three types of five-axis control machines>
Tool rotating type
Table rotating type
Mixed type
Secondary rotational axis
Primary rotational axis
Tool
Table
Primary rotational axis
Tool
Workpiece
Workpiece
er
ve
d
Workpiece
.
Tool
Primary rotational axis
re
s
Table
Table
Secondary
rotational axis
D740PB0034’
ri
gh
ts
Secondary
rotational axis
Table rotating type
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Tool rotating type
.A
ll
<Two types of four-axis control machines with a single rotational axis>
o.
Rotational axis
for the tool
Workpiece
Table
ZA
K
IM
Table
A
Se
ri
al
Workpiece
K
N
Tool
Rotational axis
for the table
ZA
D749PB0050
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
Note 2: The execution of a block in the mode of tool-tip point control may require simultaneous
motions on the controlled axes for which no explicit motion commands are given. If a
simultaneous control of two or more rotational axes or five or more axes in total should
be required for the execution of a single block, the alarm 801 SIMULTANEOUS AXIS
EXCEEDED is raised.
ht
(c
Note 3: If the required option is not added, giving a command of tool tip point control will result
in an alarm (975 TOOL TIP PT CTRL N/A).
C
op
yr
ig
Note 4: As for four-axis control machines with a single rotational axis, do not give a motion
command for the controlled axis of the rotation around the Z-axis; otherwise the alarm
970 TOOL TIP CTRL PARAMETER ERROR is raised.
26-2
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
26
26-1-2 Detailed description
1.
Programming coordinate system
In the mode of tool tip point control, where an axis control is provided for the tip point to describe
the programmed path, specify in a sequence of motion blocks the ending positions of the tool tip
point in the peculiar coordinate system for programming. Two types of coordinate system are
available (according to the parameter setting concerned) for describing the motion of the tool tip
point: a table coordinate system (system fixed to the table) and a workpiece coordinate system.
A.
er
ve
d
.
Irrespective of which coordinate system is selected for programming, the relative motion of the
tool tip point to the workpiece can be achieved as programmed in a sequence of linear interpolation (or circular interpolation, if available).
Programming with a table coordinate system
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
With the parameter F85 bit 2 being set to “0”, selecting the tool tip point control mode includes
establishment of a programming coordinate system by fixing the current workpiece coordinate
system to the table. The table coordinate system will rotate as the table rotates. It will not change
in position, however, as the direction of the tool axis changes. Subsequent X-, Y- and Z-axis
motion commands will be executed with respect to the table coordinate system.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
The initial state of the table coordinate system refers to the current table position, or is to be
specified by a table rotation command given in the block of G43.4 or G43.5.
<Initial state>
<After table rotation>
Z
Z
o.
Y
K
ZA
Y
X
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
X
ZA
D740PB0035
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
A workpiece coordinate system fixed to the table.
The table coordinate system will rotate as the table rotates. It will not rotate, however, as the tool
rotates on its rotational axis. The tool path described on the basis of this coordinate system
refers to the relative motion of the tool to the workpiece.
26-3
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
<Description of the table coordinate system>
The angular position of the table at the fixing of the workpiece coordinate system depends on the
setting of the parameter concerned as follows:
Starting position
(F86 bit 6 = 0)
0° position
(F86 bit 6 = 1)
Method of fixing
the workpiece
coordinate
system to the
table
The workpiece coordinate system is fixed to
the table in its angular position at the start of
tool tip point control. That is, the initial state of
the table coordinate system refers to the current table position, or is to be specified by a
table rotation command given in the block of
G43.4 or G43.5.
The workpiece coordinate system is fixed to the
table in its angular position of 0°.
C-axis origin = 45°
C-axis origin = 45°
er
ve
d
.
Reference
angular position
Reference position
Y
re
s
Reference position
Y
C=0
ri
gh
ts
C-15.
G43.4Hh
.A
ll
X
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
30°
Example:
Workpiece origin
setting for the
C-axis = 45°
o.
Y
A
ZA
K
N
al
ri
C = 90.
C = 90.
K
IM
Se
Y
135°
X
ZA
X
A
M
YA
Since the table coordinate system depends on
the angular position at the start of tool tip point
control, correctly perform initial positioning on
the rotational axis concerned; otherwise the
relative position of the tool tip point to the
workpiece may deviate from the expected
path.
01
3
)2
(c
Positioning
Positioning
Fixing the workpiece coordinate system to the
table occurs at the start of tool tip point control.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
45°
Table rotation
Table rotation
120°
Feature
X
26-4
D740PB0036
Fixing the workpiece coordinate system to the
table occurs with the table in a C-axis position of
0° in the workpiece coordinate system.
Since the table coordinate system is independent of the angular position at the start of tool tip
point control, the relative position of the tool tip
point to the workpiece cannot deviate from the
expected path due to the initial angular positioning.
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
B.
26
Programming with a workpiece coordinate system
With the parameter F85 bit 2 being set to “1”, the current workpiece coordinate system is to be
used for describing the movement of the tool tip position. The coordinate system in this case will
not rotate as the table rotates.
Subsequent X-, Y- and Z-axis commands will be of linear motion with respect to the table (workpiece). Specify the ending positions along the orthogonal axes always taking into consideration
the particular angle of the table rotation.
<After table rotation>
<Initial state>
Z
Z
Y
X
er
ve
d
.
Y
gh
ts
re
s
X
ri
D740PB0037
2.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
A workpiece coordinate system established by offsetting the machine coordinate system in
accordance with the workpiece origin settings.
This coordinate system is stationary on the machine and does not rotate, therefore, with any
motion on the rotational axis of the table or the tool.
Programming format
K
ZA
A
Tool tip point control ON
Se
A.
ri
al
N
o.
Two types of programming formats are available for tool tip point control: type 1 for programming
only a tool length offset, and type 2 for programming a tool length offset and the direction (attitude) of the tool axis.
YA
M
A
Orthogonal coordinate axis motion command
Rotational axis motion command
Tool length offset number
Coordinate system for linear interpolation under G00 in tool tip point control mode
01
3
x, y, z :
a, b, c :
h
:
p
:
ZA
K
IM
<Type 1>
G43.4 (Xx Yy Zz Aa Bb Cc) Hh (Pp) ..... Tool tip point control type 1 ON
)2
<Type 2>
G43.5 (Xx Yy Zz) Ii Jj Kk Hh ............. Tool tip point control type 2 ON
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
x, y, z : Orthogonal coordinate axis motion command
i, j, k : Direction of tool axis (Position vector from tip point to center of rotation of the tool)
h
: Tool length offset number
C
B.
Tool tip point control OFF (cancellation)
G49 ......................................................... Tool tip point control OFF
Other G-codes in group 8
G43/G44 (Tool length offset in the plus/minus direction)
26-5
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
Notes
1.
The startup axis movement is executed in the currently active mode of movement. However,
giving a G43.4 or G43.5 command under a mode other than of linear movement (G00 or
G01) will cause an alarm (971 CANNOT USE TOOL TIP PT CONTROL).
2.
Do not give a command that reverses the direction of the tool with respect to the workpiece.
Otherwise an alarm will be caused (973 ILLEGAL TOOL AXIS VECTOR).
3.
Do not use an axis address other than those for the particular axes specified in the
parameters concerned (3 linear and 2 rotational ones). Otherwise an alarm will be caused
(974 TOOL TIP PT CTRL FORMAT ERROR).
4.
Do not specify the attitude of the tool axis using I, J, and K in the mode of tool tip point
control type 1 (G43.4). Otherwise an alarm will be caused (974 TOOL TIP PT CTRL FORMAT ERROR).
5.
Do not give any rotational axis motion command in the mode of tool tip point control type 2
(G43.5). Otherwise an alarm will be caused (974 TOOL TIP PT CTRL FORMAT ERROR).
6.
Do not give a G43.5 command (for tool tip point control type 2) without the table coordinate
system being appropriately selected for programming. Otherwise an alarm will be caused
(971 CANNOT USE TOOL TIP PT CONTROL).
7.
An argument of zero (0) for vector components (I, J, K) can be omitted in the mode of tool tip
point control type 2 (G43.5). The position vector of the preceding block will be kept intact if
all the three components are omitted.
8.
Parameter F36 bit 6 determines the number of effective decimal digits in the tool axis
vector’s components (I, J, K) for tool tip point control type 2.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
C.
o.
F36 bit 6 = 0:
N
4 and 5 decimal digits are effective for the metric and inch system, respectively.
K
ZA
ri
al
Example : For a block of G43.5I0.12345678J0.12345678K0.12345678Hh:
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
By rounding off the fifth decimal digit, 0.1235 is used as arguments I, J, and K for the
metric system.
By rounding off the seventh decimal digit, 0.12346 is used as arguments I, J, and K for
the inch system.
A
F36 bit 6 = 1:
M
7 decimal digits are effective, irrespective of the system of units.
YA
Example : For a block of G43.5I0.12345678J0.12345678K0.12345678Hh:
01
3
By rounding off the eighth decimal digit, 0.1234568 is used as arguments I, J, and K.
)2
<Number of effective digits in vector components I, J, and K>
0
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
F36 bit 6
9.
1
System of units
Minimum value
Maximum value
Metric system
–99999.9999
99999.9999
Inch system
–9999.99999
9999.99999
Metric system
–99.9999999
99.9999999
Inch system
–99.9999999
99.9999999
It depends upon the setting of a parameter (F114 bit 1) whether or not the cancellation
causes an axis motion (in the currently active mode in G-code group 1: at rapid traverse
[G00] or cutting feed [G01]) of canceling the tool length offset. Do not give a cancellation
command in a mode of circular interpolation. Otherwise an alarm will be caused (971 CANNOT USE TOOL TIP PT CONTROL).
10. The cancellation command G49 must be given with no other instruction codes. Giving the
G49 code with an axis motion command will cause an alarm (974 TOOL TIP PT CTRL
FORMAT ERROR).
26-6
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
26
11. In the mode of tool tip point control, the angular movement on a rotational axis of rotational
type always occur on the shortest path, and an angular distance of just 180° is covered in
particular by rotation in the positive direction.
12. Type 1 of tool tip point control allows the coordinate system for linear interpolation under
G00 in the mode of tool tip point control to be specified with argument P, as shown below.
Argument P can be omitted if it is 0 (for the use of the parameter setting concerned).
Argument P cannot be used for type 2 of tool tip point control.
.
P0 : As specified in the parameter setting concerned (F37 bit 4 = 0/1: Table/Machine coordinate system)
P1 : Table coordinate system (independently of the parameter setting concerned)
P2 : Machine coordinate system (independently of the parameter setting concerned)
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
The machine coordinate system is used for the linear interpolation concerned on condition
that
F37 bit 4 = 1, and the command block for selecting the mode of tool tip point control has
“P0” or “P2” specified as an argument (or argument P omitted),
workpiece coordinate system is selected (F85 bit 2 = 1; not table coordinate system [F85
bit 2 = 0]) for programming in the mode of tool tip point control,
the motion command is of positioning mode (G00), and
there is a motion command given (together) for the table’s rotational axis.
26-7
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
3.
Startup
The startup axis movement is executed with the tool tip point control being active (by an
interpolation with reference to the table coordinate system).
As explained in the table below, the startup operation depends upon whether or not motion
commands for the orthogonal or rotational axes are given in the same block as G43.4 or
G43.5. (The figures in the following table refer to a case where G43.4 is used for a machine
equipped with the tool’s rotational axis named B. This example applies in principle to all other
cases: use of G43.5 on a machine of different configuration, etc.)
Motion commands for orthogonal axes
Commands for
rotational axis
motion or toolaxis direction
G43.4Hh
G43.4XxYyZzHh
ts
re
s
G43.4Hh
er
ve
d
given (*1)
F162 bit 0 = 1
(No motion by the offset amount)
.
not given (*1)
F162 bit 0 = 0
(Motion by the offset amount)
.A
ll
ri
gh
Control point
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
not given
Tool tip point
Tool tip point
Y
(x, y, z)
X
o.
No motions occur at all.
A motion occurs for the tip point to
(A motion by the offset amount does be at a point of the specified coordinot occur.)
nates, inclusive of offset amount.
N
A shifting motion occurs for the tip
point to be at the current control
point, i.e. in the tool-axis direction
through the length offset distance.
Z
K
ZA
b
G43.4XxYyZzBbHh
b
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
b
G43.4BbHh
A
Se
ri
al
G43.4BbHh
given (*2)
Tool tip point
01
3
Tool tip point
X
)2
(c
(x, y, z)
Y
D740PB0038
A rotational motion occurs with
automatic linear axis movements in
order not to move the position of the
tool tip point, as in the programming
coordinate system (*2).
A linear and rotational motion
occurs for the tip point to be at a
point of the specified coordinates,
as in the programming coordinate
system (*2), inclusive of offset
amount.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
A linear and rotational motion
occurs for the tip point to be at the
current control point, as in the programming coordinate system (*2),
through the length offset distance.
Z
(*1)
“Given” is the orthogonal-axis motion command when the G43.4 or G43.5 block contains
even only one command for an orthogonal axis.
(*2)
If there is also a motion command for the table’s rotational axis given with the table
coordinate system being selected for programming, then that particular programming
coordinate system (the table coordinate system) will move accordingly. In such a case the
final position of the tip point’s (eventual) motion denotes a position relative to the table in
the specified angle.
26-8
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
4.
26
Cancellation
A parameter is provided for the selection of whether or not the cancellation includes the corresponding axis movement.
- Cancellation with axis movement (F114 bit 1 = 0)
The tool tip point control mode is cancelled with a shifting motion in the direction of the tool axis
for canceling the particular amount of length offset.
G49
er
ve
d
.
Control point
ts
re
s
Tool tip point
ri
.A
ll
- Cancellation without axis movement (F114 bit 1 = 1)
gh
D740PB0039
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
The tool tip point control mode is cancelled without any axis motions being caused by the
cancellation block.
K
ZA
A
Giving the G49 code with an axis motion command will cause an alarm (974 TOOL TIP
PT CTRL FORMAT ERROR).
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
Note :
D740PB0040
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
G49
26-9
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
5.
Operation in the mode of tool tip point control
A.
Tool tip point control type 1 (G43.4)
<Orthogonal and rotational axis motion commands given in one block>
- The motion is controlled in order that the tool tip point may describe the programmed path.
Z
:
G43.4Xx1Zz1Bb1Hh
Xx2Zz2Bb2
Xx3Zz3Bb3
:
b1
b2
er
ve
d
.
b3
re
s
z1
gh
ts
z2
z3
Table coordinate system
x2
x3
X
D740PB0041
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
x1
.A
ll
ri
Tool tip point
- The points on the tool path programmed using the workpiece coordinate system will be traced
by the tool after internal conversion of coordinates for the table coordinate system.
<An independent rotational axis motion command>
K
ZA
Z
b0
b1
Tool tip point
X
Table coordinate system
D740PB0042
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
:
G43.4Bb0Hh
:
Bb1
:
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
- The explicit command of rotation is executed together with automatic orthogonal axis movements in order not to move the position of the tool tip point, as in the table coordinate system (a
position relative to the workpiece).
26-10
Serial No. 340839
26
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
B.
Tool tip point control type 2 (G43.5)
<Orthogonal axis motion and position vector commands given in one block>
The motion is controlled in order that the tool tip point may describe the programmed path.
:
G43.5Xx1Zz1Ii1Jj1Kk1Hh
Xx2Zz2Ii2Jj2Kk2
Z
Xx3Zz3Ii3Jj3Kk3
:
(i1, j1, k1)
er
ve
d
.
(i2, j2, k2)
(i3, j3, k3)
z1
re
s
z2
z3
Programming coordinate system
x2
x3
.A
ll
x1
D740PB0043
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
<An independent position vector command>
X
ri
gh
ts
Tool tip point
The rotation command included in the position vector is executed together with automatic
orthogonal axis movements in order not to move the position of the tool tip point.
:
G43.5Ii0Jj0Kk0Hh
:
Ii1Jj1Kk1
:
A
ZA
(i1, j1, k1)
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
Z
K
N
o.
(i0, j0, k0)
YA
M
A
Tool tip point
01
3
X
Programming coordinate system
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
D740PB0044
26-11
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
6.
Positions, and Rate of feed, to be programmed in the mode of tool tip point control
Describe in the program the movement of the center of the tool tip.
Ball-ended milling cutter
Flat-ended milling cutter
Tool tip point
er
ve
d
D740PB0045
.
Tool tip point
ts
re
s
The feed is controlled so that the center of the tool tip may move at the specified rate.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
Control point
F
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
- Interpolation occurs in the continuous lines determined by the specified
positions of the tool tip point.
- Specified rate of feed (F) = Speed of the tool tip point’s motion
26-12
D740PB0046
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
7.
26
Interpolation methods for rotational axes
A parameter is provided for the selection between two interpolation methods for rotational axes:
Uniaxial rotation interpolation or Joint interpolation.
(In parentheses, the tool’s attitude varies from the same one at the start in different ways to the
same one at the end of an interpolation block, indeed, but in both methods the locus of the tool
tip points is the same in reference to the workpiece.)
Method
Uniaxial rotation interpolation
Parameter
F85 bit 3 = 0
Joint interpolation
F85 bit 3 = 1
A linear interpolation with a constant rotational
speed is applied to each rotational axis (as is
normally the case with G01).
<Tool axis direction relative to the workpiece>
<Tool axis direction relative to the workpiece>
Operation
er
ve
d
re
s
ts
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
Tool-axis direction
vector at end. pt.
gh
Tool-axis direction
vector at start. pt.
The locus of the tool-axis direction
vectors makes up in general a
curved surface.
Tool-axis direction
vector at start. pt.
Tool-axis direction
vector at end. pt.
ri
The locus of the tool-axis direction
vectors lies in a plane.
.
A simultaneous control is conducted on the rotational axes in order that the tool-axis direction vector
may move at a constant angular velocity in a plane
which is determined by the tool-axis direction
vectors at the starting and ending points.
Constant angular velocity in the plane
<Machine action>
o.
<Machine action>
A
ZA
K
The speed of rotation is kept
constant on each axis.
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
The speed of rotation is not
kept constant on each axis.
D740PB0047
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
There arises no unexpected collision or faulty
machining during execution of an interpolation
block since the tool attitude relative to the workpiece is always kept in a plane which is determined by the tool-axis direction vectors at the starting
and ending points.
C
op
Feature
In order that the tool attitude relative to the workpiece may always be kept in one and the same
plane, however, an intense motion on a particular
controlled axis may be caused at the beginning,
the end, or in the middle, of a block.
26-13
During execution of an interpolation block the
tool axis deviates from the plane including the
tool-axis direction vectors at the starting and
ending points. The extent of the deviation depends upon the configuration of the machine’s
controlled axes. This must be taken into consideration in programming so as to prevent collision and faulty machining.
As the motion speed on each axis is kept constant, machine operation progresses smoothly
and the machining time can be reduced to some
extent in general. Consequently, this method of
joint interpolation should be selected unless
special care must be taken about collision and
faulty machining.
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
<Notes>
In order to move the tool-axis direction vector in one and the same plane, the method of uniaxial
rotation interpolation may sometimes cause abrupt and discontinuous axis motions, as illustrated
below with an example. The method of joint interpolation should in general be selected unless,
for operational safety or other reasons, it is desired to keep the change in tool’s attitude always in
the plane determined by the attitude vectors at the starting and ending points.
Program example
N1 B0.C0.
N2 G43.4H1
N3 B45.C90.
er
ve
d
.
Figure A below shows the relative position of the tool to the workpiece for block N3.
gh
ts
re
s
Let us now take as an example the execution of block N3 by uniaxial rotation interpolation. In
order that the tool’s attitude vector may move in the plane including the tool-axis direction vectors
at the starting and ending points, actual machine operation will be as shown in Figure B. That is:
first, in order to fit the B-axis rotation plane to that of the motion of the tool’s attitude vector
.A
ll
ri
a rotation by 90° occurs on the C-axis and, in synchronization with it, a movement of the
tool tip point is performed to follow the starting point ([1] in Figure B),
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
then the tool tip point is fed to the ending point on the workpiece with a synchronized tool
axis rotation by 45°, as programmed, on the B-axis ([2] in Figure B).
(A) Tool’s relative motion to the workpiece
C90
B45
A
Se
K
IM
C0
[2]
Ps
(Starting point)
A
ZA
Ps
ZA
ri
Pe
(Ending point)
K
al
N
o.
B0
(B) Machine action for uniaxial rotation interpolation
[1]
Pe
YA
M
D740PB0048
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
As illustrated above, the uniaxial rotation interpolation may sometimes cause discontinuous
machine actions, while the joint interpolation is executed in continuous and smooth motions from
the start to the end of the block.
26-14
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
26
Graphic explanation with tool’s attitude vectors in the top view of the machining surface.
The interpolation of tool’s attitude vector occurs in synchronization with the tip point’s movement. The starting point, and the length, of the vector in the figure below refer to the position
of the tool tip point, and the attitude (inclination) of the tool axis, respectively. (The shorter the
vector, the uprighter [nearer to a position of B = 0] the tool.)
Joint interpolation
Ending point
B45. C90.
As a result of uniform
motions on the B- and
C-axis, the plane of toolaxis inclination pivots
continuously.
Ending point
B45. C90.
.
Initial rotation by 90° on
the C-axis is required for
the tool-axis inclination to
always occur in a plane
in this direction.
er
ve
d
Uniaxial rotation interpolation
B27. C54.
B27.
B18.
re
s
B36. C72.
B36.
ts
B18. C36.
B9.
ri
gh
B9. C18.
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
A
ZA
K
N
al
ri
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
Starting point
B0. C0.
(Attitude vector
is upright.)
.A
ll
Starting point
B0. C0.
(Attitude vector
is upright.)
26-15
D740PB0049
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
8.
Selection for determining the angle on the rotational axis
A.
Tool tip point control type 1 (G43.4)
As for tool tip point control type 1, movement on the rotational axis is carried out exactly as
programmed (independently of the selected “type of passage through singular point” described
later).
Because of the specified tool attitude being unobtainable, an alarm will be caused (973
ILLEGAL TOOL AXIS VECTOR) when the following three conditions are all met:
The method of uniaxial rotation interpolation is selected,
2.
The position on the primary rotational axis differs in algebraic sign between the starting and
ending points, and
3.
A singular point (a state where the tool axis is parallel to the axis of rotation of the secondary
rotational axis) is not passed as the starting point, nor on the way to the ending point.
(This applies when, for instance, a motion command for the secondary rotational axis is
included in the same block, with condition 2 above being satisfied.)
Table rotating type
Mixed type
N
Tool rotating type
ri
Definition of primary and secondary rotational axes
.A
ll
Remark :
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
1.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Secondary rotational axis
Tool
Primary rotational axis
Table
N
o.
Primary rotational axis
K
Workpiece
Table
Secondary
rotational axis
ZA
Table
Tool
A
K
IM
Se
ri
Workpiece
Workpiece
ZA
al
Tool
Primary
rotational axis
Secondary rotational axis
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
D740PB0034
26-16
Serial No. 340839
26
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
B.
Tool tip point control type 2 (G43.5)
<At the startup of tool tip point control>
As for tool tip point control type 2, a command for the tool-axis direction with I, J, and K can in
general be executed by using either of the two pairs of angles on the rotational axes concerned.
Pairs of angles on the rotational axes for obtaining the specified
tool’s attitude relative to the workpiece
Programmed command
Solution with a positive angle
of the B-axis
For tool rotating
type
Solution with a negative angle
of the B-axis
B = –45°
C = 180°
er
ve
d
.
B = 45°
C = 0°
ts
Solution with a negative angle
of the A-axis
For table rotating
type
A = –30°
N
.A
ll
A = 30°
ri
gh
Solution with a positive angle
of the A-axis
re
s
I0.707J0K0.707
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
C = 0°
I0J0.866K0.5
ZA
K
IM
Se
I0.707J0K0.707
B = 45°
B = –45°
C = 0°
C = 180°
A
ri
al
For mixed type
Solution with a negative angle
of the B-axis
K
N
o.
Solution with a positive angle
of the B-axis
C = 180°
ZA
D740PB0091
A
The appropriate one of the two solutions is internally selected by the following process:
Decision for the solution whose angle of the primary rotational axis has the same sign as its
initial position (position at the startup of the tool tip point control by a G43.5 command),
[2]
If not decided in step [1] above (i.e. when the initial position on the primary rotational axis is
equal to 0), then decision for the solution whose angle of the primary rotational axis has the
same sign as the wider side of its axis stroke,
[3]
If not yet decided in step [2] above (i.e. when the positive and negative sides of the stroke
on the primary rotational axis are equal to each other), then final decision for the solution
whose angle of the primary rotational axis has a negative sign.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
[1]
26-17
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
<In the mode of tool tip point control (on passage through singular point)>
In the mode of tool tip point control type 2 there are two types available for the passage through a
singular point (a state where the tool axis is parallel to the axis of rotation of the secondary
rotational axis), which are especially distinctive with regard to the angle of the rotational axis
concerned at the ending point. Use parameter F162 bit 1 to select the desired type.
Type 1 of passage through singular point
Selected is a simultaneous control of rotational axes which results in the ending
point’s angle of the primary rotational axis obtaining the same sign as its initial
position (position at the startup by a G43.5 command).
Operation
The angle of the primary rotational axis (B- or A-axis in this example) has always the
same sign (including 0).
B=0
B = positive
re
s
B = positive
er
ve
d
.
- For tool rotating type
C = 180
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
C=0
- For table rotating type
A = positive
A = positive
N
o.
F162 bit 1 = 1
A=0
K
ZA
A
C=0
C = 180
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
Example
B = positive
B=0
B = positive
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
- For mixed type
C=0
C
op
yr
ig
ht
B
C = 180
D740PB0092
26-18
Serial No. 340839
26
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
Type 2 of passage through singular point
With respect to the sign of the ending point’s angle of the primary rotational axis the
appropriate method of axis control is internally selected by the following process:
[1] Decision for a method which does not require an angular position beyond the
permissible motion range of rotational axis,
[2] If not decided in step [1], then decision for a method which requires smaller
distance of angular motion on the secondary rotational axis,
(Short-cut method for secondary rotational axis)
Operation
[3] If not decided in step [2], then decision for a method which requires smaller
distance of angular motion on the primary rotational axis,
(Short-cut method for primary rotational axis)
er
ve
d
.
[4] If not yet decided in step [3], then final decision for a method which results in the
ending point’s angle of the primary rotational axis obtaining the same sign as its
initial position (position at the startup by a G43.5 command).
re
s
The ending point’s angle of the primary rotational axis is determined in principle so
that smaller distance of angular motion is required for the secondary rotational axis
(C-axis in this example).
gh
B=0
B = negative
.A
ll
ri
B = positive
ts
- For tool rotating type
C=0
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
C=0
F162 bit 1 = 0
A=0
A = negative
A
ZA
K
A = positive
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
- For table rotating type
C=0
C=0
- For mixed type
B = positive
B=0
B = negative
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
Example
C=0
C=0
D740PB0093
26-19
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
9.
Coordinate system for linear interpolation under G0 in the mode of tool tip point control
The coordinate system for linear interpolation under G0 in the mode of tool tip point control
depends upon the setting of the parameter F37 bit 4 as follows:
F37 bit 4 = 0: Table coordinate system
F37 bit 4 = 1: Machine coordinate system
The machine coordinate system is used for the linear interpolation concerned on
condition that
F37 bit 4 = 1, and the command block for selecting the mode of tool tip point control
has “P0” or “P2” specified as an argument (or argument P omitted),
workpiece coordinate system is selected (F85 bit 2 = 1; not table coordinate system
[F85 bit 2 = 0]) for programming in the mode of tool tip point control,
the motion command is of positioning mode (G0), and
there is a motion command given (together) for the table’s rotational axis.
ts
Linear interpolation in the table coordinate system
gh
A.
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Note :
ri
The linear interpolation in question occurs in the table coordinate system when F37 bit 4 = 0.
.A
ll
The movement of the tool tip point is controlled with table rotation being taken into consideration.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Example : Execution of a command of single-axis motion on the C-axis (table’s rotational axis)
by 120° in the workpiece coordinate system
B
B
B
A
K
ZA
A
A
B
A
Motion of the tool tip point on the machine
Motion of the tool tip point on the table
D740PB0135
ZA
Linear interpolation in the machine coordinate system
A
B.
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
A
M
The linear interpolation in question occurs in the machine coordinate system when F37 bit 4 = 1.
YA
The movement of the tool tip point is controlled independently of table rotation.
(c
)2
01
3
Example : Execution of a command of single-axis motion on the C-axis (table’s rotational axis)
by 120° in the workpiece coordinate system
B
B
C
op
yr
ig
ht
B
B
B
A
A
A
A
A
Motion of the tool tip point on the machine
Motion of the tool tip point on the table
D740PB0136
26-20
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
26
When F37 bit 4 = 1, a G0-command (of interpolation type) is executed in order that the tool tip
point may describe a straight line segment in the machine coordinate system, not in the table
coordinate system, as is normally the case with a motion command of linear interpolation in the
mode of tool tip point control. No motions occur, therefore, on the orthogonal axes in the case of
a command for the table’s rotational axis only.
In case that motion commands are given for orthogonal axes and the table’s rotational axis in the
same block, the tool tip point will describe a straight line segment up to the specified ending point
in the machine coordinate system.
B
For moving the tool tip point on a linear
path in the table coordinate system
(non-linear, therefore, with respect to
the machine coordinate system).
re
s
A
B
F37 bit 4 = 1
ts
For moving the tool tip point on a linear
path in the machine coordinate system
(independently of the table rotation).
.A
ll
ri
gh
A
B
er
ve
d
A
.
F37 bit 4 = 0
G0G91X-10.Y-5.C120.
D740PB0137
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
<Precautions on selecting the machine coordinate system for linear interpolation by G0>
K
ZA
A
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
When a motion command for the tool’s rotational axis is given in the same block, a simultaneous
control is provided in order that the tool tip point may describe a straight line segment in the
machine coordinate system up to the specified ending point.
01
3
D740PB0138
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
The interpolation method applied to rotational axes is always of joint interpolation, independently
of the parameter concerned (F85 bit 3).
26-21
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
In a combined use with other functions of coordinate conversion (for workpiece setup error correction [G54.4], inclined-plane machining [G68.2, G68.3], etc.), a control for the same purpose
(linear path up to the specified ending point in the machine coordinate system) is provided with
all the functions concerned being taken into consideration.
Z
X
Z
Values for workpiece
setup error correction
x = 40
y = 30
Motion commands
X–70
Y–50
C100
Y
er
ve
d
.
Y
Motion commands
X–70
Y–50
C100
X
D740PB0139
gh
ts
re
s
Coordinate system
conversion
N
.A
ll
ri
It makes no difference in the commands available in the mode of tool tip point control whether
the machine coordinate system or the table coordinate system is selected for the linear interpolation concerned.
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
As for a combined use with the tool radius compensation for five-axis machining, the selection of
the machine coordinate system for the linear interpolation concerned makes a difference in the
movement direction for the block in question and, therefore, in the vector created for radius
compensation as well as in whether or not supplementary blocks are automatically inserted. For
this reason it is advisable to use for a preparatory positioning close to the workpiece surface
(cutting position) a command of linear interpolation in the table coordinate system (under another
mode than G0, or without designation for the table’s rotational axis).
26-22
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
26
26-1-3 Relationship to other functions
1.
Commands usable in the same block with G43.4/G43.5
Code
Function
Code
Positioning
Function
G00
Incremental data input
G91
Linear interpolation
G01
Feed function
F
Absolute data input
G90
Commands available in the mode of tool tip point control
Function
Code
re
s
A.
er
ve
d
Relationship to other commands
Function
ts
2.
.
Giving any other command than those enumerated above in the same block as G43.4/G43.5 will
lead to an alarm (972 ILLEGAL CMD TOOL TIP PT CTRL).
Code
G00
Scaling OFF
Linear interpolation
G01
Exact stop mode
Circular interpolation
G02/G03
(*1) (*5)
Geometry compensation
G61.1 (*3)
Cutting mode
G64
Dwell
G04
Macro call
High-speed machining mode
G05 (*4)
Absolute data input
G90
Exact-stop
G09
Incremental data input
G91
Plane selection
G17/G18/G19
Inverse time feed
G93
Tool radius compensation OFF
G40
Feed per minute
G94
G41.2
G41.4
G41.5
M, S, T, B output to opposite system
G112 (*2)
Tool radius compensation for five-axis
machining (to the left)
Subprogram call/End of subprogram
M98/M99
G49
ri
G50
G61
G65
Feed function
F
M, S, T, B function
MSTB (*2)
Local variables, Common variables, Operation
commands (arithmetic operations, trigonometric functions, square root, etc), Control
commands (IF GOTO , WHILE DO )
Macro
instructions
M
A
.A
ll
K
ZA
A
K
IM
G43/G44
Tool position offset OFF
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
N
al
ri
G42.2
G42.4
G42.5
ZA
Tool length offset (+/–)
Se
Tool radius compensation for five-axis
machining (to the right)
gh
Positioning
A command for helical/spiral interpolation will lead to an alarm (972 ILLEGAL CMD TOOL TIP PT CTRL).
Use of a tool function (T-code) in the mode of tool tip point control will lead to an alarm (972 ILLEGAL CMD TOOL
TIP PT CTRL).
*3
Giving a G61.1 command with the geometry compensation being invalid for rotational axes will lead to an alarm
(972 ILLEGAL CMD TOOL TIP PT CTRL).
The fairing function for high-speed machining cannot be made effective. The related parameter (F96 bit 1) is of no
effect during tool tip point control.
With the table coordinate system being selected for programming, giving a circular interpolation command will lead
to an alarm.
(c
)2
01
3
YA
*1
*2
C
op
yr
ig
*5
ht
*4
Giving any other command than those enumerated above in the mode of tool tip point control will
lead to an alarm (972 ILLEGAL CMD TOOL TIP PT CTRL).
26-23
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
B.
Modes in which tool tip point control is selectable
Code
Function
Code
Positioning
G00
Cutting mode
G64
Linear interpolation
G01
Macro call
G65
High-speed machining mode OFF
G05P0
Modal macro call OFF
G67
Radius data input for X-axis ON
G10.9X0
3-D coordinate conversion ON
G68 (*2)
Programmed data setting OFF
G11
Plane selection
G17/G18/G19
Inch data input
G20
Metric data input
G21
3-D coordinate conversion OFF
G69
Pre-move stroke check OFF
G23
Fixed cycle OFF
G80
Tool radius compensation OFF
G40
Absolute data input
Control for normal-line direction OFF
G40.1
Incremental data input
er
ve
d
Function
Tool length offset (+/–)
G43/G44
Inverse time feed
Tool position offset OFF
G49
Feed per minute
Head offset for five-surface machining OFF
G49.1
Constant surface speed control OFF
Scaling OFF
G50
Mirror image OFF
G50.1
Initial point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G98
Polygonal machining mode OFF
G50.2
G99
Selection of workpiece coordinate system,
additional workpiece coordinate system
G54-59,
G54.1
R-point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
Workpiece setup error correction
G54.4
Exact stop mode
G61
Geometry compensation
G61.1 (*1)
G68.2
Inclined-plane machining
G68.3
.
G68.4
G90
re
s
G91
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
G93
G94
G97
G109
Cross machining control axis cancellation
G111
Hob milling mode OFF
G113
o.
Single program multi-process control
Giving a G43.4/G43.5 command under G61.1 with the geometry compensation being invalid for rotational axes will
lead to an alarm (971 CANNOT USE TOOL TIP PT CONTROL).
A G43.4/G43.5 command can be given under G68 only when parameter F168 bit 4 = 1 (Replacing the 3-D
coordinate conversion command [G68] with inclined-plane machining command [G68.2]).
ZA
A
Se
ri
*2
K
al
N
*1
On the use of the MAZATROL tool data
A
3.
ZA
K
IM
Giving a G43.4/G43.5 command in a mode other than those enumerated above will lead to an
alarm (971 CANNOT USE TOOL TIP PT CONTROL).
)2
01
3
YA
M
The data settings of the TOOL DATA display (prepared for the execution of MAZATROL
programs) can also be used for the tool tip point control. The table below indicates those usage
patterns [1] to [4] of the externally stored tool offset data items which are applied to the tool tip
point control according to the settings of the relevant parameters (F93 bit 3 and F94 bit 7).
ht
(c
Table 26-1 Tool offset data items used according to the parameter settings
yr
ig
Pattern
TOOL OFFSET
C
op
[1]
Data items used
(Display and Data item names)
Offset data items
Parameter
F94 bit 7
F93 bit 3
0
0
1
1
LENGTH
Programming method
G43.4/G43.5 with H-code
T-code
[2]
TOOL DATA
[3]
TOOL DATA
LENG. No.
LENG. CO.
1
0
G43.4/G43.5 with H-code
[4]
TOOL OFFSET +
TOOL DATA
Offset data items +
LENGTH
0
1
G43.4/G43.5 with H-code +
T-code
LENGTH + LENG. No.
LENGTH + LENG. CO.
26-24
T-code + H-code
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
4.
26
Change between Tip control and Length offset
A.
Immediate change between G43.4/G43.5 and G43/G44 (without using G49)
er
ve
d
.
An immediate change of one mode for the other with a motion command added causes the
“control point” to be moved to the specified position. The control point here refers to the real tool
tip point in the case of G43.4 and G43.5 or, for G43 and G44, to an imaginary tip point which
corresponds to a B-axis angle of 0°.
An independent change (without axis motion commands) does not include any change at all in
axis positions, indeed, but causes the POSITION values (indicated with respect to the workpiece
coordinate system) to be changed because of the above-mentioned difference in the meaning of
the control point unless the current B-axis position is 0°.
re
s
See the description under B below for more information.
T01 T02 M6
G01 X_Y_Z_F_
ATC includes selection of length offset function.
(Note 1)
N
N01
N02
···
···
N10
N11
···
···
N20
N21
···
···
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
Shown below is a programming example with an explanatory figure for the use of the
MAZATROL tool data (stored on the TOOL DATA display).
G43.4 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Bb1
G01 X_Y_Z_B_C_
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Machining with length offset function (G43)
Tool tip point control ON
(Note 2)
o.
Machining with tip point control (G43.4)
G43 Xx2 Yy2 Zz2
G01 X_Y_Z_B0
(Note 2)
K
A
ZA
Machining with length offset function (G43)
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
Tool length offset ON
YA
M
A
N01
N02 - N09,
from N21 on
N20
(x1, y1, z1)
N11 - N19
(x2, y2, z2)
ht
(c
)2
01
3
N10
ig
Z
Control
point
Real
tip point
C
op
yr
Control point =
Real tip point
X
D734P2014
Note 1: When F93 bit 3 = 1, the length offset function is automatically made active by each
ATC operation according to the new tool’s LENGTH value on the TOOL DATA display.
Note 2: Add an H-code as required to use as the offset amount the sum of the LENGTH value
and another related setting. (See Table 26-1 “Tool offset data items used according to
the parameter settings” for more information.)
26-25
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
B.
POSITION counting displayed on the screen
An immediate (without using G49) and independent (without axis motion commands) change
between G43.4/G43.5 and G43/G44 brings about no actual machine motion (axis movements),
but causes the POSITION values on the display to be changed unless the current B-axis position
is 0°.
1.
Change of G43/G44 for G43.4/G43.5
( ii )
( iii )
er
ve
d
.
(i)
Z
re
s
[2]
X
gh
ri
Upon change of G43 for G43.4
the real tip point is indicated
correctly by the POSITION
value.
D734P2015
.A
ll
The POSITION value [1] in the
G43 mode does not corresponds with the real tip point [2]
unless B-axis = 0°.
2.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
In the G43 mode the POSITION
value (of the tip position as
recognized by the NC) corresponds with the real tip point
when B-axis = 0°.
ts
[1]
Change of G43.4/G43.5 for G43/G44
( ii )
( iii )
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
Z
K
al
N
o.
(i)
ZA
X
[1]
Change of G43.4 for G43
makes the POSITION value
[1] different from the real tip
point [2] unless B-axis = 0°.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
In the G43.4 mode the POSITION
value (of the tip position as recognized by the NC) corresponds with
the real tip point, irrespective of Baxis position.
[2]
26-26
Correct POSITION indication
will not occur in the G43 mode
until the B-axis is indexed to
the 0° position.
D734P2016
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
C.
26
Change between G43.4/G43.5 and G43/G44 by means of G49
The execution of the cancellation command G49 includes axis movements for canceling the
offset amount in general (see Note 4 below). Add, therefore, a motion command as required for a
safety position before the G49 command is given as a means of mode change.
Shown below is a programming example with an explanatory figure for the use of the
MAZATROL tool data (stored on the TOOL DATA display).
N01
N02
···
···
N08
N09
N10
N11
N12
···
···
N18
N19
N20
N21
N22
···
···
T01 T02 M6
G01 X_Y_Z_F_
ATC includes selection of length offset function.
(Note 1)
Machining with length offset function (G43)
G0 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1
G49
G0 Xx2 Yy2 Zz2 Bb2 Cc2
G43.4
G01 X_Y_Z_B_C_
gh
ri
Machining with tip point control (G43.4)
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Positioning to a safety position for canceling the length offset function.
Canceling the length offset function in the safety position.
Positioning to a safety position for selecting the tip point control.
Selecting the tip point control in the safety position.
(Note 1, 2)
G0 Xx3 Yy3 Zz3 Bb3 Cc3
G49
G0 Xx4 Yy4 Zz4 Bb4 Cc4
G43
G01 X_Y_Z_B0
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
Positioning to a safety position for canceling the tip point control.
Canceling the tip point control in the safety position.
(Note 4)
Positioning to a safety position for selecting the length offset function.
Selecting the length offset function in the safety position. (Note 1, 3)
N11,
N18
A
K
IM
Se
ri
N08,
N21
ZA
al
N01
K
N
o.
Machining with length offset function (G43)
N12 - N17
N10,
N19
01
3
YA
M
N09,
N20
A
ZA
N02 - N07,
from N22 on
)2
D734P2017
ig
ht
(c
Note 1: When F93 bit 3 = 1, the length offset function is automatically made active by each
ATC operation according to the new tool’s LENGTH value on the TOOL DATA display.
C
op
yr
Note 2: Add an H-code as required to use as the offset amount the sum of the LENGTH value
and another related setting. (See Table 26-1 “Tool offset data items used according to
the parameter settings” for more information.)
Note 3: Irrespective of the related parameters (F94 bit 7 and F93 bit 3), the execution of a G49
command always clears the currently used offset amount. Do not fail, therefore, to give
a G43 command or a tool change command (T_T_M6) again as required to replace the
tip point control when the automatic selection of the length offset function is used (with
F93 bit 3 = 1).
Note 4: Axis movements for canceling the offset amount do not occur by the execution of an
independent command of G49 unless F114 bit 1 = 0.
26-27
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
5.
Prefiltering for rotational axes
The tool tip point control may sometimes require a series of fluctuating angular movements
which, in turn, necessitates frequent alternation of acceleration and deceleration, resulting in the
surface quality being deteriorated. The function of prefiltering for rotational axes applies a
moving average to the amounts of serial angular movements to smooth fluctuations of tool
attitude.
The time constant used in prefiltering for rotational axes can be set in parameter L125. The
higher the time constant is, the more smoothly the tool attitude is changed. The prefiltering in
question cannot be made effective at all when the time constant (L125) is set to zero (0).
The prefiltering function works with its time constant (L125) on condition that
.
er
ve
d
re
s
ts
The setting in L125 is exclusively used in prefiltering for rotational axes.
gh
*
high-speed smooth interpolation is valid (G5P2, G61.1, F3 = 1),
F36 bit 7 is set to 1 (Prefiltering for rotational axes is made valid),
tool tip point control is ON (under G43.4 or G43.5), and
the mode of cutting feed, or interpolation, is ON.
.A
ll
ri
Without prefiltering
Acceleration
N
Deceleration
Deceleration
NC control point
Tool tip point
K
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Acceleration
ZA
A
D740PB0093
K
IM
Se
Damage to surface due to frequent alternation of
acceleration and deceleration
Gradually decelerated
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
Gradually accelerated
M
A
ZA
With prefiltering
D740PB0094
26-28
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
6.
26
Five-axis fairing function
The five-axis fairing function is provided to correct the command points of tool tip as well as the
command angles for rotational axes in the mode of tool tip point control in order to obtain smooth
machining movements by diminishing critical variations in the microsegment program section.
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Before five-axis fairing
gh
ts
: Path through the command points
ri
D747PB0014
K
A
K
IM
Se
: Path after five-axis fairing
: Path through the command points
ZA
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
After five-axis fairing
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
D747PB0015
26-29
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
A.
Required conditions for five-axis fairing function
The five-axis fairing function cannot work until, in the mode of tool tip point control (G43.4 or
G43.5), high-speed machining mode is turned ON (with G05P2) with parameter F157 bit 6 = 1
(Five-axis fairing function enabled), and four blocks of linear interpolation (five command points)
are programmed in succession.
Example :
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
(Tool tip point control ON)
(High-speed machining mode ON)
(P1)
(P2)
Five-axis fairing function activated
(Pn)
(Pn+1)
(High-speed machining mode OFF)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
N100 G43.4 .....................................
N101 G05P2 .....................................
N102 G00 X_Y_Z_B_C_ .................
N103 G01 X_Y_Z_B_C_ .................
N189
X_Y_Z_B_C_ ......................
N190 G00 X_Y_Z_B_C_ .................
N200 G05P0 .....................................
N201 G49
N202 M30
P1
P2
Pn+1
Pn
D747PB0016
K
al
N
o.
: Path after five-axis fairing
: Path through the command points
B.
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
In the above example, the five-axis fairing function is activated for the blocks N103 to N189 to
correct the command points (P2 to Pn).
Conditions for canceling five-axis fairing function
M
A
ZA
The five-axis fairing function is temporarily canceled as often as one of the following conditions is
satisfied:
A command is given for another motion type than linear interpolation (G01).
YA
1.
01
3
The five-axis fairing function is only applied to motion blocks of linear interpolation (G01) to
correct their command points.
A move-free block (without any motion command) is found.
)2
2.
ht
(c
The fairing function for three orthogonal axes is canceled at a block without motion
commands for those axes.
C
op
yr
ig
The fairing function for two rotational axes is canceled at a block without any motion
commands for orthogonal as well as for rotational axes.
3.
Move-free are, for instance, an empty block (null contents) and a comment block beginning
and ending with “(” and “).”
Single block operation mode is activated.
The five-axis fairing function is temporarily canceled as long as the single block operation
mode is activated.
26-30
Serial No. 340839
26
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
C.
Setting of the distance for geometry recognition
The distance of geometry recognition is preset independently for orthogonal and rotational axes,
and the five-axis fairing function conducts correction of the command points with respect to the
preceding and succeeding areas of the specified distance from the point concerned, or to the
geometry described by up to 7 blocks of linear interpolation.
1.
Distance of geometry recognition for three orthogonal axes
Geometry recognition dist. f. 3 orthogon. axes .......... Parameter F4
.
Example : F4 = 5000 (0.5 mm)
er
ve
d
Command point
Z
Unit: mm
Y
0.15
0.1
re
s
X
0.15
0.15
0.2
gh
Point corrected
ts
0.2
ri
Succeeding: 0.5
Preceding: 0.5
N
F4 = 5000 (0.5 mm)
.A
ll
0.2
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
: Path after five-axis fairing
: Path through the command points
D747PB0017
o.
In the following cases, however, the path of tool tip point will be drawn as programmed
without any correction of command points.
K
A
ZA
Unit: mm
K
IM
Se
Command point
ri
al
N
The distance of the motion specified in a single block is greater than F4.
0.7
0.8
A
ZA
Succeeding:
Preceding:
0.5
0.5
F4 = 5000 (0.5 mm)
M
Z
YA
Y
X
01
3
D747PB0018
ht
(c
)2
As is the case with an arc composed of microsegment blocks, the geometry described
with blocks (of smaller motion distance than F4) is judged to be smooth enough.
ig
Command point
yr
0.1
op
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
C
0.1
0.1
0.1
Preceding:
0.5
Succeeding:
0.5
F4 = 5000 (0.5 mm)
Z
Unit: mm
Y
X
Note :
D747PB0019
A value of 1 mm or 0.04 in is used even if parameter F4 is set to zero (0).
26-31
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
2.
Distance of geometry recognition for two rotational axes
Geometry recognition dist. f. 2 rotation. axes .......... Parameter F5
In the following cases the path of tool tip point will be drawn as programmed without any
correction of command points.
The angular distance of the motion specified in a single block is greater than F5.
As is the case with an arc composed of microsegment blocks, the geometry described
with blocks (of smaller motion distance than F5) is judged to be smooth enough.
Note :
.
Setting of tolerance (of chord error)
er
ve
d
D.
A value of 1° is used even if parameter F5 is set to zero (0).
ts
re
s
The tolerance (of chord error) is preset independently for orthogonal and rotational axes, and the
point corrected by the five-axis fairing function can be further corrected in order that the error
from the original command point may not exceed the tolerance (of chord error).
Maximum permissible linear error caused by fairing for three orthogonal axes
ri
gh
1.
.A
ll
Max. linear error caused by 5-axis fairing ........ Parameter F104
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Example : Linear error of the point corrected by fairing is greater than F104.
Point corrected by fairing
(corrected further)
Z
Y
K
ZA
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
X
F104
K
IM
Point corrected by fairing
(without further correction)
ZA
: Path after five-axis fairing
: Path through the command points
M
A
D747PB0020
Maximum permissible angular error caused by fairing for rotational axes
01
3
2.
No further correction is performed after fairing if parameter F104 is set to zero (0).
YA
Note :
(c
)2
Max. angular error caused by 5-axis fairing ........ Parameter F128
Angle
Point corrected by fairing
(without further correction)
C
op
yr
ig
ht
Example : Angular error of the point corrected by fairing is greater than F128.
Time
Point corrected by fairing
(corrected further)
F128
: Path after five-axis fairing
: Path through the command points
26-32
D747PB0021
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
26
26-1-4 Restrictions
The selection code of tool tip point control (G43.4/G43.5) must not be given together with
any other G-code.
2.
Calculation of the machining time
The machining time cannot be calculated accurately for a program containing tool tip point
control commands.
3.
Tracing
Tracing in the mode of tool tip point control is displayed with reference to the machine
coordinate system.
4.
Tool path check
Tool path check function cannot be applied to a program containing tool tip point control
commands. (The programmed data can only be checked as if tool tip point control were
throughout cancelled.)
5.
Restart
As for restarting operation, do not specify a block within the G43.4/G43.5 mode (nor a block
of cancellation [G49]) as a restarting position. Otherwise an alarm will be caused (956
RESTART OPERATION NOT ALLOWED).
6.
Resetting
The mode of tool tip point control is cancelled by resetting.
7.
Corner chamfering/rounding
Do not use corner chamfering or rounding commands in the mode of tool tip point control.
Otherwise an alarm will be caused (972 ILLEGAL CMD TOOL TIP PT CTRL).
8.
Mirror image function (activated by a code or external switch)
Mirror image function is not available at all in the mode of tool tip point control.
9.
Macro interruption and MDI interruption
Macro interruption as well as MDI interruption is not available in the mode of tool tip point
control.
Giving a G43.4/G43.5 command with macro interruption being active will lead to an alarm
(971 CANNOT USE TOOL TIP PT CONTROL), while an attempt to perform MDI interruption in the mode of tool tip point control will only cause another alarm (167 ILLEGAL
OPER TOOL TIP PT CTRL).
K
ZA
A
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
1.
01
3
YA
M
10. Display of actual feed rate
The feed rate displayed is the final resultant rate of feed, not the feed rate at the tool tip with
respect to the workpiece.
ht
(c
)2
11. Manual interruption
As a general precaution to be taken for normal machine operation, resetting is required after
any manual interruption (resumption of operation is prohibited).
C
op
yr
ig
12. The relevant items of digital information on the POSITION display denote the following in
the mode of tool tip point control:
POSITION:
MACHINE:
BUFFER:
REMAIN:
Position of the tool tip point in the workpiece coordinate system
Position of the control point in the machine coordinate system
Moving distance of the control point in the next block
Remaining distance of movement of the control point in the current block
13. Tool function
Use of a tool function (T-code) in the mode of tool tip point control will lead to an alarm (972
ILLEGAL CMD TOOL TIP PT CTRL).
26-33
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
14. Calling a MAZATROL program as a subprogram
Do not specify a MAZATROL program as a subprogram to be called up in the mode of tool
tip point control. Otherwise an alarm will be caused (972 ILLEGAL CMD TOOL TIP PT
CTRL).
15. Circular interpolation
Circular interpolation can only be applied when the current tool tip point control is of type 1
(G43.4) with workpiece coordinate system being selected for programming. In other cases
giving a command for circular interpolation will cause an alarm (971 CANNOT USE TOOL
TIP PT CONTROL). Moreover, even thus available circular interpolation mode cannot
accept any commands for rotational axes, and such an inadmissible command will result in
the alarm 972 ILLEGAL CMD TOOL TIP PT CTRL.
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
16. MAZATROL tool data
When the MAZATROL tool data (data prepared on the TOOL DATA display) are made valid
for executing EIA/ISO programs, milling tools should generally be used in the mode of tool
tip point control. Tool length offset for tool tip point control will be executed for turning tools
with their LENGTH B and NOSE-R data being ignored.
.A
ll
ri
17. High-speed machining mode
The fairing function for high-speed machining cannot be made effective. The related parameter (F96 bit 1) is of no effect during tool tip point control.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
18. Positioning commands (under G0) in the mode of tool tip point control are always executed
in interpolation-type paths even if F91 bit 6 is set to 1.
N
o.
19. Prefiltering for rotational axes
When the function of prefiltering for rotational axes is made valid, the maximum permissible
acceleration for rotational axes is increased according to the time constant concerned (as
set in L125).
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
20. The acceleration and deceleration for positioning commands (under G0) in the mode of tool
tip point control occurs according to the parameters L74 (rate of cutting feed for pre-interpolational acceleration/deceleration control) and L75 (time constant for pre-interpolational
cutting feed) when they are given under G61.1 (geometry compensation) or with the
(optional) fixed gradient control for G0 being selected.
ZA
21. Five-axis fairing function
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
If Joint interpolation is selected (F85 bit 3 = 1), command points are corrected by the
five-axis fairing function for the three orthogonal axes (for tool tip position control) as well
as for the two rotational axes (for tool attitude control). Correction is conducted, however,
only for the three orthogonal axes if Uniaxial rotation interpolation is selected (F85 bit 3 =
0), or the fairing function for rotational axes is not made valid at all (F151 bit 5 = 0).
ht
(c
The program section for five-axis fairing is excluded from the domain of the function for
sequence number search and modal restart.
C
op
yr
ig
Tool path is drawn on the TOOL PATH CHECK display according to the command
points corrected by the five-axis fairing function.
If the feed hold function is applied during five-axis fairing, the stop position will be used
as the starting point of fairing in the resumed operation.
If the function of workpiece setup error correction is activated, the solutions for rotational
axes may differ in algebraic sign depending upon whether the five-axis fairing function is
enabled or disabled. Set bit 3 of parameter F156 to “1” (Priority is given to the sign of the
primary rotational axis) if it is desired to obtain the same solutions.
An attempt to use the five-axis fairing function in the mode of tool radius compensation
for five-axis machining (G41.2, G41.4, G41.5, G42.2, G42.4, or G42.5) will only cause an
alarm (961 ILLEGAL COMMAND 5X RADIUS COMP.).
26-34
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
26
As for machines of four-axis control type (K113 = 4 or 5), a command for selecting the
high-speed machining mode (G5P2) will only cause an alarm (972 ILLEGAL CMD TOOL
TIP PT CTRL) if it is given in the mode of tool tip point control (G43.4 or G43.5) with the
five-axis fairing function being enabled (F157 bit 6 = 1). Disable the five-axis fairing
function as required.
26-1-5 Related parameters
Offset for the axis of rotation of the rotational axis (for table rotating type)
Axis-of-rotation position on the
horizontal axis (X)
0 - 99999999
0.0001 mm
K123
Axis-of-rotation position on the vertical
axis (Y)
0 - 99999999
0.0001 mm
K124
Axis-of-rotation position on the height
axis (Z)
0 - 99999999
0.0001 mm
ts
K122
Remarks
er
ve
d
Setting unit
re
s
Setting range
ri
.A
ll
B.
Contents
gh
Parameter
Offset for the axis of rotation of the secondary rotational axis
Parameter
Contents
Setting range
Setting unit
Remarks
0 - 99999999
0.0001 mm
To be omitted
Axis-of-rotation position on the
horizontal axis (X)
K127
Axis-of-rotation position on the vertical
axis (Y)
0 - 99999999
0.0001 mm
To be omitted
K128
Axis-of-rotation position on the height
axis (Z)
0 - 99999999
0.0001 mm
To be omitted
K
ZA
A
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
K126
Axis of
C-axis rotation
01
3
YA
M
Machine origin
)2
Offset vector
from spindle nose
to A-axis center
K124
(on the X-axis) K122
(on the Y-axis) K123
Axis of
A-axis rotation
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
Reference point
of the workpiece
D740PB0095
Fig. 26-1 For table rotating type
26-35
.
Offset for the axis of rotation of the primary rotational axis
N
A.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
1.
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
2.
Offset for the axis of rotation of the rotational axis (for tool rotating type)
A.
Offset for the axis of rotation of the primary rotational axis
Parameter
Setting range
Setting unit
Remarks
K122
Axis-of-rotation position on the
horizontal axis (X)
0 - 99999999
0.0001 mm
To be omitted
K123
Axis-of-rotation position on the vertical
axis (Y)
0 - 99999999
0.0001 mm
To be omitted
K124
Axis-of-rotation position on the height
axis (Z)
0 - 99999999
0.0001 mm
To be omitted
Offset for the axis of rotation of the secondary rotational axis
Parameter
Contents
er
ve
d
.
B.
Contents
Setting range
Setting unit
Remarks
Axis-of-rotation position on the
horizontal axis (X)
0 - 99999999
0.0001 mm
To be omitted
K127
Axis-of-rotation position on the vertical
axis (Y)
0 - 99999999
0.0001 mm
To be omitted
K128
Axis-of-rotation position on the height
axis (Z)
0 - 99999999
0.0001 mm
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
K126
N
o.
Axis of C-axis rotation
Axis of B-axis rotation
ZA
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
K128
K
Offset vector from tool
holder end to B-axis center
M
A
D740PB0096
Selection of programming coordinate system
01
3
3.
YA
Fig. 26-2 For tool rotating type
(c
)2
Parameter
0: Selection of the table coordinate system
1: Selection of the workpiece coordinate system
Selection of interpolation method for tool tip point control
C
op
4.
yr
ig
ht
F85 bit 2
Setting range
Parameter
F85 bit 3
Setting range
0: Uniaxial rotation interpolation
1: Joint interpolation
26-36
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
5.
26
Selection of override scheme for tool tip point control
Parameter
Setting range
Overriding the rapid traverse in the mode of tool tip point control is applied
F86 bit 2
0: to the speed of motion of the tool tip point
1: to the speed limit for the axis control’s reference point
Overriding the cutting feed in the mode of tool tip point control is applied
F86 bit 5
0: to the speed of motion of the tool tip point
1: to the speed limit for the axis control’s reference point
Setting range
0: Angular position at the start of tool tip point control
F86 bit 6
ts
re
s
1: Position of 0°
Parameter
Setting range
0: Cancellation with axis movement for clearing the length offset amount
F114 bit 1
1: Cancellation without axis movement
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
8.
ri
gh
Selection of canceling operation by G49 in the mode of tool tip point control
.A
ll
7.
er
ve
d
Parameter
.
Selection of reference position on the rotational axis for tool tip point control
N
6.
Selection of operation for starting up the tool tip point control without motion commands
Parameter
Setting range
0: Startup with axis movement by the length offset amount
o.
F162 bit 0
K
ZA
K
IM
Parameter
A
Selection of type of passage through singular point for tool tip point control
Se
9.
ri
al
N
1: Startup without axis movement
Setting range
ZA
0: Selected is a simultaneous control of rotational axes which requires, for
passing through the singular point, smaller distance of angular motion on the
secondary rotational axis. (The motion on the primary rotational axis may use
both positive and negative sides of the stroke.)
M
A
F162 bit 1
)2
01
3
YA
1: Selected is a simultaneous control of rotational axes which does not require,
throughout one block, any motion on the primary rotational axis into the
opposite side of its stroke to that of its initial position (position at the startup).
(c
10. Limit of feed rate for the mode of tool tip point control
C
op
yr
ig
ht
Set the maximum admissible rate of cutting feed for the mode of tool tip point control.
The cutting feed during tool tip point control will be limited by parameter M3 (general limit of feed
rate) if it is lower than the setting of parameter S22.
Note :
Set zero (0) in S22 to make the parameter invalid. If both parameters S22 and M3 are
set to zero (0), then parameter M1 (for rapid traverse) serves as the speed limit in
question.
Parameter
S22
Setting range
0 - 200000
Setting unit
Linear axis
1 mm/min
Rotational axis
1 deg/min
26-37
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
11. Criterion for the neighborhood of singular point
Parameter
Setting range
Setting unit
K110
0 - 360
1 deg
12. Effective decimal digits in arguments I, J, and K for G43.5 (tool tip point control type 2)
Parameter
Setting range
Number of effective decimal digits in arguments I, J, K for tool tip point control type 2
F36 bit 6
0: 4 or 5 for the metric or inch system
er
ve
d
.
1: 7 (irrespective of the system of units)
Setting range
ts
Parameter
re
s
13. Function of prefiltering for rotational axes valid/invalid
F36 bit 7
gh
Function of prefiltering for rotational axes
ri
0: Invalid
N
.A
ll
1: Valid
Parameter
Setting range
L125
0 - 200
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
14. Time constant for prefiltering for rotational axes
Setting unit
o.
1 ms
The prefiltering cannot be made effective at all when L125 is set to zero (0).
ZA
K
IM
Parameter
A
Se
ri
15. Five-axis fairing function valid/invalid
K
al
N
Note :
Setting range
Five-axis fairing function
0: Invalid
1: Valid
F151 bit 5
Fairing function for rotational axes during five-axis fairing
0: Invalid
1: Valid
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
F157 bit 6
Setting range
Setting unit
Distance of geometry recognition for three orthogonal axes
0 - 999999
0.0001 mm or
0.00001 in
Distance of geometry recognition for two rotational axes
0 - 899999
0.0001°
(c
Parameter
ht
)2
16. Distance of geometry recognition for five-axis fairing
F5
C
op
yr
ig
F4
17. Tolerance (of chord error) for five-axis fairing
Parameter
Setting range
Setting unit
F104
Maximum permissible linear error caused by fairing
0 - 999999
0.0001 mm or
0.00001 in
F128
Maximum permissible angular error caused by fairing
0 - 3600000
0.0001°
26-38
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
26
26-2 Cutting Point Command (Option)
26-2-1 Function outline
Cutting point command function provides a special type of tool-tip point control in order that the
cutting point (point of contact between tool and workpiece for chip removal) may precisely
describe a tool path as programmed on the machining surface.
Therefore, the tool path itself, once described in a machining program, need not be modified
according as the geometry (tool diameter, corner radius, etc.) of the tool to be used is changed,
which is not the case with the ordinary tool-tip point control.
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
Tool-axis direction
vector
Tool length
er
ve
d
.
Tool diameter
N
Corner
radius
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Normal vector to the
machining surface
Programmed path
Cutting point
N
o.
D747PB0031
K
al
This function is valid only for five-axis control machines.
ZA
A
Three types of five-axis control machines
Table rotating type
01
3
YA
M
Tool’s first
rotational axis
Tool’s rotational axis
Tool
Table
)2
Tool’s second
rotational axis
ht
(c
Tool
Tool
Workpiece
Table’s first
rotational axis
Workpiece
yr
ig
Mixed type
A
Tool rotating type
ZA
Remark :
K
IM
Se
ri
If the required option is not added, giving a command for selecting the mode of cutting point
command will result in an alarm.
Table
op
C
Workpiece
Table
Table’s second
rotational axis
Table’s rotational axis
D740PB0034
* The VARIAXIS machines belong to the table rotating type.
* The VERSATECH machines belong to the tool rotating type.
26-39
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
26-2-2 Detailed description
1.
Programming coordinate system
Refer to the corresponding description given for the tool tip point control
under 1. in Subsection 26-1-2.
2.
Programming format
Cutting point command ON
re
s
A.
er
ve
d
.
Two types of programming formats are available for cutting point command: type 1 for specifying
the tool-axis direction vector in rotational axis coordinates, and type 2 for programming the
direction (attitude) of the tool axis in vector components.
gh
ts
<Type 1>
G43.8 (Xx Yy Zz Aa Bb Cc Hh Dd Pp Qq) ,L2 Ii Jj Kk .... Cutting point command type 1 ON
.A
ll
ri
<Type 2>
G43.9 (Xx Yy Zz Ii Jj Kk Hh Dd Qq) ,L2 Ii Jj Kk ........... Cutting point command type 2 ON
K
ZA
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
x, y, z : Orthogonal coordinate axis motion command
a, b, c : Rotational axis motion command
i, j, k : Vector components of tool-axis direction
h
: Tool length offset number
d
: Tool radius compensation number
p
: Temporary G0 cancellation
q
: Type of barrel-shaped milling cutter (1/2/3: Type 1/2/3)
,L2 : Declaration for normal vector specification
i, j, k : Components of normal vector to the machining surface
(after ,L2)
M
Cutting point command OFF (cancellation)
YA
B.
A
ZA
K
IM
The available types of barrel-shaped milling cutters are detailed later under
5-A “Applicable tool types and compensation amounts” in Subsection 26-2-2.
01
3
G49 ......................................................... Cutting point command OFF
)2
Other G-codes in group 8
(c
G43/G44 (Tool length offset in the plus/minus direction)
ht
Notes
ig
C.
C
op
yr
1.
2.
The startup axis movement is executed in the currently active mode of movement. However,
giving a G43.8 or G43.9 command under a mode other than of linear movement (G00 or
G01) will cause an alarm (1836 CANNOT USE CUTTING PT CTRL).
Do not use an axis address other than those for the particular axes specified in the
parameters concerned (3 linear and 2 rotational ones). Otherwise an alarm will be caused
(1838 CUTTING PT CTRL FORMAT ERROR).
26-40
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
3.
26
Do not give any of the following commands; otherwise an alarm will be caused (1838
CUTTING PT CTRL FORMAT ERROR).
Specifying the normal vector with arguments I, J and K without preceding ,L2,
Specifying all the arguments I, J and K after ,L2 with zero (0),
Omitting all the arguments I, J and K after ,L2,
Use of any other addresses than I, J and K after ,L2,
Specifying an argument Q with a value other than 1, 2 and 3, or
Specifying an argument Q without setting together an argument H.
An argument of zero (0) for vector components (I, J, K) after ,L2 can be omitted in the mode
of cutting point command type 1 (G43.8).
5.
Do not give any rotational axis motion command in the mode of cutting point command type
2 (G43.9). Otherwise an alarm will be caused (1838 CUTTING PT CTRL FORMAT
ERROR).
6.
Do not give a G43.9 command (for cutting point command type 2) without the table coordinate system being appropriately selected for programming. Otherwise an alarm will be
caused (1836 CANNOT USE CUTTING PT CTRL).
7.
An argument of zero (0) for vector components (I, J, K) after ,L2 can be omitted in the mode
of cutting point command type 2 (G43.9).
8.
Parameter F36 bit 6 determines the number of effective decimal digits in the vector’s components (I, J, K).
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
4.
F36 bit 6 = 0:
4 and 5 decimal digits are effective for the metric and inch system, respectively.
o.
Example : For a block of G43.9I0.12345678J0.12345678K0.12345678Hh:
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
By rounding off the fifth decimal digit, 0.1235 is used as arguments I, J, and K for the
metric system.
By rounding off the seventh decimal digit, 0.12346 is used as arguments I, J, and K for
the inch system.
F36 bit 6 = 1:
ZA
7 decimal digits are effective, irrespective of the system of units.
A
Example : For a block of G43.9I0.12345678J0.12345678K0.12345678Hh:
YA
M
By rounding off the eighth decimal digit, 0.1234568 is used as arguments I, J, and K.
01
3
<Number of effective digits in vector components I, J, and K>
)2
F36 bit 6
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
0
9.
1
System of units
Minimum value
Maximum value
Metric system
–99999.9999
99999.9999
Inch system
–9999.99999
9999.99999
Metric system
–99.9999999
99.9999999
Inch system
–99.9999999
99.9999999
It depends upon the setting of a parameter (F114 bit 1) whether or not the cancellation
causes an axis motion (in the currently active mode in G-code group 1: at rapid traverse
[G00] or cutting feed [G01]) of canceling the tool length offset. Do not give a cancellation
command in a mode of circular interpolation. Otherwise an alarm will be caused (1836
CANNOT USE CUTTING PT CTRL).
10. The cancellation command G49 must be given with no other instruction codes. Giving the
G49 code with an axis motion command will cause an alarm (1838 CUTTING PT CTRL
FORMAT ERROR).
11. Argument Q is ignored when the settings on the TOOL DATA display (MAZATROL tool
data) are to be fetched (i.e. when F93 bit 3, F94 bit 7 or F92 bit 7 is set to “1”).
26-41
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
12. If the current tool is a barrel-shaped milling cutter, then a command of G43.8 causes the
relevant tool data items to be checked for appropriateness, and the alarm 1917 ILLEGAL
TOOL DATA CUT PT CTRL is raised in any one of the cases described below.
When the settings on the TOOL DATA display (MAZATROL tool data) are to be fetched
(i.e when F93 bit 3, F94 bit 7 or F92 bit 7 is set to “1”):
One of the relevant items on the TOOL DATA display remains unset or set to “0.”
When an effective argument Q is specified and the settings on the TOOL DATA display
(MAZATROL tool data) are not applicable (i.e. when F93 bit 3, F94 bit 7 and F92 bit 7 are
all set to “0”):
Any one of the parameters F306 to F311 is set to “0,” or
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
The tool length offset amount concerned is unset (set to 0).
26-42
Serial No. 340839
26
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
3.
Startup
The startup axis movement is executed with the cutting point command being active (by an
interpolation with reference to the table coordinate system).
As explained in the table below, the startup operation depends upon whether or not motion
commands for the orthogonal or rotational axes are given in the same block with G43.8 or
G43.9. (The figures in the following table refer to a case where G43.8 is used for a machine
equipped with the tool’s rotational axis named B. This example applies in principle to all other
cases: use of G43.9 on a machine of different configuration, etc.)
Commands for
rotational axis
motion or
tool-axis
direction
Motion commands for orthogonal axes
given (*1)
G43.8Hh,L2IiJjKk
G43.8XxYyZzHh,L2IiJjKk
ts
re
s
G43.8Hh,L2IiJjKk
er
ve
d
F162 bit 0 = 1
(No motion by the offset amount)
.
not given (*1)
F162 bit 0 = 0
(Motion by the offset amount)
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
Control point
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
not given
Cutting point
o.
K
N
ZA
K
IM
b
G43.8BbHh,L2IiJjKk
Cutting point
Y
(x, y, z)
X
A motion occurs for the cutting
point to be at a point of the specified coordinates, inclusive of offset
amount.
G43.8XxYyZzBbHh,L2IiJjKk
A
ri
Se
G43.8BbHh,L2IiJjKk
No motions occur at all.
(A motion by the offset amount does
not occur.)
al
A shifting motion occurs for the
cutting point to be at the current
control point, i.e. in the tool-axis
direction through the length offset
distance.
Z
b
YA
M
A
ZA
b
Cutting point
01
3
given (*2)
Cutting point
(x, y, z)
Y
)2
X
(c
D740PB0038’
A rotational motion occurs with automatic linear axis movements in
order not to move the position of the
cutting point, as in the programming
coordinate system (*2).
C
op
yr
ig
ht
A linear and rotational motion occurs for the cutting point to be at the
current control point, as in the programming coordinate system (*2),
through the length offset distance.
Z
A linear and rotational motion occurs for the cutting point to be at a
point of the specified coordinates,
as in the programming coordinate
system (*2), inclusive of offset
amount.
*1
“Given” is the orthogonal-axis motion command when the G43.8 or G43.9 block contains
even only one command for an orthogonal axis.
*2
If there is also a motion command for the table’s rotational axis given with the table coordinate system being selected for programming, then that particular programming coordinate system (the table coordinate system) will move accordingly. In such a case the final
position of the cutting point’s (eventual) motion denotes a position relative to the table in the
specified angle.
26-43
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
4.
Cancellation
A parameter is provided for the selection of whether or not the cancellation includes the corresponding axis movement.
Cancellation with axis movement (F114 bit 1 = 0)
The cutting point command mode is cancelled with a shifting motion in the direction of the tool
axis for canceling the particular amount of length offset.
G49
er
ve
d
.
Control point
re
s
Cutting point
gh
ts
D740PB0039
ri
Cancellation without axis movement (F114 bit 1 = 1)
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
The cutting point command mode is cancelled without any axis motions being caused by the
cancellation block.
K
A
ZA
D740PB0040
K
IM
Giving the G49 code with an axis motion command will cause an alarm (1838 CUTTING PT CTRL FORMAT ERROR).
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
Note :
Se
ri
al
N
o.
G49
26-44
Serial No. 340839
26
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
5.
Operation in the mode of cutting point command
A.
Applicable tool types and compensation amounts
1.
Ball-ended milling cutter, End mill with corner radius and Flat-ended milling cutter
Only milling tools can be used in the mode of cutting point command. As for tool radius compensation, use the D-code in the program to specify the number of the desired offset data
item prepared on the TOOL OFFSET DATA display.
End mill with corner radius
Flat-ended milling cutter
Length
comp.
amount
Length
comp.
amount
Nose center
Nose center
Radius comp. Corner radius
comp. amount
amount
(Note)
ri
gh
ts
Nose center
re
s
Length
comp.
amount
er
ve
d
.
Ball-ended milling cutter
Radius comp.
amount
(Note)
D747PB0032
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
Radius comp. Corner radius
amount
comp. amount
(Note)
Note :
Barrel-shaped milling cutter
Do not fail, on the TOOL DATA display, to set the tool name (TOOL) to BARREL for a
barrel-shaped milling cutter to be used in the mode of cutting point command.
There are three types of barrel-shaped milling cutters available as shown below.
K
ZA
K
IM
Type 1
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
2.
The setting of the actual diameter (ACT-) is used for tool radius compensation. Set the
corresponding data items on the TOOL DATA and TOOL OFFSET DATA displays in
diameter values.
Tool’s reference position
M
YA
ACT-2
A
LENGTH
LENGTH
R2
ht
R1
R HEIGHT
Nose center
TEETH LG
ig
ACT-1
R2
Nose center
Nose center
(c
)2
01
3
LENGTH
Tool’s reference position
R1
A
R2
Type 3
ZA
Tool’s reference position
Type 2
ACT-1
R1
TEETH LG
ACT-1
R1
C
op
yr
D747PB0048
Note : Set TEETH LG and ACT-2 for barrel-shaped milling cutter of type 2 as follows:
TEETH LG .... Height (Distance) of point A from the tool nose. Set the correct value with
reference to the tool drawing, since the corresponding item (length of cut)
indicated in the catalogue may not agree with the required value.
ACT-2 ......... Diameter of the tool on the level of point A. Set the correct value with
reference to the tool drawing, since the corresponding item (neck diameter)
indicated in the catalogue may not agree with the required value.
The amounts of compensation for barrel-shaped milling cutters are detailed
later under 3-D “Compensation for barrel-shaped milling cutters” in Subsection 26-2-3.
26-45
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
A
TEETH LG on the
TOOL DATA display,
or
parameter F309
(For cutting pt. cmd.:
TEETH LG)
A
ACT-2 on the
TOOL DATA display,
or
parameter F310 R2
(For cutting pt. cmd.:
ACT-2)
R2
Compensation, and cutting point on the tool, for each tool type
re
s
B.
er
ve
d
.
D747PB0054
1.
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
In the mode of cutting point command, compensation for tool geometry is performed with
reference to the normal vector to the machining surface as well as to the diameter and corner
radius of the tool. Therefore, the cutting point on the tool and the singular attitude differ according
to the tool types.
Ball-ended milling cutter
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
In the case of ball-ended milling cutters, the cutting point on the tool moves on the semicircle of the ball end profile in accordance with the angle between Tool-axis direction vector
and Normal vector to the machining surface.
K
ZA
A
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Tool-axis direction vector
Normal vector to the machining surface
Nose center
Cutting point
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
D747PB0033
26-46
Serial No. 340839
26
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
2.
End mill with corner radius
In the case of end mills with corner radius, the cutting point on the tool moves on the circular
arc of the profile with corner radius in accordance with the angle between Tool-axis direction
vector and Normal vector to the machining surface.
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Tool-axis direction vector
Normal vector to the machining surface
Nose center
Cutting point
ri
D747PB0034
Flat-ended milling cutter
.A
ll
3.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
In the case of flat-ended milling cutters, the cutting point on the tool does not move at all on
the profile with flat end.
K
ZA
A
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
Tool-axis direction vector
Normal vector to the machining surface
Nose center
Cutting point
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
D747PB0035
26-47
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
C.
Compensation, and cutting point on the tool, for each type of barrel-shaped milling
cutter
In the mode of cutting point command, compensation for tool geometry is performed with
reference to the normal vector to the machining surface, tool-axis direction vector as well as to
the various amounts of compensation (ACT-1, R1, R2, TEETH LG, ACT-2, R HEIGHT).
The cutting point on the tool, or the radiused section to be brought into contact with the
workpiece, depends upon the tool-axis direction vector and the normal vector to the machining
surface.
1.
Barrel-shaped milling cutter of type 1
er
ve
d
.
ACT-1, R1 and R2 are used to calculate the amount of compensation for tool geometry.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
Tool-axis direction vector
Normal vector to the machining surface
Nose center
Cutting point
R1
D747PB0049
R1
o.
R2
Barrel-shaped milling cutter of type 2
al
N
2.
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
ACT-1, R1, R2, TEETH LG and ACT-2 are used to calculate the amount of compensation
for tool geometry.
R1
R2
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
Tool-axis direction vector
Normal vector to the machining surface
Nose center
Cutting point
26-48
R1
D747PB0050
Serial No. 340839
26
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
3.
Barrel-shaped milling cutter of type 3
ACT-1, R1, R2, TEETH LG and R HEIGHT are used to calculate the amount of compensation for tool geometry.
R2
R1
gh
R1
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Tool-axis direction vector
Normal vector to the machining surface
Nose center
Cutting point
Singular attitude in the mode of cutting point command
N
D.
.A
ll
ri
D747PB0051
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
“Singular attitude” in the mode of cutting point command refers to a state where the normal
vector to the machining surface is parallel to the tool-axis direction vector.
The settings in parameters K251 and K254 determine whether or not the parallelism exists
between both vectors.
al
N
o.
While the threshold setting in parameter K251 is applied during cutting feed proper, that in K254
is prepared specially for rapid traverse (under G0).
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
Threshold for singular attitude in the mode of cutting point
command (for mode of feed other than rapid traverse)
Threshold for singular attitude in the mode of cutting point
command (for rapid traverse)
........................................
Parameter K251
........................................
Parameter K254
YA
M
A
ZA
In the case of end mills with corner radius, flat-ended milling cutters and barrel-shaped milling
cutters of type 2 and 3, there arises a surface contact between tool and workpiece in a singular
attitude.
In a non-singular attitude
In a singular attitude
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Tool-axis direction vector
Normal vector to the machining surface
Nose center
Cutting point
D747PB0036
26-49
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
1.
Singular attitude in the operation flow in the mode of cutting point command
As for singular attitude arising in the operation flow in the mode of cutting point command,
either of the following points is processed as the cutting point according to the setting in bit 1
of parameter F336: Tip point on the tool axis, or that point on the contact surface which is
closest to the latest, immediately preceding, cutting point.
F336 bit 1 = 0: Tip point on the tool axis
= 1: Point on the contact surface, closest to the latest cutting point
er
ve
d
When F336 bit 1 = 1
2.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
When F336 bit 1 = 0
.
Tool-axis direction vector
Normal vector to the machining surface
Nose center
Cutting point
Startup in a singular attitude
D747PB0037
al
N
o.
As for startup in a singular attitude, the tip point on the tool axis is always processed as the
cutting point, without tool radius compensation being applied.
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
Tool-axis direction vector
Normal vector to the machining surface
Nose center
Cutting point
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
Cutting point for startup in a singular attitude
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
D747PB0038
26-50
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
6.
26
Rate of feed to be programmed in the mode of cutting point command
For cutting operation in the mode of cutting point command, specify the rate of feed of the cutting
point with reference to the table coordinate system.
Nose center
Cutting point (programmed point)
er
ve
d
.
Fed at the programmed rate.
gh
Interpolation methods for rotational axes
ri
7.
ts
re
s
D747PB0039
8.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
Refer to the corresponding description given for the tool tip point control
under 7. in Subsection 26-1-2.
Selection for determining the angle on the rotational axis
K
ZA
ri
Coordinate system for linear interpolation under G0 in the mode of cutting point command
Se
9.
al
N
o.
Refer to the corresponding description given for the tool tip point control
under 8. in Subsection 26-1-2.
K
IM
A
In the mode of cutting point command, it is the nose center, not the cutting point, that describes a
linear path under G0.
YA
M
A
ZA
As for the coordinate system for linear interpolation under G0, refer to the
corresponding description given for the tool tip point control under 9. in
Subsection 26-1-2.
01
3
10. Control method for rapid traverse (G0) in the mode of cutting point command
ht
(c
)2
Use bit 0 of parameter F336 if it is desirable to apply the tool tip point control for executing rapid
traverse commands also in the mode of cutting point command.
yr
ig
F336 bit 0 = 0: Control proper to cutting point command for rapid traverse commands
= 1: Tool tip point control for rapid traverse commands
C
op
Note 1: Tool tip point control can be applied for G0 commands, indeed, but combined use with
the tool radius compensation for five-axis machining (G41.2, G41.3, G41.4, or G42.2,
G42.3, G42.4) is not possible.
Note 2: Information on modal conditions on the POSITION display as well as alarms raised
always refer to the mode of cutting point command.
Note 3: Application of tool tip point control may cause an abrupt motion in transition between
G0 and G1 commands which undergo different control methods.
26-51
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
26-2-3 Relationship to other functions
1.
Commands usable in the same block with G43.8/G43.9
Code
Function
Code
Positioning
Function
G00
Incremental data input
G91
Linear interpolation
G01
Feed function
F
Absolute data input
G90
Giving any other command than those enumerated above in the same block with G43.8/G43.9
will lead to an alarm (1837 ILLEGAL CMD CUTTING PT CTRL).
er
ve
d
Commands available in the mode of cutting point command
Function
Code
re
s
A.
.
Relationship to other commands
Function
ts
2.
Code
G00
Cutting mode
Linear interpolation
G01
User macro call
Circular interpolation
G02/G03 (*1, *5) Absolute data input
Dwell
G04
Incremental data input
High-speed machining mode
G05 (*4)
Inverse time feed
Exact-stop
G09
Feed per minute
Plane selection
G17/G18/G19
M, S, T, B output to opposite system
G112 (*2)
Tool radius compensation OFF
G40
Subprogram call/End of subprogram
M98/M99
Tool length offset (+/–)
G43/G44
Feed function
F
Tool position offset OFF
G49
M, S, T, B function
MSTB (*2)
Scaling OFF
G50
Exact stop mode
G61
Local variables, Common variables, Operation
commands (arithmetic operations, trigonometric functions, square root, etc), Control
commands (IF GOTO , WHILE DO )
Macro
instructions
ri
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
G65
G90
G91
G93
G94
K
K
IM
A
G61.2
ZA
Se
Modal spline interpolation
G64
o.
N
al
G61.1 (*3)
ri
Geometry compensation
gh
Positioning
A command for helical/spiral interpolation will lead to an alarm (1837 ILLEGAL CMD CUTTING PT CTRL).
Use of a tool function (T-code) in the mode of cutting point command will lead to an alarm (1837 ILLEGAL CMD
CUTTING PT CTRL).
Giving a G61.1 command with the geometry compensation being invalid for rotational axes will lead to an alarm
(1837 ILLEGAL CMD CUTTING PT CTRL).
The fairing function for high-speed machining cannot be made effective. The related parameter (F96 bit 1) is of no
effect in the mode of cutting point command.
A command for circular interpolation will lead to an alarm if table coordinate system is selected for programming.
ZA
*1
*2
M
A
*3
YA
*4
01
3
*5
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
Giving any other command than those enumerated above in the mode of cutting point command
will lead to an alarm (1837 ILLEGAL CMD CUTTING PT CTRL).
26-52
Serial No. 340839
26
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
B.
Modes in which the mode of cutting point command is selectable
Function
Code
Function
Code
G00
Modal spline interpolation
G61.2
Linear interpolation
G01
Cutting mode
G64
High-speed machining mode OFF
G05P0
User macro call
G65
Radius data input for X-axis ON
G10.9X0
Modal user macro call OFF
G67
Data setting mode OFF
G11
3-D coordinate conversion ON
G68 (*2)
Polar coordinate interpolation OFF
G13.1
Plane selection
G17, G18,
G19
Inclined-plane machining
G68.2,
G68.3,
G68.4
Inch data input
G20
3-D coordinate conversion OFF
G69
Metric data input
G21
Fixed cycle OFF
G80
Pre-move stroke check OFF
G23
Absolute data input
Tool radius compensation OFF
G40
Incremental data input
Control for normal-line direction OFF
G40.1
Inverse time feed
Tool length offset (+/–)
G43/G44
Feed per minute
Tool position offset OFF
G49
Constant surface speed control OFF
Scaling OFF
G50
Mirror image OFF
G50.1
Initial point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G98
Polygonal machining mode OFF
G50.2
R-point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G99
Selection of workpiece coordinate system/
additional workpiece coordinate system
G54-59/G54.1
Workpiece setup error correction
G54.4
Exact stop mode
G61
Geometry compensation
G61.1 (*1)
er
ve
d
.
Positioning
G90
re
s
G91
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
G93
G94
G97
G109
Cross machining control axis selection
G110 (*3)
Cross machining control axis cancellation
G111
Hob milling mode OFF
G113
o.
Single program multi-process control
Giving a G43.8/G43.9 command under G61.1 with the geometry compensation being invalid for rotational axes will
lead to an alarm (1836 CANNOT USE CUTTING PT CTRL).
Only valid when parameter F168 bit 4 = 1 (Operation by converting 3-D coordinate conversion into Inclined-plane
machining [G68.2]).
Se
A
Only valid on machines with the optional function for selecting from multiple sets for five-axis machining.
K
IM
*3
K
ri
*2
ZA
al
N
*1
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
Giving a G43.8/G43.9 command in a mode other than those enumerated above will lead to an
alarm (1836 CANNOT USE CUTTING PT CTRL).
26-53
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
3.
On the use of tool data settings
A.
Tool length offsetting in the mode of cutting point command
The table below indicates those usage patterns [1] to [4] of the externally stored tool offset data
items which are applied to length offsetting in the mode of cutting point command according to
the settings of the relevant parameters (F93 bit 3 and F94 bit 7).
Table 26-2 Tool offset data items used according to the parameter settings (1/2)
Data items used
(Display and Data item names)
Pattern
Parameter
F94 bit 7
F93 bit 3
0
0
1
1
Programming method
[1]
TOOL OFFSET
[2]
TOOL DATA
[3]
TOOL DATA
LENG. No. or
LENG. CO.
1
0
G43.8/G43.9 with H-code
[4]
TOOL OFFSET +
TOOL DATA
Offset data items +
LENGTH
0
1
G43.8/G43.9 with H-code +
T-code
Offset data items
G43.8/G43.9 with H-code
.
T-code
gh
ts
re
s
T-code + H-code
Tool radius compensation in the mode of cutting point command
N
B.
.A
ll
ri
LENGTH + LENG. No. or
LENGTH + LENG. CO.
er
ve
d
LENGTH
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
The table below indicates those usage patterns [1] to [4] of the externally stored tool offset data
items which are applied to radius compensation in the mode of cutting point command according
to the settings of the relevant parameters (F92 bit 7 and F94 bit 7).
Table 26-3 Tool offset data items used according to the parameter settings (2/2)
0
0
A
N
F92 bit 7
1
1
ACT- CO. or
OFFSET No.
1
0
T-code
Offset data items +
ACT-
0
1
G43.8/G43.9 with D-code +
T-code
Se
ACT-
TOOL DATA
[3]
TOOL DATA
[4]
TOOL OFFSET +
TOOL DATA
T-code
T-code + D-code
K
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
ACT- + ACT- CO. or
ACT- + OFFSET No.
G43.8/G43.9 with D-code
Corner radius compensation in the mode of cutting point command
01
3
C.
ZA
ri
Offset data items
[2]
Programming method
F94 bit 7
al
TOOL OFFSET
[1]
Parameter
o.
Data items used
(Display and Data item names)
Pattern
ig
ht
(c
)2
The table below indicates those usage patterns [1] and [2] of the externally stored tool offset data
items which are applied to corner radius compensation in the mode of cutting point command
according to the settings of the relevant parameters (F92 bit 7 and F94 bit 7).
Data items used
(Display and Data item names)
C
op
yr
Pattern
[1]
[2]
PARAMETER
TOOL DATA
F268 (Corner radius for cutting point command)
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Setting unit:
0.0001 mm or 0.00001 in
CORNER R
26-54
Parameter
F94 bit 7 F92 bit 7
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
Programming
method
—
T-code
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
D.
26
Compensation for barrel-shaped milling cutters
The table below indicates those usage patterns [1] and [2] of the externally stored tool offset data
items which are applied to the compensation types other than length offsetting for barrel-shaped
milling cutters, in the mode of cutting point command, according to the settings of the relevant
parameters (F93 bit 3, F92 bit 7 and F94 bit 7).
Parameter
Data items used
(Display and Data item names)
Pattern
F93
bit 3
F92
bit 7
F94
bit 7
er
ve
d
.
F306 (For cutting point command: ACT-1)
Used as ACT-1 of a barrel-shaped milling cutter when
Q1, Q2 or Q3 is entered in the block of G43.8 or G43.9.
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Setting unit:
0.0001 mm or 0.00001 in
PARAMETER
F309 (For cutting point command: TEETH LG)
Used as TEETH LG of a barrel-shaped milling cutter
when Q2 or Q3 is entered in the block of G43.8 or
G43.9.
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Setting unit:
0.0001 mm or 0.00001 in
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
G43.8/G43.9
with argument Q
N
o.
[1]
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
F307 (For cutting point command: R1)
Used as R1 of a barrel-shaped milling cutter when Q1,
Q2 or Q3 is entered in the block of G43.8 or G43.9.
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Setting unit:
0.0001 mm or 0.00001 in
F308 (For cutting point command: R2)
Used as R2 of a barrel-shaped milling cutter when Q1,
Q2 or Q3 is entered in the block of G43.8 or G43.9.
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Setting unit:
0.0001 mm or 0.00001 in
Programming
method
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
F310 (For cutting point command: ACT-2)
Used as ACT-2 of a barrel-shaped milling cutter when
Q2 is entered in the block of G43.8 or G43.9.
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Setting unit:
0.0001 mm or 0.00001 in
YA
M
A
ZA
F311 (For cutting point command: R HEIGHT)
Used as R HEIGHT of a barrel-shaped milling cutter
when Q3 is entered in the block of G43.8 or G43.9.
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Setting unit:
0.0001 mm or 0.00001 in
(c
TOOL
DATA
T-code
C
op
yr
ig
ht
[2]
)2
01
3
ACT-1
R1
R2
TEETH LG
ACT-2
R HEIGHT
4.
Change between Cutting point command (G43.8/G43.9) and Length offset (G43/G44)
Refer to the corresponding description given for the tool tip point control
under 4. in Subsection 26-1-3.
26-55
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
5.
Prefiltering for rotational axes
Refer to the corresponding description given for the tool tip point control
under 5. in Subsection 26-1-3.
6.
Five-axis fairing function
.
Refer to the corresponding description given for the tool tip point control
under 6. in Subsection 26-1-3.
er
ve
d
26-2-4 Restrictions
The selection code of cutting point command mode (G43.8/G43.9) must not be given
together with any other G-code.
2.
Calculation of the machining time
gh
ts
re
s
1.
Tracing
N
3.
.A
ll
ri
The machining time cannot be calculated accurately for a program containing cutting point
commands.
4.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Tracing in the mode of cutting point command is displayed with reference to the machine
coordinate system.
Tool path check
K
al
Restart
ri
5.
N
o.
Tool path check function cannot be applied to a program containing cutting point commands.
(The programmed data can only be checked as if the mode of cutting point command were
throughout cancelled.)
Resetting
ZA
A
ZA
6.
K
IM
Se
As for restarting operation, do not specify a block within the G43.8/G43.9 mode (nor a block
of cancellation [G49]) as a restarting position. Otherwise an alarm will be caused (956
RESTART OPERATION NOT ALLOWED).
A
The mode of cutting point command is cancelled by resetting.
Corner chamfering/rounding
YA
M
7.
01
3
Do not use corner chamfering or rounding commands in the mode of cutting point command.
Otherwise an alarm will be caused (1837 ILLEGAL CMD CUTTING PT CTRL).
Mirror image function (activated by a code or external switch)
)2
8.
ht
Macro interruption and MDI interruption
Macro interruption as well as MDI interruption is not available in the mode of cutting point
command.
Giving a G43.8/G43.9 command with macro interruption being active will lead to an alarm
(1836 CANNOT USE CUTTING PT CTRL), while an attempt to perform MDI interruption in
the mode of cutting point command will only cause another alarm (1141 ILLEGAL OPER
CUTTING PT CTRL).
C
op
yr
ig
9.
(c
Mirror image function is not available at all in the mode of cutting point command.
10. Display of actual feed rate
The feed rate displayed is the final resultant rate of feed, not the feed rate at the cutting
point with respect to the workpiece.
11. Manual interruption
As a general precaution to be taken for normal machine operation, resetting is required after
any manual interruption (resumption of operation is prohibited).
26-56
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
26
12. The relevant items of digital information on the POSITION display denote the following in
the mode of cutting point command:
POSITION: Position of the cutting point in the workpiece coordinate system
MACHINE: Position of the control point in the machine coordinate system
BUFFER: Moving distance of the control point in the next block
REMAIN:
Remaining distance of movement of the control point in the current block
13. Tool function
Use of a tool function (T-code) in the mode of cutting point command will lead to an alarm
(1837 ILLEGAL CMD CUTTING PT CTRL).
14. Calling a MAZATROL program as a subprogram
re
s
er
ve
d
.
Do not specify a MAZATROL program as a subprogram to be called up in the mode of
cutting point command. Otherwise an alarm will be caused (1837 ILLEGAL CMD CUTTING
PT CTRL).
15. Circular interpolation
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
Circular interpolation can only be applied when the current mode of cutting point command
is of type 1 (G43.8) with workpiece coordinate system being selected for programming. In
other cases giving a command for circular interpolation will cause an alarm (1836 CANNOT
USE CUTTING PT CTRL). Moreover, even thus available circular interpolation mode cannot accept any commands for rotational axes, and such an inadmissible command will result
in the alarm 1837 ILLEGAL CMD CUTTING PT CTRL.
16. MAZATROL tool data
ri
al
17. High-speed machining mode
K
N
o.
When the MAZATROL tool data (data prepared on the TOOL DATA display) are made valid
for executing EIA/ISO programs, milling tools should generally be used in the mode of
cutting point command. Tool length offset for cutting point commands will be executed for
turning tools with their LENGTH B and NOSE-R data being ignored.
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
The fairing function for high-speed machining cannot be made effective. The related parameter (F96 bit 1) is of no effect in the mode of cutting point command.
ZA
18. Positioning commands (under G0) in the mode of cutting point command are always executed in interpolation-type paths even if F91 bit 6 is set to 1.
A
19. Prefiltering for rotational axes
01
3
YA
M
When the function of prefiltering for rotational axes is made valid, the maximum permissible
acceleration for rotational axes is increased according to the time constant concerned (as
set in L125).
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
20. The acceleration and deceleration for positioning commands (under G0) in the mode of
cutting point command occurs according to the parameters L74 (rate of cutting feed for preinterpolational acceleration/deceleration control) and L75 (time constant for pre-interpolational cutting feed) when they are given under G61.1 (geometry compensation) or with the
(optional) fixed gradient control for G0 being selected.
26-57
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
21. Five-axis fairing function
If Joint interpolation is selected (F85 bit 3 = 1), command points are corrected by the
five-axis fairing function for the three orthogonal axes (for tool tip position control) as well
as for the two rotational axes (for tool attitude control). Correction is conducted, however,
only for the three orthogonal axes if Uniaxial rotation interpolation is selected (F85 bit 3 =
0), or the fairing function for rotational axes is not made valid at all (F151 bit 5 = 0).
The program section for five-axis fairing is excluded from the domain of the function for
sequence number search and modal restart.
Tool path is drawn on the TOOL PATH CHECK display according to the command
points corrected by the five-axis fairing function.
er
ve
d
.
If the feed hold function is applied during five-axis fairing, the stop position will be used
as the starting point of fairing in the resumed operation.
gh
ts
re
s
If the function of workpiece setup error correction is activated, the solutions for rotational
axes may differ in algebraic sign depending upon whether the five-axis fairing function is
enabled or disabled. Set bit 3 of parameter F156 to “1” (Priority is given to the sign of the
primary rotational axis) if it is desired to obtain the same solutions.
N
.A
ll
ri
An attempt to use the five-axis fairing function in the mode of tool radius compensation
for five-axis machining (G41.2, G41.4, G41.5, G42.2, G42.4, or G42.5) will only cause an
alarm (961 ILLEGAL COMMAND 5X RADIUS COMP.).
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
22. Linear interpolation occurs with respect to the nose center in the mode of cutting point
command, and thus the locus of the cutting point may not always describe a linear path.
o.
Consequently, an unexpected overcutting may occur, as shown below, if the tool-axis
direction vector or the normal vector to the machining surface should change abruptly.
K
ZA
A
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
Nose center
Cutting point (programmed point)
01
3
D747PB0052
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
23. Do not use, for operation by cutting point commands, a barrel-shaped milling cutter of type 3
which is characterized in that the tangent to the upper radiused section of R1 at its upper
ending point is not perpendicular to the tool axis (as shown on the left side of the figure
below). Such a tool would be processed erroneously by the NC as if its geometry were as
shown on the right side in the figure below, and the upper radiused section of R1 could not
be applied correctly to the machining surface.
Actual geometry
Geometry as processed by the NC
Tool’s axial direction
Tool’s axial direction
R1
R1
D747PB0053
26-58
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
26
26-2-5 Related parameters
Refer to the corresponding description given for the tool tip point control in
Subsection 26-1-5.
<Parameters related to the mode of cutting point command>
Parameter
Axis-of-rotation position on the horizontal axis (X)
K123
Axis-of-rotation position on the vertical axis (Y)
K124
Axis-of-rotation position on the height axis (Z)
K126
Axis-of-rotation position on the horizontal axis (X)
K127
Axis-of-rotation position on the vertical axis (Y)
K128
Axis-of-rotation position on the height axis (Z)
F85 bit 2
Selection of programming coordinate system
F85 bit 3
Selection of interpolation method
F86 bit 2, bit 5
Selection of override scheme
F86 bit 6
Selection of reference position on the rotational axis
F114 bit 1
Selection of canceling operation by G49
F162 bit 0
Selection of operation for starting up
F162 bit 1
Selection of type of passage through singular point
F37 bit 4
Selection of coordinate system for linear interpolation under G0
S22
Limit of feed rate
F36 bit 6
Effective decimal digits in arguments I, J, and K (for type 2 only)
F36 bit 7
Function of prefiltering for rotational axes valid/invalid
L125
Time constant for prefiltering for rotational axes
F157 bit 6
Five-axis fairing function
F151 bit 5
Fairing function for rotational axes during five-axis fairing
F4, F5
Distance of geometry recognition for five-axis fairing
F104, F128
Tolerance (of chord error) for five-axis fairing
F268
Corner radius for cutting point command
F306
For cutting point command: ACT-1
F307
For cutting point command: R1
F308
For cutting point command: R2
K
ZA
A
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
K122
F309
01
3
For cutting point command: TEETH LG
F310
For cutting point command: ACT-2
For cutting point command: R HEIGHT
Selection of control method for rapid traverse commands
F336 bit 1
Selection of cutting point position for singular attitude
Threshold for singular attitude in the mode of cutting point command (for mode of
feed other than rapid traverse)
ht
(c
F336 bit 0
ig
)2
F311
op
yr
K251
C
Description
K254
Threshold for singular attitude in the mode of cutting point command (for rapid
traverse)
26-59
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
26-3 Inclined-Plane Machining: G68.2, G68.3, G68.4, G53.1
The inclined-plane machining function makes it possible to define a new coordinate system
(referred to as a feature coordinate system) by translating as well as rotating the current
workpiece coordinate system around the X-, Y- and Z-axis. Using this function, therefore, an
arbitrarily inclined plane can be defined in a space and the desired machining contour can be
programmed easily as if the plane concerned were an ordinary XY-plane.
er
ve
d
.
In addition, there is a function provided to adjust the direction of tool axis to the positive direction
of the Z-axis of a feature coordinate system. Since the feature coordinate system is then
redefined according to the change in tool-axis direction, a machining program can be prepared
without consideration of the inclination of the coordinate system or the tool axis.
Z
Y
ts
re
s
Z
ri
gh
X
.A
ll
Machine coordinate system
Feature coordinate
system
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Y
X
D736PB001
N
o.
Workpiece coordinate system
K
ZA
A
Se
ri
al
There are two programming types provided for inclined-plane machining (the selection between
which is to be done with parameter F34 bit 4): type A for combined use with the other five-axis
machining functions, and type B allowing various types of interruption.
M
A
ZA
K
IM
The inclined-plane machining is described in this section type by type in
detail, with the main differences between the two types being enumerated in
the table below as an introduction.
YA
No.
Item
×: Impossible
Type A
F34 bit 4 = 0
Type B
F34 bit 4 = 1
Combined use with the tool tip point control (G43.4/G43.5)
×
2
Combined use with the workpiece setup error correction (G54.4)
×
3
Combined use with the tool radius compensation for five-axis machining
×
×
×
(c
)2
01
3
1
Resumption of automatic operation after interruption without having restored
the positional conditions (in the use of manual interruption or TPS function)
ig
ht
4
yr
5
Changing the position on a rotational axis during interruption
6
Interruption using the manual pulse handle
×
7
Command for inclined-plane machining with macro interruption being active
8
MDI interruption
×
9
Use of corner chamfering/rounding command
×
10
Use of G68.2 or G53.1 in a subprogram of the nesting level 8
×
11
Restart operation from a block in the mode of inclined-plane machining (or
from a G69 block)
×
12
Programming format (using Eulerian angles)
13
Programming format (using roll, pitch, and yaw angles, three points in the
plane, two vectors, projection angles, or tool-axis direction)
×
14
Reference for the feature coordinate system
(with workpiece coordinate system as reference)
op
C
: Possible
26-60
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
No.
Item
26
Type A
F34 bit 4 = 0
Type B
F34 bit 4 = 1
15
Reference for the feature coordinate system
(with table indexing to 0° as reference)
×
16
Indications under WPC on the POSITION display in the mode of inclinedplane machining with reference to the feature coordinate system (*1)
17
Combined use with the cutting point command (G43.8/G43.9)
×
*1
As for Type A, WPC indications are given with reference to the workpiece coordinate system or feature coordinate
system according as F143 bit 6 is set to zero (0) or one (1). They always refer, however, to the feature coordinate
system in the case of Type B.
Command codes for inclined-plane machining
A.
Inclined-plane machining ON (startup)
re
s
1.
er
ve
d
.
26-3-1 Function description for type A
ri
gh
ts
The feature coordinate system is to be set, or defined, by the following methods at the beginning
of a program section for inclined-plane machining.
G68.2 P1
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Using roll, pitch, and yaw angles
.A
ll
Programming format
G68.2 [P0]
N
Setting method
Using Eulerian angles
Using three points in the plane
G68.2 P2
Using two vectors
G68.2 P3
Using projection angles
G68.2 P4
G68.3
N
o.
Using tool-axis direction
2.
If any number other than 0 to 4 is entered with P in a G68.2 block, an alarm will be caused
(1809 TILTED PLANE CMD FORMAT ERROR).
3.
Argument P or Q with a decimal point in a G68.2 block will be processed by simply deleting
the decimal point and decimal digits.
4.
Be sure to enter the G68.2 or G68.3 command independently. If a block of G68.2 or G68.3
should contain any other G-codes or motion commands, an alarm is caused (1809 TILTED
PLANE CMD FORMAT ERROR).
ZA
A
ri
Tool-axis direction control
01
3
B.
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
K
Argument P can be omitted if it is 0 (for the use of Eulerian angles).
al
1.
ig
ht
(c
)2
The G53.1 command causes motions on the rotational axes concerned so as to make parallel to,
and of the same direction with, each other the direction of the tool axis (from the tip along the
perpendicular to the tool-swiveling axis) and the positive direction of the Z-axis of the current
feature coordinate system.
C
op
yr
G53.1 Pp
G53.1:
P:
Tool-axis direction control
Selection of a solution for the axis of rotation.
0: Processed as “P = 1” or “P = 2”, depending on the construction of the machine.
Works the same as “P = 1” and “P = 2”, respectively, for machines of tool rotating
or mixed type and table rotating type.
1: Solution with a positive angle of rotation on the primary rotational axis.
2: Solution with a negative angle of rotation on the primary rotational axis
See the description given later under 3 “Tool-axis direction control” for more
information.
26-61
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
C.
1.
Enter the G53.1 command in the mode of inclined-plane machining.
2.
Be sure to enter the G53.1 command independently. If a block of G53.1 should contain any
other G-codes or motion commands, an alarm is caused (1808 CANNOT USE G53.1).
3.
The motion caused by a G53.1 block is executed in the currently active mode of motion.
4.
Argument P can be omitted if it is zero (0). If any number other than 0, 1 or 2 is entered with
P, an alarm will be caused (809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT).
5.
Use of any other addresses than P will lead to an alarm (1808 CANNOT USE G53.1).
Inclined-plane machining OFF (cancellation)
G69
er
ve
d
.
Inclined-plane machining OFF
Be sure to enter the G69 command independently. If a block of G69 should contain any
other G-codes or motion commands, an alarm is caused (1809 TILTED PLANE CMD
FORMAT ERROR).
2.
Do not enter the cancellation command (G69) in the mode of circular interpolation or fixed
cycles; otherwise an alarm is caused (1807 CANNOT USE G68.2).
Various methods for selecting the inclined-plane machining mode
Setting with Eulerian angles
A.
Programming format
G68.2 [P0] Xx Yy Zz I J K
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
2-1
.A
ll
2.
ri
gh
ts
re
s
1.
K
ZA
A
Se
ri
al
N
o.
G68.2 [P0]: Inclined-plane machining ON (Setting with Eulerian angles)
x, y, z:
Coordinates of the origin of feature coordinate system. To be specified with its
absolute values in the currently active workpiece coordinate system.
Eulerian angles (to describe the orientation of the feature coordinate system).
, , :
Setting range: –360° to 360°.
The designation of X, Y, or Z can be omitted when the argument is zero (0: no shift along
the particular axis). Set zero for X, Y, and Z if no translation of the origin is required.
2.
The designation of I, J, or K can be omitted when the argument is zero (0: no rotation
around the axis concerned).
3.
Use of any other addresses than P, X, Y, Z, I, J, and K will lead to an alarm (1809 TILTED
PLANE CMD FORMAT ERROR).
Setting a feature coordinate system
)2
B.
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
1.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
Enter a block of G68.2 [P0] (with arguments for translating and rotating the current workpiece
coordinate system) to set a feature coordinate system. Use Eulerian angles to specify the
rotation.
G68.2 Xx Yy Zz I J K sets a feature coordinate system as follows:
1)
Point (x, y, z) in the current workpiece coordinate system is set as a new origin.
2)
The translated coordinate system is then rotated around the Z-axis by an angle of °.
3)
The turned coordinate system is then rotated around the X-axis by an angle of °.
4)
Finally, the coordinate system is rotated around the Z-axis by an angle of °.
26-62
Serial No. 340839
26
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
A counterclockwise rotation when viewed from the positive side of the axis of rotation to the
origin is to be specified with a positive value (in degrees). The figure below shows the relationship between a workpiece coordinate system and its feature coordinate system.
Conversion by means of Eulerian angles
Z
Y
Zw
Y
Workpiece
coordinate
system
2) Rotation
on Z by °
z
Z
3) Rotation
on X by °
X
Yw
X
x
1) Translation of the
system
4) Rotation
on Z by °
Workpiece
coordinate
system
X
X
ri
Z
Feature
coordinate
system
Z
gh
Zw
ts
Y
re
s
Y
z
.A
ll
Xw
er
ve
d
.
y
Yw
N
x
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
y
Xw
Setting with roll, pitch, and yaw angles
Programming format
ZA
ri
al
G68.2 P1 Qq Xx Yy Zz I J K
K
N
A.
o.
2-2
D736PB002
Axis of the first rotation
X-axis
132
A
Axis of the third rotation
Y-axis
Z-axis
X-axis
Z-axis
Y-axis
Y-axis
X-axis
Z-axis
Y-axis
Z-axis
X-axis
Z-axis
X-axis
Y-axis
Z-axis
Y-axis
X-axis
M
01
3
213
(c
)2
231
312
Axis of the second rotation
A
q
123
YA
ZA
K
IM
Se
G68.2 P1: Inclined-plane machining ON (Setting with roll, pitch, and yaw angles)
x, y, z:
Coordinates of the origin of feature coordinate system. To be specified with its
absolute values in the currently active workpiece coordinate system.
q:
Order of rotations
ht
321
C
op
yr
ig
: Angle of rotation around the X-axis [Roll angle].
: Angle of rotation around the Y-axis [Pitch angle].
: Angle of rotation around the Z-axis [Yaw angle].
(Setting range: –360° to 360°.)
1.
The designation of X, Y, or Z can be omitted when the argument is zero (0: no shift along
the particular axis). Set zero for X, Y, and Z if no translation of the origin is required.
2.
The designation of I, J, or K can be omitted when the argument is zero (0: no rotation
around the axis concerned).
3.
Use of any other addresses than P, Q, X, Y, Z, I, J, and K will lead to an alarm (1809
TILTED PLANE CMD FORMAT ERROR).
4.
Argument Q can be omitted if Q123 is required.
26-63
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
5.
B.
The designation of Q with any other value than enumerated above will lead to an alarm
(1809 TILTED PLANE CMD FORMAT ERROR).
Setting a feature coordinate system
Enter a block of G68.2 P1 (with arguments for translating and rotating the current workpiece
coordinate system) to set a feature coordinate system. Use roll, pitch, and yaw angles to specify
the rotation.
G68.2 P1 Q123 Xx Yy Zz I J K sets, for example, a feature coordinate system as follows:
Point (x, y, z) in the current workpiece coordinate system is set as a new origin.
2)
The translated coordinate system is then rotated around the Xw-axis by an angle of °.
3)
The turned coordinate system is then rotated around the Yw-axis by an angle of °.
4)
Finally, the coordinate system is rotated around the Zw-axis by an angle of °.
er
ve
d
.
1)
gh
ts
re
s
A counterclockwise rotation when viewed from the positive side of the axis of rotation to the
origin is to be specified with a positive value (in degrees). The figure below shows the relationship between a workpiece coordinate system and its feature coordinate system.
Zw
Workpiece
coordinate
system
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
z1
.A
ll
Zw
ri
Conversion by means of roll, pitch, and yaw angles
2) Rotation
on Xw by °
z
y1
3) Rotation
on Yw by °
Yw
Yw
x
Xw
o.
y
1) Translation of the
system
z2
y1
ZA
Yw
M
Feature
coordinate
system
Z
y2
z
Yw
Xw
Yw
X
x
y
x2
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
x2
Y
Zw
Y
z2
Z
4) Rotation
on Zw by °
Zw
A
Xw
ZA
y2
K
IM
Se
z1
A
ri
Zw
K
al
N
Xw
26-64
X
Xw
D740PB0096
Serial No. 340839
26
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
2-3
Setting with three points in the plane
A.
Programming format
[G68.2 P2 Q0 Xx0 Yy0 Zz0 R]
G68.2 P2 Q1 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1
G68.2 P2 Q2 Xx2 Yy2 Zz2
G68.2 P2 Q3 Xx3 Yy3 Zz3
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
G68.2 P2: Inclined-plane machining ON (Setting with three points in the plane)
Q:
Point designation (for point 1 to 3, or for shifting amounts).
x0, y0, z0: Amounts of shift from point 1 to the definite origin of feature coordinate system.
To be specified with their incremental values from the origin of the feature coordinate system to be established.
:
Angle of rotation of the feature coordinate system around the Z-axis.
Setting range: –360° to 360°.
x1, y1, z1: Coordinates of point 1 (origin of feature coordinate system). To be specified with
its absolute values in the currently active workpiece coordinate system.
x2, y2, z2: Coordinates of point 2 (a point on the feature coordinate system’s X-axis [on the
positive side]). To be specified with its absolute values in the currently active
workpiece coordinate system.
x3, y3, z3: Coordinates of point 3 for plane definition. To be specified with its absolute values
in the currently active workpiece coordinate system.
Argument Q can be omitted if Q0 (for designation of shifting amounts) is required.
2.
The designation of X, Y, or Z can be omitted when the argument is zero.
3.
The designation of R can be omitted when the argument is zero (0: no rotation).
4.
Use of any other addresses than P, Q, X, Y, Z, and R will lead to an alarm (1809 TILTED
PLANE CMD FORMAT ERROR).
5.
Alarm 1809 TILTED PLANE CMD FORMAT ERROR occurs in the following cases:
K
ZA
Se
ri
al
N
o.
1.
Alarm 1810 TILTED PLANE CANNOT BE DEFINED occurs in the following cases:
YA
6.
M
A
ZA
K
IM
A
- A series of blocks from G68.2 P2 Q0 to Q3 is interrupted by any other block,
- Any of the blocks from G68.2 P2 Q1 to Q3 is wanting,
- Any of the blocks from G68.2 P2 Q0 to Q3 is overlapping,
- Argument Q is of any other value than 0 to 3,
- Argument R is entered in multiple blocks.
ig
Setting a feature coordinate system
yr
B.
ht
(c
)2
01
3
- Any pair of the three points 1 to 3 denotes one and the same point,
- All the three points 1 to 3 lie on one and the same line,
- The distance between any one of the three points and the line through the other points
should be less than 0.1 mm.
C
op
G68.2 P2 blocks set a feature coordinate system as follows:
1)
Point (x1, y1, z1) in the current workpiece coordinate system is set as a new origin.
2)
The feature coordinate system’s X-, Y-, and Z-axis are determined as follows:
The X-axis direction is set to the direction from point 1 (Q1) to point 2 (Q2).
The Z-axis direction is then determined by the cross product (Q2 – Q1) × (Q3 – Q1).
Finally, the Y-axis is set in accordance with the rule of right-handed system.
3)
The feature coordinate system is then translated by the shifting amounts (x0, y0, z0), if
specified in a Q0 block. The desired new position of the origin must be specified with
incremental values from the origin of the feature coordinate system to be established.
26-65
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
Finally, the feature coordinate system is rotated around the Z-axis by an angle of °, if specified as argument R in a Q0 block.
4)
Conversion by means of
three points in the plane
4) Rotation on Z by °
Y
Z
Feature coordinate
system
Z
X
Q3
Q1
Yw
X
3) Translation of the
system (x0, y0, z0)
Q2
.
Zw
er
ve
d
Y
Xw
gh
ts
Workpiece
coordinate
system
re
s
1) Translation of
the system
(x1, y1, z1)
.A
ll
ri
D740PB0097
N
Remark 1: Cross product
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
The cross product of two ordered vectors a and b (denoted by a × b) is another vector c which is
perpendicular to the plane containing the given two vectors, with a direction determined in
accordance with the rule of right-handed system, and has a magnitude equal to the parallelogram that the vectors span.
o.
Remark 2: Right-handed system
K
ZA
A
Right-handed system
X-axis
Vector b
01
3
Vector c
YA
M
A
ZA
Cross product: c = a × b
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
Right-handed system refers to one of the methods of defining the three-dimensional axes of
rectangular coordinates. The orientation of the X-, Y-, and Z-axis of a right-handed coordinate
system corresponds to the directions pointed by the right hand’s thumb, index, and middle
fingers, in that order, at right angles to one another (with the thumb and the index finger lying in
the same plane with the palm).
Vector a
ig
ht
(c
)2
Y-axis
op
yr
Z-axis
C
D740PB0098
26-66
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
2-4
26
Setting with two vectors
A.
Programming format
G68.2 P3 Q1 Xx Yy Zz Iix Jjx Kkx
G68.2 P3 Q2 Iiz Jjz Kkz
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
G68.2 P3: Inclined-plane machining ON (Setting with two vectors)
Q:
Vector designation (for the X- or Z-axis direction).
x, y, z:
Coordinates of the origin of feature coordinate system. To be specified with its
absolute values in the currently active workpiece coordinate system.
ix, jx, kx: Components of the vector representing the X-axis direction of the feature coordinate system. To be specified (in dimensionless numbers) with respect to the
currently active workpiece coordinate system.
Setting range: as specified for the orthogonal axes.
iz, jz, kz: Components of the vector representing the Z-axis direction of the feature coordinate system. To be specified (in dimensionless numbers) with respect to the
currently active workpiece coordinate system.
Setting range: as specified for the orthogonal axes.
The designation of X, Y, or Z can be omitted when the argument is zero (0: no shift along
the particular axis). Set zero for X, Y, and Z if no translation of the origin is required.
2.
The designation of I, J, or K can be omitted when the argument is zero.
3.
Use of any other addresses than P, Q, I, J, and K will lead to an alarm (1809 TILTED
PLANE CMD FORMAT ERROR).
X, Y, and Z can be additionally used in a block of G68.2P3Q1.
4.
Alarm 1809 TILTED PLANE CMD FORMAT ERROR occurs in the following cases:
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
1.
K
ZA
A
Alarm 1810 TILTED PLANE CANNOT BE DEFINED occurs in the following cases:
ZA
5.
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
- The successive blocks G68.2 P3 Q1 and Q2 are interrupted by any other block,
- Either of the blocks G68.2 P3 Q1 and Q2 is wanting,
- Either of the blocks G68.2 P3 Q1 and Q2 is overlapping,
- Argument Q is of any other value than 1 and 2,
- Argument Q is omitted.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
- All the values ix, jx, kx amount to zero (0),
- All the values iz, jz, kz amount to zero (0),
- The angle that is formed by the vectors specified for the feature coordinate system’s Xand Z-axis deviates by 5° or more from the perpendicularity.
26-67
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
B.
Setting a feature coordinate system
G68.2 P3 blocks set a feature coordinate system as follows:
1)
Point (x, y, z) in the current workpiece coordinate system is set as a new origin.
2)
The feature coordinate system’s X-, Y-, and Z-axis are determined as follows:
The X-axis direction is set to the direction of the vector rx = (ix, jx, kx).
The Y-axis direction is then determined by the cross product (iz, jz, kz) × (ix, jx, kx).
Finally, the Z-axis is set in accordance with the rule of right-handed system.
.
Conversion by means of two vectors
er
ve
d
2) Orientation of the system
re
s
Z
Y
1) Translation of
the system
rx
Xw
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Programming format
ZA
ri
al
G68.2 P4 Xx Yy Zz I J K
K
A.
o.
Setting with projection angles
D740PB0099
N
2-5
N
Workpiece
coordinate
system
X
ri
Feature coordinate system
.A
ll
Yw
gh
ts
rz
Zw
A
The designation of X, Y, or Z can be omitted when the argument is zero (0: no shift along
the particular axis). Set zero for X, Y, and Z if no translation of the origin is required.
The designation of I, J, or K can be omitted when the argument is zero (0: no rotation
around the axis concerned).
3.
Use of any other addresses than P, X, Y, Z, I, J, and K will lead to an alarm (1809 TILTED
PLANE CMD FORMAT ERROR).
4.
Alarm 1810 TILTED PLANE CANNOT BE DEFINED occurs if the angle that is formed by
the X-axis rotated around the Y-axis by –°, on the one side, and the Y-axis rotated around
the X-axis by °, on the other side, should be 1° or less.
C
op
yr
ig
2.
ht
(c
1.
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
G68.2 P4: Inclined-plane machining ON (Setting with projection angles)
x, y, z:
Coordinates of the origin of feature coordinate system. To be specified with its
absolute values in the currently active workpiece coordinate system.
:
Angle of rotating the X-axis around the Y-axis of the current workpiece coordinate
system.
:
Angle of rotating the Y-axis around the X-axis of the current workpiece coordinate
system.
:
Angle of rotation around the Z-axis of the feature coordinate system.
(Angle setting range: –360° to 360°.)
26-68
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
B.
26
Setting a feature coordinate system
A block of G68.2 P4 sets a feature coordinate system as follows:
1)
Point (x, y, z) in the current workpiece coordinate system is set as a new origin.
2)
The feature coordinate system’s X-, Y-, and Z-axis are determined as follows:
Assume that the direction of the X-axis rotated by –° around the Y-axis of the current
workpiece coordinate system be ra, and that the direction of the Y-axis rotated by ° around
the X-axis of the current workpiece coordinate system be rb.
The direction of the feature coordinate system’s Z-axis is determined by the cross product
ra × rb.
Conversion by means of
projection angles
ts
re
s
Finally, the Y-axis is set in accordance with the rule of right-handed system.
er
ve
d
.
The X-axis direction is then set to the direction of ra resulting from a rotation around the
Z-axis by °.
rb
ra
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Z
Y
.A
ll
ri
gh
X
–
2) Orientation of the system
o.
Zw
K
ri
Yw
1) Translation of the system
ZA
al
N
Xw
A
D740PB0100
K
IM
Se
Workpiece coordinate system
A.
Programming format
YA
M
G68.3 Xx Yy Zz R
ZA
Setting with tool-axis direction
A
2-6
The designation of X, Y, or Z can be omitted when the argument is zero (0: no shift along
the particular axis). Set zero for X, Y, and Z if no translation of the origin is required.
C
op
yr
ig
1.
ht
(c
)2
01
3
G68.3: Inclined-plane machining ON (Setting with tool-axis direction)
x, y, z: Coordinates of the origin of feature coordinate system. To be specified with its
absolute values in the currently active workpiece coordinate system.
:
Angle of rotation around the Z-axis of the feature coordinate system.
Setting range: –360° to 360°.
2.
The designation of R can be omitted when the argument is zero (0: no rotation around the
axis concerned).
3.
Use of any other addresses than X, Y, Z, and R will lead to an alarm (1809 TILTED PLANE
CMD FORMAT ERROR).
26-69
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
B.
Setting a feature coordinate system
A block of G68.3 sets a feature coordinate system as follows:
1)
Point (x, y, z) in the current workpiece coordinate system is set as a new origin.
2)
The feature coordinate system’s X-, Y-, and Z-axis are determined as follows:
The feature coordinate system’s Z-axis is set to be parallel with the current direction of the
tool axis.
The X-axis is inclined, with reference to the workpiece coordinate system, so as to correspond with the angular positions of the tool. (The X-axis is, therefore, orientated in parallel
with the original one if the machine coordinates of the tool on its rotational axes are 0°.)
er
ve
d
.
The Y-axis is inclined, with reference to the workpiece coordinate system, so as to correspond with the angular positions of the tool. (The Y-axis is, therefore, orientated in parallel
with the original one if the machine coordinates of the tool on its rotational axes are 0°.)
re
s
Finally, the feature coordinate system is rotated around the Z-axis by an angle of °.
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
Conversion by means of
tool axis direction
N
2) Orientation of the system
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Y
X
Z
o.
ZA
K
IM
Yw
1) Translation of the system
A
Se
ri
al
Xw
K
N
Zw
Workpiece coordinate system
ZA
Tool-axis direction control
A
3.
D740PB0101
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
The G53.1 command causes motions on the rotational axes concerned so as to make parallel to,
and of the same direction with, each other the direction of the tool axis (from the tip along the
perpendicular to the tool-swiveling axis) and the positive direction of the Z-axis of a feature
coordinate system. Although no movements occur on the X-, Y- and Z-axis, the resultant rotation
of the table makes changes to the feature coordinate system in some cases, and the positional
indication with respect to the currently valid coordinate system changes accordingly for the
orthogonal axes.
Z
Z
Y
Y
G53.1 command
X
Feature coordinate system
X
Feature coordinate system
D740PB0102
26-70
Serial No. 340839
26
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
As shown in the figure below, the G53.1 command causes a rotation on the C-axis so as to make
the Z-axis of the (1st) feature coordinate system parallel to the XZ-plane of the workpiece
coordinate system and, on the other hand, a rotation on the B-axis so as to make the direction of
the tool axis and the positive direction of the Z-axis of the changed (2nd) feature coordinate
system parallel to, and of the same direction with, each other. (No movements occur on the X-,
Y- and Z-axis.) The positional indication on the display with respect to the currently valid
coordinate system changes according to the 2nd feature coordinate system. The speed of the
rotation caused by a G53.1 command depends on the currently active mode of motion
(G00/G01).
Operation caused by a G53.1 command
er
ve
d
.
Zw
Workpiece
coordinate system
re
s
Xw
Feature coordinate
system (1st) Z
gh
ts
Yw
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
X
.A
ll
ri
Y
For G53.1P0
or G53.1P1
N
o.
For G53.1P2
Z
K
X
M
YA
X
A
X
Feature coordinate system (2nd)
Y
ZA
Y
Z
B-axis rotation
(B < 0)
ZA
K
IM
Feature coordinate system (2nd)
A
Se
ri
al
B-axis rotation
(B > 0)
C-axis rotation
)2
01
3
C-axis rotation
ht
(c
D736PB004
C
op
yr
ig
For angles that are calculated for G53.1, there are usually two solutions: solution by a positive, or
a negative angle of rotation on the B-axis. Use argument P for the G53.1 command to specify
which solution to select.
1. G53.1P1 for the solution by a positive angle of rotation on the B-axis. (Left figure above)
2. G53.1P2 for the solution by a negative angle of rotation on the B-axis. (Right figure above)
Omission of argument P (or P0) selects a positive angle of rotation (as with case 1 above).
26-71
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
4.
Incremental coordinate system establishment for inclined-plane machining
Use G68.4, in the same manner as for G68.2, to establish a new coordinate system on the basis
of the currently valid feature coordinate system (defined with G68.2 and G68.3).
Setting method
Programming format
Using Eulerian angles
G68.4 [P0]
Using roll, pitch, and yaw angles
G68.4 P1
Using three points in the plane
G68.4 P2
Using two vectors
G68.4 P3
Using projection angles
G68.4 P4
Argument P can be omitted if it is 0 (for the use of Eulerian angles).
2.
If any number other than 0 to 4 is entered with P in a G68.4 block, an alarm will be caused
(1809 TILTED PLANE CMD FORMAT ERROR).
3.
Argument P or Q with a decimal point in a G68.4 block will be processed by simply deleting
the decimal point and decimal digits.
4.
Be sure to enter the G68.4 command independently. If a block of G68.4 should contain any
other G-codes or motion commands, an alarm is caused (1809 TILTED PLANE CMD
FORMAT ERROR).
5.
Giving a G68.4 command without any feature coordinate system (defined with G68.2, G68.3
and G68.4) being valid will lead to an alarm (1807 CANNOT USE G68.2).
6.
It is possible to give another G68.4 command with respect to a feature coordinate system
established by the preceding G68.4 command.
7.
Use G69 to cancel the mode of inclined-plane machining and to restore the original workpiece coordinate system.
K
A
K
IM
1) Establishment of a feature coordinate
system using Eulerian angles.
ZA
ri
Se
Operation by a G68.4 command
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
1.
G68.4 P0 X-15.0 Y0 Z-15.0 I90.0 J90.0 K-90.0
Y
X
A
ZA
G68.2 P0 X20.0 Y5.0 Z0 I0 J90.0 K0
2) Incremental establishment of a new feature coordinate system using Eulerian angles.
YA
Y
(c
)2
01
3
Yw
Z
Zw
M
Zw
Y
Yw
X
X
Z
Z
Xw
Workpiece coordinate system
Xw
D740PB0118
op
yr
ig
ht
Workpiece coordinate system
Operation description
C
5.
A.
Operation in the mode of inclined-plane machining
The G68.2 command causes a feature coordinate system to be set as described above, and the
positional indication on the display with respect to the currently valid coordinate system to
change accordingly (without any actual movements on the machine).
Axis motion commands in the G68.2 mode are processed in general with respect to the feature
coordinate system.
26-72
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
B.
26
Tool-axis direction control
The G53.1 command causes actual motions on the rotational axes concerned so as to adjust the
direction of tool axis to the positive direction of the Z-axis of a feature coordinate system. No
motions, however, will occur on the orthogonal axes (X, Y and Z). The speed of the rotation
depends on the currently active mode of motion (G00/G01).
Note :
Cancellation of the mode of inclined-plane machining
er
ve
d
.
C.
Depending on the particular attitude of the feature coordinate system, the G53.1
command may cause a considerable amount of motion on the rotational axis
concerned (for the tool or the table). To prevent interference, therefore, move the tool
well away from the table before entering the command.
gh
ts
re
s
The G69 command cancels the mode of inclined-plane machining. The feature coordinate
system will be replaced by the original workpiece coordinate system with reference to which the
G68.2 command was given, and the positional indication on the display with respect to the
currently valid coordinate system will be changed accordingly (without any actual movements on
the machine).
Reference for the feature coordinate system
N
D.
.A
ll
ri
Resetting the NC-unit includes cancellation of the mode of inclined-plane machining.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Use parameter F144 bit 1 to select the reference for establishing a feature coordinate system.
The parameter in question is out of all relation to the angular position of the tool on its rotational
axis and the workpiece origin settings on the WORK OFFSET display.
Workpiece coordinate system
F144 bit 1 = 0
o.
Reference
ZA
Se
ri
al
Description
K
N
A feature coordinate system is to be established
with reference to the currently active workpiece
coordinate system.
A
ZA
K
IM
A
Established on the assumption that the table is
currently indexed to 0°, the feature coordinate
system can be set independently of the workpiece
origin settings for the rotational axis on the WORK
OFFSET display.
To machine the same contour on multiple surfaces
(centrally symmetric under a point reflection through
the axis of table rotation), index the table to the
required angles and call one and the same subprogram including an inclined-plane machining
command and describing the desired machining
contour.
(See “E. Example of programming” 1.)
A feature coordinate system (to be rotated according to the table rotation) is to be established
with reference to the 0° position of the table
indexing.
The feature coordinate system thus established
rotates according to the table’s angular position
as well as to the workpiece origin settings for the
rotational axis on the WORK OFFSET display.
To machine the same contour on multiple surfaces, give inclined-plane machining commands
for the respective surfaces and call one and the
same subprogram describing the desired
machining contour.
(See “E. Example of programming” 2.)
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
Remarks
Table indexing to 0°
F144 bit 1 = 1
C
op
yr
ig
Note 1: The parameter in question (F144 bit 1) only applies to G68.2 (out of all relation to
G68.3 and G68.4).
Note 2: The parameter in question (F144 bit 1) exerts influence upon the replacement of a G68
command with a G68.2 command (enabled when F168 bit 4 = 1). Take due care,
therefore, when changing the parameter setting.
26-73
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
E.
Example of programming
1.
The example given below refers to the selection of Workpiece coordinate system as
Reference for the feature coordinate system (F144 bit 1 = 0).
Shown below is a program for machining the same geometry on each inclined surface of a
hexagonal prism. Blocks N1 to N6 in the main program index the table for each machining
surface, and the required feature coordinate system is established as well as the tool path
for machining is described in a subprogram (WNo. 100).
The workpiece origin is assumed to be set on the axis of rotation of the hexagonal prism.
WNo. 10
G0 B0. C180.
M98 P100
G69
G0 X300. Y0. Z200.
For machining on
surface [4]
G0 B0. C240.
M98 P100
G69
G0 X300. Y0. Z200.
For machining on
surface [5]
er
ve
d
re
s
ts
gh
ri
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
K
G0 B0. C300.
M98 P100
G69
G0 X300. Y0. Z200.
.
For machining on
surface [3]
For machining on
surface [6]
K
IM
Se
N6
G0 B0. C120.
M98 P100
G69
G0 X300. Y0. Z200.
ZA
N5
For machining on
surface [2]
N
N4
G0 B0. C60.
M98 P100
G69
G0 X300. Y0. Z200.
G68.2 X86.6025 Y50. Z0. I-90. J-45. K0.
G53.1
G90 G0 X0. Y0. Z0.
G1 Y20. F1000
G2 X20. Y0. R20. F1000
G1 X0. F1000
M99
A
N3
For machining on
surface [1]
al
N2
WNo. 100
G0 B0. C0.
M98 P100
G69
G0 X300. Y0. Z200.
ri
N1
YA
M
A
ZA
M30
Yf
Yf
Zf
[1]
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Origin of the feature
coordinate system
[6]
86.602
[2]
50.
X
w
C
op
yr
ig
Xf
Y
w
[5]
[3]
[4]
D736PB005’
26-74
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
2.
26
The example given below refers to the selection of Table indexing to 0° as Reference for the
feature coordinate system (F144 bit 1 = 1).
Shown below is a program for machining the same geometry on each inclined surface of a
hexagonal prism. Blocks N1 to N6 in the main program define a feature coordinate system
for each surface, and the tool path for machining is described in a subprogram (WNo. 100).
The workpiece origin is assumed to be set at the center of the top surface of the hexagonal
prism (need not be set on the axis of rotation of the hexagonal prism).
N4
G68.2 X-86.602 Y-50. I-270. J-45. K0.
M98 P100
G69
G0 X300. Y0. Z200. B0. C0.
For machining on
surface [4]
G68.2 X-86.602 Y50. I-330. J-45. K0.
M98 P100
G69
G0 X300. Y0. Z200. B0. C0.
For machining on
surface [5]
er
ve
d
For machining on
surface [3]
re
s
G68.2 X0. Y-100. Z0. I-210. J-45. K0.
M98 P100
G69
G0 X300. Y0. Z200. B0. C0.
ri
gh
ts
For machining on
surface [2]
G68.2 X0. Y100. I-30. J-45. K0.
M98 P100
G69
G0 X300. Y0. Z200. B0. C0.
A
ZA
For machining on
surface [6]
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N6
K
N
o.
N5
G68.2 X86.602 Y-50. Z0. I-150. J-45. K0.
M98 P100
G69
G0 X300. Y0. Z200. B0. C0.
G53.1
G90 G0 X0. Y0. Z0.
G1 Y20. F1000
G2 X20. Y0. R20. F1000
G1 X0. F1000
M99
.A
ll
N3
For machining on
surface [1]
N
N2
G68.2 X86.602 Y50. Z0. I-90. J-45. K0.
M98 P100
G69
G0 X300. Y0. Z200. B0. C0.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N1
WNo. 100
.
WNo. 10
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
M30
Yf
Yf
Zf
[1]
ig
ht
(c
)2
Origin of the feature
coordinate system
C
op
yr
Xf
[6]
86.602
[2]
50.
X
Y
[5]
[3]
[4]
D736PB005
26-75
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
3.
Shown below is a program for machining on an inclined surface cut on a cube.
Six examples of program section are given for defining a feature coordinate system for the
inclined plane, and the tool path for machining is described in a subprogram (WNo. 100).
This program can be created and executed only when type A is selected.
WNo. 10
WNo. 100
G28XYZBC
G54X0Y0Z0
M200
G53.1
G90 G0 X0.Y0.Z0.B0.C0.
G0 X0Y0Z0
G1 Y50. F1000
G2 X50. Y0. R50. F1000
G1 X0. F1000
M99
Section for setting a feature
coordinate system.
See 1 to 6 below.
re
s
ts
Setting with Eulerian angles
gh
1.
er
ve
d
M98P100
G69
M30
.
*
ri
G68.2 X33.3333 Y33.3333 Z66.6667 I-45 J54.7356 K0
Setting with roll, pitch, and yaw angles
G68.2 P1 Q321 X33.3333 Y33.3333 Z66.6667 I45 J-35.2644 K-30
3.
Setting with three points in the plane
G68.2 P2 Q0 X70.7107 Y40.8248 Z0 R-60
G68.2 P2 Q1 X0 Y0 Z0
G68.2 P2 Q2 X100 Y0 Z100
G68.2 P2 Q3 X0 Y100 Z100
4.
Setting with two vectors
G68.2 P3 Q1 X33.3333 Y33.3333 Z66.6667 I100 J-100
G68.2 P3 Q2 I-100 J-100 K100
ZA
K
Setting with projection angles
ri
5.
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
2.
Setting with tool-axis direction
K
IM
6.
A
Se
G68.2 P4 X33.3333 Y33.3333 Z66.6667 I45 J45 K-60
A
ZA
B54.7356 C-135.
G68.3 X33.3333 Y33.3333 Z66.6667 R90
Zw
YA
M
Yf
Xf
01
3
B
Yf
B
C
C
)2
Zf
Xf
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
100
Xw
Yw
100
100
A
A
Origin of the feature coordinate system
= Centroid of the inclined surface
(x0, y0, z0) = (33.3333, 33.3333, 66.6667)
D740PB0103
26-76
Serial No. 340839
26
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
26-3-2 Restrictions for type A
1.
Relationship to other commands
A.
Commands available in the mode of inclined-plane machining
Code
Function
Code
G00
Exact stop mode
G61
Linear interpolation
G01
Geometry compensation
G61.1
Circular interpolation (CW)
G02 (*1)
Cutting mode
G64
Circular interpolation (CCW)
G03 (*1)
User macro single call
G65
Dwell
G04
User macro modal call A
G66
High-speed machining mode
G05
User macro modal call B
Exact-stop
G09
User macro modal call OFF
Selection of XY-plane
G17
3-D coordinate conversion ON
Selection of ZX-plane
G18
Selection of YZ-plane
G19
Incremental coordinate system establishment
for inclined-plane machining
G68.4
Return to zero point
G28/G30
3-D coordinate conversion OFF
G69
Nose radius/Tool radius compensation OFF
G40
Hole-machining fixed cycles (G82.2 excluded)
G71.1-G89
Nose radius/Tool radius compensation (left)
G41
Absolute/Incremental data input
G90/G91
Nose radius/Tool radius compensation (right)
G42
Inverse time feed
Tool radius compensation for five-axis
machining (to the left)
G41.2/G41.5
Tool radius compensation for five-axis
machining (to the right)
G42.2/G42.5
Tool length offset (+)
G43
Tool tip point control, type 1
G43.4 (*4)
.
Positioning
er
ve
d
Function
A
Mirror image OFF
M
Mirror image ON
re
s
ts
gh
ri
.A
ll
N
G98
R-point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G99
ZA
K
Initial point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
Single program multi-process control
G109
G47/G48
Subprogram call/End of subprogram
M98/M99
G49
Feed function
F
G50.1
M, S, T, B function
MSTB (*2)
G51.1
Local variables, Common variables, Operation
commands, Control commands
Macro
instructions
Tool-axis direction control
G53.1
YA
G95
G283-G289
G53
01
3
G94
Feed per revolution (synchronous)
G112
Selection of machine coordinate system
A command for helical/spiral interpolation will lead to an alarm (1806 ILLEGAL CMD TILTED PLANE CMD).
Use of a tool function (T-code) in the mode of inclined-plane machining will lead to an alarm (1806 ILLEGAL CMD
TILTED PLANE CMD).
A G68 command can be given in the mode of inclined-plane machining only when parameter F168 bit 4 = 1
(Replacing the 3-D coordinate conversion command [G68] with inclined-plane machining command [G68.2]).
Axis movement commands for linear and rotational axes are executed with reference to the feature and workpiece
coordinate systems, respectively, in the mode of inclined-plane machining. It should be noted here, therefore, that
an unexpected motion may be caused especially in combined use with G43.4.
yr
ig
*3
ht
(c
)2
*1
*2
Feed per minute (asynchronous)
Driling/Tapping cycles
ZA
Tool position offset OFF
G93
M, S, T, B output to opposite system
K
IM
Tool position offset
G68 (*3)
G45/G46
A
G44
Se
Tool length offset (–)
G67
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
N
al
G43.5
ri
Tool tip point control, type 2
G66.1
C
op
*4
Giving any other command than those enumerated above in the mode of inclined-plane machining will lead to an alarm (1806 ILLEGAL CMD TILTED PLANE CMD).
26-77
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
B.
Modes in which inclined-plane machining is selectable (with G68.2 or G68.3)
Function
Code
Function
Code
G00
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 3
G56
Linear interpolation
G01
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 4
G57
High-speed machining mode OFF
G05P0
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 5
G58
Radius data input for X-axis ON
G10.9X0
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 6
G59
Polar coordinate interpolation OFF
G13.1
Exact stop mode
G61
Polar coordinate input OFF
G15
Geometry compensation
G61.1
Selection of XY-plane
G17
Modal spline interpolation
G61.2 (*1)
Five-surface machining OFF
G17.9
Cutting mode
G64
Selection of ZX-plane
G18
User macro single call
G65
Selection of YZ-plane
G19
User macro modal call OFF
Inch data input
G20
3-D coordinate conversion OFF
Metric data input
G21
Fixed cycle OFF
Pre-move stroke check OFF
G23
Absolute/Incremental data input
Tool radius compensation OFF
G40
Inverse time feed
Control for normal-line direction OFF
G40.1
Feed per minute (asynchronous)
Tool length offset (+)
G43
Feed per revolution (synchronous)
G95
Tool length offset (–)
G44
Constant surface speed control OFF
G97
Tool length offset OFF
G49
Head offset for five-surface machining OFF
G49.1
Initial point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G98
Scaling OFF
G50
Mirror image OFF
G50.1
R-point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G99
Polygonal machining mode OFF
G50.2
Single program multi-process control
G109
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 1
G54
Cross machining control axis selection
G110 (*2)
Cross machining control axis cancellation
G111
er
ve
d
re
s
ts
gh
ri
G93
G94
N
.A
ll
G90/G91
K
Hob milling mode OFF
G113
Superposition control OFF
G127
Giving a G68.2/G68.3 command under G61.2 for a system without the optional function for five-axis spline interpolation will lead to an alarm (1829 NO 5 AXIS SPLINE CUTTING OPTION).
Only valid on machines with the optional function for selecting from multiple sets for five-axis machining.
ZA
*1
G55
G69
K
IM
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 2
A
G54.4
ZA
Se
Workpiece setup error correction
G67
G80
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
N
al
G54.1
ri
Selection of additional workpiece coordinate
system
.
Positioning
M
A
*2
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
Giving a G68.2 or G68.3 command in a mode other than those enumerated above will lead to an
alarm (1807 CANNOT USE G68.2).
26-78
Serial No. 340839
26
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
C.
Modes in which incremental coordinate system establishment for inclined-plane
machining is possible (with G68.4)
Function
Code
G58
Linear interpolation
G01
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 6
G59
Radius data input for X-axis ON
G10.9X0
Exact stop mode
G61
Polar coordinate interpolation OFF
G13.1
Geometry compensation
G61.1
Polar coordinate input OFF
G15
Modal spline interpolation
G61.2
Selection of XY-plane
G17
Cutting mode
G64
Five-surface machining OFF
G17.9
User macro single call
G65
Selection of ZX-plane
G18
User macro modal call OFF
G67
Selection of YZ-plane
G19
3-D coordinate conversion ON
Inch data input
G20
Metric data input
G21
Pre-move stroke check OFF
G23
Tool radius compensation OFF
G40
3-D coordinate conversion OFF
Control for normal-line direction OFF
G40.1
Fixed cycle OFF
Tool length offset (+)
G43
Absolute/Incremental data input
G90/G91
Tool length offset (–)
G44
Inverse time feed
G93
Tool length offset OFF
G49
Feed per minute (asynchronous)
G94
Head offset for five-surface machining OFF
G49.1
Feed per revolution (synchronous)
G95
Scaling OFF
G50
Constant surface speed control OFF
G97
Mirror image OFF
G50.1
Polygonal machining mode OFF
G50.2
Initial point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G98
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 1
G54
R-point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G99
Selection of additional workpiece coordinate
system
.
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 5
er
ve
d
Code
G00
al
Function
Positioning
G68.2
ts
gh
ri
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
K
N
G80
G111
G56
Hob milling mode OFF
G113
G57
Superposition control OFF
G127
A
ZA
G110 (*2)
Cross machining control axis cancellation
ri
Cross machining control axis selection
G55
A
ZA
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 4
G69
G109
K
IM
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 3
G68.4
Single program multi-process control
G54.4
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 2
G68.3
re
s
Inclined-plane machining
G54.1
Se
Workpiece setup error correction
G68 (*1)
A G68 command can be given in the mode of inclined-plane machining only when parameter F168 bit 4 = 1
(Replacing the 3-D coordinate conversion command [G68] with inclined-plane machining command [G68.2]).
Only valid on machines with the optional function for selecting from multiple sets for five-axis machining.
YA
M
*1
*2
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Giving a G68.4 command in a mode other than those enumerated above will lead to an alarm
(1807 CANNOT USE G68.2).
26-79
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
D.
Modes in which tool-axis direction control (G53.1) is selectable
Function
Code
G57
Linear interpolation
G01
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 5
G58
High-speed machining mode OFF
G05P0
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 6
G59
Radius data input for X-axis ON
G10.9X0
Exact stop mode
G61
Polar coordinate interpolation OFF
G13.1
Geometry compensation
G61.1
Polar coordinate input OFF
G15
Modal spline interpolation
G61.2
Selection of XY-plane
G17
Cutting mode
G64
Five-surface machining OFF
G17.9
User macro single call
G65
Selection of ZX-plane
G18
User macro modal call OFF
G67
Selection of YZ-plane
G19
3-D coordinate conversion ON
Inch data input
G20
Metric data input
G21
Pre-move stroke check OFF
G23
Tool radius compensation OFF
G40
Fixed cycle OFF
Control for normal-line direction OFF
G40.1
Absolute/Incremental data input
Tool length offset (+)
G43
Inverse time feed
G93
Tool length offset (–)
G44
Feed per minute (asynchronous)
Tool length offset OFF
G49
Feed per revolution (synchronous)
G95
Head offset for five-surface machining OFF
G49.1
Constant surface speed control OFF
G97
Scaling OFF
G50
Mirror image OFF
G50.1
Initial point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G98
Polygonal machining mode OFF
G50.2
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 1
G54
R-point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G99
Selection of additional workpiece coordinate
system
Single program multi-process control
G109
er
ve
d
ts
gh
ri
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
o.
K
N
G68.4
G80
G90/G91
G94
Cross machining control axis selection
G110 (*1)
Cross machining control axis cancellation
G111
G54.4
Hob milling mode OFF
G113
G55
Superposition control OFF
G127
ZA
A
G56
A
ZA
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 3
G68.3
G54.2P0
ri
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 2
re
s
G68.2
K
IM
Workpiece setup error correction
G68 (*2)
Inclined-plane machining
G54.1
Se
Dynamic offsetting OFF
.
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 4
.A
ll
Code
G00
al
Function
Positioning
Only valid on machines with the optional function for selecting from multiple sets for five-axis machining.
A G68 command can be given in the mode of inclined-plane machining only when parameter F168 bit 4 = 1
(Replacing the 3-D coordinate conversion command [G68] with inclined-plane machining command [G68.2]).
YA
M
*1
*2
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Giving a G53.1 command in a mode other than those enumerated above will lead to an alarm
(1808 CANNOT USE G53.1).
26-80
Serial No. 340839
26
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
Notes
Move the tool to a safe position before entering the G53.1 command in order to prevent
interference from being caused by the resulting motions on the rotational axes.
2.
In the mode of inclined-plane machining, system variables #5001 to #5116 for reading
positional information refer to the feature coordinate system, while system variables #5021
to #5036 always denote the current position with respect to the machine coordinate system.
3.
Resetting in the mode of inclined-plane machining cancels the mode and makes the G69
code modal in the group concerned.
4.
External deceleration signal works only on the actually controlled axes of the machine
coordinate system, not on those of the feature coordinate system.
5.
Tool radius compensation (for five-axis machining as well), mirroring by G-code, fixed cycle,
and tool tip point control must be selected and cancelled within the mode of inclined-plane
machining.
ts
gh
ri
.A
ll
Mode of inclined-plane
machining
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
G68.2 X_Y_Z_I_J_K
(Inclined-plane machining ON)
:
G41 D1
(Tool radius compensation ON)
:
Mode of tool radius compensation
:
G40
(Tool radius compensation OFF)
:
G69
(Inclined-plane machining OFF)
re
s
er
ve
d
.
1.
N
2.
Selection of inclined-plane machining mode (by G68.2) with the tool length offset function
being active will result in a disagreement between the real tip point and its positional
indication with respect to the current coordinate system. The disagreement will be cleared,
as shown below, by executing the G53.1 command to adjust the tool-axis direction to the
Z-axis of the feature coordinate system.
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
6.
Before the G68.2 command is entered, the
real position of the tip point is in agreement with the positional indication.
ZA
Z
YA
M
A
X
01
3
Z
X
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
If a new coordinate system is set by a G68.2
command, the tool length offset is internally
applied to the Z-axis direction of the new
coordinate system, resulting in a disagreement between the real tip point and its
positional indication.
The G53.1 command really adjusts the
direction of the tool axis to the Z-axis of the
new coordinate system and, as a result,
clears the disagreement in question.
C
op
Z
X
D740PB0052
7.
Manual interruption is always performed on the basis of the machine coordinate system
(without any coordinate conversion).
26-81
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
8.
MDI interruption is not available in the mode of inclined-plane machining. An attempt to
perform MDI interruption in the mode of inclined-plane machining will only cause an alarm
(185 ILLEGAL OPER IN G68.2 MODE).
9.
Do not give a command for interruption with the execution of a user macroprogram in the
mode of inclined-plane machining; otherwise the execution of the interrupted program could
not be continued due to an alarm (807 ILLEGAL FORMAT) caused at an M99 block in the
macroprogram.
10. Do not give any tool change command in the mode of inclined-plane machining; otherwise
an alarm will be caused (1806 ILLEGAL CMD TILTED PLANE CMD).
er
ve
d
.
11. Tool path check can only be performed on the basis of the original workpiece coordinate
system (without coordinate conversion taken into consideration).
re
s
12. Tracing in the mode of inclined-plane machining is displayed with reference to the machine
coordinate system.
gh
ts
13. Do not use corner chamfering or rounding commands in the mode of inclined-plane
machining; otherwise an alarm will be caused (1806 ILLEGAL CMD TILTED PLANE CMD).
.A
ll
ri
14. Do not forget to take into consideration the restrictions imposed on tool tip point control,
workpiece setup error correction, and tool radius compensation for five-axis machining in
combined use with the inclined-plane machining function.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
15. For the function of inclined-plane machining to be used in the mode of tool tip point control,
set bit 1 of parameter F144 to “1” beforehand (for the selection of Table indexing to 0° as
Reference for the feature coordinate system), and, after setting the inclined-plane machining mode, give a command of G53.1 to continue the use of the tip point control mode.
al
N
o.
16. As a matter of course, restart operation started by the [RESTART 2 NONMODAL] menu
function cannot in general be executed otherwise than with the inclined-plane machining
mode being cancelled.
K
ZA
K
IM
A
Se
ri
17. Inclined-plane machining is not available if the C-axis control of the turning spindle No. 2 is
concerned (on accordingly constructed machines) unless the optional function for selecting
from multiple sets for five-axis machining is provided.
M
A
ZA
See Section 26-7 for a detailed description of the above-mentioned optional
function.
(c
)2
01
3
YA
18. According to the settings in parameter SU153, the relevant items of digital information on
the POSITION display refer to the following types of coordinate system in the mode of
inclined-plane machining function:
Bit in question OFF (0)
(SU153 bit 3)
yr
ig
MACHINE
Machine coordinate system
BUFFER
(SU153 bit 1)
Workpiece coordinate system
Feature coordinate system
REMAIN
(SU153 bit 2)
Workpiece coordinate system
Feature coordinate system
C
op
Bit in question ON (1)
Feature coordinate system
ht
POSITION
19. Do not give a command for positioning to an arbitrarily definable point, or for external tool
measurement (for tool breakage detection) in the mode of inclined-plane machining; otherwise an alarm will be caused (1806 ILLEGAL CMD TILTED PLANE CMD).
20. Do not specify a MAZATROL program as a subprogram to be called up in the mode of
inclined-plane machining; otherwise an alarm will be caused (1806 ILLEGAL CMD TILTED
PLANE CMD).
21. Positioning commands (under G0) in the mode of inclined-plane machining are always
executed in interpolation-type paths.
26-82
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
26
22. On machines of table rotating type, a G68.3 block will always establish a feature coordinate
system with the Z-axis being parallel to that of the current workpiece coordinate system.
Arguments X, Y, Z, and R (for translating and rotating the coordinate system), however, can
be specified in the G68.3 block in such a case as well.
23. In the mode of inclined-plane machining, another selection of inclined-plane machining
mode (with G68.2 or G68.3) will only lead to an alarm (1806 ILLEGAL CMD TILTED
PLANE CMD).
24. In the mode of inclined-plane machining, give motion commands for linear axes with reference to the feature coordinate system and those for rotational axes with reference to the
workpiece coordinate system (i.e. machine coordinate system).
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
25. The acceleration and deceleration for positioning commands (under G0) in the mode of
inclined-plane machining occurs according to the parameters L74 (rate of cutting feed for
pre-interpolational acceleration/deceleration control) and L75 (time constant for pre-interpolational cutting feed) when they are given under G61.1 (geometry compensation) or with
the (optional) fixed gradient control for G0 being selected.
26-83
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
26-3-3 Function description for type B
1.
Programming format
A.
Inclined-plane machining ON
G68.2 Xx Yy Zz I J K
G68.2:
x, y, z:
Inclined-plane machining ON
Coordinates of the origin of a feature coordinate system. The origin needs to be
specified with its absolute values in the workpiece coordinate system.
Eulerian angles that determine the direction of a feature coordinate system.
A counterclockwise rotation when viewed from the positive side of the axis of
rotation to the origin is defined as positive rotation.
er
ve
d
.
, , :
The X-, Y- and Z-coordinates are to be specified with their absolute values in the original
workpiece coordinate system. The designation of an axis can be omitted when no shift is
required along the particular axis.
2.
The designation of I, J, or K can be omitted when the argument is zero (0: no rotation
around the axis concerned).
N
Tool-axis direction control
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
B.
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
re
s
1.
The G53.1 command causes motions on the rotational axes concerned so as to make parallel to,
and of the same direction with, each other the direction of the tool axis (from the tip along the
perpendicular to the tool-swiveling axis) and the positive direction of the Z-axis of the current
feature coordinate system.
N
o.
G53.1 Pp
ZA
A
ri
K
IM
Se
K
Tool-axis direction control
Selection of a solution for the axis of rotation.
0: Processed as “p = 1”.
1: Solution with a positive angle of rotation on the B-axis.
2: Solution with a negative angle of rotation on the B-axis.
al
G53.1:
p:
YA
M
A
ZA
Refer to the description given under 3 in Subsection 26-3-1.
Enter the G53.1 command in the mode of inclined-plane machining.
2.
Be sure to enter the G53.1 command independently. If a block of G53.1 should contain any
other instructions, an alarm is caused (1808 CANNOT USE G53.1).
3.
The motion caused by a G53.1 code is executed in the currently active mode of motion.
)2
(c
ht
Argument P can be omitted if it is zero (0). If any number other than 0, 1 or 2 is entered with
P, an alarm will be caused (809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT).
op
yr
ig
4.
01
3
1.
C
C.
Inclined-plane machining OFF (cancellation)
G69
Inclined-plane machining OFF
26-84
Serial No. 340839
26
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
2.
Setting a feature coordinate system
Enter a block of G68.2 (with arguments for translating and rotating the current workpiece coordinate system) to set a feature coordinate system. Use Eulerian angles to specify the rotation.
G68.2 Xx Yy Zz I J K sets a feature coordinate system as follows:
1)
Point (x, y, z) in the current workpiece coordinate system is set as a new origin.
2)
The translated coordinate system is then rotated around the Z-axis by an angle of °.
3)
The turned coordinate system is then rotated around the X-axis by an angle of °.
4)
Finally, the coordinate system is rotated around the Z-axis by an angle of °.
Conversion by means of Eulerian angles
er
ve
d
.
A counterclockwise rotation when viewed from the positive side of the axis of rotation to the
origin is to be specified with a positive value (in degrees). The figure below shows the relationship between a workpiece coordinate system and its feature coordinate system.
re
s
Z
ts
ri
z
3) Rotation
on X by
X
Yw
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
y
1) Translation of the
system
Y
o.
Workpiece
coordinate
system
K
X
ZA
al
Feature
coordinate
system
Z
X
z
Yw
x
A
ri
K
IM
Se
Y
Zw
N
Z
4) Rotation
on Z by
X
N
x
.A
ll
2) Rotation
on Z by
Z
gh
Y
Workpiece
coordinate
system
Xw
y
A
ZA
Xw
M
Tool-axis direction control
YA
3.
(c
)2
01
3
Refer to the description given under 3 in Subsection 26-3-1.
ht
Operation description
Refer to the description given under 5 in Subsection 26-3-1.
C
op
yr
ig
4.
Y
Zw
26-85
D736PB002
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
26-3-4 Restrictions for type B
The restrictions on the inclined-plane machining of type B are in general similar to those imposed
on the three-dimensional coordinate conversion (G68). Shown below are only the restrictions
proper to the inclined-plane machining.
1.
Commands usable in the same block with G68.2
Code
Function
Code
Positioning
G00
Incremental data input
G91
Linear interpolation
G01
Feed function
F
Absolute data input
G90
.
Function
Commands usable in the same block with G53.1
ts
2.
re
s
er
ve
d
Giving any other command than those enumerated above in the same block with G68.2 will lead
to an alarm (1806 ILLEGAL CMD TILTED PLANE CMD).
K
ZA
A
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
o.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
No other commands can be given at all in the block of selecting the tool-axis direction control
(G53.1). If a block of G53.1 should contain any other instructions, an alarm is caused (1808
CANNOT USE G53.1).
26-86
Serial No. 340839
26
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
3.
Relationship to other commands
A.
Commands available in the mode of inclined-plane machining
Function
Code
G61
Linear interpolation
G01
Geometry compensation
G61.1
Circular interpolation (CW)
G02
Automatic corner override
G62
Circular interpolation (CCW)
G03
Cutting mode
G64
Dwell
G04
User macro single call
G65
Exact-stop
G09
User macro modal call A
G66
Data setting mode ON/OFF
G10/G11
User macro modal call B
G66.1
Selection of XY-plane
G17
User macro modal call OFF
Selection of ZX-plane
G18
3-D coordinate conversion OFF
Selection of YZ-plane
G19
Hole-machining fixed cycles (G82.2 excluded)
G71.1-G89
Return to zero point
G28/G30
Absolute data input
G90
Return from zero point
G29
Incremental data input
Nose radius/Tool radius compensation OFF
G40
Inverse time feed
Nose radius/Tool radius compensation (left)
G41
Feed per minute (asynchronous)
G94
Nose radius/Tool radius compensation (right)
G42
Feed per revolution (synchronous)
G95
Tool length offset (+)
G43
Tool length offset (–)
G44
Initial point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G98
Tool position offset, extension
G45
Tool position offset, reduction
G46
R-point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G99
Tool position offset, double extension
G47
Single program multi-process control
G109
Tool position offset, double reduction
G48
M, S, T, B output to opposite system
G112
Tool position offset OFF
Driling/Tapping cycles
G283-G289
.
Exact stop mode
er
ve
d
Code
G00
N
Function
Positioning
Selection of machine coordinate system
ZA
Tool-axis direction control
re
s
ts
gh
ri
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
M98/M99
F
G52
M, S, T, B function
MSTB (*1)
G53
Local variables, Common variables, Operation
commands, Control commands
Macro
instructions
ZA
A
G53.1
G60
M
A
One-way positioning
G93
Feed function
G51.1
K
IM
Se
Local coordinate system setting
G91
Subprogram call/End of subprogram
ri
G50.1
Mirror image ON
G69
K
o.
al
G49
Mirror image OFF
G67
Use of a tool function (T-code) in the mode of inclined-plane machining will lead to an alarm (1806 ILLEGAL CMD
TILTED PLANE CMD).
YA
*1
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
Giving any other command than those enumerated above in the mode of inclined-plane machining will lead to an alarm (1806 ILLEGAL CMD TILTED PLANE CMD).
26-87
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
B.
Modes in which inclined-plane machining (G68.2) is selectable
Code
Function
Code
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 6
G59
Linear interpolation
G01
Exact stop mode
G61
High-speed machining OFF
G05P0
Geometry compensation
G61.1
Radius data input for X-axis ON
G10.9X0
Modal spline interpolation
G61.2 (*1)
Polar coordinate interpolation OFF
G13.1
Automatic corner override
G62
Polar coordinate input OFF
G15
Tapping mode
G63
Selection of XY-plane
G17
Cutting mode
G64
Selection of ZX-plane
G18
User macro single call
G65
Selection of YZ-plane
G19
User macro modal call OFF
G67
Inch data input
G20
3-D coordinate conversion OFF
Metric data input
G21
Fixed cycle OFF
Pre-move stroke check OFF
G23
Absolute data input
Nose radius/Tool radius compensation OFF
G40
Incremental data input
Tool length offset (+)
G43
Inverse time feed
Tool length offset (–)
G44
Feed per minute (asynchronous)
Tool length offset OFF
G49
Feed per revolution (synchronous)
G95
Scaling OFF
G50
Constant surface speed control OFF
G97
Mirror image OFF
G50.1
Polygonal machining mode OFF
G50.2
Initial point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G98
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 1
G54
Selection of add. workpiece coordinate systems
G54.1
R-point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G99
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 2
G55
Single program multi-process control
G109
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 3
G56
Cross machining control axis cancellation
G111
G57
Hob milling mode OFF
G113
er
ve
d
re
s
G80
G91
G93
G94
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
G90
ZA
Superposition control OFF
G127
Giving a G68.2 command under G61.2 for a system without the optional function for five-axis spline interpolation
will lead to an alarm (1829 NO 5 AXIS SPLINE CUTTING OPTION).
K
IM
*1
G58
G69
A
Se
ri
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 5
K
N
al
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 4
.
G00
o.
Function
Positioning
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
ZA
Giving a G68.2 command in a mode other than those enumerated above will lead to an alarm
(1807 CANNOT USE G68.2).
26-88
Serial No. 340839
26
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
C.
Modes in which tool-axis direction control (G53.1) is selectable
Code
Function
Code
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 6
G59
Linear interpolation
G01
Exact stop mode
G61
High-speed machining OFF
G05P0
Geometry compensation
G61.1
Radius data input for X-axis ON
G10.9/X0
Modal spline interpolation
G61.2
Polar coordinate interpolation OFF
G13.1
Automatic corner override
G62
Polar coordinate input OFF
G15
Tapping mode
G63
Selection of XY-plane
G17
Cutting mode
G64
Selection of ZX-plane
G18
User macro single call
G65
Selection of YZ-plane
G19
User macro modal call OFF
G67
Inch data input
G20
Inclined-plane machining
Metric data input
G21
Fixed cycle OFF
Pre-move stroke check OFF
G23
Absolute data input
Nose radius/Tool radius compensation OFF
G40
Incremental data input
Tool length offset (+)
G43
Inverse time feed
Tool length offset (–)
G44
Feed per minute (asynchronous)
Tool length offset OFF
G49
Feed per revolution (synchronous)
G95
Scaling OFF
G50
Constant surface speed control ON/OFF
G96/G97
Mirror image OFF
G50.1
Polygonal machining mode OFF
G50.2
Initial point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G98
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 1
G54
Selection of add. workpiece coordinate systems
G54.1
R-point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G99
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 2
G55
Single program multi-process control
G109
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 3
G56
Cross machining control axis cancellation
G111
G57
Hob milling mode OFF
G113
er
ve
d
re
s
G80
G91
G93
G94
N
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
G90
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
ZA
G58
G68.2
Superposition control OFF
G127
A
Se
ri
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 5
K
N
al
Selection of workpiece coordinate system 4
.
G00
o.
Function
Positioning
A
Notes
Move the tool to a safe position before entering the G53.1 command in order to prevent
interference from being caused by the resulting motions on the rotational axes.
2.
In the mode of inclined-plane machining, system variables #5001 to #5116 for reading
positional information refer to the feature coordinate system, while system variables #5021
to #5036 always denote the current position with respect to the machine coordinate system.
3.
Resetting in the mode of inclined-plane machining cancels the mode and makes the G69
code modal in the group concerned.
M
1.
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
4.
ZA
K
IM
Giving a G53.1 command in a mode other than those enumerated above will lead to an alarm
(1808 CANNOT USE G53.1).
C
op
4.
5.
External deceleration signal works only on the actually controlled axes of the machine
coordinate system, not on those of the feature coordinate system.
A positioning command with G28, G30, G53, etc., which is to be executed with reference to
the machine coordinate system, will be carried out under temporary cancellation of the
inclined-plane machining mode (with the exception, as appropriate, of the positioning to the
specified intermediate point).
26-89
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
6.
Tool radius compensation (G41, G42, G40), mirroring by G-code (G51.1, G50.1), and fixed
cycle must be selected and cancelled within the mode of inclined-plane machining.
G68.2 X_Y_Z_I_J_K
(Inclined-plane machining ON)
:
G41 D1
(Tool radius compensation ON)
:
Mode of tool radius compensation
:
G40
(Tool radius compensation OFF)
:
G69
(Inclined-plane machining OFF)
The execution of a G68.2 command with the tool length offset function being active will
result in a disagreement between the real tip point and its positional indication with respect
to the current coordinate system. The disagreement will be cleared, as shown below, by
executing the G53.1 command to adjust the tool-axis direction to the Z-axis of the feature
coordinate system.
ri
gh
ts
re
s
er
ve
d
.
7.
Mode of inclined-plane
machining
Z
N
.A
ll
Before the G68.2 command is entered, the
real position of the tip point is in agreement with the positional indication.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
X
ZA
A
K
IM
A
M
X
If a new coordinate system is set by a G68.2
command, the tool length offset is internally
applied to the Z-axis direction of the new
coordinate system, resulting in a disagreement between the real tip point and its
positional indication.
The G53.1 command really adjusts the
direction of the tool axis to the Z-axis of the
new coordinate system and, as a result,
clears the disagreement in question.
ZA
Z
Se
ri
al
X
K
N
o.
Z
YA
D740PB0052
Do not use a G68.2 command in a subprogram of the eighth nesting level; otherwise an
alarm will be caused (842 SUB PROGRAM NESTING EXCEEDED).
9.
A G53.1 command block is in reality composed of two processes: motions on the rotational
axes and redefinition of the feature coordinate system. In the single-block operation mode,
therefore, press the
button twice to complete a G53.1 block.
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
8.
10. Manual interruption is always performed on the basis of the machine coordinate system
(without any coordinate conversion).
11. Do not give any tool change command in the mode of inclined-plane machining; otherwise
an alarm will be caused (1806 ILLEGAL CMD TILTED PLANE CMD).
12. Tool path check can only be performed on the basis of the original workpiece coordinate
system (without coordinate conversion taken into consideration).
13. Tracing in the mode of inclined-plane machining is displayed with reference to the machine
coordinate system.
14. Inclined-plane machining is not available if the C-axis control of the turning spindle No. 2 is
concerned.
26-90
Serial No. 340839
26
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
15. As for restarting operation, do not specify a block within the G68.2 mode (nor a block of
cancellation [G69]) as a restarting position; otherwise an alarm will be caused (956
RESTART OPERATION NOT ALLOWED).
Sample program
N10 G00 X_Y_Z_
N11 G00 X_Y_Z_B_C
The program can be restarted
from blocks Nos. 10, 11 and 32.
er
ve
d
ts
gh
ri
.A
ll
:
:
D736PB007
K
ZA
ri
Selection of programming type for inclined-plane machining
Se
1.
al
N
o.
26-3-5 Related parameters
X_Y_
Z_
N32 T_T_M6
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
The program cannot be restarted from
blocks Nos. 30 and 31. (The program
cannot be restarted even after G69 until
motions on the X-, Y- and Z-axes are
specified with abosolute coordinates.)
N30 G90 G00
N31 G90 G00
N
* The program cannot be restarted from
the G69 block, either.
re
s
The program cannot be restarted from
blocks Nos. 20 to 23.
.
N20 G68.2 X_Y_Z_I_J_K
N21 G01 X_Y_Z_F_
N22 G01 X_Y_Z_F_
N23 G69
K
IM
A
Use the following parameter to select the desired type of programming for inclined-plane
machining.
Setting range
ZA
Parameter
0: Type A
A
F34 bit 4
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
M
1: Type B
26-91
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
26-4 Tool Radius Compensation for Five-Axis Machining (Option)
26-4-1 Function outline
The function described in this section refers to three-dimensional tool radius compensation on a
five-axis control machine (equipped with two controlled axes of rotational type) by computing the
offset vector in a plane perpendicular to the tool axis.
er
ve
d
.
Vector of tool axis
Programmed path
(Path before compensation)
gh
ts
re
s
Offset vector for
radius compensation
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
.A
ll
ri
Tool center path
(Path after compensation)
Compensation
plane
D736P0522
ZA
ri
al
26-4-2 Function description
K
N
o.
Fig. 26-3 Tool radius compensation for five-axis machining
A
ZA
K
IM
Se
The offsetting function in question conducts tool-path control for tool radius compensation in a
plane (called ‘compensation plane’) perpendicular to the tool axis whose direction is determined
by the motion command of the rotational axis concerned. This subsection gives operational
particulars proper to this special function, with the compensation plane explained later.
A
See Subsection 26-4-4 for a detailed description of compensation plane.
)2
Programming format
(c
1.
01
3
YA
M
Refer to Section 12-5 for a detailed description of the general tool radius compensation.
Tool radius compensation for five-axis machining ON
ig
ht
A.
op
yr
<For tool rotating type>
C
G41.2 (X_ Y_ Z_ A_ B_ C_ D_);
G42.2 (X_ Y_ Z_ A_ B_ C_ D_);
G41.2
: Tool radius compensation (to the left)
G42.2
: Tool radius compensation (to the right)
XYZABC : Axis motion commands
D
: Tool offset data No. for radius compensation
*
Do not use G41.4 and G42.4 (provided for “table rotating type”) or G41.5 and G42.5 (for
“mixed type”) for five-axis control machines of tool rotating type; otherwise an alarm will occur
(970 TOOL TIP CTRL PARAMETER ERROR).
26-92
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
26
<For table rotating type>
G41.4 (G41.2) (X_ Y_ Z_ A_ B_ C_ D_);
G42.4 (G42.2) (X_ Y_ Z_ A_ B_ C_ D_);
G41.4 : Tool radius compensation (to the left)
G42.4 : Tool radius compensation (to the right)
*
Use G41.4 and G42.4 for five-axis control machines of table rotating type, for which G41.2
and G42.2 (provided for “tool rotating type”) may be used as well for the same purpose.
Do not use G41.5 and G42.5 (provided for “mixed type”), however, for machines of table
rotating type; otherwise an alarm will occur (970 TOOL TIP CTRL PARAMETER ERROR).
er
ve
d
.
<For mixed type>
re
s
G41.5 (G41.2) (X_ Y_ Z_ A_ B_ C_ D_);
ts
G42.5 (G42.2) (X_ Y_ Z_ A_ B_ C_ D_);
.A
ll
ri
gh
G41.5 : Tool radius compensation (to the left)
G42.5 : Tool radius compensation (to the right)
Use G41.5 and G42.5 for five-axis control machines of mixed type, for which G41.2 and
G42.2 (provided for “tool rotating type”) may be used as well for the same purpose.
Do not use G41.4 and G42.4 (provided for “table rotating type”), however, for machines of
mixed type; otherwise an alarm will occur (970 TOOL TIP CTRL PARAMETER ERROR).
B.
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
*
Tool radius compensation for five-axis machining OFF (cancellation)
N
o.
G40 (X_ Y_ Z_ A_ B_ C_);
K
ZA
A
K
IM
Offset data items used for tool radius compensation
ZA
2.
Give the G40 command in a single-command block (without any other G-code). Otherwise an
alarm will occur (961 ILLEGAL COMMAND 5X RADIUS COMP.).
Se
*
ri
al
G40 : Cancellation of tool radius compensation
)2
01
3
YA
M
A
The data settings of the TOOL DATA display (prepared for the execution of MAZATROL
programs) can also be used in tool radius compensation for five-axis machining. The table below
indicates those usage patterns of the externally stored tool offset data items which are applied to
the tool radius compensation according to the settings of the relevant parameters (F92 bit 7 and
F94 bit 7).
Data in the TOOL DATA display
F94 bit 7
ACT-
ACT- CO./No.
Data in the TOOL
OFFSET display
0
ht
0
×
×
0
1
×
×
1
0
×
1
1
×
C
op
yr
(c
F92 bit 7
ig
Parameter
: Used for tool radius compensation.
×: Not used.
F92 bit 7: ACT-/NOSE-R in the TOOL DATA display for an EIA/ISO program
0: Invalid
1: Valid
F94 bit 7: Offset or compensation values to be used for an EIA/ISO program
0: Values in the TOOL OFFSET display
1: Values provided for EIA/ISO programs in the TOOL DATA display
26-93
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
26-4-3 Operation of tool radius compensation for five-axis machining
1.
Startup of the tool radius compensation
The G41.2/G42.2, G41.4/G42.4, or G41.5/G42.5 code given in the cancellation mode turns on
the mode of tool radius compensation for five-axis machining, and describes such an initial offset
path to the selection block’s ending point as includes compensation in the plane perpendicular to
the tool axis in that position. The selection between type A and type B for startup operation in the
compensation plane is to be done by setting parameter F92 bit 4, as is the case with the general
mode of tool radius compensation.
er
ve
d
.
See Section 12-5 for more information.
ri
Operation in the mode of tool radius compensation
.A
ll
2.
gh
ts
re
s
Take care to give the startup code under the appropriate conditions of G-codes (see the table
concerned in Subsection 26-4-5); otherwise an alarm will be caused (962 CANNOT USE 5X
RADIUS COMP.).
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
The tool radius compensation for five-axis machining only applies to commands of positioning
(G00) and linear interpolation (G01). Take care not to use G-codes unavailable in the mode;
otherwise an alarm will be caused (961 ILLEGAL COMMAND 5X RADIUS COMP.).
o.
See the table concerned in Subsection 26-4-5 for available G-codes.
K
ZA
A
Cancellation of the tool radius compensation
ZA
3.
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
As for motion blocks automatically interpolated for turning a corner, the direction of the tool axis
at the ending point of the first one of the two blocks concerned (as specified in the last B-axis
command) is kept intact, along with the rate of feed and other modal information items, up to the
stop point for the single-block operation.
M
A
The mode of tool radius compensation for five-axis machining is cancelled when one of the
following conditions is satisfied:
The cancellation command concerned (G40) is executed,
Zero is specified as the number of offset data for radius compensation (D00), or
3.
The NC is reset.
)2
01
3
YA
1.
2.
ig
ht
(c
The selection between type A and type B for cancellation can be done by setting parameter F92
bit 4, as for startup operation.
op
yr
26-4-4 Method of computing the offset vector
C
The offset vector is internally computed as follows.
1.
Conversion for the table coordinate system
The programmed motion commands are converted for a tool path with respect to the table
coordinate system. Table coordinate system is a coordinate system which is fixed to the table (or
workpiece) and will rotate as the table rotates. The tool path described on the basis of this
coordinate system refers to the relative motion of the tool to the workpiece.
26-94
Serial No. 340839
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
<Initial state>
26
<After table rotation>
Z
Z
Y
X
Y
X
D740PB0035
er
ve
d
Conversion of points into the compensation plane
re
s
2.
.
Fig. 26-4 Table coordinate system
.A
ll
ri
gh
ts
The obtained tool path in the table coordinate system is then converted by orthogonal projection
onto the compensation plane (a plane cutting the tool axis perpendicularly in a point for compensation).
Direction of tool axis at point B
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
N
Compensation plane
for point B
Tool path for the
table coordinate system
C
o.
A’
ZA
K
B
A
C’
K
IM
Se
ri
al
N
B
A
D740PB0053
ZA
Fig. 26-5 Conversion of points into the compensation plane
YA
M
A
The NC finally conducts tool radius compensation on the path projected into the compensation
plane to calculate the offset vector at the particular point.
01
3
Tool path for the table coordinate system,
as projected onto the compensation plane
ig
ht
(c
)2
Offset vector in the
compensation plane
yr
A’
C
C
op
B
C’
A
D740PB0054
Fig. 26-6 Compensation in the compensation plane
26-95
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
26-4-5 Relationship to other functions
1.
Commands usable in the same block with the mode selection code
Function
Code
Function
Code
Positioning
G00
Incremental data input
G91
Linear interpolation
G01
Feed function
F
Absolute data input
G90
Giving any other command than those enumerated above in the same block as the mode
selection code will lead to an alarm (961 ILLEGAL COMMAND 5X RADIUS COMP.).
er
ve
d
Commands available in the mode of tool radius compensation for five-axis machining
Function
Code
re
s
A.
.
Relationship to other commands
Function
ts
2.
Code
G00
Geometry compensation
Linear interpolation
G01
Cutting mode
Circular interpolation (CW)
G02 (*1)
Macro call
Circular interpolation (CCW)
G03 (*1)
Absolute data input
Dwell
G04
Incremental data input
G91
High-speed machining mode
G05
Inverse time feed
G93
Exact-stop
G09
Feed per minute
G94
Pre-move stroke check ON
G22
Feed per revolution
G95
Pre-move stroke check OFF
G23
Constant surface speed control ON
G96
Tool radius compensation OFF
G40
Constant surface speed control OFF
G97
M, S, T, B output to opposite system
G112 (*2)
ri
.A
ll
N
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
M98/M99
G42.2
Feed function
F
G42.4
M, S, T, B function
MSTB (*2)
G42.5
Local variables, Common variables, Operation
commands (arithmetic operations, trigonometric functions, square root, etc), Control
commands (IF GOTO , WHILE DO )
Macro
instructions
o.
M96/M97
K
A
ZA
al
ri
K
IM
G43/G44
G49
G61
01
3
Exact stop mode
G90
Subprogram call/End of subprogram
N
YA
Tool length offset OFF
G65
Branching mode ON/OFF
ZA
M
A
Tool length offset (+/–)
G64
G41.4
G41.5
Tool radius compensation for five-axis
machining (to the right)
G61.1
G41.2
Se
Tool radius compensation for five-axis
machining (to the left)
gh
Positioning
Designation of a rotational axis’ position in the mode of circular interpolation, however, will lead to an alarm (961
ILLEGAL COMMAND 5X RADIUS COMP.).
*2
Use of a tool function (T-code) in the mode of tool radius compensation for five-axis machining will lead to an alarm
(961 ILLEGAL COMMAND 5X RADIUS COMP.).
ht
(c
)2
*1
C
op
yr
ig
Giving any other command than those enumerated above in the mode of tool radius compensation for five-axis machining will lead to an alarm (961 ILLEGAL COMMAND 5X RADIUS
COMP.).
26-96
Serial No. 340839
26
FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
B.
Modes in which tool radius compensation for five-axis machining is selectable
Code
Function
Code
G00
Exact stop mode
G61
Linear interpolation
G01
Geometry compensation
G61.1
Radius data input for X-axis ON
G10.9
Cutting mode
G64
Polar coordinate interpolation OFF
G13.1
Macro call
G65
Plane selection
G17, G18,
G19
Modal user macro call OFF
G67
3-D coordinate conversion ON
G68 (*1)
Inch data input
G20
Metric data input
G21
Pre-move stroke check ON
G22
Pre-move stroke check OFF
G23
3-D coordinate conversion OFF
Tool radius compensation OFF
G40
Fixed cycle OFF
G41.2
Absolute data input
G41.4
Incremental data input
G41.5
Inverse time feed
G42.2
Feed per minute
G42.4
Feed per revolution
G95
G42.5
.A
ll
Function
Positioning
Constant surface speed control ON
Tool length offset (+/–)
G43/G44
Constant surface speed control OFF
G97
Tool length offset in tool-axis direction
G43.1
Tool tip point control
G43.4/G43.5
Initial point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G98
Tool length offset OFF
G49
Scaling OFF
G50
R-point level return in hole-machining fixed
cycles
G99
Mirror image OFF
G50.1
Single program multi-process control
G109
Polygonal machining mode OFF
G50.2
Hob milling mode OFF
G113
Superposition control OFF
G127
Branching mode ON/OFF
M96/M97
.
er
ve
d
re
s
N
ri
gh
ts
G90
A
G91
G93
G94
G96
K
IM
Workpiece setup error correction
G54.4
A command for tool radius compensation for five-axis machining can be given under G68 only when parameter
F168 bit 4 = 1 (Replacing the 3-D coordinate conversion command [G68] with inclined-plane machining command
[G68.2]).
M
A
ZA
*1
ZA
G54-59,
G54.1
Se
Selection of workpiece coordinate system/
additional workpiece coordinate system
G69
G80
K
ri
al
N
o.
Tool radius compensation for five-axis
machining (to the right)
G68.3
G68.4
34
08
C
39
O
R
PO
R
A
TI
O
Tool radius compensation for five-axis
machining (to the left)
G68.2
Inclined-plane machining
C
op
yr
ig
ht
(c
)2
01
3
YA
Giving a command for tool radius compensation for five-axis machining in a mode other than
those enumerated above will lead to an alarm (962 CANNOT USE 5X RADIUS COMP.).
26-97
Serial No. 340839
26 FIVE-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION
26-4-6 Restrictions
The calculated path of tool radius compensation cannot be checked for interference,
irrespective of the setting of the parameter concerned (F92 bit 5: Checking to avoid interference ON/OFF).
2.
Do not use the radius compensation codes G38 (to set an offset vector) and G39 (to interpolate a circular arc at a corner) in
